Drug use-various effects

by   JON MICHAEL RAASCH, US POLITICAL REPORTER  –  Daily Mail –  23 April 2026

“Cannabis stock prices jumped on Wednesday after Axios first reported that the administrative change could be coming within days. 

Canopy Growth Corp stock spiked over 20 percent, while Tilray’s stock price jumped up 15 percent. 

The change would reshape the cannabis industry by enabling companies in the space to more easily secure loans and funding that have previously been stifled due to strict federal regulations. 

It would also lower the tax burdens on cannabis companies.”

Marijuana rackets get lower taxes and USA banking BEFORE any “new” research they claim is needed is completed??????

Donald Trump has moved to reclassify cannabis following a months-long federal review of the drug and its current restrictions.

The President’s acting Attorney General Todd Blanche signed an order reclassifying state-licensed medical marijuana on Thursday. 

He said the effort was ‘delivering on President Trump’s promise’ to expand medical options for Americans. 

‘This rescheduling action allows for research on the safety and efficacy of this substance, ultimately providing patients with better care and doctors with more reliable information,’ Blanche’s statement said. 

The shift marks a significant step toward loosening federal barriers on marijuana.

The order establishes a system for marijuana producers to register with the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) and helps legitimize the 40 medical cannabis programs within the states that have passed laws adopting the shops. 

Trump ordered the review in December, targeting cannabis’s Schedule I designation – a category reserved for drugs like heroin, LSD, and ecstasy. The reclassification is expected to ease limits on research and expand legal use.

‘The Administration continues to expeditiously implement President Trump’s December executive order to increase medical marijuana research to close the gap between current medical marijuana use and medical knowledge,’ a White House official told the Daily Mail on Wednesday.

The official said ‘specifics related to possible reclassification’ would come from the Department of Justice. The DOJ did not respond to the Daily Mail’s request for comment. 

The Drug Enforcement Administration is planning to announce an administrative hearing on the rescheduling, two people familiar with the matter told the Washington Post. 

The administration’s plan would move to classify cannabis as a Schedule III substance, which is the same category as prescription painkillers, ketamine and anabolic steroids. 

However, rescheduling cannabis is broadly unpopular among congressional Republicans.

‘Reclassifying Marijuana does NOTHING to lower the cost of health insurance premiums,’ former Trump ally and Georgia Congresswoman Marjorie Taylor Greene fumed on Thursday after the announcement.

‘We are soon entering the bankruptcy phase of our nation and Democrats’ answer will be throw more taxpayer money that we don’t have to solve the problems and Trump’s answer is give them marijuana, they will all be too high to notice they’re broke,’ she added. 

Shortly after Trump announced in December that he was prioritizing rescheduling, 22 GOP Senators and 26 Republican House members sent letters urging the President against the effort. 

‘We don’t need rescheduling to do medical research on marijuana- all we are doing is exposing more of our youth to an addictive drug,’ Congressman Andy Harris, chairman of the ultra-conservative House Freedom Caucus, said at the time. 

But Trump fought back against claims that the reclassification effort would lead to additional drug use. Additionally, the President himself has long abstained from drinking alcohol or using drugs. 

‘I always told my kids don’t take drugs,’ Trump said, telling America’s youth to ‘just don’t do it.’

‘It doesn’t legalize marijuana in any way, shape or form,’ he said. ‘And in no way sanctions its use for a recreational drug,’ Trump said during his December announcement. 

The president pointedly repeated his opposition to the use of illegal drugs. Kim Rivers, the CEO of cannabis dispensary Trulieve, lobbied Trump for months to get the regulatory rollback. 

Her organization donated to Trump, attended fundraisers and raised the rescheduling issue with White House aides repeatedly before the President sided with her. 

‘It was a little surreal,’ she told the Wall Street Journal of her successful effort resulting in Trump’s decision to reclassify the plant. 

Senior administration officials described the December order as the president keeping his 2024 campaign promise.

Trump announced support for rescheduling the drug in 2024 to allow ‘research to unlock the medical uses of marijuana’ even though he expressed his desire to ban its use in public spaces to prevent the smell from affecting cities.

Cannabis stock prices jumped on Wednesday after Axios first reported that the administrative change could be coming within days. 

Canopy Growth Corp stock spiked over 20 percent, while Tilray’s stock price jumped up 15 percent. 

The change would reshape the cannabis industry by enabling companies in the space to more easily secure loans and funding that have previously been stifled due to strict federal regulations. 

It would also lower the tax burdens on cannabis companies.  

Source: www.drugwatch.org

Submitted by Maggie Petito on behalf of drugwatch international
14 April 2026 

Of late, numerous marijuana advocates state in the media that legalization for all marijuana is needed so that research can be done to determine marijuana’s effects. Recognition of who is advancing the argument indicates much about the quality of the argument -Maggie Petito

Washington Post article: by Sarah Klein – 14 April 2026:

As more states legalize recreational marijuana use, here’s what the research says about what cannabis is really doing to your brain.

Marijuana use seems to be more popular (or at least more openly talked about) than ever. Regardless of whether you’re on the gummy bandwagon, you might wonder how it really affects your brain after the buzz wears off.

About 15.4 percent of Americans older than 12 have used cannabis in the past month, according to 2024 data from the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration. That number has been increasing as new marijuana products hit the market and more states legalize its use, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

Older adults — those 60 and older — are the fastest-growing group of cannabis users in the country. According to a 2022 study, adults over 60 who started using did so for medical reasons, including to treat pain and arthritis, sleep disturbances, anxiety and depression.

While more than three-quarters of those people found the cannabis either somewhat or very helpful, the question remains: What are the side effects? You may be particularly curious about brain effects, given concerns about cognitive decline. So what exactly does the research say?

Cannabis use is linked to worse working memory

This probably isn’t too surprising, but cannabis can affect your ability to retain information in the short term. This makes some intuitive sense to anyone who has tried it: “If you smoke cannabis, afterward, if you do a working memory test where you’re trying to maintain some piece of information, like a phone number or a short list of words, you’re less good at doing that while you’re acutely intoxicated,” said Joseph Schacht, associate professor of psychiatry and co-director of the Division of Addiction Science, Prevention and Treatment at the University of Colorado School of Medicine.

But lifetime use seems to have a similar effect. Consistent cannabis users tend to have lasting memory deficits compared with nonusers, he said. In a January 2025 study in JAMA Network Open, the largest of its kind, researchers looked at the effects of cannabis use on more than 1,000 adults ages 22 to 36 using brain imaging. Heavy lifetime users exhibited lower brain activity during a working memory task compared with nonusers after excluding recent users.

There isn’t much research on potential long-term memory effects, but it’s a growing area of study as more older adults use cannabis. “Essentially baby boomers who grew up using cannabis are [now] using it in older age but experiencing some of those effects on working memory,” Schacht said. Available research suggests no overarching association between cannabis use and cognitive decline or dementia risk, although larger and longer studies are needed on this topic.

It’s tied to changes in brain volume

Long-term cannabis use has also been associated with changes in brain volume. This is most pronounced in people who started using cannabis in adolescence, when the brain was still developing. “Cannabinoid exposure during that developmental window probably interferes with some of those normal brain development functions,” Schacht said.

Some research shows changes in the white matter of the brain in people who started using cannabis before the age of 16. White matter connects and facilitates communication among various regions of the brain. Younger users show more difficulty with cognitive tasks requiring executive function, such as inhibition control, linked to lower integrity of certain parts of white matter and higher behavioral impulsivity, said Staci Gruber, director of Marijuana Investigations for Neuroscientific Discovery at McLean Hospital in Belmont, Massachusetts, and associate professor of psychiatry at Harvard Medical School. Gruber is the study’s lead author.

In a 2026 meta-analysis of 77 studies in the journal Addiction, cannabis use was linked with reduced volume in the amygdala in particular, a region of the brain involved in processing and regulating emotions. But this study didn’t include information on when people started using the drug.

In adults ages 40 to 70 who began using cannabis after roughly 25 years of age, lifetime cannabis use is actually associated with greater brain volume, according to research published this year in the Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs. That’s particularly true in areas of the brain with receptors for cannabinoids, the active compounds in cannabis that modulate things such as pain, mood and appetite. The study authors concluded this may be a sign of the “neuroprotective” benefits of cannabis in older adults, given that brain atrophy is common with age and is linked to cognitive decline and lower quality of life.

Those neuroprotective benefits could at least partly explain why cannabis use isn’t associated with dementia risk.

We need more data on how cannabis affects mood disorders

In a review in Lancet Psychiatry, researchers found no help or harm from specific cannabinoids with relation to a number of mood-related concerns, including anxiety and post-traumatic stress disorder. It also concluded there wasn’t enough data to study any potential effects on bipolar disorder or depression.

Gruber, however, noted that the study looked at either THC alone, CBD alone or a combination of THC and CBD, not the potential risks and benefits of the entire cannabis plant. (THC, or delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol, is the psychoactive cannabinoid associated with the high caused by marijuana, while CBD, or cannabidiol, is a nonintoxicating cannabis compound.) “The idea that we would look primarily at single extracted compounds for things like anxiety is one that isn’t necessarily going to be as successful as when we look at multi-compound products,” she said. “The synergistic action of these things all together is significantly greater than the sum of its parts,” much like how sports teams are more successful with multiple players on the field.

Schacht notes that some people use cannabis as a way to mitigate symptoms without addressing the underlying cause. “As someone who has worked in addiction and substance use for a number of years, depression and anxiety are frequently reasons that people use a number of substances, such as cannabis, alcohol and nicotine,” he said. “Those drugs can be helpful in relieving those symptoms in the short term, but over the long term, I think it’s fairly clear that they are not helpful and, in some cases, actually exacerbate the problem that led people to turn to them in the first place.”

Using marijuana as a teenager or young adult is linked to a greater risk of some serious mental health problems. “People who start using cannabis when they are young and who have any kind of a family history of psychosis or severe mental illness are at risk for developing psychosis and severe mental illness themselves because of the cannabis use,” Schacht said. The greatest association with psychosis and other severe mental illnesses is also typically strongest in the heaviest cannabis users.

Ultimately, Gruber said, more studies are needed — both larger studies and those that focus on the entire cannabis plant.

And, yet, researching cannabis is challenging because it is categorized federally as a Schedule I drug, meaning that, according to the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration, it has “no currently accepted medical use and a high potential for abuse.” The risk of abuse decreases as the schedule number gets higher. The government’s strict regulations on studying these substances limit research opportunities. “It would be so much easier if people could use those things in the laboratory, for example, but we can’t generally do that,” Schacht said.

That would also help researchers investigate whether the method of cannabis delivery matters. More research is needed to know whether smoking, vaping or oral administration make any difference in cognitive (or other) effects.

Age matters when it comes to problematic cannabis use

To many people, other Schedule I drugs such as heroin and LSD sound much more concerning. But research suggests that 22 percent to 30 percent of people who use cannabis have cannabis use disorder, a type of substance use problem.

The risk of developing cannabis use disorder is higher in people who start using marijuana in adolescence and use it frequently. “It doesn’t mean that every single person who uses cannabis at an early age is going to have a problem, but our work and the work of others demonstrates that earlier onset of recreational cannabis use, along with more frequent and higher magnitude of use, is usually associated with worse potential outcomes,” Gruber said.

To her, future research should focus on whether the potential therapeutic benefits of cannabis can be harnessed without increasing the risk of harm to improve upon current standards of care. It will take time for research to catch up to the increasing popularity of this plant, Gruber said, but that very popularity points to some benefit: “If people didn’t yield something from it, why would they keep using this?”

In the meantime, without more research, it can be challenging for some people to decide whether cannabis might benefit them. “The best thing we can hope for is good, sound, empirical data that helps to drive individuals’ decisions as opposed to hearing somebody say ‘That should never be used,’” Gruber said. If you’re concerned about a specific aspect of your brain health, such as dementia risk, and how cannabis may affect you, consider talking to your doctor before trying legal products.

Source: www.drugwatch.org

 

It is tempting to oversimplify the causes of addiction and even the ways that people recover from it. But Flanagan calls addiction “psychobiosocial,” a word which begins to get at the complexity of its causes. There is no one-size-fits-all approach to reducing addiction. But, according to some recent research, religion can help.

Researchers at prominent universities including Harvard and Stanford conducted a meta-analysis of 55 longitudinal studies, which collectively included more than half a million participants. They found that there was a “significant protective association,” related to both prevention and recovery, between spirituality and usage of alcohol and other drugs.

They found only positive results from religious involvement, no detrimental ones, when it came to substance use.

This will not be news to many, of course. Twelve-step programs like Alcoholics Anonymous have long relied on ideas about a “higher power” and communal support in order to help their members achieve sobriety. Even people like journalist Katie Herzog, who did not find AA particularly useful in her initial attempts to quit drinking and who ended up using medication to get sober, eventually went back to AA because it helped her find social supports for the long term.

Of course, it’s not only that religious communities provide a sense of purpose and meaning and that they offer a community. Religion also supports other structures — like stable families — that also make drug abuse less likely. Religion generally encourages marriage and childbearing, but also provides rituals for families to spend time together whether at a house of worship or at home.

One question that readers will reasonably ask is whether correlation can tell us anything about causation. Are religious people simply less likely to engage in substance use because they also come from environments that frown on it or because they believe that a higher power doesn’t want them to use? It is hard to say, particularly with recovery programs. Some research suggests that AA is no more effective than any other treatment program.

When it comes to child-rearing, however, the results are remarkably consistent. Last year, I interviewed Keith Humphreys, a professor of psychiatry at Stanford, who also happens to be one of the co-authors of the new JAMA study. He and a colleague had previously conducted a study and found that if you wanted to predict whether a child would have a drug problem, the No. 1 factor was, Humphreys told me, “not race or income or education or even parents’ drug use.” It’s whether they are “being raised in religious home.”
Comments

The largest effects were found in Jewish, Latter-day Saint and Muslim homes. The findings, he said, resulted in “multiple academics getting really angry.” He says that these findings about the positive impacts of religion “makes a certain type of person uncomfortable.”

The JAMA authors make clear that the government obviously shouldn’t be involved in the promotion of a particular religious viewpoint, but government is not the only agent that can help with our addiction crisis. Health professionals, for instance, can ask, “Are religion or spirituality important to you in thinking about health or illness at other times?” and “Do you have, or would you like to have, someone to talk about religious or spiritual matters?”

They note that while not all clinicians will be able to relate to religious involvement, “they can acknowledge their value as part of patient-centered care.” Indeed, the tendency of some to shy away from these findings, that is “not encouraging such community participation,” the authors note, “may potentially neglect an important health resources that supports people in a time of need.”

(An author of multiple books, Naomi is a senior fellow at the American Enterprise Institute and at the Independent Women’s Forum)

Source: https://www.deseret.com/opinion/2026/04/11/spirituality-religion-addiction-recovery-study/

 

 

 

 

(Max Pemberton is a consultant psychiatrist and columnist for the Daily Mail)

Some days I wonder if I’m going mad – and you don’t need to be a psychiatrist to know that’s not a good sign. I work in a specialist NHS service for people experiencing first episode psychosis – young people at their most vulnerable, teetering on the edge of severe and enduring mental illness, some of them already sliding towards schizophrenia. Day in and day out, I watch how cannabis has destroyed people’s minds. It is, frankly, heart-breaking. So you can perhaps imagine how I feel when those same patients mention, almost in passing, that a private doctor has prescribed them cannabis. Not for cancer pain, not for the muscle spasms of multiple sclerosis, not for the intractable epilepsy of a child for whom nothing else has worked (the conditions where there is at least a credible clinical argument) but for their mental health. For depression. For anxiety.

I’m sorry, what? We are handing this stuff out on prescription for the very conditions it is known to cause and worsen. It is, and I do not use the phrase lightly, a prescription for disaster. Despite the protests of the powerful pro-cannabis lobby, it has now been proved beyond any reasonable doubt that cannabis use is directly associated with depression, anxiety, psychosis and avolition, a grinding loss of motivation that can hollow a person out completely.

Just recently I had a patient who had a history of psychosis. She’d been watching TikTok and become convinced that cannabis was the answer to her ADHD. A private clinic had given her a prescription without checking her notes, without calling me, and without calling her GP. It came out only by chance, in conversation. I sat there absorbing this information, thinking: a private doctor has prescribed her a powerful drug that is directly contraindicated for her condition, without contacting a single one of the clinicians actually responsible for her care. How is this right?

The latest figures, published in the Times, should alarm anyone who cares about how medicine in this country is practised. Since cannabis was legalised for medical use, just ten private doctors have signed off more than half of all cannabis-based prescriptions in the country. Ten doctors. One consultant alone accounted for one in every ten prescriptions nationwide, getting through nearly 46,000 in the first five months of last year. Do the arithmetic and that works out at roughly one every two working minutes. I’ll leave you to draw your own conclusions about how rigorous those consultations could possibly have been.

To understand how we’ve ended up here, it’s worth remembering that the story of medical cannabis in this country started in a genuinely sympathetic place. In 2018 the government legalised cannabis-based medicines following the case of Billy Caldwell, a severely epileptic child experiencing hundreds of seizures a day, for whom cannabis had worked when almost everything else had failed. The public outrage when his medication was confiscated at the border was entirely justified, and it was right to change the law. Cannabis does have legitimate medical uses for certain rare epilepsies, for chronic pain, and for patients who have exhausted every other option. Nobody sensible disputes this. What nobody could have anticipated was quite how rapidly and recklessly that door would be shoved open. Many doctors said so at the time, of course. When the law changed in 2018, there were plenty of voices in the medical profession warning that this was the thin end of the wedge; that however carefully the legislation was drafted, a private market would find ways to exploit it, that the definition of clinical need would be stretched until it was meaningless, and that the result would be cannabis available on medical prescription to more or less anyone who wanted it. Those concerns were dismissed as scaremongering. They were, it turns out, entirely justified. You can now claim some suitably vague condition, sit through a brief online consultation, and walk away with a prescription for cannabis at a potency you would struggle to obtain from the finest drug dealer in the country. The word ‘medical’ does a great deal of heavy lifting in all of this.

The prescription numbers tell the story. From a standing start in 2018, monthly figures climbed slowly at first, then accelerated sharply, reaching around 10,000 a month by mid-2022 and surging to nearly 100,000 a month by early 2025. Almost none of this growth has been driven by epilepsy or chronic pain. At Mamedica, one of the largest private cannabis clinics in the country, over half of its 12,000 patients are being prescribed cannabis for psychiatric conditions. (Mamedica says that cannabis treatment can be ‘game changing’ for these patients and has led to improvements in mood, hope and functioning. Its CEO says that ‘At Mamedica, every patient undergoes full clinical assessment, shared decision-making and ongoing monitoring under strict governance. This is structured, accountable medicine, not volume prescribing.’)

Professor Sir Robin Murray of King’s College London, who has spent his career studying the catastrophic relationship between cannabis and psychosis, has been watching all of this with undisguised alarm. He has warned bluntly that certain private clinics are ‘causing harm to the people they are claiming to help’. But it’s another observation of his that really cuts to the heart of the matter. ‘Usually,’ he has pointed out, ‘if a person has a medical condition, they see a doctor who specialises in a particular area of medicine, for example, respiratory or kidney disease. After diagnosis, the doctor prescribes from a range of treatments’. That, of course, is how medicine is supposed to work. A condition is identified, an appropriate specialist assesses it, and a treatment is chosen on the basis of evidence. What is happening in these clinics is the precise opposite: the treatment comes first, the condition barely matters, and the evidence is nowhere to be seen.

A quarter of psychosis cases in South London were associated with skunk, according to Murray’s research at the Institute of Psychiatry. Oxford University has shown it raises the risk of depression in teenagers by 40 per cent. None of this is seriously contested, it is settled science. Last month a major review in the Lancet Psychiatry screened nearly 6,000 studies and found that cannabinoids showed no significant benefit for anxiety, PTSD, psychotic disorders or OCD. For depression – the single most common reason cited for prescription across most legalised markets – there were no randomised controlled trials to look at. None at all. Not a thin evidence base. No evidence base whatsoever. And still these prescriptions keep on coming.

Then there is the question of what, exactly, is being prescribed, because it is emphatically not the careful, pharmaceutical-grade product the word ‘medical’ implies. Many of these prescriptions are for high-potency products with THC content exceeding 30 per cent. One strain, cheerfully named Space Cake, clocks in at 34 per cent THC. Street skunk – the very stuff Sir Robin Murray and colleagues have spent years linking to psychosis – typically contains between 14 and 16 per cent. So we are prescribing considerably stronger products to people who are already mentally unwell, with no credible evidence that it does them any good. If this were happening with any other substance, there would be a public inquiry.

Make no mistake, the human cost of all this is not abstract. Oliver Robinson was 34 years old, a former property developer from Bury in Greater Manchester. He had been struggling with depression, bipolar disorder and anxiety, and was already under the care of NHS and Priory psychiatrists, both of whom were strongly opposed to him using cannabis, when he turned to a private clinic. A video consultation with Curaleaf was all it took. The clinic based its decision on a GP summary that was nine months out of date. It never contacted his other treating psychiatrists. It prescribed him cannabis. What followed was 18 months of deterioration as his dependency took hold, eventually costing him a £1,000 a month, until he could bear it no longer and was found dead at his home in November 2023.

The inquest, concluded in January this year, made for grim reading. Coroner Catherine McKenna ruled that the prescription had ‘probably contributed to his death’ and had ‘acted as an obstacle’ to him receiving appropriate psychiatric care, giving the drug, in her words, a sense of legitimacy that made it harder for him to engage with the clinicians who were actually trying to help him. She issued a Regulation 28 Prevention of future deaths report to Curaleaf, finding that the prescribing doctor was a children’s and adolescent psychiatrist with no experience of treating adults with Oliver’s complex presentation. His brother Alexander said afterwards that he believed profit had been prioritised over his brother’s life. It is thought to be the first time a coroner has formally linked a private cannabis prescription to a patient’s death. It will not, I fear, be the last. Sir Robin Murray, responding to the verdict, was characteristically direct. These clinics, he said, are ‘nothing more than drug dealers for the middle classes’. Some clinics seem almost proud of how easy they make it to get a prescription. The industry, when challenged, responds with the usual blizzard of patient testimonials and wellness language, insisting people have every right to try whatever they believe is helping them. Let’s be honest about what this is: it’s retail with a prescription pad.

Of course, cannabis has over the past decade acquired a sort of halo. It became the anti-establishment option, the natural remedy, the thing your GP would never prescribe because of Big Pharma and vested interests and all the rest of it. It has latched onto the broader conversation about mental health in the same way recreational ketamine has managed to: cynically and with considerable commercial savvy. The moment it put on a white coat, a great deal of critical thinking went out of the window.

To its credit, the NHS has stayed sceptical. There are only around 5,000 NHS prescriptions for licensed cannabis medicines each year, limited to conditions with genuine evidence behind them, and Nice has declined to recommend it for the vast majority of conditions the private clinics are happily treating. So the private market has simply flourished in the gap, turning NHS caution into a marketing opportunity and positioning itself as the enlightened alternative to a stuffy, out-of-touch establishment. It’s a cynical trick and it has worked spectacularly.

I’ve sat with families trying to make sense of how their bright, funny, perfectly healthy child ended up psychotic. I’ve watched patients who started smoking skunk as teenagers and never quite came back. And now I find myself watching those same patients – or patients just like them – being sent home with a prescription for something considerably stronger than what broke them in the first place, signed off by a doctor churning out one every two working minutes. It’s utter madness. It really is.

SOURCE: https://spectator.com/article/the-madness-of-using-cannabis-to-treat-mental-health/

Combining love and boundaries in my parenting, and guiding my child with care, not with punishment, are the most valuable lessons I learned in just three days of the Strong Families Programme.

My name is Roya*, and two months ago, I joined the Strong Families Programme, where we learned practical lessons about positive parenting, stress management, and understanding our children’s emotions. I especially enjoyed the calm breathing exercise, a simple practice to bring peace and relaxation. Sharing family challenges with other mothers made me realize that I am not alone and that together we can stay strong and support one another.

This new understanding has changed my relationship with my daughter. I realized this when one day I couldn’t afford to buy her a new school bag. In the past, she might have cried or shouted, but this time she stayed calm and said, “Mother, I will go to school with the same bag this year.”

Her reaction touched me deeply and showed how much she has learned. This new understanding between us is priceless and gives me a feeling of peace and pride as a mother. It makes me confident that she will go out and make healthy decisions in her life. I believe more families should have the chance to join programmes like Strong Families. Many parents face stress and family problems, and this programme shows simple ways to build healthier children’s behavior and a happier, more peaceful home.

About the Strong Families Programme (SFP)

Through funding support by the Republic of Korea, UNODC successfully scaled up the global Strong Families Program (SFP) (A family skills drug use prevention programme for families living in stressful and challenged settings) in Kabul and Nangarhar provinces, adapted to the Afghan context and reaching 180 highly vulnerable families from low-resource, internally displaced, poppy-farming communities.

Through structured sessions, participating families gained practical skills to manage stress, strengthen parenting practices, prevent violence, and foster positive, age-appropriate family dynamics. As a result, the intervention led to improved emotional well-being, stronger caregiver-child relationships, and enhanced household resilience, all of which are protective factors against drug use initiation.

These achievements are expected to directly contribute to national drug prevention priorities and integrated into broader family support and drug prevention initiatives, ensuring long-term sustainability and wider impact.

Source: https://www.unodc.org/coafg/en/stories/2026/strong-families-porgramme-a-family-based-drug-use-prevention-intervention-helping-mothers-to-have-a-strong-bonding-with-their-children.html

Finnish Institute for Health and Welfare (THL), Finland

by Senior Researcher Karoliina Karjalainen – Publication date9.4.2026

Young people’s drug-related deaths and overdoses (non-fatal poisonings) are significantly more common among young people who have experienced diverse problems, such as a parent’s substance use or mental disorders or long-term financial difficulties in their childhood home. For some young people, placement in out-of-home care may reduce these risks, even though the overall risk for young people in out-of-home care is higher than for the rest of the population.

This information is revealed by a recent study carried out in the Out of Despair project. In the study, register data was used to monitor all children born in Finland in 1991 and 1997 and their biological parents until the end of 2019. A total of over 124,000 children were included in the study.

Placement in out-of-home care increased the risk, but may also protect some young people

According to the results, the probability of drug-induced death or an overdose leading to hospitalisation was clearly higher among children or young people who had been placed in out-of-home care at some point before the age of majority than in the rest of the population. 

However, the link between the family’s diverse problems and drug-induced deaths was particularly visible among young people who had never been placed in out-of-home care. For example, a parent’s substance use problem increased the likelihood of drug-induced death or overdose only among those who lived their entire childhood at home, whereas among young people in out-of-home care, a parent’s substance-use problem did not increase the likelihood of drug-related death or overdose compared to other young people in out-of-home care. This suggests that moving away from a harmful growth environment protects the young person. 

In addition to out-of-home placement, long-term financial difficulties in the family were independently linked to drug-induced deaths or overdoses among young people. 

“The result may indicate an accumulation of problems: mental health or substance use problems may affect the parents’ work ability and that way cause financial difficulties for the family and, at worst, lead to long-term poverty,” says Senior Researcher Karoliina Karjalainen from THL.

Prevention of drug-induced deaths requires help at an early stage

The study emphasises the importance of early support and multidisciplinary services, in particular. Close cooperation between substance use, mental health and social services as well as sufficient resources are important in order to support families in time. Access to substance use treatment should be improved for young people, for example, by offering opioid substitution treatment to minors, if necessary.

“The family’s diverse problems, other adverse childhood experiences and substance use may form a complex and intertwined bundle of problems in the lives of young people, and ultimately lead to serious consequences,” Karjalainen says.

“This is why prevention and early intervention are of primary importance, and sufficient timely and appropriate help should be available to families with children.”

The study has been published in the journal Drug and Alcohol Review.

Source: https://thl.fi/en/-/diverse-problems-in-the-family-increase-risk-of-drug-induced-deaths-among-young-people-placement-in-out-of-home-care-may-protect-some-young-people

(A position statement by NDPA, as at April 2026)

By Peter Stoker, C. Eng., M.I.C.E. (Retd) – Director – National Drug Prevention Alliance

At various times new suggestions are made for policy and practice in responding to drug misuse, addictions, treatment, education and prevention. Whilst these suggestions may derive from genuinely constructive attempts to improve the condition of drug misusers, and of society at large, they can sometimes be exploited by those who advocate liberalising policy and practice.

Two earlier such well-known examples where this kind of exploitation has been seen are known under the terms ‘human rights’ and ‘harm reduction’. Both these initiatives have a genuinely valid place in policy and practice, but both have also been called into quite different tactical ploys by liberalisation ‘influencers’. Another such example has been the attempts to replace the terms ‘misuse’ or ‘abuse’ by the more neutral term ‘use’ – this illustrates how the power of words as can be deployed to influence particular policy/practice attitudes and goals.

More recently, these same influencers have widened their approach to address the subject of ‘stigma’. Moves in this field have even developed so far as to include the establishment of an Anti-Stigma Institute, under the auspices of the Addiction Policy Forum, a Washington DC-based nonprofit organisation.

Drug addiction can be seen as the extremity of drug misuse, the possible end state of a progressive behaviour which started with curiosity, then experimentation, then occasional use, through regular use to what becomes, for some, a compulsion to use. This end state can be seen to affect literally millions of people worldwide. At some stage in this progression, a person may become victim to what has been defined as SUDs – Substance Use Disorders; these disorders may include not only health consequences but also eventual dissociation by the user’s friends, partners, relatives, employers, social service providers, child care agencies, housing agencies and more. Many people perceive SUDs as a moral failing, not just a bad decision, and their reaction may well be influenced by this judgement call.

In the context of perceived stigma, a harrowing account of how thing can go badly wrong for those experiencing SUDs was published in ‘Filtermag.org’ by Patricia A Roos, a sociologist whose son Alex died from a drug overdose in May 2015. Her article, dated September 2025, was entitled ‘Stigma from Medical Providers Contributed to My Son’s Overdose’. (Ref 1) Here are a few of the points made in her article, paraphrased for brevity:

Alex had many ‘protection privileges’ – white, middle-class, educated supportive parents and friendship circle, never abused, and yet he took a downward path of behaviour, firstly through anorexia, then in addiction … he resided in many ERs etc, sometimes encountering medical providers who helped him, but many times not – instead of empathic support he experienced chastisement for ‘bad choices’ and ‘lack of willpower ’… ‘drug-seeking behaviour’ … ‘lack of engagement’ and ‘denial’. Stigmatisation powered his downward spiral … he was labelled, blamed … in effect written off. Roos observes that while stigma is present in multiple institutions, it must be said that its presence in medical care is especially pronounced, insidious and devastating. Roos goes on to comment that it is ‘perhaps not surprising that medical providers stigmatise, making moral judgements when they should be making prognoses and decisions based on science, relying on culturally-induced assumptions of personal responsibility instead of their scientific knowledge’.

Roos applauds the work of Erving Goffman, a renowned sociologist, author of many publications which address, inter alia, the subject of stigmatisation. Perhaps most relevant here is his 1963 book ‘Stigma – Notes on the Management of Spoiled Identity’. (Ref 2)

It should also be noted that towards the end of her article, Roos expresses support for ‘decriminalising  and regulating drugs’ and wider use of harm reduction initiatives. She also is scathing of the US Governments recent (2025) change of strategy and defunding, away from harm reduction, under the direction of Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F Kennedy Jr.

                                                       *        *       *       *

National bodies may strive to introduce order into stigmas around substance use disorder; for example, America’s NIDA (National Institute on Drug Abuse) have produced several papers around  this theme, one of which is entitled: ‘Addressing the Stigma that Surrounds Addiction’. (Ref 3)

On the other hand, critics of stigma can sometimes exhibit hastiness in dismissing all stigma as ‘bad’ – to go down this route would be to ignore that social stigma has always been a major factor in what controls and limits human behaviours, in the interest of society as a whole. As one observer put it “Stigmatisation is part of what makes humans social animals”.

In his 2025 book ‘What is it like to be an Addict?’ (Oxford University Press) (Ref 4), Owen Flanagan makes the key point that “… amongst the most important thing addicts say is that they are by no means blameless”.

As the review of Flanagan’s book concludes: “it is refreshing to read a book that refuses to dehumanise addicts by depriving them of responsibility or delegitimising the shame they feel for their actions”. In this context, it is worth reflecting on the fact that many drug misusers – including not a few addicts – achieve recovery and lasting sobriety without any help from anyone else – neither medical professionals nor AA groups play any part in the ability of these individuals to dig themselves out of the hole they were in.

In developing his thinking, Flanagan is sceptical of the tendency to medicalise all of life’s setbacks and sadnesses, and he goes on to make the constructive comment that dismissing the so-called ‘War on Drugs’ as a costly failure may be hasty – saying “… we can’t be sure that many addictions wouldn’t be worse in its absence”. Critics of prevention could do worse that contemplate on this observation.

And mention of prevention should remind us that addiction is only one part of the total experience of drug misuse – there are several phases of behaviour which come before addiction. It follows, therefore, that each of these phases may generate comments by those around the user – including what may seem to be just stigmatising comments – but are in fact a useful part of the self-recovering processes which enable individuals to recover.

Amongst those seeking to generate a more balanced view on stigma, an informal grouping of British specialists includes – amongst others – Professor Neil McKegany (Ref 5) – a prominent sociologist and leading researcher in the field of drug misuse, known for founding the Centre for Drug Misuse Research at the University of Glasgow in 1994; Deirdre Boyd, founder and head of DB Recovery Resources, which sustains ongoing working links with McLean Hospital, Massachusetts, and David Raynes, a Senior Adviser to the National Drug Prevention Alliance who was formerly a senior officer and drugs specialist with HM Customs and Excise (as it was known during his time).

Collating together some of the comments by these specialists on the subject of stigma …

McKeganey: “If one’s aim is to reduce prevalence of drug misuse, one needs to retain a view of drug use as a stigmatised activity” (by society as it stands) … “stigmatisation actually varies depending on the drug in question” – Cannabis, Cocaine, Heroin each attract different levels of stigma … “drug use can be stigmatised without the user being stigmatised i.e. moral judgement can stigmatise drug use but not the user”.

Boyd: “The greatest stigma is that which does not recognise addicts and their recovery … this takes recognition away from and is insulting to people who have altered their lives to stay that way and to give back to society.” … “Sadly, stigmatisation is often encountered with the medical profession itself”.(See later comments in this article, by Patricia S Roos) … “Stigma played a huge role in reducing tobacco use – adverts with children shaming parents who smoke, office workers expelled to smoke outdoors” … “stigma also pays a role in reducing alcohol use; images of drunken capering, of children abandoned, etc” (Recalling Hogarth’s 1751 image of ‘Beer Street’ and ‘Gin Lane’!)

Raynes: “Social stigma has for millennia been part of what controls and limits human behaviour.” … “This business of trying to remove social stigma from drug addiction and use, or from any antisocial behaviour, is in my view a trap, A very deliberate one … Don’t fall for it.”

                      *        *       *       *

In conclusion (for now) herein offered is an extended ‘quote’ from a paper written by an American doctor, Sally Satel. (Ref 6) This was published by John Hopkins University Press of Baltimore, as part of a larger paper entitled ‘Addiction Treatment Science and Policy for the Twenty First Century’ – and in it she nailed her colours firmly to the mast by entitling it ‘In Praise of Stigma’. Satel spoke on the value of constructive stigma as part of improving treatment effectiveness, but was roundly condemned for doing so. As she put it: “Clearly, I had committed heresy”.

Despite her much-voiced support for accessible, respectful and competent treatment, her support for stigma remained ‘a bridge too far’ for some. She resolutely commented “Why try to destigmatise irresponsibility that leads to ruptured families, ruined careers, and crime … we don’t have to neutralise the moral valence (valence meaning ‘capacity to classify’ e.g. ‘good-bad’) of addiction-fuelled behaviour to destigmatise the treatment process”.

She goes on to challenge some of the alleged benefits of eliminating stigma, as set forth by the National Institute on Drug Abuse (Ref 7) – as shown here following, in italics –  “… it will get more addicts into treatment/it will improve the availability of treatment/it will speed the development of medications” and “it will help addicts self-esteem”. A charitable evaluation of these allegations is that they seem to speak more from hope than from proven conviction.

Satel calls up McLean Hospital, Massachusetts, and in particular psychologist Gene Heyman, (Ref 8), who makes the powerful point that voluntary behaviour is mediated by the brain … motivation and self-control are acts of the brain. Recovery itself depends on willpower, and people have the capacity to transform themselves.

In the end, observes Satel, the de-stigmatisation campaign could be said to have its heart in the right place, but in her opinion its marksmanship is too sweeping, too uncontrolled, and thus tends to make things worse in its search for what could be better. As she says in closing her statement:

“Finally, even if we could somehow ‘untaint’ addiction, what would be the price? Stigmatisation is a normal part of human interaction, has a civilising effect on social life, and is often the basis of the antidrug messages we give our children … There is nothing unethical – and everything naturally and socially adaptive – about condemning the reckless and harmful behaviours that addicts commit. This need not negate our sympathy for them or our duty to provide care.”

       *        *       *       *

CONCLUSIONS:

This is a subject which will run and run, so it may be considered premature to attempt sweeping conclusions at this time. However, this writer offers the following as indicators of what might prove to be ‘route markers’ …

  • Stigma, when encountered, can be and should be assessed as either ‘constructive’ or ‘obstructive’ to interventions with drug misuse.
  • Stigma directed at the user is often obstructive to and unhelpful for progress.
  • Stigma directed at drugs and their effects on individuals and on society at large can be constructive in the right context, if applied sensitively.
  • Attempts by some to remove stigma in its entirety can often be identified as a tactic for unmerited liberalisation of drug strategy, policy and practice.

                                       *        *       *       *

REFERENCES:

  1. Roos, PA. ‘Stigma from Medical Providers Contributed to My Son’s Overdose’. Filtermag.org, 2015
  2. Goffman, E. ‘Stigma- Notes on the Management of Spoiled Identity’. Pelican, 1963
  3. NIDA – https://drugabuse.gov/about-nida/noras-blog/2020/04/addressing-stigma-surrounds-addiction)
  4. Flanagan, O. ‘What is it like to be an Addict?’. Oxford University Press, 2025
  5. McKeganey, N. ‘Controversies in Drugs Policy and Practice’. Palgrave Macmillan, 2011
  6. Satel, S. ‘In Praise of Stigma’. John Hopkins University Press, 2007.
  7. https://sallysatelmd.com/html/PraiseStigma2007.pdf – The text in this reference sets out the full statement by NIDA as to the benefits they saw at that time in ‘eliminating stigma’ – but in searching for the actual NIDA paper – entitled  ‘www.drugabuse.gov/about/welcome/aboutdrugabuse/stigma/‘ it was not found possible to access it.
  8. Heyman, GM. ‘Consumption Dependent Changes in Reward Value, a Framework for Understanding Addiction’. Elsevier, 2003

(ENDS)

 

by Denise Dador – ABC7 Newsteam – Los Angeles –  April 4, 2026 

“Rhino tranq” is an emerging, highly-risky street drug. It’s a mix of fentanyl with the animal tranquilizer medetomidine.

“Can be dangerous when people use it, because it can increase the rate of overdose, it can increase the rate of low blood pressure and other cardiovascular complications,” said Dr. Brian Hurley, the medical director of substance abuse prevention and control with the L.A. County Department of Public Health.

He compared it to “tranq,” which is a combination of fentanyl and another veterinary relaxant called xylazine. Hurley said medetomidine, which is found in ‘rhino tranq,’ is far more dangerous.

“Medetomidine is actually more potent than xylazine is, and they both seem to be associated with increased risk of overdose,” Hurley said.

The CDC issued a new warning to health care professionals on Thursday. Medetomidine, which is also known as “mede” or “dex,” is being picked up in seized drugs and wastewater samples. The highest concentration is in the Northeast.

“So it’s not present here at the same degree that is present in other cities on the East Coast, like Philadelphia,” Hurley said. “At the same time, we do think it’s important that the public and the medical providers here in Los Angeles be aware that medetomidine is here.”

He said when people experience a fentanyl overdose with medetomidine, they don’t respond effectively to the opioid reversal drug naloxone.

“Naloxone doesn’t address medetomidine intoxication, nor does it touch medetomidine withdrawal. So, that’s why people will need other supportive care,” Hurley said.

Overall in L.A. County, fentanyl-related deaths have dropped 37% in 2024 compared to 2023. But far too many overdoses are still happening and Hurley said people need to know “rhino tranq” is out there.

“The safest thing is to not use drugs, but if somebody is thinking about using, never use a loan, have naloxone on hand, and consider using test strips to look at what’s in the drug supply,” he said.

He said the county provides free fentanyl testing strips through their community health stations located at various schools, hotels and churches. You can see those locations on their website.

Source: https://abc7.com/post/cdc-issues-warning-rhino-tranq-mix-fentanyl-animal-sedative-medetomidine-resists-overdose-reversal-meds/18835236/

by  Megan Patrick, research professor at the Institute for Social Research and principal investigator of the Monitoring the Future Longitudinal Panel Study, and Yuk Pang, Yvonne Terry-McElrath and Joy Bohyun Jang of U-M’s Institute for Social Research – March 29, 2026

Researchers found that heavy use of alcohol, cannabis, and cigarettes in your 20s predicts significantly poorer self-reported memory later in life. However, the study reveals that different substances damage the brain through different “routes”—some by causing midlife addiction and others through direct, early-life damage.

Key Facts

  • The “Triple Threat”: The study analyzed binge drinking, near-daily cannabis use, and daily cigarette smoking between ages 18 and 30.
  • Cigarettes = Direct Damage: Daily smoking in young adulthood predicted poorer memory at age 50 regardless of whether the person had quit by age 35. This suggests smoking has a direct, lasting impact on the developing brain.
  • Alcohol & Cannabis = The Addiction Route: Binge drinking and frequent cannabis use in your 20s didn’t directly cause memory loss 30 years later. Instead, they increased the risk of Substance Use Disorders (SUD) in your 30s, which then led to poorer memory in midlife.
  • Early Dementia Sign: Self-reported poor memory is a common early indicator of cognitive decline and dementia, making these early-life behaviors critical targets for prevention.

Young adults who heavily use substances may report significantly poorer memory decades later, a new University of Michigan study suggests.

Researchers tracked how frequently participants reported binge drinking and daily—or near-daily—use of alcohol, cannabis and cigarettes between ages 18 and 30. They then compared those patterns with self-reported poor memory at ages 50 to 65

The study, funded by the National Institute on Drug Abuse, was recently published in the Journal of Aging and Health. 

“Substance use has both acute and long-term effects on health and well-being,” said Megan Patrick, research professor at the Institute for Social Research and principal investigator of the Monitoring the Future Longitudinal Panel Study.

“Poor memory is a common sign of early dementia. We examined whether young adult substance use was associated with poor memory decades later in midlife.”

Identifying behaviors that shape brain health across the lifespan is critical. This is among the first longitudinal studies to link cumulative young adult substance use to self-rated cognition in late midlife, Patrick said.

Young adulthood is a critical period for brain development. The study shows that substance use patterns established during this period may have lasting consequences on memory and cognitive health much later in life. 

“Data like what we have from the MTF Longitudinal Panel study enable us to see these associations across multiple decades of development in the individuals who participate,” Patrick said. “Identifying the risk factors that can lead to dementia is crucial for the prevention and treatment of cognitive decline.”​

Triple threat and addiction

The results suggest different substances may be associated with later memory through different routes—some through substance use disorder symptoms and others more directly.

For example, binge drinking and frequent cannabis use in young adulthood were not directly linked with reporting poor memory in later life. Instead, they increased the risk of developing substance use disorders for people in their 30s, and those disorders were linked to poorer memory later in life. This suggests that treating substance use in midlife could help protect brain health.

Cigarette smoking showed a different pattern. Daily smoking in young adulthood predicted poorer memory in early midlife, regardless of smoking habits at age 35. These findings highlight the need to prevent smoking early in life, Patrick said.

“It’s important for people to understand the long-term connections between their behaviors and later health and well-being,” she said.

“Even if someone thinks their current substance use may not be problematic because they don’t see it as affecting their health right now, there are still potential longer-term consequences to consider. In this case, we are finding some evidence of potential negative impacts of heavy young adult substance use on their cognitive functioning more than 20 years later.”

Prevention and intervention efforts targeting young adults could significantly benefit long-term brain health, Patrick said.

“As we saw, this study demonstrates potential long-term detrimental impacts of young adult heavy substance use on cognitive health later in life. It highlights the importance of early interventions,” she said. “Understanding these risk factors and their trajectory across the lifespan will inform strategies to support cognitive health.”

The study’s authors also included Yuk Pang, Yvonne Terry-McElrath and Joy Bohyun Jang of U-M’s Institute for Social Research.

Key Questions Answered:

Q: I smoked in my 20s but quit at 30. Is my memory still at risk?

A: According to this study, yes. Daily smoking between 18 and 30 was a predictor of poorer memory in midlife, even for those who stopped smoking by age 35. This highlights young adulthood as a “critical window” where the brain is particularly vulnerable to the toxins in cigarettes.

Q: Is cannabis safer for the brain than cigarettes?

A: It’s complicated. While cannabis didn’t show the same “direct” long-term memory damage as cigarettes, it acted as a gateway to Substance Use Disorders in midlife. If heavy use in your 20s leads to a dependency in your 30s or 40s, that dependency is what eventually degrades your memory.

Q: Can I “reverse” the damage if I stop drinking or using drugs in my 30s?

A: The study suggests that for alcohol and cannabis, treating the disorder in midlife is key to protecting your brain. Because the memory loss was linked to the persistence of the addiction into your 30s, getting help early in midlife could potentially halt the cognitive slide.

Source: https://neurosciencenews.com/young-adult-substance-use-memory-30412/

Medscape Logo

TOPLINE:

Cannabis use was associated with smaller volumes in the amygdala, and tobacco smoking was linked to smaller volumes in the amygdala, insula, and pallidum and reduced total grey matter volume (TGMV). A systematic review and meta-analysis of 103 studies found consistent evidence across cross-sectional, longitudinal, and Mendelian randomisation (MR) studies for tobacco-related TGMV loss.

METHODOLOGY:

  • Researchers conducted a systematic review and meta-analysis of 103 independent studies examining associations between cannabis use, tobacco use, co-use, and brain volume.
  • The meta-analysis included a total of 77 studies and 72,798 participants: 44 studies (18,247 participants) examined cannabis use cross-sectionally, 30 studies (51,194 participants) examined tobacco use cross-sectionally, and three studies (3357 participants) examined tobacco use longitudinally.
  • The analysis included cross-sectional, longitudinal, and MR study designs to triangulate evidence across different methodological approaches with varying sources of bias.
  • Outcome measures focused on the brain volume of global, cortical, and subcortical regions assessed using T1-weighted structural MRI, with 33 brain regions of interest analysed.
  • The researchers extracted both adjusted and unadjusted estimates and utilised random-effects meta-analyses stratified by exposure and study design.

TAKEAWAY:

  • The meta-analysis of adjusted cross-sectional estimates showed that people who used cannabis had smaller volumes in the amygdala than control individuals, with a small effect size (17 studies; P = .016).
  • People who smoked tobacco had smaller volumes in the amygdala (five studies; P = .025), insula (five studies; P = .011), and pallidum (five studies; P ≤ .0001) and smaller TGMV (seven studies; P = .020) than control individuals; however, there was weak evidence for smaller volumes in the hippocampus in this group (10 studies; P = .049).
  • Longitudinal analysis indicated a greater decrease in TGMV among people who smoked tobacco than among control individuals (five studies; P = .037).
  • MR studies provided weak evidence that smoking initiation might decrease amygdala volumes (P = .046) and TGMV (P = .122 after adjusting) while demonstrating strong evidence that smoking more cigarettes per day might significantly decrease hippocampal volumes (P = 1.8E-06).

IN PRACTICE:

“We found cross-sectional evidence that people who use cannabis had smaller volumes in the amygdala. There were smaller volumes in the amygdala, insula and pallidum associated with tobacco use. There was consistent evidence for reductions in TGMV associated with smoking across cross-sectional, longitudinal and MR studies,” the authors wrote.

“This review highlights significant gaps in the literature, including a lack of studies using longitudinal and causal inference designs, as well as a lack of research on cannabis and tobacco co-use,” they added.

SOURCE:

This study was led by Katherine Sawyer, University of Bath, Bath, England. It was published online on March 19, 2026, in Addiction.

LIMITATIONS:

Most included studies were cross-sectional, which prevented definitive causal inferences about effects of cannabis and tobacco use on brain structure. Adjusted estimates varied significantly between individual studies; some adjusted only for intracranial volume, which introduced heterogeneity into the analysis. Using cortical volume as the primary structural measure may have been less sensitive to differences driven by cortical thickness or surface area. Not all relevant regions could be assessed because there were insufficient independent studies for meta-analysis in some regions in which previous reviews had found reductions.

DISCLOSURES:

Several authors reported receiving funding, grants, investigator grants, senior research fellowships, PhD studentships, and postdoctoral fellowship awards from several organisations including but not limited to the Medical Research Council, UK Research and Innovation, the UK government’s Horizon Europe, Wellcome, the European Research Council, Cancer Research UK, and Pfizer. One author declared having previous employment at a consultancy that provided support for pharma companies.

Sources:
  • Summary:  https://www.medscape.com/viewarticle/cannabis-and-tobacco-use-tied-reduced-brain-volumes-2026a100094a?ecd=a2a&form=fpf

 

  • Original Article: https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/add.70361

Scotland’s drug crisis carries a profound toll, with hundreds of lives lost each year. As well as these human impacts, the crisis imposes considerable financial costs that are likely to shape future decision-making. This report presents new economic analysis of those costs, examining their consequences across the public sector and the wider Scottish economy.

Drawing on qualitative insights from policy experts, service leaders, and clinicians, as well as people who use drugs, the research explores the measures the new Scottish Government can take to alleviate the crisis. It ultimately advocates for a full-spectrum approach, spanning harm reduction and recovery-focused interventions.

KEY FINDINGS

  • Scotland’s drug death rate is exceptionally high. The crisis is closely linked to deprivation and structural inequalities, with deindustrialisation, social displacement, and hardship shaping the conditions in which harmful drug environments can develop. It should not be treated as an individual failing.
  • In recent years, the crisis has taken on new dimensions, such as the rise of polydrug deaths and the emergence of powerful synthetic opioids.
  • People with lived and living experience of drug use in Glasgow and Edinburgh described what is in their view an increasingly pervasive drugs market, alongside concerns that support services are difficult to access.
  • New economic modelling estimates that drug harm has a direct cost to the state of up to £1 billion every year in Scotland, including £220 million in healthcare and drug services costs and £320 million on crime and justice.
  • Total social and economic costs are estimated to be as much as £5.7 billion annually. As well as public sector impacts, this includes £1.2 billion in lost output from employment and £3.5 billion in social costs from deaths, lost quality of life, and victim costs.
  • There is extensive evidence  that relatively low-cost interventions can reduce harm and prevent deaths. Needle and syringe programmes and naloxone – an opioid overdose antidote – are highly cost-effective and may even be cost-saving. Interventional evidence also supports drug checking services and safer drug consumption facilities.

RECOMMENDATIONS

  • Policymakers should take a primarily public health-led approach to drug harm, prioritising prevention, harm reduction, treatment, and support –  a more effective approach than one based on punishment and criminalisation.
  • The most immediate priority should be to prevent deaths, through sustaining naloxone and needle and syringe exchange programmes, expanding drug checking services, and rolling out safer drugs consumption facilities.
  • These approaches should also work alongside treatment and recovery services to provide a full spectrum of support, including widening Medication-Assisted Treatment (MAT)-style treatments, increasing detox capacity, and closing gaps in residential rehabilitation.
  • In terms of longer-term measures, action should include sustained investment from the Scottish Government to back up its new Alcohol and Drugs Plan, including expanding preventative support. The UK Government should carry out a comprehensive review of drugs policy, including the possibility of legislative reform.

Source: https://www.smf.co.uk/publications/scottish-drugs-crisis/

by Christina Myer exec editor of The Parkersburg News and Sentinel – Mar 14, 2026

According to the Drug Policy Alliance, overdose deaths are decreasing most in places where harm reduction practices are at work.

Dasgupta is a scientist studying drug overdose deaths at the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill.

Use-prevention efforts such as honest school-based awareness programs, prescription drug monitoring programs, improved access to affordable mental healthcare, even data collection efforts that help guide the conversation — it all helps.

For that matter, access to affordable healthcare in general — particularly in a state that relies so much on physical laborers who face the risk of injury and chronic physical pain daily — is essential. Even better if alternative means of pain management are encouraged rather than squashed.

But perhaps one of the least considered when there is so much lower-hanging fruit for politicians are the “deaths of despair,” and the role hopelessness and dismal economic prospects have played in this plague. Deep generational poverty, socio-cultural assumptions about both education/job training AND substance use, and the perpetual failure to bring any momentum to the expansion and diversification of our economy have been crippling.

As the abstract for one Marshall University study on “The opioid epidemic: Effects on recidivism in West Virginia,” put it, “the opioid epidemic was just a by-product of a much larger issue found in West Virginia.”

Now, tens of millions of dollars have been distributed across the state in the early stages of the West Virginia First Foundation’s mission of “Empowering West Virginians to prevent substance use disorder, support recovery, and save lives.”

According to Chairman Greg Duckworth, “These investments are not just funding grants, they are strengthening an ecosystem. We are supporting foster families, peer recovery networks, workforce pipelines, diversion strategies, wraparound youth services, and the long-term capacity needed to change outcomes for generations.”

Here’s hoping the goal is that one day the foundation will run out of money after having completed its mission and happily close up shop.

But until that day, no one can let what looks like success over the course of one year lull them into letting off the gas. We’re not even out of the driveway.

Source: https://www.newsandsentinel.com/opinion/local-columns/2026/03/editors-notes-harm-reduction-effort-working/

by Elaine Williams, Business editor – March 8, 2026

Cannabis sales have surged in Washington since legalization in 2012, but educators, police and health experts say questions remain about effects on young users

Paige Valpey’s cannabis use began with what she perceived as a low-risk way to escape the angst of being a 13-year-old girl and bonding with friends.

She first smoked cannabis with friends after school, stealing the drug from a stash belonging to adults who weren’t home, said Valpey, who is now 28, nine months sober, a licensed esthetician, owner of a thriving business and a wife.

In hindsight, Valpey believes her habit, among other things, hurt her grades, curtailed her participation in school activities, triggered fatigue and caused anxiety.

Valpey started using cannabis in the Lewiston-Clarkston Valley before recreational sales became legal in Washington in 2012. But she said she found more access to the drug once cannabis stores opened in Clarkston even though she never purchased it from one of the state-licensed retailers when she was underage.

Information Washington state agencies have collected and research they have completed since recreational sales of cannabis became legal indicate the drug can be related to troubling issues for adolescents and teens who use it, like Valpey did.

Impaired learning for as long as 28 days after the last hit for weekly users and suicidal ideation for daily users are among the health conditions adolescents could encounter, according to the website of the Washington State Liquor and Cannabis Board.

A decrease in perceptual reasoning after one or two uses, along with an increase in the likelihood for generalized anxiety are noted in one state study.

Despite the potential risks, monitoring health impacts of cannabis on adolescents has gaps. Meanwhile, legal sales of the drug skyrocket and some worry the product is getting into the hands of teens through indirect channels.

The parameters of legal cannabis

Total annual sales in Asotin County’s three retail cannabis stores were four times larger in 2024 compared to the first full year of legal sales in that jurisdiction more than a decade ago, after adjusting for inflation. Overall state sales rose by 87%. (See accompanying graphic.)

Lewiston and Clarkston police believe teenagers are using some of that cannabis, even though retailers comply with a ban on sales to anyone under the age of 21 and a Washington state survey shows a decline in youth use.

In contrast, Matt Plemmons, an owner of Greenfield Cannabis in Clarkston, thinks legalization has not made cannabis more accessible to adolescents and teens.

“Legalization has made it safer,” he said. “We developed a highly, strictly regulated market that checks everybody’s IDs, every time, no matter what. Illicit dealers did not check. They didn’t care if you were not 21 years old.”

If teenagers are hanging around his business, employees call law enforcement, Plemmons said.

Youth cannabis prevention should be a collaboration of “everybody, parents, schools, health care providers and state regulators,” Plemmons said. “The industry side is strict compliance (with all state laws).”

Still, the safeguards Plemmons described don’t stop young people from paying adults to buy cannabis from the state stores or stealing cannabis from adult relatives and friends, said Clarkston police officers, educators and students.

A sign posted outside Canna4Life Cannabis Dispensary in Clarkston warns that the penalties for adults purchasing cannabis for minors are as much as 10 years in prison and a $10,000 fine. But prosecutions in Asotin County for the felony are infrequent, likely between six to 12 cases since 2000, said Asotin County Prosecutor Curt Liedkie.

Obtaining evidence is difficult. Kids typically don’t come forward. Absent officers witnessing transactions or finding text messages, the cases are challenging to prosecute, he said.

“We take it very seriously,” Liedkie said.

That reality is widely known in the Lewiston-Clarkston Valley, where Asotin County’s three stores are within a 10-minute walk of CHS, said Caden Massey, coordinator of Clarkston EPIC (Empowering People Inspiring Change), a Washington state-funded program.

Massey’s group made the signs posted at Canna4Life, one of its many efforts to help teens struggling with mental health and academic issues.

“I know people who have purchased weed for younger people, and their perception is ‘Nothing is going to happen. I’m of legal age,’ “ Massey said.

All of the stores are at least 1,000 feet away from schools, libraries, parks, daycares and arcades, in compliance with state rules, and even closer to the police department, making it easy for officers to monitor the retailers, Plemmons said.

The physical separation of the stores from places where teens gather is just part of the issue.

Teenagers who are curious, but who haven’t used the drug, window shop the retailers online, browsing hundreds of products, and then tell whoever is buying for them exactly what they want, said one Clarkston High School student.

Once again, Plemmons has a different take. Customers can only order products on his website, he notes. All purchases happen at the store where everyone is carded.

Parents and teachers can use the website as a resource to learn about cannabis to help them refine prevention strategies, he said.

“I’ve had teachers come (to Greenfield) and given them a full breakdown of what everything looks like,” Plemmons said.

In some families, teenagers obtain cannabis in their homes, said John Morbeck, a Clarkston police officer who was in charge of the community’s youth drug prevention program when state-licensed cannabis stores debuted in Asotin County.

Before that, everyone kept it out of sight, he said.

“(Parents) didn’t want their kids to go to school and say, ‘Hey, Mom and Dad are smoking pot.’ So it wasn’t available to (kids),” Morbeck said. “As soon as the legal part changed, that’s when stuff at the schools started increasing.”

The Washington CannaBusiness Association asserts underage access to cannabis is happening through a different route.

There’s a thriving illicit market online where kids can purchase untested, unregulated and untaxed cannabis products like hemp-derived THC, according to an email from the association.

Valpey’s experience mirrors what law enforcement shared.

She said she had more access to cannabis when the state-licensed stores opened even though she hadn’t turned 21 years old.

“If you had an older sibling or friend, you could convince them to go in and get it for you,” Valpey said.

Data is lacking

Just as it’s difficult to know how widespread access to cannabis from state-licensed stores is to teenagers and others who are underage through indirect channels, it’s also unclear the magnitude of any health issues caused by unauthorized availability of the drug.

Washington does not have a dedicated surveillance system that tracks the health impacts of youth cannabis in a systematic way, said Ryan McLaughlin, an associate professor at Washington State University who is co-director of the school’s Cannabis Research Center, in an email.

The lack of coordinated monitoring is widely acknowledged, McLaughlin said, and is a reason researchers at WSU and across the state emphasize the need for stronger public health tracking, particularly as the potency and variety of products have risen.

Plemmons agrees.

“Public policy should be informed by as much reliable data as possible,” Plemmons said. “That will help regulators refine our strategies to prevent use among minors.”

One effective strategy, Plemmons said, is distributing free lock boxes to customers at cannabis retailers, something EPIC sponsors.

Source: https://www.lmtribune.com/local-news/youth-and-cannabis-whats-the-risk-21338411/

Scientists analysed medical data from more than 100 million people and found that the risk of stroke was 122% higher for amphetamine users and 96% higher for cocaine users compared with those who did not take the drugs.

Cannabis users were also at greater risk, suffering 37% more strokes than non-users, the review found, though researchers saw no evidence that opioids, a highly addictive painkiller, added to a person’s risk of stroke.

The rise in strokes observed in connection with some drugs was not confined to older people. When researchers focused on under-55s, they saw a near tripling in stroke risk among amphetamine users. The additional risk linked to cannabis was a more modest 14% in the age group, while the risk from cocaine was much the same at 97%.

Dr Megan Ritson, a research associate at the University of Cambridge and first author on the study, said: “Illicit drug use is a preventable stroke risk, but I don’t know if young people are aware how high the risk is.

“This is the first finding that has shown how different substance use disorders really can impact stroke risk.”

The researchers pooled data from 32 studies on stroke and recreational drugs, involving more than 100 million people, to see which substances, if any, were associated with a greater risk. This revealed links between drug use and strokes, but it could not prove the drugs were to blame: drug users may simply be more prone to strokes for other reasons, such as poorer general health.

To delve deeper, the researchers ran more analyses to see if drugs were the probable cause of higher stroke risk. They looked at whether people who were genetically predisposed to having a drug disorder were more likely to suffer a stroke and found they were. The finding bolstered the suspicion that drugs were to blame, rather than drug users being at greater risk for other reasons. Details are published in the International Journal of Stroke.

The drugs appear to raise stroke risk in multiple ways. Amphetamines and cocaine can send blood pressure soaring, but also constrict blood vessels in the brain, potentially explaining why users are at greater risk of both bleeds and blockages in the brain. Cocaine also seems to accelerate atherosclerosis, where cholesterol, fat and other substances build up in arteries, causing them to harden and narrow. Cannabis constricts blood vessels too, and may exacerbate the problem by encouraging the formation of blood clots.

Juliet Bouverie, the chief executive at the Stroke Association, said: “These substances put a person’s cardiovascular system under huge amounts of stress which can lead to increased blood clotting, narrowing of blood vessels and damage to the circulatory system – all of which can lead to stroke. Regular use of cocaine can also lead to high blood pressure, which is the cause of around half of all strokes.

“More people of all ages are having strokes which is leaving 240 people every day with life-changing disabilities – yet nine out of 10 strokes are preventable. We strongly advise that people follow simple steps to live a healthy lifestyle and reduce their risk of stroke including eating a colourful diet, not drinking too much alcohol, getting regular exercise, and not smoking, vaping, or taking any illegal drugs.”

Source: https://www.theguardian.com/society/2026/mar/08/recreational-drugs-can-more-than-double-the-risk-of-stroke-study-suggests

Elsevier

Current Opinion in Toxicology

Elsevier article – Volume 45 –March 2026,
by Payten M. Romero, Kennon J. Heard,  Nicholas R. Oblizajek, Abdul Qadeer,Robert W. Kirchoff,
Cannabis hyperemesis syndrome (CHS) is a disorder of gut-brain interaction with symptoms of nausea, severe episodic vomiting, and abdominal pain. The primary pathways implicated in CHS are the endocannabinoid system and the transient receptor potential vanilloid-1 pathway. The lack of cannabis standardization and Fusarium mycotoxin contamination may also play a role in the development of CHS. Hot showers, capsaicin, and antipsychotics – but not traditional anti-emetics – have been shown effective for symptom management. Until recently, there has not been a specific diagnosis code for CHS, making it difficult for healthcare providers to document CHS in electronic health records. This hindered proper surveillance and epidemiology studies. Further research is needed to characterize the cannabis composition, mechanism of action, and genetic susceptibility associated with CHS.

A case study

A 24-year-old male presents to the emergency department with a 5-day history of vomiting. During the evaluation, he is violently retching and struggles to answer questions. He reports that the symptoms today started when he awoke this morning and he has been vomiting every 10 min for the last 2 h. He states that he tried to take a bath because that has helped him in the past but today it did not help. The patient reports that he does not drink or smoke cigarettes, but that he started smoking cannabis 2 years ago and he smokes cannabis several times a day for his anxiety and that he has done this for the past 2 years.
On his examination, he appears very uncomfortable. His heart rate, respiratory rate, temperature, blood pressure, and pulse oximetry are normal. His mouth and lips appear dry but his exam is otherwise unremarkable and notably he has no abdominal tenderness.
A review of his medical records shows that he has been treated in the emergency room twice in the past week for similar symptoms. An extensive workup including laboratory studies, an abdominal ultrasound, and an abdominal computed tomography scan is normal. Specifically, in laboratory studies, the electrolytes and renal function were normal. Both times he was treated with intravenous fluids and ondansetron with minimal improvement and was discharged home with a prescription for ondansetron and instructions to follow up with a gastroenterologist scheduled in 2 weeks. He was also referred to addiction medicine and his primary care provider.
After the initial treatment, the patient continued to have repeated episodes of retching and complained of severe nausea. Given his recurrent vomiting, an unremarkable prior workup, and long history of daily cannabis use, the team diagnosed CHS. The team ordered intravenous fluids for hydration and laboratory studies to evaluate him for dehydration which showed mild dehydration. The team also administered haloperidol to treat his nausea.

What is cannabis hyperemesis syndrome?

Cannabis hyperemesis syndrome describes a collection of symptoms that include severe episodic vomiting and abdominal pain in patients who use cannabis frequently (usually daily) for a prolonged time (usually a year or more) [1]. It was first described in Australia in 2004 [2] and was considered uncommon. However, with the widespread decriminalization of cannabis in the U.S., clinicians noted an increase in patients presenting to emergency departments with cyclic vomiting who reported frequent cannabis use [3]. The prevalence of CHS is not well described due to a lack of diagnosis codes [4]. However, a new diagnosis code for CHS (R11.16) is now effective in the 10th revision of the International Classification of Diseases (ICD-10) starting on October 1, 2025 [5].

What causes cannabis hyperemesis syndrome?

Cannabis hyperemesis syndrome is sometimes referred to as cannabinoid hyperemesis syndrome [1]. Despite the lack of mechanistic studies of CHS, literature reviews suggest the etiology of cannabinoid receptor 1 and 2 (CB1 and CB2) activation by tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) [∗∗6∗∗78]. While the sensation of nausea is primarily a neurologic phenomenon, CHS is largely classified as a chronic disorder of gut-brain interaction, not primarily a neurologic disorder. Nausea is mediated by the area postrema and central emetic pathways. A key component of these pathways is the endocannabinoid system (ECS), which consists of a retrograde signaling pathway activated by CB1 in the CNS and gut [7]. The ECS is a neuromodulator and regulator of nausea and vomiting, especially during stress response [7]. Chronic use of cannabis down-regulates and de-sensitizes CB1 receptors [8]. This leads to a decrease in ECS signaling that is inversely correlated to the activation of the hypothalamic-pituitary stress axis (HPA) [9]. The increased activation of the HPA may account for the vomiting effect of anxiety, which is also observed in many patients with CHS. The cannabinoid etiology of CHS was extensively reviewed by Loganathan et al. (2024) [6].
Another plausible mechanism of CHS involves the transient receptor potential vanilloid-1 (TRPV1) channel-dependent pathway in the medulla, along gastric enteric and vagal nerves, and on cutaneous receptors in the dermis and epidermis [10]. Transient receptor potential vanilloid-1 is a polymodal, non-selective cation channel that can be activated by THC, low pH, and heat [10,11]. It is down-regulated and de-sensitized with prolonged exposure to cannabis, leading to nausea, altered gastric motility, and abdominal pain [10]. The TRPV1 channel also binds to capsaicin, a chemical found in chili peppers, which controls the release of substance P (a mediator involved in pain perception) and can alleviate the symptoms of CHS [1].
Genetic polymorphisms may also play a role in the onset of CHS symptoms (Figure 1) [12]. A preliminary study by Russo et al., in 2021 identified an association between CHS and genetic polymorphisms, including catechol-O-methyltransferase, which catabolizes dopamine; ATP-binding cassette transporter A1; TRPV1; the dopamine receptor D2 (DRD2); and the cytochrome P450 2C9 enzyme, which metabolizes THC in the liver [13]. However, the study had a limited sample size (n = 28) and was not validated in larger cohorts or incorporated into any diagnostic criteria. Other larger genome-wide association studies have examined genetic polymorphisms in cannabis use disorder [14,15], but vomiting is not examined as a phenotype in these studies. Further studies are needed to fully characterize the genetic profiles of patients with CHS.

Figure 1. Different causes of cannabis hyperemesis syndrome (CHS): Prolonged use, genetic backgrounds, and contaminant exposure. 

Cannabis hyperemesis syndrome is linked to prolonged use of cannabis. Tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) activates cannabinoid receptor B1 and B2 (CB1 and CB2), with CB1 in the central nervous system being particularly relevant for emesis control, and THC also binds to transient receptor potential vanilloid-1 channels. Stimulation of CB receptors can lead to increased vagal nerve discharges contributing to vomiting. Some patients are more susceptible to the vomiting effect of high-dose THC due to their genetic backgrounds. Due to the lack of standardization in cannabis composition, production methods, and compliance testing, some patients may vomit due to exposure to cannabis contaminants (e.g., Fusarium mycotoxins) with a different mechanism of action.

What are the potential roles of cannabis standardization and Fusarium mycotoxins?

At the time of publication, cannabis is being rescheduled federally to a less restrictive Schedule III category in the U.S. [16]. Yet, cannabis remained listed in the U.S. as a controlled substance. Unlike other agricultural crops (e.g., tobacco), there is a lack of standardization in cannabis composition, production methods, and compliance testing in the state-legalized markets [17∗181920]. Furthermore, black- and gray-market cannabis is estimated to account for over two-third of the cannabis market in the U.S. in 2022 [21] and the contamination level of pesticide residues, mycotoxins, and other chemicals in black- and gray-market cannabis is largely unknown. As such, it remains unclear whether the active components of cannabis (i.e., cannabinoids) are solely responsible for the etiology of CHS.
In a study in Arizona and California in 2025, Fusarium mycotoxins were found in one in six illegal cannabis samples [22]. The poisoning symptoms of Fusarium mycotoxins deoxynivalenol (vomitoxin), nivalenol, and T-2 toxin resemble the symptoms of CHS [23,24]. In an animal study [25], deoxynivalenol was shown to activate the transient receptor potential ankyrin 1 (another TRP channel different from TRPV1) and the calcium-sensing receptor, leading to increased vagal nerve discharges contributing to vomiting. Given that CHS appears with prolonged and frequent cannabis use and Fusarium contamination can vary from batch to batch, it is plausible that the sensation of cannabis use by itself may trigger vomiting via associative learning (i.e., classical conditioning). This mechanism has not been established as a primary etiology of CHS due to limited evidence in the literature. Furthermore, it is difficult to trace back any active components or contaminants of cannabis that could have accounted for the CHS patient’s visit to the emergency department. Further studies are needed to examine how cannabis composition is linked to CHS development.

Why do hot showers help?

One of the most notable aspects described by patients with CHS is the significant relief of symptoms with hot showers [26]. While not a universal feature, up to 90 % of patients report some relief [27]. It is important to note that the relieving effect of a hot shower is not unique to CHS, as a study in 2021 found that patients who did not use cannabis but had cyclic vomiting also demonstrated lessened nausea, vomiting, and abdominal pain from a hot shower [28].
There are several theories for why hot showers may be effective in relieving symptoms of CHS. The most widely supported theory in the literature is the TRPV1 channel activation theory. Hot water at temperatures above 41 °C activates cutaneous TRPV1 channels, modulating emetic pathways and may provide antiemetic effects through the release and subsequent depletion of substance P and other neuropeptides. This is further supported by the observed efficacy of topical capsaicin, a TRPV1 agonist, in relieving CHS symptoms [1]. The second theory has to do with the fact that CB1 in the hypothalamus aids in thermoregulation [26]. Through CB1-mediated thermoregulation disruption, high doses of cannabis decrease heat production and cause hypothermia [26,29]. Hot water decreases sympathetic nervous system activation, relieving the hypothermic effects that occur with large amounts of use and cannabis accumulation in the body [26,30]. The third theory is referred to as the cutaneous steal syndrome theory. In this theory, cutaneous vasodilation from heat changes the core temperature and redirects splanchnic circulation, resulting in relief in gastrointestinal/abdominal symptoms and pain [26].

Why do standard anti-emetics not work and why are anti-psychotics so effective?

Anti-emetics are relatively ineffective at treating CHS [31∗∗3233]. A plausible explanation is that the pharmacotherapeutic targets of anti-emetics are not implicated in CHS. The most common anti-emetics for treating nausea and vomiting, such as ondansetron, are serotonin 3 receptor antagonists, which are not implicated or dysregulated in CHS [34]. Other anti-emetics, despite having different mechanisms of action for the most part, like promethazine and metoclopramide, were also found to be less effective in treating CHS [33]. Promethazine’s main mechanism of action is antagonism on histamine H1 receptors, with some anti-cholinergic, anti-muscarinic and other properties [35]. Metoclopramide mechanisms of actions include both antagonism to the serotonin 3 receptors and the dopamine 2 receptors [36]. The antagonism to the dopamine 2 receptor in metoclopramide has a short life, and extrapyramidal symptoms had arisen with higher doses of metoclopramide for treating nausea and vomiting [37]. With clinicians being possibly conservative about higher dose of metoclopramide, the standard dose being given (10 mg) has been suggested to not reach a clinically relevant anti-emetic effect [37].
While evidence supporting treatments for CHS is limited to case series and small clinical trials, anti-psychotics have been shown more effective in treating nausea, abdominal pain, and vomiting linked to CHS [33,38]. Anti-psychotics are often antagonists to DRD2 in the chemoreceptor trigger zone in the brainstem, which regulates nausea and vomiting [32,394041]. Haloperidol, an anti-psychotic, modulates the HPA stress axis, which is posited to also be dysregulated in CHS through the down-regulation of CB1 receptors [42], suggesting that haloperidol modulates two areas of mechanisms implicated in CHS. Droperidol, another anti-psychotic, is effective in reducing the length of hospital stay and decreasing the use of opioids and other medications in CHS patients [43]. Overall, limited data suggest that the anti-emetics are not as effective as anti-psychotics.

Future directions

As cannabis legalization efforts continue in the U.S. and worldwide, CHS has become an increasingly common condition that leads to emergency room visits. The new ICD-10 diagnosis code for CHS can greatly improve surveillance and epidemiology studies, resulting in a better understanding of the public health impact of CHS. While different signaling pathways have been proposed as part of the CHS etiology, more mechanistic studies are needed to understand the interaction of these pathways and the role of genetic backgrounds in CHS development. As the contribution of illicit cannabis to CHS incidence remains unclear, a nationwide cannabis checking program similar to existing programs for street drugs [44] and other substances [45] can clarify the causal roles of cannabinoids and cannabis contaminants in CHS. For regulated cannabis, standardizing production methods and compliance testing (particularly for emetic agents such as Fusarium mycotoxins) can be a useful mitigation measure for CHS.

Source: Cannabis hyperemesis syndrome: Pharmacological and toxicological perspectives – ScienceDirect

Kratom leaves, which contain psychoactive substances, come from a tree native to Southeast Asia. Traditionally used in countries like Thailand and Indonesia, kratom leaves are generally crushed and then can be consumed in various forms: smoked, vaped, powdered in beverages, liquid extract “shots,” or taken as capsules. However, we are now seeing Kratom in all forms pop up in the United States in smoke shops, gas stations, convenience stores, and online.

The most recent usage data of kratom reports that about 1.6 million people in the United States use kratom.1 Kratom, which is an opioid, has what might seem like strange effects; at lower doses, kratom acts like a stimulant, while at higher doses, can act like a sedative. People take the drug for all sorts of (not scientifically supported) reasons, such as pain, anxiety, depression, etc.

Despite its accessibility, kratom is intoxicating, impairing, and can pose serious health risks. It is not controlled by the Controlled Substances Act, nor is it approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for any medical use. The FDA warns consumers not to use kratom “because of the risk of serious adverse events, including liver toxicity, seizures, and substance use disorder (SUD)”.2 Further research indicates that up to one-third of users may experience adverse side effects, which can include cardiac arrest, liver damage, seizures, brain hemorrhaging, and even overdose deaths.3 Kratom has been labeled as a “drug of concern,” with a particular focus on products containing 7-hydroxymitragynine (7-OH), a potent component found naturally in kratom, but which is readily being synthesized into higher concentrations to create a stronger effect for users.

The presence of 7-OH in kratom products is particularly concerning for employers. This opioid-like substance can lead to severe health complications, including addiction and withdrawal symptoms similar to those experienced with traditional opioids. Employers may face challenges in workplace testing and safety protocols due to the unregulated nature of kratom. As kratom use increases, the likelihood of employees using it at work or being impaired by its effects rises, leading to potential safety hazards and decreased productivity.

Employers must also be aware that traditional drug tests may not detect kratom or its metabolites, making it difficult to identify users. This gap in testing can lead to a false sense of security and complicate workplace safety initiatives. As a result, businesses should consider implementing specific policies regarding psychoactive substance use (including drugs legally available) and conduct regular training for employees about the risk of drug use affecting the workplace environment.

Recognizing that some employees may be using kratom is vital for maintaining a safe and productive work environment. Educating your team about the risks associated with kratom use can be an effective first step – check out this FDA created resource that illustrates the dangers of kratom. Consider fostering open discussions about substance use in a supportive environment and establish a clear substance use policy that helps set expectations and outlines potential consequences for impairment on the job. By promoting health resources, such as counseling and support services, you provide employees with the tools they need to address any substance-related challenges.

As kratom continues to gain traction, it’s vital for employers to stay informed. By fostering a culture of awareness and support, you can help ensure a safe and productive workplace for your employees.

Source: Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Avenue N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

Forwarded by Maggie Petito   – From  UK Spectator – February 23, 2026 

The truth about Mexico’s cartel wars

Spectator  UK – February 23, 2026 by Joshua Treviño. (Treviño is the chief transformation officer at the Texas Public Policy Foundation and a senior fellow of the Western Hemisphere Initiative at the America First Policy Institute).

To understand the latest disturbing spasm of violence in Mexico, it helps to go back six years to an ultra-wealthy colonia called Lomas de Chapultepec, near the heart of Mexico City.

Lomas de Chapultepec is protected, partly by a large security apparatus net that has been thrown around it, and partly by the pacto de narco, which protects the high-income neighborhoods in which both cartel leadership and their political partners live, along with their families.

Not long ago, former Mexican president Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador was publicly threatening to use the Mexican armed forces to defend cartels

That was why it was surprising when, on June 26, 2020, Mexico City’s chief of police Omar Garcia Harfuch was attacked on the Paseo de la Reforma by a hit squad armed with heavy-caliber weaponry. Wounded, he escaped with his life, although two accompanying policemen did not.

This shocking eruption of military-grade violence inside Mexico City’s wealthiest colonia was swiftly attributed to the bloodthirsty and sociopathic leader of the Cártel de Jalisco Nueva Generación (CJNG), Nemesio Rubén Oseguera Cervantes: the man known as El Mencho.

Yesterday, Omar Garcia Harfuch – who is now Mexico’s Secretary of Security and Citizen Protection – struck back. El Mencho failed to kill him, therefore he has killed El Mencho.

The Mexican state’s account of events holds that El Mencho and his men attacked the force sent to arrest him, and that the CJNG boss died of wounds en route to treatment. Mexico also said that the United States forces provided intelligence and unspecified support to the Mexican effort, without any presence on the scene. One may or may not believe this. Those in the know are not issuing the press statements.

What’s clear is that the targeting of El Mencho was meant to address and appease two mutually antagonistic parties. One is the Americans, who demand ever-greater deliverables from the Mexican state in the cartel wars. The other is the ideological core of Mexico’s ruling Morena party, which is fundamentally anti-American and would react to a US presence with something close to revolt. It was not so very long ago – the spring of 2023, in fact – that the creator and central figure of Morena, former Mexican president Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador, was publicly threatening to use the Mexican armed forces to defend cartels against any American action against them.

If his successor, current Mexican President Claudia Sheinbaum, has allowed direct American action now, it is an epochal break with her own benefactor who bestowed the office upon her. As things stand, the effort to both claim and disclaim American involvement carries a sense of protesting too much.

Two consequences of the hit now present themselves. The first and most-dramatic is the spasm of violence across much of Mexico, including well-known tourist areas. CJNG personnel are swarming into areas previously considered off-limits to the cartel wars. The organization that violated the peace of Lomas de Chapultepec is now doing the same to international airports, to Puerta Vallarta, to Guadalajara and beyond.

The actions appear to be comparable to those one might expect of heavy infantry units, equipped with anti-armor and anti-aircraft weaponry. The Mexican armed forces, clearly caught off guard, are slowly responding. But the reaction ought not to have been a surprise: in the Culiacanazo of October 2019, Sinaloa-cartel militia conducted a similar operation after an arrest of one of El Chapo’s sons. This is a known organizational response by major cartels when challenged by the state, and the state’s unreadiness can be explained by plain incompetence – or by an inability to trust the broader security apparatus with news of the impending raid.

As the fighting progresses, watch the speed at which the Mexican armed forces reassert control, as they likely will. Well-armed as CJNG and the major cartels are, the strongest force in the country remains the formal state. If the matter becomes pressing, America could offer intelligence and targeting assistance – none of which will become public knowledge.

Watch also the extent to which CJNG chooses to exact vengeance upon any of the several million US citizens in Mexico, now that the Mexican state has given the Americans partial credit for El Mencho’s death. The targeting of American citizens as such would of necessity draw in the direct and public involvement of the United States.

Various members of the Mexican and American establishments are proclaiming that the death of El Mencho is proof that the Mexican regime is, at long last, serious in its fight against the cartels. This is slightly naive. The traditional cartel partner of the Morena regime is the Sinaloa cartel, which, although presently in violent flux, has a perennial and bloody rivalry with CJNG.

The Mexican state will continue to offer up big-name cartel figures ad infinitum, but their elimination alone changes little. What would be transformative is bringing to account the politicians who enable, protect and promote cartels. These men are at the very heart of Mexico’s Morena regime. That is what a true strategic win would look like, and it is what the United States must resolutely pursue.

 Source: www.drugwatch.org

 by Kerry Charron – Feb 22, 2026

Researchers affiliated with Tufts University School of Medicine analyzed online survey data from 2,090 adolescents (ages 12-17) and their parents. They answered questions about the quality of their family meals, which focused on communication, enjoyment, logistics, and digital distractions. The survey also covered questions about teen alcohol, e-cigarette, and cannabis use in the previous six months.

The researchers analyzed how these patterns differed based on teens’ experiences of household stressors and exposure to violence. The research team developed a weighted score based on how strongly the various experiences are linked to substance use in prior research and this national sample.

The findings revealed that higher family dinner quality was linked with a 22-34% lower prevalence of substance use among teens who had either experienced no or low to moderate levels of adverse childhood experiences. Examples of adverse childhood experiences reported by study participants included the impact of divorce, substance abuse, mental health challenges, and domestic violence. In addition, teens who experienced teasing about their weight or sexual or physical dating violence were some other critical influences.  

Lead study author Dr. Margie Skeer, professor and chair of the Department of Public Health and Community Medicine at the School of Medicine, emphasized that family meals are a practical and effective intervention that decreases the risk of teen substance use. She explained, “Routinely connecting over meals—which can be as simple as a caregiver and child standing at a counter having a snack together—can help establish open and routine parent-child communication and parental monitoring to support more positive long-term outcomes for the majority of children.” The findings highlight how family meals facilitate positive parent-child relationships and interactions.  

However, the study also suggested that family meals may not be effective for adolescents who have experienced significant childhood adversity. Teens who endured more significant stressors may benefit from more intensive and trauma-informed approaches.  

Source: https://www.labroots.com/trending/health-and-medicine/30227/study-examined-link-family-dinners-teen-substance-prevention-2

 

  • Yngvild Olsen and Sunny Patel –

Ms. B (identified by first initial of last name for privacy) had never told anyone about the sexual abuse she had suffered at the hands of her uncle as a young child. For years during her adolescence, the secret festered, driving her to run away from home, drop out of school, and begin drinking and taking opioids to numb the pain.

It wasn’t until she was sitting in a brightly lit room with other women at the clinic where she had started treatment for her opioid use disorder, surrounded by rainbow-colored positive affirmations, drinking a cup of hot coffee, and laughing at a joke the peer specialist had just told, that she felt safe enough to start telling her story.

Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA) grant funds had paid for the affirmation signs, the coffee, and the salary for the peer specialist. Ms. B was one of many women that year who benefitted from this care designed specifically to address the trauma that contributed to the development of their substance use disorders. And it was working.

Yet on January 13, that progress for Ms. B and many others was threatened. With no announcement or reasoning, the federal government abruptly cut $2 billion in already awarded grants to SAMHSA—an agency likely unfamiliar to most Americans, but one that undergirds and forms the safety net for the country’s behavioral health system. There was no warning for an agency already cut by $1 billion last year, hit with significant staff reductions, and poised to be subsumed under a new proposed entity, the Administration for a Healthy America, within the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS). Programs across the country were zeroed out overnight. Only after intense public outcry did the administration reverse course.

In early February, Congress passed bipartisan appropriations to preserve SAMHSA’s structure and funding, clearly signaling the little agency and its work is essential to the nation’s behavioral health system. This is welcome relief to the uncertainty just weeks ago. Adding to a recent focus on behavioral health, President Trump issued a related Executive Order, Addressing Addiction Through the Great American Recovery Initiative, on January 29. This order establishes a new interagency taskforce to provide recommendations and guidance for better coordination and alignment of relevant federal programs. On February 2, HHS Secretary Kennedy announced a new $100 million SAMHSA grant program, the Safety Through Recovery, Engagement, and Evidence-based Treatment and Supports, or STREETS Initiative, to fund outreach, mental health care, medical stabilization, crisis intervention, and linkages to housing for people experiencing homelessness and addiction.

These are welcome, if unclear, actions, and they come on the heels of the whiplash caused by mass grant cancellation and reversal—a terrifying stress test that exposed just how fragile America’s behavioral health infrastructure has become.

This is juxtaposed with recent data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention that demonstrated another remarkable and welcome increase in life expectancy in America on the heels of reductions in overdose mortality. However, much of the federal infrastructure that contributed to this progress was nearly dismantled overnight.

Confusion About Behavioral Health Care And The Role Of SAMHSA

What happened in mid-January reveals a deeper misunderstanding of how behavioral health care actually works in America, and why weakening SAMHSA puts lives at risk.

Despite progress, substance-related conditions, including accidents and unintentional injuries, and suicides remain among leading causes of death for people ages 25–64 in the United States. Millions of Americans continue to struggle with untreated or inadequately treated substance use disorders and mental illness. And communities everywhere—urban, rural, tribal—are grappling with shortages of trained providers, fragmented systems, and rising demand for services.

SAMHSA is the only federal public health agency whose sole mission is to address the full continuum of behavioral health needs—from prevention to treatment to supporting individuals in recovery. Its work does not replace direct clinical care. It often funds services that fall outside of traditional insurance models yet exist as glue in a system.

Take overdoses, for instance. SAMHSA funding has enabled states to saturate their communities with naloxone, a life-saving overdose reversal medication. SAMHSA investments have supported training for first responders and community organizations on how to recognize and respond to overdose. These investments are not abstract. They show up in emergency departments, resulting in fewer fatal overdoses, and in communities where people survive long enough because of SAMHSA funding to engage with treatment and sustain recovery.

As former career federal officials at SAMHSA and as physicians who continue to see patients, we’ve seen the agency’s work and impacts firsthand at the individual, family, and community levels. We’ve also seen how the programmatic expertise SAMHSA brings has helped other federal agencies make major systems level changes; examples include 1) the Drug Enforcement Administration’s regulatory flexibilities allowing for telehealth initiation of buprenorphine for the treatment of opioid use disorder, and 2) the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services promulgating a new billing code for peer support services in the 2024 Physician Fee Schedule. SAMHSA’s unique focus on the behavioral health needs of the country is what makes its role and work so special.

SAMHSA also recognizes that the work of saving lives and improving behavioral health wellbeing is done on the ground by trained and knowledgeable individuals. Few federal agencies other than SAMHSA fund the ongoing training and technical assistance needed to make sure the public health, public safety, and health care professionals serving people with, or at risk for, behavioral health conditions are up on the latest research and best practices. For example, grant programs such as the Addiction and Prevention Technology Transfer Centers, Center for Mental Health Implementation Support, and Opioid Response Network have provided cutting-edge support to thousands of public health and health care professionals, first responders and other public safety officials, state level professionals, and policymakers.

Many of these services and training/technical assistance grants were on the chopping block just a few weeks ago. Even though the cuts were ultimately restored, the whiplash furthered an unnerving sense of instability that began in spring 2025 with Secretary Kennedy’s announcement of a planned new Administration for a Healthy America that would comprise SAMHSA and several other HHS operating divisions. Collectively, these actions have undermined workforce morale, disrupted planning, and eroded trust in the federal government being a reliable partner. The grant funds were restored; the trust was not.

Looking Forward

The next question is what happens now that the fiscal year funding has passed.

Appropriations language alone does not ensure implementation. Take, for instance, the prior massive workforce reductions at the agency and the sudden $1 billion cut last year that required 23 states and the District of Columbia to file suit and obtain injunctions to continue the flow of funding. Most recently, on January 23, $5 billion in essential public health infrastructure funding by CDC to local health departments around the country was suddenly paused and then “unpaused” 24 hours later; these dollars were also appropriated by Congress. And a recent article in Health Affairs Forefront found that SAMHSA had spent only 34.6 percent of its FY 2025 budget allocation, based on a review of USAspending.gov accounts. 

Congress must exercise sustained oversight to ensure the administration fully executes on the will of Congress, that grants are reliably administered, and that the workforce and technical assistance infrastructure are rebuilt rather than quietly hollowed out. Such robust oversight and accountability functions have been lacking. Thus, it will be important for SAMHSA grantees, state behavioral health administrators, family members, and others with a vested interest to raise issues and concerns with their Congressional representatives regularly and urgently when there are future drastic changes to funding and programs. Ensuring that individuals, families, and communities impacted by substance use get the help they need is a bipartisan concern.

We also need hearings on what has happened, as well as Office of Inspector General and Government Accountability Office reports on the work SAMHSA and related agencies are doing and where they are falling short. We need active engagement with Congressional representatives where these dollars are awarded (and that’s every state and territory in the United States) to ensure that the money allocated is being disbursed by the government and reaching the communities it is intended to serve. The lesson of January is that sustained advocacy works, but vigilance is required to ensure follow-through on Congressional intent for appropriated funding.

SAMHSA may be little known to the general public, but its work touches millions of lives. Weakening it when the nation is finally turning the corner on the overdose crisis is a risk we cannot afford to take. Saving it once is not enough; ensuring its stability is the next test. Ultimately, the measure of our national commitment will be whether Congress secures long-term stability for SAMHSA.

Ms. B found her voice in a room funded by a government grant. We must ensure that those healing spaces continue to exist, the lights are still on, and the peer specialist is still employed when the next person walks through the door seeking help.

Authors’ Note:

Manatt Health works with a diverse group of clients, including states; state and federal policy makers and agencies; payers; health care providers and systems; foundations; associations; consumer organizations; and pharmaceutical, biotech, and device companies.

Dr. Olsen is a member of the American Society for Addiction Medicine (ASAM), serves on an ASAM Criteria Implementation Committee, and has a small clinical advisory role with them.

Source: https://www.healthaffairs.org/content/forefront/congress-has-preserved-substance-abuse-and-mental-health-services-administration-samhsa

Press Release by media@phi.org – Oakland, CA –

Adolescents who use cannabis could face a significantly higher risk of developing serious psychiatric disorders by young adulthood, according to a large new study published today in JAMA Health Forum. The longitudinal study followed 463,396 adolescents ages 13 to 17 through age 26 and found that past-year cannabis use during adolescence was associated with a significantly higher risk of incident psychotic (doubled), bipolar (doubled), depressive and anxiety disorders. The study was conducted by researchers from Kaiser Permanente, the Public Health Institute’s Getting it Right from the Start, the University of California, San Francisco and the University of Southern California, and was funded by a grant from NIH’s National Institute on Drug Abuse (R01DA0531920).

The study analyzed electronic health record data from routine pediatric visits between 2016 and 2023. Cannabis use preceded psychiatric diagnoses by an average of 1.7 to 2.3 years. The study’s longitudinal design strengthens evidence that adolescent cannabis exposure is a potential risk factor for developing mental illness.

“As cannabis becomes more potent and aggressively marketed, this study indicates that adolescent cannabis use is associated with double the risk of incident psychotic and bipolar disorders, two of the most serious mental health conditions,” said Lynn Silver, M.D., program director of the Getting it Right from the Start, a program of the Public Health Institute, and a study co-author.

Cannabis is the most used illicit drug among U.S. adolescents. The Monitoring the Future study shows use rising with grade level — from about 8% in 8th grade to 26% in 12th grade — and according to the 2024 National Survey on Drug Use and Health, more than 10% of all U.S. teens aged 12 to 17 report past-year use. At the same time, average THC levels in California cannabis flower now exceed 20%, far higher than in previous decades, and concentrates can exceed 95% THC.

Unlike many prior studies, the research examined any self-reported past-year cannabis use, with universal screening of teens during standard pediatric care, rather than focusing only on heavy use or cannabis use disorder.

“Even after accounting for prior mental health conditions and other substance use, adolescents who reported cannabis use had a substantially higher risk of developing psychiatric disorders — particularly psychotic and bipolar disorders,” said Kelly Young-Wolff, Ph.D., lead author of the study and senior research scientist at the Kaiser Permanente Division of Research.

The study also found that cannabis use was more common among adolescents enrolled in Medicaid and those living in more socioeconomically deprived neighborhoods, raising concerns that expanding cannabis commercialization could exacerbate existing mental health disparities.

SOURCE: https://www.phi.org/press/study-adolescent-cannabis-use-linked-to-doubling-risk-of-psychotic-and-bipolar-disorders/

###

PSYCHOLOGY TODAY

by Mark Gold MD – Addiction Outlook –  

Connecting with a ‘higher power’ works in prevention, treatment, and recovery.

  • 48.5 million people in the U.S. have diagnosable alcohol and other drug disorders.
  • Researchers found that spiritual practices positively affect alcohol, marijuana, and drug addiction recovery.
  • For individuals who value spirituality, these opportunities may also improve prevention and recovery.

For years, Alcoholics Anonymous and related organizations have emphasized that members should seek help from their “higher power,” however they conceptualize that entity. Now, a new JAMA Psychiatry meta-analysis supports this view. The investigators synthesized data from 55 rigorous longitudinal studies, including 540,712 participants. These studies followed participants from six months to 20+ years, most spanning multiple years. Across alcohol, tobacco, marijuana, and other illicit drugs, researchers found a statistically significant protective association between spirituality and more favorable substance use outcomes.

Higher levels of spiritual engagement were associated with a 13 percent reduction in risk of harmful or hazardous use across prevention and recovery contexts. For example, among individuals attending religious services more than weekly, the risk reduction was 18 percent.

“Meta-analyses of such longitudinal studies on spirituality and health are rare. This is a sort of once-in-a-decade advance,” said senior author of the study from the Harvard School of Public Health Tyler VanderWeele, PhD. “The consistency of the results across all the studies—including over a dozen studies conducted outside of the U.S.—was striking, with all but a few showing a protective, not detrimental, effect.” The study defined spirituality broadly, including religious service attendance, private practices such as prayer or meditation, 12-step programs, and community-based practices.

Substance use disorders are shaped by genetic vulnerability, environmental exposure, developmental timing, psychiatric comorbidity, and social determinants of health. To identify a psychosocial factor that prospectively predicted a lower incidence of drug and alcohol addiction among varied populations in a variety of countries is highly significant. The protective role of spirituality is particularly salient in youth. Early initiation of alcohol or drug use is strongly associated with poor school and social development, higher addiction liability, higher severity, and worse long-term outcomes. If spiritual engagement delays initiation or reduces progression to hazardous patterns, even modest reductions could translate to substantial public health benefits.

While no one knows exactly how spirituality is so effective, possible mechanisms include social support embedded within religious communities, strong social norms favoring abstinence or moderation, internalized ethical systems that discourage intoxication, the power of prayer, and helping others, which provide meaning and purpose that lower reliance on substances for mood regulation. Emerging neuroscientific research suggests meditation, prayer, and other contemplative practices may influence neural circuits involved in stress regulation, reward processing, and interpersonal bonding, though this remains a field for further investigation.

Consistent With Other Research

These new results extend and reinforce an already-substantial body of work examining spiritually oriented mutual-help organizations, most prominently Alcoholics Anonymous and related 12-step programs. Although AA is often discussed primarily as a peer-support model, it is also grounded in spiritual principles, including reliance on a higher power as understood by the individual. Earlier meta-analyses of randomized trials examining 12-step facilitation have shown significant benefits compared with no treatment. But effect sizes have sometimes been comparable to those of other active treatments, such as cognitive-behavioral therapy. However, a 2020 Cochrane review of 27 studies concluded AA and 12-step facilitation were at least as effective as other established treatments and, in some analyses, superior in sustaining abstinence at 12 months.

Alcoholics Anonymous

In 2014, Kelly and Greene demonstrated increases in spirituality during AA participation partially mediated by improved alcohol outcomes. Gains in meaning, purpose, and connection to a higher power were associated with reductions in drinking, even after accounting for other factors. Importantly, spirituality in this context was linked to identifiable psychological processes, including augmented coping skills, reduced negative mood, improved self-regulation, and expanded recovery-supportive social networks. Kelly and Eddie later showed in a national U.S. sample that spirituality and religiosity were independently associated with a greater likelihood of recovery and remission from alcohol and other drugs. These studies provide an explanatory scaffold for the newest findings.

Sociocultural context also matters. Earlier work by Kaskutas and colleagues found differences in AA affiliation at treatment intake between Black and White Americans. Survey data indicated more than 1 in 2 African American respondents endorsed spirituality/religion as central to their recovery, compared with 1 in 4 White respondents.

In the past, I highlighted the language and culture of 12-step programs, emphasizing that sayings heard in AA and NA, such as “One day at a time,” are not simply slogans; they are behavioral micro-interventions. These phrases operationalize relapse prevention principles by reducing catastrophic thinking, thereby promoting better present-moment decision-making.

Recovery Capital

Recovery capital is the sum of internal and external resources supporting sustained remission, including organized religions, positive social networks, employment, housing stability, coping skills, and psychological health. Spiritual well-being is one dimension. Longitudinal cohort studies suggest that higher spiritual well-being predicts reductions in substance use frequency, particularly in early recovery.

Spirituality may strengthen resilience by fostering hope, reinforcing prosocial values, and providing supportive communities. In contrast to pharmacotherapies such as naltrexone or acamprosate, which target neurobiological reinforcement pathways, and psychotherapies such as cognitive-behavioral therapy, which target maladaptive cognitions and behaviors, spiritually mediated pathways operate in existential and relational realms. These domains address dimensions of suffering often underemphasized in clinical settings.

Early Intervention and Spirituality

Many individuals who drink heavily do not yet meet the criteria for alcohol use disorder. Screening and brief interventions in primary care can reduce risk and prevent progression. The new longitudinal data suggest spirituality and religious engagement may be ideal interventions during early use or before addiction is firmly entrenched. Whether using religious service attendance, meditation, self-help groups, or other spiritually oriented communities, individuals may access social and psychological supports and reduce the likelihood of transitioning from any use to addiction.

This new 2026 study does not suggest that physicians direct patients toward specific religious beliefs; instead, it highlights spirituality as a potentially protective factor that merits assessment. Asking patients whether spirituality or religion is important in their lives and whether it plays a role in coping can open the door to patient-centered discussions. For those already valuing spiritual engagement, encouragement to connect with supportive communities or practices may augment prevention or recovery efforts.

Substance use and addictions remains one of the largest public health challenges of our time. If spirituality is associated with even a modest reduction in use across multiple substances, collaborations between health systems and community spiritual organizations could expand prevention and recovery resources. Spirituality is a potentially protective factor meriting assessment.

Summary

The 2026 meta-analysis reported in JAMA Psychiatry offers rigorous longitudinal evidence that spiritual engagement correlates with a lower risk of drug or alcohol problems in people already experiencing such problems, as well as better outcomes in treatment and relapse prevention. This finding is consistent with decades of research on Alcoholics Anonymous outcomes, demonstrating that spirituality promotes recovery coping, identity transformation, social integration, and meaning-making.

SOURCE: https://www.psychologytoday.com/ca/blog/addiction-outlook/202602/aa-and-na-were-right-spirituality-decreases-addictions

by Shane Varcoe –  Feb 17, 2026

Every day in Australia, we lose nine people to suicide. The connection between substance use, mental health, and suicide is undeniable – trauma drives people to self-medicate, substance use deepens isolation and depression, and what starts as numbing pain can end in taking one’s life. Yet research shows us something remarkable: the vast majority of people contemplating suicide don’t actually want to die. They just want the suffering to stop. And that’s where intervention can change everything.

In this context, I spoke with Rob Nicholls and Jenny Nicholls, a couple whose personal journey through trauma and substance use has equipped them to train ordinary Australians to recognise the signs and save lives. Rob is an ASIST Trainer with Living Works, the world’s leading suicide prevention organisation, and Jenny is the author of Shattering Deception and Revealing Truth, a powerful memoir of her journey through childhood abuse, trauma, and the destructive coping mechanisms that followed.

Shattering Deceptions & Revealing Truth – Seeking a Healthy Out from Trauma – A Conversation with Suicide Preventionists

Jenny grew up in a home marked by her mother’s occult involvement, alcoholism, drug use and violence. Rob’s early years were shaped by party culture and alcohol as a social lubricant. Both understand firsthand how substance use becomes an escape from pain, how trauma creates patterns of self-medication, and how exclusion – whether through disability, mental illness, or addiction – increases suicide risk. The constant hypervigilance from Jenny’s childhood created patterns of anxiety that eventually led to her own suicide attempts.

Key Takeaways:

  • Most people thinking about suicide haven’t lost hope entirely – they’ve lost hope but hope there could be hope. That thin thread is what intervention can grab hold of.
  • Substance use and suicide share common roots – trauma, isolation, and pain drive both self-medication and self-harm. Addressing one requires addressing the other.
  • You don’t need to be an expert to save a life – Rob shares stories of barbers, neighbours, and strangers who simply noticed someone struggling and asked, “Are you okay?”
  • Desperation harnessed to hope is powerful – but desperation harnessed to hopelessness is devastating. Creating pathways to hope is essential.
  • Both the fence and the ambulance matter – prevention and intervention must work together. We can’t neglect either end of the crisis.

Shattering Deception and Revealing Truth by Jenny Nicholls shares her lived experience of childhood trauma, substance use, suicide struggles, and her journey toward healing and recovery.

Source: Shane Varcoe – Executive Director for the Dalgarno Institute

Forwarded by Maggie Petito (Drug watch International)

Article by London Telegraph – Sarah Newey –  Global health security correspondent – 17 February 2026

“Chinese triads, Mexican cartels and Australian biker gangs are all operating, even collaborating, in a “thriving criminal ecosystem” that exploits the region’s porous coastlines, weak law enforcement and widespread corruption. Yachts, narco-subs and drones have all been used across the network of air and maritime routes.”

Fiji’s spiralling health crisis is linked to an explosion in methamphetamine that threatens to turn the Pacific into a ‘semi-narco region’

Ben took his drugs ‘on the rocks’. Instead of diluting the methamphetamine with water, he’d draw blood into a syringe, dissolve the crystals, and inject himself. Sometimes it was his blood, sometimes a friend’s, and the needle was rarely new. That hardly seemed to matter.

It was 2021 and Ben, whose name has been changed, was living on the streets in Suva – Fiji’s faded seaside capital. Then 20, he’d fled his home after his father and five brothers tried to beat away his bisexuality. Crystal meth’s numbing high became an all-consuming escape from the painful memories. “I just felt like the love I was looking for was in the streets, it was not at home,” Ben, now a tall, measured 24-year-old, told the Telegraph. “I didn’t consider [safety] at all… I just continued taking [meth]. For me, when I took drugs, it transformed my mind – I was in another world altogether.”

But that world of euphoric highs and shared syringes left its mark long after Ben abandoned Suva’s shabby streets.

By late 2023, he had developed a persistent cough, his hair was falling out, and he was losing weight rapidly – dropping from a waist size 42 to just 22. When he was hospitalised with severe pneumonia, doctors diagnosed Ben with late-stage HIV, then transferred him to a ward notorious in Fiji as the place men go to die. “That’s how ill I was,” he said, sipping Coca-Cola on the seafront earlier this month. “Lying in that bed with no hope, everything seemed lost and fading.”

As recently as 2020, stories like this were relatively rare in Fiji, a former British colony best known as a paradise archipelago with pristine beaches and a vibrant culture. But now, the small Pacific nation has a grim new accolade: it is struggling to stem the world’s fastest growing HIV outbreak. “This is the ugly side of Fiji,” said Paulo, another of the five people living with HIV who spoke to the Telegraph in Suva – where children as young as 10 have contracted the virus from injecting drugs, as HIV rips through a country caught off guard.

According to data shared by the Ministry of Health, 147 people were newly diagnosed with the disease in 2020. Just four years later, that number had jumped to 1,583 – and in the first six months of 2025 alone, 1,226 cases were reported. Overall, infections have risen by 3,000 per cent since 2010.

While still a relatively small total compared to Fiji’s population – roughly 930,000 people – patchy testing means diagnosed cases are only the tip of the iceberg. And the trajectory of the outbreak looks ominous: the health department estimates that, without urgent interventions, the country could see 25,000 cases a year by 2029.

“I never thought I’d see another epidemic like this in my lifetime,” said Prof Lisa Maher, an epidemiologist at the Kirby Institute in Sydney, who worked on the HIV response in New York in the 1980s and later in southeast Asia, and is now supporting Fiji. “It came out of nowhere, because there was no data and no surveillance in place.”

‘A thriving criminal ecosystem’

The escalating crisis is linked to a boom in drugs that threatens to turn the Pacific into a “semi-narco region”, according to Associate Professor Jose Sousa-Santos, director of the Pacific Regional Security Hub at the University of Canterbury in New Zealand.

The region has long been a strategic stop-off point on a ‘drugs superhighway’ from the Americas and southeast Asia to Australia and New Zealand, where high demand and prices equate to lucrative profits. Yet the route’s popularity is increasing, with organised crime in the Pacific “evolving faster than any previous point in history”, according to a report from the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC).

Chinese triads, Mexican cartels and Australian biker gangs are all operating, even collaborating, in a “thriving criminal ecosystem” that exploits the region’s porous coastlines, weak law enforcement and widespread corruption. Yachts, narco-subs and drones have all been used across the network of air and maritime routes.

Alongside Tonga and Papua New Guinea, a key foothold is Fiji – the transport hub is dubbed the ‘gateway to the Pacific’, while four coups since 1987 have eroded democratic institutions and left them open to infiltration.

Recent seizures by the authorities, including 4.8 tonnes of crystal meth and 2.6 tonnes of cocaine, give a sense of the scale of drugs flowing through the archipelago. Police have also confirmed “wash-ups” of drug packages on outer islands – one story circulating suggests unaware locals in one remote village used the “white stuff” as washing powder after it swept ashore.

Yet the nation is no longer simply a stopover point for criminal syndicates: drugs, predominantly methamphetamines, are also spilling into a booming domestic market.

“A transit country doesn’t usually stay as a transit country,” said Megumi Hara, a regional advisor on transnational organised crime at UNODC, based in Suva. “Eventually, it also becomes a destination – and that’s what we’ve seen here.”

The Telegraph witnessed the thriving trade firsthand. As a deep orange sunset spread above Suva on a Sunday evening, two contacts (on the condition we didn’t name them or the places) took us on a “sightseeing tour” of the city’s many drug-dealer hang outs: behind a grey block of social housing, at a nondescript bus stop on a busy road, and a lush green village just outside town.

“This is one of the drug red zones in Fiji,” said one of our well-connected escorts, as the car spluttered up a steep hillside in the village, past a group of boys lurking under a palm tree. “Even the police are scared to come here… they can’t do anything because the drug lord is the landowner. His children, his brother, his brother’s son – they’re all selling drugs.”

When we paused outside a modest wooden house, a gaunt man in a hoodie immediately sauntered up to the car window – in one hand was a red burner phone, in the other six small sachets of crystal meth. The 28-year-old wasn’t there to talk – he scuttled away as soon as another car pulled up, hoping the driver of the white Toyota might make a better customer.

‘A runaway problem with meth’

The sheer volume now circulating on the archipelago is unprecedented. Although surveillance data on use remains limited, the number of cases involving meth reported by the Fiji Police Force jumped 36-fold between 2015 and 2024 – from just 10 arrests to 366.

“Fiji went from having a small number of users, to now having a runaway problem with methamphetamines,” said Prof Sousa-Santos, adding that the market was a deliberate construction.

When organised crime first operated in the Pacific, they developed a network of facilitators – usually people from commercial elites, or with links to law enforcement and government. These connections run deep – between January 2023 and October 2025, the Ministry of Policing said 27 police officers were charged with drug-related offences.

For a fee, corrupt facilitators would ensure the smooth passage of drug shipments through the country. But, as the quantity of drugs grew, criminal syndicates offered to pay in product instead of cash.

From there, local gangs emerged and became increasingly professionalised – by 2018 and 2019, the “white stuff” was not only on the streets but was starting to be sold on university campuses as “study aids”, and to elites as a sex drug. This trade only accelerated when the pandemic disrupted supply routes into and out of the country.

“If you get paid in the drugs, you have the opportunity to triple or quadruple your return,” said Prof Sousa-Santos. “But to do that, you need a local market. In Fiji, the first market that was targeted was sex workers. It grew and grew from there.”

Perched on the curbside of a dark road in east Suva as friends and customers come and go, a charismatic “drug lord” explains how this market operates on his turf.

Simon, whose name has been changed due to ongoing criminal cases, mainly sold and smoked marijuana but swapped the “green stuff” for the “white stuff” when meth started to hit the streets. The upbeat, 48-year-old reggae musician said he was dealing to “put food on the table” for his children, and make sure users had access to “high quality stuff”.

Now the market “has exploded”, Simon said, his eyes wide. Although he was vague about where he gets the meth he hawks from, there are two main distribution routes.

The first is to sell the substance to other “small-time pushers” at a wholesale price – $2,500 Fijian (£835) for seven grams. These dealers then split the meth into at least a dozen small sachets, generally containing 0.08g of crystals, which they peddle on the streets for $50 Fijian (£17) – effectively doubling their money.

Simon and his partners also employ people to work on their patch, running two four-hour shifts a night. Pushers are paid $50 per shift, during which they’d generally sell at least 14 bags of crystal meth – in Fiji, the national minimum wage is $5 per hour.

‘A bin fire became a bushfire’

But methamphetamines alone do not trigger an HIV crisis: the virus – which spreads through bodily fluids – has found fertile ground because of the way the drugs are being used. Widespread sharing of blood, needles and syringes has transformed a small, background epidemic spreading via unprotected sex into an explosive outbreak.

The shift emerged rapidly. In 2021, the country’s two main sexual health hubs in Suva and Lautoka did not report a single HIV case transmitted through drug use – by 2024, 48 per cent of new HIV infections nationally were among people injecting meth, according to UNAIDS.

“You had a lot of young people, very young people, initiating injecting with no context, no information, no awareness and no access to sterile equipment,” said the Kirby Institute’s Prof Maher, who led a Rapid Assessment on injecting drug use and HIV in Suva, commissioned by the UN and published last year. “A bin fire has become a bushfire.”

While sleeping rough on the seafront in 2021 and again in 2023, Ben engaged in many of the risky drug practices that fueled this “bushfire” – sometimes motivated by intrigue, sometimes culture, and sometimes necessity.

One trend at the time was “bluetoothing”, he said, where friends pooled money to buy a single bag of meth, before one person injected the drug. Once they were high, another person drew blood from the initial user and injected themselves, chasing a secondary rush from the traces of meth in the bloodstream. But while a cost-saving (and headline grabbing) concept, bluetoothing is now uncommon as users found it rarely worked.

Instead, some people have reported using blood, rather than water, as the solvent to dissolve methamphetamine. This involves inserting the needle into a vein and repeatedly “flushing” the plunger back and forth to draw enough blood into the syringe to dilute the crystals, before injecting the entire mixture.

“It gives a stronger high… it gives us a lot of energy,” said Ben, explaining the appeal. He still called this practice “bluetoothing”, but most drug users who spoke to the Telegraph and the Rapid Assessment team referred to the approach as “on the rocks”, “dry” or “koda” – a Fijian word which translates to “raw”, and a nod to a traditional raw fish dish called kokoda.

The rampant HIV transmission has also been driven by sharing of mixing paraphernalia – for instance, using the same bottle caps or mugs to dissolve the meth in water – as well as needles and syringes. In that instance, scarcity has partly been caused by a police crackdown based on a misinterpretation of the law.

“The police started coming down hard on pharmacies for selling needles and syringes to anyone wanting one,” said Renata Ram, the Pacific HIV adviser at UNAIDS in Fiji. “That’s when [the HIV] caseload started increasing as well, in late 2021 and 2022.

“If you really want a hit, you’ll find a way to get it – sharing needles was people’s only option,” she said, adding that selling sterile equipment was never actually illegal. “We’ve heard people saying they would share needles about 15 times, or use the same one 15 times.”

She added that stigma is high but knowledge around HIV is low, with a “whole generation” unaware of transmission risks. Some do not know that treatment exists, so see no reason to test, others diagnosed shun anti-retrovirals in favour of traditional Fijian medicines or prayer.

Meri – who, like Ben, asked for her name to be changed because of pervasive stigma in the conservative country – has seen the human cost of the syringe shortage more clearly than most. Within four months last year, she buried three of her closest friends; they were only 33, 42 and 44.

The group started buying methamphetamines just after the pandemic, when they were living on the streets in Lautoka – a city some 120 miles from the capital, on the western side of Fiji’s largest island.

Meri had long been a marijuana smoker, but had never tried the “white stuff” before. Soon the 55-year-old was hooked – she loved “the brightness” and besides, staying awake was useful for long shifts selling cigarettes (some nickname the meth here “mileage”, as it keeps you up for days). But the friends were rarely able to buy sterile equipment – while drugs were everywhere, clean needles and syringes were a luxury.

“They were hard to find, so nearly every time we just shared,” said Meri, sitting cross-legged on a woven mat in a small courtyard at the Survival Advocacy Network (SAN) in Suva. “We washed them, but sharing was kind of [a] necessity.”

Sesenieli Naitala, the founder of SAN, said sharing is also common as it’s hardwired into Fijian life through the custom of “kerekere”, which obliges people to share resources with close friends and relatives. People frequently pass a single cigarette or marijuana joint around a group, while kava – a traditional psychoactive drink – is shared in a single cup.

But in February 2024, Meri tested positive for HIV. She was scared and blamed herself, although she didn’t want to show it – Meri, who wears a cap over her bleach blond pixie cut, attempts an air of nonchalance. She immediately phoned her friends, who still lived on the streets – none of them had considered the risk of blood-borne infections until then.

By the time they were tested, the virus had progressed to Aids. They received treatment, but didn’t stop taking drugs or drinking alcohol and gradually their immune systems faltered. Meri said a final goodbye to two of them in July, and one in October.

“[When I buried them] I was thinking about myself, that I had to change and just leave it behind for good. Because I know if I [keep using] too… it’ll be the same as what my friends went through,” she said softly. “It’s a hard thing to stop [taking meth]… but I had to think of my life.”

‘The epidemic changed, the response did not’

It is now more than a year since the Ministry of Health declared a national HIV outbreak and set up a dedicated taskforce to respond, putting Dr Jason Mitchell, a Fijian doctor who’s worked on HIV across southeast Asia and the Pacific, at the helm.

“The way I describe what’s happened here in Fiji is that the epidemic changed, but programming in response to the epidemic did not,” he said. “So our responsibility here in this unit… is to set up an appropriate response for the new epidemic we’re facing.”

The government unlocked $10 million Fijian (£3m) to do so – up from a budget of $200,000 a year – while international support has ramped up, including £1.7m from New Zealand and £2.6m from Australia, who have also invested £25m in a broader Pacific-wide programme. These countries are also supporting law enforcement operations to counter the flow of drugs into Fiji.

But with key elements of the health response beset by delays, critics say the glacial pace is only giving the virus more time to spread, amplifying the “tsunami of infections” they fear is on the horizon. There are also concerns that punitive attitudes and moral framing of drug use is a continued barrier.

There is still no needle and syringe exchange programme, no pre-exposure prophylaxis (PrEP) available, and no rehab centre. There are also major gaps in testing and treatment. UNAIDS estimates that just 36 per cent of people living with HIV in Fiji were aware of their status in 2024, and only 24 per cent were taking antiretrovirals (there have also been sporadic stockouts of the treatment).

Meanwhile the virus is seeping into new groups: in the first half of 2025, 33 babies were born with HIV, signalling broader weaknesses in the health system.

Dr Mitchell conceded that progress has been slower than hoped, and is clearly frustrated by elements of government bureaucracy.

“The outbreak is so large now that it has the potential to impact the country as a whole, the economy and all of the industries that we rely on – such as tourism, which [is where] 40 per cent of our GDP comes from,” the 47-year-old said animatedly, warning there are also signs HIV is starting to spread to other Pacific island nations.

“So it is an emergency. The most frustrating thing is [that] during Covid… things just happened overnight, approvals just happened, finances just flowed, all of that was fast tracked. That has not happened for the HIV response… Why? It’s a question I can’t actually answer.”

But despite red tape, Dr Mitchell stressed there has been major progress behind the scenes to re-build the capacity, expertise and systems needed to respond (while Fiji once had a robust programme to keep HIV at bay, it was gradually sidelined as cases remained low, new health threats emerged and donor funding for HIV was diverted elsewhere).

He is also optimistic that the much needed needle and syringe programme will launch in the second quarter of the year, once the supplies arrive in March, and hopes PrEP will become available for high risk groups within six months.

In the meantime, 11 new HIV care teams have been established at hospitals across the country, free condom pick-up points have been rolled out, and peer-to-peer education programmes are targeting those most at-risk – including the Angels Collective, a group of drug users who are hitting the streets to teach others about safe injecting practices and HIV.

‘We don’t know what Fiji’s future holds’

For Dr Kesaia Tuidraki, director of Medical Services Pacific, some of the most important programmes are those taking services directly to communities at risk – whether that’s in the Suva’s suburbs or a remote island three days away by boat, where cases are also emerging.

“If you want to reach people you have to go to where they are, because accessibility has always been an issue,” she said, in an office overlooking the capital’s busy port at the NGO’s modest hillside clinic. “Economical issues, unemployment, challenging backgrounds, geographic isolation, stigma – all these things are stopping people from coming forward.

“This means we’re only seeing the tip of the iceberg, there are a lot more [cases] going unnoticed,” she said, adding that many people only test positive once their infection has deteriorated into Aids. According to government data, more than half of the people who died of HIV-related causes in 2024 found out their status the same year.

And so, as evening rush hour traffic eased, a bus kitted out as a mobile clinic set off to a housing project in the densely populated Suva-Nausori corridor. This is the Moonlight programme, which is trying to stem the glaring testing gap that’s hindering the response.

Within half an hour of arriving, a long queue has formed and HIV, hepatitis and syphilis screening gets underway. Outside the bus, health care workers under a bright hanging torch ask preliminary questions, then prick people’s index fingers and transfer the blood to a rapid test. Some 15 minutes later, results are delivered in private inside the compact mobile clinic.

“Well, we caught some tigers,” Vilisi Uluinaceva, the nurse practitioner, said at the end of a long night. Two of 50 tests came back positive – samples will now be sent to the hospital lab for confirmation, and the patients referred to the main clinic for treatment.

That number is lower than previous screenings – at one, mainly among sex workers, 19 of 25 tests came back positive. But the team is pleased so many young people turned up, as cases in this group are surging: in the first half of 2025 alone, 174 children and teenagers aged between five and 19 were diagnosed nationally. Mrs Uluinaceva has treated patients as young as 13.

“We just have to create more awareness on this issue, because if all these children are going to have HIV, there’ll be no future for Fiji,” she said, holding back tears. “Of course I worry and sometimes I’m really emotional – we just don’t know what the future holds.”

But for Ben, the future finally feels exciting again – he’s found a job and a flat share, and is considering re-enrolling at university. It’s a far cry from the weeks after his diagnosis, when the loneliness felt crushing and thoughts of suicide dominated his mind.

“I have come to understand that HIV is just a sickness like any other,” he said, adding that he has been taking antiretroviral treatment for more than 18 months. “We can all be diagnosed with different illnesses, but what matters is how we accept our condition and maintain a positive mindset.”

Walking through the shallow waters less than two miles from the seawall where he used to sleep rough, Ben also shared uplifting news: last week he found out that, for the first time, his HIV viral load is so low it’s undetectable, thanks to the anti-retrovirals. It doesn’t mean the virus has gone, but it means Ben’s condition is stable and he can no longer pass HIV onto someone else. “Here I am today, just living my life like any other normal person,” he said, beaming.

Source: Maggie Petito – Drug watch International

__

News Release 

by Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health

Key points:

  • Broad spiritual practices, ranging from attending religious services to meditation to prayer, were associated with a 13% reduced risk of hazardous drug and alcohol use, according to a meta-analysis. The greatest reduction (18%) was seen among individuals attending religious services at least once per week.
  • The meta-analysis is the first of its kind to synthesize and comprehensively estimate how dangerous substance use is impacted over time by spirituality.
  • According to the researchers, the findings carry potential for individuals who find spirituality important in other aspects of their lives to also use it as a resource in their relationship with drugs and alcohol. Clinicians and communities can also use these findings to consider broader strategies for addiction prevention and care.

Boston, MA—Individuals who engaged in spirituality were significantly less likely to exhibit hazardous use of alcohol, tobacco, marijuana, and illicit drugs, according to a new meta-analysis led by researchers at Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health. The meta-analysis is the first of its kind to synthesize and comprehensively estimate associations between harmful or hazardous substance use and spirituality—considered any practice, religious or otherwise, through which an individual finds ultimate meaning, purpose, and connection to something greater than themselves. 

“Our findings indicate that spirituality may be protective against substance misuse, one of the biggest public health challenges of our time,” said lead author Howard Koh, Harvey V. Fineberg Professor of the Practice of Public Health Leadership. “For many individuals and families, using spirituality as a resource—whether that be attending religious services, meditating, praying, or seeking others forms of spiritual comfort—may be an avenue to enhance their health.”

The study will be published Feb. 18, 2026, in JAMA Psychiatry.

Of more than 20,000 spirituality and health studies published in the 21st century (2000-2022), the researchers identified 55 that fit their criteria for rigor, including large cohorts and longitudinal design. They analyzed the results of these studies, which collectively followed more than half a million people over time, to understand the overall relationship between spirituality and alcohol and drug use.

The meta-analysis found that broad spiritual practices, including spiritual and religious community involvement, attending religious services, meditation, and prayer, reduced individuals’ risk of dangerous alcohol and drug use by 13%. This reduction was greater (18%) among individuals attending religious services at least once per week. The results were consistent across all of the drug categories studied (alcohol, tobacco, marijuana, and illicit drugs).

“Meta-analyses of such longitudinal studies on spirituality and health are rare. This is a sort of once-in-a-decade advance,” said senior author Tyler VanderWeele, John L. Loeb and Frances Lehman Loeb Professor of Epidemiology. “The consistency of the results across all the studies was striking, with all but a few—including over a dozen studies conducted outside of the U.S.—showing a protective, not detrimental, effect.” 

According to the researchers, the findings carry potential not just for individuals, but also for clinicians caring for patients at risk of or struggling with substance misuse and communities working to address substance misuse epidemics.

For example, the researchers wrote that clinicians could ask patients about the role of spirituality in their lives and prompt those who find it important to consider spiritual practices or community participation. Moreover, public health organizations and spiritual or religious communities could join forces to provide more resources and opportunities that help address the factors often driving substance misuse, such as stress, loneliness, and loss of meaning.

Article information

“Spirituality and harmful or hazardous alcohol and other drug use: A meta-analysis of longitudinal studies,” Howard K. Koh, Donald E. Frederick, Tracy A. Balboni, Samantha M. O’Reilly, John F. Kelly, Keith Humphreys, Michael Botticelli, Maya B. Mathur, Constantine S. Psimopoulos, Katelyn N.G. Long, Tyler J. VanderWeele, JAMA Psychiatry, February 18, 2025, doi: 10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2025.4816

The study was supported by the Templeton Religion Trust (grant 2022-30967) and the Lee Family Fund.

Source: https://www.eurekalert.org/news-releases/1116640

Submitted by Dave Evans via Drug Watch International – 12 February 2026

If America’s pot problem is becoming so evident that even the legacy media is pumping the brakes, how bad is it?

By  Zach Jewell – DailyWire.com – Feb 11, 2026   

The New York Times editorial board expressed concern this week that the massive marijuana craze in America might have some major side effects — besides drowsiness and the munchies.

The Times editorial board, which dedicated a series of articles to pushing for marijuana legalization over 10 years ago, admitted on Monday that some of its arguments for legalized weed have been proven wrong after states began allowing recreational and medicinal marijuana use. It seems that many talking points from the pro-marijuana legalization side are falling apart as research uncovers some brutal truths about America’s pot craze.

“In our editorials, we described marijuana addiction and dependence as ‘relatively minor problems.’ Many advocates went further and claimed that marijuana was a harmless drug that might even bring net health benefits. They also said that legalization might not lead to greater use,” the Times editorial board wrote. “It is now clear that many of these predictions were wrong. Legalization has led to much more use. Surveys suggest that about 18 million people in the United States have used marijuana almost daily (or about five times a week) in recent years. That was up from around six million in 2012 and less than one million in 1992. More Americans now use marijuana daily than alcohol.”

Later, the editorial board added, “The unfortunate truth is that the loosening of marijuana policies — especially the decision to legalize pot without adequately regulating it — has led to worse outcomes than many Americans expected. It is time to acknowledge reality and change course.”

It’s rare for the Times to admit to so clearly pushing a narrative that turned out to be wrong. So, if America’s pot problem is becoming so evident that even the legacy media is pumping the brakes, how bad is it?

Addiction and other health issues stemming from marijuana use have spiked in the past decade as more states hopped on the pot bandwagon. As the Times pointed out, a large percentage of marijuana users aren’t just smoking a joint or two on the weekend; they’re consuming marijuana on a daily basis. According to research from Yale Medicine, a staggering 30% of cannabis users “meet the criteria for addiction.”

This heavy reliance on marijuana comes with multiple potential health risks, including cannabinoid hyperemesis syndrome, which gives users intense stomach pain and can cause vomiting. At least one recent study has also linked cannabis use to schizophrenia. The study, published in “Psychological Medicine,” found that up to 30% of schizophrenia cases in young men can be linked to cannabis use disorder.

A study conducted by UC San Diego School of Medicine and the New York University Grossman School of Medicine, meanwhile, found that employees who use cannabis regularly were more likely to miss work.

The advocacy group Smart Approaches to Marijuana has also pointed to research showing that driving fatalities involving marijuana skyrocketed between 2000 and 2018. Kevin Sabet, the president and CEO of Smart Approaches to Marijuana, told The Daily Wire that legalization leading to Increases in addiction was “absolutely predictable.”

Despite the promises of the legalizers, federal data show that (just as the Times notes) legalization drives use, including youth use increases,” Sabet said. “This is true in the national aggregate and in individual state data. It’s not rocket science: If you make a powerful addictive drug easier to access (and send the signal that it’s OK to use in the process), more people are going to use it. That is what I and many other people who were aware of the danger warned would happen and it is precisely what did happen.”

Now that nearly half the country has legalized marijuana in some or all forms, Sabet said the best path forward is for “states to focus on making sure that people, and above all young people, know how dangerous and destructive marijuana is: a permanent investment in infrastructure meant to promote prevention and awareness.”

“And it’s beyond important to remember here what the Times piece truly reveals,” he added. “Namely, that while people may disagree about policies and execution, they are now all agreed on the same set of facts. And those facts show beyond doubt that marijuana is dangerous, addictive, and creating havoc across America.”

The data pointing to some of these issues was available when the Times editorial board began publishing its series arguing for federal legalization. In a 2014 paper, researchers Hefei Wen, Jason M. Hockenberry, and Janet R. Cummings found that marijuana legalization led to an increase in marijuana abuse and dependence. The 2014 paper also found that as legalization surged, so did the rate at which adolescents experimented with the drug.

Ironically, the Times editorial board’s shift on marijuana coincides with the federal government in the process of reforming how it regulates the drug. In December, President Donald Trump signed an order to open the door to reclassifying marijuana as a Schedule III drug, meaning marijuana would be in the same category as drugs that have “a moderate to low potential for physical and psychological dependence.” For decades, the U.S. government has categorized marijuana as a Schedule I substance, which is defined as “no currently accepted medical use and a high potential for abuse.”

The U.S. government’s potential reclassification would not legalize marijuana at the federal level, but it could reduce the scale of marijuana-related offenses. As the president was considering the marijuana reclassification last year, nearly 50 organizations signed a letter urging Trump to keep marijuana classified as a Schedule I drug, arguing that marijuana “fits squarely” in the definition of a Schedule I drug, “a fact acknowledged in every scheduling review prior to 2023.”

Source: www.drugwatch.org

10 Feb 2026 | By Benjamin Ferrer

by WRD News Team February 6, 2026          

 

Between 1980 and now, something fundamental has shifted in how we approach drugs, and understanding this transformation requires examining the historical record with clear eyes. Peter Stoker’s peer-reviewed paper, published in The Journal of Global Drug Policy and Practice in 2007, and very recently merged from a three-part in the Journal version into a single document, republished in the NDPA Website, traces the harm reduction history that changed everything, and his analysis, backed by over 250 references, makes for profoundly uncomfortable reading.

Back in 1980, America had just pulled off something remarkable in public health terms. Through coordinated prevention efforts involving parent groups and community organisations, drug use had dropped by 60%, with approximately thirteen million people stopping entirely. Parent groups had mobilised thousands of families around clear messaging that worked precisely because it was straightforward and uncompromising.

Today we’re told that same approach is not only outdated but fundamentally impossible to replicate. Prevention doesn’t work, the contemporary consensus insists, and the only realistic option is managing drug use rather than preventing it. Schools now teach children how to use drugs “more safely” instead of why they shouldn’t use them at all, representing a philosophical shift so profound that many who lived through both eras struggle to explain how it happened.

So what changed between then and now, and more importantly, how did such a dramatic reversal occur in barely more than a generation?

When Prevention Actually Worked

The 1970s were extraordinarily rough for American communities grappling with escalating drug use across virtually all demographic groups. By 1979, one in three teenagers had tried illegal drugs, whilst among high school seniors the figure approached an alarming two in three. Parents watched their children getting swept up in drug culture and recognised that something fundamental had to give.

Groups like the National Federation of Parents for Drug-Free Youth and PRIDE refused to accept this trajectory as inevitable or irreversible. They developed coordinated responses centred on three straightforward goals: stop kids starting, help users quit, and ensure treatment was available for those who genuinely needed it.

The results, documented across multiple independent studies, speak powerfully to the effectiveness of well-implemented prevention. Between 1980 and 1992, overall drug use fell 60%, representing one of the most successful public health interventions in modern American history. This wasn’t achieved through complex interventions or expensive pharmaceutical solutions, but through clear messaging and communities working together around shared values.

Then, almost imperceptibly at first but with gathering momentum, the tide began turning in a different direction entirely.

Liverpool’s Place in Harm Reduction History

Liverpool in the 1980s was struggling with profound challenges that had been building for years. The Toxteth riots of 1981 had left deep psychological and economic wounds, leaving the city angry, economically battered, and desperately searching for new answers to seemingly intractable problems.

A group of activists saw an opportunity to advance a radically different approach. Peter McDermott, now an editor at the International Journal on Drug Policy, later admitted with remarkable candour what they’d really been pursuing. The goal, in his own words, was to “signify a break with the philosophy that placed a premium on seeking to achieve abstinence,” and this moment would prove absolutely pivotal in harm reduction history.

What happened next is profoundly telling about the unintended consequences that emerge when ideology drives policy ahead of careful evaluation. Liverpool’s heroin users had historically smoked their drugs, a pattern that carried risks but avoided the particular harms of injection. After new programmes started handing out unlimited needles, the city shifted dramatically towards majority injecting use, and Hepatitis C rates climbed sharply during the same period.

A Liverpool mother whose two children battled heroin addiction told Stoker what she saw firsthand. Workers gave out needles “by the bag full,” and they even supplied known drug dealers who’d been promised they wouldn’t be arrested if caught carrying equipment.

The question nobody seemed willing to ask, or perhaps didn’t want to face honestly, was whether this represented genuine public health intervention or something else entirely.

Following the Money

George Soros, operating through various philanthropic entities under his control, had spent over $90 million by 1997 specifically pushing for fundamental changes in drug law and policy. Current estimates, based on tracking available records, put the cumulative total somewhere closer to $200 million invested over subsequent years in supporting liberalisation efforts.

That substantial financial backing funded major advocacy organisations including the Drug Policy Alliance, the Lindesmith Institute, and countless international conferences that shaped policy discourse globally. The money paid for glossy publications reaching policymakers, sustained media campaigns influencing public perception, and full-time lobbyists who could dedicate themselves entirely to advancing liberalisation agendas.

Prevention groups, by stark contrast, operated almost entirely on modest donations and small grants, and the financial mismatch was absolutely crushing in its practical effects on policy influence.

When you can afford international conferences bringing together hundreds of policymakers, employ professional PR firms that understand media dynamics, and fund sympathetic academic research whilst your opponents scrape by on volunteer hours, the playing field isn’t merely uneven. It’s tilted at such an extreme angle that meaningful competition becomes virtually impossible.

How Harm Reduction History Shaped Education

England and Wales had approximately 100 drug education coordinators serving 50 million people during the 1980s, which isn’t a particularly large number to convince if you’re attempting to shift fundamental policy direction. Focused advocacy groups recognised this vulnerability and exploited it systematically.

By the 1990s, British schools were incorporating materials suggesting “drug use is fun” and encouraging students to explore “the benefits of drug taking” without corresponding emphasis on risks. One widely distributed curriculum posed the question: “If adults drink alcohol why should I not take Ecstasy?” without providing any framework for evaluating the obvious differences in legal status, risk profiles, and social consequences.

Australia went considerably further, making these approaches mandatory components of school-based education across entire state systems.

The philosophical groundwork had been carefully laid over preceding decades through broader changes in educational theory. Carl Rogers had developed “values clarification” with the worthy intention of helping students discover values that would serve their development and communities. In practice, however, it morphed into something quite different, as external moral guidance came to be characterised as “anti-democratic” imposition. The new orthodoxy insisted that children should work out their own values largely independently, without what was dismissively termed “interference” from adults.

Rogers himself, watching how his concepts were being implemented and recognising troubling outcomes, later expressed profound reservations. He referred to what his work had enabled as “this damned thing” and questioned publicly whether he’d unwittingly initiated something “fundamentally mistaken.”

By the time Rogers voiced these concerns, however, the educational approaches his work inspired had already achieved such widespread implementation that reversing course would have required acknowledging systemic failure on a scale that bureaucracies rarely prove willing to contemplate.

What the Research Actually Shows

Needle exchange programmes consistently get presented as obvious public health victories, yet the accumulated research tells a considerably more complicated and often quite troubling story.

In Vancouver, HIV rates amongst participants jumped from 2% in 1988 to 23% in subsequent measurements. The city now holds the unfortunate distinction of Canada’s highest overdose death rate, and more than a quarter of participants continue sharing needles despite regular access to sterile equipment.

Montreal found participants had a 33% probability of HIV infection, whilst comparable non-participants showed only 13% probability, raising serious questions about whether participation might actually increase risk.

In India, baseline measurements before programme implementation showed HIV prevalence of 1%, Hepatitis B of 8%, and Hepatitis C of 17%. Following several years of operation, these figures had risen to 2%, 18%, and a truly alarming 66% respectively.

Analysis of 131 American programmes found that of nearly 20 million needles distributed, over 7 million were never returned, leading researchers to characterise many initiatives not as genuine exchanges but as distribution programmes.

Meanwhile, rigorous studies indicated that standard addiction treatment focused on reducing or stopping injection provided substantially superior protection against HIV and Hepatitis C compared to needle programmes operating without treatment components. This finding, however, doesn’t fit comfortably within the preferred narrative and consequently receives minimal attention.

Sweden’s Different Path

Sweden’s experience provides particularly instructive contrast. Following experimentation with permissive policies after World War II and evaluation revealing unfavourable outcomes, Sweden implemented comprehensive prevention-focused strategies as national policy.

The measurable results demonstrate what’s possible when commitment remains consistent over extended periods. Sweden maintains Europe’s lowest substance use rates across virtually all categories and age groups, a remarkable achievement sustained over several decades. Treatment centres operating both voluntary and court-mandated programmes achieve comparable success rates, suggesting quality matters more than admission pathway. Education systematically prioritises preventing initiation rather than teaching “safer” consumption methods.

The Swedish experience demonstrates conclusively that prevention can achieve substantial results when adequately resourced, systematically implemented, and sustained through consistent policy commitment over the time periods required for cultural change to take root.

The Power of Words

Language plays an extraordinarily significant role in shaping how different policy approaches are perceived by stakeholders, from policymakers to the general public. Certain terminology choices have proven remarkably influential precisely because the terms themselves carry implicit assumptions that bypass critical evaluation.

The term “soft drugs” implies substantially reduced harm potential, creating categorical distinctions that research doesn’t necessarily support. “Recreational use” frames consumption within normative leisure contexts, stripping away the reality that we’re discussing powerful psychoactive substances with genuine addiction potential. “Medical use,” when applied to smoking unprocessed plant material rather than tested pharmaceutical preparations, deliberately borrows credibility from established medical practice.

Perhaps the cleverest rhetorical trick has been characterising prevention as “prohibition,” a term that deliberately evokes 1920s American alcohol policy. The word triggers immediate images of gangsters and policy failure, despite substantial historical evidence that actual prohibition achieved measurable public health improvements.

Historical analysis by Robert Peterson demonstrates that prohibition outcomes contradicted common perceptions. Cirrhosis mortality decreased by over a third, alcohol-related psychosis declined markedly, and contrary to widespread belief, murder rates rose far more slowly during prohibition than before or after.

These facts receive minimal attention in contemporary discourse, strongly suggesting that terminology choices serve rhetorical rather than analytical functions, designed to trigger emotional responses rather than encourage careful evidence evaluation.

What Users Actually Want

Professor Neil McKeganey at Glasgow University’s Centre for Drug Misuse Research did something that should be standard practice but apparently represented something quite radical. He systematically surveyed substantial cohorts of drug-dependent individuals, directly asking what services they actually wanted.

The findings revealed patterns that fundamentally contradicted prevailing assumptions underlying current service delivery. The overwhelming majority didn’t request expanded needle programmes or indefinite methadone prescriptions. Instead, they expressed clear desire for clinical assistance in achieving complete cessation and sustained recovery, essentially asking for help to stop entirely rather than support for continued use under marginally safer conditions.

This peer-reviewed finding, published in respected journals and subjected to standard methodological scrutiny, contradicts the entire philosophical rationale underlying approaches focused on managing ongoing use. The research demonstrates that when you actually ask users what they want, they articulate goals aligning much more closely with prevention and treatment than with harm reduction philosophies. These findings, however, have received remarkably limited attention in subsequent policy development and funding decisions.

Europe’s Funding Games

The European Union formally maintains that drug policy falls outside its competence and remains under member state authority through subsidiarity principles. In practical operation, however, the EU exercises considerable influence through strategic funding decisions, policy recommendations carrying significant political weight, and coordination mechanisms shaping national development.

Former Swedish MEP MaLou Lindholm systematically documented troubling patterns in how these mechanisms operate. The European Cities on Drug Policy, representing approximately 30 cities favouring liberalisation, received substantial EU funding sustained over multiple years. Meanwhile, the European Cities Against Drugs, representing over 250 cities supporting UN conventions and prevention strategies, received outright rejections on multiple applications despite membership nearly ten times larger.

The Italian Radical Party, focused explicitly on drug liberalisation advocacy, maintains permanent office space within the EU Parliament building itself. The organisation utilises Parliament telecommunications, internet, and facilities, all taxpayer-funded, to lobby elected officials who often lack detailed policy knowledge.

Analysis suggests most elected representatives possess remarkably limited knowledge of harm reduction history and policy evidence, potentially increasing susceptibility to focused lobbying from well-resourced organisations that can afford professional staff dedicated entirely to influencing legislative processes. Most politicians know almost nothing substantive beyond simplified talking points provided by whichever advocacy groups reach them first.

The Evidence Double Standard

For decades, advocates attacked prevention for supposedly lacking sufficient evidence and failing to demonstrate effectiveness through rigorous evaluation. Demanding evidence-based policy certainly represents legitimate practice, and holding prevention to high standards is entirely appropriate.

What makes this problematic is the glaring double standard in how evidentiary demands get applied depending on which approach is under scrutiny. Anna Bradley, former Director of Britain’s Institute for the Study of Drug Dependence, acknowledged publicly in the late 1990s that “there is no research base for harm reduction,” essentially admitting that programmes promoted as evidence-based alternatives lacked the systematic evaluation their advocates demanded from prevention.

Stoker personally observed a 1988 presentation by Alan Parry, a Liverpool activist, who forcefully demanded rigorous proof from prevention programmes whilst simultaneously acknowledging his own programmes had no evaluation protocols due to “limited funding.” Assessment relied on subjective impressions that approaches appeared “working well.”

This differential standard continues characterising policy discourse in ways seriously undermining claims that contemporary drug policy is genuinely evidence-based. Prevention faces relentless demands for rigorous trials and demonstrated effectiveness, whilst approaches managing active use operate with substantially reduced scrutiny and minimal evaluation requirements.

Why Opposition Got Crushed

The massive resource differential created constraints so severe that fair debate on policy merits became virtually impossible. Well-funded liberalisation groups, backed by hundreds of millions, maintained capacity for activities prevention groups could barely imagine.

They organised international conferences attracting hundreds of participants, providing networking and coordinated messaging shaping global discourse. They afforded professional publication and distribution through established channels. They employed full-time staff and structured lobbying operations developing long-term policymaker relationships. They ran sustained media campaigns across multiple platforms. They funded research programmes and academic positions generating ostensibly independent scholarship supporting preferred directions.

Prevention organisations, operating primarily through volunteer contributions and modest grants, simply couldn’t compete effectively. When prevention advocates secured media attention, they frequently received characterisation as punitive and moralistic. Liberalisation advocates, meanwhile, benefited from portrayal as compassionate, evidence-based, and appropriately pragmatic.

These treatment patterns both reflected and substantially reinforced underlying disparities, creating self-reinforcing cycles where funding advantages translated into media advantages which further entrenched funding advantages through enhanced credibility.

The Cultural Shift Behind Harm Reduction History

Understanding harm reduction history comprehensively requires considering much broader cultural transformations occurring simultaneously. Substance use behaviours don’t occur in isolation but are substantially shaped by prevailing cultural environments and normative frameworks.

From the 1960s onwards, individual rights received progressively increasing prioritisation over community responsibility and collective wellbeing. Traditional authority figures experienced progressive reduction in societal influence. Non-judgementalism became increasingly elevated as paramount virtue, to the point where making moral distinctions between choices became culturally problematic.

Values-based education underwent substantial transformation towards pure individualism. Young people received consistent messaging that external moral guidance constituted “anti-democratic” imposition inappropriate in pluralistic societies. They were systematically encouraged to develop autonomous values without reference to adult perspectives or accumulated cultural wisdom.

Family structures underwent profound changes including dramatically increased divorce rates and single-parent households. Community bonds providing support networks and shared identity weakened substantially as people moved more frequently and participated less in traditional institutions. Materialistic values and immediate gratification became increasingly dominant. Self-focused outlooks progressively superseded concern for collective wellbeing.

Into this comprehensively transformed environment, creating what might be characterised as a moral vacuum, came messaging suggesting drug use represented merely another legitimate lifestyle choice. The message insisted it required professional management rather than moral evaluation or prevention efforts, fitting perfectly within broader currents elevating individual choice whilst dismissing traditional frameworks as outdated.

Drug policy didn’t change in isolation but was intimately connected to cultural shifts creating the environment where harm reduction history could unfold precisely as it did.

Where Things Stand

British drug education reflects substantial influence from approaches systematically prioritising managing use over preventing initiation. DrugScope, receiving up to £3 million annually in government funding, has consistently promoted these approaches whilst prevention perspectives receive substantially marginalised treatment in policy forums and funding decisions.

The Drug Education Forum and Drug Education Practitioners Forum, influential bodies shaping practice across thousands of schools, have been substantially influenced over extended periods by individuals known for publicly opposing prevention priority. Schools consequently receive official guidance tending systematically to undermine clear anti-drug messaging in favour of approaches focused on purported harm reduction.

Australia implemented similar approaches as mandatory national policy several years prior, whilst Canada systematically redirected substantial prevention funding towards programmes serving active users rather than preventing initiation. Across European jurisdictions, prevention organisations face persistent resource constraints whilst liberalisation advocacy receives substantial EU funding.

Nevertheless, recent developments suggest potential for significant reassessment. McKeganey’s research on user preferences created evident discomfort amongst groups claiming to represent user interests authentically. Sweden’s sustained success maintaining remarkably low rates through consistent prevention remains extremely difficult to dismiss. Some former advocates, speaking privately, have begun acknowledging limitations and disappointing outcomes of current approaches, though such admissions rarely translate into policy reversals.

What Harm Reduction History Teaches Us

Stoker’s analysis, drawing systematically on over 250 references spanning decades across numerous jurisdictions, establishes several key evidence-based conclusions deserving serious consideration.

Prevention demonstrates measurable effectiveness when adequately implemented and sustained over sufficient time periods. America’s dramatic 60% reduction during the 1980s provides powerful evidence that prevention works at population scale when communities mobilise around clear messaging. Sweden’s sustained low rates maintained consistently across decades offer additional compelling confirmation.

Current approaches focused predominantly on managing active use whilst neglecting prevention have produced disappointing outcomes across multiple domains. These approaches have demonstrably failed to align with stated user preferences, whom research indicates primarily desire complete cessation rather than indefinite management. They’ve failed families experiencing profound disruption from member addiction. They’ve failed communities experiencing elevated drug-related crime and social disorder.

The substantial financial advantage enjoyed by liberalisation organisations, sustained through foundation funding counted in hundreds of millions, requires explicit acknowledgement and strategic response if prevention voices are to receive fair hearing. Without comparable resources enabling professional operations and sustained engagement, prevention groups will continue facing persistent structural disadvantages.

Media treatment patterns systematically favouring liberalisation require critical examination and direct challenge. The assumption that liberalisation automatically represents compassionate pragmatism whilst prevention represents punitive moralising fundamentally lacks empirical foundation. Genuine compassion would logically prioritise preventing harmful initiation over managing consequences of initiated use.

Educational approaches require systematic reorientation towards messaging clearly communicating evidence-based realities: drugs present genuine health risks, initiation is demonstrably preventable, and young people deserve meaningful protection from exploitation and misguided frameworks normalising harmful behaviours.

Fundamentally, broader cultural renewal merits serious consideration. Shared values, despite contemporary dismissal as outdated, serve crucial protective functions. Community bonds provide essential support structures and accountability mechanisms. Clear guidance from caring adults serves essential protective functions during developmental periods when young people establish lifelong patterns.

Young people benefit substantially from learning that certain choices produce demonstrably better outcomes, not through judgementalism but from genuine concern for their wellbeing and ability to build lives worth living.

The Bottom Line

Stoker’s analysis reveals a well-funded, strategically sophisticated campaign that transformed drug policy over four decades. This transformation wasn’t driven by evidence or user preferences. Research shows users want help to quit, not indefinite management of continued use.

Instead, the shift was driven by ideological commitments backed by unprecedented funding from philanthropic sources, promoted through captured institutions, and facilitated by sympathetic media.

The consequences are troubling. Millions of lives have been negatively impacted by substance use that prevention might have forestalled. Families have been torn apart. Communities struggle with drug-related crime and social disorder. Billions have been allocated to approaches producing limited results whilst prevention remains underfunded.

But it’s not predetermined. Sweden proves prevention works when properly resourced. McKeganey’s research shows academic questioning is emerging. Parent organisations are growing.

The question is whether sufficient will exists to learn from harm reduction history’s lessons. Prevention produces results when adequately funded. Alternative approaches have proven expensive whilst producing disappointing outcomes, despite compassionate rhetoric.

The evidence points towards clear conclusions for anyone genuinely committed to reducing harm.

 

Source: www.wrdnews.org

 Two articles submitted by Maggie Petito – Drug Watch International – 03 February 2026

FIRST ARTICLE: 

Organised crime strikes gold in the Amazon region –  from Diálogo Americas – Southern Command – January 30, 2026             

Organized crime has become a dominant force in the Amazon region, especially in border towns, the Amazon Underworld platform, which specializes in cross-border crime, indicated in a recent report. The report highlights the alarming expansion of transnational criminal organizations (TCOs) into the Amazon’s fragile ecosystem, confirming the region is increasingly becoming a strategic refuge and operational hub for these groups.

According to the study, at least 67 percent of a total of 987 Amazonian municipalities across six major countries (Bolivia, Brazil, Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, and Venezuela) face the presence of criminal networks and armed groups. These TCOs are diverse and highly influential. They include major regional groups such as Brazil’s First Capital Command (PCC) and Red Command (CV); Colombia’s National Liberation Army (ELN) and dissidents from the Revolutionary Armed Forces of Colombia (FARC); Ecuador’s Los Lobos; and Venezuelan groups like the Cartel of the Suns (CdS) and the Tren de Aragua (TdA).

This expansion has devastating consequences for local communities and the environment. “The arrival or expansion of armed groups represents a turning point for many local communities that are seeing their natural environment destroyed,” notes the Amazon Underworld report. “Violence is reaching unprecedented levels, and young people are being drawn into activities such as gold mining and drug trafficking.”

The convergence of crime and environmental destruction

TCOs have dramatically escalated their activity by diversifying their illicit economies, creating a dangerous nexus between drug trafficking and environmental crime often referred to as “narco-mining” or “narco-deforestation.” Reports indicate that as much as 91 percent of forest loss in the Brazilian Amazon was linked to illegal activity orchestrated by well-structured criminal enterprises.

Illegal gold mining, in particular, has become one of the fastest-growing illicit economies in the Western Hemisphere, in some countries generating more revenue for organized crime than the drug trade itself. TCOs use the profits from cocaine smuggling to invest in mining operations, which in turn provides a method for laundering billions of dollars. This criminal convergence is acutely felt across Brazil’s Legal Amazon, where groups like the PCC and CV have rapidly expanded into environmental crimes, establishing a national scope of interconnected illicit economies that now challenge the Brazilian state across multiple regions. Over 4,000 illegal mining sites were identified across the Amazon region in 2023, underscoring the exponential growth of this market.

Tri-Border hotspots and the urban threat

The TCO crisis is particularly volatile in the Amazonian triple frontiers. In the Tri-Border Area of Brazil, Colombia, and Peru, Brazilian criminal groups have struck partnerships with Colombian guerrilla factions and Peruvian drug trafficking outfits to control the drug supply chain from coca cultivation in the Peruvian Amazon all the way to Atlantic ports. The expansion of the CV and the PCC has been rapid, with criminal gangs now operating in 344 out of 772 municipalities in the Brazilian Amazon (roughly 45 percent), according to a November 2025 report from the Brazilian Forum on Public Security.

The hundreds of rivers and clandestine airstrips scattered across the Amazon, originally used for the drug trade, are now also leveraged for the transport of illicit gold, facilitating the movement of contraband across borders to evade crackdowns. This competition for control has led to an explosion of violence. Large Amazonian cities such as Manaus and Belém, and even smaller towns like Tabatinga (Brazil) and Leticia (Colombia), have seen homicide rates surge as TCOs fight for criminal governance, establishing their own rules and exacting violent punishment for transgressions.

Targeting protected lands and Indigenous communities

The TCOs’ expansion poses a direct threat to the Amazon’s most protected areas. A significant portion of environmental crime hotspots, including illegal timber harvesting and mining, falls within designated Indigenous lands and Conservation Units. Indigenous communities are disproportionately affected, facing forcible displacement, mercury poisoning from mining, and violent recruitment of their youth into criminal ranks.

Reports indicate that these indigenous territories, which historically have been the most effective barriers against deforestation, are now on the verge of being breached by encroaching loggers, land grabbers, and racketeers.

The transnational challenge

While the TCO crisis spans the entire basin, certain regions have historically served as critical nerve centers — refuges and logistical support bases that facilitate TCOs’ regional expansion. For years, geographic complexities that lead to gaps in institutional oversight, as well as the presence of permissive environments have allowed criminal networks to use strategic ports for trafficking.

In these sectors, a sophisticated network of illicit actors managed to integrate illegal gold mining and drug transit into a singular financial engine. This system allows for the large-scale extraction of minerals, where criminal organizations often operate by exerting control over local populations and exacting “taxes” through these corridors. This created a self-sustaining cycle where the profits from one illicit market — such as cocaine — provided the liquid capital to expand into others, like gold and timber.

Basin-wide

The increasing sophistication of these illicit systems marks a critical phase in the Amazon’s history. Groups like the PCC and CV, whose power lies in their control over the “logistical veins” of the rainforest, have spent decades building their operations. By utilizing clandestine airstrips and an intricate network of rivers, these organizations move contraband across international boundaries, effectively treating the entire basin as a single, borderless theater of operations.

The convergence of TCOs and environmental destruction demands a unified, transnational strategy that treats the rainforest’s preservation as inseparable from regional security. By leveraging the comprehensive support of international partners with the firsthand operational knowledge of Amazonian nations, the region can move from being a sanctuary for crime to a stronghold for the rule of law. This integrated approach must do more than just disrupt crime; it must dismantle the systemic illicit economies that threaten the sovereign rights of the communities who call the forest home.

SECOND ARTICLE:

The Mining Arc: The Silent Operation that Sustains the Maduro Regime

Sabina Nicholls/Diálogo Americas – Southern Command – December 17, 2025

Gold has become the new lifeblood flowing through the veins of the Nicolás Maduro regime. With the oil industry collapsing and international sanctions restricting access to foreign currency, the Venezuelan regime has found in the extractive industry a critical alternative revenue stream and a mechanism for political control.

The Orinoco Mining Arc, a vast zone covering millions of hectares of the Amazon rainforest in southern Venezuela, has devolved into a battleground for armed groups, military factions, and criminal networks — all operating with the regime’s complicity.

“The Maduro regime demands a share of the revenues obtained in this area and acts as an arbiter in disputes between the organizations operating there,” Ryan C. Berg, director of the Americas Program and head of the Future of Venezuela Initiative at the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS), told Diálogo.

Under the pretense of national development, the Mining Arc functions in practice as a network for the extraction and smuggling of illicit gold. This operation feeds international financial networks, circumvents sanctions, and guarantees a steady flow of foreign currency.

Having become the new financial lifeline of Chavismo, Venezuelan gold also acts as a powerful mechanism for political cohesion. Through this metal, the regime guarantees the loyalty of segments of the Venezuelan Armed Forces (FANB), enriches elites close to power, and sustains local structures linked to transnational criminal organizations, ultimately consolidating territorial control and reinforcing Maduro’s permanence in power.

Illegal mining with state complicity

In 2016, the Maduro regime established the Orinoco Mining Arc National Strategic Development Zone, a megaproject covering nearly 12 percent of Venezuelan territory, an area almost the size of Portugal. This region is rich in resources such as bauxite, coltan, industrial diamonds, and most crucially, gold.

The magnitude of this illicit economy was highlighted in a report by the Financial Accountability and Corporate Transparency (FACT) Coalition, which revealed that at least 86 percent of Venezuelan gold is produced illegally. Approximately 70 percent is subsequently smuggled, with an estimated illicit value of $4.4 billion in 2021. Though Venezuela accounts for only 5.6 percent of the Amazonian territory, it concentrates more than 30 percent of the illegal mining centers in the basin.

This scheme directly and indirectly benefits the Maduro regime. The semi-official mining sector, comprising state-owned companies such as Minerven and the Military Company for Mining, Oil, and Gas Industries (CAMIMPEG), sources minerals from illegal mines and exports them primarily to Turkey and the United Arab Emirates. Part of these profits flow directly into the regime’s coffers, according to the CSIS report, Illegal Mining in Venezuela: Death and Devastation in the Amazon and Orinoco Regions.

However, these operations represent only a fraction of the business. The majority of the gold leaves the country as contraband and is then formalized on the international market, with the regime and security forces securing a significant portion of the profits at every stage of the process.

The corruption machinery

The creation of the Mining Arc allowed the regime to deploy military units under the guise of protecting strategic areas and attracting investment. However, investigations reveal that this initiative serves to consolidate state control over mineral extraction and ensure the direct participation of military actors in the business.

A 2024 U.S. State Department report presented to Congress denounced the Mining Arc as a system of institutionalized corruption. Military personnel and officials have transformed access to the mines into a source of personal enrichment. This network of high-ranking military and regime officials led by Maduro himself, which facilitates large-scale illicit gold extraction and narcotrafficking, is widely known as the Cartel of the Suns.

“The Arc, home to numerous indigenous peoples, has become a center for mining and illicit gold smuggling. The extraction and sale of this mineral have become a lucrative financial scheme for some well-connected Venezuelans and members of the Bolivarian National Armed Forces,” the State Department document states.

The International Crisis Group (ICG), in its report, The Curse of Gold: Mining and Violence in Southern Venezuela, warns that the military deployment is part of a reconfiguration of territorial control. According to the study, many officers have evolved from mere security forces into direct economic actors. They allow illegal miners to operate in exchange for payments that can reach 20 percent of production or agreements to sell gold below market price. Some prominent generals in the area receive up to $800,000 a month in bribes, according to the ICG.

This dynamic reflects the Armed Forces’ increasingly central role in the political and economic fabric of Chavismo, a role reinforced after their decisive support for Maduro in the 2024 elections. “In a deeply polarized political landscape, these mechanisms allow the regime to ensure the loyalty of the Armed Forces,” Berg said.

Mining as political currency

Maduro has further used mining to consolidate the loyalty of political leaders. In November 2019, he announced that the 19 Chavista governors would each receive direct control of a gold mine, with the possibility of using the profits to bolster regional budgets, CSIS reported.

Even more alarming are allegations of state complicity and military permissiveness in the face of transnational criminal networks. According to the ICG, the FANB delegates control of mines to non-state armed groups, cementing a hybrid system involving the military, criminal organizations, and local authorities.

“The Maduro regime uses all means at its disposal to stay in power, and the current price of gold offers incentives to continue illegal mining in the infamous Mining Arc,” Berg said.

A mosaic of guerrillas and transnational crime

With the complicity of the state, southern Venezuela has been transformed into a mosaic of criminal actors who divide territory and gold profits in exchange for political loyalty to the regime.

According to the ICG, active cooperation exists between the FANB and the National Liberation Army (ELN), a Colombian guerrilla group historically linked to Chavismo. Both forces reportedly operate in coordination in areas of Yapacana and Canaima National Parks, imposing gold taxes, recruiting indigenous youth, and exercising social control through violence.

The ELN also allegedly controls the exploitation of a mine in San Martín de Turumbang, on the border with Guyana, a site reportedly ceded by the Venezuelan regime, according to InSight Crime. Simultaneously, the dissident FARC faction known as Segunda Marquetalia is disputing territory with the ELN, consolidating the presence of Colombian armed groups in southern Venezuela.

“The regime tries to arbitrate between the different groups wherever they operate, allowing those willing to pay kickbacks and collaborate with it to act, while persecuting and punishing those who refuse to do so,” Berg explained. According to him, the Venezuelan regime’s support for these guerrilla groups, designated terrorist organizations, “provides Maduro with security options in case his power is threatened, while generating income from illicit activities.”

Added to this network is the Venezuelan criminal organization Tren de Aragua (TdA), also designated a terrorist organization by several countries in the region. In Bolívar state, TdA acts as a mining syndicate, controlling operations in Las Claritas with protection from local and military authorities, InSight Crime reported. During the 2024 elections, the streets of Las Claritas were covered with pro-regime propaganda and images of the character “Super Bigote” (Super Moustache). This regime-created superhero cartoon based on Maduro became a visible symbol of the fusion between state propaganda and organized crime in a zone under the influence of terrorist organizations.

On the border with Brazil, the First Capital Command (PCC) has also extended its influence, operating in Yanomami territories and using air and river routes to extract Venezuelan gold. According to InSight Crime, this transnational smuggling circuit crosses Brazil, Guyana, and the Caribbean, financing armed structures, buying political loyalties, and propping up the regime in the face of international isolation.

Environmental crime and human cost

In addition to the expansion of organized crime, environmental devastation is advancing unchecked in southern Venezuela. The Mining Arc has become a hotbed of ecological destruction affecting the Venezuelan Amazon rainforest, one of the most biodiverse areas in the country. Illegal logging is giving way to mines, roads, and camps, while illicit operations are rapidly invading protected areas.

According to data cited by Infobae, by 2023 these operations had penetrated 27 of the 41 protected areas in the Venezuelan Amazon, and deforestation had skyrocketed by 170 percent annually. Between 2017 and 2020, more than 22,000 hectares were cleared in national parks such as Caura, Canaima, and Yapacana. Even Cerro Delgado Chalbaud, the source of the Orinoco River, was ravaged by Brazilian miners. Environmental monitoring infrastructure has virtually disappeared due to budget cuts and corruption, Infobae reported.

Added to the devastation is the massive use of mercury and other toxic chemicals that pollute rivers and soils, damaging human health, biodiversity, and Amazonian ecosystems. Data revealed by CSIS show that high levels of this element have been found in nearby rivers that supply drinking water to Colombia and Brazil and flow within Canaima National Park. Elevated levels of mercury have also been found in freshwater fish in the region, which are exported for consumption in Brazil, Guyana, and Trinidad and Tobago.

Criminal control also fuels human trafficking and sexual exploitation in mining camps, exacerbating the vulnerability of a region where Indigenous communities represent almost half of the population of Amazonas state. Agriculture has been displaced by mining, creating a dependence on illicit networks and causing high school dropout rates. Despite the apparent gold rush, poverty persists. In Bolívar, 82 percent of the population lived in extreme poverty in 2021, according to data from Crisis Group.

For Berg, “the Maduro regime is a full-fledged, devastating criminal regime that has empowered itself through relationships with criminal organizations in the heart of South America and poses a major challenge to regional and global order,” he concluded.

Source: www.drugwatch.org

Submitted by Maggie Petito – Drug watch International – 01 February 2026

By  Nav Rahi with Ben Simon in Toronto – AFP NEWS        Jan 31, 2026

Over 35 years as a drug user, Vancouver resident Garth Mullins said he’s had “hundreds and hundreds” of interactions with police, and long believed drug decriminalization was smart policy.

“I was first arrested for drug possession when I was 19, and it changes your life,” said Mullins, who is now in his 50s and was an early backer of Canadian province British Columbia’s decriminalization program that ended on Saturday.

“That time served inside can add up for a lot of people. They do a lifetime jolt in a series of three‑month bits,” he told AFP.

BC’s three-year experiment with drug decriminalization, which launched in 2023 and shielded people from arrest for possession of up to 2.5 grams of hard drugs, was ground-breaking for Canada.

Many praised it as a bold effort to ensure the intensifying addiction crisis devastating communities across the country was treated as a healthcare challenge, not a criminal justice issue.

But on January 14, BC’s Health Minister Josie Osborne announced the province would not be extending the program.

“The intention was clear: to make it easier for people struggling with addiction to reach out for help without fear of being criminalized,” Osborne said.

The program “has not delivered the results we hoped for,” she told reporters. For Mullins, the province’s desired results were never realistic.

The former heroin user, who currently takes methadone, is an activist and broadcaster who co‑founded the Vancouver Area Network of Drug Users (VANDU), which advised BC’s government on decriminalization.

At VANDU’s office in Vancouver’s Downtown Eastside neighborhood, home to many drug users, the walls are full of pictures honoring those who have died from overdose.

“The idea behind decriminalization was one simple thing: to stop all of us from going to jail again and again and again,” he said.

Breaking the cycle of arrests is crucial because criminal records make it more difficult to find work and housing, often perpetuating addiction, experts say.

But thinking decriminalization could help steer waves of users into rehab was misguided, and misinforming the public about the possible outcomes of the policy risked a backlash, Mullins said.

“For everybody out there, in society, sending fewer junkies to jail might not sound like a good thing to do.”

After the province announced the program’s expiration, Canadian media was filled with critics who said it had been mishandled.

Vancouver police chief Steven Rai said his force had been willing to support the plan, but “it quickly became evident that it just wasn’t working.”

Decriminalization “was not matched with sufficient investments in prevention, drug education, access to treatment, or support for appropriate enforcement,” he added.

Cheryl Forchuk, a mental health professor at Western University who has worked on addiction for five decades, said BC “never really fully implemented” decriminalization because the essential complementary programs — especially affordable housing supply — were never ramped up. “It was like they wanted to do something, but then really didn’t put the effort into it and then said, gee, it didn’t work,” she told AFP.

BC’s experience mirrors that in the US state of Oregon, which rolled back its pioneering drug decriminalization program in 2024 after a four-year trial.

Like in Oregon, BC’s program faced fierce criticism, with many saying public safety was threatened by a tolerance of open use.

A flashpoint moment in the western Canadian province was a 2024 incident where a person was filmed smoking what appeared to be a narcotic inside a Tim Hortons, the popular coffee shop chain frequented by families across the country.

Local politicians in Maple Ridge, BC, attributed the incident to a permissiveness about drugs ushered in by decriminalization. But for Mullins, the incident spoke to broader misconceptions about the intent of the policy.

Decriminalization did not allow for drug use inside a restaurant, and the person could have been arrested. Drug user advocates, he added, don’t want policy that makes the broader public feel threatened.

“We need something where everybody feels safe, right? If people who are walking with their kids don’t feel safe, that’s a problem for me,” he said. But, he added, security also matters to users for whom “the world feels very scary and unsafe.”

Source: www.drugwatch.org

‘HIS LOSS IS MASSIVE’ … THE DEATH OF GUS

by Alex Homer – BBC News Shared Data Unit – 12 February 2026

Additional reporting: Navtej Johal       Additional data journalism: Paul Bradshaw

Highly potent synthetic opioid drugs called nitazenes, which experts say can be many times more potent than heroin, have been linked to hundreds of deaths in the UK.

Records show some people are taking them by accident, as they are mixed in with other drugs as cheap substitutes.

So how are nitazenes making their way into the supply chain, and are the authorities doing enough to curb their spread?

Undecided about what he wanted to do after his A-levels, Gus tried a range of jobs and travelled overseas.

He filmed himself hiking up volcanoes in Mexico and captured the effects of climate change. It made up his mind to apply for a university’s journalism course.

A week after he returned home his mother Nicola found he had unintentionally overdosed and died at the age of 21.

“I loved him very much and his loss is massive,” she said. “The awful thing is, I think he was at one of the best places in his life.”

Gus had sat down to watch a film and eat a takeaway and taken what he believed was a tablet of oxycodone, external, a strong pain medication which he had bought illicitly.

Three months later, Nicola received a post-mortem report saying the tablet was actually a type of nitazene.

Despite a career spent in medicine as a consultant radiologist, she had never heard of these synthetic opioid drugs.

A coroner later concluded her son’s death was drug-related, caused by the “substitution” of a nitazene in place of what he had sought to buy.

Nicola said: “I can tell you that is the most awful thing to suddenly open an e-mail and read your child’s post-mortem.

“It said that there was nitazene in his bloodstream and this was thought to be the cause of death, and I thought ‘what the hell is that?'”

Gus is among hundreds of people whose deaths have been linked to nitazenes since they first made news in the UK in 2021.

Professor Michel Kazatchkine, a founding member of the Global Commission on Drugs Policy, said the numbers of deaths meant the UK was “by far outpacing all other countries [in Europe] and it’s even outpacing Canada”.

The BBC Shared Data Unit has analysed exclusive data from The National Programme on Substance Use Mortality (NPSUM), external. It is made up of voluntary reports of inquest records from coroners in England, Wales and Northern Ireland.

The records are not exhaustive because not all coroners volunteer them and it takes seven months on average for drug-related deaths to be registered, external, so some appear in the following year’s figures.

The records analysed are for 286 inquests involving deaths linked forensically to nitazenes by the end of March 2025.

Dr Caroline Copeland, director of NPSUM and senior lecturer in pharmacology and toxicology at King’s College London, said the records showed some of those affected were among the “most marginalised”.

More than one in five people in the records had “a lack of stable housing, living in the most deprived parts of the country with incredibly high levels of unemployment and with a high burden of mental health disorders,” she said.

Our analysis also found:

  • Nine in 10 of the inquest records were for men

  • Ages ranged from 17 to 66, with many in their 40s

  • Most were known to use drugs

  • More than half the people died in their homes

  • Almost every inquest concluded the death was by accident

The amount of nitazene – ordered legitimately for research purposes – in this vial was enough for a potentially fatal dose for ten people, Copeland said

The opioid antidote naxolone is viewed as key to preventing deaths from substances like nitazenes, but was detected in just one in every seven inquest records.

In January 2025, the coroner reviewing the death of Joe Black raised concerns, external naloxone was only available to take home from some substance misuse services and many people who used drugs were also not engaging with them.

Joe, who had schizophrenia and substance misuse disorder, was found dead aged 39 from an overdose including heroin adulterated with nitazenes at a hostel in Camden, London.

Neither the hostel nor the mental health NHS Trust which were treating Joe were permitted to give naloxone kits to their residents or patients who were known to use drugs.

In December, the Department of Health and Social Care began a 10-week consultation, external on proposed legislative changes to expand naloxone access in the UK.

His mother Jude said: “Joe was a wonderful, sensitive, caring, intelligent, talented young man. And he, like everybody else, had a right to live.

“He also was carrying this terrible illness and coping as best he could, and was hugely vulnerable to exploitation and accidental overdose.”

She said it was “negligent” it had taken nearly a year since the inquest for the consultation to begin.

“I feel it diminishes the value of my son’s life and the tragedy of his death.

“People like Joe are still hugely at risk and I’m sure they’re still dying.”

In Sandwell, West Midlands, the charity Cranstoun is trialling a new type of outreach service.

Sue McCutcheon goes out proactively to find people on the street who have substance dependence issues and may not be willing or able to use traditional services for help.

She is a nurse with more than 30 years’ experience and can prescribe treatments and hand out naloxone, which she describes as “like a duty of care or a moral issue”.

She said: “If these people don’t come into our buildings to get naloxone, where are they going to get it from?”

The National Crime Agency (NCA) believes nitazenes are being smuggled into the UK through the post. Due to their strength, they can be secreted in small volumes in parcels.

The ban on harvesting opium poppies in Afghanistan has previously been suggested as the cause. Opium is the key ingredient for heroin.

Adam Thompson, the NCA’s head of drugs threat, said while heroin purity had dropped on the streets, there were still no signs of shortage in the UK.

“In most cases, organised criminals’ sole motivation for using nitazenes is greed. They buy potent nitazenes cheaply and mix them with other drugs… to strengthen the product being sold and make significant profits,” he said.

The government said it would keep enhancing its surveillance and early warning systems to alert people when new drugs emerged.

Analysis of the inquest records showed multiple drugs were being increasingly implicated in people’s deaths – called polydrug use.

Dr Alex Lawson is a consultant clinical scientist in toxicology for University Hospitals Birmingham NHS Foundation Trust.

After a spike in nitazene-related deaths in the city in summer 2023, lessons have been shared, external by the city’s agencies to inform contingency plans elsewhere if there were a similar outbreak.

One in every seven of the NPSUM records we analysed were from the coroner’s area Lawson’s team covers.

They routinely tests blood, urine and other tissues for the presence of up to 2,500 different types of drugs – but that level of investigation is not uniform across all coroner areas.

“Things are improving but the nitazenes that people are testing for will vary from lab to lab, and not every laboratory will be able to keep up to date with the newest nitazenes that are on the market,” Lawson said.

Copeland has co-authored research published this week which says nitazenes-related deaths may have been under-estimated by up to a third.

The research found the drugs deteriorate in post-mortem blood samples more quickly than most forensic samples are handled in the real world, so they may not be detected.

Concerns over mis-selling

The most recent annual report, external from the UK’s only national drug-testing service, WEDINOS, found more than a third of the samples it tested did not contain what the purchaser had intended to buy, while some contained extra substances.

Copeland said at the start of 2023 nitazenes were mostly found contaminating heroin, but now they are being found as a complete substitute for other drugs.

“The complete mis-selling is something that is very concerning for nitazenes, because people don’t know what they’re taking, so they’re not going to be able to take the necessary precautions,” she said.

In October 2025, the government began a new campaign targeting 16 to 24-year-olds and social media users to raise awareness of harms from drugs, including nitazenes.

It said it had guaranteed funding for council public health schemes for the next three years, including £3.4bn protected for drug and alcohol prevention, treatment and recovery.

The BBC’s request for an interview was declined, but a spokesperson said its strategy involved strengthening border security to block “these lethal substances from entering the country”.

Naloxone was also now being carried by officers in 32 police forces out of the 45 covering the UK, they said.

Nicola said: “You don’t want your child to be judged. There’s always a stigma with certain types of death and substances is one of them.

“And I didn’t want Gus to be tarred with any of that, so at first you don’t say anything and then I thought, I have to tell his friends and I have to tell people.

“He wasn’t a great sleeper. I think he just thought he would take something, it would relax him and he would just have a nice sleep that night, and it put him to sleep and he never woke up.”

Source: https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/articles/ce3enqnnpy8o

 

Health Promotion International, Volume 41, Issue 1, February 2026, daag002.
Oxford University Press

Abstract

School-based health promotion is a key setting for fostering positive youth health behaviours. Digital and immersive technologies offer promising opportunities to engage young people. This study explores a virtual reality (VR) intervention designed to prevent alcohol, vaping, and cannabis use among secondary school students. The intervention allowed students to navigate realistic, branching scenarios simulating peer pressure and substance use, aiming to enhance refusal strategies, critical thinking, and decision-making skills. A mixed-methods evaluation involving 277 students and nine teachers across four Australian schools was conducted. Postintervention surveys assessed engagement, immersion, emotional responses, and skill development, while focus groups and interviews explored participant experiences. Results indicate that students found the VR experience immersive and valuable, particularly for rehearsing peer resistance and evaluating the consequences of risky behaviours. Teachers viewed the intervention as a powerful tool for prompting reflection and discussion and a strong complement to existing health education curricula. Thematic analysis highlighted the importance of realism and interactivity for student engagement. While some technical and content improvements were identified, both students and teachers considered the VR tool effective for enhancing health literacy and behavioural readiness. This study shows that immersive VR can be a scalable, engaging addition to school-based health promotion, improving prevention skills and confidence in managing substance-related situations. As adolescent health behaviours are increasingly shaped by digital environments, immersive interventions such as VR offer a promising avenue for skill building and reflection. Further research should assess long-term impacts, with greater attention to implementation and equity considerations.

Introduction

Alcohol, vaping, and other drug (AOD) prevention for youth remains a pivotal public health concern, particularly in countries with high rates of underage substance use. In Australia, underage alcohol consumption declined significantly from the early 2000s to the late 2010s, with a notable increase in the proportion of teenage abstainers. However, since 2019, this trend has plateaued, and rates of underage drinking have begun to rise again. Currently, approximately one-third of Australian adolescents aged 14–17 report consuming alcohol in the past year (Australian Institute of Health and Welfare 2024b). Parallel to this, the use of e-cigarettes among young Australians has increased substantially. In 2023, 9.3% of individuals aged 18–24 reported daily e-cigarette use, highlighting the growing prevalence of vaping among younger demographics (Australian Institute of Health and Welfare 2024a). Emerging nicotine products, such as nicotine pouches, are also gaining popularity among Australian youth, further complicating efforts to address substance use (Jongenelis et al. 2024, Watts et al. 2024). Compounding these challenges, recent research shows that young people are frequently exposed to online marketing of nicotine products, despite advertising restrictions in many Western countries. Misinformation about health and wellbeing is also increasingly circulated by social media influencers, whose content is often viewed as credible due to high engagement and parasocial relationships. Mulcahy et al. (2025) demonstrate that high-virality influencer posts can lower perceived deception and facilitate the spread of misinformation, especially when accompanied by supportive user comments. These dynamics create a digital environment in which adolescents are vulnerable to misleading substance-related content, highlighting the need for forward-looking, media-literate interventions that strengthen critical thinking and digital discernment. McGlinchy et al. (2025) similarly found that children as young as 11 frequently encounter vape and tobacco marketing online, where traditional advertising restrictions are often ineffective. Buchanan et al. (2018) further show that digital marketing negatively shapes young people’s attitudes and behaviours towards unhealthy products, with peer-endorsed content blurring boundaries between advertising and social interaction. In parallel, adolescents today are growing up in a digital-first environment that strongly influences their health behaviours and perceptions. As Raeside (2025) explains, adolescent health promotion must evolve alongside young people’s digital engagement habits by using community-based and digital-only platforms that reflect their lived experiences and expectations. This involves prioritizing youth voice, digital safety, and participatory design to avoid reinforcing inequities and to address emerging digital determinants of health. In a world-first effort to limit young people’s exposure to harmful online environments, Australia has restricted social media use to individuals aged 16 and over, highlighting growing concern about risks in unregulated digital spaces.

Amid these developments, schools continue to play a central role in universal AOD prevention by providing structured opportunities to shape young people’s attitudes and behaviours before risky substance use patterns emerge. Schools are uniquely positioned for this work because they reach most children and adolescents during key developmental years. The literature shows that social and emotional factors, including peer influence, social norms, and perceived acceptance within family and school environments, are important drivers of adolescent AOD behaviours (Biles et al. 2025). The school environment has long been central to public health and educational interventions. Traditional school-based AOD programmes, such as didactic seminars, health education units, and expert-led presentations, aim to delay initiation and reduce substance use by increasing knowledge, shifting attitudes and norms, and enhancing self-efficacy. Yet these approaches often suffer from low engagement, limited personalization, and poor translation of knowledge into practice (Liu et al. 2022, Gardner et al. 2024). In contrast, emerging approaches such as immersive virtual reality (VR) offer a new vehicle to engage young people through dynamic and experiential learning. VR allows students to actively participate in simulated environments that replicate real-life social scenarios, making abstract concepts more concrete and emotionally resonant (AlGerafi et al. 2023, Marougkas et al. 2024). By embedding decision-making moments within engaging narratives and real-world 360° footage, VR can support adolescents in critically reflecting on substance use, rehearsing resistance strategies, and building confidence in navigating risky situations. However, despite growing interest, few AOD programmes have integrated or rigorously evaluated VR interventions targeting adolescent substance use, largely due to technological barriers such as cost, equipment requirements, and setup complexity. While VR is known to be engaging (Jiang et al. 2026), its potential remains underexplored, as existing studies often rely on limited outcome measures, leaving a critical evidence gap. Building on this knowledge base, this paper examines the implementation of a VR intervention component of a larger AOD programme aimed at high school students. It builds and expands the existing evidence base and explores how VR can influence a range of psychological, emotional, experiential, and behavioural factors such as engagement, immersion, emotional responses, peer resistance, critical thinking, problem-solving, and overall satisfaction. By supporting harm minimization approaches and strengthening practical decision-making and refusal skills, VR offers a promising tool for prevention particularly in the face of growing digital influences on young people’s perceptions and behaviours.

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image of the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Source: https://academic.oup.com/heapro/article/41/1/daag002/8441976

by Erikka Loftfield, PhD, MPH – NIH – January 26, 2026

Key takeaways:

  • Consistent heavy alcohol use and higher lifetime consumption may raise risk for colorectal cancer, particularly rectal tumors.
  • Data suggest a benefit of alcohol cessation among former moderate/heavy drinkers.

An analysis of more than 88,000 U.S. adults provides new insights into how duration and extent of alcohol consumption may affect colorectal cancer risk.

Current and consistent heavy alcohol intake throughout adulthood appeared associated with a near-doubling of risk compared with current, consistent light drinking, data from a population-based randomized screening trial showed.

Data derived from O’Connell CP, et al. Cancer. 2026;doi:10.1002/cncr.70201.

Higher lifetime alcohol consumption also appeared associated with significantly higher risk, particularly for rectal tumors.

In addition, the findings suggested benefits of alcohol cessation, including lower odds for colorectal cancer or nonadvanced adenomas.

Erikka Loftfield states that “The findings of this study support — and really give empirical weight to — guidance from internationally recognized bodies that recommend limiting or abstaining from alcohol intake to reduce cancer risk,” .

Filling an evidence gap

Research has intensified over the past several years into alcohol’s role in cancer development.

A population-based study led by International Agency for Cancer Research linked alcohol consumption to more than 740,000 new cancer diagnoses in 2020, equivalent to 4% of cases worldwide.

Loftfield and colleagues analyzed data from the Prostate, Lung, Colorectal, and Ovarian (PLCO) Cancer Screening Trial — designed to determine the effects of screening on cancer-related mortality among cancer-free adults — to estimate the association between lifetime alcohol consumption and incident colorectal cancer or adenoma.

“Prior studies have established that alcohol consumption is associated with increased risk of cancer, but there’s very little data regarding how lifetime patterns of drinking affect colorectal adenoma and cancer risk,” Loftfield said. “We wanted to try to fill that gap. We know a lot about how smoking cessation lowers cancer risk, but we wanted to learn more about what reduction or cessation of alcohol drinking means for future cancer risk.”

In the PLCO trial, researchers randomly assigned people aged 55 to 74 years to cancer screening or standard care. Colorectal cancer screening consisted of flexible sigmoidoscopy at baseline, and again either 3 years or 5 years later.

Trial participants completed risk factor and dietary history questionnaires. They reported alcohol intake during four age periods —18 to 24 years, 25 to 39 years, 40 to 54 years, and 55 years and older — using 10 predefined frequency categories, as well as current drinking frequency at baseline.

Loftfield and colleagues categorized participants as current drinkers, former drinkers or never drinkers.

They used multiple categories to quantify average lifetime drinking — less than one drink per week, one to less than seven drinks per week, seven to less than 14 per week, or 14 or more per week — and they used past and current drinking frequency to define broader alcohol intake patterns through adulthood.

They used sex-specific U.S. dietary guidelines to classify light drinking (less than 14 drinks per week for men, less than seven per week for women), moderate drinking (14 to 21 drinks per week for men, seven to 14 per week for women) and heavy drinking (22 or more per week for men, 15 or more per week for women).

‘Timely’ findings

During 20 years of follow-up, 1,679 incident colorectal cancer cases occurred among 88,092 PLCO trial participants.

Current drinkers who had an average lifetime alcohol intake of 14 or more drinks per week exhibited a 25% (HR = 1.25; 95% CI, 1.01-1.53) higher risk for colorectal cancer than those with average lifetime intake of one drink or less per week.

Those with higher average lifetime alcohol intake had nearly double the risk for rectal cancer (HR = 1.95; 95% CI, 1.17-3.28).

“This finding is timely because we are seeing increasing rates of colorectal cancer among younger people, and that increase has been driven predominantly by rectal tumors,” Loftfield said.

Consistent heavy drinking appeared associated with a near-doubling of colorectal cancer compared with light drinking (HR = 1.91; 95% CI, 1.17-3.12).

The data also suggested benefits of alcohol cessation.

Former drinkers who had been moderate to heavy drinkers earlier in life exhibited similar colorectal cancer risk as light drinkers.

An analysis of about 12,000 PLCO trial participants who had negative baseline screens compared former drinkers with current drinkers who averaged less than one drink per week in their lifetime. Results showed former drinkers had numerically lower risk for any adenoma (OR = 0.78; 95% CI, 0.59-1.02) and significantly lower risk for nonadvanced adenoma (OR = 0.58; 95% CI, 0.39-0.84).

“From a clinical perspective, that is pretty robust evidence to support that there is a benefit to drinking cessation,” Loftfield said.

The mechanisms of alcohol’s impact on cancer risk have been well studied, specifically related to how alcohol in the body converts to acetaldehyde, a known carcinogen. Less is known about how alcohol affects the gut microbiome and the impact that may have on colorectal cancer risk, Loftfield said.

Loftfield and colleagues hope to conduct additional research exploring the impact of lifetime alcohol use — and alcohol cessation — on other malignancies, such as liver cancer.

Further study into the effects of alcohol cessation on people who average one to two drinks per day also could be valuable, Loftfield said.

“We know a lot more about heavy drinkers who quit drinking or reduce their alcohol intake,” she said. “A better understanding of what happens for moderate drinkers, and how their biology changes when they reduce or quit drinking, may help inform what we know about cancer prevention.”

Source: Herschel Baker – International Liaison Director, Queensland Director, Drug Free Australia

Cannabis use, vaping and the use of psychedelic drugs are at or near all-time highs, research shows.

The percentage of young and midlife adults using nicotine pouches significantly increased last year, while cannabis use, vaping and the use of psychedelic drugs are at or near all-time highs, according to the latest data from the University of Michigan’s Monitoring the Future (MTF) Panel survey funded by the National Institute on Drug Abuse of the National Institutes of Health (NIDA).

Alcohol continues to be the most used substance across age groups, followed by cannabis and nicotine. The patterns of substance use are changing over time, with cannabis use, vaping of both nicotine and cannabis, and psychedelic drug use increasing across all age groups. In 2025, there was also an increase in the use of nicotine pouches across all age groups.

Key findings include:

  • Nicotine pouch use (past 12-month use) significantly increased from 2023 to 2024 among all age groups (ages 19 to 30, 35 to 50 and 55 to 65). Nicotine pouch use was first measured in 2023, and it has doubled in one year, with 9.5% of 19-to-30-year-olds reporting past 12-month use in 2024.
  • Cannabis use (past 12-month, past 30-day and daily use) in 2024 remained near or at the recent highest levels ever recorded among adults ages 19 to 30, all with significant increases across the past five and 10 years. Among adults ages 35 to 50, cannabis use (past 12-month, past 30-day and daily use) prevalence has doubled or nearly doubled (and significantly increased) over the past five and 10 years. In addition, cannabis use disorder has increased over the past five years among adults ages 40 to 50.
  • Vaping cannabis (past 12-month and past 30-day use) reached the highest levels ever recorded in 2024. Among adults ages 19 to 30, prevalence in the past year doubled since it was first measured in 2017 for this group, increasing significantly over the past five years. Vaping cannabis significantly increased among adults ages 35 to 50 (past 12-month) and among adults ages 55 to 65 (past 12-month and past 30-day), also reaching new high levels in 2024.
  • Vaping nicotine (past 12-month and past 30-day use) reached the highest levels ever recorded in 2024. For example, among adults ages 19 to 30, prevalence in the past month tripled since this measure was first added to the survey in 2017. Vaping nicotine (past 12-month and past 30-day) significantly increased over the past five years among adults ages 19 to 30 and 35 to 50, reaching new historic high levels in 2024.
  • Use of psychedelic drugs/hallucinogens (past 12-month use) has continued to rise, reaching the highest levels ever recorded in 2024 among adults ages 19 to 30 and 35 to 50, following significant increases over the past five and 10 years in these age groups. In addition, there have been significant increases in stimulant drug use (amphetamines and cocaine, past 12-month) over the past ten years among adults ages 35 to 50.

A longitudinal panel study component of MTF conducts follow-up surveys on a subset of these participants (about 20,000 people per year), collecting data from individuals every other year from ages 19 to 30 and every five years after age 30 to track their drug use through adulthood. Participants self-report their drug use behaviors across various periods, including lifetime, past-year (12 months), past-month (30 days), and other use frequencies depending on the substance type.

Researchers say the power of surveys such as MTF allows for documentation of how substance use evolves in the population over time. As more of the original survey takers—first recruited as teens—now enter later adulthood, researchers are also able to examine the effects of drug use throughout the life course on health and well-being decades later.

Behavior and public perceptions about drug use can shift rapidly, based on drug availability and other factors. It’s important to track this so that public health professionals and communities can be prepared to respond. Collecting data to document these population-level patterns is critical for informing our nation’s public health priorities.

SAFE, Inc. is the only alcohol and substance abuse prevention, intervention and education agency in the City of Glen Cove. Its Coalition is conducting alcohol, marijuana, tobacco and other drug use prevention awareness campaigns entitled, “Keeping Glen Cove SAFE,” to educate and update the community regarding alcohol, prescription and illicit drug use and its consequences. To learn more about the SAFE Glen Cove Coalition please follow us on www.facebook.com/safeglencove or visit SAFE’s website to learn more at www.safeglencove.org.

SOURCE: https://patch.com/new-york/glencove/safe-gc-coalition-nicotine-pouch-cannabis-vaping-psychedelic-use-rise

by Drew Davison and Catherine LaBrenz – UTA – Jan 28, 2026 •

One in four U.S. adolescents is exposed to violence in their neighborhood, and those teens are more than twice as likely to use cigarettes, alcohol or drugs to cope, according to a new study from The University of Texas at Arlington.

Published in the Journal of Affective Disorders, the study was led by UT Arlington School of Social Work Professor Philip Baiden and drew on national data from the 2023 Youth Risk Behavior Survey. Researchers analyzed responses from 20,005 adolescents ages 12 to 18, offering new insights into early pathways to substance use, a persistent public health concern.

“Our study reminds us that violence is not a rare or isolated experience for many young people—it is a daily reality,” Dr. Baiden said. “Youth exposed to neighborhood violence often carry the psychological weight of chronic stress, fear and trauma. Many turn to alcohol, marijuana, vaping or other substances to self-medicate or numb the emotional impact of these experiences.”

According to the 2024 National Institute on Drug Abuse annual report, 58.3% of individuals ages 12 or older reported using tobacco, vaping nicotine, alcohol or an illicit drug in the prior month. Substance misuse contributes to preventable illness and death nationwide.

Catherine LaBrenz, coauthor of the study and a UTA School of Social Work associate professor, noted that previous research has shown neighborhood violence can alter how the brain processes emotions.

“When teens experience chronic fear or trauma, it can increase vulnerability to substance use,” Dr. LaBrenz said.

The researchers examined five substance categories: cigarette smoking, alcohol use, electronic vaping products, marijuana use, and prescription opioid misuse. Exposure to neighborhood violence was associated with higher odds of using all five substances, even after controlling for demographics, mental health symptoms, physical activity and bullying involvement.

The study also revealed several notable patterns. Cyberbullying is more strongly linked to substance use than traditional school bullying. In addition, students who participate in team sports tend to report higher rates of alcohol use.

“Cyberbullying is distinct in that it follows adolescents everywhere—there is no escape,” Baiden said. “If someone is bullied on a school playground, it’s traumatizing but you could brush it off and might be able to outgrow it. When it is cyberbullying, it spreads widely, persists indefinitely and you don’t know who has access to it, which makes its emotional impact even more traumatic. You can’t just delete it.”

Related: Researchers uncover surprising link to stroke risk

The study also identified a nuanced relationship between team sports and substance use. Participation in team sports such as football, for example, was linked to increased alcohol use.

“Team sports can offer structure, belonging and social support, but they also expose adolescents to peer cultures where alcohol use may be normalized,” Baiden said. “That helps explain why we see increased odds of drinking among youth who participate.”

Baiden and LaBrenz said the findings could help inform policies and prevention strategies aimed at reducing substance use among adolescents. Further research will focus on specific populations and potential interventions.

“It’s not enough to document adverse effects,” Baiden said. “We want to identify interventions that counselors, mental health professionals and social workers can use when working with youth who experience neighborhood violence.”

UTA Social Work professors Angela J. Hall and Joshua Awua were contributing authors to the study.

About The University of Texas at Arlington (UTA)

The University of Texas at Arlington is a growing public research university in the heart of the thriving Dallas-Fort Worth metroplex. With a student body of over 42,700, UTA is the second-largest institution in the University of Texas System, offering more than 180 undergraduate and graduate degree programs. Recognized as a Carnegie R-1 university, UTA stands among the nation’s top 5% of institutions for research activity. UTA and its 280,000 alumni generate an annual economic impact of $28.8 billion for the state. The University has received the Innovation and Economic Prosperity designation from the Association of Public and Land Grant Universities and has earned recognition for its focus on student access and success, considered key drivers to economic growth and social progress for North Texas and beyond.

Source: https://www.uta.edu/academics/schools-colleges/social-work/news/releases/2026/01/28/one-in-four-teens-face-violence-higher-substance-use

by Ric Treble and Caroline Copeland – News Release

The illicit drug trade is international, and different countries have developed different strategies intended to minimize its negative effects, most commonly through controls on, or prohibition of, specified substances. But which approaches to banning substances are actually most effective in reducing harm? 

The advent of NPS, and the range of subsequent legislative controls introduced by different countries, has created a natural experiment. Using data from the UK’s National Programme on Substance Abuse Mortality (NPSUM), our study examines how different national and international control strategies have translated into real-world outcomes within England, Wales, and Northern Ireland by examining NPS deaths.

Internationally, there has been a high degree of consistency in drug control. The United Nations (UN) annually reviews and updates the lists of substances (and precursors) named in its drugs conventions, based on recommendations from the World Health Organization’s expert committee. All signatory nations of the conventions are then required to incorporate these controls into their national laws. However, this process of problem identification, data compilation, formulation of recommendations, and achieving international consensus followed by national legislation, is inevitably slow. In contrast, the appearance and spread of NPS within drug markets can be incredibly rapid, so there can be significant delays between local identification of issues arising from novel substances and the international introduction of new controls.

Beyond international laws

In response, some nations have therefore chosen to act sooner, introducing their own national controls in response to local concerns, in advance of, or in addition to, those required by the UN. This means that there is an international patchwork of legislation regarding emerging drug threats, with different substances being controlled in different countries at different times. Whilst challenging for policymakers, this variation provides a valuable opportunity to assess the impact of the application of different nations’ controls on particular substances.

In the UK, there have been very few examples of the illicit synthesis of NPS and the vast majority of such substances are imported instead, often facilitated by internet trading and ‘fast parcel’ delivery services. To address the rapid appearance of NPS, the UK’s Misuse of Drugs Act (1971) has been supplemented by other measures, such as the introduction of Temporary Class Drugs Orders (2011) and the much broader Psychoactive Substances Act (2016). These measures effectively prevented open sale of NPS via ‘head shops’ and UK-based websites. However, NPS remained accessible to both individuals and distributors via internet trading and traditional drug distribution networks. 

The power of foreign legislation

Over the period studied, the major sources of NPS in the UK were chemical supply companies based in China. In response to both local and international concerns, China introduced a series of national controls over and above those required by UN scheduling, initially on specifically named substances and, more recently, on whole families of NPS by means of ‘generic’ controls. 

When we compared trends in NPS detections within the NPSUM’s mortality data with the timing of the UN’s international control requirements and the UK’s and China’s national legislations respectively, a clear pattern emerged: controls implemented in the producing countries were associated with larger reductions in NPS detections in deaths than controls introduced solely within the consuming country.

Action at home

National legislation within consumer countries is, of course, still essential. It enables national law-enforcement activity, including restricting the import and trafficking supply chain and the implementation of possession offences. However, national legislation and enforcement alone cannot eliminate drug use or its associated harms. For this reason, they must be complemented by wide-ranging harm-reduction strategies. However, legislative controls can also drive unintended consequences. Targeted bans on specific substances often stimulate the development of novel NPS, including the production of new, as yet uncontrolled, variants of substances controlled by name. This pattern has been particularly evident in the case of synthetic cannabinoids, where successive generations of legislation-avoiding substances have continued to appear, prompting the development of ever broader generic controls.

However, even generic controls have limits. Where entire families of drugs are prohibited, new drug families which produce similar effects may emerge instead. This dynamic is currently being seen in the case of highly potent synthetic opioids, a particularly concerning cause of drug-related deaths. Broad controls on fentanyl and their pre-cursors have been followed by the appearance of nitazenes and, as controls on nitazenes are being introduced, a new group of potent opioids, the orphines, has begun to appear. These cycles of control and innovation are therefore likely to continue.

Early legislative action by consumer countries remains necessary to limit the distribution and harms of newly emerging NPS. The findings of our study also demonstrate the particular effectiveness of prompt action to restrict production within source countries to prevent international distribution. If, as a result of Chinese legislative actions, production of NPS for the illicit drug trade becomes more geographically diverse, action to identify new sources of production and to encourage and support supplier nations to restrict production as soon as practicable will be required. This will present particular challenges if the substances being produced and exported are not perceived to present a threat within the producing country.

However, supply-side interventions alone cannot provide a lasting solution: as long as there is sustained demand for psychoactive substances, there will be strong incentives for suppliers to adapt, innovate, and profit. Reducing drug harms will therefore require not only responsive legislation and international co-operation, but also investment in education, prevention, and treatment to address the drivers of demand.

Source: https://www.eurekalert.org/news-releases/1113837

published by Aurora – January 31, 2026

Fentanyl has become one of the greatest health, social, and security challenges of the 21st century. This synthetic opioid, originally created for medical purposes, is now at the center of an unprecedented crisis that is hitting the United States particularly hard and is beginning to spread alarmingly to other countries around the world

More potent than heroin and morphine, cheap to produce, and extremely addictive, fentanyl has transformed the illegal drug market and caused hundreds of thousands of overdose deaths in the last decade. Its impact extends far beyond public health: it affects security, the economy, social stability, and international relations.

Origin and medical use of fentanyl

Fentanyl was developed in the 1960s as a pain reliever for hospital use. In the medical field, it remains a key tool for treating severe pain, especially in surgery, palliative care, and cancer patients. Under medical supervision, its use is safe and effective.

The problem arises when this substance leaves the legal market and begins to be produced clandestinely. On the black market, fentanyl is manufactured without controls, in unpredictable doses, and is mixed with other drugs such as heroin, cocaine, or methamphetamines, often without the user’s knowledge.

The fentanyl crisis in the United States

The United States is the epicenter of the crisis. In recent years, fentanyl has become the leading cause of overdose deaths in the country. Its low cost and enormous potency have made it attractive to criminal networks, which use it to enhance other drugs and maximize profits.

The social impact is devastating. Entire families are experiencing irreparable losses, healthcare systems are overwhelmed, and whole communities, both urban and rural, are facing profound decline. The crisis does not discriminate based on age, social class, or region: it affects young people, adults, and the elderly.

Why is fentanyl so lethal?

The main reason it’s dangerous is its potency. A minimal dose can be enough to cause a fatal overdose. Furthermore, when mixed with other substances, the user loses all sense of the amount ingested.

Another key factor is how quickly it acts in the body. Fentanyl depresses the respiratory system, which can lead to death within minutes if there is no immediate intervention.

The role of drug trafficking and illegal production

The illegal production and distribution of fentanyl is a global phenomenon. The chemical precursors are typically manufactured in different countries, then assembled in clandestine laboratories, and finally distributed through transnational networks.

This has turned fentanyl into a geopolitical problem. Governments must coordinate efforts to control chemical precursors, combat drug trafficking, and strengthen borders, while also recognizing that this is a public health crisis.

The challenge for the rest of the world

Although the United States accounts for the majority of deaths, other countries are beginning to register warning signs. In Latin America, Europe, and Asia, cases of drugs adulterated with fentanyl are increasingly being detected, raising the risk of overdose even among occasional users.

The American experience serves as a warning. Without preventative policies, prepared health systems, and international cooperation, the crisis could be replicated in other regions.

Prevention, treatment and public policies

Addressing the fentanyl problem requires a comprehensive approach. Prevention is key, especially through education and information. Many deaths occur because people are unaware they are using an extremely dangerous substance.

Access to addiction treatment, the availability of medications to reverse overdoses, and the strengthening of healthcare systems are fundamental pillars. At the same time, it is necessary to combat the criminal organizations that profit from this drug.

A threat that demands a global response

Fentanyl is not just a problem in the United States. It is a global threat that challenges governments, healthcare systems, and entire societies. Its spread demonstrates how quickly drug trafficking adapts to market opportunities, even at the cost of thousands of lives.

The fight against this deadly drug requires international cooperation, evidence-based policies, and a human-centered approach that understands addiction as a public health problem. Otherwise, the world risks facing an even greater crisis in the coming years.

Source: https://www.aurora-israel.co.il/en/fentanyl-lethal-drug-United-States/

A new publication by the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) finds that drug use in Afghanistan remains dominated by traditional substances, while the use of synthetic substances and misused pharmaceutical drugs is increasing. In this assessment, men most frequently cited cannabis (46%) and opium (19%) as the drugs used in their communities, while “Tablet K” (11%) and methamphetamine (7%) were also mentioned.

This publication is the third and final volume of UNODC’s National Survey on Drug Use in Afghanistan (NSDA), funded by UNDP. It builds on two earlier health-focused volumes on mapping of facilities for treatment of substance use disorders and assessing high-risk drug use. The last national measurement of drug use in Afghanistan was in 2015.

The findings highlight the economic burden of household dependence. The cost of substances such as methamphetamine and opium can exceed a full day’s wage. For example, one day of methamphetamine use can cost up to 138% of a casual worker’s daily income or 67% of a skilled worker’s wage. Respondents linked ongoing drug use mainly to poverty, unemployment, and financial hardship. They also cited physical pain and ill health, psychological distress, family challenges, and dependence. Overall, the results show strong links between substance use and wider socio-economic pressures.

“Our findings show drug use is closely linked to poverty, unemployment, and untreated health needs. Effective responses must integrate treatment and harm reduction with primary health care, mental health support, and social protection to reduce harmful self-medication and support recovery”. Said Mr Oliver Stolpe, UNODC Regional Representative, Regional Office for Afghanistan, Central Asia, Iran, and Pakistan.

“This national survey gives us a clear picture of the realities of drug use in Afghanistan and the challenges people are facing. The findings will help shape stronger policies and programmes to address the health dimensions related to drug use, support recovery, and tackle the root causes of drug use, including lack of jobs and economic opportunities. It also shows what we can achieve when UN agencies work together, combining our strengths to deliver better results for the Afghan people.” Said Mr. Stephen Rodriques, UNDP Resident Representative in Afghanistan.

Earlier findings from UNODC’s High-Risk Drug Use Survey emphasis the health risks associated with Afghanistan’s changing drug landscape. The survey found that 8% reported having injected drugs in their lifetime, and among those who injected, more than 75% reported sharing needles and around half reported inconsistent access to sterile equipment, pointing to gaps in harm reduction coverage.

A gender gap was also evident, with only 29% of women reporting treatment compared with 53% of men, underscoring the need to expand women-specific services.

While de facto authorities report treating large numbers of people who use drugs, the first volume in this series, UNODC’s mapping of facilities for treatment of substance use disorders, shows that major gaps persist in distribution, accessibility, quality, and gender coverage. Nearly two-thirds of facilities serve men only, 17.1% serve women only, and in the 32 provinces surveyed, just over one-third have services available for women. The mapping also found ongoing constraints, including shortages of qualified health professionals and insufficient infrastructure.

“These studies are essential to further guide the response of the de facto authorities, donors, UN and partners to this extremely serious problem. The study recommends a people-centred response: putting people first by ending the stigma and discrimination surrounding drug use,” said Georgette Gagnon, Officer in Charge of UNAMA and Deputy Special Representative of the UN Secretary-General in Afghanistan. “We reiterate that prevention is the most essential, cost-effective strategy to halt the flow of drugs, protect communities, and reduce demand.”

Based on the three volumes and international standards, UNODC recommends expanding voluntary, rights-based treatment and harm reduction services for men and women, alongside investments in health worker training and minimum facility standards. Responses should be linked to primary health care, mental health and psychosocial support, and social protection and employment assistance to address poverty, pain and distress. Interventions should also be tailored to provincial drug market patterns and reduce the burden on households through family-centred services and livelihood support for people in treatment.

The three reports can be accessed via the links below:

  1. Afghanistan Drug Insights, Volume 3: Mapping of Facilities for Treatment of Substance Use Disorders: Addressing Service Provision Challenges in a Humanitarian Crisishttps://www.unodc.org/documents/cropmonitoring/Afghanistan/Afghanistan_Drug_Insights_V3.pdf
  2. Afghanistan Drug Insights, Volume 5: High Risk Drug Use in Afghanistan: https://www.unodc.org/coafg/uploads/documents/Afghanistan_Drug_Insights_Volume_5.pdf
  3. Afghanistan Drug Use Assessment 2025: https://www.unodc.org/documents/crop-monitoring/Afghanistan/Afghanistan_drug_use_assessment_2026.pdf

Source: https://www.unodc.org/coafg/en/Press-Release/unodc-report-finds-drug-use-in-afghanistan-is-shifting-toward-synthetic-drugs-and-the-misuse-of-pharmaceutical-drugs.html

The previous site of the overdose prevention site is seen on the intersection of Seymour Street and Helmcken Street. The site moved to Howe Street in April 2024, which has now closed. (Justine Boulin/CBC)

A Vancouver overdose prevention site has closed less than two years after it moved from its previous location, raising concerns among health officials and harm reduction advocates as the province sees record number of overdose calls to emergency services.

The Thomus Donaghy Overdose Prevention Site, located at 1060 Howe St., shut its doors Saturday, according to Vancouver Coastal Health.

The health authority says the owner of the building, Prima Properties, notified them to leave the property by the end of January after hearing a number of complaints from nearby residents.

CBC News reached out to the building’s owner to understand the scope and nature of the complaints but did not hear back by deadline. 

Dr. Patricia Daly, VCH’s chief medical health officer said the health authority took steps to address neighbourhood concerns, including hiring security, conducting needle sweeps, and placing staff on the sidewalk to prevent disorder.

“I myself frequently went down and observed that things seemed to be operating as they should,” Daly said.

The Howe Street location opened after the site was moved from Seymour Street in Yaletown in April 2024 following public safety concerns and backlash from nearby residents.

“It was actually a very good location, not visible to people on the street,” Daly said. 

It was the only one of its kind in what VCH calls the Vancouver City Centre area, which includes most of downtown, the West End and Fairview.

“That neighbourhood has the second highest rate of overdose deaths in our region, and the third highest rate in the entire province,” Daly said.

Daly says the OPS typically saw about 400 to 500 visits per week and has reversed more than 300 overdoses since its opening.

Across Vancouver, there are 12 overdose prevention sites, most of them located in the Downtown Eastside. But with the latest closure, that number drops to 11.

People who relied on the site will be directed to services in the Downtown Eastside, which is about a 30-minute walk away.

************

Earlier this week, the B.C. Centre for Disease Control issued a province-wide drug alert, noting new substances in the unregulated drug supply are putting people at risk province-wide. 

It says medetomidine, used primarily by veterinarians to sedate animals, is now being mixed with opioids like fentanyl.

Harm reduction and recovery advocate Guy Felicella said closing overdose prevention sites at a time like this is “disappointing and sad.”

“With the drug supply this deadly, not only you’re going to see people consuming substances out in the community, we could also witness people dying out in the community,” he said.

Felicella says overdose prevention sites played a critical role in his personal life. 

“I struggled in this area and the Downtown Eastside for decades and I was brought back to life multiple times at these services,” he said. 

Daly says the health authority is working with the City of Vancouver and other partners to identify a permanent or at least a temporary replacement location but she says it has become increasingly difficult to find a location that would host overdose prevention services.

“We hope to have something available on at least a temporary basis within the next week or two,” she said.

Source: https://www.cbc.ca/news/canada/british-columbia/thomus-donaghy-overdose-prevention-site-closing-9.7069806

 

Image via Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration

by Leah Harris – filtermag.org – February 4, 2026

At a sumptuous resort just outside Washington, DC, on February 2 for “Prevention Day,” Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. announced his Safety Through Recovery, Engagement and Evidence-based Treatment and Supports (STREETS) Initiative. He opened by scapegoating people who use drugs as “negative producers” and “drags on the whole [health care] system.” 

STREETS is billed as a $100-million investment to “solve long-standing homelessness issues, fight opioid addiction and improve public safety by expanding treatment.” It will be piloted in eight as-yet-unspecified cities, and is designed to operate in tandem with “assisted outpatient treatment” (AOT)—court-ordered psychiatric probation, similar to probation for drug violations. AOT saddles participants with the ever-present threat of being involuntarily committed to a psychiatric facility for noncompliance, or even just a technical violation. HHS will soon offer $10 million in AOT grants (though this amount has been higher in previous years). 

Kennedy now wants provider organizations to “take charge of an addict” for a period of one to three years. Providers would receive bundled payments if they ensure that the people in their custody remain in compliance with an abstinence-only model. This will prove beneficial to providers with stake in urinalysis testing—possibly the most notorious financial scheme in the rehab industry—but is not likely to result in long-term abstinence. It also incentivizes providers to employ policies that are increasingly punitive, result in misleading data, or both.

“While ICE terrorizes our families and communities, STREETS will do little to address our addictions, mental health and homelessness crises.”

STREETS furthers President Donald Trump’s July 2025 executive order titled “Ending Crime and Disorder on America’s Streets,” which was widely condemned as a declaration of war on unhoused people. The Legal Defense Fund likened it to a resurrection of the Black Codes preceding today’s “vagrancy” laws.

The Housing First model, which does not require abstinence as a precondition of access to permanent supportive housing, was created to address the failures of the “tough on homelessness” approach favored in the 1980s. Trump’s HHS has characterized Housing First and harm reduction-based programs as “misguided,” falsely claiming that they’ve been ineffective and “enabled future drug use.” This is reminiscent of proponents of involuntary commitment falsely contending that deinstitutionalization failed, when it was never fully implemented and was arguably still the most successful decarceration effort in United States history.

“While ICE terrorizes our families and communities, STREETS will do little to address our addictions, mental health and homelessness crises,” former Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration official Paolo del Vecchio told Filter, “turning away from proven harm reduction and Housing First approaches while embracing failed practices of coercion and criminalization.”

In red and blue jurisdictions alike, messaging is shifting from public health to public safety. Policymakers are expanding the reach of civil commitment laws to remove unhoused people from public view, disappeared into a vast system of coercive programs. Some fear these may include forced labor farms and detention camps.

Investment in faith-based treatment and “outcome-oriented” payment models all but guarantee increased coercion from providers.

In 2025 the White House announced its Faith Office, which supports “faith-based entities, community organizations and houses of worship” in competing on “a level playing field” for federal grants and other funding opportunities.

“Faith-based organizations play a critical role in helping people re-establish their connections to community,” Kennedy, a 12-step devotee, told the audience on February 2. The same day, Faith Center Director Monty Burks spoke at a separate, virtual event introducing STREETS to community stakeholders.

Several of the Prevention Day event speakers signaled the desire to phase out the health insurance industry’s current fee-for-service models, in which providers are reimbursed based on quantity, and instead use “outcome-oriented” or “values-based” payments that incentivize based on quality—and are still rife with inequities. The costs and administrative burdens of both approaches could be eliminated if we ditched the predatory health insurance industry in favor of Medicare for All.

Investment in faith-based treatment and “outcome-oriented” payment models all but guarantee increased coercion from providers, potentially in violation of the First Amendment

In January, a separate executive order establishing the “Great American Recovery Initiative” (of which Kennedy is a co-chair) warned that most people who need treatment don’t think that they do. It appears that the public is being primed for the widespread involuntary detention of unhoused people who use drugs and/or have visible symptoms of mental illness. 

“We intervene early,” Kennedy told Chris Cuomo of News Nation on February 3. “We catch people on the street and channel them into treatment, out of crisis through detox, treatment, outpatient and into sober housing.” 

Cuomo gently pushed back: “You can’t make people get treatment if they don’t want to.”

“We have a community care program that involves the courts,” Kennedy retorted. This, he said, is a more “efficient, economic and humane” approach to those who refuse services.

Source: https://filtermag.org/hhs-streets-initiative-treatment-prevention-day/amp/


 

 

     Staff Sgt. Shane Sanders  – 161st Air Refueling Wing    

Red Ribbon Week, the nation’s largest and longest running drug prevention campaign, serves as a reminder of the importance of prevention, education, and community involvement.

by Staff Sgt. Shane Sanders  – 01.28.2026 – PHOENIX, ARIZONA, UNITED STATES

Observed annually from Oct. 23 through Oct. 31, the campaign brings together schools, families, and organizations nationwide to promote drug-free lifestyles and encourage young people to make healthy choices.

The campaign was established in honor of Drug Enforcement Administration Special Agent Enrique “Kiki” Camarena, who was killed in 1985 while investigating drug cartels in Mexico. His sacrifice sparked a national movement symbolized by the red ribbon, which represents a collective stand against substance misuse and a commitment to protecting future generations. Since then, Red Ribbon Week has educated millions through educational programs, student pledges, rallies, and prevention-focused activities.

In Arizona, the Counterdrug Task Force’s Drug Demand Reduction and Outreach (DDRO) program has played an increasing role in Red Ribbon Week by expanding statewide prevention efforts and access to education and outreach services.

In 2023, DDRO recorded 8,107 engagements during Red Ribbon Week, along with 8,050 student pledges. In 2024, those numbers tripled to 25,183 engagements and 11,110 pledges. In 2025, DDRO reached a new milestone, achieving 82,829 engagements and 28,236 student pledges during the campaign.

These figures represent more than attendance totals, they reflect points of connection where prevention messaging reached students, families, and communities. Engagements included in-person classroom presentations, community outreach events, public service announcements, online interactions, YouTube views, and joint outreach efforts conducted with the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA). DDRO also expanded access through virtual presentations, ensuring schools and organizations unable to host in-person events could still participate.

A major enhancement in 2025 was DDRO’s decision to extend Red Ribbon Week outreach beyond the traditional calendar. Instead of limiting activities to a single week, prevention efforts were expanded from Oct. 1 through Nov. 5. This extended timeframe provided schools greater flexibility to participate, increased accessibility for underserved communities, and amplified statewide impact.

According to Daniel Morehouse, Community Outreach Specialist with the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration, collaboration between DDRO and DEA played a critical role in amplifying prevention messaging during this year’s Red Ribbon Week. He emphasized that the scale of reach achieved in 2025 would not have been possible without shared resources and coordinated efforts. When agencies work together, Morehouse noted, audiences, particularly youth, are more engaged and receptive.

“Our drive for a Fentanyl Free America requires not just the enforcement side of things, but also outreach and education,” Morehouse said, adding that DDRO’s professionalism and prevention expertise significantly strengthens DEA’s prevention tools and messaging.

The success of DDRO’s Red Ribbon Week is rooted in strong partnerships. Schools across Arizona coordinated schedules, engaged students, and supported prevention activities. Community organizations, prevention coalitions, and agency partners worked alongside DDRO to strengthen outreach and reinforce consistent prevention messaging.

Merilee Fowler, Executive Director of the Substance Awareness Coalition Leaders of Arizona, highlighted the importance of collaboration in achieving meaningful impact. She shared that it was inspiring to see the number of students and adults reached during the 2025 campaign; noting that students across Arizona proudly pledged to grow up safe, healthy, and drug-free.

Fowler emphasized that coordinated prevention efforts strengthen communities statewide. When prevention organizations and coalitions work together, she explained, they create collective impact that improves the ability to prevent and reduce substance use. She also stressed the importance of a comprehensive approach that balances enforcement with education and outreach.

“Preventing and solving drug problems in our communities is complex and requires a combination of enforcement, education, and outreach,” Fowler said. “Success depends on all of us working together as a united team.”

She further noted that effective prevention must include families as well as youth. Partnerships among DDRO, SACLAZ, DEA, and other organizations have expanded outreach to parents and caregivers, and open conversations at home about the real harms of substance use play a critical role in prevention, she said.

U.S. Arizona Air National Guard Senior Master Sgt. Michael Gunderson, serves as the Non-Commission Officer in Charge of Arizona DDRO. In this role, Gunderson oversees the planning, coordination, and execution of statewide substance-use prevention and education efforts, working closely with schools, community coalitions, law-enforcement agencies, and prevention partners.

“At the heart of Red Ribbon Week and DDRO’s expanding efforts are the students themselves. Each pledge represents a personal commitment, and each engagement reflects a conversation that may influence future decisions,” said Gunderson. “The continued growth of DDRO’s Red Ribbon Week outreach demonstrates the power of prevention when communities unite around a shared purpose, protecting youth, honoring legacy, and building healthier, safer futures.”

As DDRO continues to grow, the program remains committed to refining its practices through evaluation, evidence-based strategies, and flexible delivery methods tailored to community needs. These efforts ensure prevention messaging remains accessible, relevant, and effective.

Source: https://www.dvidshub.net/news/556965/arizona-red-ribbon-week-expands-reach-spreading-prevention-awareness

The U.S. government recently released updated Dietary Guidelines for Americans that include new advice about alcohol. These changes are part of health advice that the government updates every five years, with the newest version released in early 2026.

 

What the New Guidelines Say

 In past years, the U.S. said that women could have up to one drink per day and men could have up to two drinks per day if they chose to drink alcohol. But the new guidelines removed those specific daily limits. Now, the main message is that people should “consume less alcohol for overall better health.” There’s no fixed number of drinks in the new advice.

The change doesn’t mean alcohol is “healthy.” It’s simply because the government no longer lists a safe number of drinks per day. Instead, it focuses on general moderation and a healthy diet that includes better food choices.

 

Why Healthcare Providers Are Worried

 Not all health experts agree with this change. Many doctors and public health groups are concerned for several reasons:

  • Lack of clear limits. Without specific numbers, some people might think it’s okay to drink more than before. This could lead to more health problems.
  • Alcohol and health risks. Many studies show that even small amounts of alcohol can increase the risk of cancer, liver disease, heart problems, and injuries. Research suggests drinking carries risk from the first drink and the risk goes up with more alcohol use.1
  • Scientists wanted stronger warnings. Public health experts have recommended clearer messages, including possibly warning labels on alcohol that say alcohol causes cancer, similar to tobacco warnings.2

Some healthcare providers also worry that the changes were influenced more by the alcohol industry than by science, which could weaken the health message.

As a comparison, Canadian health authorities have shared a risk-based system that tells people how health risks change with how much alcohol they drink:3

  • 0 drinks per week — safest for health
  • Up to 2 drinks per week — lowest risk of harm
  • 3–6 drinks per week — risk goes up more
  • 7 or more drinks per week — risk of serious problems goes up a lot
  • More than 2 drinks at one time increases risk of injury, violence, or accidents
  • No alcohol is safest during pregnancy or breastfeeding

This shows a clear scale of risk — from no drinking at all to higher risk — so people can see how their drinking might affect their health.

In the U.S., the removal of drink-specific targets leaves American adults without clear numbers to guide their daily drinking choices. Some healthcare professionals find this to be less helpful for preventing harm.

 

What This Means for You and Your Family

 If you choose to drink alcohol, these guidelines mean it’s important to:

  • Understand that any amount of drinking carries some risk.
  • Keep any alcohol locked up to help prevent underage drinking.
  • Talk with a doctor if you have questions about drinking and your health.

In other words, health experts still agree that drinking less is better for your health — even if the exact wording and approach are changing. Learn more about alcohol, its relationship to cancer and other health risks, and how to reduce the harms around drinking in our Alcohol Resource Center.

SOURCE: https://drugfree.org/article/new-u-s-alcohol-guidelines-2025-2030-why-some-doctors-are-concerned/

Boston University School of Public Health – News Release
by Jillian McKoy, Michael Saunders
OPENING STATEMENT BY NDPA:
We publish this article for its general interest, whilst at the same time noticing several remarks favouring policy change, which suggest this article may be loaded with some degree of bias – nevertheless it is worthy of study … we recommend that readers just keep a pinch of salt handy!

As the federal government begins to loosen restrictions on cannabis, a new study found that removing legal barriers to cannabis use may reduce daily opioid use and, thus, the risk of opioid-related overdoses among people who inject drugs

Legalizing cannabis for both medical and recreational use may lead to a decline in daily opioid use among people who inject drugs in the United States, according to a new study led by a Boston University School of Public Health researcher (BUSPH).

Published in the journal Drug and Alcohol Dependence, the study found that US states that legalized marijuana for medical and adult recreational use saw a 9-to-11-percentage-point decline in daily opioid use among this population, compared to states that legalized marijuana for medical use only.

While the harms and benefits of cannabis use and cannabis reform continue to be debated on the national stage, these findings highlight one major potential advantage of widespread access to marijuana: this increased access may enable people to substitute their use of the unstable and toxic opioid  supply with comparatively safer cannabis and, thus, lower their chances of experiencing opioid-related harms or dying from an overdose. In the US, opioids contribute to more than 75 percent of fatal drug overdoses.

The study was published on the heels of a significant shift in US drug policy that will indeed lower restrictions on cannabis. Last December, President Donald Trump signed an executive order to downgrade cannabis from a Schedule 1 classification (assigned to drugs such as heroin and ecstasy) to a Schedule 3 classification, which refers to drugs that pose minimal to moderate risk of physical or psychological dependence. Nearly all US states and Washington, DC have legalized cannabis for medical use, while 48 percent of states allow cannabis for adult recreational use.

People who inject drugs are part of a population that is at the epicenter of the opioid crisis in America, and they stand to benefit the most from policies that increase access to cannabis. By focusing on this group, the study builds upon past research on cannabis use and opioid mortality that has primarily examined the general population—which has a lower risk of experiencing opioid-related harms—with mixed results.

“The magnitude of decrease in opioid use that we observed among a population that is experienced with opioid use and likely to experience unpleasant withdrawal symptoms after reducing this use is very profound and important,” says study lead and corresponding author Dr. Danielle Haley, assistant professor of community health sciences at BUSPH. 

The takeaway, she says, is that creating a safe and regulated supply of a substance is a valuable overdose prevention tactic because it can reduce use of non-regulated and more dangerous substances. “Legalized cannabis tends to be higher quality and more potent. As these products become more available and cheaper, people might be able to reduce their opioid use even without increasing how often they use cannabis.” 

For the study, Dr. Haley and colleagues utilized data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention’s National HIV Behavioral Surveillance, including self-reported use of cannabis and non-medical opioid use among within the last 12 months among nearly 29,000 people who inject drugs, comparing data from states that did not legalize cannabis, legalized it for medical use only, or legalized it for both medical and adult recreational use. The data spanned 13 states in four waves: 2012, 2015, 2018, and 2022.

The decline in opioid use was equivalent across all racial and ethnic groups, as well as among males and females. 

“This study adds to a growing body of evidence that sensible changes to our outdated drug policies can have a positive health impact, especially among some of our most vulnerable neighbors,” says study coauthor Dr. Leo Beletsky, professor of law and health sciences at Northeastern University.

The team did not observe overall links between cannabis legalization and daily cannabis use, but cannabis use did increase by five percentage points among White participants living in states that transitioned from no legalization to legalizing cannabis for medical use only. This increase among White participants could reflect long-standing racial inequities in healthcare that make it easier for White people to navigate health systems and services than people of other races, the researchers say.

Understanding how policies related to substance use benefit the health of people who use drugs is essential for effective cannabis reform. 

“What this study shows is the potential impact of decriminalization paired with access to a regulated supply,” says Stephen Murray, adjunct clinical assistant professor of community health sciences at BUSPH, who is also an overdose survivor and former paramedic with expertise in overdose prevention. Murray was not involved in the study. “When legal barriers are removed and people have safer alternatives available, we see meaningful reductions in daily opioid use—even among people with long histories of injection drug use. That’s a powerful signal.”

But the findings also serve as a reminder that the design and implementation of these policies matter, he says. “Commercialized access to cannabis does not benefit all communities equally, and without intentional equity-focused policy, longstanding racial disparities in healthcare access and criminalization can persist even under legalization.”

The researchers say future research should further investigate links between legal medical and recreational cannabis and reduced opioid use, as well consider benefits in other areas, such as a reduction in cases of blood-borne infections through injection.

The study’s senior author is Dr. Hannah Cooper, Rollins Chair of Substance Use Disorders Research and professor of behavioral, social, and health education sciences at Emory University’s Rollins School of Public Health.

** 

About Boston University School of Public Health 

Founded in 1976, Boston University School of Public Health is one of the top ten ranked schools of public health in the world. It offers master’s- and doctoral-level education in public health. The faculty in six departments conduct policy-changing public health research around the world, with the mission of improving the health of populations—especially the disadvantaged, underserved, and vulnerable—locally and globally.

SOURCE:

by Deborah Brauser, Medscape Medical News – January 16, 2026

Researchers have identified the specific number of weekly delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) units beyond which the risk for cannabis use disorder (CUD) increases.

Using standard THC units — defined as 5 mg of THC per unit — the investigators found that consuming more than 8.3 units per week among adults (about 41 mg of THC) and more than 6.0 units per week among adolescents (about 30 mg of THC) represented the optimal cutoffs for increased risk for any CUD.

Higher thresholds — 13.4 units per week for adults and 6.45 units per week for adolescents — were associated with the risk for moderate-to-severe CUD. The UK study, which included adults and teens, showed the accuracy of using weekly standard THC units to identify CUD was high across all models assessed.

Lead author Rachel Lees Thorne, MD, Addiction and Mental Health Group, Department of Psychology at the University of Bath, Bath, England, noted that 8 units per week equate to approximately 0.33 g of herbal cannabis on the UK market.

“This will likely be a lower amount than people who use cannabis regularly would typically consume and highlights that CUD can occur even with relatively lower levels of consumption,” Thorne told Medscape Medical News.

She added that although the findings may not be generalizable to other settings where cannabis products and use patterns differ, the investigators hope that framing use in THC units could help clinicians have more informed conversations with patients and better track cannabis-related behaviors.

The investigators also noted that theirs is the first study to estimate risk thresholds for CUD based on standard THC units mirroring the way alcohol units are used to calculate higher risk for drinking.

The findings were published online on January 12 in Addiction.

Risk Threshold

About 22% of individuals who use cannabis go on to develop CUD, a pattern of use that leads to clinically significant distress and/or impairment. The investigators noted that in the UK, cannabis use is cited as a problem drug by 87% of patients younger than 18 years who are in drug treatment programs.

A paper published in 2019 proposed that in the US, a “standard THC unit” should be set at 5 mg of THC across all cannabis products and methods of administration.

In 2021, NOT-DA-21-049: Notice of Information: Establishment of a Standard THC Unit to be used in Research     the US National Institutes of Health (NIH) agreed, defining a standard THC unit as “any formulation of cannabis plant material or extract that contains 5 mg of THC.” In its announcement, the NIH added that the definition would apply to any future applications proposing research on cannabis or THC.

In the current study, the investigators used data from the observational CannTeen study of 65 adults aged 26-29 years (54% men) and 85 teens aged 16-17 years (56% girls) from London who reported using cannabis at least once during the 1-year study period.

The Enhanced Cannabis Timeline Followback was used to estimate mean weekly THC units by assessing quantity, frequency, and potency of consumed cannabis. A diagnosis of CUD was assessed using the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition, with “any CUD” describing a composite of mild, moderate, or severe versions of the condition.

Receiver operating characteristic curve models were used to determine how well weekly standard THC units could distinguish between no CUD and either any CUD or moderate/severe CUD.

Results showed an area under the curve (AUC) of < 0.7 for all models assessing discrimination accuracy of weekly standard THC units on CUD.

For determining no CUD from any CUD, the AUC was 0.79 in the adult-only model and an “outstanding” 0.94 for adolescents. The AUCs were 0.82 and 0.94, respectively, for determining no CUD from moderate/severe CUD.

The optimal risk cutoffs for any CUD were 8.3 units of THC per week for adults and 6.0 units per week for adolescents; for moderate/severe CUD, the optimal risk thresholds were 13.4 and 6.45 units per week, respectively.

Measuring cannabis use with standard THC units “appears to show good discrimination accuracy of [CUD] at different severities and in different age groups,” the investigators wrote.

“Safer levels of cannabis use, defined by low weekly standard THC unit consumption, could be recommended in lower risk cannabis use guidelines,” they added. 

‘A Much Needed Start’

In an expert roundup by the Science Media Centre, Marta Di Forti, MD, PhD , Institute of Psychiatry, Psychology & Neuroscience at King’s College London in London, England, noted that using this type of standardized measurement could become an “important tool” in both research and clinical settings — in about the same way standardized alcohol units have become.

However, “it is important to remember that cannabis, unlike alcohol, does not contain only one active ingredient but over 144 cannabinoids,” said Di Forti, who was not involved in the current research.

Still, THC units are, “undoubtedly, a very important and much needed start,” she added.

David Nutt, DM, Edmond J. Safra Professor of Neuropsychopharmacology and director of the Neuropsychopharmacology Unit in the Division of Brain Sciences – Faculty of Medicine at Imperial College London in London, noted in the roundup that the analysis provided a “welcome update” on recreational THC risks that can lead to dependence.

“What needs to be done now is to facilitate recreational cannabis users in determining exactly how much they are using to help them control their risk,” Nutt said.

“The best way would be through a regulated cannabis market with clear product quality and identification of unit amounts…plus a credible and honest educational program,” he added.

Source: Medscape Medical News

by the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs (ACMD) – 28 January 2026

The ACMD has advised the government ketamine should remain a class B controlled substance, but that police forces and health care professionals must receive greater support to better identify, prevent and respond to ketamine‑related harms.

In January 2025, the government asked the ACMD to review the prevalence and harms of the misuse of ketamine. After examining the latest evidence, engaging with people with lived or living experience with the substance, consulting stakeholders, and reviewing academic research, the ACMD concluded ketamine should not be reclassified and should remain in class B.

Findings and decisions

In reaching its decision, the ACMD noted that the acute harms of ketamine – such as toxicity and deaths – align with its current class B status.

The ACMD also expressed concern about the growing use of high‑dose ketamine – described in some cases as “chronic”- and the long‑term harms associated with it.

However, as these harms were established in the 2013 ketamine assessment, the group focused its discussions on identifying new and emerging risks.

The ACMD report highlighted that many acute harms experienced by ketamine users are likely to be significantly influenced by using other drugs at the same time, and that reclassifying ketamine in isolation would unlikely reduce prevalence or misuse.

Individuals with personal experience of ketamine use and harms who contributed to the review said they did not believe upgrading ketamine to class A would reduce its use. Health and social care professionals similarly, largely, voiced opposition to reclassification.

Ultimately, the ACMD concluded that a public health‑centred approach is essential for reducing ketamine-related harms. This approach requires co-ordinated action across public bodies, health services, and community organisations.

The ACMD Chair Professor David Wood said in relation to the report:

The ACMD report highlights the need for a ‘whole system approach’ through its recommendations to tackle issues related to ketamine use, as no single recommendation is sufficient to do this alone.

Recommendations  

The ACMD’s recommendations are outlined in full in their report. This includes recommendations on classification, improving treatment of ketamine-related harms, international control, intelligence gathering, education and training, harm reduction and research.

Source: https://www.gov.uk/government/news/acmd-announces-decision-on-the-classification-of-ketamine

by Jan Hoffman, NY Times – 15.12.2025

Medetomidine, a veterinary sedative, mixed into fentanyl has sent thousands to hospitals, not only for overdose but for life-threatening withdrawal. It is spreading to other cities.

Joseph is newly in recovery from fentanyl mixed with medetomidine, a veterinary sedative. Philadelphia’s hospitals are strained by cases of medetomidine withdrawal, which have life-threatening symptoms.

Around 2 a.m., Joseph felt the withdrawal coming on, sudden and hard. He fell to the floor convulsing, vomiting ferociously. The delirium and hallucinations were starting.

He shook awake his friend, who had let him in earlier to shower, wash his clothes and grab some sleep. “Do you have a few dollars?” he pleaded. “I have to get right.”

The friend, a community outreach worker who had been trying for years to get him into treatment, looked up at him standing over her raving and unfocused.

“Either leave or let me call an ambulance,” she demanded.

At 34, Joseph (who, with his friend, recounted the evening in interviews with The New York Times) had been through opioid withdrawals many times — on Philadelphia streets, in jail, in rehab. But he had never experienced anything as terrifyingly all-consuming as this.

A new drug has been saturating the fentanyl supply in Philadelphia and moving to other cities throughout the East and Midwestern United States: medetomidine, a powerful veterinary sedative that causes almost instantaneous blackouts and, if not used every few hours, brings on life-threatening withdrawal symptoms.

It has created a new type of drug crisis — one that is occasioned not by overdosing on the drug, but by withdrawing from it.

Source: https://www.nytimes.com/2025/12/15/health/medetomidine-withdrawal-symptoms-treatment.html?

By Corinne Boyer – Montreal City News – January 25, 2026 

A new remote service has launched in Quebec to help prevent drug overdoses, offering callers access to counselors by phone or video in a province grappling with rising overdose deaths.

Quebec’s overdose crisis has reached alarming levels. A report from the province’s institute for public health shows there were 645 drug overdose deaths in 2024 alone, with projections for 2025 expected to exceed 600.

Drugs: Help and Referral recently introduced the Remote Service for Overdose Prevention (RSOP) to provide immediate support for those at risk.

“In Canada, we’ve seen a decrease of overdoses, in Quebec, we’ve seen the opposite!” said David Galipeau, assistant coordinator at RSOP.

RSOP counselors follow a structured approach, explaining rules to callers, obtaining consent to contact emergency services if necessary, assessing overdose risk, providing wellness checks when there’s no immediate danger, and deleting personal information once the call ends to maintain anonymity.

“Here is really a support,” said Galipeau. “So the person could just use substances completely in silence and will just be there and monitor and see if the person is still well and then punctually just check up on the person. We stay on the phone throughout the entire time. But sometimes, the person just wants to talk about what they’re feeling. Sometimes, it can bring out some emotions and stuff like that. Then we can intervene and we can support those types of cases. But the person can choose the level of which, the support that they get from our team.”

Counselors emphasize that the service is not about stopping drug use but preventing fatal overdoses.

“We’re not there to tell them what to do, we’re not there to stop them from using the drug, we’re not asking them to stop, we’re just asking them to do it with someone, to not do it alone,” said Karelle Chevrier, addiction counselor at RSOP.

Officials note that most overdose-related deaths in Quebec occur when people use drugs alone at home, which significantly increases the risk of a fatal outcome.

“Drug usage in general is very stigmatized in society, and some people, due to that stigmatization and self-stigmatization as well, experience loneliness,” said Galipeau. “It leads them to use substances alone in their house or elsewhere in the city in secluded areas.”

“The danger when we do it alone is so high and we just don’t want people to die basically so just call us to do it with us and we won’t judge you,” added Chevrier. “We’ll be there for you and we’re not going to tell you what to do.”

After the pilot project launched in June 2025 proved successful, RSOP has grown to nearly 30 employees handling 120 to 160 calls a day, with recent spikes reaching 200 daily calls.

“Frequency is slowly going up but it’s more the number of different people that is becoming bigger faster and also we did lose some of our callers because they ended up going to our other program so they used with us and then they stopped using and now they moved on to the regular line where they can talk about how they want to keep sober and they want to stay sober and they want to go to therapy,” said Chevrier.

The service is free, confidential, bilingual, and available seven days a week from 11 a.m. to 2:30 a.m. Callers can connect with an RSOP counselor by contacting Drugs: Help and Referral at 1-800-265-2626 and choosing option 2.

Source: https://montreal.citynews.ca/2026/01/25/quebec-launches-remote-service-drug-overdoses/

Forwarded by Maggie Petito – Dec 31 2025

The following are two articles forwarded by Maggie Petito of Drug Watch International. The first article touches on recruiting young ones as assassins for the rackets/cartels. The second article says: “SFS applauds the Trump Administration for taking this step and encourages it to go further, by expanding the list of individuals and entities working in both countries and broadening it to China and Russia which are also working with Iran to prop up the Maduro regime and weaken the U.S. in the region.”

First article sent by Maggie Petito:

– – The Financial Times – Barney Jopson: “Criminal drug gangs have become a grave threat to European security by flooding the streets with South American cocaine, seeking to corrupt officials and hiring a new wave of paid assassins, according to the EU’s drugs agency. Due to financial crises, terrorism, Covid-19 and the Ukraine war, European policymakers had not paid enough attention to the criminal organisations that had built sprawling drugs businesses, said Alexis Goosdeel, outgoing director of the EU Drugs Agency (EUDA). Now, Europe was belatedly waking up to the “hyper-availability” of illegal drugs and to traffickers’ pervasive attempts to intimidate and corrupt officials in ports, police forces and the judiciary, Goosdeel added. `We discovered the tip of the iceberg and we have not seen what is under the surface,’ he told the Financial Times at the end of his 10-year term as head of the Lisbon-based EUDA. `I think for the moment it’s not even possible to imagine the dimensions.’ This year has served up stark examples. A police union in southern Spain said the state had `lost control’ of the fight against traffickers. A judge said Belgium was at risk of becoming a `narco-state.’ And the killing of an anti-drug activist’s brother in Marseille heightened fears that France was heading the same way. Alexis Goosdeel: ‘Assassination as a service involves young people who are recruited using social media’ Goosdeel warned that the trade in illicit drugs posed a `multidimensional’ menace to Europe, extending from lethal violence to institutional corruption. `The threat today is very high,’ he said.  This month, the European Commission unveiled a new narcotics action plan, calling drug trafficking a `major threat to Europeans’ wellbeing’ that demanded a `stronger, co-ordinated response across the EU…’ Goosdeel said there has been an “encouraging” increase in European criminals finally being extradited from their sanctuaries in Dubai, which remains home to notorious figures including Daniel Kinahan, the Irish boss of the Kinahan organised crime group.”

Second article sent by Maggie Petito:

Drug gangs pose grave threat to European security, agency warns

Scale of Europe’s narcotics crisis ‘not even possible to imagine’, says EUDA director Alexis Goosdeel

The Financial Times    Barney Jopson in Madrid  12-31-25

Criminal drug gangs have become a grave threat to European security by flooding the streets with South American cocaine, seeking to corrupt officials and hiring a new wave of paid assassins, according to the EU’s drugs agency. Due to financial crises, terrorism, Covid-19 and the Ukraine war, European policymakers had not paid enough attention to the criminal organisations that had built sprawling drugs businesses, said Alexis Goosdeel, outgoing director of the EU Drugs Agency (EUDA). Now, Europe was belatedly waking up to the “hyper-availability” of illegal drugs and to traffickers’ pervasive attempts to intimidate and corrupt officials in ports, police forces and the judiciary, Goosdeel added. “We discovered the tip of the iceberg and we have not seen what is under the surface,” he told the Financial Times at the end of his 10-year term as head of the Lisbon-based EUDA. “I think for the moment it’s not even possible to imagine the dimensions.” This year has served up stark examples. A police union in southern Spain said the state had “lost control” of the fight against traffickers. A judge said Belgium was at risk of becoming a “narco-state”.

 And the killing of an anti-drug activist’s brother in Marseille heightened fears that France was heading the same way. Alexis Goosdeel: ‘Assassination as a service involves young people who are recruited using social media’ Goosdeel warned that the trade in illicit drugs posed a “multidimensional” menace to Europe, extending from lethal violence to institutional corruption. “The threat today is very high,” he said.

This month, the European Commission unveiled a new narcotics action plan, calling drug trafficking a “major threat to Europeans’ wellbeing” that demanded a “stronger, co-ordinated response across the EU”. The biggest recent change has been a surge in the production and trafficking of cocaine, mainly from Colombia, Peru and Bolivia, Goosdeel said. “For the last six, seven years we have seen a really exponential increase in the availability of cocaine on the European market, with stable prices, a very high level of purity,” he said. As a result, “there is pressure from the producers to find new customers or to make customers use more”, creating sharper competition between rival drug organisations. Europe is also experiencing a rise of “crime as a service”, including hired assassins to take out rivals and contractors who can set up industrial-scale amphetamine labs. “Assassination as a service involves young people who are recruited using social media,” Goosdeel said. “They are brought to another country to commit a crime, then they are brought back.” Goosdeel said it was not possible to know how US President Donald Trump’s recent strikes on alleged Venezuelan drug trafficking boats would affect Europe “because there is no documentation” and “there were no legal cases brought against those people and those boats”. The ubiquity of drugs in Europe is linked in part to large-scale trafficking via commercial shipping containers, an import route that was far less common 10 years ago, he said. Ports are joining forces to fight trafficking. Some, such as Antwerp, have introduced stricter controls on dockers, including biometric IDs and preset timeframes for access to containers and cranes. But Goosdeel said that had prompted criminal gangs to shift their attention to managers who control container movements. “Criminal organisations will not easily renounce corruption. Corruption is a way for them to reach their objectives,” he said. “They try at every level.” But Goosdeel said there has been an “encouraging” increase in European criminals finally being extradited from their sanctuaries in Dubai, which remains home to notorious figures including Daniel Kinahan, the Irish boss of the Kinahan organised crime group. He argued that governments must go beyond enforcement to address why demand for dangerous substances — both illicit drugs and misused medicines — was rising. “Using substances at different moments in our life or in the day to cope with anxiety, with difficulties or to improve our performance is much more widespread than it was 10 or 20 years ago,” he said. He linked the change to socio-economic pressures, such as the struggles of young people to find a job or afford a home, together with anxiety over Covid and the Ukraine war. “We need to understand that the fact that we have more users doesn’t mean that they are all criminals or all addicts,” Goosdeel said. A new approach would involve more investment in harm reduction, plus new treatment protocols for drug dependence, especially on cocaine. But he said it should also encompass the root causes of drug abuse, even as countries across Europe are pressured to spend less on social welfare and more on defence. “We are at a moment where it’s really time to find a way to reinvest in living together,” he said.

Source: www.drugwatch.org

As 30 Days of Drug Facts comes to an end this December, we encourage you to take time to learn about drugs. When you know the risks and effects, you can prevent misuse, avoid harmful interactions, and recognize warning signs early to help those in need.

Accurate information also protects against the danger of hearing incorrect information from your peers or through social media. Education strengthens both you and your community’s safety by lowering crime and health issues linked to drug abuse.

DEA.gov offers many drug fact sheets where you can find descriptions of a drug’s effects on the body and mind, history, legal status, and other key facts. Remember, you play a vital role in educating your friends, family, and colleagues on how to make healthy, informed decisions. Learn more today.

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image of the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Source: https://www.dea.gov/factsheets?Utm_campaign=20251230_30days&utm_medium=email&utm_source=govdelivery

Published by Michigan State University College of Human Medicine:

Michigan State University College of Human Medicine. (2025). At least 1 in 6 pregnant Michigan women uses cannabis. MSUToday. https://humanmedicine.msu.edu/news/2025-at-least-1-in-6-pregnant-michigan-women-uses-cannabis.html

Marijuana use among pregnant women has exponentially increased over the last 20 years. According to the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG), pregnant women, especially those from high-income countries like the United States, have reported use ranging from 3.9% to 22.6%. This change in the landscape of substance use is observed in states like Michigan where both medical and recreational marijuana are legal. As access expands and perception shifts, researchers are racing to understand the number of pregnant women using marijuana and what factors shape that decision.

A recent study from the University of Michigan analyzed data of self-reported marijuana use and urine toxicology testing from 1,100 mothers in Michigan between 2017 and 2023, finding that 1 in 6 pregnant mothers used marijuana and in some parts of the state, that number is as high as 1 in 4.

Other key findings include:

·    25% reported using marijuana 3 months prior to becoming pregnant

·    12.3% self-reported using marijuana while pregnant

·    13.3% tested positive from urine toxicology testing

When self-reported use was considered together with urine toxicology results, the prevalence reached 16.8%, substantially higher than the national average of 9.8%. This study also found that single pregnant individuals, those with lower educational attainment, individuals who presented with symptoms of depression, or who had a history of Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACEs) had a higher likelihood of prenatal marijuana use.

Why are pregnant women turning to marijuana?

·    Perceived safety: nearly 1 in 5 pregnant women believed that weekly marijuana use poses “no risk”

·    Affordability: Michigan’s cannabis market is one the largest in the country, with prices dropping from ~$267 to $65/ounce in 2025

·    Symptom relief: 81.5% reported using it to relieve stress, anxiety

·    Ease of acquisition: 91.7% of pregnant users said that it was easy to obtain

The increased prevalence of marijuana use discovered in this and many other studies, suggest that many pregnant individuals may not fully understand the risks or may be using marijuana for symptom relief without the guidance of their healthcare provider.

To learn more about the risks of marijuana use during pregnancy and parenthood, visit marijuanaknowthetruth.org/marijuana-and-pregnancy for science-based resources, including fast facts, videos, and the latest research.

Source: Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Ave N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

The Lexington Times

by  Anabel Peterman (This post was originally published by CivicLex) –  January 11, 2026
This story was produced as part of a joint Equitable Cities Reporting Fellowship for Rural-Urban Issues between CivicLex and Next City.

While serving a three-year prison sentence for meth trafficking, Matewood Gerald got the call that she’d soon be a grandmother.

Gerald started abusing drugs when she was just 13, and she says everyone in the small town of Irvine has seen her at her worst. But she had to become the best version of herself for her granddaughter.

“​​I would lay there and think, is she gonna like me? Am I going to be perfect whenever I get out?” Gerald says.

Less than five years later, she is a peer support specialist with Mercy Health Marcum and Wallace Hospital in rural Irvine, Kentucky. It’s the only hospital serving a four-county region, including Estill County. In this role, she and other medical professionals meet with people struggling with active addiction – people who almost always recognize her – and ensure they have clean supplies and are in a safe environment. They always offer rehabilitation services for anyone who’s ready.

Harm reduction measures, like syringe exchanges and narcan distribution, are gaining strength in Estill County. It became a state-certified ‘Recovery Ready’ county last month. The Irvine city council prohibited syringe exchange in 2020, so hospital officials and the Estill County Health Department found creative ways to reach people in active addiction, including a mobile clinic

“It has not always been popular in our area. Actually, just about six months ago, [syringe exchange] wasn’t even allowed in the city limits,” says Trena Lynn Stocker, president of Mercy Health Marcum and Wallace Hospital in Irvine, Kentucky. “We are now garnering support at the city level. We didn’t always have that. We had a police chief that, at one point, if you had fentanyl testing strips, he was going to get you for paraphernalia.”

Across all of Kentucky, too, harm reduction is gaining traction. More than 30 of its counties are deemed ‘recovery ready,’ signifying they run accessible drug and alcohol abuse programs. More than half of the state has implemented harm reduction protocols. These numbers encourage the idea that the Commonwealth is taking steps to protect those battling addiction.

Estill County ranked fifth out of Kentucky’s 120 counties for drug overdose deaths per 100,000 residents in 2024. But that’s an improvement – Estill had the highest rate of overdose deaths statewide in both 2021 and 2023.

These practitioners explain that harm reduction, which brings resources and life-saving materials to people already abusing drugs, is helping save lives in rural Kentucky. Yet, it doesn’t get to the root cause of drug abuse. That’s why they showed up on a rainy Tuesday evening to the Estill Development Alliance’s second Parent Cafe.

It’s one piece of the Estill Pathfinder Initiative Coalition (EPIC), a holistic approach to drug prevention in the local youth that’s inspired by an evidence-based model from overseas. Officials say the Development Alliance supports this programming through its unique development model, focused on being a one-stop shop for community health and wellbeing.

“GIVE THEM SOMETHING TO DO”

Since 1983, the D.A.R.E program has been the standard for drug prevention across America. Police officers give lecture-style presentations to elementary schoolers about the dangers of drug and alcohol use, encouraging them to ‘just say no.’ D.A.R.E does not address root factors in individual communities or teach its students how to be safe if they do engage in drugs. Critics say that’s why the program has been ineffective. Yet, the curriculum is still actively used in many Kentucky schools.

Suzanne Waite has worked in the Estill County school system for years, so she saw these trends firsthand and sought out a different approach. Two years ago, she came across a better fit for residents’ needs, which inspired her to team up with the Estill Development Alliance and create EPIC.

The Icelandic Prevention Model was first conceptualized in the 1990s, when rates of drinking and drug use among European teenagers were at their peak. About 23% of 15- and 16- year olds in Iceland had reported smoking daily, and 42% had drank alcohol in the previous month. 

In response, the Icelandic government decided to implement new regulations for its youth. A mandatory country-wide curfew for children under 16 was set, though that facet of the model hasn’t gained much traction outside of its home country. 

What did stick: parental involvement and bolstering recreational programs for students. When Waite took on leadership of EPIC this year, that’s what she honed in on.

“It’s looking at your community, coming together to address this issue, and looking at things that are more preventative upstream”, Waite says.

The Icelandic prevention model has been adopted by organizations in 19 countries, though EPIC is one of the few official partners in the United States. The process starts with the same in-depth survey that the Icelandic Model uses, provided by a global group called Planet Youth. 

Waite’s learned they can’t always take survey responses at face value, as many teens start off afraid to admit their own drug use. 

“They do ask the questions in multiple ways, like many tests. It’ll say, ‘have you engaged in drugs?’ [and] 23% of them might say yes,” Waite explains. “But amazingly, 85% know a friend that has.”

She says it’s no wonder why kids turn to substance use instead of recreation. The small town of 2,000 has limited infrastructure; at first glance, it can be hard to find variety in activities, especially for kids.

“There’s no local movie theater. There’s no local bowling alley. There’s no local skating rink. You’ve got to go out of town for all of those things. And there’s not a community center that would just be [for] fun activity,” Waite says. “And then, there’s no public transportation.”

Many of these kids can only congregate with each other at school. So that’s where Waite started: a new leadership club at Estill County High School. In EPIC’s first two years, students launched and took full charge of the “Council of Engineers Leading for Tomorrow.”

“Our schools’ mascots are the engineers,” Waite explains. “Last year’s group, they did a color run to raise some funding [and] raise some awareness … Currently, we got a grant through the Kentucky Retail Survey Project. And we went out into the environment and did an environmental scan of the different tobacco retailer outlets here.”

These students are learning about environmental factors that correlate to certain shops selling tobacco products to underage customers. Another advantage of this ‘environmental scan’ is that they are eagerly engaging with the Estill County community and local leadership.

“We actually got them on the agendas for four different groups in the county,” Waite says. The club was signed up to present this environmental scan at the local city council, fiscal court, school board and Estill Development Alliance’s chamber meeting. “[I told them], ‘OK, you don’t have to do all four. But these are the adults that would like to hear from you and what you found out.’ And they said, ‘we’ll do them all!’” 

It gives young students a sense of accomplishment and involvement, especially hard to find in a rural county, she says. That’s what resonated most with EPIC when its leaders learned about the Icelandic Prevention Model from Planet Youth.

“Drug abuse ends up being because something is broken. So, what is broken that you’re trying to fix?” Waite says. “We’re trying to let you see that you don’t have to be dependent upon some substance, to get that feeling of, ‘I feel good about myself,’ if you can get that from people in your life that do care about you.”

EPIC is planning a lot more activities; through a grant with Operation UNITE, she anticipates hosting a youth talent show in the spring, where local musicians will mentor students hoping to perform. And last year, the CELT club began working with Irvine City Council to build a city park on a vacant parcel of land in town. 

In the next two years, officials with the Estill Development Alliance also hope to convert their facility into a gathering spot for youth to drop in as they wish. Once that’s complete, their offices will provide yet another service to their community. 

ESTILL DEVELOPMENT ALLIANCE

EPIC is one of multiple divisions within the Estill Development Alliance. Even within such a small town, Estill Development Alliance communications director Payten Rice says, the Chamber of Commerce itself is bustling.

“We have about 104 businesses that are members of our chamber that serve to support our local economy. We always are doing events and fundraising in ways [so] businesses can get involved with the community,” Rice says. 

In most cases, the local chamber of commerce is more connected to the city or county municipal government, often independent organizations that benefit from government support. The Estill Development Alliance instead hosts the Chamber of Commerce, which Rice says helps the organization avoid any sort of bias. 

“It’s a working relationship, but we’re pretty independent,” Rice explains.

The money invested into the Chamber of Commerce gets a positive return; those funds, combined with grants, very limited local government contributions, and personal donations, have kept the Estill Development Alliance’s lights on for more than 20 years. 

In turn, it powers the organization’s other divisions, like the outdoor-recreation based Estill County Action Group, the five-county regional leadership group LEAP, and several philanthropic and civic engagement initiatives. One division, the River City Players, leads a community theatre group and supports the revitalization of the local historic theatre.

“There’s not a lot of development alliances that have a very old movie theater that they’re rebuilding. And let me tell you, that’s a passionate group of people,” says Stocker. In addition to her role at Mercy Health, she is also a board member of almost every Estill Development Alliance division. 

Stocker explains these branches may seem unrelated, but they all serve the purpose of strengthening the infrastructure and social health of their town. This further contributes to the mission of EPIC.

“We have it here,” Stocker says. “You just have to have some ownership in figuring out what is going on in your community.”

She says Estill County has enough economic momentum; it will take a combination of the preventative work from EPIC and Mercy Health’s harm reduction to help this money go toward local businesses instead of drugs.

“It goes hand in hand because of the amount of money that is being wasted on drugs by community members and the tax on the healthcare system,” Stocker says. “Nobody can get a job – or the money.”

GETTING PEOPLE IN THE DOOR 

The Estill Development Alliance’s new Parent Cafe program is meant to provide a quiet space for parents to learn about warning signs of early drug addiction in their kids; the event was catered, and childcare was ready. Instead, the library basement sat empty, aside from the EPIC coordinators and Mercy Health members.  

That’s a problem for drug awareness and prevention events in any place, Stocker says. Even when hosting events for the community’s only hospital, she says, attendance for these addiction-related events can be extremely volatile. Just last month, she saw it first hand. 

“On a miserably rainy evening, [we] had over 160 people come to the recovery rally. But then a week later, we have the memorial event for those that we’ve lost this year [to addiction], and we had six show up,” Stocker says. 

EPIC has great participation in the school system through the CELT club, and Waite and Stocker consistently secure new grants– soon they’ll have customized T-shirts, the youth talent show, and more recreational programs for kids to get immersed in. 

The next challenge is getting their movement off the ground. EPIC is faced with a community that lacks public transportation and relies on social media algorithms to get the word out about local events. Leaders are working vigorously to build community trust – which is especially difficult in a small town, they explain – and get the word out. 

EPIC’s current goal: Find the best way to get people, even adults, excited and ready to participate. 

“I wish I knew,” Waite laughs. “[I] sat down with the board members, talked to them about, hey, what else can we be doing … what else have I not thought of?”

Commentary-  Articles| – January 18, 2026

by Brian Walker, RPh

Substances marketed as “legal” or “natural” alternatives are increasingly accessible to adolescents through gas stations, convenience stores, and vape shops. Although legality may reassure consumers, pharmacists are seeing a growing disconnect between regulatory status and clinical risk. Products such as nitrous oxide inhalants, kratom, Delta-8 and Delta-9 tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), and Salvia divinorum are associated with dependence, neurologic injury, psychiatric effects, and accidental harm—particularly in younger populations.

As medication experts, pharmacists are uniquely positioned to recognize the public health implications of these products and to educate patients, caregivers, and policymakers on risks that often remain hidden in plain sight.

Nitrous Oxide: Retail Availability, Clinical Consequences

Nitrous oxide—commonly referred to as “whippets” or “laughing gas” and increasingly marketed under brand names such as “Galaxy Gas”—has gained popularity among adolescents through social media exposure. Although intended for culinary use, flavored nitrous oxide canisters are frequently misused for their euphoric effects.3

Clinically, nitrous oxide misuse has been associated with hypoxia, syncope, cardiac arrhythmias, and vitamin B12 depletion leading to myeloneuropathy.4-6 Chronic exposure can result in irreversible neurologic injury, including gait disturbance and sensory loss. Of concern to pharmacists, no standardized manufacturing or purity requirements exist for recreational nitrous oxide products sold at retail, contributing to unpredictable dosing and adverse outcomes.7

Kratom: Opioid Activity Without Oversight

Kratom (Mitragyna speciosa) is marketed as a dietary supplement for pain relief, anxiety, and opioid withdrawal. Its primary alkaloids—mitragynine and 7-hydroxymitragynine—exert activity at μ-opioid receptors, conferring both analgesic and addictive potential.8.9

Although not federally scheduled, kratom has been linked to seizures, hepatotoxicity, hypertension, and opioid-like withdrawal symptoms.10,11 FDA analyses have identified contamination with heavy metals and pathogenic organisms in unregulated products.12 Regulatory approaches vary by state, creating inconsistent consumer protections and increasing the likelihood of misuse.

Delta-8 and Delta-9 THC: Potency and Labeling Concerns

Delta-8 THC and Delta-9 THC products are widely marketed as legal cannabis alternatives in the form of edibles, vape cartridges, and tinctures. Delta-9 THC is the primary psychoactive component of cannabis, and Delta-8 THC is a synthetically derived isomer with similar psychoactive effects.13

FDA and CDC warnings have highlighted concerns regarding inaccurate labeling, excessive THC concentrations, and contamination with residual solvents from chemical synthesis.14,15 Adverse events reported include anxiety, paranoia, impaired cognition, and psychosis—effects that may be amplified in adolescents and young adults.16

Salvia Divinorum: A Legal Hallucinogen

Salvia divinorum, a potent kappa-opioid receptor agonist, remains legal in several US jurisdictions despite its intense psychoactive effects. When smoked or chewed, salvinorin A produces rapid-onset hallucinations, dissociation, and loss of environmental awareness.17

From a safety perspective, Salvia use has been associated with panic reactions, accidental injuries, and prolonged psychological distress.18 Its sale as a novelty or incense product may obscure its clinical risks.

Implications for Pharmacy Practice

The normalization of these substances—amplified by influencer culture and online marketing—has outpaced regulatory oversight. Many do not appear on standard toxicology screens, complicating detection and counseling.19

Pharmacists can play a critical role by:

  • Educating patients and caregivers on risks associated with legally marketed substances
  • Monitoring emerging substance-use trends
  • Encouraging age restrictions and improved labeling standards
  • Collaborating with clinicians and public health organizations

Legality does not equate to safety. Increased awareness and pharmacist engagement are essential to addressing the public health risks posed by these widely available products.

Source: https://www.drugtopics.com/view/hidden-in-plain-sight-legal-substances-putting-children-at-risk

by The Office of the Police and Crime Commissioner for Devon, Cornwall and the Isles of Scilly –

Successful drugs in pubs police crackdown sends out clear message 

On a freezing cold January Friday night in Paignton, I joined police officers on an unannounced Pubs Against Drugs (PAD) operation to disrupt and deter drug use and make nights out safer in the town. 

These operations are carried out across Devon and Cornwall throughout the year. It is such a great way to show people that the police take tackling drugs seriously and sends out a clear message that drug use will not be tolerated in our pubs and clubs. 

In Paignton, incredibly well-trained police drug dog Jasper was joined by policing teams from South Devon, as well as Special Constables who give up their time for free to help keep our communities safe. 

During the evening, visits to eight pubs in the town were carried out. It was heartwarming to see people out enjoying themselves in the pubs, especially at a time when the industry is struggling to stay afloat. 

It was reassuring to see the efforts being made by licensees to keep their pubs safe and the positive way they interacted with police during the operation.  

At two of the pubs the police visited, managers went out of their way to tell me how much they welcomed the police action because of the message it sends to their customers about drug use not being acceptable.  

Although little drug use was found, inevitably some positive searches were conducted. Quantities of both Class A and Class B drugs were found. The presence of police in the pubs also resulted in the arrests of two wanted men. 

One was wanted on warrant and the other was being sought in relation to domestic violence offences which demonstrates how beneficial these operations are in tackling crime. 

Paignton Inspector Pete Giesens, who heads up the local Neighbourhood Police Team, organised the action in the town. He told me about the great relationship his officers have with licensees and bar staff, as well as door security officers, to ensure that unwanted behaviour is dealt with in the night time economy. 

Tackling drugs remains one of key priorities in my Police and Crime Plan because residents tell me they want it pushed out of their communities. Operations such as PAD show it will not be tolerated and action will be taken. 

My office remains committed to supporting education for both adults and children to help cut crime and save lives.  

A few days after my night out with the police in Paignton I visited Cornwall College in Camborne where many students completed my Young Voices in Policing online survey. Alarmingly, out of all the responses we have gathered so far, 40 per cent were either concerned or very concerned about drug use in their age group, and eight per cent said they have experienced or witnessed drug use in the past 18 months. 

There is no place for drugs in our region. Issues can only be tackled by disrupting organised criminal groups, reducing supply and demand, delivering effective treatment, and protecting young people from exploitation.  

A holistic and trauma responsive approach to tackle the root causes is required and that’s why I am such an advocate of specialist providers such as Harbour Housing in St Austell. I have personally seen how its incredible model and ethos has transformed the lives of its service uses by tackling homelessness, drugs, alcohol, mental health issues and unemployment.  

It also brings great benefits to the local community by reducing antisocial behaviour, and I would love to see this model replicated across Devon. 

There are also many other organisations and charities out there who are playing their part such as North-Devon based Addicts to Athletes. Last year, under my office’s Community Grant Scheme, they were awarded £5,000 – the biggest grant they have received – to continue delivering the benefits of free physical activity to help adults suffering with addiction, including drugs, alcohol and gambling. 

Source: https://devonandcornwall-pcc.gov.uk/successful-drugs-in-pubs-police-crackdown-sends-out-clear-message

Introduction

Illicit drugs and new psychoactive substances (NPS) are commonly used across Europe.
Acute toxicity from their use, along with acute toxicity from the non-medical use (misuse) of
prescription medicines, can lead to emergency department (ED) presentations with the
potential for significant morbidity and/or mortality. For the purpose of this protocol, the term
‘recreational drug’ encompasses these three substance groups. A previous study showed
that there are limited systematic data available at a national or international level on acute
harm related to the use of recreational drugs (Heyerdahl et al., 2014). It is not possible to
easily collect these data from national/central sources because of the limitations in the
coding of acute drug toxicity using coding systems such as ICD-10 (Wood et al., 2019). This
lack of systematic data on acute drug toxicity represented a significant gap in the public
health understanding of the implications of drug use in Europe.
To address this gap, the European Drug Emergencies Network (Euro-DEN) project was set
up in 2013, originally funded for 12 months by the DPIP/ISEC Programme of the European
Union. The project has continued as the Euro-DEN Plus project, with support from the
EMCDDA/EUDA. The aim of the project is to increase knowledge on ED presentations with
acute toxicity related to the use of recreational drugs across Europe, in order to contribute,
along with other sources of information, to monitoring and act as an early warning system on
drug-related harms, as well as to inform responses and policies in Europe.
A network of sentinel centres across Europe was developed to collect systematic data on
acute drug and NPS toxicity presentations. Data are collected using a purpose-built
representative minimum dataset (Wood et al., 2014). These data are collected from routine
hospital medical records, with no additional information collected over and above that
collected as part of routine clinical care. Data were initially collected in an Excel spreadsheet
(from 2013-2022). In 2022, the project adopted the secure and EU-approved REDCap online
database for data collection. The data are collated by the Euro-DEN Plus coordinating centre
in London, UK. The EUDA provides support with data quality control for the Euro-DEN
dataset.
The initial Euro-DEN project involved 16 centres in 10 European countries. Over the lifetime
of the Euro-DEN Plus project, 53 centres in 27 countries have contributed data. In 2025,
there were 37 active centres in 21 countries, and over 90 000 presentations were recorded
in the database. The description of the centres is available in the Source table section of the
Euro-DEN Plus data explorer (EUDA, 2025). The location of the centres who reported data
for the year 2024 is presented in the map below (Figure 1).

 

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Source: euro-den-plus-protocol

Opening Statement by National Drug Prevention Alliance – 11 Jan 2026:

This article, forwarded to NDPA by DWI’s Maggie Petito, is included in NDPA’s website to complete the contemporaneous picture around this extraordinary initiative by President Trump … it is noteworthy that the three main protagonists of this proposal were a CEO of a marijuana company which has donated $750,000 to the (presidential?) inauguration; a police sheriff who has become a supporter of legalising marijuana for recreational use (not just for medicinal use); and a long-term friend of the President in the Mar-a-Lago membership body. It has to be said that this whole episode smells of interest-led lobbying gaining what it wanted, rather than any research-based development of drug policy – this may be an uncharitable conclusion, but time will tell where the truth lies.

From: drug-watch-international –   On Behalf Of Maggie Petito –  Sent: 28 December 2025 
Subject: The Wall Street Journal’sPiece12-28-25

Paraphrasing an article by The Wall Street Journal’s Josh Dawsey, in a front-page story (included below) Maggie Petito informs on details of how  a concerted lobbying push by a cannabis CEO, a Florida sheriff and a Mar-a-Lago member helped persuade the president …

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

After a two-hour Oval Office debate about marijuana in December, President Trump overrode some on the religious right, White House aides and senior Republican lawmakers and decided to reschedule the green leaf as a lower-level drug.

Trump watched as Kim Rivers, the CEO of Trulieve, a Florida-based marijuana company, Gordon Smith, a Florida sheriff, and Howard Kessler, a Mar-a-Lago member and longtime Trump friend, argued the president should reschedule marijuana, according to people with knowledge of the meeting… The decision to reschedule marijuana from a Schedule I drug to a Schedule III drug followed an aggressive 18-month lobbying campaign by Rivers. The CEO and her company cut large checks to Trump’s political groups, attended at least three fundraisers, repeatedly raised the issue with White House aides and hired influential lobbyists. Rivers’s efforts delivered the marijuana industry one of its biggest victories. In addition to making medical research easier, the order is expected to eliminate tax burdens that have made profitability an uphill battle for many cannabis companies. Cannabis executives say the order will help normalize the business environment for marijuana sellers and improve access for buyers… Rivers first met with Trump on marijuana in summer 2024, when she cut a seven-figure check to a political group helping him, people familiar with the meeting said. Trump then supported a referendum allowing recreational marijuana in Florida… Rivers hired lobbyists close to Trump, including Brian Ballard and Nick Iarossi. The lobbyists pitched conservatives to write positive op-eds about the marijuana push, among other things, and generate support within the administration. White House officials described Rivers as particularly aggressive in making her case. Trulieve gave another $750,000 to the inauguration. After Trump indicated to Rivers and other donors at a New Jersey fundraiser this summer that he would follow through on rescheduling the drug, industry officials were hopeful. That fundraiser was billed at $1 million a guest… A follow-up meeting was scheduled, and Rivers asked Gordon Smith, the sheriff of Bradford County—a small county in northern Florida between Jacksonville and Tallahassee—to join her. She also brought two cancer survivors and a Duke University professor. Smith had introduced Trump at a rally about a decade ago and had become one of the first conservative sheriffs to endorse recreational marijuana use.

Inside the Oval Office, Trump talked with Kessler, a financial executive who has advocated for medical cannabis, and others about expensive properties in Palm Beach, donations to the White House ballroom and a golf course he wanted to renovate in Washington, Smith recalled. Trump gave opinions on appearances from daughter-in-law Lara Trump on Fox News and talked about Sylvester Stallone’s climbing trees and hurting his back… Trump reviewed polling on rescheduling and said he had heard from many people—including boxer Mike Tyson—that he should reschedule. He continually reiterated they were not legalizing it. Smith said Dr. Mehmet Oz, who leads Medicaid and Medicare, Health Secretary Robert F. Kennedy, and White House chief of staff Susie Wiles also watched the debate… Smith’s brother, a military veteran, had been helped by medical marijuana, he said, and he believed it was safer than alcohol and other substances. The sheriff’s concern, he said, was fentanyl-laced marijuana that killed people. When Speaker Johnson called in, the president put him on the phone with the sheriff, who tried to persuade Johnson. `It’s a gateway drug,’ Johnson argued, according to the sheriff. Smith said Johnson was a `nice guy’ and he answered Johnson’s questions. Another person familiar with the meeting said Johnson cited studies and research. Oz argued for rescheduling as Schedule II, Smith and others said.  Johnson declined to comment through a spokesman.”

 Again from Dawsey: “…the order is expected to eliminate tax burdens that have made profitability an uphill battle for many cannabis companies. Cannabis executives say the order will help normalize the business environment for marijuana sellers and improve access for buyers.”

We do not have a fulsome roster of who or what these largesse-receiving “companies” are or do. “Normalizing” differing from “legalizing” loses its distinction when financial access for little known companies or rackets gain tax reductions and financial access, forbidden to similar rackets sometimes called vice or “businesses” and crypto/bitcoin’s opaque/unaccountable systems seeking false junctures with sound monetary structures. We do not know whose polling was applied. I do not check Trulieve’s financial statements.

THE WALL STREET JOURNAL ARTICLE:  by Josh Dawsey       Dec. 27, 2025

How Trump Became the Unlikely Champion of Easing Marijuana Restrictions – Concerted lobbying push by a cannabis CEO, a Florida sheriff and a Mar-a-Lago member helped persuade the president

The president agreed to make marijuana a Schedule III drug. Evan Vucci/AP

President Trump decided to reschedule marijuana as a lower-level drug after an Oval Office debate, overriding some Republicans and religious right figures.

After a two-hour Oval Office debate about marijuana in December, President Trump overrode some on the religious right, White House aides and senior Republican lawmakers and decided to reschedule the green leaf as a lower-level drug.

Trump watched as Kim Rivers, the CEO of Trulieve, a Florida-based marijuana company, Gordon Smith, a Florida sheriff, and Howard Kessler, a Mar-a-Lago member and longtime Trump friend, argued the president should reschedule marijuana, according to people with knowledge of the meeting. It was time to open the door for medical research and improve access to cannabidiol products, they argued.

House Speaker Mike Johnson (R., La.) on speakerphone urged the president against the decision and senior aides warned the move could be dangerous to some Americans.

After listening, Trump, a teetotaler who eschews alcohol and drugs, sided with the pro-marijuana camp and delivered the biggest softening of federal cannabis policy since U.S. states began legalizing recreational marijuana in 2012.

“It was a little surreal,” Rivers said in an interview. 

The decision to reschedule marijuana from a Schedule I drug to a Schedule III drug followed an aggressive 18-month lobbying campaign by Rivers. The CEO and her company cut large checks to Trump’s political groups, attended at least three fundraisers, repeatedly raised the issue with White House aides and hired influential lobbyists. 

Rivers’s efforts delivered the marijuana industry one of its biggest victories. In addition to making medical research easier, the order is expected to eliminate tax burdens that have made profitability an uphill battle for many cannabis companies. Cannabis executives say the order will help normalize the business environment for marijuana sellers and improve access for buyers.

“The president heard from many different people on this issue and ultimately felt it was the best policy and political decision to make for the country. On all issues, the president is the final decision maker,” said White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt.

Conservative and religious leaders, such as the Faith and Freedom Coalition’s Ralph Reed, had asked the White House not to reclassify the drug, saying it could be a gateway to other drugs and didn’t fit with the president’s agenda. Reed and allies argued medical studies had not shown health or medicinal benefits. Heidi Overton, a top aide on the conservative domestic policy council, repeatedly weighed in against it, including in the meeting where Trump made the decision, people with knowledge of the meeting said. Through a spokeswoman, she declined to comment.

Some White House officials, including deputy chief of staff James Blair, told Trump that many Republicans were opposed, and aides showed him a letter signed by 22 senators urging against it, White House officials said.

“The only winners from rescheduling will be bad actors such as Communist China, while Americans will be left paying the bill,” the senators wrote.

Leavitt, the White House spokeswoman, said that “it’s Blair’s job to convey to the president what the Hill thinks, and what the politics are, on every issue.”

For many months, the policy seemed on hold. Rivers first met with Trump on marijuana in summer 2024, when she cut a seven-figure check to a political group helping him, people familiar with the meeting said. Trump then supported a referendum allowing recreational marijuana in Florida. Trump also said on the campaign trail that he would reschedule the drug, but it wasn’t in his first slate of executive orders. Some in the industry grew frustrated, believing Trump’s staff was stalling. 

Rivers hired lobbyists close to Trump, including Brian Ballard and Nick Iarossi. The lobbyists pitched conservatives to write positive op-eds about the marijuana push, among other things, and generate support within the administration. White House officials described Rivers as particularly aggressive in making her case. Trulieve gave another $750,000 to the inauguration.

After Trump indicated to Rivers and other donors at a New Jersey fundraiser this summer that he would follow through on rescheduling the drug, industry officials were hopeful. That fundraiser was billed at $1 million a guest. Behind the scenes, White House officials expressed frustration, people familiar with the matter said, and Trump waffled when publicly asked about rescheduling days later.

Rivers didn’t give up, and again came to a golf fundraiser for Sen. Lindsey Graham (R., S.C.) in November. She and Trump spoke briefly, and she asked for a White House meeting.

“When I’m there, it’s a natural conversation topic—he asks me about business and how things are going,” Rivers said of the fundraiser. “The president has been very consistent on this issue.”

Rivers’s efforts appeared to be bearing fruit when Trump invited her to the Oval Office to make her case. She was met in the Oval by Overton, who disagreed, and Trump didn’t make a final decision.

A follow-up meeting was scheduled, and Rivers asked Gordon Smith, the sheriff of Bradford County—a small county in northern Florida between Jacksonville and Tallahassee—to join her. She also brought two cancer survivors and a Duke University professor. Smith had introduced Trump at a rally about a decade ago and had become one of the first conservative sheriffs to endorse recreational marijuana use.

Inside the Oval Office, Trump talked with Kessler, a financial executive who has advocated for medical cannabis, and others about expensive properties in Palm Beach, donations to the White House ballroom and a golf course he wanted to renovate in Washington, Smith recalled. Trump gave opinions on appearances from daughter-in-law Lara Trump on Fox News and talked about Sylvester Stallone’s climbing trees and hurting his back.

Trulieve CEO Kim Rivers triumphed despite objections from some of those close to the president. Douglas R. Clifford/Zuma Press

“Some of the conversation was way above my pay grade,” Smith said. Kessler didn’t respond to requests for comment. 

Trump reviewed polling on rescheduling and said he had heard from many people—including boxer Mike Tyson—that he should reschedule. He continually reiterated they were not legalizing it. Smith said Dr. Mehmet Oz, who leads Medicaid and Medicare, Health Secretary Robert F. Kennedy, and White House chief of staff Susie Wiles also watched the debate. Wiles left early. At one point, Trump zeroed in on Smith.

“He turned to me and said, ‘Sheriff, what do you think?’ ” Smith’s brother, a military veteran, had been helped by medical marijuana, he said, and he believed it was safer than alcohol and other substances. The sheriff’s concern, he said, was fentanyl-laced marijuana that killed people.

When Speaker Johnson called in, the president put him on the phone with the sheriff, who tried to persuade Johnson. “It’s a gateway drug,” Johnson argued, according to the sheriff. Smith said Johnson was a “nice guy” and he answered Johnson’s questions. Another person familiar with the meeting said Johnson cited studies and research. Oz argued for rescheduling as Schedule II, Smith and others said.  Johnson declined to comment through a spokesman. 

The president said Democrats should have rescheduled the drug “because it was really a Democratic issue.” The Biden administration started the process of reclassifying pot last year, but didn’t finish. After about two hours, Trump said he was going to reschedule the drug and said he wanted to post on Truth Social, the sheriff recalled. Trump said he wanted everyone on board.

“The lawyers and his staff, they started yelling, ‘No sir, you can’t yet; there’s a 30-day period, it’s gotta go through this and that,’ ” Smith said. “They had to stop him from posting.”

Trump then instructed the sheriff and staffers to go into another room and put together an executive order. Trump wanted to put the “real story of why we are doing this in the order,” Smith said.

“I was in awe of the whole thing,” he said.

Trump invited Smith to come back the next week and see him sign the order, but Smith said he couldn’t—he had to attend an execution in Florida that evening. Trump told others that Rivers had pushed him to do it, said people familiar with the matter.

Announcing the order from the White House podium on Dec. 18, Trump thanked Kessler, saying, “We have people begging for me to do this, people that are in great pain. I have probably received more phone calls on this, on doing what we’re doing.”

Source: www.drugwatch.org

Use of most drugs remains low among U.S. teens and abstention from drug use remains at historic highs, according to NIDA.

According to the National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA), reported use of most drugs remains low among U.S. teens and abstention from drug use remains at historic highs, according to the 2025 Monitoring the Future Survey. Monitoring the Future (MTF) is one of the nation’s most relied upon scientific sources of valid information on trends in use of licit and illicit psychoactive drugs by U.S. adolescents, college students, young adults, and adults up to age 60. MTF is conducted each year by researchers at the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, and funded by the National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA), part of the National Institutes of Health and has been doing so since 1975.

The MTF survey is given annually to students in eighth, 10th, and 12th grades who self-report their substance use behaviors over various time periods, such as past 30 days, past 12 months, and lifetime. The survey also documents students’ perception of harm, disapproval of use, and perceived availability of drugs. The results were gathered from a national representative sample, and the data were statistically weighted to provide national numbers. The investigators collected 23,726 surveys from students enrolled across 270 public and private schools nationwide from February through June 2025. Students took the in-school survey via the web – either on tablets or on a computer.

For the fifth year in a row, use of most substances among teenagers in the United States has continued to hover around the low-water mark reached in 2021. Researchers detected a sharp decline in reported use of most drugs from 2020 to 2021. This substantial falloff was largely attributed to disruptions in drug availability and in the social lives of teens during the pandemic, when many were isolated at home with parents or other caregivers and spending less time with friends. The researchers also found that the percentage of teens currently abstaining from alcohol, tobacco, and nicotine use held steady at historically high levels.

The data indicates that, compared to 2024, reported use of most drugs in most grades held steady in 2025. These are some of the key findings:
  • Abstaining from, or not using, marijuana, alcohol, and nicotine remained stable for all grades, with 91% of eighth graders 82% of 10th graders, and 66% of 12th graders reporting abstaining in the past 30 days.
  • Alcohol use remained stable among all three grade levels, with 11% of eighth graders, 24% of 10th graders, and 41% of 12th graders reporting use in the past 12 months.
  • Cannabis use remained stable among all grades, with 8% of eighth graders, 16% of 10th graders, and 26% of 12th graders reporting use in the past 12 months. Of note, 2% of 8th graders, 6% of 10th graders, and 9% of 12th graders reported use of cannabis products made from hemp, which include intoxicating products such as delta-8-tetrahydrocannabinol, in the past 12 months.
  • Nicotine vaping remained stable among all grades, with 9% of eighth graders, 14% of 10th graders, and 20% of 12th graders reporting use in the past 12 months.
  • Nicotine pouch use remained stable among all grades, with 1% of eighth graders, 3% of 10th graders, and 7% of 12th graders reporting use in the past 12 months.
  • Nicotine pouch use remained stable among all grades, with 1% of eighth graders, 3% of 10th graders, and 7% of 12th graders reporting use in the past 12 months.
  • Cocaine use also remained low and stable for 10th graders, with 0.7% reporting use in the past 12 months; though values increased significantly among the other grades surveyed, with 0.6% of eighth graders (compared to 0.2% in 2024) and 1.4% of 12th graders (compared to 0.9% in 2024) reporting use in the past 12 months.
  • Heroin use among all three grades remains low, though values increased significantly from 2024, with 0.5% of eighth graders (compared to 0.2% in 2024), 0.5% of 10th graders (compared to 0.1% in 2024), and 0.9% of 12th graders (compared to 0.2% in 2024) reporting use in the past 12 months.

Researchers maintain the slight increase in cocaine and heroin use warrants close monitoring. However, to put these current levels of use in context, they are leagues below what they were decades ago.

SAFE, Inc. is the only alcohol and substance abuse prevention, intervention and education agency in the City of Glen Cove. Its Coalition is conducting alcohol, tobacco and other drug use prevention awareness campaigns entitled, “Keeping Glen Cove SAFE,” to educate and update the community regarding alcohol, prescription and illicit drug use and its consequences. To learn more about the SAFE Glen Cove Coalition please follow us on www.facebook.com/safeglencove or visit SAFE’s website to learn more at www.safeglencove.org.

Source: https://patch.com/new-york/glencove/safe-gc-coalition-nida-reports-encouraging-news-regarding-youth-alcohol-substance

<drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com> on behalf of Maggie Petito – mlp3@starpower.net – 09 January 2026 13:47

This reportage derives from a UK newspaper item – published in the The London Telegraph on 09 January 2026 – -by Charles Hymas Home Affairs Editor and Meike Eijsberg Data journalist      

Starmer accused of ignoring more significant safety issue while planning to cut drinking limit for motorists

Drugs are now a bigger factor in road deaths than alcohol, official figures show.

The number of deceased drivers who tested positive for drugs increased by 78 per cent, from 106 to 189, in the decade to 2023, according to the Department for Transport (DfT) and police data.

By contrast, the number of dead motorists with alcohol proved to be present in their system rose by 5 per cent in the same period, from 162 to 171.

Sir Keir Starmer, the Prime Minister, now stands accused of ignoring the bigger problem of drug-driving while planning to reduce the drink-driving limit, which critics fear will “strangle” struggling pubs.

The Government’s proposals have prompted a backlash from MPs and publicans, who say the move will put pubs under more pressure following an increase in business rates.

Britain lost an average of one pub each day in 2025, and industry bosses have warned that rising tax bills and wages, on top of higher energy costs, will drive hundreds more out of business.

The Telegraph has launched a campaign to save the nation’s pubs, calling on Labour to stop its assault on Britain’s locals, and to cut tax and red tape.

Ministers are now expected to announce a climbdown, saying they are working on relief measures to be announced in the coming days. But the about-turn relates to jumps in business rates for landlords, not the new drink-drive limit.

DfT figures show that the percentage of fatal collisions in which drink-driving was involved has been relatively stable over the past 10 years, at 13 per cent.

However, the proportion in which drug-driving played a role has doubled from 5 per cent in 2014 to 10 per cent in 2023.

While drug-driving convictions rose by 13.5 per cent in 2024 to 27,000, the number of drivers convicted of drink-driving offences fell by 6 per cent to 36,415.

Meanwhile, injuries from drink-driving incidents have significantly decreased since 1980, from around 20,000 annually to about 5,000 since 2020.

Despite this, the Government’s new road strategy proposes “taking tougher action on drink-driving” by reducing the legal limit of 80mg of alcohol per 100ml of blood to 50mg, or around a pint.

It would be the most significant reform to road safety laws since 1967, when the blood alcohol limit was first introduced.

Chris Philp, the shadow home secretary, said: “Labour are now proposing even more measures that will endanger country pubs.

“At the same time, the Government is completely failing to do more to address a more rapidly growing road safety issue – drug-driving. More drivers killed in a collision had drugs in their system than alcohol.

“The Government should prioritise toughening up on drug-drivers above measures which will strangle struggling country pubs.”

‘Further pressure’ on pubs

The British Beer and Pub Association warned that any toughening of measures on drink-driving would harm rural pubs in areas without public transport or reliable taxi services.

A spokesman said: “The pub sector continues to face huge challenges, so any additional policy measures that further impact trade will be of real concern to licensees, especially those in rural areas.”

Drug-drivers face similar penalties as those caught drinking, including a minimum 12-month driving ban and up to six months in prison for serious or repeat offences.

Limits for illegal drugs such as cannabis, cocaine, ketamine and heroin are set at extremely low levels, but not at zero, to account for accidental exposure.

However, Government-funded research has suggested that dangerous drug-drivers have been escaping prosecution – and putting lives at risk – because some police forces ration the number of testing kits issued to officers to just one a day.

The study, by the Parliamentary Advisory Council for Transport Safety, found there was a “geographical lottery” where the best-performing forces were catching 10 times more drug-drivers per head of population than the worst.

Drivers can also escape justice because of delays of four to five months in processing blood tests. Officers have only six months to prosecute. Dangerous driving penalties to be reviewed

The Government’s new road safety strategy proposes that there should be a review of penalties and mandatory training for drink and drug-driving offences.

It has also pledged to explore alternative processing and evidence collection for drug-driving to “improve speed of results, supporting more robust enforcement outcomes.”

A DfT spokesman said the strategy would “save thousands of lives by targeting the root causes of deaths, including the impact of both alcohol and drugs”.

They added: “We’re determined to crack down on drug-driving, and the strategy includes new measures to modernise how we tackle it, including new testing methods, and powers to suspend driving licenses for those caught under the influence.

“We do not expect the new limit to harm pubs; experience in Scotland shows such changes have minimal impact on local businesses while making roads safer.”

Source: Maggie Petito – mlp3@starpower.net

By Press Advantage – January 01, 2026

Muse Treatment Alcohol & Drug Rehab Los Angeles has published a new educational resource examining how opioid tolerance develops and why it plays a significant role in substance use disorder progression and treatment planning. The article, titled “How Does Opioid Tolerance Develop”, provides research-informed context for patients, families, and healthcare professionals seeking a clearer understanding of opioid-related risk, dependence, and recovery pathways.

According to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, opioid tolerance occurs when repeated exposure to opioids reduces the body’s response to the drug, leading people to require higher doses to achieve the same effect. This physiological adaptation is a central driver of escalating use and overdose risk. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention reports that opioids remain a major contributor to drug-related mortality in the United States, with tolerance and dose escalation frequently cited in toxicology findings. Peer-reviewed research published in journals such as The New England Journal of Medicine further confirms that tolerance alters brain chemistry and reward pathways, making cessation more complex without structured treatment support.

The newly published resource outlines how tolerance develops at the cellular and neurological level, emphasizing that it is not a failure of willpower but a predictable biological response. This distinction is supported by guidance from the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, which frames substance use disorders as chronic medical conditions requiring evidence-based care. By presenting opioid tolerance through a clinical lens, the article reinforces the importance of early intervention and medically appropriate treatment selection.

This educational release aligns with the clinical services at the Los Angeles location, where inpatient treatment programs are designed around evidence-based frameworks used in accredited addiction treatment facilities. Program information is available at Muse Treatment Los Angeles. Services include medically supervised care models that address alcohol and opioid use disorders through structured programming, including intensive outpatient alcohol rehab and partial hospitalization alcohol rehab. These levels of care reflect standards outlined by SAMHSA, which identifies continuity of care and treatment intensity matching as key predictors of positive outcomes.

Patients seeking care often come from across Los Angeles and surrounding communities, reflecting the regional need for accessible, medically grounded addiction treatment. People searching for drug rehab near me in LA frequently include residents from West LA, where proximity and flexible treatment scheduling influence engagement. Downtown LA is also represented among patients accessing services, highlighting the demand for structured care models that integrate clinical oversight with community-based recovery. East LA similarly relies on nearby treatment options that support consistent participation without extended travel.

The reach of care extends into neighborhoods such as Glendale,Westwood and Westwood Village, where patients often seek programs that balance privacy with evidence-based clinical support. Little Holmby and Holmby Hills are included as well, underscoring the role of localized treatment availability when families evaluate the best alcohol rehab centers and related services. Bel Air shows similar patterns, reinforcing the importance of geographically relevant care when people decide whether to initiate treatment and follow through.

National outcome data support the treatment approaches discussed in the article. The National Institute on Drug Abuse reports that relapse rates for substance use disorders are comparable to those of other chronic conditions, such as diabetes and hypertension, emphasizing that effective care focuses on long-term management rather than short-term detoxification alone. Programs offering partial hospitalization alcohol rehab and intensive outpatient alcohol rehab are well-positioned to support patients as they transition between levels of care, particularly when tolerance and withdrawal symptoms complicate recovery.

The article also contributes to broader public health education around opioid risk. The CDC notes that tolerance can lower perceived risk while increasing physiological danger, as higher doses strain respiratory and cardiovascular systems. Understanding this dynamic is critical for patients and families evaluating treatment options, particularly in regions with sustained opioid exposure.

Accreditation standards further inform the clinical framework reflected in the services described. Organizations such as The Joint Commission emphasize medication management, patient safety, and evidence-based treatment protocols as benchmarks for quality addiction care. Independent analyses have shown that accredited programs demonstrate stronger adherence to clinical guidelines and improved coordination between medical and behavioral health services.

As healthcare search trends continue to show rising interest in opioid tolerance, overdose prevention, and structured treatment pathways, educational resources grounded in third-party research play a critical role in informed decision-making. By publishing this article and integrating it within a broader continuum that includes intensive outpatient alcohol rehab and partial hospitalization alcohol rehab services, Muse Treatment reinforces the role of education as a foundation of effective addiction treatment.

The resource serves as a reference point for patients, families, and healthcare professionals seeking clarity on how opioid tolerance develops, while supporting broader efforts to reduce preventable harm and improve recovery outcomes through evidence-based care across Los Angeles and surrounding communities.

Source: https://markets.financialcontent.com/wral/article/pressadvantage-2026-1-1-opioid-tolerance-explained-in-new-educational-resource-published-by-muse-treatment

People in B.C. who are prescribed safe alternatives to deadly street drugs must now take their meds in front of a witness. Here’s why advocates are concerned.

British Columbia’s overdose-prevention safer supply program underwent a significant shift Tuesday.

With a few exceptions, participants in the program will now need to ingest their prescribed alternatives to street drugs in front of a health-care professional—often a pharmacist.

It’s a change the opposition B.C. Conservatives say is an improvement, and an acknowledgment that safer supply isn’t really working.

“This is really just managing someone’s decline,” said Claire Rattee, the B.C. Conservative critic for mental health and addictions. “We don’t do this in any other area of mental health or medicine.”

The shift was announced in February, prompted by leaked documents confirming what critics had warned about and the NDP had disputed—that significant amounts of the prescribed alternatives were being diverted and sold on the streets.

“The government continues to paint this as a problem with bad actors in pharmacies, but the reality was that it was a government policy of giving out large quantities of highly addictive opioids,” said Elenore Sturko, the Independent MLA for Surrey-Cloverdale.

Sturko is the one who exposed the truth about diversion. She’s happy about the changes, but wants a public inquiry and more answers, including about the status of investigations into the dozens of pharmacies alleged to have enabled the diversion and how widespread it was.

“We need to have answers and clarity,” said Sturko on Tuesday. “Where is the accountability for those pharmacies that were under investigation?”

The latest stats show 150 lives lost to toxic drug overdoses in October.

Some worry Tuesday’s changes could actually add to those numbers, with street drugs becoming more convenient than prescribed alternatives.

“My concern is always that if people don’t go to get their prescription medications, then where will they go?” asked harm reduction advocate Guy Felicella.

The Health Ministry tells CTV News that investigations into the pharmacies began more than nine months ago and are ongoing. It says it remains committed to monitoring the program to ensure it’s working as intended to save lives in a crisis that’s already claimed more than 16,000 lives in nine years.

Source: https://www.ctvnews.ca/vancouver/article/critics-react-to-changes-to-bc-overdose-prevention-program/

The HOPI Substance Abuse Prevention Center reports great success with clients being successfully reintegrated as members of the community. Manager Bryan Humetewa says he has had the joy of seeing clients return to their homes, holding jobs and witnessing “the miracle” of being back with their children.

“Working with the community collaboratively is key, especially with limited resources,” he said.

The center works cooperatively with First Mesa Elementary School, Hopi Junior Senior High School, Hopi Court and the Navajo Department of Corrections in Tuba City. For those who need a higher level of care, they can be referred to Hopi Behavioral Health, Native Americans for Community Action, Sonora Prevention Works in the Phoenix area or Scottsdale Recovery Center.

Humetewa said the staff is committed to helping clients who have used illegal drugs and alcohol. “It depends on what the individual needs,” he said.

Of the 79 clients served last year, only five individuals were referred to higher levels of service. Humetewa says most of their clients are coming to them as part of their aftercare program.

Hopi Behavioral Health assesses the clients. “We utilize our lived experiences to provide evidence-based curriculum, utilizing our teachings and values,” he said.

Clients are influenced by where they grew up and their environment, says Humetewa. Generational disconnection has been a problem, he reports. Many individuals have problems living in the two worlds: One of their homeland and the other the Western European way of life.

“We use language and culture to reintroduce the values and teachings. They need to first find out where they were disconnected and then reconnect with their culture. They need to be right with themselves first before they can be in touch with a higher power.”

HOPI Substance Abuse Prevention Center offers a 12-step program. Also beneficial, he says, are community wellness programs. Humetewa says clients return to their communities to help and mentor others. Many have returned to education and earned degrees.

Humetewa has been through his own ordeal, but recently celebrated 21 years of recovery. He graduated from an Indian recovery program in 2004. He says he learned that sobriety and recovery are two different things: Sobriety is being sober, and recovery is realizing the work it takes to be well, physically, spiritually and psychologically.

Humetewa said finding transitional housing for those in recovery, especially on Hopi where housing is limited, can be a challenge. This is where peer support becomes crucial. “I’m working on this, but it’s not easy.”

Humetewa said it’s always encouraging to come home to help your people, but when people come home, they find few jobs or resources to help them. Still, Humetewa has seen many successes. “I enjoy watching the miracles of change and seeing people as they start looking well,” he said. “They share their stories of recovery. They work at getting well.”

The HOPI Substance Abuse Prevention Center is part of the Hopi Foundation and funded through grants It serves clients from the Navajo Nation, as well. Humetewa praises his staff and mentors Cordell Sakeva and Kristie Kewenvoyouma for the work they do.

The HOPI Substance Abuse Prevention Center provides daily support in recovery through programs, satellite locations and on-call services. It also promotes collaborative work that strengthens individuals, families and cultural values. FBN

Source: https://www.flagstaffbusinessnews.com/hopi-recovery-center-sees-miracles-of-change-through-culture-based-healing/

Srinagar, Jan 3: Leaving the pulpits of their Masjids for the meeting hall of the Institute of Mental Health and Neurosciences (IMHANS) at Government Medical College (GMC), Srinagar, Imams from across Kashmir gathered on Saturday to take on another religious responsibility of saving the youth from the grip of drugs.

The resolve of the gathering was to reduce demand for drugs, while strengthening channels where those who are already in the deadly trap could be helped free from it.

A day-long brainstorming session was organised at the IMHANS, GMC Srinagar.

It aimed to equip religious leaders with the skills and information to speak about substance abuse and reach young people vulnerable to addiction.

The initiative was organised to empower the religious leaders with medical knowledge and Islamic insights to create an environment for the prevention of substance abuse. The event included sessions on early detection and referral of individuals struggling with addiction, ultimately towards the goal of reducing drug demand among youth.

The event saw the participation of religious scholars, medical experts, and officials from the administration, joining hands to create a bridge between spiritual guidance and professional treatment.

The pivotal role of Imams as trusted figures in local communities was highlighted and explored.

An interactive session on ‘Imams as First Responders’ moderated by Dr Fazle Roub, Assistant Professor Psychiatry, GMC Srinagar, opened pathways to youth.

The discussion covered how community members often turn to Imams first for help.

The participants spoke about their understanding and scientific view on dos and don’ts while providing assistance. It weighed various approaches to encourage youth to seek help at de-addiction centres while maintaining confidentiality and reducing stigma.

The participants discussed the Quranic guidance and Islamic perspective on addiction.

Masjids and Friday sermons, the participants agreed, could help in breaking through the shells that people with addiction disorders often retreat into.

“Religious scholars are key to raising awareness, reducing stigma, and encouraging early help-seeking,” said Anshul Garg, Divisional Commissioner, Kashmir, who was the chief guest on the occasion.

He reiterated the administration’s endeavour to a multi-sectoral strategy involving health services, civil society, and religious institutions.

Guest of honour, Akshay Labroo, echoed these sentiments and stressed the need for coordinated action.

He said that Imams with the tools to address addiction compassionately could strengthen community-based responses and protect youth from this growing menace.

Principal GMC Srinagar Prof Iffat Hassan Shah underscored the importance of Imams in prevention efforts, early intervention, and reducing societal stigma around addiction. Head of the Department of Psychiatry, GMC Srinagar, Prof Arshad Hussain, delved deep into the escalating burden of substance use disorders while emphasising early intervention and broad community involvement.

Dr Sajjid Wani, Assistant Professor of Psychiatry, GMC Srinagar, talked about ‘medical understanding of addiction’ and explained addiction as a disease rather than a moral failing. He detailed common substances abused in Kashmir, warning signs for families and brain changes that undermine willpower.

Source: https://www.greaterkashmir.com/front-page-2/imams-join-fight-against-drug-abuse/

 (translated using AI)
If a person who habitually drives under the influence of alcohol acquires a license again, a conditional license system that requires the attachment of a “drunk driving prevention device” will take effect in October next year.

According to the “2026 Road Traffic Act” released by the National Police Agency on the 28th, people who have driven drunk twice or more within the past five years must install a DUI prevention device on their vehicle when they re-acquire their license after a two-year disqualification period.

The device prevents the vehicle from starting at all when alcohol is detected. The cost of installation is about 3 million won, and the police said they are in talks with the Korea Expressway Corporation to allow rental.

In addition, driving without installing preventive devices could result in up to a year in prison or a fine of up to 3 million won. It is also possible to revoke a driver’s license.

If another person is caught driving after avoiding alcohol detection by breathing instead, he or she will be sentenced to up to three years in prison or fined up to 30 million won.

According to the police, about 40% of drunk drivers have recidivism within five years. The police’s plan is to “block the source” as a device to prevent the possibility of such recidivism.

From next year, punishment for “drug driving” will also be strengthened. The move comes as the number of accidents while driving under the influence of psychotropic drugs such as propofol and zolpidem increases rapidly.

When drug driving is caught, it has been raised from “imprisonment of up to three years or a fine of up to 10 million won” to “imprisonment of up to five years or a fine of up to 20 million won.” A new provision has also been established that will result in “imprisonment of up to five years or a fine of up to 20 million won” for non-compliance with drug measurements.

The issuance of Type 1 licenses will also become stricter. Previously, if only the seven-year accident-free requirement was met, type 2 driver’s license holders could obtain type 1 licenses only by aptitude tests. Starting next year, you can get a type 1 license after an aptitude test only if you prove your actual driving experience with a certificate of auto insurance.

The standard for calculating the renewal period of a driver’s license will be changed from the existing annual unit (January 1st to December 31st) to six months for each individual’s birthday. The related system will also be adjusted so that trainees can legally train on the road to the places and courses they want without visiting the driver’s license academy in person.

Kim Ho-seung, director of the National Police Agency’s Living Safety Transportation Bureau, said, “We will strongly crack down on activities that threaten the lives of the people on the road and actively improve daily inconveniences.”

 by Karim Easterbrook* – Oman Observer – Dec 27, 2025 the author is a former school principal and author

Preventative action in the earliest stages is urgently needed; the earlier the better. Silence is perceived as consent. Thus, schools in Oman carry a heavy responsibility. They are among the first places where changes in behaviour can be noticed. Experience from Western societies shows that drug dealers approach even very young schoolchildren, who are easily influenced. However, schools must be careful: drug warnings founded solely on fear soon lose their force.Fear fades and curiosity or defiance takes its place. What endures is clarity: age‑appropriate information about the physical and psychological harm of drugs, the legal consequences that follow and the social isolation that often accompanies dependency.

Teachers, frequently the first adults to sense that something is wrong, must be trained to recognise early warning signs and to respond with confidence.

A school ruled by punishment alone encourages concealment, whereas one that allows students to seek help without stigma and reprisal may prevent lasting harm. Strengthening life skills, particularly resistance to peer pressure regarding drugs, remains a practical and effective defence. The damage extends far beyond users. It spreads through public health, education and economic life, weakening each in turn. Careers are lost and communities lose capable members long before the problem is acknowledged.

Social stability is central to national identity and long‑term progress. Illegal drugs represent a serious threat to Omani society. The experience of North America and Europe offers a stark warning. There, widespread drug availability has contributed to rising addiction, increasing overdose deaths and the decline of once‑stable communities.

Drug dealers are everywhere, health services struggle with long‑term physical and psychological harm, families fracture and crime increases. Youngsters are especially vulnerable because judgement, concentration and emotional balance are still forming. Exposure to drugs at this early age can cause lasting impairment: academic failure, school dropout, mental illness and long‑term dependency.

Government action must therefore be firm and consistent. Drug trafficking thrives where enforcement is weak or uneven. Strong border controls, intelligence‑led policing, police departments dedicated to arresting drug dealers and swift prosecution send a clear message that trafficking will not be tolerated.

While users require rehabilitation rather than punishment, those who profit from supplying drugs must face severe penalties. Delay and denial allow the problem to grow quietly until it becomes deeply entrenched.

Rumours that illegal drugs in Oman are sold mainly by non‑Omani residents must be treated with caution. Assigning blame on the basis of nationality distorts justice and weakens enforcement. Responsibility must be determined by evidence and applied impartially to all involved: Omanis and expats.

Families can be the most influential line of defence. Young people who feel supported and connected to their families are far less vulnerable to external pressure.

Open discussion, clear boundaries, awareness of friendships and online influences and early intervention when concerns arise can prevent experimentation from becoming a habit.

Waiting for unmistakable signs is often waiting too long. International evidence also indicates that vaping devices are sometimes used to consume illegal drugs discreetly, increasing the need for awareness at home and in schools.

Protecting Omani youth requires coordinated effort rather than isolated gestures. Families, schools and authorities must act together. Oman’s stability has been built patiently over generations.

Allowing illegal drugs to spread would place that inheritance at risk. Early, decisive action remains far less costly than prevention attempted too late. What is needed immediately, especially for parents and their children, is a drug hotline which can be called for advice without fear of social repercussions.

Source: https://www.omanobserver.om/article/1181724/opinion/why-schools-must-act-early-against-drugs

 

by  Mark S. Gold M.D. – Addiction Outlook – Posted  

 

The change was made despite lack of evidence of medicinal benefits.

  • President Trump directed federal agencies to expedite the process of reclassifying cannabis to Schedule III.
  • Now what? Many actions are needed, including new research and protection of adolescents.
  • Placebo-controlled, double-blind trials of pharmaceutical-grade cannabis constituents are needed.

The most consequential shift in cannabis policy in more than 50 years is now happening. A December 2025 executive order from President Trump has directed the federal government to down-schedule cannabis from Schedule I (illegal) to Schedule III (a lawful drug designation with a lower level of harm than Schedules I or II) . This is despite the alarming lack of research evidence for medicinal cannabis.

Rescheduling cannabis will provide significant tax advantages to the industry, allowing billions in previously banned business expense deductions that could hugely boost marketing efforts, research, or both. The executive order (EO) does not explicitly recognize cannabis as medicine. It also does not set national standards for cannabis labeling, dosages, or youth protection, all of which are essential.

Whether you view the EO as long overdue or ill-advised, the key questions now are how this change will be implemented, who will control the downstream effects of cannabis, and whether public health experts or lobbyists seeking to accelerate commercial momentum will define what happens next.

Currently, any cannabis warning labels are inconsistent across states, often minimal, and frequently omit critical risks, such as mental health effects, breastfeeding harms, and other dangers stemming from high-potency cannabis products.

5 Examples of Warning Labels 
5 Examples of Warning Labels – THIS NEEDS A BORDER AND ENLARGEMENT AND ‘PACKAG?? – H
Source: Dr Mark Gold

The executive order simultaneously instructs federal agencies—particularly the National Institutes of Health and the Food and Drug Administration—to expand, streamline, and lower barriers to cannabis/cannabinoid research.

Indeed, the now-history LSD-like Schedule I status of cannabis imposed hurdles to research. Nevertheless, considerable research has been done, even though a special license was necessary to use the drug in studies. However, rescheduling marijuana doesn’t guarantee adequate research funding, FDA approval for cannabis, THC, or CBD, or high-quality research.

What Drug Experts Say

Among the EO’s most vocal critics is Kevin Sabet, drug policy expert who served both Republican and Democratic administrations and now president of Smart Approaches to Marijuana, who sees the order as devoid of public health wisdom. Sabet warns that rescheduling signals medical endorsement despite cannabis’s association with significant health risks, especially for young users. Sabet highlights that the EO moves cannabis from Schedule I (not legal) to Schedule III (controlled but legal), although the medicinal effects of cannabis have never been FDA-proven or approved.

Harvard’s Kevin Hill, M.D., supports rescheduling for improving research facilitation, arguing that current cannabis use lacks clinical guidance. He emphasizes funding as crucial for quality research. Hill ‘s position is pragmatic: Lack of scientific certainty is not a reason to avoid research—it’s the reason research is needed.

Hill also places responsibility for research funding on states and industry. Legal cannabis markets generate billions in revenue, yet only a fraction is reinvested in rigorous research, prevention, or treatment. Ethical stewardship, he argues, demands that those profiting from cannabis bear responsibility for understanding its risks and benefits.

Thirty percent of cannabis users, including adolescents, develop a substance use disorder, according to Mt Sinai School of Medicine’s Dr. Yasmin Hurd. She emphasizes the importance of pairing research expansion with clear regulations to avoid exacerbating risks linked with cannabis.

A crucial area for future research is safe and effective dosing of THC (the intoxicant in cannabis) amid imminently rising sales of high-potency products. Large-scale, longitudinal studies tracking neurodevelopmental outcomes in relation to timing and potency of cannabis exposure are essential.

At the same time, policymakers face a proliferation of unregulated intoxicating cannabinoids sold outside state-licensed cannabis systems. Products such as delta-8 and other synthetic or semi-synthetic cannabinoids are widely available in gas stations and convenience stores, often with minimal oversight. These products disproportionately attract youth, undermining consumer safety. Closing loopholes has become a public-health necessity.

Recognizing the Rising Risks

Some media reports suggest the EO was pushed through despite vociferous objections highlighting the risks of cannabis use among adolescents and young adults. The link between early-age cannabis exposure and increased risk of schizophrenia, mood disorders, and long-term functional impairment is no longer speculative. The disorders carry lifelong healthcare, social, and economic costs. Yet current data are insufficient to guide prevention efforts. Without guidelines, prevention efforts will remain reactive and politically vulnerable. Nowhere are the stakes higher than among adolescents and young adults.

One of the nation’s leading scientists and long-time vocal opponents of legalizing cannabis, Yale’s Deepak D’Souza, M.D., has focused on the increasing amount of cannabis, its increased potency, frequency of use, and duration of effects, causing severe consequences in young people. Cannabis and some of its constituents produce acute impairments in memory, attention, executive function, impulsivity and risk-taking behaviour, and psychomotor coordination, critical for driving a car. Nora Volkow, M.D., director of the National Institute for Drug Abuse (NIDA) has underscored the need for balanced research, acknowledging both benefits and risks of cannabis.

Dose is another urgent research priority, since higher THC concentrations are associated with increased risks of psychosis, cannabis use disorder, cardiovascular events, and cognitive impairment. More isn’t always better. A post-rescheduling agenda should include an investigation into minimum effective doses, upper safety thresholds, and the feasibility of reducing THC concentrations while preserving potential therapeutic effects.

Since rescheduling will be interpreted as an implicit medical endorsement, regardless of official intent, a national, evidence-based prevention strategy is needed, modeled on successful tobacco-control frameworks Such a strategy needs to include school-based education, clinician training, parental guidance, and public-health messaging that’s scientifically grounded rather than moralistic/alarmist.

Federal consumer protection agencies need to become empowered to monitor misleading cannabis advertising.

Finally, the integrity of emerging research depends on maintaining a firewall between scientific inquiry and commercial influence. Industry participation in research isn’t inherently problematic, but it must be governed by transparency, independent oversight, and conflict-of-interest safeguards.

Acceptance Without Complacency

The December 2025 executive order is now a reality. There is likely to be a huge cash infusion without regulation, causing a commercialization boom in cannabis, with the potential to harm our youth more than ever. Industry needs to step up and fund academic research.

Youth protection and guardrails are indispensable. A good start would be warning labels, funding of prevention efforts directed toward teens and young adults, and increasing NIDA’s funding for cannabis/THC/CBD translational research .

If cannabis products remain legal and available, consumers need clear, standardized warnings reflecting the best available evidence on cannabis use disorder and psychosis risk; impaired driving; memory effects; and adolescent brain vulnerability. Public health warnings should not be optional, nor diluted by marketing language implying medical endorsement where none exists.

Source: https://www.psychologytoday.com/au/blog/addiction-outlook/202512/marijuana-rescheduling-is-now-real

by Ryan Mancini –  The Hill – 12/03/25

A vomiting disorder linked to frequent marijuana use is on the rise, prompting global health officials to allow researchers to track the condition and study it.

Dubbed on social media as “scromiting,” short for screaming and vomiting, cannabis hyperemesis syndrome (CHS) cases saw a jump in emergency department visits between 2016 and 2022, according to a November study by the medical journal JAMA Network Open released in November. CHS was first identified in Australia in 2004.

Specifically, researchers found that the jump in visits was isolated to 2020 and 2021, when there were 188 million reported emergency department visits among adults between 18 and 35 years old.

Symptoms of CHS include cyclical nausea and vomiting, with abdominal pain with no organic cause, according to the National Institutes of Health’s (NIH) National Library of Medicine. Those with CHS will compulsively bathe in hot water, which long-term marijuana use of more than a year can induce.

“It’s pretty universal for these patients to say they need a really, really hot shower, or a really hot bath, to improve their symptoms,” Dr. Sam Wang, pediatric emergency medicine specialist and toxicologist at Children’s Hospital Colorado, told CNN.

Wang described patients who were “writhing, holding their stomach, complaining of really bad abdominal pain and nausea,” with painful vomiting that lasted for hours before they took “a scalding hot shower before they came to the ER but it didn’t help.”

The hot water side-effect of CHS appears to be a learned behavior, NIH noted. After a short while, the hot water bathing can become a compulsion.

How someone can develop CHS is unclear, as researchers do not yet know how much marijuana use on a daily or weekly basis can cause it. Patients could go through years of suffering from debilitating CHS symptoms and, even with several diagnostic tests, still not have a clear diagnosis or treatment plan, NIH stated.

It can take days, weeks or months for someone with CHS to recover after a “scromiting” incident. This can be fueled by general wellness and normal eating patterns, along with regained weight and a regular bathing routine, NIH stated. If someone continues to use marijuana, CHS symptoms can start all over again.

A study conducted by the George Washington University School of Medicine and Health Sciences found that 44 percent of those surveyed were hospitalized once due to CHS symptoms. The study also found that 40 percent of respondents used marijuana over five times a day before CHS symptoms developed. Using marijuana at an early age was also more likely to lead to CHS.

Researchers argue that while there are limitations in understanding CHS, including why patients bathe themselves with scalding water, there is a need for greater clinical awareness.

“Targeted screening for cannabis use and recognition of symptom patterns could improve diagnostic accuracy,” JAMA Network Open wrote, adding that more studies can help prevent a misdiagnosis for someone with CHS symptoms.

Source: drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com

 

 


www.drugwatch.org
drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com

United Nations

Office on Drugs and Crime – Youth Initiative – 23 December 2025

With the year 2025 coming to an end, it is a great pleasure to reflect on this year’s highlights and express our sincere appreciation for the support of all partners and collaborators of the Youth Initiative.

Friends in Focus

From the outset, 2025 has been a fruitful and exciting year for the Youth Initiative, with its reach expanding and its positive impact growing. Following the successful prototype development in 2024, UNODC’s new youth-based, peer-to-peer drug prevention programme, Friends in Focus, began its pre-pilot testing in 2025 with the support of local partners, UNODC field offices, and most importantly the youth participants across various countries. Friends in Focus is an evidence-informed prevention programme that equips youth with practical skills and knowledge in drug use prevention, encouraging them to act as positive peer influencers within their communities

The initial pre-pilot was launched in Serbia in February, marking the programme’s first transition from theory to practice. Building on this launch, the pre-pilot implementation expanded throughout the year to Italy (Trento and Piedmont, respectively) and Montenegro. In addition to these national and local efforts, UNODC also initiated regional trainings of Friends in Focus in Central Asia (involving youth from Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan) and in Central America (with youth from Guatemala, Costa Rica, and the Dominican Republic). These regional pre-pilots have been particularly valuable in making Friends in Focus available in widely spoken languages such as Russian and Spanish, creating opportunities for further scaling of the programme in these regions.

These pre-pilot implementations stand among the key achievements of 2025, enabling the initiation of the assessment of the programme’s feasibility and applicability globally. Moreover, the wide reach achieved across the globe provides UNODC with a valuable opportunity to hear perspectives from youth in diverse cultural and societal contexts, and to evaluate whether Friends in Focus continues to resonate and remain relevant across different settings

Youth Forum on Drug Use Prevention

As in previous years, the Youth Forum took place on the sidelines of the annual Commission on Narcotic Drugs (CND) in March 2025. With the participation of 32 youth from 25 countries, the Youth Forum provided a safe environment for the youth from diverse cultures to come together, learn, and exchange insights about evidence-based drug use prevention efforts in line with the UNODC/WHO International Standards on Drug Use Prevention. The youth participated in interactive sessions throughout the Forum, and also had the opportunity to get a glimpse of UNODC’s Friends in Focus programme.

Continuing a cherished tradition, the youth drafted and delivered their joint Youth Statement, underscoring the importance of their peers’ active involvement in prevention work. They emphasized that “Prevention efforts must not only be about us, but led by us,” and that “When prevention is a priority, resilience becomes a reality.” Watch the highlight video of the Youth Forum 2025 here.

DAPC Grants

In 2025, the Drug Abuse Prevention Center (DAPC) continued to provide steadfast support to NGOs around the world in implementing youth-focused prevention projects. This year, local implementing partners from Cambodia, Iraq, Sri Lanka, Zimbabwe, Guatemala, Costa Rica, the Dominican Republic, and the Philippines were recommended and selected to receive the DAPC grants. These new projects will be implemented in their respective communities, promoting health, drug prevention and peer support, through active engagement with local stakeholders and young people. These initiatives highlight UNODC’s commitment to fostering resilient and healthier communities shaped with the meaningful participation of young people.

This year, the Youth Initiative continued to thrive as Youth Alumni advanced their active involvement in prevention work. After her participation in the UNODC Youth Forum 2024, Habiba Raslan collaborated with the National Fund for Drug Control and Treatment of Addiction (FDCTA) in Egypt, delivering impactful prevention messages to children and teenagers. She also remained active in the UNODC MENA Youth Network, and was also involved in the launch of the Egyptian Youth Network, bringing together young people committed to substance use prevention.

In April, 2023 youth alumna Inês Costa Louro delivered a remarkable address at the ECOSOC Youth Forum 2025 on the role of youth in public health policy and the need to address the digital determinants of health, particularly in relation to substance use and mental well-being. In June, at the high-level conference commemorating 30 years since the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action, Yeanoh Rukoh Bai-Kamara, a Sierra Leonean participant of this year’s Youth Forum, shared her perspectives as a young woman and highlighted her organisation’s efforts to empower women and support youth. She emphasized the inequalities women face in relation to drugs and the need to better address their specific needs. Later in the summer, Nathan Morris, another participant of the Youth Forum 2025 from Jamaica, contributed his perspectives as a youth advocate during the CND/CCPCJ joint side event at the 2025 High-level Political Forum, “Engaging children and youth in drug control, crime prevention and criminal justice efforts.”

Another key highlight of the year was the 2nd UNODC Youth Forum Alumni Reunion, which welcomed former Youth Forum participants from 20 countries. Notably, the event brought together participants from across the history of the Youth Forum, spanning from its early days in 2014 to the most recent cohort of 2025, marking over a decade of youth leadership. Through youth-led presentations and peer-to-peer discussions, the reunion reinforced the importance of mainstreaming youth perspectives and ensuring meaningful participation, strengthening young leaders’ roles as co-creators rather than merely beneficiaries of prevention efforts.

Looking Ahead

We extend our deep gratitude to all youth participants and alumni, DAPC grantees, local implementing partners of Friends in Focus, and supporters for their meaningful contributions to the Youth Initiative in 2025. This year was particularly significant, as we were able to reach far and wide through the new tools and resources, enabling youth to be more meaningfully engaged in prevention efforts. We look forward to continuing our collaboration with all partners and to the new possibilities that the coming year will bring, as we further strengthen youth engagement in prevention.

Source: https://www.unodc.org/unodc/prevention/youth-initiative/youth-action/2025/December/global-youth-leadership-in-drug-prevention_-key-highlights-from-2025.html

by Morgan Ebert, Managing Editor – contemporarypediatrics.com. – morgan-petronelliDecember 23, 2025

Teen use of alcohol, cannabis, and nicotine remained stable in 2025, while daily energy drink use rose and heroin and cocaine use showed small increases.

Substance use among adolescents in the United States has remained at historically low levels for the fifth consecutive year, according to new data from the Monitoring the Future (MTF) study conducted by the University of Michigan’s Institute for Social Research. The findings suggest that declines in teen drug use observed during the COVID-19 pandemic have persisted, rather than rebounding to pre-pandemic levels as many experts anticipated.1,2

The MTF study is an annual, nationally representative survey of substance use behaviors and attitudes among eighth, 10th, and 12th graders and has been supported by the National Institutes of Health for more than five decades. The 2025 report reflects responses from 23,726 students enrolled in 270 public and private schools across the United States, with data collected between February and June 2025. Students completed the survey online while in school, and results were statistically weighted to generate national estimates.

Researchers found that the proportion of adolescents abstaining from alcohol, tobacco, and nicotine remained stable at levels first documented in 2021, following a sharp decline in reported substance use between 2020 and 2021. That earlier decline was widely attributed to pandemic-related disruptions, including reduced social interaction, limited access to substances, and increased time spent at home with caregivers.

“One of the main findings from the survey this year is that teen use of the most common drugs has not rebounded after the large decline during the pandemic,” said Richard Miech, PhD, research professor at the Institute for Social Research and team lead of the MTF study. “Many expected teen drug use levels to return to pre-pandemic levels once the social distancing policies were lifted, but this has not happened.”

Abstinence and common substances

In 2025, abstinence from marijuana, alcohol, and nicotine in the past 30 days remained high across all grades. Among eighth graders, 91% reported abstaining, compared with 82% of 10th graders and 66% of 12th graders.

Alcohol use over the past 12 months also remained stable, reported by 11% of eighth graders, 24% of 10th graders, and 41% of 12th graders. Cannabis use showed a similar pattern, with 8% of eighth graders, 16% of 10th graders, and 26% of 12th graders reporting use in the past year.

The survey also assessed use of cannabis products derived from hemp, including intoxicating products such as delta-8-tetrahydrocannabinol. In the past 12 months, 2% of eighth graders, 6% of 10th graders, and 9% of 12th graders reported using these products.

Nicotine vaping remained stable across grades, with past-year use reported by 9% of eighth graders, 14% of 10th graders, and 20% of 12th graders. Use of nicotine pouches was less common but also stable, reported by 1% of eighth graders, 3% of 10th graders, and 7% of 12th graders.

Energy drinks and illicit substances

One notable exception to overall stability was daily consumption of energy drinks or energy shots. Daily use in the past 30 days was reported by 18% of eighth graders, 20% of 10th graders, and 23% of 12th graders. Among 10th graders, this represented a statistically significant increase from 17% in 2024.

Use of heroin and cocaine remained uncommon across all grades but showed statistically significant increases compared with the previous year. Past-year heroin use was reported by 0.5% of eighth graders, 0.5% of 10th graders, and 0.9% of 12th graders, up from 2024 levels. Cocaine use remained stable among 10th graders at 0.7% but increased among eighth graders to 0.6% and among 12th graders to 1.4%.

“The slight but significant increase we see in heroin and cocaine use warrants close monitoring. However, to put these current levels of use in context, they are leagues below what they were decades ago,” Miech said.

Implications for clinicians and prevention

Nora Volkow, MD, director of the National Institute on Drug Abuse, emphasized the importance of continued surveillance and prevention efforts, noting that overall levels of adolescent drug use remain low.

“It is encouraging that adolescent drug use overall remains relatively low and that so many teens choose not to use drugs at all,” Volkow said. “It is critical to continue to monitor these trends closely to understand how we can continue to support teens in making healthy choices and target interventions where and when they are needed.”

For pediatricians and other clinicians caring for adolescents, the findings underscore the value of routine screening, anticipatory guidance, and counseling tailored to emerging trends, including energy drink consumption and evolving cannabis products.

Source: https://www.contemporarypediatrics.com/view/teen-substance-use-remains-historically-low-in-2025-with-stability-across-most-drugs

Opioids are often shown in movies, music, and social media as party drugs, symbols of fun, rebellion, or a carefree lifestyle. Instead of highlighting the real dangers of addiction, withdrawal or overdose, entertainment culture turns powerful and deadly substances into aesthetic props. 

This glamorized image shapes how teens and young adults think about opioids, making the risks seem smaller and the consequences less real.

In music videos, party scenes, and viral content, opioids like Percocet or Oxycodone are often linked to the idea of “relaxing,” “forgetting your problems,” or just “vibing.” 

According to researchers at the University of Texas, popular rap songs mentioning opioids increased over 100 percent between 2010 and 2020, and the lyrics usually portray the drugs as recreational or harmless. 

When teens hear their favorite artists talk about pills casually, it can normalize misuse and blur the line between entertainment and real-life danger.

Social media adds another layer. On platforms like TikTok and Instagram, trends involving “party drugs” often show pills as colorful, fun, or part of a night out. Content creators rarely show addiction, emergency room visits, or the long-term mental and physical damage. 

The problem with this portrayal is that it hides the truth. Opioids are not harmless party favors. They are powerful drugs that can alter the brain’s reward system, cause dependence in a short amount of time, and lead to deadly overdoses. 

The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) reported that opioid-involved overdose deaths reached more than 80,000 people in 2023, the highest number ever recorded. 

Nothing about that is glamorous.

The media’s glamorization also contributes to stigma. By focusing on “fun” drug imagery, entertainment prevents people from seeing addiction as a medical condition. 

Instead of understanding opioid use disorder as something that requires treatment, support, and compassion, society often sees it as a “bad decision” gone wrong. This stigma makes it harder for people to seek help and easier for audiences to ignore the suffering behind the real opioid epidemic.

Perception shapes reality. When teens constantly see pills framed as harmless fun, it becomes easier to underestimate the risks. It also becomes harder to recognize warning signs in themselves or friends. The National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA) warns that early exposure to positive portrayals of opioids increases the likelihood of experimentation, especially among younger audiences.

The solution isn’t to ban music or shut down social  media. It’s to shift the conversation. 

Entertainment platforms can show the full reality of drug use, not just the parts that look exciting on screen. Schools and families can teach teens to question what they see online and understand the difference between a fictional party scene and a real overdose. Communities can focus on education, mental health support, and honest conversations about substance misuse.


This article was written as part of a program to educate youth and others about Alameda County’s opioid crisis, prevention and treatment options. The program is funded by the Alameda County Behavioral Health Department and the grant is administered by Three Valleys Community Foundation.

Source: https://www.pleasantonweekly.com/alameda-county/2025/12/22/entertainment-vs-reality-how-media-glamorizes-opioids-and-warps-teens-perception/

 

 

THIS ARTICLE IS A COLLATION OF THE SUBMISSION BY DAVID EVANS OF A JAMA RESEARCH BY MICHAEL HSU ET AL, PLUS COMMENTS BY JOHN COLEMAN AND BERTHA MADRAS

Comment by John Coleman, – john.coleman.phd@gmail.com- 14 December 2025 

Subject: Re: FROM DAVID EVANS MOST RECENT META ANALYSIS OF THERAPUETIC USE OF CANNABIS

Bertha,

You raise an interesting point, i.e., could someone argue (and who would it be?) that because cannabis was a medicine prior to the 1938 Amendments to the Food and Drug Act, is pre-market approval required, or can it be considered “grandfathered-in”? My copy of the 1936 National Formulary lists the only cannabis medicine as a tincture and gives the formula for the medicinal composition (see below). The 1937 Marihuana Tax Act prohibited prescribing and dispensing marihuana without a federal registration and payment of a special tax. That, in effect, dissuaded its use as a medicine, and by 1941, it was removed from the U.S. Pharmacopeia.

In 1968, Harvard Professor Timothy Leary brought his case to the Supreme Court. Leary and his daughter had been arrested entering Texas from Mexico with a kilo of marijuana. In deciding for Leary, the Court invalidated much of the Marihuana Tax Act of 1937, under which Leary had been convicted in lower courts. This problem was addressed by Congress in 1970 with the enactment of the Comprehensive Drug Abuse and Control Act, Title II of which is the Controlled Substances Act. This ended the uncertainty and placed cannabis (marihuana and THCs) in Schedule I, confirming that it was not approved for use in treatment in the U.S.

The 1938 Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act grandfathered all drugs on the market at the time the bill was enacted. They did not require additional safety and effectiveness testing required for all new drugs. But this came with a caveat requiring grandfathered drugs to retain the same formulation and chemical composition as before the 1938 Act. This means that the Tincture described in the attachment would have to be replicated today, assuming such an argument might prevail. Personally, I think the CSA of 1970 mooted this issue forever, and anyone making such an argument today would likely be laughed at … (But it is an interesting hypothesis!)

John Coleman

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

Comment by Bertha Madras,  <bertha_madras@hms.harvard.edu> Sent: Sunday, December 14, 2025 

Subject: Re: FROM DAVID EVANS MOST RECENT META ANALYSIS OF THERAPUETIC USE OF CANNABIS

Let us not forget that FDA approval is highly desirable for a drug to be included in S2-S5, but it is not essential. A number of drugs were “grandfathered in”.  I am unaware of any recent drug that landed in a “medical” S2-S5 schedule  without FDA approval. Perhaps Philip Drum is aware of them.  That’s how HHS shaped their argument, on the basis of 8-factor analysis and not FDA approval.

The best rebuttal for how S1 prevents research is to use CBD as an example. It was S1 (and generic CBD remains there) but GW decided to invest in it, did the clinical trials, generated Phase 3 data sufficiently adequate for the FDA to approve. Then Epidiolex eventually was removed from CSA (de-scheduled) because of any evidence it has abuse liability.

Bertha K Madras

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

Submission by DAVID EVANS – December 14, 2025 

MOST RECENT META ANALYSIS OF THERAPEUTIC USE OF CANNABIS – 11.26.2025

Approximately 27% of adults in the US and Canada report having ever used cannabis for medical purposes. An estimated 10.5% of the US population reports using cannabidiol (CBD), a chemical compound extracted from cannabis that does not have psychoactive effects, for therapeutic purposes.

Observations  Conditions for which cannabinoids have approval from the US Food and Drug Administration include HIV/AIDS–related anorexia, chemotherapy-induced nausea and vomiting, and certain pediatric seizure disorders. A meta-analysis of randomized clinical trials reported a small but significant reduction in nausea and vomiting from various causes (eg, chemotherapy, cancer) when comparing prescribed cannabinoids (eg, dronabinol, nabilone) with placebo or active comparators (eg, alizapride, chlorpromazine; standardized mean difference [SMD], −0.29 [95% CI, −0.39 to −0.18]). A meta-analysis of randomized clinical trials among patients with HIV/AIDS reported that cannabinoids had a moderate effect on increasing body weight compared with placebo (SMD, 0.57 [95% CI, 0.22 to 0.92]). Evidence-based guidelines do not recommend the use of inhaled or high-potency cannabis (≥10% or 10 mg Δ9-tetrahydrocannabinol [Δ9-THC]) for medical purposes. High-potency cannabis compared with low-potency cannabis use is associated with increased risk of psychotic symptoms (12.4% vs 7.1%) and generalized anxiety disorder (19.1% vs 11.6%). A meta-analysis of observational studies reported that 29% of individuals who used cannabis for medical purposes met criteria for cannabis use disorder. Daily inhaled cannabis use compared with nondaily use was associated with an increased risk of coronary heart disease (2.0% vs 0.9%), myocardial infarction (1.7% vs 1.3%), and stroke (2.6% vs 1.0%). Evidence from randomized clinical trials does not support the use of cannabis or cannabinoids for most conditions for which it is promoted, such as acute pain and insomnia. Before considering cannabis or cannabinoids for medical use, clinicians should consult applicable institutional, state, and national regulations; evaluate for drug-drug interactions; and assess for contraindications (eg, pregnancy) or conditions in which risks likely outweigh benefits (eg, schizophrenia or ischemic heart disease). For patients using cannabis or cannabinoids for treatment of medical conditions, clinicians should discuss harm reduction strategies, including avoiding concurrent use with alcohol or other central nervous system depressants such as benzodiazepines, using the lowest effective dose, and avoiding use when driving or operating machinery.

Conclusions and Relevance  Evidence is insufficient for the use of cannabis or cannabinoids for most medical indications. Clear guidance from clinicians is essential to support safe, evidence-based decision-making. Clinicians should weigh benefits against risks when engaging patients in informed discussions about cannabis or cannabinoid use.

Therapeutic Use of Cannabis and Cannabinoids –

A Review

Published in JAMA Online: November 26, 2025
ABSTRACT:

Importance  Approximately 27% of adults in the US and Canada report having ever used cannabis for medical purposes. An estimated 10.5% of the US population reports using cannabidiol (CBD), a chemical compound extracted from cannabis that does not have psychoactive effects, for therapeutic purposes.

Observations  Conditions for which cannabinoids have approval from the US Food and Drug Administration include HIV/AIDS–related anorexia, chemotherapy-induced nausea and vomiting, and certain pediatric seizure disorders. A meta-analysis of randomized clinical trials reported a small but significant reduction in nausea and vomiting from various causes (eg, chemotherapy, cancer) when comparing prescribed cannabinoids (eg, dronabinol, nabilone) with placebo or active comparators (eg, alizapride, chlorpromazine; standardized mean difference [SMD], −0.29 [95% CI, −0.39 to −0.18]). A meta-analysis of randomized clinical trials among patients with HIV/AIDS reported that cannabinoids had a moderate effect on increasing body weight compared with placebo (SMD, 0.57 [95% CI, 0.22 to 0.92]). Evidence-based guidelines do not recommend the use of inhaled or high-potency cannabis (≥10% or 10 mg Δ9-tetrahydrocannabinol [Δ9-THC]) for medical purposes. High-potency cannabis compared with low-potency cannabis use is associated with increased risk of psychotic symptoms (12.4% vs 7.1%) and generalized anxiety disorder (19.1% vs 11.6%). A meta-analysis of observational studies reported that 29% of individuals who used cannabis for medical purposes met criteria for cannabis use disorder. Daily inhaled cannabis use compared with nondaily use was associated with an increased risk of coronary heart disease (2.0% vs 0.9%), myocardial infarction (1.7% vs 1.3%), and stroke (2.6% vs 1.0%). Evidence from randomized clinical trials does not support the use of cannabis or cannabinoids for most conditions for which it is promoted, such as acute pain and insomnia. Before considering cannabis or cannabinoids for medical use, clinicians should consult applicable institutional, state, and national regulations; evaluate for drug-drug interactions; and assess for contraindications (eg, pregnancy) or conditions in which risks likely outweigh benefits (eg, schizophrenia or ischemic heart disease). For patients using cannabis or cannabinoids for treatment of medical conditions, clinicians should discuss harm reduction strategies, including avoiding concurrent use with alcohol or other central nervous system depressants such as benzodiazepines, using the lowest effective dose, and avoiding use when driving or operating machinery.

Conclusions and Relevance  Evidence is insufficient for the use of cannabis or cannabinoids for most medical indications. Clear guidance from clinicians is essential to support safe, evidence-based decision-making. Clinicians should weigh benefits against risks when engaging patients in informed discussions about cannabis or cannabinoid use

Source: www.drugwatch.org

Forwarded by Maggie Petito, DWI – 03 December 2025

A variety of news reports* are out concurrently regarding the massive drugs transit schemes to move cocaine, etc. on horrifyingly diseased cattle, etc. illegally flagged tankers. Other tankers ferried sheep and cocaine via the al Kuwait relying on Croatian rackets.

  * Drug cartels are using ships packed with disease-ridden cattle to smuggle huge quantities of cocaine to Europe.

Police do not seize the vessels because it is a “logistical nightmare” to deal with the thousands of cows, intelligence sources have told The Telegraph.

The festering and foul-smelling conditions on board, with many of the animals dead or having spent months wallowing in faeces, put officers off searching the ships.

In the gang-controlled ports of Santos and Belem in Brazil, and in Colombia’s Cartagena, up to 10,000 cows at a time are loaded on to the decrepit 200m long ships, according to sources at the Maritime Analysis and Operations Centre, Narcotics (MAOC-N).”

Every single part of these reports indicates criminal – racketeering- actions where no justice prevails. Source ports in Colombia and Brazil pack for the uninspected ocean carriers. Near-failed state Lebanon and Egypt, previously linked with Latin America’s Hezbollah cartels, receive the tankers of diseased cattle. No reports on the health of the tanker crew.

Moreover: “The 50-year-old carriers set sail around the Caribbean or South America to collect cocaine packages from smaller ships, typically picking up four to 10 tons, worth up to around £450m. The crew conceal the packages in the ship’s giant grain silos and other hiding places, the sources said. The vessels will fly flags of convenience – where the ship is registered in a country different to its ownership, often in those with less stringent maritime regulations, such as Panama and Tanzania.

The vessels are officially bound for the ports of Beirut in Lebanon or Damietta in Egypt, where sanitation regulations for livestock are less stringent than in Europe. However, the ship’s most lucrative cargo is destined for the major seaports of Antwerp or Rotterdam, Europe’s gateways for cocaine. At some point across the Atlantic, the crew tie the packages of cocaine to inflatables, attach GPS devices, and jettison them overboard where they are then picked up by “go-fast boats” and smuggled to Belgium and the Netherlands.

The method is so effective that in the past 18 years, European police have seized only one livestock vessel carrying cocaine. At least one suspicious livestock ship departs every week from South America towards Europe, The Telegraph understands.

The law enforcement group is made up of 10 member countries, including the UK, and works closely with the National Crime Agency, Britain’s equivalent of the FBI.”

One must ask: If 10,000 diseased cattle are shipped to Africa or Europe or the Middle East weekly, in three months this is over 100,000 diseased cows entering such zones. What becomes of these animals?

Hats off to Australia: “Meanwhile, last week Australian police disclosed that a livestock ship carrying sheep had been used to try to smuggle £84m of cocaine into the country.

Fishermen found the cocaine tied to a floating drum off the western coast of Lancelin, about 75 miles north of Perth, on Nov 6.

The Western Australia Joint Organised Crime Taskforce alleged the drugs were dropped into the ocean from a livestock carrier, the Al Kuwait, on its way to Fremantle Harbour.”

So-called shadow fleets and rickety tankers moving god-knows-what, under fake flags and no transponders, are the tools of criminal rackets.

Recently Spain suffered an outbreak of swine flu derived from Spain’s large holiday ham sales. Fearing swine flu transmittal, unsafe ham is being banned.

Unsafe, filthy practices permit the spread of the food of addictions and attendant deadly diseases.

It has been penny wise, so some think, yet pound foolish to curtail USDA staff.

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

Cocaine cows: How cartels use livestock to smuggle drugs to Europe

Gangs pack narcotics into carriers with dead and dying cattle to deter police from searching on board

Telegraph     Max Stephens International Crime Correspondent      02 December 2025

Drug cartels are using ships packed with disease-ridden cattle to smuggle huge quantities of cocaine to Europe.

Police do not seize the vessels because it is a “logistical nightmare” to deal with the thousands of cows, intelligence sources have told The Telegraph.

The festering and foul-smelling conditions on board, with many of the animals dead or having spent months wallowing in faeces, put officers off searching the ships.

In the gang-controlled ports of Santos and Belem in Brazil, and in Colombia’s Cartagena, up to 10,000 cows at a time are loaded on to the decrepit 200m long ships, according to sources at the Maritime Analysis and Operations Centre, Narcotics (MAOC-N).

MAOC-N is an EU law enforcement group based in Lisbon that combats drug-trafficking by sea.

The Orion V was intercepted in the Canary Islands carrying 4,500 kilos of cocaine in Jan 2023 Credit: Policia Nacional

The 50-year-old carriers set sail around the Caribbean or South America to collect cocaine packages from smaller ships, typically picking up four to 10 tons, worth up to around £450m. The crew conceal the packages in the ship’s giant grain silos and other hiding places, the sources said.

The vessels will fly flags of convenience – where the ship is registered in a country different to its ownership, often in those with less stringent maritime regulations, such as Panama and Tanzania.

The vessels are officially bound for the ports of Beirut in Lebanon or Damietta in Egypt, where sanitation regulations for livestock are less stringent than in Europe.

However, the ship’s most lucrative cargo is destined for the major seaports of Antwerp or Rotterdam, Europe’s gateways for cocaine.

At some point across the Atlantic, the crew tie the packages of cocaine to inflatables, attach GPS devices, and jettison them overboard where they are then picked up by “go-fast boats” and smuggled to Belgium and the Netherlands.

The method is so effective that in the past 18 years, European police have seized only one livestock vessel carrying cocaine. At least one suspicious livestock ship departs every week from South America towards Europe, The Telegraph understands.

The law enforcement group is made up of 10 member countries, including the UK, and works closely with the National Crime Agency, Britain’s equivalent of the FBI.

An intelligence analyst for the MAOC-N told The Telegraph: “You would not want to spend more than one minute on one of these vessels, you can only imagine the smell. The authorities don’t want to have these vessels at their ports.

“Logistically, the countries don’t like to do inspections on board these vessels. The bad guys, they know this and that’s why they are using it.”

When police and customs officers reached the Orion V they faced the terrible stench of dead and dying cows Credit: Policia Nacional

Sniffer dogs are near useless at detecting drugs because they are so put off by the cows and their stench, they added.

The source described the scale of the problem as a “black hole”. Without intelligence detailing exactly where the drugs were onboard, it was almost impossible to meet the threshold for convincing national police authorities to do a seizure.

They said: “You can imagine the cost of such an operation, to get to a port, take all the cattle out, get all the authorities in to do an inspection on a vessel that is very big, a lot of concealment [for drugs]. They [the gangs] are very professional and they know exactly what they can take advantage of.”

On January 24 2023, Spanish police made the first ever seizure of a cattle ship trafficking cocaine in European waters. Armed police intercepted the 100m long Orion V 62 nautical miles south-west of the Canary Islands during its voyage from Colombia to Lebanon.

Officers discovered 4,500kg of cocaine, with a value of around £82m, hidden in packages in cattle food silos. Footage from body-worn police cameras showed officers wading through dung and urine from the 1,750 cows on board.

Packages of drugs, alleged by Australian police to have been carried on a ship full of sheep Credit: Western Australia Police

The vessel, flying a Togolese flag, was towed to Las Palmas de Gran Canaria and its 28 crew members, of nine different nationalities, were arrested. Locals in the port city reportedly complained of the rotting smell emanating from the vessel.

Meanwhile, last week Australian police disclosed that a livestock ship carrying sheep had been used to try to smuggle £84m of cocaine into the country.

Fishermen found the cocaine tied to a floating drum off the western coast of Lancelin, about 75 miles north of Perth, on Nov 6.

The Western Australia Joint Organised Crime Taskforce alleged the drugs were dropped into the ocean from a livestock carrier, the Al Kuwait, on its way to Fremantle Harbour.

Police said the drugs were dropped into the ocean from a livestock carrier Credit: Western Australia Police

The day after the drugs were found, police charged the vessel’s chief officer, a 46-year-old Croatian national, with attempting to import a commercial quantity of cocaine. Investigators searched his ship and found a blue drum and ropes similar to those allegedly found with the drugs.

Two men from Sydney, aged 19 and 36, and a 52-year-old Perth man were all allegedly part of the shore party, and responsible for collecting the cocaine and bringing it to shore.

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

Trump’s Pardon for Cocaine Juan

A jury found Honduras’s former President guilty. Why set him free?

Wall Street Journal   The Editorial Board     Dec. 2, 2025

President Trump, like other politicians, sometimes does something unpopular to please his base. But what is the audience for Mr. Trump’s pardon of former Honduran President Juan Orlando Hernández?

He was sentenced in 2024 to 45 years in prison, after a federal jury in New York found him guilty of participating in a conspiracy to traffic 400 tons of cocaine to the U.S.

“The jury heard the testimony of Juan Orlando Hernández, and saw right through his polished demeanor,” Judge P. Kevin Castel told the court during last year’s sentencing. “They saw him for what he was, a two-faced politician, hungry for power, who presented himself as a champion against gangs, murder, crime, and drug trafficking, but secretly protected a select group of drug traffickers.”

Those 400 tons of cocaine, trans-shipped via Honduras, were worth $10 billion in the U.S. “In 2013, El Chapo Guzman, head of the Sinaloa Cartel, paid a $1 million bribe to Hernández and his campaign, delivered directly to Hernández’s brother,” the judge said. While the former Honduran leader wasn’t accused of a direct role in the conspiracy’s killings, “he knew and understood the violence that accompanies drug trafficking, and in facilitating trafficking, he knowingly facilitated the violence.”

That’s the voice of the federal judge who presided over the trial, saw the evidence, and supervised the jury. So why did Mr. Trump decide to set Mr. Hernández free?

“I was asked by Honduras, many of the people of Honduras, they said it was a Biden set up,” Mr. Trump told a reporter Sunday on Air Force One. “They basically said he was a drug dealer because he was the President of the country. And they said it was a Biden Administration set up, and I looked at the facts, and I agreed with them.”

Would Mr. Trump care to elaborate for a perplexed public, including Republicans on Capitol Hill? The Trump Administration is saying that illegal drugs are a threat serious enough to justify U.S. military strikes on alleged trafficking boats in the Caribbean, and it’s also trying to push out Venezuelan dictator Nicolás Maduro. “Why would we pardon this guy and then go after Maduro for running drugs into the United States?” Sen. Bill Cassidy wrote on social media. “Lock up every drug runner! Don’t understand why he is being pardoned.”

Mr. Hernández pleaded for clemency in a sycophantic letter to Mr. Trump that is dated Oct. 28. “I have found strength from you, Sir, your resilience to get back in that great office notwithstanding the persecution and prosecution you faced, all for what, because you wished to make your country Great Again,” the Honduran wrote. “Like you, I was recklessly attacked by radical leftist forces.”

The White House denied that Mr. Trump saw this fawning message before he announced the pardon late last week, but the letter was reportedly passed along to him by Roger Stone, the Beltway gadfly whom Mr. Trump pardoned in the first term after a conviction for lying to Congress.

Meantime, the results of Sunday’s presidential election in Honduras remain too close to call. Mr. Stone had argued on his blog that a “well-timed pardon” for Mr. Hernández could help to prod the election in a direction favorable to American interests.

What a strange turn of events. Perhaps Mr. Trump thinks he’s playing geopolitical chess, but he has a long record of high susceptibility to flattery, and his pardon without explanation undermines the rule of law and the prosecutors who put Mr. Hernández away. Which convicted criminals will be the next to discover that praising Donald Trump’s magnificence is a get-out-of-jail-free card?

Source: www.drugwatch.org

Opening Statement by NDPA:

This essay by Gillis-Smith is published here not through any support of its content, but as an example of the published works in this area of the drugs policy/practice field at large. Readers must draw their own conclusions as to its validity and value.

by Paul Gillis-Smith – program lead on psychedelics and spirituality,  Harvard Law School – November 30, 2025

“psychedelics golden age” of access, research, and culture. A significant reason is their assumption that psychedelics were easy to get because few laws criminalized their possession or sale prior to the Comprehensive Drug Abuse Prevention and Control Act of 1970. But that story leaves out the legal predecessors to the Controlled Substances Act, specifically the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (FDCA) of 1938. 

This essay corrects the false notion of a legal psychedelic “free-for-all” through the story of Lisa Bieberman, an LSD enthusiast and Harvard Square denizen of the 1960s. I draw upon archival research at the Peter Stafford Papers at Columbia University for Bieberman’s bimonthly publication, the Psychedelic Information Center Bulletin, and the Cambridge Public Library Archives for Bieberman’s never-published memoir manuscript, To Mark A Spot: A Psychedelic Pilgrimage. Bieberman was prosecuted under the FDCA, which gave the FDA authority to regulate food, drugs, medical devices, and cosmetics. According to a story in the Harvard Crimson, she was the first person in New England prosecuted for an LSD violation under the FDCA, for illegally shipping LSD through the mail. 

Bieberman was a Radcliffe graduate (’63) who encountered psychedelics through Timothy Leary and Richard Alpert, two faculty in Harvard’s Department of Social Relations, just as their time at Harvard screeched to a halt. Upon her graduation, she worked for Leary and Alpert’s para-academic organization, the International Federation for Internal Freedom, which Bieberman describes in her memoir as continuing Leary and Alpert’s research, starting a pharmaceutical lab, and launching a combination clinic-utopian colony (71-72). She kept their Cambridge headquarters afloat while Leary, Alpert, and company flew off to Mexico, the Caribbean, and eventually upstate New York. 

Bieberman started the Psychedelic Information Center (PIC) in Harvard Square in 1965, releasing a bimonthly bulletin where she reported on changing drug laws, sold mushroom grow guides, publicized new psychedelic churches, and attempted to correct myths, like whether smoked banana peels are a psychedelic (they aren’t).

IMAGE: Psychedelic Information Center Bulletin 3; December 1965; Peter G. Stafford papers; Box 29 Folder “Psychedelic Information Center Bulletin (Cambridge, Mass.)”; Rare Book and Manuscript Library, Columbia University Library

In 1965, in the third installment of her PIC Bulletin, Bieberman provided an open offer for LSD for Christmas: “Santa Claus has a batch of LSD, but the law won’t let him carry it across state lines in his little red sleigh.” Based on the offer, it is clear she was aware of her limitations per the FDCA. Nevertheless, based on information in her memoir, she mailed LSD to a handful of out-of-state requests (242). Bieberman reports that on March 18, 1966, she received a letter from the FDA that threatened prosecution for shipments of LSD across state lines to Kansas, Missouri, and California with improper labeling (under FDCA, (502)(e)(1)(A)(i), per the FDA Papers, 35). She had sent sugar cubes to a student in Kansas who had apparently publicized his acquisition a bit too loudly; and Bieberman alleged that the FDA caught wind of him (242-243). She was arraigned in the summer of 1966 and pleaded not guilty. The day after her arraignment, Bieberman left Boston for UC Berkeley’s LSD Conference. 

In mid-November of 1966, Bieberman at last had her day in court — three days, in fact. According to her memoir, she found her lawyer inept —Bieberman felt she had done far more research on her case than her lawyer could ever be convinced of doing (295-297). The judge found her guilty of violating the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act: four counts of mailing LSD without proper labeling. She was sentenced to a year of probation. 

While the state’s sentence was light, the extralegal consequences were worse. After her sentencing, Bieberman reported that she was urged by her department at Brandeis University, where she had just begun a PhD in Psychology, to resign (299). Because of her drug conviction, the Massachusetts Registry of Motor Vehicles refused to renew her driver’s license.

Bieberman’s run-in with the law did not dissuade her from psychedelic advocacy. Two months after her sentencing, she published Session Games People Play: A Manual for the Use of LSD. In her Bulletin in April 1967, she devoted several paragraphs to the confused state of the law regarding psychedelic research and how researchers can obtain and manufacture their own LSD. She implores her readers to pick up the Drug Abuse and Control Amendments (1965) for themselves, as “too few people read the law books, and (contrary to popular belief) they are really not hard to read.” 

Bieberman’s case demonstrates that the FDA would prosecute cases involving psychedelics in the ’60s, counter to the common conception that all activities involving psychedelics were legally unrestricted until the Controlled Substances Act. In fact, this was a known risk, as Bieberman notes in her Christmas coupon, and in her frequent admonitions against secrecy and paranoia among psychedelic enthusiasts. 

In an essay for The Boston Globe Magazine in 1968, Bieberman insisted that paranoia and underground activities cannot be the winning strategy – nor were religious arguments likely to be compelling if they were disingenuous: “Most psychedelic groups up till now have kept their activities nine-tenths submerged; when they get in trouble they scream religious persecution. But I do not think our courts will ultimately choose to persecute religion, where it proves itself genuine and conscientious.” While Bieberman did not take up a legal defense on the grounds of religion for her use and advocacy of LSD, she did become a devout Quaker. In an essay titled “Phanerothyme: A Western Approach to the Religious Use of Psychochemicals,” Bieberman offered a model of using psychedelics in a Quaker style. Rather than offering legal protection, Bieberman’s religious approach to LSD was intended to support the lessons that a psychedelic experience “has to teach, to support one’s companions in their search, and to put the insights gained into practice in living.”  

This post is part of a digital symposium titled The PULSE of Psychedelics, Law, and Spirituality. 

About the author – Paul Gillis-Smith

  • Paul Gillis-Smith is a program lead on psychedelics and spirituality, as part of the Transcendence and Transformation Initiative at the Center for the Study of World Religions. He is an alum of Harvard Divinity School (M.Div ’24), where he focused on the history of psychiatry as it relates to psychedelic medicine and chaplaincy.

Source: https://petrieflom.law.harvard.edu/2025/11/30/lsd-gospel-christmas-tidings-and-the-fda-during-the-psychedelic-sixties/

Opening statement by NDPA:

NDPA has mixed feelings about Harm Reduction – in one form, aiming to minimise harm in users while they consider cessation of drug use, it is something which NDPA supports, but in another form it is a ‘closet legalisation ploy’ – promoting the notion that drug use is valid and one should only seek to reduce the harm users experience – and NDPA clearly does not support this form. With this caveat, this article is included as an opinion piece for reading.

by Ricardo Fuertes, EATG member and representative at the EU Civil Society Forum on Drugs – December 17, 2025

Earlier this month, Mr Fuertes participated in the Civil Society Forum on Drugs as a representative of EATG. The discussions offered important insights into the current direction of EU drug policy and the conditions under which civil society organisations are operating.

The New EU Drugs Strategy: An Unbalanced Approach and the Downgrading of Harm Reduction

The European Commission presented the new EU Drugs Strategy. From the perspective of many civil society organisations, the Strategy is notably unbalanced. While prevention, treatment, and social integration are clearly highlighted and structured as core pillars, harm reduction is treated differently. Rather than being recognised as a distinct and essential pillar, it is dispersed across the document, diluted in its language, and separated from the other approaches.

At the same time, the Strategy is highly detailed when it comes to security-related themes, threats, and supply reduction. Considerable attention is given to law enforcement and control measures, while approaches grounded in public health and human rights receive comparatively less emphasis. Decriminalisation and the legal regulation of drugs are entirely absent from the framework. In addition, the Strategy lacks a defined timeframe or end date, raising concerns about accountability and evaluation. It is also not accompanied by a dedicated budget or a comprehensive action plan beyond an Action Plan against drug trafficking.

These concerns have been explicited in a joint letter coordinated by the International Drug Policy Consortium and signed by a wide number of organisations, including EATG, as a tool to encourage negotiation with Member States.

Systemic Barriers and Excluded Populations

Discussions throughout the Forum highlighted the need to better address systemic barriers affecting vulnerable populations. While HIV and viral hepatitis are mentioned within the EU Drugs Strategy, this is done in broad terms, without clearly identifying who is being left behind and why.

From EATG’s perspective, undocumented migrants must be explicitly included in prevention and treatment efforts. Legal precarity, fear of detection, and administrative barriers continue to exclude many undocumented migrants from access to drug services, HIV prevention, and care for viral hepatitis. A generic commitment to identifying systemic barriers is not sufficient; concrete measures are needed to ensure that prevention and treatment are accessible to all, regardless of migration status.

Civil Society Participation Under Pressure

A noticeable decline in participation at this year’s Forum was also observed. This reflects the increasingly difficult conditions under which many civil society organisations are operating across Europe. Participants reported funding cuts, staff reductions and layoffs, as well as decisions to limit participation in international meetings. These pressures are forcing organisations to reduce activities and service provision, with harm reduction particularly affected.

Across the Forum, there was a shared sense that civil society space is narrowing and that critical voices are at risk of being marginalised.

As debates around the EU Drugs Strategy continue, EATG will continue to underline the importance of protecting civil society space, restoring harm reduction as a central pillar of drug policy, and ensuring that prevention and treatment genuinely reach the most marginalised, including undocumented migrants. A balanced, public health- and rights-based approach is not an abstract principle; it requires concrete actions, political commitment, and sustained investment.

           Photo: Delegates at the Civil Society Forum on Drugs – December 17, 2025

Source:  https://www.eatg.org/blogs/the-new-eu-drugs-strategy-an-unbalanced-approach-and-the-downgrading-of-harm-reduction/

by Robert F. Bukaty/Associated Press – Wall Street Journal      The Editorial Board           Dec. 9, 2025

Forwarded by Maggie Petito, DWI –  10 December 2025

Two new studies show that the ill effects of THC are increasing.

Here’s some surprising political news: A referendum campaign is gaining support in Massachusetts, of all places, to reverse the state’s 2016 legalization of recreational marijuana. Not coincidentally, two new studies report a surge in young pot users showing up at hospital emergency rooms.

Doctors at Mass General Brigham hospital found that the share of adolescents with psychiatric emergencies who tested positive for THC—the psychoactive ingredient in marijuana—jumped nearly four-fold after the drug was legalized for recreational sale and consumption in the state. The prevalence of other cannabis-related disorders among adolescents increased by a similar amount.

“Young people with mental health challenges are more vulnerable to the negative effects of cannabis use, which can catalyze or worsen psychiatric symptoms,” author Cheryl Yunn Shee Foo writes. She adds that legalization of the drug can lead to “greater accessibility, social acceptability, and advertising” that increases use among young people.

This last point is common sense. Legalization removes a stigma from marijuana use, as well as increasing its availability.

Meantime, a new study in the Journal of the American Medical Association (JAMA) finds a surge in young adults nationwide showing up at hospital emergency rooms with cannabinoid hyperemesis syndrome (CHS). This is cyclical vomiting, often with nausea or stomach pain, that is far more severe than what someone might experience after a night of binge drinking. It is caused by heavy marijuana use, especially at high potencies.

ER visits for the disorder increased nearly eight-fold in the spring of 2020 as Covid lockdowns took hold. Visits dropped some in 2022, but remained about five times higher than before the pandemic. The U.S. Northeast and West experienced the biggest spikes, perhaps not surprising since most states in those regions have legalized marijuana and they also imposed strict lockdowns.

California, New York and other progressive states allowed pot dispensaries to stay open during the lockdowns by deeming them “essential businesses.” Instead of working, young people got high at home.

The study notes that better awareness among physicians of the disorder may contribute to the increase in ER diagnoses. An earlier study found that patients with the syndrome visited the ER on average 18 times before getting diagnosed, costing on average $76,920 per patient. Maybe someone can investigate how much Medicaid is spending on treating pothead maladies.

An accompanying commentary in JAMA says that stopping marijuana use is the “cornerstone” of preventing the syndrome, but “abrupt discontinuation may lead to withdrawal and high rates of relapse.” Legalization proponents downplay marijuana’s negative effects and addictive potential, but daily marijuana use is more common than daily alcohol use, according to a Carnegie Mellon University analysis last year of national survey data.

A group in Massachusetts last week submitted more than 74,000 signatures for a ballot referendum next November to reverse the state’s legalization experiment. These days this is a counterculture cause, but it’s one that may gain momentum as the ills of pothead culture and especially from pot use among the young become more widespread.

Source: www.drugwatch.org

Kevin Sabet’s message is getting through. Credit: Getty
by Sohrab Ahmari – US editor of UnHerd  – 29 Nov 2025 

In June 2014, Maureen Dowd published a column that has since acquired legendary status in drug-policy circles. In it, the New York Times writer recounted her experience trying a marijuana candy bar on a visit to Denver not long after Colorado legalized pot. After a calm first hour, the drug plunged her into a personal hell: panting, shudders, confusion, deep paranoia. Eventually: “I became convinced that I had died, and no one was telling me.”
Social media gently mocked Dowd when her column first appeared: silly Boomer, she didn’t dose it right — couldn’t handle the ride. Momentum for legalization was gathering back then, driven by the anti-antidrug Left, the free-market Right, and lobbyists and entrepreneurs who could just hear the cha-ching sounding from the next big vice industry. Twenty-three states plus the District of Columbia would follow in Colorado’s footsteps in the decade that followed.
The picture of weed shared by many older Americans, drawn from their own college years, helped ease the path of legalization. Weed, the mellow drug. The Cheech-and-Chong drug. The Grateful-Dead-road-trip drug. The munchies drug. The drug that, if anything, makes you overly cautious behind the wheel. Dowd thought of marijuana along similar lines — that is, until she tried the legalized stuff for herself and nearly lost her ever-loving mind. 
Since then, weed potency has only intensified, with some concentrates reaching near-pure levels of THC, the plant’s primary psychoactive compound. Only now are policy makers and opinion elites reckoning with what Big Weed has wrought: “turning a drug that used to be 5% THC, and made people pass out for a few hours and eat Cheetos, into one that triggers psycho killers,” as Kevin Sabet, a former drug adviser in successive Democratic and GOP administrations, tells me.
Sabet admits that such talk can make him sound like Reefer Madness, the classic anti-weed propaganda film from 1936. “But if you look at almost every single mass shooting in this country, there are many common denominators, and one of them is a substance. And it’s not alcohol, and it’s not meth, and it’s not fentanyl. So you can guess what it is. It’s marijuana.”  
Take Robert Westman, the 23-year-old who murdered two children and wounded 30 people in a gun rampage at a Minnesota Catholic school in August. In his diaries, Westman, who both used weed and worked at a dispensary, blamed the drug for his violent tendencies. “Gender and weed fucked up my head,” he wrote. “I wish I never tried experimenting with either. Don’t let your kids smoke weed or change gender until they are, like, 17.” 
A 2025 study, published in the East Asian Archives of Psychiatry, found a definite and growing link between US mass-shooting perpetrators and the use, possession, and distribution of cannabis. Moreover, the researchers found that younger mass killers are more likely to be involved with marijuana. They concluded that the drug is particularly harmful to “subgroups of individuals” prone to such violent eruptions.
Even if they don’t go full Columbine, young people who regularly use today’s high-potency varieties are at elevated risk for psychosis, per a 2019 study published in Lancet Psychiatry. King’s College London, home to the lead author, sums up the grim finding: “In cities where high-potency cannabis is widely available, such as London and Amsterdam, . . . a significant proportion of new cases of psychosis are associated with daily cannabis use.”
Things have gotten so bad that The Guardian, which once pooh-poohed concerns about weed, now regularly runs warnings about its adverse effects on health (it doubles the risk of heart death, to mention just one recent finding). Most recently, the paper took readers inside a pioneering London clinic specially dedicated to addressing cannabis psychosis. It’s a crisis that goes far beyond a typical “bad trip,” shattering minds and leading many users to take their own lives.
“We are dealing with a fundamentally different drug,” says Sabet, “that has been genetically modified and bred by a powerful industry that we are now sanctioning and encouraging, and allowing to contribute to inaugurations.. . . The fact that we are allowing this, to me, that’s immoral.” Despite bipartisan opposition from a pro-weed lobby led by the likes of John Boehner, the former Republican House speaker, Sabet’s calls for limits have begun to break through.
Most notably, Sabet has led the campaign urging President Trump not to remove marijuana from Schedule I, the most serious category in the federal government’s scheme for classifying drugs. As he wrote in a widely read UnHerd essay, reclassification wouldn’t mean federal legalization. But it would grant the drug a false federal “imprimatur of being safer,” thus allowing Big Weed to enjoy tax deductions from which they are currently barred. 
So far, Sabet’s campaign seems to have stayed Trump’s hand, even as the president has floated the idea of Medicaid coverage of marijuana products as a stress and pain balm for seniors. “This [reclassification] isn’t a priority for the president,” Sabet tells me. “But on the other hand, there are some lobbyists and maybe friends of his son-in-law and others in the business” who would benefit from rescheduling and its associated tax benefits, meaning Sabet’s work is far from over.
Kevin Sabet came to the drug problem from an unusual personal angle. Born in the Midwest to a Bahai family that left Iran before the 1979 Islamic Revolution, he remembers a childhood in which he didn’t know anyone who so much as drank. (The Bahai religion, which is persecuted by Iran’s ruling Islamists, preaches the unity of all faiths — and total abstinence). When he moved to Orange County as a teenager, his perspective was radically different from that of his peers. And what he saw of addiction encouraged him to fight it. 
As an undergrad at the University of California, Berkeley, in the mid-’90s, he says, “I saw the influence of the [drug] culture. I saw marijuana shops before that was even a thing.” Then the rave culture arrived, giving rise to what he describes as a “mini-epidemic” associated with the hallucinogen ecstasy, also known as MDMA. As a student, he’d go to clubs and hand out postcards showing scans of drug-addled brains on one side, and a call-for-help number on the other.
His activism won him some attention in the press — and then a phone call from Barry McCaffrey, the retired US Army general then serving as President Bill Clinton’s drug czar. “I thought the call was fake,” Sabet recalls. But it wasn’t. Gen. McCaffrey was offering him a job as a speechwriter. Sabet accepted and moved to Washington before heading to Oxford to earn a master’s degree in social policy.
“Weed potency has only intensified, with some concentrates reaching near-pure levels of THC.” 
After 9/11, many of Sabet’s friends went off to Afghanistan in defense of the homeland, and he felt guilty writing papers at “Oxford, of all places, a comfortable place.” As it happens, the White House called again — this time, the George W. Bush administration with an offer to hire him as a senior speech writer on drug policy. “ ‘We want you to serve your country,’ ” he remembers the caller saying. “ ‘We know you’re not a Republican, but we also know you’re not a Democrat, and that’s fine with us.’ ” (His politics, as far as I can tell, are: whatever will stop this scourge.)
Yet another White House stint came during the Obama administration, which tapped him as senior drug-policy adviser (by then he’d finished his master’s and a doctorate at Oxford). It was around that time, the 2010s, that marijuana legalization went from a pothead’s dream to a serious business and political enterprise. Weed, the legalizers said, is harmless. Sabet disagreed, and he published a book, Reefer Sanity, to push back against the complacent mythology.
The book, in turn, led to his founding of a restrictionist advocacy group, Smart Approaches to Marijuana, or SAM, today the most visible drug-policy organization in Washington (a telling indicator of the growing concern about Big Weed).
But why the focus on marijuana? Why not the likes of fentanyl or heroin? Marijuana, Sabet answers, “is the most dangerous drug in my mind because it’s the most misunderstood.” There was a time when one could “experiment” with pot as part of the transition to adult responsibility and success. “The marijuana of today is doing the opposite,” he says, potentially derailing a person for life. “It’s causing violence, it’s causing erratic people to lose any sense of reality.”
And it’s addictive, a truth that Americans are still reluctant to accept. Sabet recalls speaking to a large group about the addiction angle, only for a member of the audience to tell him during the Q&A portion: “I use it every day, Kevin, and I’m qualified to tell you it’s not addictive.” 
The numbers say otherwise. As the Associated Press reported on Tuesday, regular use of marijuana has now outpaced drinking, with 18 million Americans reporting daily use, up from fewer than 1 million in the 1990s. In tandem, there has been an explosion in diagnoses of cannabis-use disorder — an insatiable craving for the drug that leaves people incapable of fulfilling ordinary responsibilities; 1 in 3 pot users suffers from it, with symptoms classified from mild to severe.
But aren’t alcohol and tobacco just as destructive? Why not call for a new Prohibition and extend it to cigarettes for good measure? 
“The reason I would say that Prohibition wasn’t sustainable as a policy in America is because alcohol has been so ingrained in Western civilization, since before the time of the Old Testament.” Then, too, alcohol is associated with human sociality, and for most people, the substance and its effects leave the body after 24 hours. Not so with weed, which lingers for much longer and at a cellular level. Sabet thus dismisses the argument that we shouldn’t restrict marijuana until alcohol is under control: “That’s like saying my headlights are broken, and just to be consistent, I’m going to break my tail lights, too.”
As for smoking: “Ninety percent of the people who built the Brooklyn Bridge were smokers. They were smoking at the time they built the Brooklyn Bridge. They could function. Maybe it even made them concentrate better,” Sabet says. The cigarette — unlike tobacco itself — “is a relatively new invention.” 
Lung-cancer deaths before the 1920s were almost unheard of. Only with the rise of a cigarette industry did the smoking crisis appear. And that, he says, is also what’s happening with legalized, industrial weed, a product hawked by growers chasing ever higher THC yields — mental health be damned. Moreover, as cigarette smoking rates decline, Big Tobacco is looking to enter the weed market, Sabet says.
So what to do now, beyond restriction (a cause that’s already lost in half of US states)? At the root of the drug crisis, Sabet thinks, is a “moral and spiritual breakdown.” Drugs, he suggests, offer too-easy answers to the search for meaning; or else they palliate the pain associated with modern life. Even so, Western societies can erect guardrails, for example by hindering the spread of weed advertising to ever-younger audiences. 
As for those already trapped, Sabet sees a role for behavioral incentive systems, such as programs that offer cash rewards for addicts who don’t use — or ones in which they face a choice between doing time or going to rehab. 
“I’m calling for a new effort on drugs,” he says, aware of the odium attached to the War on Drugs. “I don’t love the war analogy because wars have defined ends, or they should. And this will never stop. We will never stop having to stop drug use among young generations. . . . I embrace aiming for a drug-free society, even if it’s not possible. We’ve never had a violence-free society, but that doesn’t mean that we don’t want to aim for that.” 
Source : https://archive.is/DrvMY#selection-480.0-487.55

Drug Enforcement Administration

by Rosa Valle-Lopez – December 03, 2025

|LOS ANGELES – The U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration is intensifying its fight against the deadly threat of synthetic opioids with the launch of Fentanyl Free America, a comprehensive enforcement initiative and public awareness campaign aimed at reducing both the supply and demand for fentanyl. This effort underscores DEA’s unwavering commitment to protecting American lives and communities from the devastating impacts of fentanyl, which claimed nearly 50,000 lives last year according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). 

Through intensified enforcement operations and heightened intelligence, DEA is applying unprecedented pressure on the global fentanyl supply chain, forcing narco-terrorists, like the Sinaloa Cartel and CJNG Cartel, to change their business practices. This has led to encouraging signs of progress. DEA laboratory testing indicates 29% of fentanyl pills analyzed during fiscal year (FY) 2025 contained a potentially lethal dose, a significant drop from 76% of pills tested just two years prior in FY 2023. Additionally, fentanyl powder purity decreased to 10.3%, down from 19.5% during the same time period. These reductions in potency and purity correlate with a decline in synthetic opioid deaths to levels not seen since April 2020. 

As of December 1, 2025, DEA has seized more than 45 million fentanyl pills, and more than 9,320 pounds of fentanyl powder, removing an estimated 347 million potentially deadly doses of fentanyl from our communities. DEA intelligence indicates a shift in cartel operations, with increased trafficking of fentanyl powder and domestic production of fentanyl pills. The seizure of more than two dozen pill press machines in October further highlights this trend.

“Fentanyl Free America represents DEA’s unwavering commitment to save American lives and end the fentanyl crisis, we are making significant progress in this fight, and we must continue to intensify efforts to disrupt the fentanyl supply and reduce demand,” said DEA Administrator Terrance Cole. “DEA is striking harder and evolving faster to dismantle the foreign terrorists fueling this crisis, while empowering all our partners to join the fight to prevent fentanyl-related tragedies. Together, we can achieve a fentanyl free America and create a safer future for generations to come.” 

The DEA Los Angeles Field Division was one of 23 domestic field divisions and seven foreign divisions that initiated Operation Fentanyl Free America in October.  This targeted enforcement effort resulted in the seizure of:

  • 1,027,206 Counterfeit pills
  • 70.97 kilograms of fentanyl powder
  • 978 kilograms methamphetamine
  • 149.32 kilograms of cocaine
  • 3 pill press machines
  • 15 firearms
  • $28,852,441 U.S. currency

Brian Clark, Special Agent in Charge of the Los Angeles Field Division, said, “Our country will be safer, healthier, and more secure when fentanyl no longer threatens our communities. A fentanyl-free America is within reach thanks to increased enforcement, education, awareness, and prevention. We all play a critical role in the fight against fentanyl. We’ve made substantial progress, but we can’t stop now.”

The threat of poly-drug organizations; cartels that traffic a portfolio of drugs opposed to a single substance became even more apparent during Operation Fentanyl Free America.  Aside from producing less potent fentanyl, the cartels have increasingly diversified their operations in an attempt to minimize their risks and maximize profits, an evolution driven by opportunity and greed.

DEA remains at the forefront of the fight to disrupt trafficking networks and strengthen the government’s response to this epidemic.  Fentanyl Free America represents DEA’s heightened focus on enforcement, education, public awareness, and strategic partnerships. The goal of the campaign is clear: eliminate the fentanyl supply fueling the nation’s deadliest drug crisis. Since 2021, synthetic opioids have claimed nearly 325,000 American lives. 

The Fentanyl Free America campaign also emphasizes the importance of public engagement.  DEA encourages everyone from community leaders, clergy, educators, parents, physicians, pharmacists, and law enforcement to take an active role in raising awareness by protecting others through education; preventing fentanyl poisonings by understanding the dangers; and supporting those impacted.  Free resources including posters, radio advertising, billboards, and social media resources are available at dea.gov/fentanylfree.  

DEA’s efforts are part of a larger whole-of-government strategy to dismantle transnational criminal organizations and protect U.S. communities from fentanyl.  

Source: https://www.dea.gov/press-releases/2025/12/03/dea-launches-fentanyl-free-america-initiative-combat-synthetic-drug-2

by Jared Culligan – Program Manager, Safety –

From 2019 to 2023, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recorded more than 4,931 deaths in drunk driving traffic crashes during the month of December. In addition, a study by NHTSA found more than 54% of injured drivers had some amount of alcohol or drugs in their system at the time of the incident.

While this month focuses primarily on reducing impaired driving on the road, it’s also crucial to extend this conversation to safety in the workplace and how drunk and drug impaired driving can impact the construction industry.

What can your organization do to prevent drunk and drug impaired driving incidents?

  • Perform random and post-incident drug testing and have a recovery-ready workplace to engage and support employees in stopping substance misuse whenever possible.
  • Provide education and training materials on the effects of certain substances.

NAHB has several Video Toolbox Talks, available in English and Spanish, that cover drunk and drug impaired driving and its underlying causes. Please be sure to check out our content and help spread awareness as we approach the holidays:

In addition, several government establishments are promoting materials during this time of year. Check out their available resources here:

If you know of anybody that needs immediate help, please reach out to the 988 Suicide and Crisis Lifeline or SAMHSA’s National Helpline, 1-800-662-HELP (4357).

by Erin E. Bonar, Ph.D et al. – News Release Michigan Medicine – University of Michigan

Among people over 50 who use cannabis, those most likely to drive after partaking are men, people who use daily, and those who use THC-containing products for mental health reasons

With cannabis-related vehicle crashes on the rise, a new study suggests that prevention campaigns shouldn’t focus just on young people.

In fact, 20% of people over 50 who use cannabis products reported that at least once in the past year, they had driven within two hours of using the drug.

That means they likely got on the road while the THC in cannabis still impaired their reaction times, attention and other abilities that are important to driving safely.

The findings, from a University of Michigan team led by addiction psychologist Erin E. Bonar, Ph.D., are published in the journal Drug and Alcohol Dependence. The data behind the study come from the National Poll on Healthy Aging, based at the U-M Institute for Healthcare Policy and Innovation.

Bonar and the poll team published an initial analysis in late 2024, but the new paper dives deeper into the data.

“So much of the effort to reduce ‘driving while high’ through awareness campaigns has focused on young people, but our findings show this is a cross-generational issue,” said Bonar, a professor of psychiatry at the U-M Medical School. “Targeting messages at those middle age and older adults with the highest risk of post-use driving could also include message about the options for addressing the health issues that they may be trying to self-treat with cannabis.”

Those most likely to drive after using cannabis

Adults age 50 and over who use cannabis products daily or nearly daily were three times as likely to say they had driven soon after using, compared with those who only use cannabis rarely, the study finds.

Those who use cannabis for mental health reasons were twice as likely to say they’d driven after using it, compared with those who didn’t list mental health among their reasons for choosing to use cannabis.

And men over 50 who use cannabis were 72% more likely to drive after using THC-containing products, compared with women in the same age group who use cannabis.

In all, the poll showed that 21% of people age 50 and up had used a cannabis product at least once in the last year, including 27% of those aged 50 to 64 and 17% of those aged 65 and up.

Of the 729 respondents over 50 who said they had used cannabis in the past year, 27% said they use it daily or almost daily, while 43% had used it only once or twice. The rest were divided between those who use monthly (14%) and weekly (16%).

Beyond the riskiest groups

While the study results suggest some groups of people over 50 who could especially benefit from targeted preventive messaging about the risks of driving after using cannabis, broad-based messaging appears to be needed, Bonar says.

In all, 65% of the people in the survey who said they use cannabis were between the ages of 50 and 64, with the rest over 65. But there was no difference between the age groups in likelihood of post-cannabis-use driving.

There were also no differences in post-use driving by age, race, ethnicity, income, history of loneliness, or caregiver status.

Those who live in states where recreational cannabis has been legalized were no more likely to drive after using the drug than those living in other states.

In addition to mental health, the poll asked about other reasons that adults over 50 might use cannabis, including several related to health. In all, 52% of people over 50 who use cannabis cited a mental health or mood-related motive for using cannabis, and 67% cited a sleep-related motive.

There was no difference in whether participants drove after cannabis use based on using it for pain, other medical reasons or sleep-related reasons, once the researchers adjusted the data. However, there was some signal that those who use it for sleep reasons may be more likely to drive after using.

This suggests a need to help adults age 50 and up understand that there are options for treating these conditions that have much more evidence behind them than cannabis, said Bonar. It also highlights the need for more robust research on which health conditions cannabis might address most effectively.

Age-specific messaging

Bonar and her co-authors also note that driving guidelines for people over age 50 who choose to use cannabis should also consider the effects of aging on cognitive and motor abilities, and the potential for interactions between cannabis and the prescription drugs that these adults are more likely to take.  

Helping adults over 50 who choose to use cannabis understand the potential impacts of today’s more potent cannabis, compared with the forms available in their younger years, is also important, says Bonar.

And when advising people over 50 about reducing driving risks related to their cannabis use, she said, health care providers and public health agencies may want to focus on strategies like using cannabis at times when they’re unlikely to need to drive, such as before bedtime, and the importance of planning ahead for safe transportation via a designated driver or ride share service.

Bonar is a member of IHPI and of the U-M Addiction Center, the U-M Injury Prevention Center and the U-M Eisenberg Family Depression Center.

In addition to the new paper on cannabis use and driving among people over 50, the National Poll on Healthy Aging recently issued a report on driving behaviors among people age 65 and over. Find it at https://michmed.org/w4Ayn

Bonar and colleagues also recently published an Injury Prevention Center report on the impact of recreational cannabis legalization in Michigan, including data on motor vehicle crashes and fatalities linked to cannabis.

In addition to Bonar, the study’s authors are Lianlian Lei, Matthias Kirch, Kristen P. Hassett, Erica Solway, Dianne C. Singer, Sydney N. Strunk, J. Scott Roberts, Preeti N. Malani, and NPHA director Jeffrey T. Kullgren.

Citation: Driving after cannabis consumption among US adults ages 50 years and older: A short communication, Drug and Alcohol Dependence, DOI:10.1016/j.drugalcdep.2025.112985, https://authors.elsevier.com/a/1mCG51LiD3LPLZ

Source: https://www.eurekalert.org/news-releases/1109142

It isn’t just people — when given the chance rats may also use cannabis to cope with stress, according to a study by researchers at Washington State University.

Published in the journal Neuropsychopharmacology, the study was designed to examine cannabis-seeking behavior and found that rats with higher natural stress levels are far more likely to self-administer the popular recreational drug.

“We ran rats through this extensive battery of behavioral and biological tests, and what we found was that when we look at all of these different factors and all the variables that we measured, stress levels seem to matter the most when it comes to cannabis use,” said Ryan McLaughlin, associate professor in WSU’s College of Veterinary Medicine.

Looking at traits ranging from social behaviors to sex, cognition, reward, and arousal, McLaughlin and his team of undergraduate and graduate student researchers created a behavioral profile for each rat. Then, over the course of three weeks, rats were observed for one hour daily as they were given the option to self-administer cannabis by poking their nose in a vapor port to release a three-second dispersal of cannabis vapor in an air-tight chamber.

During that one-hour period, student researchers tracked the number of “nose-pokes” by each rat and found a direct correlation to the number of nose-pokes and baseline stress hormone levels.

By measuring the stress hormone corticosterone in the rodents, the equivalent to the stress hormone cortisol in humans, the team found rats with higher natural stress hormone levels were far more likely to self-administer cannabis.

“If you want to really boil it down, there are baseline levels of stress hormones that can predict rates of cannabis self-administration, and I think that only makes sense given that the most common reason that people habitually use cannabis is to cope with stress,” McLaughlin said.

He said it’s important to note that it was a rat’s resting baseline stress levels that were associated with cannabis self-administration, not stress that fluctuates in real time with exercise or mentally challenging tasks. Stress hormone levels were also calculated after exposure to a stressor and showed no significant link to cannabis-seeking behavior.

There were also significant relationships between rates of cannabis self-administration and measures of “cognitive flexibility”, which is our ability to adapt to changing rules.

“Animals that were less flexible in shifting between rules, when we tested them in a cognitive task, tended to show stronger rates of cannabis-seeking behavior,” he said. “So, animals that rely more heavily on visual cues to guide their decision making, those rats, when we tested their motivation to self-administer cannabis vapor, were also very highly motivated rats.”

The study also identified a link between high morning corticosterone and low endocannabinoid levels to cannabis self-administration, although not as strongly as baseline stress.

‘Our findings highlight potential early or pre-use markers that could one day support screening and prevention strategies’ – Ryan McLaughlin, associate professor, Washington State University

Endocannabinoids are compounds produced on demand to help the body maintain a state of physiological balance, or homeostasis.

“There’s some thought behind why people might be more prone to use cannabis, and that maybe THC serves as a reasonable substitute for endocannabinoids in individuals that have lower endocannabinoid levels,” McLaughlin said. “So, perhaps there’s more of a drive to supplement that with cannabis.”

With more and more states decriminalizing cannabis and legalizing recreational cannabis, McLaughlin said it’s critical to understand the effects of the drug and the grips of drug abuse.

“Our findings highlight potential early or pre-use markers that could one day support screening and prevention strategies,” McLaughlin said. “I could certainly envision a scenario where having an assessment of baseline cortisol might provide some level of insight into whether there’s an increased propensity for you to develop problematic drug use patterns later in life.”

Media Contacts

  • Ryan McLaughlin and Josh  Babcock, WSU Department of Integrative Physiology and Neuroscience

Source:https://news.wsu.edu/press-release/2025/12/11/rats-may-seek-cannabis-to-cope-with-stress-wsu-research-finds/

By  CLAIRE RUSH, Associated Press –


November 17, 2025

PORTLAND, Ore. (AP) — A federal judge on Monday ruled there would be no prison time for a former Alaska Airlines pilot who had taken psychedelic mushrooms days before he tried to cut the engines of a passenger flight in 2023 while riding off-duty in the cockpit.

U.S. District Court Judge Amy Baggio in Portland, Oregon, sentenced Joseph Emerson to time served and three years’ supervised release, ending a case that drew attention to the need for cockpit safety and more mental health support for pilots.

Federal prosecutors wanted a year in prison, while his attorneys sought probation.

“Pilots are not perfect. They are human,” Baggio said. “They are people and all people need help sometimes.”

Emerson hugged his attorneys and tearfully embraced his wife after he was sentenced.

Emerson was subdued by the flight crew after trying to cut the engines of a Horizon Air flight from Everett, Washington, to San Francisco on Oct. 22, 2023, while he was riding in an extra seat in the cockpit. The plane was diverted and landed in Portland with more than 80 people.

Emerson told police he was despondent over a friend’s recent death, had taken psychedelic mushrooms about two days earlier, and hadn’t slept in over 40 hours. He has said he believed he was dreaming and was trying to wake up by grabbing two red handles that would have activated the fire suppression system and cut fuel to the engines.

He spent 46 days in jail and was released pending trial in December 2023, with requirements that he undergo mental health services, stay off drugs and alcohol, and keep away from aircraft.

Attorney Ethan Levi described his client’s actions as “a product of untreated alcohol use disorder.” Emerson had been drinking and accepted mushrooms “because of his lower inhibitions,” Levi said.

Emerson went to treatment after jail and has been sober since, he added.

Baggio said the case is a cautionary tale. Before she sentenced him, Emerson said he regretted the harm he caused.

“I’m not a victim. I am here as a direct result of my actions,” he told the court. “I can tell you that this very tragic event has forced me to grow as an individual.”

The judge sentenced Emerson to time served (46 days) and put him on probation for 3 years, with some restrictions. 

Source: Claire Rush – Associated Press

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

Addendum by John Coleman Ph D, President, Drug Watch International

From: John J. Coleman. PhD <john.coleman.phd@gmail.com>
Sent: 19 November 2025 13:21
To: ndpa@drugprevent.org.uk
Subject: RE: Question about Psilocybin

It is now known that his employer, Horizon Airlines, terminated him as soon as his arrest was reported. Feelings here are very mixed over this outcome and some thought he should have been given some additional prison time. Had he been drunk on alcohol, things would have been different and he likely would have wound up in prison. In John Coleman’s opinion, being under the influence of psychedelics is even worse because the person can appear normal, as this fellow did, and still pose a serious risk to self and others.

Coleman  wrote the judge a letter and recommended she include several thousand hours of community service in the form of lecturing school children and young adults on the dangers of psychedelics, but she apparently didn’t consider it. 

Here’s what Coleman advised the judge:

November 11, 2025 to The Hon. Amy M. Baggio – United States District Judge – District of Oregon

In re: Sentencing of Joseph David Emerson, defendant in case #3:25-cr-00306, USA v. Emerson

Dear Judge Baggio,

Please forgive me for using an email to send this letter to you. I’m afraid regular mail would be too slow to get from one side of the country to the other.

On Monday, November 17, 2025, I believe you have scheduled a sentencing hearing for the defendant, Joseph David Emerson, who, in 2023, while under the influence of psilocybin, a Schedule I controlled substance, attempted to cause the destruction of an Alaska Airlines flight containing 84 passengers and crew, including himself. Emerson has admitted to the charge, among others, of interfering with a flight and flight crew (Title 49, United States Code, Section 46504). He has signed a plea agreement, and media reports indicate that the federal prosecutor has agreed to recommend a sentence of one year, along with restitution for costs incurred in the emergency landing and the rebooking of stranded passengers.

On a personal note, I served 33 years as a special agent for the Drug Enforcement Administration and headed several offices, including that of Assistant Administrator for Operations, the top non-appointed position in the agency. During the course of my long career, especially when working as a street agent in New York City, Chicago, Washington, D.C., Newark, and Boston, I was often asked what the most dangerous drug a drug abuser could take. My answer, your honor, was always the same: psilocybin. Over the years, I witnessed hundreds of people severely addicted to opiates and stimulants (like amphetamines and cocaine), and after completing treatment, they would bounce back and be productive members of society again. Some today are famous people, even high-level government officials, people I knew when they were hitting the bottom of the proverbial barrel. Many, indeed, most, rebounded in ways that I can only say were inspiring for me and my fellow officers.

The sole exception for which recovery never seemed possible involved those using psilocybin, especially chronic users of the drug. I was told by someone who would know that in street parlance, “psilocybin burns out the brain cells.” Some of the most bizarre crimes I ever encountered – people cutting off their own limbs and the heads of their spouses and children – were more often than not the result of taking psilocybin. Some were just too gruesome for words. My colleagues and I, in such instances, would suspect long before the tox or autopsy reports came in that psilocybin was the causative agent.

In closing, I would ask that, whatever you decide to do with Mr. Emerson as a result of his imprudent use of psilocybin, you consider including several thousand hours of directed community service in which he is accepted by an appropriate state or federal department, on behalf of which he will make presentations to school audiences and others about the dangers of using psychedelic drugs, especially psilocybin. Mr. Emerson was a commercial pilot, someone who even now might draw a considerable amount of attention. His personal experiences, given in a format of educating others, would surely go a long way toward keeping this and other dangerous drugs away from vulnerable people. And it might even go a long way toward helping him to deal with his own mental health issues.

Thank you for considering this suggestion, and thank you for your service to our nation.

Sincerely, – J. Coleman – [signed]

Source: John J. Coleman, PhD. President – Drug Watch International, Inc.

by Rosa Valle-Lopez – November 19, 2025

The synthetic opioid is 100 times more potent than Fentanyl

LOS ANGELES – An operation led by the Drug Enforcement Administration Los Angeles Field Division in October uncovered 628,000 pills containing carfentanil. According to the DEA, carfentanil is a synthetic opioid approximately 10,000 times more potent than morphine and 100 times more potent than fentanyl. The majority of the pills were seized from one stash location in Los Angeles County. The operation also resulted in the arrest of one suspected drug trafficker.

Brian Clark, Special Agent in Charge of the DEA Los Angeles Field Division, said, “This is a massive seizure, 628,000 carfentanil pills taken from a single drug trafficker. Our agents, with vital backing from local partners, mitigated a catastrophic danger. The urgency of this matter cannot be overstated, another stark reminder to those vulnerable to drug misuse. Know what you’re taking, because one pill can kill.”

According to the DEA, carfentanil was originally developed for veterinary use, more specifically to tranquilize large animals such as elephants. The white powdery drug closely resembles other substances like fentanyl or cocaine and can come in several forms. The DEA warns that carfentanil and other fentanyl analogues present a serious risk to public safety, first responder, medical, treatment, and laboratory personnel.

This operation was led by DEA L.A. Field Division Southwest Border Group 1 special agents and task force officers, with key support from the Vernon Police Department, the Baldwin Park Police Department, and the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department. Testing of the seized pills was performed by the DEA Southwest Regional Laboratory.

According to DEA L.A. Field Division, local law enforcement and first responders have recently seen an increased presence of carfentanil in the illicit drug market, which has been linked to a number of overdose deaths in various parts of the country. According to the CDC, deaths involving carfentanil increased approximately sevenfold – from 29 deaths from January to June 2023, to 238 deaths from January to June 2024. Carfentanil has now been detected in 37 states.

The L.A. Field Division stands as one of the DEA’s most complex and high-impact divisions, covering Southern California, Nevada, Hawaii, and the U.S. Territories of Guam and Saipan.

For additional safety information, please see the resource below:

https://www.dea.gov/stories/2025/2025-05/2025-05-14/carfentanil-synthetic-opioid-unlike-any-other

Source: https://www.dea.gov/press-releases/2025/11/19/dea-operation-nets-628000-carfentanil-pills-la-county

News Article by US News ReporterDec 01, 2025

There is “insufficient” evidence supporting the use of cannabis or cannabinoids for most medical purposes, a new review has concluded.

“We reviewed the totality of the evidence—over a thousand studies with emphasis on randomized trials, meta-analyses, and systematic reviews,” Dr Kevin Hill, one of the review authors, and director of addiction psychiatry at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, and a professor of psychiatry at Harvard University, told Newsweek.

He said that “beyond the FDA-approved indications, the evidence for cannabis and cannabinoids as a medical treatment is limited.”

The review was published online in the peer-reviewed medical journal JAMA Network on November 26.

Why It Matters

There has been increasing use of cannabis and cannabinoids for medical treatment in recent years. It has gained popularity among cancer patients, for managing nausea, pain and reduced appetite, and it is favored among patients with chronic pain for its analgesic properties.

However, its use medically has gathered some concern, as while certain patients may experience benefits, some medical professionals have said that there is not enough research to determine if the positives outweigh any future negatives.

After the Senate passed its funding package to end the U.S. government shutdown, which included a measure that will lead to the banning of many THC products, the issue of cannabis use has been in the spotlight.

What The Review Found

The review found that 27 percent of adults from the U.S. and Canada have used cannabis for medical purposes, while 10.5 percent of Americans report using cannabidiol (CBD) for therapeutic purposes.

“Cannabis and cannabinoids like CBD have a broad range of effects, so, with so many people suffering from medical problems, it is not hard to see why they might consider cannabis and cannabinoids as treatments,” Hill said.

However, he said that “the evidence is not strong” for their use medically.

While doctors may “consider cannabis and cannabinoids as third-line treatments in various clinical scenarios,” Hill said, “the lack of evidence coupled with significant risks means that, most often, the risks outweigh the benefits.”

The review found that almost a third of adult users of medical cannabis go on to develop a cannabis use disorder—a complex condition that is a type of substance use disorder, where a patient can experience a problematic pattern of cannabis use that causes them distress or impairs their life.

It also found that daily inhaled cannabis use compared to nondaily use was associated with higher risks of coronary heart disease, heart attack, and stroke,

“The adverse effects of cannabis upon one’s physical health are becoming more well-defined,” Hill said.

He said that the purpose of this review was to provide clinicians and patients with “better information with which to have sensible, evidence-based conversations,” conversations about medical treatment which he said should take place between doctors and patients, and “not between budtenders and customers in dispensaries.”

What Other Experts Think

Jonathan Caulkins, a professor of operations research and public policy at Carnegie Mellon University, who was not involved in the review, told Newsweek that while there is “high-quality evidence supporting certain very specific medical uses,” most medical use is “predicated on much less evidentiary basis, and below what is expected for FDA approval.”

He said that what is “important” about this review is that it helps “counter the messaging from cannabis treatment advocates, who promote the good news, and the hopes, without balance or caution.”

“The actual situation is nuanced, and more gets written that pushes for an overly optimistic view of cannabis’ medical value,” he said.

Yasmin Hurd, chair of translational neuroscience and the director of the Addiction Institute at Mount Sinai, also told Newsweek that the findings are “notable” because it “confirms what has been previously published from other reviews and consensus reports like those from the National Academies, noting that there is insufficient evidence for the use of cannabis to treat most medical conditions.”

While the authors have “done a very comprehensive and in my view very useful review of this topic,” Dr Igor Grant, a professor of psychiatry and director of the HIV Neurobehavioral Research Program and Center for Medicinal Cannabis Research, at the University of California, San Diego, told Newsweek, “it is clear from the way the article is written that the authors have significant concerns about the use of medicinal cannabis, and as such have tended to emphasize many of the negatives, including potential side effects.”

He said that this “does not mean that the side effects are not there, nor does it negate the fact that evidence for efficacy of medicinal cannabis is weak in many areas. But there does seem to be a definite slant.”

He also said that while this review highlights cardiovascular risks, other research has also shown there is “actually no statistically reliable evidence to suggest that cannabis users suffer more cardiovascular risk, including no effect on hypertension, myocardial infarction, and presence of coronary atherosclerosis.”

What People Are Saying

Caulkins told Newsweek: “We customarily expect medicinal drugs to be produced in a way that guarantees consistency from dose to dose. Every pill in a bottle of pills that is prescribed by a physician, manufactured by a pharmaceutical company and distributed by a licensed pharmacy should have essentially the exact same dose. With the exception of the FDA-approved and regulated cannabinoids (which account for a tiny share of all consumption that is described or understood to be “medical cannabis”), there is not that same quality control for medical cannabis.”

He added: “Cannabis smoke contains known carcinogens. Sometimes good medical practice exposes patients to carcinogenic risk, notably radiation treatment does. But we do that carefully and knowingly, because the risk of untreated cancer is greater than the risk that radiation therapy will create new cancer. But given that in many cases the upside benefit of medical cannabis is not well established, it is striking how cavalier the system is with respect to known carcinogens present in cannabis smoke. For most categories of consumer products, the presence of known carcinogens is sufficient to have that product taken off the shelves, even if there are not epidemiological studies documenting effects on cancer rates at the population level. For whatever reason or reasons, we collectively seem surprisingly unconcerned about that risk regarding smoked cannabis, medical or non-medical.”

Hurd told Newsweek: “There remain numerous concerns about cannabis for medical use since there is so little known about whether it works, what particular conditions it might be helpful to treat and what dose and dosing regime for clinicians to recommend. In addition, there are also concerns that individuals will use ‘medicinal cannabis’ obtained from sources where the contents are not verified and cannabis with high THC concentration has well known significant side effects. Cannabis should be used with caution in medical settings. As such, like many medicines, especially where there is very limited information available, it is best to start low dose and go slow. Also, cannabis should not be the first line therapy and instead used only for conditions where conventional therapies have failed.”

She added: “It is important that the public also begins to better understand that cannabis is a very complex plant with hundreds of chemicals whereas ‘medicine’ is normally a product that has specific, well studied components. Also, cannabis is different from specific cannabinoids, like cannabidiol (CBD), which has FDA approval for the treatment of certain epilepsy conditions.”

Grant told Newsweek: “While I agree that physicians who are counseling patients about potential use of cannabis for various indications need to both warn patients about lack of evidence in many cases, the possibility of side effects, and certainly evaluate a patient in the event they have major psychiatric or substance use disorder, there are, as they note protocols for doing this, and in some ways, assuring safety. I believe also that the risk of people who use medicinal cannabis, who are often people who are older with various kinds of chronic conditions, is rather low that they will systematically increase their use to the point of developing a cannabis use disorder. Cannabis use disorder is real, and a concern, but very unlikely to be a problem in the clinical setting. The article tends at times to conflate recreational and medicinal use: that’s a bit like using data from opioid addiction to comment on appropriate use of opioids in a clinical setting.”

Source: https://www.newsweek.com/does-cannabis-actually-have-medical-benefits-11118810

Story by Camilla Jessen – Received by DWI: 02 December 2025 
Cannabis users warn of painful syndrome linked to long-term use

A growing number of regular cannabis users in the U.S. are coming forward with accounts of a severe and little-known disorder linked to long-term marijuana use.

The condition, now officially recognized by global health authorities, has led some people to hospital with pain so intense they describe it as unbearable.

<cs-card “=”” class=”card-outer card-full-size ” card-fill-color=”#FFFFFF” card-secondary-color=”#E1E1E1″ gradient-angle=”112.05deg” id=”native_ad_inarticle-1-a4414e4e-f3d5-4c5e-9912-8a6bea8629d7″ size=”_2x_1y” part=””>

Holland & Barrett Tribiotic Mind Balance Capsules – 60 Capsules

Holland & Barrett UK

Sponsored
call to action icon

Troubling symptoms

As of 2023, roughly 17% of Americans reported using cannabis, with 24 states legalizing recreational use.

But while the drug is widely used for its therapeutic and recreational effects, doctors are increasingly treating patients who present with repeated vomiting, severe abdominal pain and dehydration.

The pattern has been identified as cannabis hyperemesis syndrome (CHS), a disorder seen primarily in people who use cannabis daily or near-daily over long periods.

UW Medicine says symptoms often appear within 24 hours of the most recent use and can persist for days.

The syndrome is sometimes nicknamed “scromiting,” a blend of “screaming” and “vomiting,” due to the intensity of the episodes.

<cs-card “=”” class=”card-outer card-full-size ” card-fill-color=”#FFFFFF” card-secondary-color=”#E1E1E1″ gradient-angle=”112.05deg” id=”native_ad_inarticle-2-8407cf5e-ce0b-4b17-a88e-460321ec5385″ size=”_2x_1y” part=””>

George Vi British Empire Stamps Collection – 100 To 500 Different Used & Off Paper Collecting, Crafting

Etsy.com

Sponsored
call to action icon

Users speak out

Many who have experienced CHS have shared their stories online.

One TikTok user described the onset as “the worst physical pain I’ve ever experienced… and I birthed a 9-pound baby.”

Another said she “almost died,” explaining she couldn’t keep food or water down for a week.

Despite the episodes, some users admitted they continued smoking, which only worsened the symptoms. One woman, now six months sober, said quitting was the only way to stop the cycle.

“Smoking nearly killed me,” she said.

Medical uncertainty

Doctors still do not fully understand why the condition occurs.

The Cleveland Clinic says one leading theory is that chronic use overstimulates cannabinoid receptors in the body’s endocannabinoid system, disrupting normal digestive regulation.

The World Health Organization has listed CHS in its International Classification of Diseases, allowing clinicians to formally track cases for the first time.

<cs-card “=”” class=”card-outer card-full-size ” card-fill-color=”#FFFFFF” card-secondary-color=”#E1E1E1″ gradient-angle=”112.05deg” id=”native_ad_inarticle-3-7e46df70-dd14-456d-9b37-1e9f0a653474″ size=”_2x_1y” part=””>

Sage Intacct for Manufacturers – Sage™ Intacct® – Official Site – Unleash the Power of Intacct

sage.com

Sponsored
call to action icon

Researchers say the new designation will provide more reliable data on cannabis-related health problems.

Calls for more awareness

Beatriz Carlini of the University of Washington School of Medicine said the classification will help quantify a growing issue.

“A new code for cannabis hyperemesis syndrome will supply important hard evidence on cannabis-adverse events,” she noted.

Sources: UW Medicine; Cleveland Clinic; WHO ICD, Unilad

Source: https://www.msn.com/en-au/health/other/cannabis-users-warn-of-painful-syndrome-linked-to-long-term-use/ar-AA1Rya8d?

Coordinator for this subject : David G. Evans, Esq. Senior Counsel, Cannabis Industry Victims Educating Litigators (CIVEL)

Contribution from: thinkon908 via Drug Watch International <drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com>
Sent: 19 November 2025 15:27
Subject: FROM DAVE EVANS REPORT OF THE CANNABIS REGULATORS ASSOCIATION WHAT IS WRONG IN POT STATES?

FOR SOME OF YOU THE FILE ATTACHED WAS TOO LARGE – YOU CAN GET IT ONLINE – SEE BELOW:

https://www.ncdhhs.gov/national-landscape-cannabis-regulators-association-cannra-presentation/download?attachment

Cannabis Regulators Association

CRITIQUE BY DAVID EVANS:

They claim to be a national organization of cannabis regulators that provides policy makers and regulatory agencies with the resources to make informed decisions when considering whether and how to legalize and regulate cannabis.

However, in our experience, the state agencies protect the marijuana industry and not the public. They engage in a denial of the harms of marijuana use and its addictiveness. They falsely support the medical utility of cannabis and THC products.

THIS IS A SCANDAL THAT NEEDS TO BE EXPOSED

In their power point presentation to the North Carolina Cannabis Advisory Council, it notes specific problems:

SLIDE 6:  The industry is innovative and fast moving (faster than science). THIS ALSO MEANS THE INDUSTRY ARE FASTER (AND SMARTER) THAN THE STATE AGENCIES

State regulatory agencies have been limited in their resources given the needs. THEY DO NOT HAVE ENOUGH RESOURCES TO ENFORCE REGULATION. THE LEGALIZATION BILLS SEE TO THAT BY NOT AUTHORIZING FUNDS.

SLIDE 25:  There are regulatory gaps concerning these products:

Chemically derived impairing cannabinoids (Delta8, Delta-10. HHC, THCO, etc.)

THCA gap –  Products being marketed with high levels of THCA that are indistinguishable from cannabis products.

0.3% gap  – Impairing amounts of Delta-9 THO in products that meet the legal definition of “hemp” per the 2018 farm bill.

SLIDE 27:  Consumer Safety Concerns
Consumer confusion
Molecules that are new and unknown
Lack of product testing and oversight
Medical claims that are not approved by the FDA and/or supported by research

IN OTHER WORDS, THEY HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THEY ARE DOING !!

SLIDE 29: State Regulatory Challenges from the Current Landscape

No or limited state regulatory authority over cannabinoid hemp products

Lack of research to help guide regulatory decisions on many of these molecules; insufficient surveillance for current landscape. IN OTHER WORDS, THEY HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THEY ARE DOING

Increased challenges understanding data on safety and adverse events. IN OTHER WORDS, THEY HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THEY ARE DOING

Enforcement challenges

Increasingly blurred lines with the illicit market; increased cartel activity. INABILITY TO CONTROL CARTELS. WASN’T LEGALIZATION SUPPOSED TO STOP THE CARTELS?

SLIDE 37: Research finds that cannabis smoke contains many of the same carcinogens as tobacco smoke.

<<<<<<<<<<<<<>>>>>>>>>>>

Comments by J. Coleman. PhD: drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com <drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com>  Sent: 19 November 2025 16:38

To: thinkon908@aol.com;

David,

Good work exposing these folks as frauds. It’s a common strategy for cannabis promoters to recommend stringent rules, knowing full well they cannot be enforced. An example of this is the 2018 Farm Bill that legalized the production and distribution of “lawful hemp” and its derivatives. Reading the statute, one might think that the restrictions in the law, e.g., 0.3 percent or below THC content by dry weight in hemp, would keep commercial pot out of the market. The bill obviously was written by hemp lobbyists, knowing that the complex and confusing regulations would impress hardliners but have no practical effect on the industry because a) there were no resources in the bill to enforce them, and b) determining compliance with the statute would take expensive in-lab analysis that no one was likely to do.

Of course, now that we have seen the lawful hemp industry operate for several years, it’s evident that the controls initially included in the statute are now being ignored. Just last week, Congress had to revisit the 2018 Farm Act to tighten up the hemp provisions to prohibit hemp products with excessive levels of THC from being sold.

Enacting statutes that have no practical effect is one way to prevent the government from regulating the industry. Another way is getting Congress to include in its appropriations bills restrictions prohibiting the DEA from making so-called medical marijuana cases in states where this activity has become a surrogate for legalizing the drug.

For example, in each fiscal year since FY2015, a decade ago, Congress has included provisions in appropriations acts to prohibit the Department of Justice from using appropriated funds to prevent states, territories, and the District of Columbia from “implementing their own laws that authorize the use, distribution, possession, or cultivation of medical marijuana.” The FY2024 provision lists 52 jurisdictions, including every U.S. jurisdiction that has legalized medical cannabis use at the time it was enacted.

There seems to be a constitutional issue here, but I have no idea how to make it justiciable. Whether the issue is immigration or drugs, it seems like some states no longer recognize the Supremacy Clause or what it means.

According to the NSDUH: In 2023, 21.8 percent of people aged 12 or older (or 61.8 million people) used marijuana in the past year regardless of mode (Figures 12 and 13 and Table A.5B). The percentage was highest among young adults aged 18 to 25 (36.5 percent or 12.4 million people), followed by adults aged 26 or older (20.8 percent or 46.5 million people), then by adolescents aged 12 to 17 (11.2 percent or 2.9 million people). (See: Key Substance Use and Mental Health Indicators in the United States: Results from the 2023 National Survey on Drug Use and Health)

The same government survey (NSDUH) in 2013 reported: As noted in the illicit drug use section, an estimated 22.2 million Americans aged 12 or older in 2014 were current users of marijuana (Figure 1). The number of past-month marijuana users corresponds to 8.4 percent of the population aged 12 or older (Figure 3). The percentage of people aged 12 or older who were current marijuana users in 2014 was higher than the percentages from 2002 to 2013. This rise in marijuana use among those aged 12 or older may reflect the increase in marijuana use by adults aged 26 or older and, to a lesser extent, increases in marijuana use among young adults aged 18 to 25 compared with the percentages of young adults who reported marijuana use in 2002 to 2009 (See: Behavioral Health Trends in the United States: Results from the 2014 National Survey on Drug Use and Health).

Of interest here is the increase in use that appears linear with the expansion of the “legal” cannabis industry. The percentage of Americans 12 years or older reporting use of cannabis increased 178 percent, from 22.2 million in 2013, to 61.8 million in 2023.

I’ve often compared the cannabis industry to winemaking. With the latter, as anyone who’s ever tried making homemade wine knows, after adding the yeast to the mashed grapes, the yeast consumes the sugar and excretes alcohol in the process. At a certain level, the alcohol produced will kill off the remaining live yeast. There are ways of fortifying the wine, but left on its own, it will settle at about 11-14 percent alcohol, depending upon the sugar content of the source material. At some point in the future (hopefully soon), the cannabis industry may reach a level at which its success draws the attention of state attorneys general who will do the math and realize that the return in tax revenue is a lot less each year from pot than the potential return on suing the industry for harm and suffering, etc. The opiates MDL in Cleveland is a good model. Like those hapless wine yeasts, the action of the industry will have put itself out of business just by doing what it does.

John Coleman – www.drugwatch.org

Dr. Smita Das often hears the same myth: You can’t get hooked on pot .

And the misconception has become more widespread as a growing number of states legalize marijuana . Around half now allow recreational use for adults and 40 states allow medical use.
But “cannabis is definitely something that someone can develop an addiction to,” said Das, an addiction psychiatrist at Stanford University.
It’s called cannabis use disorder and it’s on the rise, affecting about 3 in 10 people who use pot, according to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
Here’s how to know whether you or a loved one are addicted to marijuana — and what kinds of treatment exist.
How to identify signs of cannabis use disorder

If pot interferes with your daily life, health or relationships, those are red flags.

“The more that somebody uses and the higher potency that somebody uses, the higher the risk of that,” Das said.

It’s become more common as cannabis has gotten stronger in recent years. In the 1960s, most pot that people smoked contained less than 5% THC, the ingredient that gets you high. Today, the THC potency in cannabis flower and concentrates in dispensaries can reach 40% or more, according to the National Institute on Drug Abuse.

Cannabis use disorder is diagnosed the same way as any other substance use disorder — by looking at whether someone meets certain criteria laid out in the latest version of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, the main guide for mental health providers.

These include needing more of the drug to get the same effect, having withdrawal symptoms and spending a lot of time trying to get or use it.

“When we break it down into these criteria that have to do with the impacts of their use, it’s a lot more relatable,” Das said.

What the different levels of addiction are

If you’ve met just two of the criteria for cannabis use disorder in the last year, doctors say you have a mild form of the condition. If you meet six or more, you have a more severe form.

According to the latest version of the National Survey on Drug Use and Health, 7% of all people 12 or older had cannabis use disorder in 2024 and most had a mild form. About 1 in 5 had a severe form.
People can be dependent on and addicted to substances. Dependence is physical, while addiction involves behavior changes.

Where people can get help for cannabis use disorder

Many marijuana users first come to Das for help coping with something else, like alcohol use disorder. Later, she said, they’ll often come back and mention a struggle with cannabis.

She assures them that there are effective treatments for the disorder.

One is called motivational interviewing, a goal-oriented counseling style that helps people find internal motivation to change their behavior. Another is cognitive behavioral therapy or CBT, a form of talk therapy that helps people to challenge negative thought patterns and reduce unhelpful behaviors.
Twelve-step programs like Marijuana Anonymous can also be helpful, Das said. But whether someone chooses to join a group or not, even being able to lean on a community of people who aren’t using pot is an important part for recovery.

Dave Bushnell, a retired digital executive creative director, started a Reddit group 14 years ago for people who, like him, had developed an addiction or dependency to cannabis and wanted help recovering. Its discussion forum has 350,000 members and continues to grow.

Bushnell, 60, said peer support is essential to recovery and some people feel more comfortable chatting online than in person. “This is potheads taking care of potheads,” he said.

Doctors urged people who need help to get it, whether it’s with a professional or in a peer group.

As with alcohol, “just because something’s legal doesn’t mean that it’s safe,” Das said.

___

Associated Press reporter Leah Willingham in Boston contributed to this story.

Source: https://www.washingtonpost.com/health/2025/11/22/pot-cannabis-use-disorder-marijuana-addiction/dcfff9a4-c7ac-11f0-be23-3ccb704f61ac_story.html

OPINION PIECE: 
by Muhammad Faizan –   Karachi  – published in Dawn, November 23rd, 2025

 

THE rising abuse of an anticonvulsant medication in the market is destroying the lives of the country’s youth. The drug, whose generic name is pregabalin and which is available under different brand names, decreases the number of pain signals that are sent out by damaged nerves in the body. Young individuals, even including teenagers, across the country are using it mixed with so-called energy drinks or soft drinks. They buy it over-the-counter (OTC) without any prescription, and mix it with caffeinated and carbonated drinks to intensify the effect and to have a strong kick. What begins as experimentation, often influenced by peer pressure or the desire for a cheap ‘high’, quickly spirals into severe addiction.

The misuse of these and other such drugs should serve as a wake-up call. These medications, meant to treat legitimate medical conditions, like epilepsy and neuropathic pain, are being treated as recreational drugs. The consequences are devastating — respiratory depression, overdose, addiction and, in worst cases, death.

What should trouble us the most is how accessible these dangerous substances have become. Any young person can walk into a pharmacy and buy them without a prescription or proper supervision. Pharmacies, either due to negligence or profit motives, are selling these controlled medications as if they were ordinary painkillers. Meanwhile, our youth remain unaware of the severe health risks they are taking.

Parents, teachers and community leaders must urgently educate society about this menace. We need to look for warning signs among our young. Unusual drowsiness, slurred speech, mood swings, declining academic performance, and withdrawal from family activities could indicate that a young person is trapped in this dangerous addiction.

The Drug Regulatory Authority of Pakistan (Drap) and provincial health departments must immediately declare all such drugs as controlled substances, and impose strict prescription require- ments through proper record-keeping at pharmacies. The pharmacists should exercise their professional responsibility, and stop selling these medications without valid prescriptions. Parents must stay vigilant and maintain open communication with their children. Educational institutions must organise awareness sessions about drug abuse, including misuse of prescription drugs. Media can help spread awareness about the crisis through dedicated campaigns and programmes. Finally, law-enforcement agencies should strengthen monitoring of pharmacies and take strict action against those violating regulations. This is not just a health crisis; it is a social emergency that threatens our future generation.

Source: https://www.dawn.com/news/1956844/rampant-drug-abuse

by Herschel Baker –  24 November 2025 

The Taskforce has been making many submission over a number of years to all States and Federal Government the increase danger of Illicit drugs on Australian roads. But our so-called experts do not recognize overseas research data.

Now The Taskforce at last has some Australian evidence see below.

National Data reveals drug driving is now responsible for more deaths on Australian roads than drink driving.

Drug driving is now responsible for more deaths on Australian roads than drink driving. National crash data shows that between 2010 and 2023, fatal crashes involving drugs, including cannabis, methamphetamine, MDMA and cocaine, more than doubled to 16-point-8 percent. At least one of those drugs is being detected in about 1 in 5 motorcycle deaths. Over the same 13-year period, crashes linked to drink driving decreased significantly Continuing a long-term downwards trend. There were ten times more random breath tests last year than roadside drug tests, but a drug test was ten times more likely to yield a positive result. Testing for drugs using a saliva swab is more complicated and more expensive than a breath test but states and territories have been incorporating more of them into their testing regimes. 

Source: https://drugprevent.org.uk/ppp/?p=20329&preview=true.

LAKELAND, Fla. — Officials are warning young people about the risks of an opioid-related ingredient increasingly added to energy drinks.

In her 25 years with InnerAct Alliance, a youth substance abuse prevention organization, Angie Ellison has witnessed the emergence of various drugs.

“We watch those things and try to let the community know about them because when it starts with college kids, it trickles down to high school and middle school,” said Ellison.

Ellison said energy drinks made with the synthetic form of kratom, known as 7-hydroxymitragynine (7-OH) are now widely available at gas stations, smoke shops and online.

“We’re just trying to make sure that everybody is aware of it, especially parents. Because a lot of times those drinks just look like maybe something to help you stay awake, but it could have very addictive traits to it,” said Ellison.

“It is a substance that can be dangerous when taken too much. It can cause dependence and addiction and when stopped, it can cause a pretty serious withdrawal syndrome,” said Dr. Eric Shamas, ER physician with Orlando Health Bayfront Hospital.

At the Crisis Center of Tampa Bay, they are seeing more college students experiencing withdrawal from the kratom byproduct.

“They get told to buy this kratom energy drink because it helped me get through studying for the finals. They start drinking it and then they get hooked. That’s when we find out it wasn’t containing natural kratom,” said Cameron Pelzel, community paramedic manager for Crisis Center of TampaBay.

Although Florida has recently made it illegal to sell 7-OH products, Pelzel said the ingredient can still be found in energy drinks, gummies and supplements.

“A lot of manufacturers are finding other synthetic compounds that mimic the 7-OH part, and they are adding it into it to get passed all the loopholes in the legal system so they can keep people buying these drinks. So we’re getting a lot of people that are solely addicted to it,” Pelzel said.

Source: https://www.tampabay28.com/news/region-polk/experts-raising-awareness-on-addiction-associated-with-energy-drinks-containing-kratom

301 deaths. 301 names, ages, faces removed. 301 families, communities, homes (or home equivalents) emptied. 

In 2023, there were 301 opioid-related overdose deaths in Alameda County. Standing alone, that figure isn’t alarming to those of us reading behind “safe” walls on our expensive devices. 

Nothing exposes us to the truth more than cold numbers. This data-driven meta-analysis will show there is far more to concern about the complexities that eventually result in the plague of opioids claiming those 301, and thousands more, lives.

The acceleration of the Alameda County crisis

Those 301 Alameda County lives claimed by opioids in 2023 represent a 60% increase  from 2022. Alameda County experienced the worst increase of all Bay Area counties in opioid overdose deaths from 2018-2021; Alameda’s rates tripled over this time while neighboring (Courtesy Alameda County)

There is an apparent inequity within the county. African-Americans’ fatal overdose rates are triple  that of the county average, and the homeless comprise 30% of all overdose deaths. 

(Courtesy Alameda County)

The teen paradox: Less use, more deaths

The focus is on teens, right? That would make sense. After all, teen substance use excluding cannabis is DOWN, compared to the 20.9% of high school juniors in 2002, the 8% figure of 2022 represents major improvement. 

Despite this, death rates are not improving. In fact, teen overdose deaths doubled in the eight short months between August 2019 and March 2020. As of 2022, 22 teens were dying WEEKLY from drug overdose in the United States. And overdoses are now the third leading cause of death for the youth, after guns and cars.

Fentanyl changed it all.

Now, over 75% of teen overdose victims’ lives are claimed by fentanyl. There was nearly a 300% INCREASE in fentanyl deaths aged 15-19 from 2018 to 2021. 

The problem isn’t necessarily addiction. It’s contamination. 

84% of teen overdose deaths are unintentional, and around a quarter of teen overdose deaths involve fake prescriptions. Fatal drugs like fentanyl spread through adult markets due to their potency and make their way to teens by accident. Most teens do not even get hooked onto the drugs that kill them.

Treatment inequality and solutions

Teen treatment right now is almost a scandal. While 42% of adults aged 45+ receive medications for opioid use disorder within three months of diagnosis, only 5% of teens do. Out of every five teens with substance use disorder, only one gets treatment.

Regardless of everything, prevention programs are still a solution. Project Towards No Drug Abuse (Project TND) has shown a 25% reduction in hard drug use. Medication-Assisted Treatment (MAT) reduces overdose deaths by 70-80%. Endless life-saving rescues by naloxone have been documented by near-death survivors. 

It is not that there are no solutions. Ironically, teens are the ones with the least access to drugs. We know what works, and Alameda County cares for its people. The change to prevent teen opioid overdose deaths must originate in expanding access and awareness to the systems proven to save lives.

Source: https://www.pleasantonweekly.com/alameda-county/2025/11/17/the-data-driven-paradox-of-prevention/


This article was written as part of a program to educate youth and others about Alameda County’s opioid crisis, prevention and treatment options. The program is funded by the Alameda County Behavioral Health Department and the grant is administered by Three Valleys Community Foundation.

The Government’s new mandate to carry out random oral-fluid roadside drug testing marks a milestone in New Zealand’s road safety policy

Under recently passed laws, police can now stop any driver, at any time, to screen with an oral swab for four illicit substances: THC (cannabis), cocaine, methamphetamine and MDMA (ecstasy).

Police will begin the rollout in Wellington in December, with nationwide coverage expected by mid next year.

Drivers will face an initial roadside swab taking a few minutes; a positive result triggers a second test. If confirmed, the driver will face an immediate 12-hour driving ban and have their initial sample sent to a lab for evidential testing.

With nearly a third of all road deaths involving an impairing drug, moves like this are clearly aimed at a serious problem.

Efforts by the previous Labour-led government stalled because no commercially available oral-fluid device met the evidentiary standards required at the roadside.

The government now appears to have what it needs to begin roadside testing. But it remains unclear whether this policy will achieve its goal of preventing truly impaired driving.

The science behind cannabis and driving

The research on cannabis and driving impairment is mixed. Many studies show an associative rather than causal link: people who use cannabis more often tend to report more crashes, but not whether those crashes happened while they were impaired.

Unlike alcohol – where blood-alcohol concentration closely tracks impairment – no such relationship exists for THC. Cannabis is fat-soluble, so traces linger in the body and appear in saliva long after any intoxicating effect has passed, making saliva testing a relatively poor proxy for impairment.

For the other targeted drugs – the stimulants methamphetamine, cocaine and MDMA – the connection to driving impairment is also unclear. At lower doses, stimulants can even improve certain motor skills. The risks are instead tied to perceptual shifts or lapses in attention, which a saliva test cannot detect.

Because cocaine and meth remain illegal globally, it is difficult to conduct the controlled studies needed to link presence and impairment.

The policy’s focus on just four illicit drugs also raises questions of scope. In practice, these are among the easiest and most visible substances to target: the low-hanging fruit.

Yet impairment from prescription medications such as sedatives or painkillers is far more common and remains largely self-policed.

Responsibility falls to individuals and their doctors to decide when it is safe to drive – a much bigger problem than many realise.

Police expect to conduct about 50,000 tests a year – around 136 a day nationwide – compared with more than four million alcohol breath tests annually.

While that’s a modest number, the introduction of roadside breath testing in the 1980s proved transformative. Alcohol consumption, which had been rising for decades, peaked around 1980 and then began to fall after the combined impact of breath testing and public awareness campaigns.

Whether the new drug-testing programme can produce a similar deterrent effect – without that level of visibility or education – remains to be seen.

Even if it does, the overall impact may be small. Drug use and drug-driving are far less common than alcohol use ever was, so the scope for large behavioural change is limited.

The problem of lingering traces

Another pressing question is what happens when the test detects traces of cannabis long after impairment has passed. THC can remain detectable in regular users for up to 72 hours, even though its intoxicating effects last only a few.

That means a medicinal cannabis patient who took a prescribed dose the night before – or a habitual user with high baseline levels – could therefore test positive while driving safely.

Although the law provides for a medical defence, there is still no clear procedure for proving a prescription at the roadside. Few people carry that documentation, and it’s uncertain whether digital GP records would be accepted.

In practice, some law-abiding drivers will inevitably be caught up in the process simply because of residual traces that pose no safety risk. Conversely, an inexperienced cannabis user may feel heavily impaired yet return a low reading.

This uncertainty reflects a deeper flaw in the system. When the previous government first designed the policy, it intended to test for impairment.

Because no devices could meet the evidentiary standard, the law was amended to test only for presence.

Perhaps the resulting regime’s relatively low-level penalties – such as a $200 fine and 50 demerit points for the confirmation of one “qualifying” substance – will help it withstand legal scrutiny, but they also highlight its scientific limitations.

Other jurisdictions have taken a different path. Many have returned to behavioural assessments of impairment – the traditional field-sobriety approach of observing coordination, balance and attention.

In the United States, for instance, officers often rely on such behavioural indicators because the law there still centres on proving a driver was impaired, not simply that they had used a substance.

In the end, a test that measures presence rather than impairment risks confusing detection with prevention – and may do little to make New Zealand’s roads any safer.

Author: Joseph Boden, Professor of Psychology, Director of the Christchurch Health and Development Study, University of Otago

Source: https://www.1news.co.nz/2025/11/17/will-drug-testing-drivers-really-make-nz-roads-safer/

At some point, just about every business will face the challenge of an employee struggling with substance use. While these situations can be complex and emotional, they also present an opportunity for employers to show compassion, strengthen their workplace culture, and retain valuable talent. Supporting an employee through treatment and recovery isn’t just the right thing to do; it’s also good business.

The U.S. Department of Labor’s Recovery Ready Workplace program asserts that “workers with SUDs take nearly 50% more days of unscheduled leave than other workers and have an average annual turnover rate 44% higher than the workforce as a whole.”1 While it may seem like the best choice is to terminate an employee with a substance use disorder, workers who are in “SUD recovery average nearly 10% fewer days of unscheduled leave per year than other workers. And, the turnover rate for employees in recovery is 12% lower than the overall average.”

Employees in recovery who feel supported often bring loyalty, commitment, and a strong work ethic. All of this helps to demonstrate the tangible labor and economic benefits of supporting employees through treatment and in recovery within your workplace. As an employer, understanding the basics of the treatment process can help you respond effectively.

Rehabilitation programs generally fall into two categories:

  • Inpatient programs, where an individual stays at a treatment facility for a set period of time.
  • Outpatient programs, which allow individuals to continue working while attending therapy sessions and medical appointments.

Employers should also remember that mental health conditions related to substance use disorders may qualify for protection under the Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

Small business owners need to know that both the FMLA and ADA include important provisions related to treatment:

  • FMLA: Employees may qualify for job-protected leave to participate in a treatment program, as long as it’s directed by a healthcare provider. However, absences due to using drugs (rather than receiving treatment) are not covered. Employers can still enforce clear, consistently applied drug-free workplace policies.
  • ADA: Employees currently using illegal drugs are not protected under the ADA. However, individuals who have completed treatment or are actively participating in a supervised rehabilitation program are protected. Employers must avoid discrimination and provide reasonable accommodations, such as flexible scheduling for therapy appointments, when possible.

Navigating these laws can be tricky, and because city and state regulations also vary, consulting legal counsel before making major employment decisions is a smart step.

Even with clear policies in place, compassion should be at the heart of your response. Here are some ways small business owners can help employees in treatment and recovery:

  1. Know your resources. Understand what your group health plan, employee assistance program (EAP), and short-term disability coverage offer.
  2. Encourage open communication. Let employees know that asking for help is a sign of strength, not weakness.
  3. Review your policies. Ensure your drug-free workplace policy outlines procedures for support and rehabilitation, not just discipline.
  4. Train supervisors. Help managers recognize signs of distress and know how to connect employees with resources.
  5. Plan for return-to-work. Recovery doesn’t end when treatment does. Have a reintegration plan that includes flexibility, support, and accountability.

Helping an employee navigate treatment and recovery is challenging, but it can also be one of the most meaningful things a small business owner can do. When you foster a culture of understanding and support, you strengthen your team, reduce turnover, and contribute to a healthier community.

Source: Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Avenue N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

Supplementary Source:

A continuing discussion on the opioid epidemic in the workplace – Part 3. (2024, February 26). JD Supra. https://www.jdsupra.com/legalnews/a-continuing-discussion-on-the-opioid-4776444/

NATIONAL DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE ALLIANCE

As the workplace division of Drug Free America Foundation, NDWA’s mission is to be a national leader in the drug-free workplace industry by directly assisting employers and stakeholders, providing drug-free workplace program resources and assistance, and supporting a national coalition of drug-free workplace service providers.

For more information and drug-free workplace resources, visit NDWA at www.ndwa.org.

        

Rutgers University – News Release

Rutgers Health researchers reveal how attention difficulties and impulsivity may heighten vulnerability to early and frequent substance use among young sexual minority men

Young sexual minority men – a term used to describe gay, bisexual, and other men who have sex with men – with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) symptoms are more likely to begin using substances such as cigarettes, alcohol, cannabis, stimulants and illicit drugs at an earlier age, according to Rutgers Health researchers.

The study, published in the Journal of Gay & Lesbian Mental Health and led by the Center for Health, Identity, Behavior & Prevention Studies (CHIBPS) at the Rutgers School of Public Health, analyzed data from 597 young sexual minority men to assess ADHD symptoms and their associations with substance use.

The researchers found clinically significant ADHD symptoms were both common and strongly associated with heightened risk and earlier initiation of substance use. Inattentive symptoms were closely tied to cigarette use, while both inattentive and hyperactive/impulsive symptoms predicted earlier use across all substances assessed.

“Given that young sexual minority men are disproportionately impacted by several other mental and physical health problems, this phenomenon warrants further attention from healthcare providers, researchers, and policymakers alike,” said Kristen Krause, an assistant professor at the School of Public Health and co-author of the study.

Findings also suggested key differences across subgroups. The connection between ADHD and early-onset substance use was stronger among bisexual men than among gay men, suggesting that tailored prevention strategies may be needed to address distinct vulnerabilities within the sexual minority population.

Krause, who also is the deputy director of the center, said the findings underscore the importance of integrating mental health and substance use screening and prevention efforts for sexual minority youth, particularly young men. Early identification of ADHD and intervention strategies could help reduce long-term health disparities in this group.

“At CHIBPS, we have long understood that health risks do not occur in a vacuum but that they are the result of the complex interplay of person, social conditions, and physical and mental health,” said Perry N. Halkitis, dean of the School of Public Health and senior author of the study. “Modern and relevant public health approaches recognize that simply telling people to become vaccinated, wear a condom every time, and/or of banning menthol cigarettes is simply not enough.”

“The focus must be on the person not the drug or the pathogen,” said Halkitis, whose forthcoming book, Humanizing Public Health: How Pathogen-Centered Approaches Have Failed Us, will be published by Johns Hopkins University Press in the winter.

Halkitis, who is the director of the center, and the researchers said future studies should use different measurement tools to better estimate ADHD prevalence and severity in sexual minority men. Longitudinal approaches that account for factors such as resilience, mental health comorbidities and social support could offer deeper insights and inform more effective interventions.

Source: https://www.eurekalert.org/news-releases/1105751

ABOUT RUTGERS HEALTH 

As New Jersey’s academic health center, Rutgers Health takes the integrated approach of educating students, providing specialized and compassionate clinical care for its communities, and conducting innovative research, with the goal of life-changing health  for all. Rutgers Health is a “bench-to-bedside” institution, bringing discoveries in the lab  directly to patients across the state and around the world. It includes eight schools, a  behavioral health network, and 11 centers and institutes in Newark and New  Brunswick

From: Drug Free America Foundation – 11 November 2025 19:28

          

New research from the Journal of Adolescent Health reveals critical insights about how cannabis legalization affects youth behavior, and why local policies matter more than ever. The study, led by researchers at the Public Health Institute, Kaiser Permanente and University of California, examined cannabis use among over 377,000 California high school juniors before and after the state legalized recreational cannabis retail in 2018.

The findings highlight an alarming trend: Frequent cannabis use among teens increased significantly after legalization, particularly in communities that permitted retail storefronts and delivery.

What the Research Shows:

  • Teen cannabis use increased significantly following legalization (except in areas that permitted only medical delivery of cannabis products).
  • Frequent use, defined as 20 or more days a month, grew the most, reversing a previous downwards trend and continued to increase through 2020.
  • Communities that banned retail cannabis sales entirely, consistently had lower rates of youth use, both before and after legalization.
  • Local policies made an impact. Jurisdictions that allowed storefront or delivery sales saw a significantly higher rate of use among high school juniors.

 Why Does This Matter for Prevention?

  • Teen Vulnerability– The teenage brain is still developing until the mid-twenties, making it especially sensitive to substances like THC. Early cannabis use has been linked to problems with memory, mental health disorders and increased risk of addiction.
  • Frequent use– Using marijuana on 20 or more days per month is a serious concern for teens. Regular or heavy use greatly increases the risk of dependency and the development of cannabis use disorder, potentially disrupting academic, social, and emotional growth.
  • Increased exposure– Legalization brings broader marketing, normalized use and greater access, especially when retail stores and delivery services are allowed in local neighborhoods/communities.

Recommendations for Communities:

  • Adapt or maintain retail bans to limit access and reduce normalization of use.
  • Restrict cannabis marketing, particularly near schools or on digital platforms frequently visited by young people.
  • Support local prevention coalitions to help educate families and youth about the real risks of early cannabis use.
  • Have open conversations with teens.

The Bottom Line:

Legalization does not mean safety. As this study demonstrates, when cannabis becomes more visible and accessible, youth use follows. Communities that stand firm with restrictive policies and invest in prevention can make a real difference in protecting their teens.

Source: Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Ave N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

Key findings and conclusions

Key findings provides an overview of selected findings from the analysis presented in Drug market patterns and trends and the thematic chapters of Contemporary issues on drugs, while Special points of interest offers a framework for the main takeaways and policy implications that can be drawn from those findings.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Source: https://www.unodc.org/unodc/en/data-and-analysis/world-drug-report-2025-key-findings.html June 2025

from BioMed/Substance Abuse Policy unit – 

by Amanda L. Graham, Sarah Cha,  Elizabeth K. Do,  Megan A.  Jacobs,  Giselle Edwards &  George D. Papandonatos 

[References not included – ignore all reference numbers. To see references, click on the Source link at the foot of this article]

Abstract

Objective

To examine patterns of abstinence from nicotine vaping and cannabis use among adolescent and young adult (YA) e-cigarette users in two text message vaping cessation trials.

Methods

Among adolescents with complete 7-month data (n = 1,016) at baseline, 25.4% were Exclusive E-cigarette Users (no past 30-day cannabis use) and 74.6% were Dual Users (past 30-day cannabis use). Among YAs with complete 7-month data (n = 1,829), 40.8% were Exclusive E-cigarette Users and 59.2% were Dual Users at baseline. Primary analyses examined the proportion of participants who were Dual Abstinent at 7-months by treatment arm differences. We also examined for interaction effects between baseline product use and vaping status at 7 months on cannabis use outcomes.

Results

At 7-months, adolescent categories of use were: Dual Abstinent, 31.7% (95% CI: 28.8, 34.6); Exclusive E-cigarette Users, 18.2% (95% CI: 15.9, 20.7); Exclusive Cannabis Users, 15.1% (95% CI: 12.9, 17.4); Dual Users, 35.0% (95% CI: 32.1, 38.1). Among YAs: Dual Abstinent, 15.6% (95% CI: 13.9, 17.3); Exclusive E-cigarette Users, 29.4% (95% CI: 27.3, 31.6); Exclusive Cannabis Users, 12.8% (95% CI: 11.3, 14.5); Dual Users, 42.2% (95% CI: 39.9, 44.5). Intervention outperformed Control in promoting rates of Dual Abstinence among adolescents (38.5% vs. 25.0%, p < 0.0001) and YAs (17.9% vs. 13.3%, p = 0.007). A higher proportion of Exclusive E-cigarette Users compared to Dual Users were Dual Abstinent at follow-up (adolescents: 37.6% vs. 29.7%, p = 0.019; YAs: 25.8% vs. 8.5%, p < 0.001).

Conclusion

A text message nicotine vaping cessation intervention promoted dual abstinence from e-cigarettes and cannabis among adolescents and YAs. Dual abstinence rates were higher among exclusive vapers than dual users, signaling the need to optimize cessation programs for dual users.

Trial Registration

Studies included were registered on ClinicalTrials.gov (NCT04251273, registered on January 31, 2020; NCT04919590, registered on June 9, 2021)

Background

E-cigarettes have been the most used tobacco product among young people for a decade [1]. More recently, co-use of cannabis alongside nicotine e-cigarettes (“co-use”) has become more common among adolescents and young adults (YA) [2, 3]. Estimates for the prevalence of nicotine vaping and cannabis co-use range from 16 to 50% among adolescent e-cigarette users [4, 5] and 34–60% among YA e-cigarette users [6,7,8].

Despite the high prevalence of co-use, few studies have addressed concurrent nicotine and cannabis use or cessation [9,10,11] and there are no clinical practice guidelines regarding cessation treatment approaches for co-use. In the limited number of nicotine vaping cessation trials that have been conducted among young people [12,13,14,15], high rates of co-use were documented (72–75% among adolescents, 59% among YA) but treatment effects on cannabis use or co-use were not examined [16].

This research gap is particularly concerning given the compounded health risks associated with co-use. Nicotine vaping carries serious consequences including respiratory problems [17], mental health issues [18], and addiction [19]. Cannabis use during adolescence is associated with structural brain changes affecting cognitive function [20, 21], increased depression and suicidality risk [22], and heightened addiction liability [23]. Cannabis vaping, in particular, introduces additional risks including respiratory symptoms [24], EVALI [25], and acute psychological effects [26, 27]. Co-use of nicotine and cannabis compounds these risks, leading to increased frequency and dependence for both products, poorer cessation outcomes [28, 29], and worse overall health functioning compared to single-substance use [30]. Research is needed to inform the development of cessation treatment approaches for nicotine and cannabis co-use [11].

The nicotine vaping cessation intervention tested in two trials among young people demonstrated a significant treatment effect in promoting dual abstinence from nicotine e-cigarettes and combustible tobacco products [14, 31], suggesting that targeting one form of substance use may have broader impacts on related substance use behaviors through shared mechanisms of behavior change. This study builds on these earlier findings to examine the following research questions about the co-use of nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis: 1) What were the overall patterns of abstinence from nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis at the primary 7-month study endpoint? 2) Were there treatment group differences in promoting abstinence from nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis at follow-up? and 3) Did treatment effects vary by baseline product use? We also explored interactions between nicotine vaping status at 7 months and baseline tobacco product use on cannabis use outcomes. Addressing these questions is crucial for understanding the interplay between nicotine vaping and cannabis use in the context of cessation interventions, with important implications for the development of efficient and effective cessation programs for young people.

Methods

Trial design

This manuscript presents secondary analyses of data from two separate parallel, two-group, double-blind individually randomized controlled trials (RCT) that compared a tailored, interactive vaping cessation text message intervention to a text message assessment-only control. Study methods in the two trials were nearly identical. The RCT among n = 1,503 adolescent (13–17 years old) e-cigarette users was conducted from October 2021 to October 2023 and randomized participants to intervention (n = 759) or assessment-only control (n = 744); a third waitlist control group was included in the parent study [14] but is not included in these analyses. The RCT among n = 2,588 young adult (YA; 18–24 years old) e-cigarette users was conducted from December 2019 to November 2020 and randomized participants to intervention (n = 1304) or assessment-only control (n = 1284) [13].

Interventions

This is Quitting: This is Quitting (TIQ, now part of EX® Program), is an automated, tailored, interactive text message program for nicotine vaping cessation designed for adolescents (13–17 years old) and young adults (18–24 years old) [32]. It is grounded in best practices [33] and our experience delivering digital tobacco cessation interventions to people of all ages and informed by formative research with young people. The program is anchored around social cognitive theory [34] and positioned as a nonjudgmental friend. To reinforce perceived social norms and social support for quitting, messages written by other users (with appropriate editorial review) are incorporated throughout the program. The program is tailored to a user’s age, enrollment date or quit date, and vape brand. Those who do not set a quit date receive 4 weeks of messages focused on building skills and confidence. Those who set a quit date receive messages 6 weeks before and 8 weeks after their quit date that focus on the risks of vaping and benefits of quitting, exercises to build coping skills and self-efficacy, encouragement and support. Mental health support (e.g., mindfulness training, self-care), breathing training, and information about Crisis Text Line are delivered to all users. For adolescents, messages about nicotine replacement therapy describe its utility but note that consultation with a healthcare provider is required. Keywords such as TIPS, FEELS, and STRESS deliver cognitive and behavioral strategies for quitting and on-demand support for managing mood and stress, respectively. Support for quitting cannabis was not explicitly provided in the intervention.

From 2020 through December 2024, TIQ was promoted nationally through the truth® campaign, earned media, and local/national outreach. To isolate treatment effects and ensure participant blinding, all branding was removed from the intervention.

Assessment-Only Control: After a text message confirming enrollment, participants received only the retention messages described below. After completing the 7-month assessment, participants were instructed how to enroll in TIQ, if interested.

Recruitment, enrollment, and randomization

Eligibility criteria for both parent trials included: age (adolescents: 13–17 years; YAs: 18–24 years), past 30-day nicotine e-cigarette use, interest in quitting vaping in the next 30 days, mobile phone ownership with active text message plan, and US residence. Advertisements on Facebook/Instagram, Twitter, and Snapchat promoted a quit vaping study. Interested individuals were asked to complete online eligibility screening. A link to online informed assent/consent was emailed, requiring a valid email for study enrollment. Assent/consent information indicated that participants would be randomly assigned to a text message intervention; specific details about the nature of each study group were not provided, ensuring double blinding.

Assent/consent differed in the two trials. In the adolescent trial, a waiver of parental consent was approved by the review board. Eligible adolescents were required to provide assent and correctly answer a series of questions indicating decisional capacity to enroll. Providing assent and answering all decisional capacity questions correctly launched the baseline assessment. In the YA trial, acceptance of informed consent launched the baseline assessment. For both trials, those who completed the baseline assessment were randomly assigned to intervention or control via the survey platform and instructed to text the study number to complete enrollment. Those who responded to the confirmation text message within 24 hours were fully enrolled.

Detailed descriptions of the study samples have been published elsewhere [13, 14]. Briefly, the adolescent sample (n = 1,503) had an average age of 16.4 years (SD = 0.8), was 50.6% female, 42.5% sexual minority, 16.2% Hispanic ethnicity, and 62.6% White race. Participants were primarily daily e-cigarette users (median vaping days in the past month: 30) with moderate-high scores on multiple measures of nicotine dependence. The young adult sample (n = 2,588) had an average age of 20.4 years (SD = 1.7), was 50.3% female, 19.0% sexual minority, 10.6% Hispanic ethnicity, and 83.4% White race. A majority reported vaping nicotine daily (93.1%) and 82.3% reported vaping within 30 minutes of waking. Study groups in both samples were balanced on baseline characteristics.

Retention

To minimize differential attrition and optimize follow-up rates in both trials, incentivized text message assessments ($5 each) regarding e-cigarette use were sent to all participants 14 days post-randomization (Checking in: Have you cut down how much you vape nicotine in the past 2 weeks? Respond w/letter: A = I still use the same amount, B = I use less, C = I don’t use at all anymore) and monthly thereafter through the 6-month follow-up (How’s the quit going? When was the last time you vaped nicotine, even a puff of someone else’s? Respond w/letter: A = In the past 7 days, B = 8–30 days ago, C = More than 30 days ago). Data from these assessments were not used in outcome analyses.

Measures

The baseline survey in both trials was conducted online, hosted on a secure server. The 7-month assessment was conducted via mixed-mode follow-up: online non-responders were contacted by phone by research staff blind to treatment assignment; text messages and emails were final means of gathering data on vaping abstinence from non-responders. Participants earned $20 for completing the follow-up, with a $10 incentive for responding within 24 hours of initial invitation.

The full battery of measures administered at baseline and 7 months have been previously described [13, 14]. These secondary analyses focus on self-reported past 30-day use of nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis at baseline and 7 months post-randomization. For e-cigarette use, participants were instructed at both timepoints “For these questions, please think of your use of vape product(s) that contain nicotine in your responses” and responded to the question “In the past 30 days, did you vape at all, even a puff of someone else’s?” Similarly, participants reported past 30-day use of other substances, including cannabis; the mode of cannabis use was not specified.

Statistical analyses

At baseline, participants were categorized as 1) Exclusive E-cigarette Users if they reported no past 30-day cannabis use, or 2) Dual Users if they also reported past 30-day cannabis use. At 7 months post-randomization, four groups of interest were defined: 1) Dual Abstinent, no past 30-day nicotine e-cigarette or cannabis use, 2) Exclusive E-cigarette Users: no past 30-day cannabis use, but any past 30-day nicotine e-cigarette use, 3) Exclusive Cannabis Users: no past 30-day nicotine e-cigarette use, but any past 30-day cannabis use, and 4) Dual Users: any past 30-day use of nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis.

Primary analyses focused on the proportion of participants who were Dual Abstinent as the outcome of interest. We employed 2-sample Z-tests based on a normal approximation to the binomial distribution to examine between-arm differences in Dual Abstinence rates, both in the overall sample and by baseline substance use pattern (Exclusive E-cigarette vs. Dual Use).

Within-subject comparisons of cannabis use at baseline and 7-month follow-up were based on McNemar’s test [35]. Additional analyses of 7-month follow-up data explored whether cannabis use at follow-up was associated with nicotine vaping cessation.

All statistical analyses were conducted in R (v 4.5) [36].

Results

Among 1,503 adolescents randomized, the 7-month follow-up rate was 70.8% (n = 1,064). Data on cannabis use was missing for 48 participants, who provided data only on 7-month nicotine vaping status. Thus, the adolescent analytic sample comprised n = 1,016 participants with follow-up data on both e-cigarette and cannabis use. There was no differential attrition by treatment assignment (p = 0.20), with 66.0% (501 of 759) of Intervention participants retained at 7 months versus 69.2% (515 of 744) of Control. Likewise, there was no differential attrition by baseline cannabis use (p = 0.74), with 68.4% (258 of 377) of Exclusive E-cigarette Users retained at 7 months versus 67.3% (758 of 1126) of Dual Users. At baseline, 74.6% (95% CI = 71.8, 77.3) of adolescents reported past 30-day cannabis use, which decreased to 50.1% (47.0, 53.2) at 7 months, a 24.5% point change (95% CI = 20.8, 28.0; McNemar’s test p < 0.001).

Among 2,588 YAs randomized, the 7-month follow-up rate was 76.0% (n = 1,967). Data on cannabis use was missing for 138 participants, who provided data only on 7-month nicotine vaping status. Thus, the YA analytic sample comprised n = 1,829 participants with follow-up data on both e-cigarette and cannabis use. There was no differential attrition by treatment assignment (p = 0.14), with 69.3% (904 of 1304) of Intervention participants retained at 7 months versus 72.0% (925 of 1284) of Control. Likewise, there was no differential attrition by baseline cannabis use (p = 0.86), with 70.9% (747 of 1053) of Exclusive E-cigarette Users retained at 7 months versus 70.5% (1,082 of 1534) of Dual Users. At baseline, 59.2% (95% CI = 56.9, 61.4) of YAs reported past 30-day cannabis use, which decreased to 55.0% (95% CI = 52.7, 57.3) at 7 months, a 4.2% point change (95% CI = 1.9, 6.4; McNemar’s test p < 0.001).

What were the overall patterns of abstinence from e-cigarettes and cannabis at 7-months?

As shown in Table 1, 31.7% (95% CI = 28.8, 34.6) of adolescents were Dual Abstinent, 18.2% (95% CI = 15.9, 20.7) were Exclusive E-cigarette Users, 15.1% (95% CI = 12.9, 17.4) were Exclusive Cannabis Users, and 35.0% (95% CI = 32.1, 38.1) were Dual Users.

Table 1 Dual use of nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis at 7 months by treatment assignment and baseline product use among adolescents (13–17 years) enrolled in a randomized trial of vaping cessation, n (%)

As shown in Table 2, 15.6% (95% CI = 13.9, 17.3) of YAs were Dual Abstinent, 29.4% (95% CI = 27.3, 31.6) were Exclusive E-cigarette Users, 12.8% (95% CI = 11.3, 14.5) were Exclusive Cannabis Users, and 42.2% (95% CI = 39.9, 44.5) were Dual Users.

Table 2 Dual use of nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis at 7 months by treatment assignment and baseline product use among young adults (18–24 years) enrolled in a randomized trial of vaping cessation, n (%)

Was there a treatment effect in promoting dual abstinence at follow-up?

Yes. As shown in Table 1, among adolescents, the rate of Dual Abstinence was 13.5% points higher (95% CI = 7.8, 19.1; p < 0.0001) among those randomized to Intervention (38.5%; 95% CI = 34.4, 42.9) vs. Control (25.0%; 95% CI = 21.5, 29.0). As shown in Table 2, among YAs, the rate of Dual Abstinence was 4.6% points higher (95% CI = 1.3, 7.9; p = 0.007) among those randomized to Intervention (17.9%; 95% CI = 15.5, 20.6) vs. Control (13.3%; 95% CI = 11.2, 15.7).

Did treatment effects in promoting dual abstinence vary by baseline product use?

No. In the adolescent sample, the treatment advantage of Intervention over Control was comparable for Exclusive E-cigarette Users (12.4 points; 95% CI = 0.6, 23.8) and Dual Users (13.9 points; 95% CI = 7.4, 20.3), interaction p = 0.82 (Table 1). Among Exclusive E-cigarette Users, 44.0% of adolescents randomized to Intervention were Dual Abstinent (95% CI = 35.1, 53.1) compared to 31.6% of Control (95% CI = 23.8, 40.2). Among Dual Users, 36.7% of Intervention participants were Dual Abstinent (95% CI = 31.8, 41.8) compared to 22.8% of Control (95% CI = 18.7, 27.3).

Likewise, in the YA sample, the treatment advantage of Intervention over Control was comparable for Exclusive E-cigarette Users (7.4 points; 95% CI = 1.1, 13.7; p = 0.02) and Dual Users (3.7 points; 95% CI = 0.0, 7.1, p = 0.03), interaction p = 0.28 (Table 2). Among Exclusive E-cigarette Users, 29.7% of YAs randomized to Intervention were Dual Abstinent (95% CI = 25.0, 34.8) compared to 22.3% of Control (95% CI = 18.3, 26.8). Among Dual Users, 10.3% of Intervention participants were Dual Abstinent (95% CI = 7.9, 13.2) compared to 6.6% of Control (95% CI = 4.6, 9.0).

Was there an interaction effect between vaping status at 7 months and baseline tobacco product use on cannabis use outcomes?

Among adolescents, the difference in cannabis use at follow-up between continuing vapers and vaping abstainers was significantly weaker among baseline Exclusive E-cigarette Users than among baseline Dual Users (interaction p < 0.001). As shown in Supplemental Table 1, among 258 adolescent baseline Exclusive E-cigarette Users, cannabis use at 7 months was reported by 31.1% (95% CI = 23.4, 39.6) of those who were still nicotine vaping versus 21.1% (95% CI = 14.8, 29.2) of those who were vaping abstinent, a 10% point difference (95% CI = −0.8, 20.3). Among 758 baseline Dual Users, cannabis use at 7 months was reported by 77.3% (95% CI = 72.9, 81.3) of those who were still nicotine vaping versus 36.1% (95% CI = 31.1, 41.3) of those who were vaping abstinent, a 41.3% point difference (95% CI = 34.5, 47.4). In total, 97 out of 258 baseline Exclusive E-cigarette Users were dual abstinent (37.6%) compared to 225 out of 758 baseline Dual Users (29.7%), a significant difference at p = 0.019.

Among YAs, the difference in cannabis use at follow-up between continuing vapers and vaping abstainers was comparable (interaction p = 0.81) for baseline Exclusive E-cigarette Users and baseline Dual Users. As shown in Supplemental Table 2, among 747 YA baseline Exclusive E-cigarette Users, cannabis use at 7 months was reported by 27.2% (95% CI = 23.4, 31.2) of continuing nicotine vapers versus 16.8% (95% CI = 12.2, 22.3) of vaping abstainers, a 10.4% point difference (95% CI = 3.9, 16.2, p < 0.001). Among 1,082 baseline Dual Users, cannabis use at 7 months was reported by 79.5% (95% CI = 76.5, 82.2) of continuing nicotine vapers versus 68.1% (95% CI = 62.3, 73.4) of vaping abstainers, an 11.4% point difference (95% CI = 5.5, 17.6). In total, 193 out of 747 baseline Exclusive E-cigarette Users were dual abstinent (25.8%) compared to 92 out of 1082 baseline Dual Users (8.5%), a significant difference at p < 0.001.

Discussion

This study provides the first evidence that a text message intervention designed to promote nicotine vaping cessation also promoted dual abstinence from both nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis among adolescents and young adults. The observed treatment effect is particularly noteworthy given that the intervention contained no explicit cannabis-specific content, highlighting the potential for spillover effects across substances that share common use patterns, contexts, and delivery mechanisms. The magnitude of the treatment effect was substantial, with the intervention demonstrating a 13.5% point advantage over control in promoting dual abstinence among adolescents (38.5% vs. 25.0%) and a 4.6% point advantage among young adults (17.9% vs. 13.3%). Importantly, these treatment effects were observed regardless of baseline cannabis use status, indicating the intervention’s broad efficacy across different patterns of substance use. The stronger effect observed in adolescents compared to young adults suggests potentially greater malleability of substance use behaviors during earlier developmental stages.

Several mechanisms may explain this beneficial spillover effect on cannabis use. First, it may reflect the increasingly common practice of cannabis vaping [37] the use of electronic delivery systems similar or identical to those used for nicotine to aerosolize liquid tetrahydrocannabinol (THC). When young people successfully quit using their vaping devices for nicotine, this behavior change would naturally extend to decreased cannabis consumption via the same delivery method, creating an incidental cessation effect for both substances simultaneously. Additionally, as young people stopped using e-cigarettes, they may have experienced decreased exposure to the people, places, and cues associated with cannabis use. The fact that baseline dual users who successfully quit vaping were significantly less likely to continue cannabis use compared to those who continued vaping aligns with this hypothesis. Second, participation in a cessation study may have triggered broader self-reflection about substance use patterns, prompting young people to reconsider their cannabis use independently. Third, the cognitive and behavioral skills taught for nicotine vaping cessation (e.g., identifying triggers, developing coping strategies, building self-efficacy) may have generalized to cannabis use behaviors through shared psychological mechanisms of behavior change. Fourth, the text message intervention may have resonated with dual users’ motivations to reduce multiple substances. Finally, young people’s perceptions of health risks associated with vaping may have extended to cannabis due to shared delivery mechanisms and overlapping health concerns. While some observed changes in cannabis use may reflect experimentation, the significant treatment group differences and interaction effects with vaping cessation status suggest intervention-specific mechanisms beyond spontaneous cessation patterns. These potential mechanisms represent a critical area for future research that could inform more efficient interventions addressing polysubstance use.

While these findings demonstrate promising spillover effects, they also reveal important heterogeneity in treatment response that has implications for future intervention development. The lower dual abstinence rates among baseline dual users compared to exclusive e-cigarette users suggest that while some young people may benefit from shared behavioral strategies that address both nicotine vaping and cannabis use simultaneously, individuals with established patterns of polysubstance use may require additional or enhanced intervention components beyond those targeting nicotine vaping alone. The nature of this additional support – whether it involves cannabis-specific content, modified behavioral strategies, increased intervention intensity, or entirely different therapeutic approaches – represents a critical area for future research. Developing and testing interventions that systematically address both substances while identifying which young people are most likely to benefit from integrated versus sequential treatment approaches are critical next steps.

The remarkably high rates of cannabis use observed in both trials (74.6% among adolescents and 59.2% among young adults) far exceeded national prevalence estimates from population-based surveys (approximately 25% for adolescents and 23% for young adults [38]). This disparity suggests that young people who vape nicotine represent a distinct high-risk population for polysubstance use. Notably, similarly high rates of cannabis use (71%) were reported in another recent vaping cessation trial targeting 16- to 25-year-olds [12], confirming that this pattern is not unique to our sample but rather characteristic of young people seeking nicotine vaping cessation support.

A notable age-related pattern emerged in our data: while adolescents reported higher baseline rates of cannabis use compared to young adults (74.6% vs. 59.2%), they also demonstrated substantially greater reductions in cannabis use at follow-up (24.5% points vs. 4.2% points). Adolescents also achieved higher rates of dual abstinence compared to young adults (31.7% vs. 15.6%), suggesting that younger populations may be more responsive to cessation interventions, potentially due to shorter duration of use, less entrenched habits, or greater neuroplasticity during this developmental period [39].

This study has several notable strengths. To our knowledge, it is the first to document treatment effects on cannabis use from a nicotine vaping cessation intervention that did not explicitly target cannabis. This finding is significant as it provides evidence that substance-specific interventions may yield beneficial effects on other substances, potentially reducing implementation burden for addressing multiple substance use. The large sample sizes across two distinct age groups enhance the generalizability of our findings and allow for meaningful age comparisons, which are particularly important given developmental differences in substance use patterns and cessation outcomes. Additionally, the randomized controlled trial design with high follow-up rates and no differential attrition provides robust evidence of intervention effects while mitigating selection bias.

An important limitation of our study is that assessment of cannabis use did not distinguish between different modes of administration (e.g., smoking, vaping, dabbing, edible). This limitation prevents us from determining whether reported reductions were specific to certain modes of administration, particularly vaping. We also cannot examine whether the intervention might have had stronger effects on cannabis vaping specifically, given similarities with nicotine vaping in terms of behavior patterns, devices, and contexts of use. Future research should assess mode of administration to enable more nuanced analyses of cessation patterns and intervention effects across different cannabis products. A second limitation is that abstinence from vaping and cannabis were not biochemically verified. Biochemical verification of substance use has shown to be challenging in other digital cessation studies [40]. Despite reliance on self-reported data that may be susceptible to social desirability bias, this low-intensity, fully automated intervention trial with low-demand characteristics that did not explicitly intend to address cannabis use, rates of misreporting are anticipated to be minimal. Two aspects of our measurement approach warrant comment: examination of interim timepoints beyond baseline and 7-month endpoints could provide important insights into the temporal dynamics of behavior change, and our use of a 30-day assessment window for cannabis use may not have captured infrequent or experimental use patterns, potentially underestimating baseline prevalence of cannabis use or overestimating cessation rates among less-than-monthly users. Another limitation is that both trials were conducted during the COVID-19 pandemic, which introduced unique stressors [41] and altered substance use patterns among young people [42, 43]. This context may have influenced both baseline substance use rates and cessation outcomes in ways that limit generalizability to non-pandemic conditions.

Conclusions

A text message nicotine vaping cessation intervention was effective in promoting abstinence from nicotine e-cigarettes and cannabis among adolescents and young adults, with stronger effects observed in adolescents. Treatment efficacy was comparable across exclusive e-cigarette users and dual users, though baseline exclusive e-cigarette users achieved higher dual abstinence rates. These findings demonstrate that substance-specific interventions can yield broader health benefits across multiple substances simultaneously, while also highlighting the need for enhanced approaches specifically targeting young people who use multiple substances.

Continued monitoring of substance use patterns among youth is needed given the evolving e-cigarette and cannabis landscape. The increasing prevalence of co-use highlights the growing need for concurrent treatment approaches [11]. This study demonstrates a promising, efficient pathway to address polysubstance use by leveraging existing intervention frameworks, potentially reducing implementation burden while maximizing public health impact.

Source: https://substanceabusepolicy.biomedcentral.com/articles/10.1186/s13011-025-00679-1

by Mark Gold M.D. –  Reviewed by Michelle Quirk –  –

Key points

  • We screen and intervene early for hypertension, type 2 diabetes, and cancer; we can do the same for addiction.
  • Preaddiction thinking supports early engagement, attacks denial, and normalizes a harm-reducing mindset.
  • Delaying treatment increases risks and harms, contradicting outcomes research and ethical medical practice.

Raising “rock bottom” with early diagnosis and intervention in substance use.

The mistaken belief that people with substance use disorders (SUDs) must “hit rock bottom” has shaped addiction care for decades. This model contrasts with how medicine manages chronic illnesses, where early detection and proactive treatment are normal. The “bottom” in addiction is a moment of maximum despair and hopelessness. It also may be a life-changing event like getting fired, losing a relationship, or facing legal charges. It could mean a moment between considering changing one’s life or suicide.

For more than 30 years, I have proposed that addiction treatment must “move up the bottom” to reduce harm and have a better chance of working. Applying preaddiction logic holds promise for lowering SUD-related suffering, illness, and mortality. Denying early diagnosis and treatment may primarily stem from addiction stigma.

“Let them hit bottom” was (and is) the refrain in addiction care; suffering supposedly must crescendo before people with an SUD accept the need to stop using drugs. Whether arising from fear of people gaming the system and seeking opioids for fake injuries or the inherent austerity of public institutions, this belief still shapes policy and practice.

In the early 1970s, I encountered this idea as a medical student. People who came to the emergency room with overdoses were not admitted. Medicine had little to offer and might undermine a person’s journey toward readiness; a person might feel ready for treatment, but someone else decided they’d not hit bottom. How ridiculous is this?

But when physicians misuse substances, then early intervention, long-term monitoring, and structured support are considered necessary. These practices, codified in physicians’ health programs (PHPs) across the United States, help most physicians, yielding an excellent return-to-work rate and resumed function. The message is clear: The “rock bottom” model is neither ethical nor clinically efficient.

National Institute on Drug Abuse Director Nora Volkow has called the belief that someone must “hit rock bottom” before treatment “a myth that can have dire consequences.” While the rock-bottom narrative offers psychological neatness—drama, surrender, catharsis—it lacks scientific grounding. Substance use disorders rarely emerge overnight; they evolve with “use,” then “risky use,” often in adolescence or early adulthood. By the time someone meets all criteria for severe SUD, the hijacked brain is adept at finding and using drugs, and not getting caught or sent to treatment. The longer SUD continues, the more complex and complicated the reversal is.

Ethically, “waiting” is untenable. Delayed intervention amplifies harm, entrenches bad behavior, and puts family, friends, and others at risk of harm. An earlier intervention and treatment might prevent loss of friends, family, and job, as well as halt the addiction from becoming entrenched.

We don’t withhold antihypertensives until catastrophic bleeds occur. We don’t wait for myocardial infarction to begin statins. Medicine emphasizes upstream prevention and treatment. While many perceive addiction as a choice, impaired MDs will tell you they wish someone had intervened and helped them earlier.

The directors of the National Institute on Drug Abuse and the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism proposed, in 2022, earlier identification and intervention for substance use and its consequences. Volkow, Koob, and McLellan introduced this preaddiction concept by paralleling prediabetes. These researchers used mild to moderate Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th Edition, SUD criteria to help define pre-addiction, allowing early detection, brief treatment, or intervention before addiction-related neurobehavioral and psychosocial collapses occurred.

Research shows that at mild to moderate levels of SUD severity, patients often retain executive function, can reassert control over drugs, and may still re-engage and preserve intact relationships, work roles, and decision-making. At this preaddiction point, brief interventions, outpatient treatment, or educational measures have great potential to resolve the preaddiction. Sometimes, treatment might comprise advice and education rather than weeks in a treatment facility. In addition, early interventions may not require anti-craving medications, detoxification, opioid treatment medications, hospitalization, or extensive monitoring.

Preaddiction thinking supports early engagement, attacks denial, and normalizes a preventive mindset. Preaddiction communicates risk while preserving agency, as with prediabetes. It gives clinicians a structured rationale to screen, counsel, and refer before severe illness.

Early Intervention Works

Nowhere is “raising the bottom” more visible than in PHPs. These state-based programs often identify impaired doctors from anonymous reports of patients, staff, or other providers. They protect patients from impaired physicians by managing them through structured evaluation, mandated treatment, regular toxicology testing, workplace monitoring, and ongoing recovery support—often for five or more years.

This model is widely celebrated, even though its success depends partly on external leverage: Physicians are often told noncompliance may result in license suspension and loss of professional status. In a five-year, multi-state study, DuPont and colleagues found that more than 70 percent of the doctors returned to practice, sustaining functional recovery. The model used early identification, accountability, structured care, serial urine testing, and long-term follow-up. It’s preventive, continuous, and outcome-driven.

The PHP system contradicts the “hitting bottom” mantra. It’s a real-life demonstration of what addiction care could be: long-term, hopeful, and outcome-driven, but with accountability. The limited application of such systems beyond professional circles reflects a profound inequity—not a clinical limitation.

Physician colleagues have moral, ethical, and legal obligations to report coworkers whose impairment threatens patients. Avoiding “punishment” and promoting sharing, shame reduction, and physicians helping each other in camaraderie while in treatment is critical to the success of physician programs.

When structured and ethical, coercion may paradoxically enhance autonomy by restoring capacity. Treat coercion as a clinical tool—not punishment. Integrate preaddiction into medical education, focusing on prevention, brain changes, and ethical duties.

“Bottom” need not be the destination just before treatment. Waiting or delaying intervention until full disorder or voluntary self-referral risks disease progression, more entrenched brain/behavior changes, worse prognosis, and higher costs.

Summary

To align addiction with other chronic medical conditions, SUD screening must be routine for every healthcare, clinic, or emergency department visit. Duration, age of initiation at use, and severity should be assessed. The preaddiction concept provides a teachable inflection point rather than the binary “normal vs addicted,” and intervention may change the trajectory. Brief interventions may be the only treatment needed if interventions start early enough.

Medicine should abandon the myth that people with SUDs must earn the right to be helped by suffering “enough.” Medicine has shown numerous benefits of early screening, intervention, and assisting patients in changing. If we can intervene early for hypertension, for type 2 diabetes, and for breast and colon cancer, we can do the same for addiction. What’s holding us back?

Source: https://www.psychologytoday.com/us/blog/addiction-outlook/202511/preaddiction-intervention-could-save-lives

Kate Dubinski · CBC News ·

Faced with teens drinking alcohol and using drugs at higher rates than others in the province, a local health unit will try to reverse the trend by using a system first developed in Iceland.

The Icelandic Prevention Model will be adapted to reflect local data and community needs, officials with Southwestern Public Health told CBC News.

“Local health status data is clear: reported use of alcohol, cannabis, tobacco, and other substances among youth is higher here than in Ontario,” said Peter Heywood, director of healthy communities at the health unit, which covers St. Thomas, Woodstock, and Oxford and Elgin counties.

More than one in three young people in that region reported using alcohol, cannabis and smoking a full cigarette for the first time in Grade 9, according to public health data, and more than half of young people reported drinking alcohol in the previous year, about 10 per cent higher than the Ontario average.

High school students will be asked to take a survey from Nov. 24 to Dec. 5, asking about substance use. They’ll be asked about their experiences in school, their communication with parents and siblings, their friendships, what they do in their spare time, how they see their mental health and what substances they use and how they perceive that use.

The results will be analysed and will guide how officials apply the Icelandic model locally, said Jessica Austin, a health promotor with Southwestern Public Health.

“The Icelandic Prevention Model was developed in Iceland by social scientists in the 90s (who) looked at factors that influence youth substance use to inform their community that had high substance rates on where they could focus their efforts to lower those rates,” Austin said.

Iceland’s teenagers used drugs and alcohol at the highest rates in Europe. Now, their rates are among the lowest.

Approach adopted worldwide

The approach has been adopted in communities around the world, including some in Canada. It focuses on prevention rather than targeting specific behaviours. Using the local data, the health unit works with community agencies, recreational facilities, faith groups, police officers, and school boards to give teens a sense of belonging.

“We know substance use is a complex issue and it requires a complex solution,” Austin said. “We’ve done a lot of work using provincial data, but now we will be able to work more effectively with the local data, to come together and get into the root causes.”

It typically takes a few years for change to happen, she added.

“I think everybody gets excited when we see the Icelandic graph sitting at one per cent for smoking rates and six per cent for alcohol-use rates, when we are sitting in the nearly 50 per cent alcohol-use rates for our youth,” Austin said.

“We would love to get down to that under the 10 per cent marker. In the short term, we want to at least get to the provincial rate.”

Source: https://www.cbc.ca/news/canada/london/icelandic-prevention-model-southwestern-public-health-9.6971289

The New England Journal of Medicine is again promoting failed progressive public policies. This time, it is “harm reduction.” From “The Erosion of Harm Reduction,” by Joshua Barocas, M.D.

Unlike the targets of many other recent attacks on public health and medicine in the United States, harm reduction is not a formal bureaucracy, but a philosophy and an approach to health care. As defined by the Drug Policy Alliance, it is “a set of ideas and interventions that seek to reduce the harms associated with both drug use and punitive drug policies.” Harm reduction is embodied in syringe-services programs (SSPs), naloxone distribution, overdose education, overdose-prevention centers [i.e. “safe injection sites”], and decriminalization of drugs.

Barocas decries the Trump Administration’s executive order that limits such policies:

Perhaps most concerning, an executive order focused on homelessness and civil commitment issued on July 24, 2025, prohibits federal SAMHSA discretionary grants from being used to fund harm-reduction activities, proposes a freeze on federal funding to organizations that provide “drug paraphernalia,” and threatens legal action against harm-reduction organizations. The executive order states that these approaches “only facilitate illegal drug use and its attendant harm.”

The Streets of San Francisco

My wife, the Las Vegas Review-Journal columnist Debra J. Saunders, covered San Francisco’s harm reduction drug policies extensively back when she worked for the San Francisco Chronicle. It started with “needle exchange,” which she initially supported as a means of preventing the spread of HIV. The idea was for addicts to “exchange” dirty needles — a prime source of HIV transmission — for clean ones. The rule was: no used needle, no free clean replacement. Unfortunately, the program led to greater drug abuse. “Harm reduction” zealots eventually dropped the exchange requirement, which resulted in dangerous used needles littering San Francisco’s sidewalks and even children’s playgrounds.

Debra noticed the decay and decided to investigate. I’ll let her describe it. From a 2019 Review-Journal column:

In 2015, I learned that San Francisco had abandoned the “needle exchange” model — clinics would dispense one new needle in exchange for each used needle — in favor of needle “access.” Which means free needles.

So I walked into a downtown clinic and walked out with a “starter kit” of 20 needles in a paper bag filled with other paraphernalia meant to make it safer to shoot up. It was that easy.

You see, it had become too much to expect the city’s many junkies to return used needles to get free needles. (It also was too much to expect drug users to buy their own needles, which had been legalized.)

Instead the Special City, as some call it, put out drop boxes in the hope that the civic-minded would use them. How did that work out? Just look at the sidewalks. It’s not working.

Can You Imagine?

San Francisco was allowing harm reducers to give away “starter kits” to people so they could begin injecting drugs! That’s harm causation.

Policies have consequences. Those of San Francisco’s homelessness “harm reduction” protocols were dire. Human feces befouled the streets, to the point that a “poop map” was published to warn people about unsanitary messes. The downtown commercial center imploded. Once-thriving shopping hubs closed. Union Square became a ghost town. Squalor ruled blocks of Market Street. A total “harm reduction” catastrophe.

The Good Doctor Barocas

But don’t tell that to the good doctor Barocas, who concludes his NEJM piece thusly:

Harm reduction is evidence-based health care that is rooted in public health principles. There is no single best form of harm reduction — this model depends on the availability of an array of services that meet patients where they are. Undermining harm reduction and cutting related programs isn’t merely a funding decision; it is an assault on an approach to health care that prioritizes evidence, compassion, and dignity — values that are central to the medical profession. Such actions are in keeping with other moves by the federal government that encroach on clinical practice and the professional judgment of clinicians and undermine the autonomy of patients. Like many other aspects of public health and medical care, harm reduction is being dangerously and rapidly eroded.

I don’t think that “personal autonomy” and “human dignity” entail shooting up harmful substances, defecating in public, living (and dying) on the streets, or engaging in the many other behaviors associated with drug abuse (and mental illness) that have ruined too many of America’s formerly world-class cities.

Helping drug abusers as well as we can is an ethical imperative. The question therefore becomes: Do we love our addicted countrymen enough to insist that they diligently engage in programs to restore themselves to lives of dignity and self-respect? Harm reduction isn’t that. Indeed, the more we take that path, the worse things get. Facilitating drug abuse — which is what “harm reduction” does — causes terrible harm, often to the people it purports to help and certainly to the communities in which they reside.

Wesley J. Smith – Chair and Senior Fellow, Center on Human Exceptionalism

Wesley J. Smith is Chair and Senior Fellow at Discovery Institute’s Center on Human Exceptionalism. Wesley is a contributor to National Review and is the author of 14 books, in recent years focusing on human dignity, liberty, and equality. Wesley has been recognized as one of America’s premier public intellectuals on bioethics by National Journal and has been honored by the Human Life Foundation as a “Great Defender of Life” for his work against suicide and euthanasia. Wesley’s most recent book is Culture of Death: The Age of “Do Harm” Medicine, a warning about the dangers to patients of the modern bioethics movement.

Source: https://scienceandculture.com/2025/11/harm-reduction-harms-the-homeless/


Opening Statement from NDPA:

Commentary on psychiatry and its interaction with drug problems: Whilst this article sometimes includes CCHR’s campaigning rhetoric (and CCHR do much good work) there is also much of generic interest and usefulness on this specific subject – both in the article text and in the sources listed. For this reason, we include this in NDPA’s archive. (CCHR’s background and work can be reviewed via info@cchr.org.uk)

LOS ANGELES, Calif., Nov. 3, 2025 (SEND2PRESS NEWSWIRE) — Each May and October, millions are urged to “raise awareness” for mental health through national and international campaigns, including World Mental Health Day in October. Yet, according to the mental health industry watchdog, Citizens Commission on Human Rights International (CCHR), many of the advocacy campaigns driving these observances are dominated by pharmaceutical interests and a biomedical model reliant on psychotropic drugs, electroshock, and even psychosurgery. The outcome has been catastrophic: more than 76 million Americans take psychiatric drugs, and an estimated 100,000—including children as young as five—are electroshocked annually.

CCHR warns that modern mental-health awareness campaigns are not about understanding the mind but promoting psychiatry’s drug-driven model of “treatment.” Since its founding in 1969, the organization has used these awareness months to expose psychiatric abuse and coercion—particularly the drugging, electroshocking, and violent restraint of children in behavioral facilities. Working with parents, doctors, and lawmakers, CCHR has helped establish hundreds of laws globally to protect against psychiatric harm, including the first U.S. bans on electroshock for minors in California (1976) and Texas (1993), and the 1983 prohibition of Deep Sleep Treatment in Australia following 48 patient deaths—now a criminal offense to administer it in New South Wales and Western Australia.

CHALLENGING DRUG-INDUCED VIOLENCE

CCHR has documented the tragic outcomes of psychiatry’s drug-based approach, including its potential links to acts of senseless violence. It testified before the first inquest into the deaths of eight victims of a Kentucky mass shooting in 1989, where the perpetrator’s psychiatrist acknowledged that the antidepressant Prozac (fluoxetine) potentially contributed to the crime. A decade later, CCHR obtained confirmation that Columbine ringleader Eric Harris had the antidepressant Luvox in his system—despite clinical trials showing the drug could “form of psychosis characterized by exalted feelings, delusions of grandeur…and overproduction of ideas.”[1]

The watchdog’s efforts led to a 1999 Colorado government hearing on psychiatric drugs and violence, with the chair, State Rep. Penn Pfiffner, stating: “There is enough coincidence and enough professional opinion from legitimate scientists to cause us to raise the issue and to ask further questions.”[2] Working with Patricia Johnson, then-member of the Colorado State Board of Education, CCHR helped obtain a precedent-setting resolution urging academic—not chemical—solutions for classroom issues.[3]

CCHR also joined with medical experts and parents to press the U.S. Food and Drug Administration to issue its 2004 “black box” warning that antidepressants can cause suicidal behavior in children, which was later expanded in 2007 to include young adults up to age 24. Today, studies confirm that 46–71% of antidepressant users experience emotional blunting, dulling empathy, and increasing detachment—a factor present in numerous violent tragedies.[4]

Further reforms followed. In 2004, CCHR helped secure the federal Prohibition of Mandatory Medication amendment, banning schools from forcing children to take psychotropic drugs as a condition of education. Three years later, language CCHR helped introduce into the FDA reform bill required pharmaceutical ads to direct consumers to report drug side effects, causing adverse drug reporting to increase by 33 percent.[5]

CCHR’s investigations have also helped expose corruption and abuse in the psychiatric hospital and “troubled teen treatment” industry. Working with whistleblowers and journalists, it uncovered coercive admissions and insurance fraud within major private psychiatric hospital chains, leading to multiple state and federal investigations, criminal penalties, and closure of hundreds of abusive facilities. New laws were enacted to prohibit “bounty hunter” practices used to capture insured individuals for involuntary commitment and billing exploitation.[6]

Raising awareness, CCHR emphasizes, means parents can make better-informed choices and seek non-invasive, evidence-based help for their children. One expert has described the psychiatric polypharmacy trend as creating “a generation of child guinea pigs.” As The New York Times reported, “many psychiatric drugs commonly prescribed to adolescents are not approved for people under 18. And they are being prescribed in combinations that have not been studied for safety or for their long-term impact on the developing brain.”[7]

In 2013, nearly 8.4 million American children were taking psychiatric drugs.[8] By 2020, the IQVIA Total Patient Tracker Database showed that number had dropped to 6.1 million[9]—a notable decline that CCHR attributes in part to heightened public awareness, stronger warnings, and parental advocacy. However, millions of children remain drugged, underscoring that while progress has been made, the systemic overreliance on psychotropic drugs continues.

In addition to its feature-length documentaries, CCHR produces short educational videos on its YouTube channel to inform the public about mental health abuses and their prevention. Working alongside doctors, whistleblowers, parents, consumers, and civil and human rights organizations, CCHR continues to supply legislators and government agencies with documentation exposing psychiatric abuses and driving legislative reform to safeguard consumer and patient rights.

Today, both the World Health Organization (WHO) and United Nations agencies are calling for an end to coercive psychiatric practices—particularly those inflicted on children. Yet much of the mental-health establishment, including “patient-advocacy” groups with deep pharmaceutical ties, remains silent—endorsing mass drugging instead of confronting its documented dangers.

For more than five decades, CCHR International, which was originally established by the Church of Scientology and eminent professor of psychiatry, Dr. Thomas Szasz, has been a catalyst for reform, exposing human-rights violations in psychiatry and helping to achieve legislative and cultural change that has already begun to reduce child drugging and public acceptance of coercion. Its continuing campaigns seek a mental-health system based on transparency, informed consent, and respect for human dignity—affirming that lasting mental health will come not through drugs or shocks, but through compassion, truth, and accountability.

To learn more, visit: https://www.cchrint.org/2025/10/31/cchr-exposes-harms-behind-todays-mental-health-awareness-campaigns/

Sources:

[1] https://www.cchrint.org/2023/01/16/school-mental-health-programs-questioned-after-6-year-old-shot-teacher/

[2] https://www.cchrint.org/2023/01/16/school-mental-health-programs-questioned-after-6-year-old-shot-teacher/; Kelly P. O’Meara, “A Different Kind of Drug War,” Insight Magazine, 13 Dec. 1999

[3] https://www.cchrint.org/2023/01/16/school-mental-health-programs-questioned-after-6-year-old-shot-teacher/; “Resolution: Promoting the Use of Academic Solutions to Resolve Problems with Behavior, Attention, and Learning,” Colorado State Board of Education, 11 Nov. 1999

[4] https://www.cchrint.org/2022/09/05/the-travesty-of-6-million-youths-on-psychotropics-a-expert-calls-it-a-generation-of-child-guinea-pigs/https://www.verywellmind.com/can-antidepressants-make-you-feel-emotionally-numb-1067348

[5] https://www.cchrint.org/about-us/cchr-accomplishments/

[6] https://www.cchrint.org/about-us/cchr-accomplishments/

[7] https://www.cchrint.org/2022/09/05/the-travesty-of-6-million-youths-on-psychotropics-a-expert-calls-it-a-generation-of-child-guinea-pigs/https://nypost.com/2022/08/29/the-ny-times-suddenly-discovered-were-giving-kids-dangerous-drugs/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/08/27/health/teens-psychiatric-drugs.html

[8] https://www.cchrint.org/2016/11/30/cchr-launches-parents-know-your-rights-campaign/

[9] https://www.cchrint.org/psychiatric-drugs/children-on-psychiatric-drugs/

Source: https://www.yourvalley.net/stories/cchr-warns-mental-health-awareness-masking-drug-and-shock-abuse,630679

Red Ribbon Week and Cobb County School District, Georgia – Oct. 30, 2025

Every October, schools across the nation celebrate Red Ribbon Week, a time dedicated to promoting healthy, drug-free lifestyles for students of all ages. This year, the Cobb County School District and our school resource officers are joining forces to remind families that staying drug-free isn’t just a one-week message, but a lifelong commitment that begins with open and honest communication.

While traditional drugs are a concern, School Resource Officer Edwin Ainsworth says vaping has become one of the most visible and dangerous trends among students. 

Ainsworth explained that a distinct fruity scent is a telltale sign that students have been vaping. The smell of THC also doesn’t get past him. 

Officer Ainsworth estimates that as many as eight in ten high school students have tried vaping at least once.

“These kids like them because they’re easy. They can pull them out and smoke them quickly. Some of them are odourless, some don’t even have smoke coming out of them, and kids can hide them,” he said.

Beyond the discreet design and flavours, the health risks are real and long-lasting. “It can cause them to have a hole in their lung, and if they get really addicted, their attitude changes. They start being a little more defensive when you talk to them,” Ainsworth added, “If your lung capacity gets full with popcorn lung, you could end up on a ventilator.”

Best Practices from Cobb Schools Police

Cobb School Resource Officers emphasize that parents play the most powerful role in prevention. The best protection is to get involved. 

Here are some strategies to help keep students drug-free! 

  • Know the Signs. Watch for changes in friends, social groups, mood, and sleep patterns.
  • Stay Involved. Get to know your students’ teachers, coaches, and friends. Encourage participation in sports, clubs, and community activities. 
  • Set Clear Expectations. Be explicit about rules and consequences. Discuss them calmly and consistently. 
  • Teach the Facts. Talk about how drugs and vaping can affect decision-making, athletic performance, and future goals.
  • Start Early. Begin age-appropriate conversations in elementary school about making healthy choices.
  • Model Healthy Behaviour. Avoid using substances in front of students. 
  • Be Proactive. Conduct regular checks of bedrooms, backpacks, and vehicles.

When students make safe, healthy choices, classrooms become stronger, and communities thrive. Red Ribbon Week serves as a reminder that prevention begins at home through honest conversations, clear expectations, and supportive environments. 

Together, we can help every Cobb student stay drug-free for life.

Source: https://www.cobbk12.org/osborne/_ci/p/120665

by Herschel Baker, International Liaison Director/Queensland Director, Drug Free Australia – 8 November 2025

Now the Australian drug cartels are using nitazenes (strong opioids) in refillable vape liquids see attached warning (click link at the foot of this article) it is now very important for the community to support strong legislation to stop illegal vapes. Drug Free Australia urgently request the West Australian Premier to please fast-track strong legislation to help stop vapes in W.A. and protect his community.

Main points of the warnings in the linked article are:

  1. Safety Notice is current at the issue date. Printed copies are uncontrolled.

NSW Health UPDATED: Further cases of dependence linked to use of nitazenes (strong opioids) in refillable vape liquids

  1. A New Type of Opioid Is Killing People in the US, Europe, and Australia

Nitazenes, a class of synthetic drugs 40 times more potent than fentanyl, are steadily becoming more common

 

  1. Clinical Experiences With the Nitazene Class of Synthetic Opioids: A Cohort Study https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0196064425010406

 

This case series highlights that standard parenteral naloxone doses are typically effective, but ongoing monitoring is necessary to detect renarcotization. Nitazene opioids display novel consumption patterns, including exposure by vaping and unintentional use in products sold as containing another drug. The risk of opioid withdrawal from regular nitazene opioid use is a novel observation. Monitoring trends through active drug surveillance, public education, and community access to naloxone are crucial to mitigate the harm posed by nitazene opioid opioids.

  1. Nitazenes: review of comparative pharmacology and antagonist action.

Nitazenes represent an emerging public health challenge due to their high potency, unknown pharmacokinetics, and increasing presence in illicit drug supplies. While naloxone is effective in reversing nitazene poisoning, cases of prolonged toxicity suggest the need for extended monitoring and repeated naloxone dosing. The findings of this review highlight the importance of enhanced drug surveillance, improved clinical awareness, and the development of targeted harm reduction strategies, including the potential for novel opioid antagonists with prolonged efficacy. Future research should focus on defining nitazene receptor kinetics, post-mortem redistribution effects, and optimizing naloxone administration protocols for these emerging synthetic opioids. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40422647/

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Risks of nitazenes (strong opioids) in refillable vapes – from DFA

Recent research indicates a staggering increase of nearly 60% in drug-related accidental injury deaths across the United States over the past five years. This alarming trend was highlighted during the American College of Surgeons (ACS) Clinical Congress held in Chicago, revealing significant implications for public health and trauma care.

According to the study, which utilized data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the rise in deaths related to unintentional drug injuries has notably affected middle-aged adults. The study underscores the urgent need to reevaluate trauma response strategies to account for the complexities introduced by drug use. The researchers emphasized the importance of addressing overdoses not only as isolated incidents but as part of a broader issue of accidental injuries.

From 2018 to 2023, the total count of unintentional injury deaths in the U.S. reached approximately 534,000. Within this timeframe, drug-related mortality rates from these injuries rose from 19.5% to 30.8%. Notably, individuals aged 35 to 44 accounted for more than half (51.4%) of these deaths, indicating a critical demographic at risk.

The study further revealed that Black patients experienced the highest mortality rates, with 34.9% of drug-related accidental injury deaths occurring among this group. Furthermore, men were found to be at a higher risk, with death rates from drug-induced injuries being nearly double that of women, at 38.4% compared to 15.6%.

These findings have raised significant public health concerns, prompting researchers to call for a comprehensive approach to tackle the rising prevalence of drug use in accidental injuries. The lead author of the study pointed out the necessity of integrating addiction medicine with trauma care to effectively address the growing crisis of drug-related deaths.

As the CDC notes, nearly half of all Americans are on at least one prescription medication, and a significant portion of the population is using multiple drugs, both recreationally and medically. This trend highlights the crucial need for continued education on the safe use of medications and the potential risks associated with drug interactions.

Researchers plan to delve deeper into the underlying causes of this worrying trend and aim to develop targeted interventions. Future initiatives may involve collaboration between trauma care services and addiction specialists to better assess and meet the healthcare needs of individuals affected by drug-related injuries.

The study was co-authored by a team of experts in trauma care and public health, who collectively stress the importance of addressing this multifaceted issue to prevent further loss of life.

Source: https://themunicheye.com/increase-drug-related-accidental-deaths-us-27335

Overdose deaths among people 65 and older linked to fentanyl mixed with stimulants such as cocaine and methamphetamines have skyrocketed by 9,000% in the past eight years, reaching levels similar to those seen in younger adults. The findings, presented at the ANESTHESIOLOGY 2025 annual meeting, highlight an alarming and often overlooked trend affecting older Americans.

This research is one of the first to use Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) data to demonstrate that older adults, a group rarely centered in overdose studies, are now deeply involved in the growing wave of fentanyl-stimulant fatalities. Those 65 and older are particularly at risk because they are more likely to have chronic health issues, take multiple medications, and process drugs more slowly as they age.

The Fourth Wave of the Opioid Epidemic

The opioid crisis has evolved through four distinct stages, each dominated by a different substance driving overdose deaths: prescription opioids in the 1990s, heroin around 2010, fentanyl beginning in 2013, and a combination of fentanyl and stimulants starting in 2015.

“A common misconception is that opioid overdoses primarily affect younger people,” said Gab Pasia, M.A., lead author of the study and a medical student at the University of Nevada, Reno School of Medicine. “Our analysis shows that older adults are also impacted by fentanyl-related deaths and that stimulant involvement has become much more common in this group. This suggests older adults are affected by the current fourth wave of the opioid crisis, following similar patterns seen in younger populations.”

Tracking the Deadly Trend in CDC Data

To examine the trend, researchers analyzed 404,964 death certificates listing fentanyl as a cause of death between 1999 and 2023, using data from the CDC Wide-ranging Online Data for Epidemiologic Research (WONDER) system. Of these, 17,040 deaths were among people age 65 and older, while 387,924 were among those aged 25 to 64.

Between 2015 and 2023, fentanyl-related deaths rose from 264 to 4,144 among older adults (a 1,470% increase) and from 8,513 to 64,694 among younger adults (a 660% increase). The most striking finding was the rapid rise in deaths involving both fentanyl and stimulants. Among older adults, these cases grew from 8.7% (23 of 264 fentanyl deaths) in 2015 to 49.9% (2,070 of 4,144) in 2023—a 9,000% jump. For younger adults, the proportion rose from 21.3% (1,812 of 8,513) to 59.3% (38,333 of 64,694) over the same period, an increase of 2,115%.

Cocaine and Methamphetamine Drive the Surge

The researchers highlighted data from these individual years because 2015 marked the onset of the fourth wave of the opioid epidemic and was also the year fentanyl-stimulant deaths among older adults were at their lowest, and 2023 as it was the most recent year of CDC data available.

The researchers noted that the rise in fentanyl deaths involving stimulants in older adults began to sharply rise in 2020, while deaths linked to other substances stayed the same or declined. Cocaine and methamphetamines were the most common stimulants paired with fentanyl among the older adults studied, surpassing alcohol, heroin and benzodiazepines such as Xanax and Valium.

Multi-Substance Overdoses and Prevention Strategies

“National data have shown rising fentanyl-stimulant use among all adults,” said Mr. Pasia. “Because our analysis was a national, cross-sectional study, we were only able to describe patterns over time — not determine the underlying reasons why they are occurring. However, the findings underscore that fentanyl overdoses in older adults are often multi-substance deaths — not due to fentanyl alone — and the importance of sharing drug misuse prevention strategies with older patients.”

The authors noted that anesthesiologists and other pain medicine specialists should:

  • Recognize that polysubstance use can occur in all age groups, not only in young adults.
  • Be cautious when prescribing opioids to adults 65 or older by carefully assessing medication history, closely monitoring patients prescribed opioids who may have a history of stimulant use for potential side effects, and considering non-opioid options when possible.
  • Use harm-reduction approaches such as involving caregivers in naloxone education, simplifying medication routines, using clear labeling and safe storage instructions and making sure instructions are easy to understand for those with memory or vision challenges.
  • Screen older patients for a broad range of substance exposures, beyond prescribed opioids, to better anticipate complications and adjust perioperative planning.

A Call to Action for Clinicians and Caregivers

“Older adults who are prescribed opioids, or their caregivers, should ask their clinicians about overdose prevention strategies, such as having naloxone available and knowing the signs of an overdose,” said Richard Wang, M.D., an anesthesiology resident at Rush University Medical Center, Chicago and co-author of the study. “With these trends in mind, it is more important than ever to minimize opioid use in this vulnerable group and use other pain control methods when appropriate. Proper patient education and regularly reviewing medication lists could help to flatten this terrible trend.”

Source: https://scitechdaily.com/a-9000-spike-in-fentanyl-deaths-is-devastating-older-americans/

Preventing drug use in vulnerable ages such as adolescence and youth must be analyzed with a comprehensive, multisectoral approach and with active participation from the individual, the community, the family, and society in a country where the policy is zero tolerance for this phenomenon.

To this end, the Joel Nieves Casas Community Mental Health Center reaches out to various Holguin communities each month. With its specialists to provide prevention messages and psychological support.

Regarding this topic of particular interest, Ariagna Ochoa Hidalgo, Master of Community Mental Health, explains that every third week of the month. When drug prevention interventions are carried out nationwide. We intensify health prevention actions and place great importance on reaching the community, schools, and every space where this topic can be addressed.

In this regard, the department head of the Community Mental Health Center states that “the first thing that must be done is to eliminate the stigmas and taboos associated with drugs.

As it is a complex issue to address, considering that our culture was not characterized by such a rapid increase in consumption and is not prepared to deal with it. It is not sure what to do in the event of such an incident, nor does it have the defense and prevention mechanisms to prevent young people from resorting to this type of consumption.”

When responding to drug use, it is necessary to identify the risk factors related to consumption. Among the individual factors are low self-esteem and frustration tolerance, and few coping mechanisms for dealing with everyday problems.
Among schoolchildren, the most common are declining academic performance, lack of motivation at school, overexertion, lack of self-control, behavioral problems, and behavioral disturbances. Dropping out of school and from school is another factor to consider. From a community perspective, the lack of recreational and leisure spaces can play a role.

This can trigger a red light and alert us that the adolescent or young person may be using drugs. Hence the importance of community preventive work. Also responsible for the Coordinator of the Mental Health Program in the municipality of Holguin, she concluded, the population must be sensitized to understand that they are dealing with an illness.

The best way to avoid it is always through prevention, keeping in mind that the rehabilitation process is complex, painful, long, inconsistent, and requires a great deal of effort and sacrifice. Therefore, it is best for young people to acquire defense mechanisms so they can voluntarily understand that a drug-free life, free from these uses, is better.

Addictions are considered a pandemic because they are on the rise worldwide, and Cuba is no exception. Also being a geographically vital hub surrounded by countries that sell and traffic drugs. The government’s commitment to preventing drug use is aimed at protecting the health and well-being of young people. As well as promoting healthy development and a full life in the future.

Source: https://www.radioangulo.cu/en/2025/10/24/mental-health-specialists-contribute-to-preventing-drug-use/

A STUDY published in June that I have just come across provides unsurprising but nonetheless devastating and irrefutable evidence linking increased cannabis use with rising rates of breast and testicular cancers in young Americans.

The study covers the period between 2000 and 2019. The aim was clear: to test the hypothesis that the increasing incidence of testis and breast cancer in adolescent and young adult (AYA) Americans correlates with their increasing cannabis use. Its conclusions are stark: that North America has evidence which implicates cannabis as a potential etiologic factor contributing to the increasing incidence of breast carcinoma in young females and testis cancer in older adolescent and young adult males, and in most races and ethnicities. Temporal correlations suggest that a carcinogenic effect of cannabis is rapid, leading to cancer within a few years after cannabis exposure. You can read this extremely detailed and careful study here. 

Its overall study design involved comparing breast and testis cancer incidence trends in jurisdictions that had and had not legalised cannabis use. In the US, both breast carcinoma in 20- to 34-year-old females and testis cancer in 15- to 39-year-old males had annual incidence rate increases that were highly correlated (Pearson’s r = 0.95) with the increase in the number of cannabis-legalising jurisdictions during the period 2000–2019. Both were significantly greater during the period 2000–2019 in the cannabis-legalising than non-legalising states. (My italics)

During the period 2000–2019, registries in cannabis-legalising versus non-legalising states documented a 26 per cent versus 17 per cent increase in breast carcinoma and 24 per cent versus 14 per cent increase in testis cancer.

In the same age groups, the study (predictably) found Canada had an even greater increase in both breast and testis cancer incidence than the US. A UNICEF study on the well-being of children had already confirmed that Canadian adolescents (aged 11 to 15) have the highest rate of cannabis use among the 29 advanced economies of the world. Of particular concern that legalising advocates would do well to note is the considerable percentage of the Canadian youth who are daily or weekly users – approximately 22 per cent of boys and 10 per cent of girls. And that amongst the older 16-19s the upward trend in use which increased to 43 per cent in 2023 compared with 36 per cent in 2018 follows the country’s nationwide legalisation of cannabis for over-18s in 2018.

This link between cannabis and these forms of cancer should come as no surprise.  A report from the American Cancer Society (ACS) in February this year identified non-seminoma testis cancer as the cancer type most closely linked to cannabis use. 

More shocking is that this relationship has been known about for years. In 2009, scientists at the Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Centre in Seattle investigated the possibility of a link ‘after learning that the testes were one of the few organs in the body to contain receptors for the main psychoactive substance in the drug, tetrahydrocannabinol (THC)‘.   The same scientists noted that there had also been a rise in testicular cancer cases that had ‘mirrored the rise in marijuana use since the 1950s’. 

The 2025 study is of course of a different type and order of magnitude. It was certainly needed. Its findings warrant the utmost attention of our national and local public health authorities which were so zealous to promote child covid vaccination but have remained over the years so strangely silent about cannabis.

This valuable study should also serve as a warning to cannabis legalisers including Sir Sadiq Khan that their endorsement of the drug and indifference to the impact of legalisation on teen health is not just irresponsible but near-criminal.  

Postscript: There are other disturbing elements regarding the underlying mechanisms noted in the study’s findings. These, its authors state, ‘may involve genotoxic effects, oxidative stress, and mitochondrial dysfunction caused by cannabis, leading to genomic instability’. For further elucidation of this a 2024 study published in Addiction Biology provides some key insights into cannabis-cancer pathobiology and genotoxicity. You can read this report here

Source:  https://www.conservativewoman.co.uk/the-irrefutable-link-between-cannabis-and-cancer-in-young-americans/

Elsevier

Pharmacology Biochemistry and Behavior

Volume 254, September 2025, 174056
Pharmacology Biochemistry and Behavior
by Lee-Yuan Liu-Chen, Peng Huang

Highlights

  • KOR agonists produce additive analgesic effect with MOR agonists.
  • KOR agonists reduce reinforcing properties and side effects of MOR agonists.
  • KOR agonists when used with MOR agonists for analgesia may prevent opioid use disorder.
  • KOR agonists decrease reinforcing properties of cocaine.
  • KOR agonists may be useful for treatment of cocaine use disorder.

Abstract

Reports in the 1990s and 2000s showed that kappa opioid receptor (KOR) agonists might be promising for treatment and/or prevention of opioid use disorder (OUD) and cocaine use disorder (CUD). However, the side effects associated with KOR agonists available at the time, such as psychotomimesis, dysphoria and sedation, prevented clinical development. Subsequently, nalfurafine and recently triazole 1.1 and oxa-noribogaine, three centrally acting KOR agonists devoid of such side effects, have been studied in animal models of OUD and CUD. By and large, earlier findings with typical KOR agonists were replicated with nalfurafine and in limited studies with triazole 1.1 and oxa-noribogaine. KOR agonists reduced reinforcing effects of mu opioid receptor (MOR) agonists and decreased tolerance to and dependence on MOR agonists. Oxa-noribogaine suppressed cue-induced reinstatement of morphine and fentanyl seeking. KOR agonists countered itch elicited by MOR agonists and produced additive analgesic effects with MOR agonists, thus allowing use of lower doses of MOR and KOR agonists, resulting in lower degrees of MOR-related side effects (such as respiratory depression) and typical KOR-associated side effects. In addition, KOR agonists attenuated locomotor sensitization and conditioned place preference sensitization following repeated cocaine, reduced acquisition and maintenance of cocaine self-administration and decreased cocaine-induced increase in extracellular dopamine. KOR agonists also suppressed cocaine priming-induced reinstatement of cocaine seeking. Therefore, a combination of a KOR agonist and a MOR agonist or a compound with dual KOR/MOR agonist activities when used as analgesics will deter escalation use of MOR agonists, thus prevent OUD, and KOR agonists may be useful for treatment of cocaine abuse and relapse. Importantly, KOR agonists with no or fewer side effects of typical KOR agonists should be further investigated in animal models of OUD and CUD, particularly those that simulate stress-, cue- and drug priming-induced relapse for potential clinical development.

Introduction

In the US more than one million people have died since 1999 from overdose of drugs of abuse (https://www.countyhealthrankings.org/health-data/health-factors/health-behaviors/alcohol-and-drug-use/drug-overdose-deaths). The number of reported opioid overdose deaths increased dramatically in recent years, with 81,083 deaths in 2023 (the most recent CDC data) (https://www.cdc.gov/nchs/pressroom/nchs_press_releases/2024/20240515.htm). In the same year, 29,918 people died from overdoses involving cocaine (https://www.cdc.gov/nchs/pressroom/nchs_press_releases/2024/20240515.htm). Many more are suffering from opioid use disorder (OUD)1 or/and cocaine use disorder (CUD). While overdose deaths involving opioids decreased in 2023 compared with 2022, overdose deaths involving cocaine and psychostimulants (like methamphetamine) increased. Unlike OUD, there are no effective medications for CUD. The % of overdose deaths in US involving both fentanyl and stimulants increased from 0.6 % (235) in 2010 to 32.3 % (34,429) in 2021 (Friedman and Shover, 2023). OUD and CUD are often co-morbid. Substance use disorder is a medical, societal, economic, and public health issue, that exacts terrible tolls on the individuals and the society. Therefore, developing drugs effective for treatment of substance use disorder (SUD) is critically important. SUD encompasses compulsive use of many drugs of abuse despite of negative consequences. This review will focus on OUD and CUD.
The kappa opioid receptor (KOR) is one of the three opioid receptors. Studies published as early as 1990s showed that KOR agonists reduced reinforcing properties of opioids and cocaine. KOR agonists prevented morphine-induced conditioned place preference (CPP) at low doses that do not cause conditioned place aversion (CPA) (Bolanos et al., 1996; Funada et al., 1993) and reduced self-administration (SA) of morphine, oxycodone, or heroin in rats and mice at doses that do not affect water SA (Glick et al., 1995; Kuzmin et al., 1997; Xi et al., 1998). KOR agonists also reduced acquisition and maintenance of cocaine SA (Glick et al., 1995; Mello and Negus, 1998, Mello and Negus, 2000; Negus et al., 1997) and attenuated cocaine-induced reinstatement of extinguished cocaine-seeking behavior in rats and monkeys (Morani et al., 2009; Schenk et al., 1999). However, development of KOR agonists for clinical use has been limited by side effects, most importantly dysphoria, psychotomimesis, and sedation (Pande et al., 1996; Pfeiffer et al., 1986; Walsh et al., 2001), except for nalfurafine (formerly named TRK-820)[reviewed in(Miyamoto et al., 2022; Zhou et al., 2022)] and, the peripherally acting difelikefalin (Fishbane et al., 2020; Lipman and Yosipovitch, 2021). Nalfurafine has been used in Japan since 2017 and difelikefalin was approved in the USA in 2021, both for pruritus associated with kidney dialysis. In addition, in preclinical studies triazole 1.1 showed promises as a selective KOR agonist without adverse effects associated with typical KOR agonists (Brust et al., 2016; Zhou et al., 2013).
Herein pharmacology of nalfurafine and triazole 1.1 is briefly described. Then evidence is reviewed for effects of KOR agonists on reinforcing effects of opioids and cocaine and reinstatement of drug seeking after extinction of SA behaviors. With the availability of KOR agonists that show no or fewer unwanted side effects, the notion that KOR agonists may be useful for the prevention and treatment of SUD warrants re-evaluation.

Section snippets

Nalfurafine

Nalfurafine is a highly potent and moderately selective KOR agonist (Cao et al., 2020; Nagase et al., 1998; Wang et al., 2005). Using [35S]GTPγS binding, we have shown that nalfurafine is a potent KOR full agonist (EC50 = 0.097 nM) and MOR partial agonist with 32× KOR/MOR and 242× KOR/DOR selectivity, respectively (Cao et al., 2020). By inhibition of [3H]diprenorphine binding, we determined its Ki to be 0.075 nM for the KOR with 69× KOR/MOR selectivity and 214× KOR/DOR selectivity(Wang et al.,

U50,488H and the dynorphin A analog E-2078

Funada et al. (1993) reported that in male ddY mice, an outbred strain, morphine (3 or 5 mg/kg, s.c.) produced significant CPP, whereas U50,488H (1 mg/kg, s.c.) and the dynorphin A analog E-2078 (0.1 mg/kg, s.c.) induced a slight, nonsignificant CPA. Morphine (3 mg/kg)-induced CPP was abolished by pretreatment with U50,488H (1 mg/kg) and significantly decreased by pretreatment with E-2078 (0.1 mg/kg). The inhibitory effects of U50,488H and E-2078 were antagonized by the KOR antagonist

U50,488

Pretreatment of C57BL/6 mice with nalfurafine (3 μg/kg and 10 μg/kg, s.c.) or U50,488 (3 mg/kg, s.c.) for 15 min before cocaine conditioning blocked cocaine (15 mg/kg)-induced CPP, while these drugs alone did not cause CPA or sedation in the rotarod assay (Dunn et al., 2020). Pretreatment of mice with 10 μg/kg nalfurafine or 3 mg/kg U50,488 immediately before testing potentiated cocaine SA (0.5 mg/kg/infusion). Further, 10 μg/kg nalfurafine also increased progressive ratio break point,

KOR agonists vs. KOR antagonists for the prevention and treatment of SUDs

Koob proposed a conceptual framework of SUDs, which is a three-stage cycle – binge/intoxication, withdrawal/negative affect, and preoccupation / anticipation (Koob, 2020, Koob, 2021, Koob, 2022). The three stages represent dysregulation in three functional domains: incentive salience and/or habits, negative emotional states, and executive function, respectively. Repeated use of drugs of abuse leads to escalating drug use and development tolerance and/or dependence (binge/intoxication) and

Centrally acting novel KOR agonists with fewer side effects

Centrally acting KOR agonists that produce fewer side effects typically associated with KOR agonists, such as nalfurafine, RB64, triazole 1.1, oxa-noribogaine, LOR17 and HS666, makes it feasible to use these compounds for prevention and treatment of SUD. Among these compounds, only nalfurafine is used clinically. As mentioned above, nalfurafine has been approved and used in Japan and South Korea for management of systemic itch associated with kidney dialysis or chronic liver diseases without

Conclusions

There was a large body of literature in 1990s and 2000s showing that KOR agonists reduced reinforcing properties of opioids and cocaine and suppressed reinstatement of opioids or cocaine seeking. However, because of the side effects associated with KOR agonists available at the time, the investigations were limited to preclinical studies in animal models. Subsequently, centrally acting KOR agonists that showed no or lower degrees of side effects have become available, including nalfurafine,

CRediT authorship contribution statement

Lee-Yuan Liu-Chen: Writing – review & editing, Writing – original draft, Project administration, Investigation, Funding acquisition, Conceptualization. Peng Huang: Writing – review & editing, Conceptualization.
Source:  https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0091305725001030

Transmitted by Gary Christian – President, Drug Free Australia – September 18, 2025

Attached is the Drug Free Australia submission to the TGA Consultation re medicinal cannabis which is not only in  Australian National interest but also this is of concern  worldwide. DFA hopes to bring the present appropriateness of access via the Special Access Scheme (SAS) and Authorised Prescriber (AP) under control into the safety and regulatory oversight of unapproved medicinal cannabis products to protect Australia’s  future generations from harm.

From DFA’s submission’s Executive Summary:

This document addresses three of the TGA consultation questions:

  • Contraindications for medical cannabis – see Appendix A
  • Claims for medical cannabis not supported by rigorous science – See Appendix B
  • Lack of quality assurance in the production of medicinal cannabis – See Appendix C

DFA recommendations are found on page 8.

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Source:  TGA Medicinal Cannabis submission

Opening Comment by DrugWatch member Maggie Petito:

It is often stated that comprehensive plans are most effective. Andean media often reports on crime profits from the transport of drugs, weapons and humans.  Additional factual reporting is needed.Few understand the profiteering by the Albanian mafia, Chinese Triads and Russian mobs. South American media does claim that Colombia [and Peru] see soaring cocaine production.Transportation and distribution yields higher profits than the actual production. Nonetheless, common sense reminds that without product, there is nothing to transport.

ARTICLE:

by    Steve Fisher, José de Córdoba and Santiago Pérez  – Wall Street Journal  – Sept. 16, 2025

From a heavily guarded mountain hideout in the heart of the Sierra Madre, 59-year-old Nemesio “Mencho” Oseguera reigns as the new drug king of Mexico, aided in his ascendance by America’s resurging love of cocaine and the Trump administration’s escalating war on fentanyl.

Oseguera spent decades building his Jalisco New Generation Cartel into a transnational criminal organization fierce enough to forge a new underworld order in Mexico, displacing the Sinaloa cartel, torn by warring factions, as the world’s biggest drug pusher.

The Sinaloans, Mexico’s top fentanyl traffickers, got caught in the crosshairs of the Trump administration, which promised to eradicate the synthetic opioid. The crackdown has left an open field for Jalisco and its lucrative cocaine trade, elevating Oseguera to No. 1.

“‘Mencho’ is the most powerful drug trafficker operating in the world,” said Derek Maltz, who served this year as interim chief of the Drug Enforcement Administration. “What is happening now is a pivot to much more cocaine distribution in America.”

Cocaine sold in the U.S. is cheaper and as pure as ever for retail buyers. Consumption in the western U.S. has increased 154% since 2019 and is up 19% during the same period in the eastern part of the country, according to the drug-testing company Millennium Health. In contrast, Fentanyl use in the U.S. began to drop in mid-2023 and has been declining since, according to data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.  

For new users, cocaine doesn’t carry the stigma of fentanyl addiction. Middle-class addicts and the tragic spectacle of homeless crack-cocaine users in the 1990s helped put a lid on America’s last cocaine epidemic.

Oseguera, who grew up poor selling avocados, is making a killing from cocaine buyers in the U.S. His cartel transports the addictive powder by the ton from Colombia to Ecuador and then north to Mexico’s Pacific coast via speedboats and so-called narco subs.

U.S. forces in the Caribbean recently blew up two speedboats, including one this week, that President Trump alleged were ferrying cocaine and fentanyl from Venezuela to the U.S. Fentanyl is largely produced in Mexico, and most cocaine ships through the Pacific. All those aboard the two vessels were killed. The president also has threatened military action against Mexican drug cartels.

A video released and edited by the Mexican military showing the apprehension of a drug-laden speedboat on Mexico’s Pacific coast this year.

The U.S. has a $15 million bounty on Oseguera, but he rarely leaves his mountain compound, according to authorities. Few photos of him circulate. The cadre of men protecting Oseguera, known as the Special Force of the High Command, carry RPG 7 heat-seeking, shoulder-fired rocket launchers capable of piercing a tank, people familiar with cartel operations said.

Visitors to the drug lord’s stronghold are hooded before they embark on the six-hour car trip through terrain sown with land mines, those people said. Locations of the pressure-activated explosives are known only by members of Oseguera’s inner circle.

Oseguera’s fortunes rose after the U.S. pressured Mexico to crack down on the Sinaloa cartel, where Oseguera got his start in the trade. The Sinaloans pioneered the manufacturing and smuggling of fentanyl, an industry breakthrough that sent cartel revenue soaring and drove up the number of fatal overdoses in the U.S. For the Sinaloans, landing in the administration’s spotlight couldn’t come at a worse time.

The capture of Sinaloa cartel leader Joaquín “El Chapo” Guzmán in January 2016 and his extradition to the U.S. a year later, set in motion a precipitous decline. Guzmán’s four sons inherited their father’s empire, highly valued for its network of smuggling tunnels beneath the U.S.-Mexico border, used for moving cocaine, fentanyl and other contraband.

The sons, known collectively as the little Chapos, or “Chapitos,” shifted production resources to fentanyl, which compared with the heroin their father had brought into the U.S. by the ton is easier to smuggle and costs just a fraction to produce.

The Chapitos triggered an internecine war last year as a result of a plot against Ismael “El Mayo” Zambada, the 70-something co-founder of the Sinaloa Cartel. Zambada was forced aboard a private plane bound for the U.S. by Joaquin Guzmán, one of El Chapo’s sons, who hoped for leniency from U.S. prosecutors.

Both men were taken into U.S. custody when they landed outside of El Paso, Texas. Zambada pleaded guilty to drug-trafficking charges last month and faces a possible life sentence. Guzmán, still in custody, pleaded not guilty to trafficking charges.

Zambada’s capture led to a violent split between men loyal to Zambada’s son, Ismael “Mayito Flaco” Zambada, and those allied with the Chapitos. An estimated 5,000 people from both camps have been killed or gone missing in the conflict, along with bystanders caught in the crossfire. Mexico has sent 10,000 federal troops in the past year to the state of Sinaloa, where the federal government has been largely helpless to end the fighting.

Hemmed in by U.S. and Mexican authorities on one front, and Zambada’s men on the other, the Chapitos swallowed their pride and sought the help of Oseguera, once a sworn enemy.

Each side had something the other wanted. Oseguera agreed to meet, looking to a future where he and his Jalisco cartel would rule as Mexico’s dominant criminal enterprise.

Landmark drug deal

In December, Oseguera sat down with a top lieutenant of Iván Archivaldo Guzmán, who leads Sinaloa’s Chapito faction. At the meeting in Mexico’s western state of Nayarit, Oseguera, who was operating from a position of strength, agreed to supply the Chapitos with weapons, cash and fighters.

In exchange, the Sinaloans opened their smuggling routes and border tunnels into the U.S., said people familiar with the meeting. The Jalisco cartel previously paid hefty fees to use the tunnels to move drugs beneath the U.S.-Mexico border, people familiar with its operations said.

The agreement also divvied up the U.S. trafficking trade, these people said: The Chapitos would keep their focus on serving American fentanyl addicts. Oseguera would concentrate on cocaine and its down-market cousin, methamphetamine. The Jalisco cartel now ferries tons of cocaine and record amounts of methamphetamine into the U.S. through Sinaloan-built tunnels, as well as fentanyl, the people familiar with cartel operations said.

The Sinaloa-Jalisco agreement was “an unprecedented event in the balance of organized crime,” Mexico’s attorney general’s office said in a July report. The Jalisco cartel compares with the Sinaloa cartel at the height of its power before El Chapo’s arrest, according to the DEA’s latest drug-threat assessment.

Oseguera caught another break from the Trump administration. The president’s campaign to deport immigrants in the U.S. illegally has taken federal agents away from drug-traffic interdiction. In Arizona, two Customs and Border Protection checkpoints along a main fentanyl-smuggling corridor from Mexico have been left unstaffed. Officers stationed there were sent to process detained migrants. A senior administration official said the U.S. border is more secure than it has ever been.

Colombia is producing records amounts of cocaine, and the volume of the drug arriving in the U.S. is driving down prices, the people familiar with cartel operations said.

Cocaine prices have fallen by nearly half to around $60 to $75 a gram compared with five years ago, said Morgan Godvin, a researcher with the community organization Drug Checking Los Angeles. “The price of pure cocaine has plummeted,” Godvin said.

Tons of cocaine manufactured in Colombia are shipped from Ecuador by small crews of fishermen on a three-week voyage to Mexico.

After refueling near the Galapagos, speed-boats and so-called narco subs continue north. The Mexican navy has deployed special forces to block shipments.

The Jalisco cartel, which controls ports on Mexico’s Pacific coast, now uses routes and tunnels into the U.S. that are controlled by the sons of imprisoned drug kingpin Joaquín “El Chapo” Guzmán.

The Jalisco cartel also draws steady revenue from diverse sources outside narcotics.

The cartel acts as a parallel government in the southwestern state of Jalisco and other parts of Mexico, taxing such goods as tortillas, chicken, cigarettes and beer, security experts said. It controls construction companies that build roads, schools and sewers for the municipal governments under cartel control. 

A booming black market for fuel is another cash cow. Gasoline and diesel stolen from Mexican refineries and pipelines—or smuggled into Mexico from the U.S. without paying taxes—is sold at below market prices to small and large businesses. U.S. officials estimate as much as a third of the fuel sold in Mexico is illicit. The head of the Jalisco cartel’s fuel division is nicknamed “Tank” for his prowess at stealing and storing millions of gallons of fuel. 

The cartel profited from the passage of migrants bound for the U.S., charging them thousands of dollars each to pass through territory it controls. And in recent years, the cartel has operated more than two dozen call centers to scam senior citizens out of hundreds of millions of dollars in a vacation-timeshare fraud, according to the Treasury Department.

Family ties

Oseguera, celebrated as “El Señor Mencho” in narco-ballads, is viewed as an altruistic patriarch by some poor Mexicans living in areas controlled by the cartel, which organizes town fiestas and hands out food, medicine and toys.

In 1994, Oseguera was convicted of dealing heroin and served nearly three years in a California prison. He was deported to Mexico, where he married the daughter of the boss of a Sinaloa-affiliated gang. By 2011, he was leading his own organization based in Jalisco state.

Jalisco gunmen stormed a Puerto Vallarta restaurant in 2016 and kidnapped two Chapitos—Iván Archivaldo and Jesús Alfredo—who were celebrating Iván’s birthday. Oseguera released them after an intervention by “El Mayo” Zambada, who later became a target of the Chapitos. 

Like many of Mexico’s cartels, Jalisco is largely a family business. One of Oseguera’s brothers, Antonio, known as Tony Montana after the Al Pacino character in the movie “Scarface,” was in charge of acquiring heavy weapons, the attorney general’s report said. The brother was arrested in 2022, and in February he was among 29 drug bosses Mexico expelled to the U.S., hoping to address Trump’s demands.

Oseguera’s son, who served as a top leader in the cartel, was sentenced in Washington, D.C., this year to life in prison for drug trafficking.

Hundreds of gunmen trained by former Colombian special forces work for Oseguera, according to Mexican officials. He travels through his territory in a small convoy of armored vehicles with a team equipped to fight off aggressors until reinforcements arrive. He had a specialized medical unit built near his mountain hideout to care for his advanced kidney disease, according to people familiar with the matter.

Photos from the Mexican navy showing packaged cocaine, in a 3.5-ton seizure from a semi-submersible vessel, a so-called narco sub, caught off the Pacific coast and brought to port in Acapulco, Mexico, in June.

Two cartel accountants arrested by Mexican authorities said they were required to leave behind smartphones, Apple Watches and any device with GPS signal before traveling to meet with Oseguera, a precaution against electronic surveillance or tracking, according to the people familiar with the cartel’s operations. Oseguera has a team that manages more than 50 phones of top cartel lieutenants, people familiar with the operations said. Every week, cartel operatives gather and review phone call logs to ensure the men haven’t been speaking with enemies, security experts said. Afterward, the men get new phones. 

In 2020, more than two dozen gunmen fired more than 400 rounds at the armored car ferrying Omar García Harfuch, then Mexico City’s security chief, on the capital’s Paseo de la Reforma. García Harfuch was hit three times but survived. Two of his bodyguards and a woman headed to work were killed. García Harfuch now serves as security minister for Mexico President Claudia Sheinbaum. He is overseeing the law-enforcement offensive, backed by U.S. intelligence, that has crippled the Chapitos. 

Oseguera’s subsequent rise to Mexico’s top drug trafficker puts him in a very dangerous spot, according to a senior Trump administration official.

Source: www.drugwatch.org
drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com

 

NIH – National Library of Medicine – National Center for Biotechnology Information

2025 Oct;178(10):1429-1440.

doi: 10.7326/ANNALS-24-03819. Epub 2025 Aug 26.

by Thanitsara Rittiphairoj1Louis Leslie2Jean-Pierre Oberste2Tsz Wing Yim2Gregory Tung3Lisa Bero4Paula Riggs5Kent Hutchison6Jonathan Samet7Tianjing Li8

Abstract

Background: Rapid changes in the legalized cannabis market have led to the predominance of high-concentration delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) cannabis products.

Purpose: To systematically review associations of high-concentration THC cannabis products with mental health outcomes.

Data sources: Ovid MEDLINE through May 2025; EMBASE, Allied and Complementary Medicine Database, Cochrane Library, Database of Abstracts of Reviews of Effects, CINAHL, and Toxicology Literature Online through August 2024.

Study selection: Two reviewers independently selected studies with high-concentration THC defined as greater than 5 mg or greater than 10% THC per serving or labeled as “high-potency concentrate,” “shatter,” or “dab.”

Data extraction: Outcomes included anxiety, depression, psychosis or schizophrenia, and cannabis use disorder (CUD). Results were categorized by association direction and by study characteristics. Therapeutic studies were defined by use of cannabis to treat medical conditions or symptoms.

Data synthesis: Ninety-nine studies (221 097 participants) were included: randomized trials (42%), observational studies (47%), and other interventional study designs (11%); more than 95% had moderate or high risk of bias. In studies not testing for therapeutic effects, high-concentration THC products showed consistent unfavorable associations with psychosis or schizophrenia (70%) and CUD (75%). No therapeutic studies reported favorable results for psychosis or schizophrenia. For anxiety and depression, 53% and 41% of nontherapeutic studies, respectively, reported unfavorable associations, especially among healthy populations. Among therapeutic studies, nearly half found benefits for anxiety (47%) and depression (48%), although some also found unfavorable associations (24% and 30%, respectively).

Limitation: Moderate and high risk of bias of individual studies and limited evaluation of contemporary products.

Conclusion: High-concentration THC products are associated with unfavorable mental health outcomes, particularly for psychosis or schizophrenia and CUD. There was some low-quality evidence, inconsistent by population, for therapeutic benefits for anxiety and depression.

Primary funding source: Colorado General Assembly, House Bill 21-1317

Source: https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40854216/

 

By Scott Wolchek –FOX 2 Detroit –  September 9, 2025 

As students return to classes, the DEA is on a mission to help prevent drug abuse on college campuses. 

Big picture view:

The Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) emphasized that prevention is key to ensuring the health and safety of the nation’s college students, and they are actively spreading that message. The DEA is teaming up with universities across Michigan and Ohio, reaching out to let them know that resources are available.

The focus is on drug awareness because many people between the ages of 18 and 25 are increasingly becoming statistics due to unfortunate overdoses. The DEA is particularly concerned about counterfeit pills, such as ecstasy, which may be laced with fentanyl. 

What they’re saying:

They report that 50% of the counterfeit pills they seize contain a lethal dose of fentanyl. The warning is clear: stop experimenting and stay safe.

“That behavior can lead a student to go online or social media or a weird part of town to obtain what they think is a study aid which might not contain anything but filler and caffeine or worse, fentanyl. We’re just letting our campuses know these pills are out there, and they’re readily available and dangerous,” said Brian McNeal. 

“Is this an age where you see people doing, like more drugs? Uh yeah, certainly. I think more and more this era of humanity is seeing an uptick in drug usage, but I mean it’s been used throughout time and memorium,” said college student Merrick.

Merrick mentioned that he himself had not encountered any of the counterfeit pill issues that the DEA is warning about. He expressed more concern about alcohol use on campus. 

The DEA representative told FOX 2 that while some people may not listen, it’s crucial to heed this advice: don’t take any pills unless you know where they came from, or they are prescribed to you.

With the fentanyl threats all around us, it’s vital to follow the advice being discussed.

Source: https://www.fox2detroit.com/news/dea-launches-drug-abuse-prevention-campaign-college-campuses-across-metro-detroit

The following 8 articles were grouped by David Evans, and published by DrugWatch International, to address the subject of cannabis use and how violent offenders can be seen to be marijuana users:

To access the full documents – for each item:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

 

  1. CANNABIS.AND.DOMESTIC.VIOLENCE
  2. CANNABIS.VIOLENCE.YOUNG ADULTS
  3. MARIJUANA INTIMATE PARTNER VIOLENCE
  4. MARIJUANA USE AND MASS VIOLENCE
  5. MARIJUANA.ADDICTION
  6. MARIJUANA.VIOLENCE.AND.LAW
  7. Violence Murder Murderers pot Mass Killers
  8. WEED.BLOWING.YOUNG.MENS’.MINDS

Source: www.drugwatch.org
drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com

7th September 2024
Substance abuse among children is a significant concern, with various studies indicating that it often begins from adolescence.

According to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, which is part of the United States National Institutes of Health, factors influencing drug use in children include peer pressure, mental health issues, and accessibility to substances.

It further noted that early exposure can lead to dependency and long-term health consequences.

Addressing your child’s substance abuse can be one of the most challenging and daunting experiences a parent or caregiver faces.

A recent study conducted by Samuel Bunu, Ronari Charles, Oyintari Charles, and Patricia Okafor on the assessment of teenagers’ involvement in drug and substance abuse in Nigeria showed a rapid increase in the unhealthy use of drugs among teenagers, with more than 66.50 per cent, including both males and females, engaging in the misuse of substances to enhance their physical activities and for other reasons.

To solve this problem, understanding the complexities of addiction and its impact on a young person’s life is crucial for effective intervention. Experts say it is important to approach the situation with empathy, patience, and a willingness to seek help.

Every child’s journey with substance use is unique, and recognising the signs early can significantly improve the chances of recovery.

Here are six ways to handle the situation if your child is struggling with substance abuse.

Sit them down and discuss

According to mental health practitioners, the first step for any parent or guardian is to sit the child down and discuss the adverse implications of substance abuse.

Experts agree that conducting joint research online or using the story of a known substance addict can help the child understand the impacts of substance abuse.

Behaviour analyst, Ibukunola Afolabi, said parents should remain calm during the conversation about substance abuse, noting that such discussions can prevent further crises that might worsen the addiction.

“When a child abusing substances feels heard by the parents, it can help the child reveal secrets that will assist in navigating the recovery process. Many children abusing substances often feel neglected or unheard of by their families, which is why they go along with the crowd.

The first step in handling a child with substance abuse is to sit down as a family and talk about it,” the expert said.

Go for family counselling

After having a heart-to-heart conversation with the child, a psychologist, Idris Abayomi, said parents should also enrol in counselling sessions to understand how to interact positively with the child. He said this would help prevent ill feelings between them and the child.

“To address dysfunctional dynamics, enhance communication, and support the child’s recovery, it is critical for the entire family to set an example and participate in thorough and continuous counselling sessions, in addition to involving a professional.

Long-term success may depend on positive family actions, as this fosters a supportive environment,” he said.

Invite an expert

Abayomi said professional help should be sought to address the underlying triggers of substance abuse. He explained that employing a mental health specialist for the child will support recovery efforts and create a nurturing environment.

“Cognitive behavioural therapy is one therapeutic strategy that can assist in addressing underlying difficulties, creating coping mechanisms,” he added.

Establish discipline

The psychologist further said parents should create a structured and supportive environment at home and establish clear rules and consequences related to substance use, while also providing positive reinforcement for healthy behaviours.

This will help the child understand that there are consequences for certain actions and rewards for good conduct.

He added that parents should “encourage the child to associate with peers who have a positive influence and allow them to join support groups.”

Afolabi also advised parents to reassess their values and rebuild character within the home. He said this would help reorient the child and other family members, leading them to adopt new morals and realign their lives for better living.

Never abandon them

Afolabi advised that when a child struggles with substance abuse, it is crucial for parents to provide consistent support and understanding, even in the face of setbacks.

“Abandoning the child during difficult times can increase feelings of shame and isolation, making recovery more challenging. Instead, parents should maintain open lines of communication, express unconditional love, and reinforce the idea that setbacks are part of the recovery journey,” she said.

Get medical help

Additionally, consulting a medical doctor for any complications arising from a child’s substance abuse is essential for their overall health and safety. Substance abuse can lead to various physical and mental health issues, including withdrawal symptoms and damage to vital organs. A healthcare professional can conduct comprehensive evaluations to identify any health complications and recommend appropriate treatments.

Source: https://punchng.com/6-ways-to-handle-a-child-with-substance-abuse/
Press Office, Media Relations – press-office@brunel.ac.uk

The UK’s science minister, Sir Patrick Vallance, has sounded the alarm over the country’s declining investment in medicines. He warned that the NHS risks losing out on important treatments and the country could lose its place at the cutting edge of medical research if spending does not recover. It comes at a sensitive time – this year drug-makers including Merck and AstraZeneca have backtracked on plans to invest in the UK.

Vallance is correct that there is a need to encourage pharmaceutical firms to keep investing and launching new medicines in the UK. On the other side, there is a need to protect public funds from being wasted on treatments that do not offer enough benefit for their cost.

At the moment, just 9% of NHS healthcare spending goes on medicines. This is less than Spain (18%), Germany (17%) and France (15%). At a time when some experts believe the UK is getting sicker, this might come as a surprise.

But the UK is unusual among major health systems in how carefully it regulates drug spending. The National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (Nice) has, since its creation, judged new treatments not only on clinical evidence but on cost-effectiveness.

That means asking whether a drug’s health benefits – measured in quality-adjusted life years (QALYs) – justify its price compared with existing care. For most treatments the threshold is about £20,000 to £30,000 per QALY. This is not a perfect measure, but it gives the NHS a consistent way of deciding whether the health gained is worth the money spent.

The value of this approach is clear. Nice’s record shows that medicines that pass its tests have added millions of QALYs to patients in England, while also preventing waste on drugs that bring only marginal improvements at high cost.

A study published earlier this year in medical journal The Lancet found that many of the new medicines recommended by Nice between 2000-2020 brought substantial benefit to patients. But it also noted that some high-cost drugs deliver much less health gain than investments in prevention or early diagnosis could.

The study emphasises that maintaining rigorous thresholds around cost-effectiveness ensures that public funds go to treatments that really improve lives. In other words, the discipline of cost-effectiveness has protected the public purse while ensuring access to genuine innovations.

This regulatory strength is reinforced by national pricing schemes for branded medicines. These cap overall growth in the NHS drugs bill and require companies to pay rebates if spending rises too fast. In practice, this means that if total spending on branded medicines exceeds an agreed annual limit, pharmaceutical companies must pay back a percentage of their sales revenue to the Department of Health.

In recent years that rebate rate has been as high as 20–26% of sales, effectively lowering the price the NHS pays. This is made possible by the buying power of the health service.

Together with Nice’s appraisals, these measures have helped the NHS maintain relatively low medicines spending compared with many countries. At the same time, it still secures access to major advances in cancer therapy, immunology and rare disease treatment.

For a publicly funded service under constant financial strain, these protections are vital. Despite the pressure on its budget, the NHS has secured meaningful access to new therapies. For example, by March 2024, nearly 100,000 patients in England – many of whom would otherwise face long delays or rejection – had benefited from early access via the Cancer Drugs Fund to more than 100 drugs across 250 conditions.

The balance with Big Pharma

However, strict controls on price and access can have unintended consequences. If companies see the UK as a low-return market, they may choose to launch new drugs elsewhere first, or to limit investment in research and early trials here.

There is a danger that patients could face delays in receiving new treatments. Or the scientific ecosystem, which relies on steady collaboration with industry, could weaken.

Still, the answer is not to abandon cost-effectiveness. Without it, the NHS would risk paying high prices for small gains. This would divert money from staff, diagnostics or prevention – areas that often bring more health benefit per pound spent.

In such cases, raising thresholds or relaxing scrutiny would do more harm than good. Cost-effectiveness is not just about saving money. It is about fairness, ensuring that treatments funded genuinely improve lives relative to their cost.

The challenge, then, is balance. The UK should continue to hold firm on value for money, while finding ways to encourage investment. That might mean improving the speed and clarity of Nice processes, so that companies know where they stand earlier and patients can access good drugs more quickly.

It could involve reviewing thresholds periodically to account for inflation and medical progress, without undermining the principle that treatments must show sufficient benefit. And it certainly means supporting research and development through stable partnerships with universities, tax incentives and grants.

What should not be underestimated is the UK’s scientific strength. The country remains home to world-class universities, skilled researchers and an innovative biotech sector. The rapid development of the Oxford–AstraZeneca COVID vaccine showed what UK science can deliver at scale and speed.

Pharmaceutical companies know this, and many – including AstraZeneca, GSK, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer, Johnson & Johnson and most recently Moderna – continue to invest in British labs and trials because of the talent and infrastructure. Danish firm Novo Nordisk has strengthened its ties with the University of Oxford, committing £18.5 million to fund 20 postdoctoral fellowships as part of its flagship research partnership.

The UK’s approach to assessing value has won respect internationally. That discipline must be preserved. Reversing the decline in investment means creating a predictable, transparent environment for industry while maintaining the protections that safeguard patients and taxpayers alike. If done well, the UK can continue to be both a responsible buyer of medicines and a world leader in science.

Source: https://www.brunel.ac.uk/news-and-events/news/articles/The-UK-must-invest-in-medicines

From open communication to community involvement, strategies help families tackle teenage substance abuse head-on

Teenage drug use remains one of the most pressing concerns for parents across America, with recent studies showing that experimentation often begins in middle school. While the challenge can feel overwhelming, experts agree that proactive parenting and strategic interventions make a significant difference in keeping teens away from harmful substances.

Establish open and judgment-free communication early

The foundation of drug prevention starts with creating an environment where teenagers feel comfortable discussing difficult topics. Parents who begin conversations about substances before experimentation occurs give their children the tools to make informed decisions when peer pressure arises.

Rather than waiting for a crisis, families should integrate these discussions into everyday life. Talking about news stories, television shows or situations involving drugs provides natural opportunities to explore consequences and share values without making teens feel interrogated or lectured.

Research consistently shows that adolescents who believe their parents would be extremely upset by drug use are less likely to experiment. However, this doesn’t mean ruling through fear. The key lies in expressing genuine concern while maintaining an open door for honest conversations, even when mistakes happen.

Creating this safe space means responding thoughtfully rather than reactively. When teens share information about their peers or express curiosity about substances, parents who listen first and lecture less build trust that pays long-term dividends.

Monitor activities while respecting growing independence

Effective supervision doesn’t mean helicopter parenting or invading privacy at every turn. Instead, it involves knowing where teenagers spend their time, who their friends are and what activities fill their schedules.

Parents should maintain relationships with other families in their teen’s social circle. This network provides valuable perspective on group dynamics and allows adults to coordinate supervision during gatherings and events. When multiple families share expectations about substance-free environments, teens receive consistent messages across their social sphere.

Setting clear boundaries about unsupervised time, particularly during high-risk periods like after school and late evenings, helps reduce opportunities for experimentation. Studies indicate that teens with structured activities and parental awareness of their whereabouts show lower rates of drug use compared to those with minimal oversight.

Technology offers both challenges and solutions in this arena. While social media can expose teens to drug culture, monitoring apps and parental controls provide tools for staying informed without constant confrontation. The balance lies in being present and aware without becoming invasive or controlling.

Build strong connections with schools and communities

Prevention extends far beyond the home. Partnering with schools, coaches, religious organizations and community programs creates a comprehensive support system that reinforces anti-drug messages.

Parents should actively engage with school counselors and administrators to understand prevention programs and warning signs staff might observe. Many schools offer parent education nights focused on substance abuse, providing current information about trends and available resources.

Encouraging participation in extracurricular activities gives teenagers positive outlets for stress and belonging. Whether through sports, arts, volunteering or clubs, structured programs fill time productively while connecting teens with positive role models and peer groups.

Community-based prevention programs often provide peer support groups where teens can discuss challenges with others facing similar pressures. These programs normalize the choice to remain substance-free and demonstrate that saying no doesn’t mean social isolation.

Recognize warning signs and seek professional help early

Even with strong prevention efforts, some teenagers experiment with drugs. Early intervention dramatically improves outcomes, making it essential for parents to recognize warning signs without dismissing concerning changes as typical adolescent behavior.

Significant shifts in friend groups, declining academic performance, changes in sleep patterns, unexplained money issues or loss of interest in previously enjoyed activities warrant attention. Physical signs like bloodshot eyes, unusual smells or coordination problems shouldn’t be ignored.

When concerns arise, parents should consult with pediatricians, school counselors or addiction specialists promptly. These professionals can assess whether experimentation has progressed to problematic use and recommend appropriate interventions.

Many families hesitate to seek help due to stigma or hoping issues will resolve independently. However, substance abuse disorders respond better to early treatment, and waiting often allows problems to deepen. Professional support provides families with strategies tailored to their specific situation while offering teenagers therapeutic tools for addressing underlying issues driving substance use.

Source: https://rollingout.com/2025/10/13/ways-parents-protect-teens-from-drugs/

guardin-logo

 By : Ijeoma Nwanosike –  16 Oct 2025

Experts and policymakers have called on Nigeria to harness technology not only as a tool for innovation but also as a means of combating drug and substance abuse, particularly among young people increasingly exposed to both digital and chemical dependencies.

The call was made at the seventh National Conference and yearly General Meeting of the International Society of Substance Use Professionals (ISSUP) Nigeria, held at the Lagos Chamber of Commerce and Industry (LCCI), Lagos, with the theme: “Impact of Technology on Addiction: Innovations in Prevention, Treatment, Advocacy, and Research.”

Delivering the keynote address, Director of Research, Training and Head of the Drug Abuse Unit at the Neuropsychiatric Hospital, Aro, Dr Sunday Amosu, described technology as a paradox, a force for progress and, simultaneously, a trigger for new forms of addiction.

He observed that while digital tools have expanded access to healthcare and prevention resources, they have also intensified compulsive behaviours, particularly among youth navigating the pressures of modern life.

“Technology can be a double-edged sword. The same innovation that helps us track recovery and connect patients to help can also fuel gaming, gambling, and social media addictions. Our task is to strike a balance, leveraging tech for good while mitigating its harms,” Amosu said.

Representing the Minister of Youth Development, Ayodele Olawande, the Senior Technical Adviser on Youth Health and Policy Research, Dr Obinna Chinonso, commended ISSUP Nigeria for sustaining national dialogue on addiction and mental health.

He reaffirmed the government’s commitment to addressing drug and substance use among the youth, who constitute nearly 70 per cent of Nigeria’s population.

“When a young person falls into addiction, whether to drugs, alcohol, or technology, they are robbed of the clarity and creativity needed to seize available opportunities,” he said.

Chinonso outlined several initiatives, including the YoHealth Initiative, a youth-focused programme that prioritises mental health and substance abuse prevention.

He also announced the establishment of a technical working group bringing together government agencies, development partners, and civil society to strengthen preventive interventions.

He added that the ministry would collaborate with ISSUP Nigeria and other stakeholders on national sensitisation campaigns, including the forthcoming Sensitisation Against Drug Abuse, Crime, and HIV Parliament Course, in partnership with the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), the National Drug Law Enforcement Agency (NDLEA), and the National Agency for the Control of AIDS (NACA).

In his remarks, President of ISSUP Nigeria, Dr Martin Agwogie, reaffirmed the organisation’s commitment to building professional capacity and promoting cross-sector collaboration to reduce drug demand.

According to him, sustainable prevention “goes beyond rhetoric” and requires systems that integrate community participation, youth engagement, and mental health support at all levels.

Chairman of ISSUP’s Board of Trustees and chief host of the event, Prof. Musa Wakil, commended the collaborative spirit of the conference, describing it as “a critical moment for aligning Africa’s response to addiction with global trends in digital health and behavioural science.”

As Nigeria faces the growing challenge of both drug and technology-related addictions, participants agreed that the future of prevention lies not only in policy but in rethinking how technology itself can be repurposed as part of the solution.

Source: https://guardian.ng/features/health/experts-policymakers-seek-tech-driven-solutions-to-combat-drug-abuse/

 

The UK government has launched a new campaign to alert young people to the dangers of ketamine, counterfeit medicines and adulterated THC vapes.
  • New campaign to alert young people to the dangers of ketamine, counterfeit medicines and adulterated THC vapes
  • Ketamine use and drug poisonings highest on record with 8 times more people seeking treatment since 2015
  • Government investing £310 million into drug treatment services alongside awareness campaign

Young people are being warned that they risk irreparable bladder damage, poisoning and even death if they take ketamine, synthetic opioids or deliberately contaminated THC vapes, as part of a new anti-drugs campaign.

Launching today (16 October 2025), the campaign, which includes online films, will target 16 to 24 years olds and social media users, following a worrying rise in the number of young people being harmed by drugs. There has been an eight-fold increase in the number of people requiring treatment for ketamine since 2015.

Supported by £310 million investment in drug treatment services, this initiative directly supports the government’s Plan for Change mission to create safer streets by reducing serious harm and protecting communities from emerging drug threats.

Health Minister Ashley Dalton said:

Young people don’t always realise the decision to take drugs such as ketamine can have profound effects. It can destroy your bladder and even end your life.

We’ve seen a worrying rise in people coming to harm from ketamine as well as deliberately contaminated THC vapes and synthetic opioids hidden in fake medicines bought online.

Prevention is at the heart of this government’s approach to tackling drugs and this campaign will ensure young people have the facts they need to make informed decisions about their health and safety, so they think twice about putting themselves in danger.

As part of the campaign, experts will highlight particular risks, including the:

  • potentially irreparable damage ketamine can cause to your bladder
  • dangers of counterfeit medicines containing deadly synthetic opioids purchased online
  • risks from so-called ‘THC vapes’ that often contain dangerous synthetic cannabinoids like spice rather than THC

Resources will be available for schools, universities and local public health teams with content available on FRANK, the drug information website.

There are growing concerns about novel synthetic opioids, particularly nitazenes, which are increasingly appearing in counterfeit medicines sold through illegitimate online sources. Users purchasing these products are typically younger and more drug-naïve.

Reports of harms from THC vapes have also increased, with many products containing synthetic cannabinoids (commonly known as ‘spice’) that have higher potency and unpredictable effects.

Katy Porter, CEO, The Loop, said:

The Loop welcomes the further investment in evidence-based approaches and support to reduce drug-related harm.

Providing accurate, non-judgemental information equips and empowers people to make safer choices and can help reduce preventable harms.

Drug poisoning deaths reached 5,448 in England and Wales in 2023, the highest number since records began in 1993. The campaign emphasises that while complete safety requires avoiding drug use altogether, those who may still use substances should be aware of the risks and know how to access help and support.

The campaign underlines that ketamine’s medical applications do not make illicit use safe, with urologists increasingly concerned about young people presenting with severe bladder problems from recreational ketamine use.

Resources will be distributed to local public health teams, drug and alcohol treatment services, youth services, schools and universities. The campaign provides clear information on accessing help and support for those experiencing drug-related problems or mental health issues.

This year the Department of Health and Social Care is also providing £310 million in additional targeted grants to improve drug and alcohol treatment services and recovery support in England, including specialist services for children and young people.

For information and support on drug-related issues, visit www.talktofrank.com or call the FRANK helpline on 0300 123 6600.

Background information

How to watch this YouTube videoThere’s a YouTube video on this page. You can’t access it because of your cookie settings.You can change your cookie settings or watch the video on YouTube instead:Ket: while each high lasts minutes, for some the damage to their bladder could last forever

How to watch this YouTube videoThere’s a YouTube video on this page. You can’t access it because of your cookie settings.You can change your cookie settings or watch the video on YouTube instead:Synthetic opioids: what are they and why are they so dangerous?

Additional resources for professionals and educators will be available through local public health networks.

The £310 million additional funding for drug treatment services is separate from the public health grant.

Source: https://www.gov.uk/government/news/young-people-given-stark-warning-on-deadly-risks-of-taking-drugs

 

17 October 2025

Sleep is essential for human survival; it affects an individual’s physical and mental health. Although the amount of sleep required varies throughout a person’s lifetime, the quality of it remains essential. Quality sleep restores the body, consolidates memories, supports emotional regulation, and plays a key role in maintaining the immune system. When sleep quality is compromised—such as in cases of insomnia—it can significantly disrupt daily life, prompting many to seek alternative remedies for relief.

One substance often misrepresented as a sleep aid is marijuana; however, research consistently shows that tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) interferes with the very sleep processes it claims to improve. A recent randomized controlled trial examining the effects of a single dose of THC and cannabidiol (CBD), the two primary compounds in marijuana, on individuals with clinical insomnia raised serious concerns about using marijuana as a treatment for sleep problems.

THC and REM sleep

In this study, those who took a one-time dose of 10mg of THC and 20mg of CBD experienced significantly less total sleep time and spent less time in rapid eye movement (REM) sleep, the phase associated with dreaming, emotional processing and memory consolidation, supporting previous research that pointed to THC disrupting deep REM sleep. THC also disrupted restorative stages, meaning that individuals may fall asleep faster but may never get the kind of sleep the body truly needs.

Those who took this THC and CBD combination also took about an hour longer to reach REM sleep compared to placebo. Studies have shown that the suppression of REM sleep can have long term consequences. While in this study a single dose did not affect next-day function, researchers cautioned that regular use may lead to tolerance and eventual withdrawal symptoms that could lead to worse quality sleep over time. Withdrawal from marijuana can also cause more sleep issues that may lead to relapse, adding challenges for people struggling with substance use or mental health.

While CBD is often marketed as the “calming” component of marijuana, in this formulation it may have intensified THC’s effects due to unknown metabolizing processes of both substances together. As marijuana and CBD products become more widely available and socially accepted—often under misleading claims—more people may turn to them as “natural” sleep remedies. However, as this study underscores, natural does not necessarily mean safe or effective. Just because something is derived from a plant does not mean it is harmless or beneficial.

Source: Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Ave N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

 

Kateena Haynes’s smile warms the room as she weaves through playing children at her feet to get to the computer room, chatting with staff as she goes. There, the walls are lined with desktop computers for kids to do their homework. A few minutes later, walking around back under the hot Appalachian sun, she notes the outstanding construction tasks for the new Boys & Girls Club gymnasium, which would officially open later that year, and beams at the progress. Haynes runs the youth development center in Harlan, Kentucky, but even if you didn’t know her official title, you’d quickly figure out that she’s the heart of this place.

During the winter of 2010, 13 of the approximately 60 kids in the Boys & Girls Club of Appalachia had a parent die of a drug overdose. One was a young girl whose father had just returned from prison and asked her to inject opioids into his arm. She said no, knowing he had already had too much.

“He wound up getting out and coming back home and overdosing in the bed with his daughter in the bed with him,” Haynes said in a 2024 interview with Encyclopaedia Britannica.

From opium to Oxy: How history set the stage for the opioid epidemic

According to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), more than 800,000 Americans died of opioid overdoses between 1999 and 2023. The drug that drove the initial phase of the epidemic was OxyContin, or oxycodone hydrochloride, a narcotic painkiller that can produce a euphoria similar to that of heroin. For its part in producing and distributing OxyContin, pharmaceutical giant Purdue Pharma agreed in 2025 to pay $7.4 billion to all 50 U.S. states, Washington, D.C., and four federal territories. Harlan is expected to receive at least $10 million over 18 years to establish treatment, recovery, and prevention efforts throughout the community.

In the complex evolution from the opium plant to widespread synthetic opioids, the 19th century was a critical turning point. American dental surgeon William Thomas Green Morton first demonstrated opioids’ use for anesthetic purposes when combined with ether in 1846, not long after the popular and wildly powerful pain medications morphine and codeine were isolated from opium. These drugs were widely available and could be used without a prescription. Then in the latter half of the century, heroin was synthesized; it also didn’t require a prescription until 1914.

Before 1874 all opium-related drugs were considered natural opioids. Heroin, synthesized via chemical manipulation of natural opium, was the first in a class of semisynthetic opioids. It is much more powerful than natural opioids—and much more addictive. Though heroin would be a scourge for the second half of the 20th century, the perilous power of morphine dominated the first half.

Learn more about the difference between opioids and opiates.

In 1929 the National Research Council’s Committee on Drug Addiction was created with a very specific first target: morphine. While their researchers were at work on understanding addiction and regulating the use of morphine, meperidine, the first entirely synthetic opioid, was created, ushering in a new era of increasingly potent drugs that carry massive overdose risks. At the same time access to other addictive opioids became more common. While the early-to-mid-20th century brought the use of hydromorphone and hydrocodone for pre- and postoperative pain, the distribution of opioids entered a new era in World War II.

The U.S. gave members of its military medical kits that each included single-use morphine injections to provide pain relief to injured troops waiting for advanced medical personnel. Though they had labels that read “Warning: May be habit-forming,” those labels far understated the drug’s addictive potential. After the war some medical kits were sold or stolen by those seeking morphine doses, and others who’d become addicted turned to heroin when morphine wasn’t available.

In 1947 the Committee on Drug Addiction and Narcotics was established, revamping the effort begun in the 1920s. This renewed focus on controlling the manufacture and distribution of drugs was, in part, spurred by the creation by German researchers of methadone. Methadone had shown potential to mitigate symptoms of opioid withdrawal, a potential that had yet to be fully realized. Though research funding began to trickle in, progress stalled as no stream of financial support was established until the 1960s.

That decade was known for massive societal shifts in the United States driven by the civil rights movement, feminist advocacy, and the rise of a distinct counterculture grounded in the questioning of long-held beliefs. For some, this attitude of rebellion led them to try—and in some cases become dependent on—illicit drugs. The increased use of marijuana, LSD, and eventually cocaine, heroin, and amphetamines led to crackdowns on pharmacies that distributed these drugs as well as a greater focus on prevention and treatment.

In 1962 the White House Conference on Narcotic and Drug Abuse was convened with the goal of determining how to better collect data about drug use, how to manage the use of both narcotic and nonnarcotic drugs, and what treatments could help those facing addiction. That year federally funded mental health centers were established nationally.

The next major move, the Controlled Narcotics Act of 1970, sorted drugs into five schedules, or categories, based on addictive potential and harmfulness, as well as their medical utility. Heroin, which had a spike in use in the late 1960s and early ’70s, was classified as a Schedule I drug, meaning it had a high potential for addiction and no accepted medical use. Cocaine was labeled a Schedule II drug, meaning it had some medical utility. Despite growing attention throughout the presidencies of John F. Kennedy and Lyndon B. Johnson, the official War on Drugs was not launched until 1971, when Pres. Richard Nixon declared “drug abuse” to be “public enemy number one.” The Drug Abuse Council was founded the same year, as the result of the Ford Foundation’s research, and helped to provide funding for research through 1978.

Initially the War on Drugs was praised as a long-awaited intervention for a serious public safety issue, but in hindsight many have called the effort a failure, both ethically and politically. Even with increased attention on the country’s drug problem, the use of crack cocaine soared throughout the 1980s. It was affordable and provided quick access to euphoria, and its ability to be smoked allowed people to receive smaller portions—all of which made it more cost-effective than powder cocaine, which has historically been seen as a symbol of wealth.

Instead of going after large dealers or manufacturers, Nixon’s War on Drugs led to mass incarceration because it targeted people selling relatively small quantities of drugs, which often meant prison time for young Black men in urban areas who were charged with low-level drug offenses. The War on Drugs also brought the use of mandatory minimum sentences, which disproportionately affected Black communities. Those found with five grams of crack cocaine received a mandatory five-year prison sentence. It took 100 times that amount of powder cocaine to earn the same sentence, meaning that a high-level powder dealer could receive a lesser punishment than a low-level crack dealer. Though statistics show that overall drug use is similar between white and Black communities, four in five crack cocaine users were Black. Nixon’s former White House counsel, John Ehrlichman, gave an interview in 1994 in which he explained the intentional targeting of these communities:

The Nixon campaign in 1968, and the Nixon White House after that, had two enemies: the antiwar left and black people.… We knew we couldn’t make it illegal to be either against the war or black, but by getting the public to associate the hippies with marijuana and blacks with heroin, and then criminalizing both heavily, we could disrupt those communities. We could arrest their leaders, raid their homes, break up their meetings, and vilify them night after night on the evening news. Did we know we were lying about the drugs? Of course we did.

Today many see the War on Drugs as having meted out the disproportionate impact of incarceration on historically underserved communities—a pattern that the quickly emerging opioid epidemic would only exacerbate. While the War on Drugs perpetuated stereotypes about Black communities, public response to the opioid epidemic capitalized on and furthered derogatory caricatures of rural white communities before the epidemic spread to all corners of the country.

As cocaine use grew across the United States, so did addiction. The number of cocaine users increased by approximately 1.6 million people between 1982 and 1985 alone. So when Purdue Pharma’s OxyContin (its brand name for oxycodone) was approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) in December 1995, concerns about drug addiction were prevalent—which made Purdue Pharma’s marketing of OxyContin as less addictive all the more appealing, even if it wasn’t true.

The epidemic

The major problem with OxyContin extended beyond the drug itself. In fact, studies at the time of its release showed that it wasn’t more effective than other opioid analgesics on the market. What set OxyContin apart and led to the opioid epidemic was the marketing and publicity around it.

In the five years after the FDA approved OxyContin, Purdue Pharma trained more than 5,000 medical professionals at all-expenses-paid conferences, often in resort locations, to aggressively promote the drug. While there, these clinicians were trained and recruited for a Purdue Pharma speaker’s bureau that encouraged promoting OxyContin use to colleagues in environments such as grand round presentations in hospitals. The company studied physicians’ prescribing patterns in order to better tailor their sales pitch to individual doctors—especially those with the highest rates of opioid prescriptions. Though this strategy was not unique, the amount of money spent on incentives and aggressive, misleading marketing campaigns were distinctive. The company spent $200 million in 2001 alone marketing OxyContin. Sales representatives also earned bonuses that sometimes outweighed their annually salary, incentivizing them to find physicians who would overprescribe the medication.

Before this period opioids had traditionally been reserved for severe acute pain, used in the palliative care of cancer patients, for example. But Purdue Pharma’s marketing focused on expanding the conditions for which doctors would prescribe OxyContin, leading to a tenfold increase in prescriptions for pain unrelated to cancer in just five years.

This gave rise to the targeting of rural areas such as Harlan. Mining and logging in these regions often led to workplace injuries, making them hotbeds for marketing of pain relief medications. Still, that wasn’t all that made Appalachian communities vulnerable. Since the 1990s Harlan had struggled with addiction and unemployment as the coal industry declined, with more than 25 percent of Harlan county’s population of about 25,000 falling below the poverty line as of 2025. As feelings of hopelessness spread, so did the drug epidemic.

Tom Vicini, president and CEO of Kentucky drug prevention and recovery organization Operation UNITE, explained in a 2024 interview with Encyclopaedia Britannica how this can happen. In early drug roundups law enforcement discovered that people selling opioids in the area needed money to feed their addiction, he said. If they were able to buy and resell others’ prescriptions, both parties could potentially make a profit off the drug.

Why is OxyContin called “hillbilly heroin”?

As the opioid epidemic spread, it quickly became associated with Appalachian communities. Hillbilly is a pejorative term used to describe those living in often low-income rural communities in the Appalachian Mountains. Given that OxyContin had overtaken both heroin and cocaine in becoming the new face of the drug crisis, it was often referred to as “hillbilly heroin” by national media outlets.

Though there is evidence that marketing of OxyContin may have been less aggressive in cities, they were far from immune. Doctors in New York City and other large metropolitan areas received funding from opioid giants and in turn promoted their products as a gold standard for pain relief. And with TV and other advertisements repeating claims of a 1 percent addiction rate, OxyContin advertising appealed to both new patients and longtime chronic pain sufferers. As the country would learn, the actual rate of addiction is much, much higher, with some researchers reporting it as high as 26 percent.

According to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, prescriptions were the most common entry to opioid addiction throughout the 1990s and 2000s—up to 75 percent of all addictions began this way. And prescriptions became more prevalent: Annual opioid prescriptions grew from between 2 and 3 million in 1990 to 11 million by 1999. Even as the addictive potential of OxyContin was publicized, other pharmaceutical companies followed suit in manufacturing generic or brand name pills, including the firms Johnson & Johnson, Endo, Teva, and Allergan. By the 21st century, Purdue Pharma alone had made $1.1 billion in OxyContin sales, more than 20 times the sales of 1996.

With the War on Drugs rhetoric weighing heavily on people’s minds, there is intense stigma associated with drug use and dependency. Through the 1990s and 2000s, the public began to shift from viewing addiction as a moral failing to seeing it as a disease—but this change has been gradual. For some the spread of addiction to all corners of the country, including to cities’ most “elite” residents, prompted this change. Highly publicized deaths involving opioid overdoses—including that of Australian actor Heath Ledger, which was caused by an accidental overdose of a mix of oxycodone and other drugs—further influenced public perception, leading to a renewed awareness of the addictive potential of prescription drugs. Although drug overdoses have long plagued Hollywood, Ledger’s death hit the public differently in light of the rising opioid crisis, especially given OxyContin’s role in his death.

Despite shifting attitudes on the subject, a 2017 study by researchers from Johns Hopkins University found that nearly four in five people think that those struggling with addiction are themselves at fault. Stigma and feelings of shame not only incentivize individuas to hide their addiction, but it can also keep many people from getting help by generating of a network of barriers. Structural stigma, for example, includes negative views held by society that influence the creation of policies that discriminate against those struggling with addiction, such as limiting the development of local treatment centers and the availability of medication for opioid use disorder (MOUD), reducing access to quality care. Self-stigma is internalized shame that can prevent someone from seeking treatment, either because they do not feel they deserve help, are embarrassed about their addiction, or because they lack systems of support.

Long after the opioid epidemic was widely recognized in the early 2000s, rates of opioid overdoses continued an unbridled rise across the country, reaching a peak during the COVID-19 pandemic and its aftermath. In 2022 more than 81,000 Americans lost their lives to opioid overdose, likely because of interruptions in treatment and psychological hardships caused by isolation, boredom, illness, or loss of work. This was especially prominent in people 20 to 39 years old, with opioid overdoses causing more than 20 percent of overall deaths in this age group in 2022, according to a study in The Lancet. Overdoses were the largest accidental cause of death for this cohort.

The physical withdrawal symptoms associated with quitting opioids make it hard to recover from opioid use disorder. Withdrawal can range from extreme physical symptoms such as vomiting and muscle spasms to emotional symptoms such as anxiety and depression. To help people recover, there has been a growing movement to make MOUD accessible.

MOUD includes methadone, buprenorphine, and naltrexone—with the former two considered by the World Health Organization to be “essential medicines” to treat opioid use disorder. MOUD normalizes neural chemistry and blocks the euphoria of opioids and is often paired with behavioral therapy to provide a comprehensive treatment plan that addresses both the physical and psychological effects of addiction and withdrawal.

That doesn’t mean these two approaches are mutually exclusive—in fact, many people rely on multipronged approaches to treatment and community support to recover from drug addiction. In Harlan numerous peer support specialists come from their day jobs to support AA or NA group meetings, which are held every evening in a building just down the alleyway bordering a bank.

Though significant gaps still remain, the shift in understanding opioid use as a public health epidemic rather than a personal moral failing has ultimately advanced the accessibility of recovery care across the country. But meeting the urgent need for support also requires funding—and there were companies that made a lot of money as a result of mass addiction and suffering.

Lawsuits and repairing communities

Large-scale lawsuits, often initiated by state attorneys general, began in the early 2000s, when West Virginia claimed that Purdue Pharma had misled medical professionals about the addictive potential of OxyContin in their aggressive marketing of the drug. The company admitted no fault but chose to settle, paying $10 million to the state over four years, to be used for drug recovery and prevention services.

That was just the beginning. In 2007 Purdue Pharma and three of the company’s top executives were fined a total of $634 million for lying to the public about OxyContin’s risk of addiction. Later that year Kentucky sued the company, and they eventually settled, with Purdue agreeing to pay $24 million to the state. But there was a pivotal clause in that agreement: The judge granted a request to unseal the court documents, making Purdue Pharma’s strategies public and unveiling the marketing strategies that propelled the spread of addiction.

Over the next decade a series of other high-profile cases involving Purdue Pharma were settled. They were brought by state and federal governments alike, including one suit brought by Canada that took more than a decade to settle, with the company ultimately agreeing to pay $20 million to individuals and health providers. Purdue Pharma declared bankruptcy in 2019.

No single settlement was as large as the $7.4 billion agreement Purdue Pharma reached with all 50 states, Washington D.C., and four U.S. territories in June 2025, to be paid out over 15 years to support prevention, treatment, and recovery programs. This resolution to pending lawsuits came just a year after the U.S. Supreme Court overturned what would have been a $6 billion settlement paid out to state and local governments. A large portion of the $7.4 billion is to come from the Sackler family, the former owners of Purdue Pharma.

Although the bell can’t be unrung, there is a breadth of research about how best to invest these abatement funds—and early evidence shows the funding may be helping to change the future of the opioid crisis. In the United States deaths from drug overdoses decreased approximately 27 percent in 2024 from the year prior, with opioid-related overdose deaths dropping by 30,365 cases. One of the states most exemplary of this change is Kentucky, where overdose deaths decreased more than 30 percent the same year.

In Harlan these abatement funds have been used to establish a position for a case manager and advocate for Casey’s Law, which allows family or friends to commit to treatment a loved one struggling with addiction. Van Ingram, executive director for the Kentucky Office of Drug Control Policy, told Encyclopaedia Britannica that there are more mental health resources now than ever, but that there’s never enough—not just in Harlan County, but in rural America as a whole.

What is Casey’s Law?

Officially known as the Matthew Casey Wethington Act for Substance Abuse Intervention, Casey’s Law was passed by Kentucky legislators in 2004 to allow relatives or friends of someone struggling with drug addiction to petition the court for that person to be involuntarily entered into a treatment program. The decision to admit someone to treatment without their consent remains a controversial subject, and many in the recovery space believe that someone must choose to enter recovery and cannot be forced into it. Before Casey’s Law was enacted, there was no way to force an adult to get help unless they committed a crime and were required by the court to enter treatment. The law is named for 23-year-old Casey Wethington, who died of a heroin overdose in 2002. His family believed his death could have been prevented if there had been another route to court-mandated treatment.

As Haynes, CEO of the Boys & Girls Club of Appalachia, and others work to provide mental health resources for their community, Ingram said he is impressed by the growth of Harlan’s recovery community.

Said Haynes: “We started a counseling program, grief counseling, before it actually became a program of Boys and Girls Clubs of America. We were doing it first because the need was there, and we couldn’t wait for them to develop a curriculum.”

Haynes and her colleagues developed a protocol for the kids if a relative died, taking them out to dinner and keeping them occupied while the family managed funeral arrangements.

She tries to mentor these children and give them opportunities that level the playing field, Haynes told Encyclopaedia Britannica: “It’s hard for some people to see beyond these mountains…especially these kids, who are seeing their parents use drugs, and they’re just hopeless.”

Simultaneously, other Harlan organizations have been working on prevention. Both Vicini and Haynes go into schools to provide education about drugs and addiction, as well as opportunities such as field trips and mentoring partnerships to keep kids engaged in their own futures.

The city’s small size enabled the opioid epidemic to spread quickly, but the intimate, close-knit relationships that the community provides have also allowed it to be a safe haven for many, including some who came there for recovery and never left.

With a combination of local efforts led by the city’s drug court and various recovery programs, including some focused on job reentry, Harlan has become an example of what an engaged recovery community can look like—and advocates believe that overdose rates are declining because of it.

Overdoses are decreasing on the national level, as well. According to a study published in the Journal of the American Medical Association, 2023 marked the beginning of “a new wave of sustained deceleration [in overdose rates]…after 2 decades of increase.”

The new wave: Dangers of fentanyl

The epidemic entered a new—and perhaps even deadlier—phase with the introduction of fentanyl. Though it has been around since 1959 as a pain reliever, illicitly manufactured fentanyl has grown increasingly popular since it became a major part of the U. S. illegal drug market in 2013. Drugs such as methamphetamines or cocaine are increasingly laced with fentanyl. In 2022, 6 out of every 10 of the millions of fentanyl-laced fake prescription pills collected by the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) contained a potentially lethal amount of the opioid, up 50 percent from the year before. Though a small segment of people who use drugs seek out fentanyl, many of those buying laced pills are unaware of its presence until it is too late.

Fentanyl is the one of the most potent pharmaceutical opioids and is 100 times more powerful than morphine. A dose of the drug equivalent to just five to seven grains of salt can be lethal, which is partially why it’s responsible for 70 percent of overdose-related deaths. And growing numbers of illegally obtained drugs are laced with fentanyl because its potency allows smaller doses of the pure drug to be sold while providing the same level of euphoria and even higher addictive potential, increasing both profits and demand. Even if it puts customers in danger, the money outweighs the risk for some sellers.

In a February 2025 U.S. Senate hearing, Sen. Dick Durbin of Illinois spoke about the growing risk of fentanyl:

In just a decade this synthetic opioid [fentanyl] has emerged as the deadliest drug in American history. All it takes is two milligrams—that’s a fraction of the size of a penny—to cause an overdose. It is so cheap that dealers are lacing lethal amounts into street drugs like cocaine and heroin, and their buyers are none the wiser.

Yet if communities can harness the growing concern about fentanyl for change, it may give a second chance to those struggling with substance use disorder. Since 2022 Harlan county has held an annual drug summit to bring together more than two dozen exhibitors with a focus on continuing to bring down overdose rates, even in the face of fentanyl.

Along with increased efforts to provide those struggling with addiction transitional housing, reemployment, and improved treatment accessibility, Harlan and other communities hit hard by opioids have another key tool: love.

“There’s people that came here for treatment and never left, because they were loved,” said Dan Mosley, Harlan county judge executive. “That’s truly what makes our place special.”

Source: https://www.britannica.com/topic/How-the-Opioid-Crisis-Devasted-Families-Communities-and-Ultimately-a-Country

 

Press Release – Washington, DCOctober 09, 2025

A popular class of therapies for treating diabetes and obesity may also have the potential to treat alcohol and drug addiction, according to a new paper published in the Journal of the Endocrine Society.

The therapies, known as Glucagon-Like Peptide-1 Receptor Agonists (GLP-1RAs), present an encouraging approach to treating alcohol and other substance use disorders.

“Early research in both animals and humans suggests that these treatments may help reduce alcohol and other substance use,” said lead researcher Lorenzo Leggio, M.D., Ph.D., of the National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA) and the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (NIAAA), both part of the National Institutes of Health (NIH) in Bethesda, Md. “Some small clinical trials have also shown encouraging results.”

Current Treatment Options Are Limited

Substance use disorders are diagnosed based on criteria that can be grouped into four categories: physical dependence, risky use, social problems, and impaired control.

The negative consequences of substance use disorders represent a global problem, affecting individuals, families, communities, and societal health at large. For instance, research indicates that alcohol is the most harmful drug, with consequences that extend beyond individual health to include related car accidents as well as gun and domestic violence, researchers note.

Despite the high prevalence and consequences of alcohol and other substance use disorders, less than a quarter of people received treatment in 2023.

Underutilization is due to a variety of barriers at the patient, clinician, and organizational levels, not the least of which is the stigma associated with substance use disorders, according to the study. “Current treatments for [alcohol and other substance use disorders] fall short of addressing public health needs,” the researchers wrote.

GLP-1s and Their Potential to Treat Addiction

GLP-1 therapies have gained widespread renown in recent years for their ability to address obesity and significantly reduce weight.

In addition to its inhibitory effects on gastrointestinal systems, GLP-1 has key functions in the central nervous system, the study notes. Among them, GLP-1R activation within the central nervous system curbs appetite and encourages individuals to eat when hungry and stop eating when they are full.

Some forms of obesity have been shown to present biochemical characteristics that resemble addiction, including neurocircuitry mechanisms, the study says, acknowledging that such conclusions are controversial.

“Pathways implicated in addiction also contribute to pathological overeating and obesity,” the study says.

With this pathway in mind, researchers in recent years have looked at GLP-1s as a potential therapy to address substance use disorders. Preclinical and early clinical investigations suggest that GLP-1 therapies modulate neurobiological pathways underlying addictive behaviors, thereby potentially reducing substance craving/use while simultaneously addressing comorbid conditions.

Studies that examine GLP-1 effects on substance use disorders include:

  • Alcohol use disorder (AUD): A randomized controlled trial with exenatide, the first GLP-1receptor agonist approved for diabetes, showed no significant effect on alcohol consumption, although a secondary analysis indicated reduced alcohol intake in the subgroup of people with AUD and comorbid obesity. A more recent randomized controlled trial showed that low-dose semaglutide — a newer GLP-1 receptor agonist approved for both diabetes and obesity —reduced laboratory alcohol self-administration, as well as drinks per drinking days and craving, in people with AUD.
  • Opioid use disorder: In rodent models, several GLP-1 receptor agonists have been shown to reduce self-administration of heroin, fentanyl and oxycodone. The studies also found that these medications reduce reinstatement of drug seeking, a rodent model of relapse in drug addiction.
  • Tobacco use disorder: Preclinical data show that GLP-1 receptor agonists reduce nicotine self-administration, reinstatement of nicotine seeking, and other nicotine-related outcomes in rodents. Initial clinical trials suggest the potential for these medications to reduce cigarettes per day and prevent weight gain that often follows smoking cessation. 

Leggio and his colleagues caution that more and larger studies are needed to confirm how well these treatments work. Additional studies will help unveil the mechanisms underlying GLP-1 therapies in relation to addictive behaviors and substance use.

But that hasn’t dampened the optimism for these therapies to address the serious problems found in substance use disorders.

“This research is very important because alcohol and drug addiction are major causes of illness and death, yet there are still only a few effective treatment options,” Leggio said. “Finding new and better treatments is critically important to help people live healthier lives.”

Other study authors are Nirupam M. Srinivasan of the University of Galway in Galway, Ireland; Mehdi Farokhnia of NIDA and NIAAA; Lisa A. Farinelli of NIDA; and Anna Ferrulli of the University of Milan and Istituto di Ricovero e Cura a Carattere Scientifico (IRCCS) MultiMedica in Milan, Italy.

Research reported in this press release was supported in part by NIDA and NIAAA. The content is solely the responsibility of the authors and does not necessarily represent the official views of the NIH.

Source: https://www.endocrine.org/news-and-advocacy/news-room/2025/glp1s-show-promise-in-treating-alcohol-and-drug-addiction

by Gabrielle Humphreys &  Natalie Finch – BMC (BioMedCentral) –

Abstract

Background

Lived experience recovery organisations (LEROs) are social support services facilitated by those who have shared lived experience. Typically, they aim to build shared identity and reducing stigma in this area, although there is limited knowledge on the experiences of those using LEROs, with research rarely permitted into these groups. The current study aims to provide insight into these groups, examining the experiences of service users in a UK-based LERO focussed on substance use disorder recovery.

Methods

Fifteen service users were interviewed about their experiences attending this LERO. Transcripts from these semi-structured interviews were thematically analysed by authors, with an inductive approach adopted.

Results

Eight themes and 10 sub-themes were identified. Themes were; Feeling supported in recovery, Experiencing life outside of substance use disorder, Fun, Skills acquisition, Preventing relapse by filling time, Gaining a sense of community, Psychological impact, and Changes in public perception. Participants reported having a positive experience within this LERO, particularly in comparison to traditional treatment pathways. Specifically, participants highlighted feelings of self-worth, belongingness, and enjoyment from this LERO – experiences they felt made this treatment pathway unique.

Conclusion

This paper highlighted the importance of peer support in substance use disorder recovery. Embedding those with lived experience into services was highly valued by participants and generated a unique culture of comfort, hope and opportunity. Although the scope of this study was limited to participants only currently attending this organisation, those interviewed significantly valued this LERO, highlighting their future potential to alleviate the lack of satisfaction reported by some around traditional treatment methods.

 

To access the full article, please click on the ‘Source’ link below:

Source: https://substanceabusepolicy.biomedcentral.com/articles/10.1186/s13011-025-00671-9

Received from AALM Americans Against Legalising Marijuana – 09 October 2025

On The Ingraham Angle, Fox News medical contributor Dr. Marc Siegel responded to a recent video from President Donald Trump, who appeared to endorse CBD use among seniors.

Dr. Siegel’s reaction was both clear and alarming:

“Marijuana is the most dangerous drug in America.”

He cautioned that while CBD is often marketed as a harmless wellness product, the truth is far more complicated. Many CBD items sold today are unregulated and frequently contain undisclosed levels of THC, the psychoactive compound found in marijuana. Dr. Siegel explained that modern marijuana is 20 to 30 times stronger than it was in decades past, creating unpredictable effects—especially for older adults who may already be taking multiple medications. For seniors, the combination of high-potency THC and prescription drugs can lead to confusion, anxiety, and dangerous interactions.

Siegel emphasized that Americans are being lulled into a false sense of safety by clever marketing and political endorsements that blur the line between medicine and addiction. Despite being sold as “natural” and “therapeutic,” these products remain largely untested, inconsistent, and risky, particularly for vulnerable populations.

🚨 Why It Matters

President Trump’s public support for CBD among seniors raises serious concerns about normalizing drug culture under the guise of health and wellness. When national figures promote substances without FDA oversight or long-term safety data, the result is confusion, not compassion. Seniors deserve real medical protection, not another gateway to unregulated drug exposure.

At Americans Against Legalizing Marijuana (AALM), we stand with medical professionals like Dr. Siegel in calling out this dangerous trend. We are urging policymakers to investigate how CBD and marijuana marketing is targeting older Americans and to hold those responsible accountable.

To access the full article, please click on the ‘Source’ link below.

Source: https://static1.squarespace.com/static/599a426ee45a7ccab72c77d2/t/63b361cb6350f410413b2878/1672700379514/Risks+of+Marijuana+Use+%28AALM%29.9.1.2022.pdf

 

  by Jessica Williams –  October 6, 2025

Every October, Substance Use and Misuse Prevention Month provides a reminder of the lives at stake in the fight against substance use disorders (SUDs). For New Hampshire, this year brings signs of real progress.

After nearly a decade of drug-related mortality rates falling above the national average, the Granite State is now experiencing record declines in drug-related fatalities. A closer look at the data suggests that sustained investments in prevention, treatment, and recovery may be paying off.

Drug-related deaths in New Hampshire, once among the highest fatality rates in the country, have begun to fall sharply. From 2013 to 2020, Granite Staters experienced drug-related fatality rates well above the national average, peaking in 2017 when an estimated 490 people died from drug-related causes, nearly five times higher than the number killed in traffic-related accidents in the state. But by 2024, deaths had declined to 287, the smallest number recorded since 2014 and the sharpest year-over-year decline across the previous decade. Early data suggests that this trend may continue into 2025: an estimated 77 Granite Staters died from drug-related fatalities the first half of this year, a decline from the 122 people during the same period in 2024.

These declines follow a decade of increasing state and federal investments in SUD prevention, treatment, and recovery services. Since 2014, New Hampshire has invested more than $835 million in SUD services, with spending increasing by an estimated 450% from 2014 to 2024.

Medicaid, the single largest payer of SUD services, has been vital for increasing access. The passage of Medicaid expansion in 2014, now commonly known as Granite Advantage in New Hampshire, expanded health coverage for adults up to 138% of the federal poverty guidelines. Of the almost $58 million spent on Medicaid-funded SUD services in 2024, nearly 80% was financed services under Granite Advantage. Opioid abatement funds resulting from legal settlements with drug manufacturers have also added funding support. By late 2024, New Hampshire had received close to $96 million in settlement money, although around half remained unspent. As of January 2025, it is estimated by the Kaiser Family Foundation that New Hampshire will receive more than $168 million in future payments, combined with a large continuing balance allowing for more spending flexibility across the state.

Yet despite these gains, access to treatment remains uneven, and many Granite Staters are still left behind. In 2022-2023, nearly 3 out of 4 Granite Staters who needed SUD treatment did not receive it, due in part to barriers such as provider shortages, regional disparities, coverage limits, and housing instability. Social determinants of health also play a role in which services people are able to obtain and can impact engagement with treatment and sustained recovery. Nationally, people identifying as Black or Native American experience disproportionate health outcomes from substance misuse. Research also shows that communities with greater income inequality experience higher drug-related fatality rates.

In New Hampshire, over half of drug-related deaths in 2024 occurred among people age 30 to 49, although shifting demographics have impacted fatalities, with older adults age 65 and older comprising around 13 percent of drug-related deaths. Men have accounted for around two-thirds of fatalities each year across the previous decade, and rural counties, including Coös and Sullivan counties, also report higher mortality rates, likely reflecting limited service availability resulting from workforce shortages.

In addition to better health outcomes, an investment in SUD services contributes to longer-term economic and social benefits. Increased prevention, treatment, and recovery services can reduce costly emergency health care spending, decrease burdens on the criminal legal system, and help keep more people engaged in the workforce.

However, new federal and state policy changes could undermine this progress. Although Medicaid has remained the largest source of funding for SUD services, new state and federal changes could impact access to health care across New Hampshire. Both the new federal reconciliation law and the latest state budget add work requirements for Granite Advantage adults, requiring people to prove employment or engagement in an eligible community engagement activity to obtain health coverage. While people in SUD treatment are exempt from the new requirements, differing state interpretations of the law, as well as difficulties with exemption paperwork and redeterminations could mean coverage losses for people in treatment and recovery. Early national research suggests that as many as 156,000 people across the country could lose access to medication-assisted treatment, resulting in an estimated 1,000 additional opioid-related deaths each year. These Medicaid changes come at a time when access to services is already limited.

As this year’s Substance Use and Misuse Prevention Month arrives, New Hampshire’s recent experience demonstrates that sustained investments in prevention, treatment, and recovery services can save lives. This progress, however, may be fragile. Without continued investment and innovation, the advances made in reducing drug-related deaths could stall, or even reverse, putting more families and communities at risk.

Source: https://newhampshirebulletin.com/2025/10/06/record-declines-in-drug-related-deaths-follow-decade-of-investment-in-prevention-and-treatment/

United Nations

United Nations – Office on Drugs and Crime

07 October 2025

Practical, Digital and Tailored to Help You Grow

The United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) has officially launched its dynamic new Learning and Innovation Programme and with it, the new powerful digital training platform called SPARK.

SPARK brings flexible, high-impact learning to professionals worldwide – from bustling capitals to remote field stations.

In many low-resource or remote settings, criminal justice institutions face significant challenges, such as fragmented access to training, language barriers and geographical isolation. As a result, many practitioners lack training altogether, while those who do receive it often rely on sporadic training or outdated courses, leaving them underprepared for rapidly evolving threats.

UNODC, through the eLearning platform SPARK, addresses these challenges by providing multilingual online and offline courses and fostering a global community of practice. This approach bridges gaps and makes knowledge on justice more accessible worldwide.

Meet SPARK: Learn Anytime, Anywhere

This new Programme reflects a growing institutional shift toward digitalization and innovation not just as tools, but as essential strategies for building safer, more secure societies.

The Learning and Innovation Programme now focuses on three core areas:

  1. Digital training delivery across all UNODC thematic areas, i.e. the world drug problem, transnational organized crime; terrorism; corruption; and criminal justice.
  2. Pedagogical support to enhance the quality and impact of training provided by partners;
  3. Digital transformation for the internal operations and processes of criminal justice institutions and academies.

“This Programme introduces a new approach to capacity-building,” said Aimée Comrie, Chief of UNODC’s Crime Prevention and Criminal Justice Section. “It is practical, digital and tailored to help institutions grow stronger through innovation.”

At the heart of the Programme is SPARK – a powerful, modern digital learning platform that offers cost-effective, flexible interactive and accessible training tools for professionals across the criminal justice system. It includes self-paced eLearning courses, with interactive scenarios and simulations, as well as eClasses, which support both in-person and virtual training formats. Knowledge hubs, including webinars, online libraries, forums and podcasts are also featured. Moreover, content is localized, tailored to regional, national or local needs. 

Digital Transformation: From the Ground Up

Many criminal justice institutions, particularly in remote or underserved regions, continue to face serious barriers to modernization: limited internet access, power outages, outdated administration systems and low levels of digital literacy. These challenges not only hinder operational efficiency but also limit the ability of institutions to adapt to rapidly changing criminal justice threats.

The Programme directly addresses these obstacles by helping institutions digitalize core operations such as data management, administration, communication and training coordination. The Programme also providers basic digital literacy training, from device operation and email use to safe web navigation and online collaboration.

“Digital transformation is not just about technology – it is about empowering institutions to function more effectively, securely and inclusively,” said Nicolas Caruso, Head of the Learning and Innovation Programme. “By addressing infrastructure and skill gaps, we are helping justice institutions become more resilient and better equipped to meet the need of their communities.”

To ensure learning reaches even the most remote locations, the Programme has introduced  Mobile Training Units (MTUs) – portable kits containing a server, laptops and a router that can run for five hours without external power and be deployed in just 20 minutes. The MTUs have been deployed in 30 locations across West, Central and Eastern Africa, Latin America, South Asia and Southeast Asia, and North Africa and the Middle East.

Moreover, over 60 eLearning Centres have already been established globally, blending in-person instruction and creating local hubs for outgoing training.

Source: https://www.unodc.org/unodc/en/news/2025/October/unodc-ignites-innovation-with-new-learning-programme-and-spark-elearning-platform.html

by Flagstaff Business News, Arizona, USA –  

By Roy DuPrez – Roy DuPrez, M.Ed., is the CEO and founder of Back2Basics Outdoor Adventure Recovery in Flagstaff. DuPrez received his B.S. and M.Ed. from Northern Arizona University. Back2Basics helps men, ages 18 to 35, recover from addiction to drugs and alcohol.

The challenge is real, but so is the opportunity: together, we can make prevention a priority and create healthier, more resilient communities.

Substance abuse continues to be one of the most pressing challenges facing families and communities today. While issues such as alcohol and illicit drug use are well known, prescription drug abuse has become a growing concern in recent years. The easy access to medications in many households, combined with misconceptions about their safety, makes prevention more important than ever.

A holistic approach – grounded in education, family support and healthy development – can go a long way in reducing the risks of substance misuse, particularly with prescription drugs.

The Importance of Early Prevention

Prevention starts long before young people are confronted with the temptation to experiment with drugs or alcohol. Building resilience, confidence and strong family connections early in life can provide powerful protection against substance abuse.

Here are some proven prevention strategies:

Developing Skills and Talents
Encouraging children to pursue sports, arts, music or other hobbies gives them positive outlets for their energy and creativity. These activities not only foster a sense of accomplishment but also help build healthy peer groups, reducing the influence of negative social pressures.

Building Self-Esteem
Confidence is one of the strongest safeguards against risky behaviors. When children feel good about who they are, they are less likely to seek validation through dangerous choices like substance use.

Fostering Family Connections
Open, honest communication within families makes it easier to address difficult topics, including substance abuse. Parents who create a safe space for discussion – and even role-play peer pressure situations – can help their children feel prepared to handle real-world challenges.

Educational Programs
Schools and community organizations play a key role in prevention. Beyond simply warning about the dangers of drugs, the best programs focus on building self-esteem, strengthening family relationships and giving students practical tools to make healthy decisions.

Understanding Prescription Drug Abuse

Even with preventive measures in place, prescription drug abuse remains a significant concern. Many families underestimate the dangers of medications that may already be in their own homes.

Commonly Misused Medications

  • Painkillers: Percocet (oxycodone), Vicodin (hydrocodone)
  • Anti-anxiety medications: Valium (diazepam)
  • Stimulants: Adderall, Ritalin and other ADHD medications

Safe Practices for Families

  • Secure Storage – Medications should be kept in locked cabinets, out of reach from children, teens and visitors.
  • Proper Disposal – Use local drug take-back programs or approved disposal sites. Throwing medications in the trash or flushing them can create environmental hazards and accidental risks.
  • Education and Awareness – Families should understand that “prescribed” doesn’t always mean “safe.” Community workshops, brochures and forums can provide helpful tools to increase awareness.

A Path Forward

Substance abuse prevention – especially when it comes to prescription drugs – requires a community-wide effort. Addiction does not discriminate; it impacts families across every socioeconomic and cultural background.

By strengthening family connections, building self-esteem, encouraging positive outlets and practicing safe medication habits, we can give the next generation the tools they need to thrive.

The challenge is real, but so is the opportunity: together, we can make prevention a priority and create healthier, more resilient communities. 

Source: https://www.flagstaffbusinessnews.com/substance-abuse-prevention-and-the-challenge-of-prescription-drug-abuse/

 

 

The steady increase in drug abuse worldwide is a reality that affects us, even in the Caribbean. On this island, as in many other places, synthetic cannabinoids are the most widely available and easiest to obtain.

Why is this? Among other reasons, their low cost and the quantities available. This type of drug is more addictive and harmful to the body, yet it is consumed in greater quantities than natural drugs.

Las Tunas is no stranger to this increase. In the second half of 2024, the province saw a spike in consultations for both acute intoxication and patients addicted to cannabinoids and other types of drugs.

 

Toxicology and psychiatry experts find it encouraging that the territory is currently at a plateau. Alejandro Mestre Barroso, a toxicologist at Ernesto Guevara Hospital, explains to 26 that this means that we do not have a peak in consumption, but neither do we have a decrease.

He also notes that the detection of cases is advancing and, due to promotional activities and the support of the various factors involved in this process, a decrease in the number of patients is expected.

“We will not see it suddenly, but gradually. This plateau phase is one of the most important for achieving a decrease in the detection of acute cases and new users.”

“We predict that, starting in the last quarter of this year, these statistics will begin to decline gradually if we continue our prevention efforts, because once consumption begins, it is so difficult to quit.”

NEED TO RAISE AWARENESS

With words of encouragement and concrete actions, health specialists in this area are always seeking to reach everyone, especially young people, who are the most vulnerable when it comes to addiction.

For this reason, the University of Medical Sciences has a Multidisciplinary Chair for the Prevention of Drug Use, promoted by a group of professionals who focus on prevention-related issues.

“This chair is part of the country’s drug surveillance network,” explains Mestre Barroso, “because it provides statistics on the age groups, gender, days of the week, and times of day when substances of abuse are most commonly consumed. All this monitoring allows us to develop an action plan that makes it possible to work on eradicating these patterns.”

 

The presence and prominence of the students enable this association to have a wide reach; they can connect with the public due to their less formal and less technical language. Adriana de la Caridad López Lora, medical student

One of those voices is Adriana de la Caridad López Lora, a fourth-year medical student, who says that through her work, she can reach many young people and warn them in time.

“I enjoy giving talks, explaining, and teaching what drugs can do, because we’re not just talking about addiction, but also the excessive increase in teenage pregnancy and the spread of sexually transmitted diseases.

“Thanks to outreach projects, we have talked to patients undergoing detoxification at the Psychiatric Hospital; we have also contributed to communities, secondary schools, and pre-university institutions. We have been able to reach large groups of people.”

Talking to her own classmates is now part of her daily routine. It is her vocation to impact as many people as possible with this issue; Adriana feels the need to raise awareness.

Through science and innovation, university professors and local experts are seeking to eradicate the use of these substances that cause so much damage to society and the body.

Source: https://www.periodico26.cu/index.php/en/principal-en/23117-prevention-the-watchword-against-drugs

 

by Ryan Hesketh – Talking Drugs – Posted on September 15, 2025

In November, the World Health Organisation (WHO) will issue its long-awaited recommendation on whether the coca leaf should remain listed under the UN’s most restrictive drug controls.

For decades, the coca leaf has been treated in international law as little more than raw material for cocaine. The 1961 Single Convention on Narcotic Drugs, following the advice of a deeply flawed 1950 WHO report, placed coca in Schedule I, equating its potential harm from use with that of heroin. This decision criminalised traditional use by Indigenous peoples in the Andes, despite millennia of practice, ignoring both its cultural and medical significance. 

Now, with WHO experts due to report their findings in September, attention is turning to whether the organisation can finally correct the record.

Critical timeline

Bolivia’s government initiated the review in 2023, arguing that coca’s scheduling was based on flawed information and infringed on indigenous rights. Since then, the WHO has tasked independent experts with conducting research on coca, its harms, and the potential impacts of change. Those experts are due to report their findings to the Executive Committee in late September, a crucial step on the pathway to potential change.

From there, the Expert Committee will meet in late October, finalising its report and recommendation in time for member states to consider ahead of the UN Commission on Narcotic Drugs’ (CND) reconvened session in December. The formal vote on coca’s scheduling, however, won’t take place until March 2026 in Vienna.

Luis Arce, the former president of Bolivia, holding coca leaves in 2022. Author: Vice Ministry of Communication of Bolivia

Uncertain outcomes

There are essentially three potential outcomes from the review. First, no action. Either the WHO makes no recommendation, which would result in no possibility of a vote, or states vote to maintain coca’s current Schedule I classification. Few expect the WHO to recommend keeping coca in its current schedule. “It’s hard to imagine they’d come to the conclusion that coca belongs where it is,” according to John Walsh, Director for Drug Policy and the Andes at the Washington Office on Latin America (WOLA).

If the review recommends a change in Coca’s scheduling, it would likely move down to either a Schedule II or III – still keeping its classification as a ‘narcotic drug’ subject to most treaty provisions. However, such a move would allow for certain traditional uses of coca and could be seen as a political compromise between those favouring full rescheduling and those favouring prohibition. This would create a clear difference in the scheduling for Coca and cocaine, similar to how opium products and the opium poppy are scheduled. Opium poppies are in Schedule II, while heroin is in Schedule I, reflecting the differing harms of the plant and its derivatives. Though rescheduling might be the most politically expedient outcome, and may align more closely with the UN’s Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, it would still be very short of full removal, according to Walsh.

Finally, the result hoped for by many states and drug policy reform advocates: coca could be completely removed from the drug control treaties. This would mean that coca “would no longer be considered a controlled substance. It would open the way to legal natural commerce,” according to Walsh. 

While the size of such a market is hard to estimate, its significance would be massive. Coca teas, flours, and medicinal extracts already circulate domestically in the Andes – only legally within Bolivia as the country had left and re-joined the UN drug control conventions in 2013 – but international markets remain blocked by treaty restrictions. 

Yet there are also risks. Walsh cautions: “There’s a concern, even among those who want coca removed, that those who have guarded the tradition could be undermined.” Comparisons to the cannabis market loom large, where capital from the Global North has quickly moved into spaces originally meant by marginalised communities. The vision of a future un-criminalised market for coca opens future concerns, such as control mechanisms that avoid biopiracy and endorse fair benefit-sharing, particularly with communities that have been destroyed by the plant’s prohibition. The Nagoya Protocol, which addresses protections against the exploitation of genetic resources and Indigenous knowledge, is often cited as a model for future control.

Even in the case of full removal, coca wouldn’t be completely free of international prohibition. “Coca destined to become cocaine would still be illegal; that wouldn’t be optional,” according to Walsh. Better controls to determine the end use of coca would have to be developed.

Politics and removal

In theory, removing coca from Schedule I requires only a simple majority of CND member states. In practice, however, bloc politics loom large. “As a formal matter, there’s no veto. But in a practical matter, the EU looms large,” Walsh explains, given the bloc’s significant role in driving global demand for cocaine. If European states vote together against rescheduling, the motion would be unlikely to pass. However, if the EU allows states to vote individually, the change is much more likely to happen.

The United States’ position is also critical. As Walsh puts it, “It would be difficult to imagine if the US would be supportive of removing coca entirely.” But, though the US was once the world’s biggest supporter of draconian drug laws, its international influence may be waning. The current administration’s defunding of global aid, much of which supported harm reduction and drug prevention programmes, have reduced the US’ ability to enact soft power internationally. President Trump’s “transactional” politics, according to Walsh, may be a signal to countries that they can go their own way on policy while the US is pursuing a more isolationist approach to international relations.

Russia, too, will be notably absent. Having not achieved sufficient votes to remain part of the CND in April 2025, Russia will not be voting on UN drug-related matters from 2026 onwards. Walsh said that “Russia has taken the mantle from the US as ‘drug warrior’” and could’ve stood staunchly against coca’s reclassification. Their absence, therefore, may open new horizons.

The coca review is primarily supported by Bolivia and Colombia, with Canada, Czechia, Malta, Mexico, and Switzerland publicly supporting their position. Some coca-producing nations, notably Peru, are not in favour of reclassification. The country’s drug control agency, DEVIDA, recently argued that reclassifying coca “could become a perverse incentive to increase its diversion to the production of cocaine,” as well as increasing deforestation and food insecurity, especially for indigenous people.

But for some, Peru’s lack of support for the review has more to do with its political priorities than any attempt at harm reduction. “Peru’s denial to support this is indeed very odd, but is a reflection of the kind of political regime it is living under,” says Pien Metaal of the Transnational Institute (TNI). “The Boluarte government is the typical white Lima elite that has ruled Peru over the past decades, with no connection to the hearts and minds of the Peruvian people.”

Indigenous resistance

The roots of the current review go back to decades of Indigenous advocacy. The UN Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples recognises the right to maintain and protect traditional medicines and cultural practices. Yet international drug treaties continue to criminalise coca chewing and related practices in many countries. 

“There has never been a credible medical or scientific basis for the prohibition of coca leaf,” according to Metaal. “Its inclusion in the 1961 Convention was a political act, not a scientific one.”

Underlying the review is a reckoning with the colonial assumptions that shape global drug control to this day. The 1950 WHO study that underpinned coca’s prohibition dismissed Indigenous practices as harmful and regressive, ignoring evidence of its benign cultural role. For many advocates, the current review is an overdue opportunity to correct that record. As Metaal argues, “This is not just about drug policy. It is about dignity, cultural survival, and Indigenous rights.”

Impending Change

For coca-using and growing communities, the implications are immediate. Continued criminalisation undermines cultural practices, justifies militarised eradication, and fuels human rights abuses. Removing the plant from international control could finally legitimise its traditional use, defund eradication policies, and unlock new economic opportunities grounded in heritage rather than prohibition.

As Walsh reflects: “In five years, I hope that we’re able to see a genuinely growing understanding of how natural coca products can really bring a lot of help to people around the world. I hope those markets can open up and can be beneficial to those communities that are most identified with coca.”

With the WHO’s deadlines fast approaching, the question is whether the international drug control system can rise to meet the moment—or whether it will once again fall back on outdated prejudices, leaving another generation of Indigenous peoples to fight for recognition of what they already know: that prohibition, not the coca leaf, is the problem.

===============================

Source:  https://www.talkingdrugs.org/upcoming-who-coca-review-a-turning-point-for-global-drug-policy/

 

Authors: Cyntia Duval, Brandon A. Wyse, Noga Fuchs Weizman, Iryna Kuznyetsova, Svetlana Madjunkova & Clifford L. Librach

Published by: Nature Communications

Published: 09 September 2025

 

Abstract

Cannabis consumption and legalization is increasing globally, raising concerns about its impact on fertility. In humans, we previously demonstrated that tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and its metabolites reach the ovarian follicle. An extensive body of literature describes THC’s impact on sperm, however no such studies have determined its effects on the oocyte. Herein, we investigate the impact of THC on human female fertility through both a clinical and in vitro analysis. In a case-control study, we show that follicular fluid THC concentration is positively correlated with oocyte maturation and THC-positive patients exhibit significantly lower embryo euploid rates than their matched controls. In vitro, we observe a similar, but non-significant, increased oocyte maturation rate following THC exposure and altered expression of key genes implicated in extracellular matrix remodeling, inflammation, and chromosome segregation. Furthermore, THC induces oocyte chromosome segregation errors and increases abnormal spindle morphology. Finally, this study highlights potential risks associated with cannabis use for female fertility.

Introduction

Cannabis consumption for both medicinal and recreational use and legalization have been rising globally1. Cannabis contains several classes of chemicals with cannabinoids being the most prominent; among these, tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) is the primary psychoactive compound and the most studied2. Notably, the concentration of THC in cannabis products has increased significantly, from an average of 3% (by weight) in the 1980s to around 15% in 2020, with some strains reaching 30% of THC2. The increase in frequency, ease of availability, and escalation in potency raises concerns about broader impacts on global human health, including reproductive health. Indeed, the main apprehension regarding THC and reproductive health stems from the importance of the endocannabinoid system in human reproduction3. Endocannabinoids, including N-arachidonoylethanolamide and 2-arachidonoylglycerol, are endogenous cannabinoids that play a central role in both male and female reproduction3, whereas THC is an exogenous cannabinoid. Extensive research has documented the effects of THC on male reproduction, highlighting an impact on sperm deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) methylation  4,5,6,7 and sperm parameters8 including sperm concentration  9,10,11, morphology  12,13,14 and motility14. As for female health, literature reports the impact of cannabis use during pregnancy on pregnancy outcomes  15,16,17,18, placental development  18,19,20 and offspring health  18,20,21,22. However, to our knowledge, no studies have investigated the impact of cannabis on the human female gamete, the oocyte, a gap partly due to the challenge associated with obtaining these samples.

During in vitro fertilization (IVF) treatment, exogenous gonadotropins are administered in a process called “controlled ovarian hyperstimulation” which recruits multiple follicles and induces follicle growth. These recruited follicles, each containing an oocyte, are then collected by a physician in a procedure called oocyte retrieval. Oocytes are collected along with their surrounding microenvironment, including follicular fluid (FF) and supportive somatic cells (granulosa cells). The oocytes are isolated, and mature oocytes are used for subsequent in vitro fertilization. Using FF, our group has previously quantified Δ9-THC and its metabolites, 11-OH-THC and 11-COOH-THC  23,24, demonstrating that these compounds could reach the follicular niche. This is significant as it suggests that THC may directly alter the microenvironment where the oocyte matures. Furthermore, our group has shown that THC exposure altered human granulosa cell methylation in a concentration dependent manner23, and in vitro exposure modulated cannabinoid receptor dynamics in granulosa cells24. However, no human studies and only a few animal model studies have investigated the impact of cannabis directly on oocyte development with conflicting results  25,26,27,28,29.

Maturation of the oocyte is a unique and highly specialized process beginning in utero during fetal development. It is widely accepted that female neonates are born with a finite number of oocytes, which, following menarche, are recruited to mature in cohorts with each menstrual cycle30. Although oocytes are protected in the ovary by the blood-follicle-barrier, they remain highly sensitive to environmental factors31. Given their essential role in reproduction, any perturbations in their development and maturation could have profound effects on fertility and on future generations. Thus, understanding the impact of THC on oocyte health is critical for providing informed guidance and counseling to patients of the potential risks to their fertility and future offspring.

In this study, we determine the impact of physiologically relevant concentrations of THC on oocyte maturation, elucidate the transcriptomic changes induced by THC exposure and its effect on chromosome segregation, and compare our findings with a retrospective cohort study. Our investigation will aid in bridging the knowledge gap in our understanding of the sex-specific reproductive consequences of cannabis use and contribute to more effective and evidence-based patient counseling.

 

To read the full article, please click on the source link below

Source:  https://www.nature.com/articles/s41467-025-63011-2

 

by Allysia Finley       Wall Street Journal          Sept. 14, 2025

What causes a young man to spiral from success toward loneliness, self-destruction and violence?

A police officer guards Tyler Robinson’s apartment complex in Washington, Utah, Sept. 12. Photo: andrew hay/Reuters

The descent of Tyler Robinson, the 22-year-old man suspected of murdering Charlie Kirk, is itself a tragedy worth mourning. How did a high-school whiz kid devolve into an assassin?

Such spirals aren’t so uncommon among young men, even if Mr. Robinson’s played out in a more calamitous and public way than most. Political violence is a problem. But so is the atomized culture in which young men retreat into confused inner worlds and virtual realities, which can be as addictive and destructive as any drug.

Mr. Robinson’s relatively normal background makes his actions jarring. He came from a good middle-class family. Having excelled in high school, he was awarded a scholarship to Utah State University, though he dropped out after one semester.

At some point, he appears to have become steeped in a dark digital world and videogames. He inscribed ammunition with obscure online memes (“Notices bulges OwO what’s this?”), lyrics to an anti-Fascist Italian song, and an apparent reference to the videogame “Helldivers 2,” a satire of a fascist interstellar empire inspired by the 1997 movie “Starship Troopers.”

Marinating in an internet cesspool can’t be good for the young and malleable male mind. Might killing villains in videogames desensitize the conscience? Studies have found an association between playing violent videogames and aggressive behavior, though most people who assume online avatars and fight monsters don’t become violent.

A broader problem, as Jonathan Haidt explains in his book “The Anxious Generation,” is that videogames cause boys to get lost in cyberspace. They have “put some users into a vicious cycle because they used gaming to distract themselves from feelings of loneliness,” Mr. Haidt notes. “Over time they developed a reliance on the games instead of forming long-term friendships.” They “retreat to their bedrooms rather than doing the hard work of maturing in the real world.”

The same is true of social-media platforms like Discord and Reddit, where young men often seek fraternity under pseudonyms. The platforms become substitutes for real-world camaraderie and can lead men down dark holes. Frequent social-media use has been found to rewire neurological pathways in young brains and compromise judgment.

Mr. Robinson’s spiral recalls Luigi Mangione, the 27-year-old University of Pennsylvania graduate who allegedly shot and killed UnitedHealthcare CEO Brian Thompson on a New York City street. Attractive and athletic, Mr. Mangione developed an obsession with self-improvement even as he suffered bouts of excruciating back pain. He was also an avid videogame player and active on Reddit.

Prior to the shooting, he cut off communications with family and friends. Men in their late teens and 20s sometimes experience psychotic breaks. Mr. Mangione’s apparent mental-health struggles, however, seem to have gone unnoticed as he got lost in a digital wilderness.

Or consider Thomas Crooks, the 20-year-old who attempted to assassinate President Trump at a rally last summer. Crooks graduated high school with high honors and scored 1530 on the SAT, then enrolled in an engineering program at a community college. His father said his mental health began declining in the year before the shooting.

Crooks lost social connections as he started spending more time online, visiting news sites, gaming platforms, Reddit and weapons blogs. He at one point searched for information on “major depressive disorder” and “depression crisis,” suggesting he suspected he had a mental illness. Instead of psychiatric treatment, he turned to the internet.

Like drugs, the internet can fuel delusions. Patrick Joseph White, 30, last month opened fire on the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention headquarters in Atlanta, then fatally shot himself. He was apparently exercising his rage against Covid shots, which he wrote were “always meant to indiscriminately murder as many as possible” and believed had caused his depression.

He had threatened self-harm numerous times in the previous year. In April police officers came to his home after he called a veterans’ crisis line and said he had been drinking and taking medication. White told officers he had called the crisis line “just to talk to someone.”

Videogames and the digital world may not cause mental illness, but they can be a form of self-medication that provides illusory relief from emotional troubles even as they propel antisocial behavior. The solution isn’t to ban them, but to create social structures that prevent young men from falling through the cracks.

Lost boys pose a broader cultural problem. The share of men 20 to 34 who work has been declining over the past 30 years, even as employment among young women has increased. Too many young men spend their days playing videogames, watching porn, smoking pot and trolling the internet rather than engaging with the real world.

Mr. Kirk sought to bring young people like Mr. Robinson out of their virtual caves. It’s harder to hate someone you meet in the flesh than an avatar in a digital dystopia.

Source:  Drug Watch International – www.drugwatch.org

Publication: American Journal of Psychiatry – 10 September 2025

Authors: Lara N. Coughlin, Ph.D. , Devin C. Tomlinson, Ph.D., Lan Zhang, Ph.D., H. Myra Kim, Sc.D., Madeline C. Frost, Ph.D., M.P.H., Gabriela Khazanov, Ph.D., James R. McKay, Ph.D., Dominick De Philippis, Ph.D., and Lewei (Allison) Lin, M.D., M.S.

Abstract

Objective:

While opioid overdose has begun to decrease in recent years, stimulant overdose has continued to increase and has not been adequately addressed. Unlike opioid use disorder, there are no medications approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration to treat stimulant use disorder (StUD). The most effective treatment is contingency management (CM), a behavioral intervention that provides tangible rewards to reinforce target behaviors, such as biochemically verified abstinence. Despite the effectiveness of CM on near-term substance use behaviors, the long-term impact on key outcomes such as mortality are unclear. The objective of this work was to examine whether patients with StUD who receive CM have a decreased risk of mortality.

Methods:

This was a retrospective cohort study of patients with StUD who received or did not receive CM, using linked electronic health records and death records in the largest integrated health system in the United States, the Veterans Health Administration (VHA), from July 2018 through December 2020. The primary outcome was mortality in the year following the index CM visit. All-cause mortality data were obtained from the National Death Index and linked to electronic health record data. Adjusted hazard ratios were estimated using stratified Cox proportional hazards models.

Results:

A total of 1,481 patients with StUD who received CM were included alongside 1,481 matched control subjects. Over the 1-year follow-up period, those who received CM were 41% less likely to die (adjusted hazard ratio=0.59, 95% CI=0.36, 0.95) than those who did not receive CM.

Conclusions:

This study provides the first evidence that CM use in real-world health care settings is associated with reduced risk of mortality among patients with StUD.

Source:  https://www.psychiatryonline.org/doi/10.1176/appi.ajp.20250053

by Jack Fenwick – BBC Political correspondent – 16 September 2025

Hilary’s son Ben died from a heroin overdose in 2018, but his death was never included on official opioid death statistics

More than 13,000 heroin and opioid deaths have been missed off official statistics in England and Wales, raising concerns about the impact on the government’s approach to tackling addiction.

Research from King’s College London, shared exclusively with BBC News, found that there were 39,232 opioid-related deaths between 2011 and 2022, more than 50% higher than previously known.

The error has been blamed on the government’s official statistics body not having access to correct data and it is understood ministers are now working with coroners to improve the reporting of deaths.

A former senior civil servant said fewer people might have died if drug policies had been based on accurate statistics.

The number of opioid deaths per million people in England and Wales has almost doubled since 2012, but this new study means the scale of the problem is likely to be even greater.

Researchers from the National Programme on Substance Use Mortality at King’s used data from coroners’ reports to calculate a more accurate estimate of opioid-related deaths.

Opioids include drugs such as heroin that come from the opium poppy plant, as well as synthetically-made substances like fentanyl.

The Liberal Democrats have said the government needs to “urgently investigate” how the error was made.

The reliability of the Office for National Statistics (ONS) data relies on coroners naming specific substances on death certificates, something which often does not happen.

Specific substances such as heroin are instead sometimes only included on more detailed post-mortem reports or toxicology results, which the ONS does not have access to.

Government data on overall drug deaths, which does not name specific substances, is not affected by the error, but ministers’ decision-making is generally influenced by the more granular statistics.

The body that oversees police commissioners says correct data on opioid deaths could have led to more funding and better treatment for front-line services such as police forces and public health.

Sir Philip Rutnam, who was the most senior civil servant at the Home Office between 2017 and 2020, told the BBC it was “quite possible” that fewer people would have died, if the government’s drug policies had been based on accurate statistics.

He told BBC Radio 4’s PM programme: “It really does matter, first of all the level of attention given to these issues, but then specifically it will affect decisions on how much funding to put into health-related programmes, treatment programmes, or into different bits of the criminal justice system.”

“My son’s death is one of thousands missed from official stats”

Ben was 27 when he died from a heroin overdose in 2018, but his death was ruled as “misadventure” and was never included on the official opioid death statistics.

His addiction began with cannabis when he was a teenager and progressed to using aerosols and eventually heroin.

“Ben was just a very kind person. We miss him, we all miss him every day,” said his mother Hilary.

At one point, she said Ben appeared to “turn a corner”.

He was awarded a place in a rehab facility, but shortly before he was set to move in, Hilary got the phone call she had always dreaded.

“I think what happened is, he wasn’t using,” she said. “They think probably about three months and his tolerance had gone down.”

Ben’s family believe that different treatment and support for drug addicts could have helped him.

Dr Caroline Copeland, who led the new research, said drug policies “will not have the desired impact unless the true scale of the problem is known”.

She added: “We need to alert coroners to the impact that not naming specific drugs as the cause of death has on the planning and funding of public health policies.”

The research, which has been peer-reviewed and published in the International Journal of Drug Policy, focused specifically on opioid deaths, but similar undercounts are thought to exist in data about deaths from other drugs too.

Further work by King’s College London has found that 2,482 cocaine-related deaths have also been missed off ONS statistics over the last 10 years.

David Sidwick, the drugs lead for the National Association of Police and Crime Commissioners, told the BBC the organisation would “be pushing hard” for more treatment funding, in light of the faulty statistics.

Mr Sidwick, who is also a Conservative police and crime commissioner, said more accurate data would lead to “better decisions about the amount of funding required for treatment” and suggested “new treatment methods” such as buprenorphine, a monthly injection that can help heroin users overcome addiction.

Helen Morgan, the Liberal Democrat health spokesperson, said: “I dread to think of the lives that may have been lost due to damaging policies based on faulty stats.”

She added: “The government now needs to step up, launch an investigation and ensure that the ONS is given access to the data it needs so that it can never make this error again.”

The ONS, which helped with the research, said it had warned that “the information provided by coroners on death registrations can lack detail” on the specific drugs involved.

A spokesperson added: “The more detail coroners can provide about specific drugs relevant to a death will help further improve these statistics to inform the UK government’s drug strategy.”

The flaw in the ONS system is not present in Scotland, where there are no coroners and where National Records Scotland (NRS) is responsible for collating official statistics.

Unlike the ONS, the NRS does receive more detailed pathology reports, but differences in how deaths are reported across the UK make it difficult to compare.

The opioid undercounting raises further questions about the under-fire ONS, which has been accused of failing on several statistical fronts recently.

Data sets on job markets and immigration have been criticised and earlier this year a government review said the ONS had “deep-seated” issues which needed tackling.

A spokesperson for the Department of Health and Social Care said: “We continue to work with partners across health, policing and wider public services to drive down drug use, ensure more people receive timely treatment and support, and make our streets and communities safer.”

 

Source:  https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/articles/cg7dzmyjrjzo

 

by Liz Mineo – Harvard Staff Writer -September 16, 2025

Study examining potential solution to treatment gap — especially in rural areas — gets federal funding cut

Between 1999 and 2023, approximately 806,000 Americans died from opioid overdoses, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Yet of the estimated 2.4 million U.S. adults with opioid use disorder, only one in four receives medications that can reduce overdose risk.

Telehealth has shown promise as a potential tool to prevent opioid overdose deaths, but funding for a study launched last year by health economist Haiden Huskamp examining its use and impact was terminated as part of the mass cancellation of federal research grants by the Trump administration in May.

“A lot of our research, including that for this grant, is looking at why so few people are getting evidence-based treatments for substance use disorder,” said Huskamp, Henry J. Kaiser Professor of Health Care Policy at Harvard Medical School. “Medications for opioid use disorder are highly efficacious. They reduce opioid use; they reduce overdose risk and other negative outcomes. These medications save lives.”

A shortage of clinicians specialized in treating opioid use disorders — particularly in rural areas — presents a major barrier to receiving care, she said.

“Our work has been trying to understand, since the pandemic in particular, who was using telemedicine for opioid use disorder,” said Huskamp, “and whether the availability of care, via telemedicine, has meant that clinicians who treat substance use disorders are now seeing more patients in areas where there aren’t enough doctors who do this work.”

217Americans, on average, died each day from an opioid overdose in 2023, according to the CDC

For the past five years Huskamp, Ph.D. ’97, has been studying telemedicine as a strategy to expand access to opioid use disorder treatment and life-saving medications such as methadone, buprenorphine, and the quick overdose-reversal drug naloxone.

“Given the opioid epidemic that we are still in the middle of, telemedicine might be an answer because it could address a number of barriers to treatment access,” said Huskamp.

Although in May the CDC reported that opioid overdose deaths dropped from 83,140 in 2023 to 54,743 in 2024, the death toll remains high. According to the CDC, in 2023, on average, 217 people died each day from an opioid overdose.

The goal of Huskamp’s terminated four-year study, launched last year with a team of 15 researchers, was to provide evidence-based information on the efficacy of telemedicine that can guide policymakers as they address the opioid epidemic. It was a renewal of a previous grant, which yielded 24 different publications whose findings have informed new rules by the Drug Enforcement Agency to expand telemedicine access for treating opioid dependence. Funded by the National Institute on Drug Abuse, the latest research sought to examine quality of care and clinical outcomes by analyzing data from Medicare, Medicaid, commercial insurance, and national pharmacy claims.

Telemedicine for opioid use disorder became more widespread across the country during the COVID-19 pandemic, and researchers have been eager to probe the data to find out if it improved access to care for patients in remote areas, and how the quality of care compared to traditional in-person care.

“Anything we can do to try to improve the healthcare system to more effectively allow people to access care and to do so in a more efficient way is really important,” said Huskamp. “We need research like this to guide policymaking, so that we can improve the system as much as possible for people to get the treatment that they need.”

 

Source:  https://news.harvard.edu/gazette/story/2025/09/only-1-in-4-addicted-to-opioids-takes-life-saving-meds-why/

Event date: 30 Sep 2025

Event location: Online

Organisers: UNODC

Event type: Meeting

The 2025 Thematic Discussions on the implementation of all International Drug Policy Commitments, following up on the 2019 Ministerial Declaration, include a session on “Prevention as a core element of the public health response to drug use”, which takes place online on 30 September.

More details can be found on the UNODC-CND webpage: https://www.unodc.org/unodc/en/commissions/CND/Mandate_Functions/thematic-discussions.html

Source: https://www.euda.europa.eu/event/2025/09/2025-cnd-thematic-discussions-prevention-core-element-public-health-response-drug-use_en

By Neuroscience – September 21, 2025

The findings were significant, Thanos explains, because not only did the HIIT animals exhibit a preference for the saline chamber, they exhibited a clear aversion to the cocaine chamber. Credit: Neuroscience News

Summary: A new study shows that high-intensity interval training (HIIT) is more effective than moderate exercise at protecting adolescent lab animals from cocaine use. Animals exposed to HIIT developed a preference for non-drug environments and an aversion to cocaine, linked to increases in ΔFosB, a molecular switch involved in addiction.

These results suggest exercise intensity matters in shaping the brain’s reward system and its response to drugs. The findings may inform new strategies for using exercise as a personalized tool in substance use disorder prevention and treatment.

Key Facts

  • HIIT Impact: High-intensity exercise made animals avoid cocaine and prefer safe environments.
  • Molecular Mechanism: HIIT raised ΔFosB levels, a transcription factor tied to addiction pathways.
  • Personalized Tool: Exercise may act as dose-dependent medicine for addiction prevention.

Source: University at Buffalo

People with substance use disorder who participate in recovery running programs have shown improved success in maintaining their sobriety and reducing their risk for relapse.

Those observations led Panayotis Thanos, a University at Buffalo neuroscientist who studies the brain’s reward system, to try to figure out the brain mechanisms behind that phenomenon.

In a new study published today in PLOS One, Thanos, PhD, senior research scientist in the Clinical and Research Institute on Addictions in the Jacobs School of Medicine and Biomedical Sciences at UB, and co-authors reveal that high-intensity interval training (HIIT) was more effective than moderate exercise in making adolescent lab animals avoid cocaine.

The researchers used adolescent lab animals because this is the age when most people who develop substance use disorder begin their exposure. The study focused on male rats only because previous observations have revealed some gender differences in drug-seeking behaviors between males and females. The researchers plan a future study on how HIIT affects females with regard to cocaine. 

HIIT as personalized medicine

“The study shows that HIIT exercise, rather than moderate exercise, during adolescence may protect against cocaine abuse,” says Thanos, a faculty member in the Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology in the Jacobs School.

The findings provide evidence that HIIT could become a personalized medicine tool in drug abuse intervention.

“The key take-home is that not all exercise is created equal in terms of outcome,” Thanos says. “Exercise is not a binary therapeutic tool but rather we need to think about exercise as dose-dependent, the way we think of medicine as dose-dependent.”

In the study, rats exposed to HIIT exercise on a treadmill were compared to rats exposed to moderate treadmill exercise. Both groups then underwent a behavioral test called cocaine place preference, which trains the animal to discriminate between two chambers: one where they can access cocaine and one where they can access saline. Cocaine preference is when the animal spends more time in the cocaine chamber, while cocaine aversion is when the animal chooses to spend more time in the saline chamber.

The findings were significant, Thanos explains, because not only did the HIIT animals exhibit a preference for the saline chamber, they exhibited a clear aversion to the cocaine chamber.

Increase in a molecular switch for addiction

“We believe that the increase in aversion to cocaine happens in the HIIT animals,” Thanos says, “because of this exercise dose-dependent effect on the brain’s reward circuit that involves an increase we observed in ΔFosB.” ΔFosB is a transcription factor commonly referred to as a molecular switch for addiction and known to boost sensitivity to drugs of abuse.

“Our study showed that HIIT increased ΔFosB levels causing an aversion to consuming cocaine,” he adds.

The findings reveal new avenues that Thanos and his colleagues plan to explore, including how HIIT may affect brain metabolism.

“We know from recent studies in our lab with steady, moderate treadmill running that compared to sedentary animals, exercise decreased metabolism in the somatosensory cortex of the brain while activating other brain regions involved in planning and decision,” he says. “That activation may help dampen various aspects of cocaine abuse and relapse.”

The paper also discusses the need to better understand gender differences in preference for cocaine. “Future studies need to explore how HIIT affects cocaine preference in female rats,” Thanos says, adding that the literature in the field includes evidence that females seem to be more vulnerable to certain phases of addiction.

UB co-authors are Teresa Quattin, MD, UB Distinguished Professor in the Department of Pediatrics and senior associate dean for research integration in the Jacobs School; Nikki Hammond, a former graduate student; and Nabeel Rahman and Sam Zhan, former undergraduate students in Thanos’ lab. Other co-authors are from Washington University School of Medicine and Western University of Health Sciences.

Source: https://neurosciencenews.com/hiit-exercise-addiction-neuroscience-29715/

By Sage Journals – September 19, 2025

 Abstract

This article presents a study exploring the prevention of alcohol and drug (AOD)-facilitated sexual violence. A participatory action research/appreciative inquiry method, World Café Forum, was used to take a multi-stakeholder approach to explore prevention initiatives. Thirty-two individuals from 14 stakeholder organizations attended. Analysis established five recurring themes, overlayed by power imbalances: education and training; policy-led initiatives; holding people accountable; social information campaigns; and cultural change. Responsibility for addressing the issue is contested. The greatest opportunity to address AOD-facilitated sexual violence lies with organizations, with a focus on restorative justice. Policy frameworks and place-based initiatives are required.

Introduction

Sexual violence is a global health issue mostly affecting women (World Health Organisation, 2021). In Australia, 23% of women will experience sexual violence across their lifetime, compared to 8% of men (Australian Bureau of Statistics, 2021). Sexual violence is reported to be higher in rural than urban areas, although prevalence is still relatively unknown, particularly for young women (Australian Bureau of Statistics, 2017; Hooker et al., 2019).

The World Health Organisation defines sexual violence as “any sexual act, attempt to obtain a sexual act, unwanted sexual comments or advances, or acts to traffic, or otherwise directed, against a person’s sexuality using coercion, by any person regardless of their relationship to the victim” (World Health Organisation, 2013). It has significant psychological and physical health impacts for women, including posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) and gastrointestinal issues (Dworkin, 2020; Tarzia et al., 2017; World Health Organisation, 2014). Sexual violence is most frequently experienced by women and LGBTQ+ people (Ison et al., 2025a), and those who face intersecting forms of inequality can experience higher rates of sexual violence. For example, women with disabilities or trans women of color have experienced higher rates of sexual violence (Australian Institute of Health and Welfare, 2024; Hindes et al., 2025; Ledingham et al., 2022).

Increasingly, it is being recognized that alcohol and drugs (AOD) are used to facilitate sexual violence. Alcohol and other drug facilitated sexual violence includes what is often colloquially known as “drink spiking” (Ison et al., 2024). Perpetration can be opportunistic, such as where the perpetrator takes advantage of a person who is intoxicated, and/or proactive, such as intentionally administering a substance to incapacitate a person (Gee et al., 2006). The victim may consume AOD voluntarily or be unaware that they have been administered them (Caluzzi et al., 2025). Alcohol and other drug facilitated sexual violence can also include the perpetrator encouraging the victim to become further intoxicated (Ison et al., 2025b). Available evidence indicates the most likely substance used by perpetrators is alcohol, but they may also use other sedative substances such as flunitrazepam (Rohypnol) or other benzodiazepines and gamma-hydroxybutyrate (GHB) (Anderson et al., 2017; Recalde-Esnoz et al., 2024; Wolitzky-Taylor et al., 2011).

Responses to AOD-facilitated sexual violence have often been piecemeal. The service system response often lacks continuity of care, and while staff may be passionate and caring, they are often overworked and have limited knowledge or training on AOD-facilitated sexual violence (Ison et al., 2025c). There have been some attempts at programs to address AOD-facilitated sexual violence, though there have been limited rigorous evaluations. These interventions have tended to focus on bars and clubs, particularly through training bar staff as bystanders (Davis et al., 2024), including a resource for bar staff that we designed for the larger project that this study is part of (detailed below) (Hooker et al., 2024). Interventions also include “solutions” to drink spiking, such as a scrunchie to cover one’s drink, or nail polish to test whether there are substances in your drink. These supposed solutions often place the onus on women to keep themselves safe through feminized products, which have troubling victim-blaming undertones (Clinnick et al., 2024).

Beyond such examples, the vast majority of interventions are focused on alcohol consumption in US college settings. While they may have some specific focus on AOD-facilitated sexual violence, they are generally concerned with minimizing the intake of alcohol. Very few interventions are focused on prevention (Hooker et al., 2020) or on response that goes beyond individuals to consider how to change broader sociocultural contexts (Dworkin & Weaver, 2021).

Study Context

There has been growing interest in and reporting on “drink spiking” in the media. In 2021, the media highlighted “drink spiking” as an issue in a regional town in Victoria (Cunningham & Koob, 2021; Lawrence & Findlay, 2021). Some young women came forward to talk to journalists about their experiences of drink spiking in a local club and the subsequent negative interactions they had with health and justice services. These media reports also indicated that drink spiking is an issue in rural communities broadly and that victims face significant barriers when seeking assistance through health and justice services. As with sexual violence broadly, increased media reporting does not necessarily mean there is an increased prevalence, but rather that people may feel empowered to come forward (Clinnick et al., 2024). The stories of the young women in the media reports inspired the research team to conduct a study focused on regional and rural experiences of AOD-facilitated sexual violence. To date, little research has been conducted on rural and remote communities’ experiences of AOD-facilitated sexual violence. However, research has shown that rural and regional Australia have distinct issues relating to sexual violence compared to urban areas, such as dominance of rural hegemonic masculinity and sexual violence revictimization (Corbett et al., 2023; Saunders & Easteal Am, 2013). The study underpinning this paper explored how a regional community could respond to, and ultimately prevent, AOD-facilitated sexual violence (Hooker et al., 2024). This article reports the findings from one part of the study: the use of a multi-stakeholder participatory action method known as a World Café Forum.

Methods

The World Café Forum is a collaborative qualitative method used to foster “constructive dialogue, accessing collective intelligence, and creating innovative possibilities for action” (Brown, 2005). It derives from participatory action research and appreciative inquiry methods that aim to guide a large group of diverse stakeholders toward solutions (Aldred, 2011). It has been used in community development (Aldred, 2011) and where interprofessional collaboration is required, for example, in healthcare and violence against women (Breitbach et al., 2017; Forsdike & Fullagar, 2021). The method brings together multiple small conversational groups to build one collective conversation of different perspectives (Brown, 2005). To build a collective conversation, participants are required to move between groups and discussion topics, so that previous conversations are built upon and include new perspectives for action (Brown, 2005).

A World Café forum was held in 2022 in a regional town in Victoria, Australia, bringing together multiple stakeholders to consider AOD-facilitated sexual violence and how it could be prevented in the region. The forum was conducted over the course of a full day and consisted of two parts. The first half of the day included presentations by members of the research team on sexual violence and AOD-facilitated sexual violence, as well as evidence of the issue in the local community. The presentations were used to engage participants and disseminate existing knowledge about the phenomena and focus on the local region. The second half of the day, the results of which this article reports, incorporated World Café method discussion groups informed by the information provided earlier in the day. The project received ethical approval from the first author’s institution (approval reference: HEC22254).

One of the key features of the World Café method is that participants rotate around the tables every 20–30 min (Fouché & Light, 2011). A host remains at their designated table to support discussion, continuity, and the development of ideas arising from previous conversations (Brown, 2005). Such varied perspectives on issues and the ideas developed are unlikely without facilitated interaction between a broad and diverse range of participants (Brown, 2005).

There are seven principles in the method’s application which were followed on the day (see Table 1).

Firstly, two questions informed by the earlier presentations were posed to the discussion groups to introduce AOD-facilitated sexual violence and establish a collective understanding of what it is in the region and how it is currently responded to by the organizations participants were representing (Brown, 2005).

Secondly, the key question then posed to the discussion groups, and which we present in the results below, was “What can we do?” Records of participants’ ideas were pinned to the walls to enable participants to reflect upon the discussions in other groups (Fouché & Light, 2011). Research team members took photos of these records for analysis.

Analysis

Analysis was informed by the socioecological model. The model was originally developed by Bronfenbrenner to reflect the relational and multiple forces that shape experience across individual, relationship, community, and sociocultural levels (Bronfenbrenner, 1977). It was further developed by Heise to provide a framework for understanding violence against women (Heise, 1998). Heise argued that we need to understand the different levels and their integration to improve responses to a complex issue (Heise, 1998). The model has since been adapted to consider imbalances of power within and between the socioecological levels (Forsdike & Giles, 2024).

The records were transcribed by co-author Jessica Ison and thematically analyzed by co-authors Kirsty Forsdike and Elena Wilson (Braun & Clarke, 2022), with co-authors Jessica Ison and Kirsty Forsdike meeting to finalize themes once co-author Jessica Ison had reviewed the initial themes developed.

Results

Thirty-two stakeholders from 14 different organizations attended the World Café Forum, with an additional seven facilitators attending from the project team. Of the 32 stakeholder attendees, 78% (n = 25) were women. The range of organizations or services from which they derived is presented in Table 2, and included specialist violence prevention and response services, health services, police and justice representatives, students, and student services.

We generated five recurring themes through analysis: (a) training and education, (b) policy-led initiatives, (c) holding people accountable, (d) social information campaigns, and (e) cultural change. When aligning these with the socioecological model (Table 3), it is clear that forum participants considered the organizational level to be the area of greatest opportunity for initiatives, followed by the sociocultural level. The individual and relational levels of the model were not identified as providing many pathways for addressing AOD-facilitated sexual violence in the community.

Education and Training

Unsurprisingly, education and training were dominant themes in discussions. Education refers to building understanding around AOD-facilitated sexual violence, while training refers to skill capacity building to respond to AOD-facilitated sexual violence. Some of the educational measures proposed addressed how people relate with each other, aligning with the relational level of the socioecological model. Here, participants discussed parenting education, engaging with the parent–child relationship to address AOD-facilitated sexual violence. Participants also referred to embedding such education within existing education programs, such as Respectful Relationships and sexual consent: “Comprehensive sexual consent education embedded into all educational institutions, i.e., what consent looks like and the nuances around this when using AOD.”

There was a focus by participants on peer education so that boys would educate boys in understanding and addressing AOD-facilitated sexual violence. Education of AOD-facilitated sexual violence also sits within the organizational level of the socioecological model, whereby it should form part of lifelong learning throughout early years education, primary school, secondary, and tertiary education.

Skills development within organizations such as police and healthcare, and places such as the workplace, at music events, sports clubs, and LGBTQIA+ events were also identified by participants. At the individual level, training was identified as essential for those working in hospitality security specifically (including developing the skills in “identifying and acting on AOD-facilitated sexual violence”), bystander training and safe substance use training for individuals.

Policy-Led Initiatives

Participants identified an absence of policy frameworks and initiatives in relation to AOD-facilitated sexual violence and argued that this was required at the organizational level and across various domains, including hospitality, health systems, and taxation. Discussions among participants produced some specific suggestions for initiatives such as “bringing alcohol service in line with food service (quality control, etc.)” and “align planning laws with hospitality, e.g., co-located supports for AOD-facilitated sexual violence.”

The latter initiative of a co-located support referred to venues being close to support services. Participants discussed co-location at length, detailing planning applications for hospitality venues such as pubs requiring recognition of where there were support services or requiring new venues to co-locate with support services. There were several participants in attendance who worked in specialist violence prevention and response, and women’s services, and they raised that alcohol and other drug services should be integrated with family violence, sexual violence, and mental health services at both the policy and service system levels.

Threaded throughout these discussions was the need for culturally specific responses to alcohol and drug issues. Tax policy initiatives proposed related to a “big alcohol tax” and the profits from tax being “used in harm minimization.” The remaining subthemes within policy-led initiatives align more with the sociocultural level of the socioecological model. This incorporated suggestions such as decriminalizing illicit drugs, normalizing safe substance use, limiting or regulating alcohol, and reporting guidelines for the media.

Holding People Accountable

The discussions were particularly forceful when considering the need to hold people accountable. At the organizational level, participants were most concerned with holding licensed venues accountable or requiring them to take some responsibility for preventing AOD-facilitated sexual violence. Harsher enforcement of penalties for venues where AOD-facilitated sexual violence takes place was proposed alongside an independent body (“watch dog”) to hold venues accountable, which includes “access to CCTV—and allow it to be viewed openly.” But more often, the participants discussed the need for initiatives that were led by or took place in licensed venues; for example, mandated AOD-facilitated sexual violence programs for licensed venues and safety officers located at venues. Another specific initiative suggested bringing licensed venues together “to create a shared onus of responsibility/plan.” In relation to perpetrators, at the individual level, participants considered the need to hold “abusers accountable within systems that actually rehabilitate” and ensuring that there are sufficient resources “to speed up processing perpetrators of AOD-facilitated sexual violence.” Linked to this was the focus on victim-led responses, for example, local restorative justice or “alternative pathways for justice for victim survivors.”

Social Information Campaigns

Participants specified initiatives for their local region when discussing social information campaigns. While general ideas were generated and proposed for public health campaigns around male behaviors, or awareness-raising campaigns in venues and public toilets, taxis, and social media, the rural focus of the project generated interesting locations for such campaigns. The need to focus on male behaviors was emphasized rather than what was seen as the current focus on women’s behaviors. For example, participants reported on an art exhibition they had seen in the news that was held at the United Nations Headquarters in New York City. The exhibition showcased the variety of clothing women who have been raped were wearing to dispel long-held rape myths. Participants attending the World Café Forum wanted campaigns on the back of toilet doors that directly questioned men: “have you used substances to manipulate some into sex?”

The region where the World Café was conducted has a well-known recreation area [Rosalind Park] where major events are held, and participants suggested that campaigns could be linked to popular events in this location. They suggested that including safe space tents should be required when holding an event. Similarly, participants suggested encouraging the city council “to focus on this as part of community safety week.”

Cultural Change

Cultural change, as part of the sociocultural level, was recognized across the discussion groups as difficult but necessary to address AOD-facilitated sexual violence. Cultural change was argued to be needed around gender inequality. It was well recognized by the specialist and women’s health services in the room that gender inequality is associated with sexual violence. In particular, participants highlighted male entitlement and control with the need to “address male entitlement in relation to respect for women,” “change ideas of male ownership/control,” and “believing women.” Participants also reflected on shifting narratives, for example, “shift the narrative” in relation to cultural attitudes around drugs and alcohol, “changing alcohol culture,” and “shifting student culture so people can speak out.” These narrative shifts identify two concepts: the Australian collective attitude toward AOD, and the ability of an individual within the culture to speak up, particularly in rural and regional areas. One participant group specifically noted that there was a “Reluctance among men to dob mates in and this is a bigger challenge in rural towns where men can then be ostracized from their community.”

Power

In recognition of the development of the socioecological model and its adaptation to consider imbalances of power within and between the socioecological levels, we were sensitive to this concept as we considered the themes detailed above (Forsdike & Giles, 2024).

Throughout the forum, power was a recurring topic discussed overtly in terms of who holds power over victims of AOD-facilitated sexual violence. For example, participants discussed how licensed venues hold power over their patrons, particularly over women who frequent them and are subjected to AOD-facilitated sexual violence. Alongside discussion of power imbalances, participants drew out some of the more covert power imbalances. In particular, participants talked about how the broader patriarchal cultural contexts see men holding power over women, which is at times heightened in rural communities and for minorities. We reflect on this more in the discussion below.

Discussion

The World Café method brings together people from a variety of perspectives and backgrounds to discuss an issue of importance. Our forum produced important findings on how to respond to and prevent AOD-facilitated sexual violence, particularly in regional and rural communities. Participants were candid about how AOD-facilitated sexual violence is a topic that can be challenging to tackle. Even those from specialist services can struggle to integrate the two issues of (a) alcohol and other drugs and (b) sexual violence. Those working in AOD-facilitated sexual violence need support for greater understanding of the term and to be able to tackle it from a cohesive perspective rather than from either an AOD or a sexual violence perspective.

As noted in the results, power was a recurring topic in terms of who holds power, for example, licensed venues holding power over women patrons. Yet, venues are unlikely to be expected to deal with or be held accountable for AOD-facilitated sexual violence that occurs at their venue. An unwillingness to assume responsibility is reflected in broader gender-based violence. For example, organizations such as universities or workplaces are often reluctant to acknowledge, let alone take responsibility for, preventing and responding to sexual harassment. As a result, victims struggle to find integrated service systems and are often forced to engage with multiple services when seeking support, resulting in poor continuity of care (García-Moreno et al., 2015). The issue of who is responsible for preventing, responding to, and supporting victims of AOD-facilitated sexual violence needs further exploration, discussion, and recognition, given the number of stakeholders involved (Ison et al., 2025c).

With regard to covert power imbalances, there are often troubling power imbalances that victim-survivors of sexual violence face at all levels of the socioecological model (Tarzia, 2020). This was identified through Australia’s patriarchal cultural context, recognized as particularly dominant in rural communities and for minorities. This understanding of sexual violence allowed participants to consider how to address AOD-facilitated sexual violence beyond just standard approaches of behavioral change to considering how to prevent sexual violence through broader cultural change, often referred to as primary prevention (Hooker et al., 2020).

One suggestion for addressing power imbalances was to implement transformative justice responses to victim-survivors. This reflects the demographics of the participants, with many working in the gender-based violence sector and in feminist advocacy, which has engaged in transformative justice work (Rasmussen, 2022). Transformative justice, as used in feminist advocacy, comes from anticarceral approaches, particularly those led by Indigenous people and people of color (Davis, 2019). Approaching sexual violence perpetration from a noncarceral perspective is something being taken up—though at times removed from these decolonial and antiracist approaches—by universities and other institutions (McMahon et al., 2024). To date, transformative justice for victim-survivors of AOD-facilitated sexual violence has been underexplored and offers a possible new avenue of research and advocacy. Restorative justice processes could also be an opportunity for perpetrators of AOD-facilitated sexual violence to recognize their behaviors and their impact. Transformative justice response broadly highlights the investment from those working with victim-survivors to considering alternative approaches outside of the current criminal-legal approach. Participants advocated for such an approach to focus on restoring power to victim-survivors.

Integrated prevention and response systems that are place-specific while also addressing both specific initiatives and broader issues, such as gender inequality, are key across all ages, stages, and places. Participants talked about needing responses to AOD-facilitated sexual violence that were culturally specific, particularly to the regional and rural context. Such an interconnected prevention approach system must consider the nuanced and place-specific, addressing both specific initiatives and broader issues such as gender inequality. It is crucial to develop strategies that are adaptable to the unique needs of different communities to be effective.

Given that participants were predominantly from regional areas, it is unsurprising that they advocated for location-specific responses relevant to their local community. They suggested embedding responses to and preventing AOD-facilitated sexual violence at key local events as well as having them embedded in community hubs, co-located service spaces. Community responses to sexual violence have been identified as an important approach for prevention (Hooker et al., 2021). However, to date, community-based responses have been underresourced with limited evaluations (DeGue et al., 2016). Existing programs tend to focus on troubling victim-blaming approaches such as drink cover (Clinnick et al., 2024) or training bar staff (Davis et al., 2024; Hooker et al., 2024). Given that drink spiking often garners significant media attention (Clinnick et al., 2024), including in the region where this study took place, it offers an opportunity for large-scale community engagement in prevention.

One of the limitations of the World Café Forum was the voices that were missing in the room. Despite invitations, no one from hospitality attended. Given this is a prominent location for AOD-facilitated sexual violence, it was disappointing that those working in hospitality locally did not attend, but it is perhaps reflective of their unwillingness to see a role in addressing the issue. The other limitation of a World Café Forum is the potential imbalance of power in the room. This can lead to dominant voices, reduced opportunity for dissenting voices, and the potential for certain voices to be silenced. For example, those facilitating discussions were aware that older and more experienced people in the work tended to dominate some of the conversations. This meant that facilitators based at each group discussion needed to deftly negotiate the voices, but there could have been some voices lost in the process.

Conclusion

This article reports findings from a World Café forum that brought together stakeholders from a variety of perspectives and backgrounds to discuss AOD-facilitated sexual violence. The aim of the forum was to produce conditions whereby participants could share knowledge and views on what ought to be done to respond to the issue in their regional area. The findings from discussions have implications for public health. Reflecting a shared view that sexual violence signals deeply embedded gendered power imbalances in society, participants overwhelmingly saw that responding to and preventing AOD-facilitated sexual violence should be chiefly undertaken at the organizational and sociocultural level. A dearth of policy frameworks and initiatives responding to the problem was identified, and it was evident there was a lack of agreement concerning who should assume responsibility for tackling the problem, alongside concern that powerful stakeholders such as licensed venues were rarely held to account. A range of measures were suggested, with a particular focus on the implementation of restorative justice approaches—reflecting the view that social policy and service delivery should restore power to victim-survivors. The importance of community-based responses relevant to local communities was also emphasized alongside targeting the behavior of men (not women)—a perspective that locates responsibility for AOD-facilitated sexual violence with perpetrators.

The full study can be accessed by clicking the ‘Source’ link below

Source: https://journals.sagepub.com/doi/10.1177/10778012251379421

by Boston Herald editorial staff – September 17, 2025

There’s a renewed push to legalize overdose prevention centers  on Beacon Hill, with advocates touting supervised drug use as harm prevention.

That depends on how one defines harm.

At these centers, trained health care workers would supervise individuals who use pre-obtained illicit drugs — and they could intervene and prevent fatal overdoses.

Yes, addicts could avoid overdosing and live another day — another day in which they’d steal or prostitute themselves to buy drugs, another day in which opioids could further damage their mind and body, and another day to stumble through the degradation of a life ruled by drugs.

The real winners? Drug dealers and traffickers. Their clientele may have access to rehabilitative services through these centers, but that cry for help may not come for a long time. Meanwhile, they are willing customers for those “pre-obtained” drugs.

In these progressive parts, the law is to be followed except if you don’t like it. Therefore, these proposals would provide legal protections for workers, drug users accessing the facilities, government officials and other stakeholders. Because the drugs being injected are, of course, illegal.

Rep. Mindy Domb, co-chair of the Joint Committee on Mental Health, Substance Use and Recovery, said Massachusetts last year recorded fewer than 2,000 fatal overdoses, breaking a grim years-long trend.

Yes, naloxone is an amazing thing, and distribution of Narcan has saved many lives from overdoses. But making drug addiction safer with the added net of Narcan is like putting a bandage on a deep wound.

One can’t fight the opioid crisis by prolonging addiction. Keeping up the demand for drugs fuels the supply and the crime that comes with trafficking. And the drug market only gets worse.

Nitazenes have entered the chat.

Last year, a state-funded drug checking program in Massachusetts has found opioids up to 25 times stronger than fentanyl, according to WBUR. In a bulletin, public health officials say the number of drug samples testing positive for nitazenes is small — but growing quickly.

“The more that we crack down on things like fentanyl and heroin, that’s going to lead to the rise of other things that are infiltrating the drug supply,” said Sarah Mackin, director of harm reduction at the Boston Public Health Commission.

“Nitazenes is just the newest thing to come through,” after xylazine, the animal tranquilizer found in 9% of overdose deaths in 2023.

However, an investigation of records from hospital emergency departments published by the JAMA Network found it often takes more doses of naloxone to reverse an overdose when nitazene is involved than it would take to reverse a fentanyl overdose. Further study is needed.

Keeping the drug cycle going, however “safely,” isn’t a step in the right direction, it’s just another foot forward on the addiction treadmill.

We need addiction reduction, stat. We need to fund programs such as Boston Medical Center’s Faster Paths to Treatment, its substance use disorder urgent care program. And we need more of them.

True harm reduction comes from helping addicts get clean so they can live full, productive lives.

Source: https://www.bostonherald.com/2025/09/17/editorial-rehab-is-the-best-harm-prevention-for-addicts/?

by Renata Glavak-Tkalić, Mara Šimunović, Katarina Perić Pavišić, Josip Razum, Desirèe Colombo – – 22 August 2025

 

ABSTRACT

Background

Substance abuse (SA) imposes a significant global health burden, demanding innovative and accessible interventions. Virtual reality (VR) offers a promising approach, providing engaging and personalized treatment experiences. However, rigorous evidence from randomized controlled trials (RCTs) on VR’s efficacy in the treatment and prevention of SA remains limited. This systematic review aimed to characterize VR interventions for substance-related disorders and evaluate their effectiveness.

Methods

To conduct this review, two researchers independently performed a comprehensive literature search across four databases using the Preferred Reporting Items for Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analyses (PRISMA) guidelines.

Results

Twenty RCTs met the inclusion criteria, focusing on alcohol, nicotine and illicit drug use. These studies utilized diverse VR modalities, most frequently exposure therapy (n = 10) and cognitive-behavioural therapy (n = 5), followed by approach bias modification, skills training, cognitive rehabilitation, counterconditioning and psychoeducation. Interventions varied in level of immersion and interactivity. Although the evidence was mixed, 17 studies demonstrated positive effects on at least one outcome variable. Most studies focused on proximal outcomes (e.g., craving), which frequently showed improvement. Clinically meaningful outcomes (e.g., substance use reduction and abstinence) were less frequently assessed, with seven of 10 studies reporting improvement.

Conclusions

VR shows promise in addressing substance-related disorders, particularly for alcohol and nicotine. However, substantial heterogeneity in VR interventions highlights the need for further research to standardize methodologies, optimize treatment parameters and explore the underlying working mechanisms of VR interventions. Additional research is also needed to assess VR’s application to illicit drug use.

Summary

Virtual reality (VR)–based interventions, particularly those that integrate cue exposure therapy and cognitive behavioural therapy, show significant promise in reducing cravings and improving abstinence among individuals using alcohol and nicotine.

VR intervention and prevention programmes have positively impacted attitudes, intentions, cognitive function and physiological responses in substance users, indicating a broader therapeutic potential that extends beyond simply addressing addiction symptoms.

The considerable variability among VR interventions emphasizes the need for greater standardization in methodologies, treatment parameters and outcome measures.

Additional research is necessary to evaluate the applicability and efficacy of VR in the prevention and treatment of illicit drug use.

The full article can be accessed by clicking the ‘Source’ link below:

Source: https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1002/cpp.70144?af=R

by JENNIFER PELTZ Associated Press – September 25, 2025

Every year, tons of heroin, cocaine, methamphetamine and other drugs flow around the world

UNITED NATIONS — Every year, tons of heroin, cocaine, methamphetamine and other drugs flow around the world, an underground river that crisscrosses borders and continents and spills over into violence, addiction and suffering. Yet when nations’ leaders give the U.N. their annual take on big issues, drugs don’t usually get much of the spotlight.

But this was no usual year.

First, U.S. President Donald Trump touted his aggressive approach to drug enforcement, including decisions to designate some Latin American cartels as foreign terrorist organizations and to carry out deadly military strikes on speedboats that he says said were carrying drugs in the southern Caribbean.

“To every terrorist thug smuggling poisonous drugs into the United States of America: Please be warned that we will blow you out of existence,” he boasted at the U.N. General Assembly on Tuesday.

Hours later, his Colombian counterpart fired back that Trump should face criminal charges for allowing an attack on unarmed “young people who were simply trying to escape poverty.”

The U.S. “anti-drug policy is not aimed at the public health of a society, but rather to prop up a policy of domination,” Colombia’s Gustavo Petro bristled, accusing Washington of ignoring domestic drug dealing and production while demonizing his own country. The U.S. recently listed Colombia, for the first time in decades, as a nation falling short of its international drug control obligations.

The barbs laid bare, on global diplomacy’s biggest stage, the world’s wide and pointed differences over how to deal with drugs.

“The international system is extremely divided on drug policy,” said Vanda Felbab-Brown, who has followed the topic as a senior fellow at the Washington-based Brookings Institution think tank. “This is not new, but it’s really just very intense at this UNGA.”

While the wars in Gaza and Ukraine, climate change and other crises got much of the focus in the U.N.’s marathon week of speeches and meetings, the topic of drugs turned up from Trump’s and Petro’s tough talk to side events on such themes as gender-inclusive drug policy and international cooperation to fight organized crime.

Some 316 million people worldwide used marijuana, opioids and/or other drugs in 2023, a 28% rise in a decade, according to the most recent statistics available from the U.N. Office on Drugs and Crime. The figures don’t count alcohol or tobacco use.

The specifics vary by region, with cocaine use growing in Europe, methamphetamine on the rise in Southeast Asia, and synthetic opioids making new inroads in West and Central Africa and continuing to trouble North America, though opioid-related deaths have been falling.

The U.N. drug office says trafficking is increasingly dominated by organized crime groups with tentacles and partnerships around the world, and nations need to think just as broadly about trying to tackle the syndicates.

“Governments are increasingly seeing organized crime and drug trafficking as threats to national and regional security and stability, and some are coming around to the fact that they need to join up diplomatic, intelligence, law enforcement and central-bank efforts to push back,” agency chief of staff Jeremy Douglas said by email.

Although organized crime hasn’t featured very prominently in top-level discussions at the General Assembly to date, he said, “we’re at a point where this needs to, and hopefully will, change.”

Nations pair up in various joint counternarcotics operations and working groups and sometimes form regional coalitions, but some experts and leaders see a need to go global.

Countries need to “pool resources in a fight that must be a common cause among all nations,” Panamanian President José Raúl Mulino told the assembly. He said his nation had seized a “historic and alarming” total of 150 tons of cocaine and other drugs this year alone.

To be sure, there is already some global-scale collaboration on drug control. The U.N. Commission on Narcotic Drugs decides what substances are supposed to be internationally regulated under decades-old treaties, and it can make policy recommendations to the U.N.’s member countries. The International Narcotics Control Board monitors treaty compliance.

But the U.N. is big-tent politics at its biggest, so even as some components of the world body deal with drug enforcement, others emphasize public health programs — substance abuse treatment, overdose prevention and other services — over prohibition and punishments.

The U.N. High Commissioner for Human Rights, Volker Türk, has advocated for decriminalizing at least some drug use while clamping down on illegal markets. Given that policing hasn’t reduced substance use or crime, “the so-called war on drugs has failed, completely and utterly,” he said last year.

Separately, a U.N. Development Programme report last week said punitive drug control had led to deaths and disease among users who shied from seeking help, racial disparities in enforcement, and other societal downsides.

At a gathering marking the report’s release, former Mexican President Ernesto Zedillo deplored that “the global drug control regime has become a substantial part of the problem.”

“The question is: Do governments have the wisdom and courage to act?” asked Zedillo, now a Yale professor and a commissioner of the Global Commission on Drug Policy, a Geneva-based anti-drug-war advocacy group.

The other question is whether they could ever agree on what action to take.

Even if countries agree — or say they do — with ending the drug trade and resulting ills, “the objectives might be different, and certain means, tools, resources they’re willing to devote to them, are different,” Felbab-Brown said.

Nations’ own drug laws vary widely. Some impose the death penalty for certain drug crimes. Others have legalized or decriminalized marijuana. At least one — Thailand — legalized it only to have second thoughts and tighten the rules. Countries’ openness to needle exchange programs, safe injection sites and other “harm reduction” strategies is similarly all over the map.

As leaders took their turns at the assembly rostrum this week, observers got occasional glimpses of the world’s different views of its drug problem.

Tajikistan’s president, Emomali Rahmon, called drug trafficking “a serious threat to global security.” Guyanese President Irfaan Ali endorsed international efforts to address drug trafficking, which he counted among the ”crimes that are destroying the lives of our people, especially young people.”

Syria’s new president, Ahmad al-Sharaa, noted that his administration closed factories that produced the amphetamine-like stimulant Captagon, also known as fenethylline, during his now-ousted predecessor’s time. Costa Rican Foreign Minister Arnoldo André Tinoco said drug smuggling networks are exploiting routes traveled by migrants and “taking advantage of the vulnerability of those seeking international protection.”

“Isolated responses are insufficient,” as the traffickers just go elsewhere and create new hotspots of crime, Tinoco said.

Reviewing the challenges facing Peru, President Dina Boluarte listed transnational organized crime and drug trafficking alongside political polarization and climate change.

“None of these problems is merely national, but rather global,” she said. “This is why we need the United Nations to once again be a forum for dialogue and cooperation.”

Source: https://abcnews.go.com/Health/wireStory/issue-drugs-showcased-general-assembly-year-125919663

by Jan Hoffman – Published Aug. 25, 2025

Jan Hoffman is a health reporter for The New York Times covering drug addiction and health law.

San Francisco, Philadelphia and others are retreating from “harm reduction” strategies that have helped reduce deaths but which critics, including Trump, say have contributed to pervasive public drug use.

Safe drug-consumption materials distributed in the Tenderloin district of San Francisco, including naloxone, pipes and plastic straws.Credit…Mike Kai Chen for The New York Times

As fentanyl propelled overdose deaths to ever more alarming numbers several years ago, public health officials throughout the United States stepped up a blunt, pragmatic response. Desperate to save lives, they tried making drug use safer.

To prevent life-threatening infections, more states authorized needle exchanges, where drug users could get sterile syringes as well as alcohol wipes, rubber ties and cookers. Dipsticks that test drugs for fentanyl were distributed to college campuses and music festivals. Millions of overdose reversal nasal sprays went to homeless encampments, schools, libraries and businesses. And in 2021, for the first time, the federal government dedicated funds to many of the tactics, collectively known as harm reduction.

The strategy helped. By mid-2023, overdose deaths began dropping. Last year, there were an estimated 80,391 drug overdose deaths in the United States, down from 110,037 in 2023, according to provisional data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

Now, across the country, states and communities are turning away from harm reduction strategies.

Last month, President Trump, vowing to end “crime and disorder on America’s streets,” issued a far-flung executive order that included a blast at harm reduction programs which, he said, “only facilitate illegal drug use and its attendant harm.”

But his words, implicitly linking harm reduction to unsafe streets, echoed a sentiment that had already been building in many places, including some of the country’s most liberal cities.

San Francisco’s new mayor, Daniel Lurie, a Democrat who campaigned on a pledge to tackle addiction and street chaos, announced this spring that the city would step away from harm reduction as its drug policy and instead embrace “recovery first,” aspiring to get more people into treatment and long-term recovery. He banned city-funded distribution of safe-use smoking supplies such as pipes and foil in public places like parks. A year earlier, San Francisco voters had signaled their restiveness with pervasive drug use by approving a measure stipulating that some recipients of public assistance who repeatedly refused drug treatment could lose cash benefits.

Philadelphia stopped funding syringe services programs, which the C.D.C. has called “proven and effective” in protecting the public and first-responders as well as drug users. The city put restrictions on mobile medical teams that distribute overdose reversal kits and provide wound care for people who inject drugs, and stepped up police sweeps in Kensington, a neighborhood long known for its open-air drug markets and a focal point of the city’s harm reduction efforts.

Santa Ana, Calif., shut down its syringe exchanges; Pueblo, Colo., tried to do the same but a judge blocked enforcement of the ordinance.

Mayor Daniel Lurie of San Francisco, center, often walks through the Tenderloin district, where people experiencing addiction, mental illness and homelessness gather.Credit…Mike Kai Chen for The New York Times

Republican-dominated states have also been retreating from the approaches. In 2021, West Virginia legislators said that needle exchange programs had to limit distribution to one sterile syringe for each used one turned in and could only serve clients with state IDs. Last year, Nebraska lawmakers voted against permitting local governments to establish exchanges.

“Harm reduction” is a decades-old concept, grounded in the reality that many people cannot or will not stop using drugs. Since the 1980s, when AIDS activists began distributing sterile syringes to drug users to slow the spread of diseases, the expression has moved to the mainstream of addiction medicine and public health.

Over time, it has become shorthand for a wide range of approaches. Some are broadly popular and will certainly continue. In April, the White House’s office of drug control policy released priorities reaffirming support for drug test strips and naloxone, the overdose reversal medication that has become an essential item in first-aid kits in homes, restaurants and school nurse offices.

But critics contend that making drug use safer, with distribution of supplies and pamphlets directing how to use them, normalizes drug use and undercuts people’s motivation to quit and seek abstinence.

“The more you’re sort of funding and feeding the addiction, you’re going to get more addiction,” Art Kleinschmidt, now the head of the federal agency that oversees grants for substance abuse, said on a podcast last year. Such programs, he said, “definitely are breeding dependency.”

Others argue for nuance.

“Harm reduction is neither the singular solution to the overdose crisis nor a primary cause of public drug use and disorder,” said Dr. Aaron Fox, president of the New York Society of Addiction Medicine. “It’s one component of a spectrum of services necessary to prevent overdose deaths and improve the health of people who use drugs. But if communities want long-term solutions to homelessness, they need to work on expanding access to housing.”

Harm reduction supporters reject the notion that protecting people from the worst consequences of drugs encourages use.

“I don’t think the availability of sterile supplies really makes a difference about whether someone is going to start or continue using drugs,” said Chelsea L. Shover, an epidemiologist at the University of California, Los Angeles, who oversees Drug Checking Los Angeles, which tests the contents of drugs for individuals and public health agencies. “But I do think it will make a difference in terms of whether that person is going to be alive in a week or a month or a year, during which time they might get into recovery, whatever that may mean for them.”

Some addiction experts fear that a retreat from harm reduction will reverse the falloff in deaths from injection-related diseases.

“Hepatitis C and H.I.V. numbers will go up, and more people are going to die,” said Dr. Kelly Ramsey, a harm reduction consultant who practices addiction medicine at a South Bronx clinic.

While overdose deaths have fallen, it is unclear whether drug use itself has also slowed. In neighborhoods across the country, from Portland, Maine, to Portland, Ore., many residents complain that the harm to them from drug use, including crime and syringe street litter, has not been reduced.

Mr. Trump particularly called out a type of harm reduction known as “safe consumption sites” — sometimes labeled “overdose prevention centers.” They are supervised locations where people can inject drugs without fatally overdosing, found in Europe, Canada and Mexico. Often drug users can test their supplies right away and staff members can quickly administer overdose reversal medication if needed.

There are only three in the United States, and they make for easy political targets. In addition to many Republicans, prominent Democratic governors, including Gavin Newsom of California, Kathy Hochul of New York and Josh Shapiro of Pennsylvania, oppose them. The Pennsylvania senate voted to ban them. One, in Rhode Island, is protected by state and local law. But the other two, in New York City, which provide treatment referrals and support services, operate in a legal gray zone and could face federal scrutiny.

Opponents of harm reduction offer few specifics about how to get more people to stop using drugs and into treatment. Mr. Trump’s order directs the health secretary and the attorney general to explore laws to civilly commit addicted people who cannot care for themselves into residential treatment “or other appropriate facilities.” But it is silent about how such programs would be paid for.

The administration has already made major cuts to the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, the federal agency that awards grants for prevention, treatment and recovery. It has slashed the agency’s staff and the grants it gives for a wide variety of prevention, intervention and treatment services.

Cuts to Medicaid included in the sweeping domestic policy bill enacted this summer are also likely to affect many people’s access to treatment and states’ ability to cover it. Robert F. Kennedy Jr., the health secretary, who is in recovery from a substance use disorder, has focused on nutrition, chronic disease and vaccines during his first six months in office and has said little about plans to address the drug crisis.

The battle over whether harm reduction should remain a primary goal or be secondary to getting users into treatment and restoring order to public streets has been joined most intensively in San Francisco.

There, ample social services and ferociously expensive housing had contributed to a large population living on the streets, many struggling with mental illness and addiction. Then, by 2020, fentanyl and Covid had slammed into the city.

At public meetings this spring, angry residents brandished signs, some reading “Harm Reduction Saves Lives” and others “Drug Enablism Kills.”

Although the city has adhered to regulations for state-funded Housing First programs, which offer permanent housing for homeless people without requiring them to be drug-free, Mr. Lurie recently presided over the opening of the city’s first transitional sober living residence, with 54 units for adults committed to abstinence.

The drive to adjust the city’s drug policy to recovery first has been led by Matt Dorsey, a member of the San Francisco Board of Supervisors, who is in recovery from a substance use disorder.

In an interview, Mr. Dorsey said he supports aspects of harm reduction, including the distribution of safe supplies. But he sees the strategy as more of a floor than a ceiling. “We need to make clear that the objective of our drug policy is a healthy, self-directed life free of illicit drug use,” he said.

The difficult challenge, he said, was how to attend to the rights of pedestrians who daily confront drug use, while also trying to “help people addicted to life-threatening drugs.”

To pay for additional treatment and services, he said, city officials are working on ballot measures to redirect tax revenue.

“Part of what gives me confidence that we will ultimately find the funding,” Mr. Dorsey added, “is that the alternative is unthinkable.”

 

Source: https://www.nytimes.com/2025/08/25/health/harm-reduction-san-francisco-trump.html

By Jennie Taer – New York Post – Published Aug. 28, 2025, 6:00 a.m. ET

The US is “behind the curve” on fighting a deadly new synthetic narcotic that’s dramatically more lethal than fentanyl and resistant to Narcan, a top DEA agent warns.

Just as authorities in the US and China increase efforts to tackle the scourge of fentanyl, the drug manufacturers, who are motivated by “greed,” shifted to start producing nitazenes — an even deadlier poison, said Drug Enforcement Administration Houston Division Special Agent in Charge Jonathan C. Pullen.

The Trump administration has hit Mexico and China with sanctions and tariffs to force the foreign governments to act against illicit drug producers responsible for the poisonings of thousands of Americans each year.

Nitazenes and other synthetic drugs are often disguised to look like prescription pills.Getty Images

Additionally, with President Trump’s effort to close the southern border, the feds have seen a significant drop in the flow of illicit fentanyl into the US.

But the Chinese pharma companies and cartels have already moved to introduce a new and stronger drug that many authorities are just now learning about, Pullen said.

“And if we get into a place where then we are able to issue controls or China issues more controls on the precursor chemicals that go to these, they’ll just change the analog and it’ll go to another precursor chemical. China’s already done that,” he added.

Nitazenes are produced in China, often with the help of Mexican cartels that finish the product and move it north across the border, according to Pullen.

The potent narcotic can be up to 43 times stronger than fentanyl depending on the formula, according to the Inter-American Drug Abuse Control Commission.

Nitazenes are not included in routine drug tests or toxicology screenings, making them all the more challenging to detect.

While the feds are “making headway” to tackle the new threat, there’s still more work to be done, said Pullen.

“So it’s very very difficult to stay ahead of it, so we’ve got to continue to step up our enforcement along the border,” he said.

“I think that the number of overdose deaths being reduced in the United States is a testament to that. The enforcement is not the only reason its reduced. Naloxone [aka Narcan] is a huge piece too, but we’re definitely making some headway and we’re gonna keep pushing on that.”

There were 80,000 overdose deaths in the US in 2024 — a 27% drop from the 110,000 deaths estimated in 2023, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

While the wider use of Narcan has contributed to the drop in overdose deaths, nitazenes is often resistant to the drug antidote — adding a terrifying new pitfall, Pullen warned.

“It’s incredibly deadly and normal treatment methods like naloxone … don’t work as well on nitazenes because it’s so much stronger,” said Pullen.

“It’s really hard to overcome if you’ve taken one.”

In the Houston-area, there were 15 deaths related to nitazenes and 11 seizures of the drug between November and February, according to the DEA.

Two of the victims were best friends Lucci Reyes-McCallister, 22, and Hunter Clement, 21, who ingested pills marketed as Xanax and Percocet that actually contained N-pyrrolidino protonitazene, a form of nitazenes that is 25 times stronger than fentanyl.

An illustration that highlights the U.S. cities with the highest rates of nitazene-related overdoses.Jared Larson / NY Post Design

And their mothers are warning America’s youth in the hopes of saving lives.

“They could think something is clean or rather safe when it’s actually pressed for something that’s 20 to 40 times stronger, more deadly than fentanyl,” Lucci’s mother Grey recently told The Post.

“It just really lit a fire under me. There was no way Lucci was going to die in vain,” she added.

The drug was developed 60 years ago as a possible alternative to morphine, but was outlawed for medical use over its high overdose risk.

Authorities in Europe have already seen several overdoses from the synthetic narcotic. It was first detected in the US in 2019.

Last January, a Florida man confessed to distributing protonitazene that he received in mailed shipments from China, according to the IRS.

Customs officers at Kennedy are also seeing the drug coming through the airport “at least a few times a week in quantities ranging from just a few grams to upwards of a pound or more,” Andrew Renna, assistant port director for cargo operations at the airport, said in May.

Source: https://nypost.com/2025/08/28/us-news/america-not-ready-to-combat-nitazene-synthetic-opioids-dea-agent/

Although I’ve been deeply concerned about this problem since my days in Sacramento, over the past nearly 8 years, I’ve focused mainly on education, on prevention, and on the need to change attitudes.

NANCY REAGAN
Remarks at the White House Conference for a Drug Free America Washington, D.C. 02/29/1988

The White House

People finally are facing up to drug abuse. They’re banding together, and they’re making real progress. And I just want to say a heartfelt ‘thank you’ to all those people out there who are working so hard to get drug abuse under control.

NANCY REAGAN
Radio Address to the Nation on Federal Drug Policy 10/02/1982

As First Lady, Nancy Reagan focused on fighting drug and alcohol abuse among youth. She expanded the drug awareness campaign to the international level when she invited First Ladies from around the world to the First Lady Conference on Drug Abuse April 24-25, 1985.

“Just Say No”

Thank you for being part of the first international ‘Just Say No’ walk. Look around at how many young people are walking with you today. And just think, there are groups as big as yours, or even bigger, doing the same thing all over the world! Can you imagine just how many children are saying ‘Just Say No’ today? Children everywhere are learning about drug abuse at an early age. And that’s a good thing.

NANCY REAGAN
Remarks at the Just Say No International Walk 05/22/1986

First Lady Nancy Reagan urged the nation’s youth to “just say no.” She appeared on television talk shows, attended rallies and sporting events, taped public service announcements, and wrote guest articles.

Signings

This legislation allows us to do even more. Nevertheless, today marks a major victory in our crusade against drugs – a victory for safer neighborhoods, a victory for the protection of the American family.

President Ronald Reagan
Remarks on Signing the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1986 10/27/1986

The United Nations

In your deliberations, I urge you not to be diplomatic for the sake of diplomacy, but to speak the truth about the effects of drugs on our peoples and our governments. I urge you to be tough and firm in the recommendations you make.

Nancy Reagan
Remarks to the Third Committee of the United Nations General Assembly 10/25/1988

On October 21, 1985, during the United Nation’s 40th anniversary, Nancy Reagan hosted a second international drug conference.

On October 25, 1988, she addressed the Third Committee of the United Nations General Assembly where she spoke about the illegal use of drugs and its impact on families.

The picture below shows the various trips Nancy Regan made in promoting her campaign.

DAYTON, Ohio (WDTN) — The Drug Enforcement Administration is launching a major campaign to combat drug abuse on college campuses.

Officials say it’s an effort to talk directly with students and raise awareness about the dangers of drugs.

“One pill can kill” is the message the Drug Enforcement Administration is pushing in a state that’s a victim of its own geography with the I-70/I-75 interchange.

“Ohio is kind of uniquely positioned. It’s great for commerce, but just like it’s great for commerce is great for drug traffickers as well,” says Brian McNeal.

Brian McNeal is the DEA’s Public Information Officer for the Detroit Division, covering Michigan, Ohio, and Northern Kentucky.

His visit to college campuses comes after a major bust in September where a large amount of drugs — including fentanyl — were seized after being brought into the region from China.

“It’s a demonstration that what happens in other parts of the world can have an impact here in Ohio,” states McNeal.

McNeal says a lot of times, you don’t know what’s in a synthetic opioid. Sometimes it’s filler — like aspirin or caffeine. But other times it’s methamphetamine or even a lethal dose of fentanyl.

McNeal says a big trend they’re seeing now are counterfeit pills, and they’re easier than ever to get.

“Gone are the days where you have to meet somebody in a weird part of town. You can just sit on your phone and order these pills,” states McNeal.

He says half of the counterfeit pills they’re seizing contain two milligrams of fentanyl, which is a deadly dose.

That’s why they’re bringing the campaign to campus to promote drug prevention and provide free resources, and in turn, decrease drug related deaths. 

“A lot of times, college students whether they’re on campus or off campus, there’s this misnomer that maybe if I pop a Percocet or an Adderall, it’ll help me study,” says McNeal. “The only pill that you should take is one prescribed by your doctor, obtained at a legitimate pharmacy, that has your name on it.”

The DEA says young adults ages 18 to 25 make up 11 percent of drug-related emergency room visits. 

Source: https://www.wdtn.com/news/local-news/dea-launches-campaign-on-campuses-warning-of-drug-dangers/

 A new non-opioid pain reliever developed in Japan shows early success in clinical trials, offering hope for safer pain management.
If  effective, it could help curb the opioid crisis by providing a powerful alternative. Credit: Stock

The discovery of a new painkiller offers relief with fewer side effects.

Morphine and other opioids are commonly used in medicine because of their strong ability to relieve pain. Yet, they also pose significant risks, including respiratory depression and drug dependence. To limit these dangers, Japan enforces strict rules that allow only specially authorized physicians to prescribe such medications.

In contrast, the United States saw widespread prescribing of the opioid OxyContin, which fueled a rise in the misuse of synthetic opioids like fentanyl. By 2023, deaths from opioid overdoses had exceeded 80,000, marking the escalation of a nationwide public health emergency now known as the “opioid crisis.”

A new analgesic approach

Opioids may soon face competition. Researchers at Kyoto University have identified a new analgesic, named ADRIANA, that provides pain relief through a completely different biological pathway. The drug is now moving through clinical development as part of an international research collaboration.

“If successfully commercialized, ADRIANA would offer a new pain management option that does not rely on opioids, contributing significantly to the reduction of opioid use in clinical settings,” says corresponding author Masatoshi Hagiwara, a specially-appointed professor at Kyoto University.

Targeting adrenoceptors for safer pain relief

The researchers drew their initial inspiration from compounds that imitate noradrenaline, a chemical released during life-threatening situations that activates α2A-adrenoceptors to reduce pain. While effective, these compounds carry a high risk of destabilizing cardiovascular function. By examining the relationship between noradrenaline levels and α2B-adrenoceptors, the team proposed that selectively blocking α2B-adrenoceptors could increase noradrenaline activity, stimulate α2A-adrenoceptors, and provide pain relief without triggering cardiovascular instability.

  Mechanism of pain relief by ADRIANA. Credit: KyotoU / Hagiwara lab

To test this idea, the scientists used a specialized method called the TGFα shedding assay, which allowed them to measure the function of different α2-adrenoceptor subtypes. Through compound screening, they succeeded in identifying the world’s first selective α2B-adrenoceptor antagonist.

Promising clinical results and future trials

After success in administering the compound to mice and conducting non-clinical studies to assess its safety, physician-led clinical trials were conducted at Kyoto University Hospital. Both the Phase I trial in healthy volunteers and the Phase II trial in patients with postoperative pain following lung cancer surgery yielded highly promising results.

Building on these outcomes, preparations are now underway for a large-scale Phase II clinical trial in the United States, in collaboration with BTB Therapeutics, Inc, a Kyoto University-originated venture company.

As Japan’s first non-opioid analgesic, ADRIANA has the potential not only to relieve severe pain for patients worldwide but could also play a meaningful role in addressing the opioid crisis — a pressing social issue in the United States — and thus contribute to international public health efforts.

“We aim to evaluate the analgesic effects of ADRIANA across various types of pain and ultimately make this treatment accessible to a broader population of patients suffering from chronic pain,” says Hagiwara.

Reference: “Discovery and development of an oral analgesic targeting the α2B adrenoceptor” by Masayasu Toyomoto, Takashi Kurihara, Takayuki Nakagawa, Asuka Inoue, Ryo Kimura, Isao Kii, Teruo Sawada, Takashi Ogihara, Kazuki Nagayasu, Takayuki Kishi, Hiroshi Onogi, Dohyun Im, Hidetsugu Asada, So Iwata, Jumpei Taguchi, Yuto Sumida, Suguru Yoshida, Junken Aoki, Takamitsu Hosoya and Masatoshi Hagiwara, 7 August 2025, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences.
DOI: 10.1073/pnas.2500006122

Funding: Japan Society for the Promotion of Science, Japan Science and Technology Agency, Japan Agency for Medical Research and Development

Source:  https://scitechdaily.com/the-end-of-opioids-new-drug-could-change-the-way-we-treat-severe-pain/

by DAVID EVANS – 19 August 2025

There are established five schedules of controlled substances, to be known as schedules I, II, III, IV, and V.

(1) Schedule I–(A) The drug or other substance has a high potential for abuse.(B) The drug or other substance has no currently accepted medical use in treatment in the United States.(C) There is a lack of accepted safety for use of the drug or other substance under medical supervision.

(2) Schedule II–(A) The drug or other substance has a high potential for abuse.(B) The drug or other substance has a currently accepted medical use in treatment in the United States or a currently accepted medical use with severe restrictions.(C) Abuse of the drug or other substances may lead to severe psychological or physical dependence.
(3) Schedule III–(A) The drug or other substance has a potential for abuse less than the drugs or other substances in schedules I and II.(B) The drug or other substance has a currently accepted medical use in treatment in the United States.(C) Abuse of the drug or other substance may lead to moderate or low physical dependence or high psychological dependence.

(4) Schedule IV–(A) The drug or other substance has a low potential for abuse relative to the drugs or other substances in schedule III.(B) The drug or other substance has a currently accepted medical use in treatment in the United States.(C) Abuse of the drug or other substance may lead to limited physical dependence or psychological dependence relative to the drugs or other substances in schedule III.
(5) Schedule V–(A) The drug or other substance has a low potential for abuse relative to the drugs or other substances in schedule IV.(B) The drug or other substance has a currently accepted medical use in treatment in the United States.(C) Abuse of the drug or other substance may lead to limited physical dependence or psychological dependence relative to the drugs or other substances in schedule IV.

Moving marijuana to Schedule III would not legalize the drug, however, the change would greatly serve to benefit state legalized commercial marijuana companies who would no longer be subject to IRS Section 280E and thus could deduct business expenses and drastically increase their profit margins. This means more advertising and normalization. Not only would this mean that marijuana corporations would be able to deduct expenses for advertisements appealing to youth and the sale of kid-friendly marijuana gummies, but it would also dramatically increase the industry’s commercialization ability.


Source:  www.drugwatch.org  (drug-watch-international@googlegroups.com)

by UNODC – 20 August 2025

For over three decades, the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) has supported non-governmental organizations (NGOs) in low- and middle-income countries implement substance use prevention projects that benefit youth around the world. This support has been made possible through the ongoing contributions of the Drug Abuse Prevention Centre (DAPC) in Japan since 1994. The DAPC Grants Programme enables civil society organizations to initiate and scale up prevention activities for youth and with youth aligned with the UNODC/WHO International Standards on Drug Use Prevention. The grants also empower young people to take active roles in supporting the health and wellbeing of their peers.

Following the 2024 Call for Proposals, which attracted more than 500 applications (more than double the previous year’s submissions), UNODC selected four new DAPC grant recipients through a multi-phased competitive process. Grantees from Cambodia, Iraq, Sri Lanka, and Zimbabwe will soon begin implementing their projects to support youth through locally grounded prevention efforts.

The Youth Aspire Development Trust, based in Zimbabwe, will be implementing their SPARK (Substance Prevention and Awareness for Resilient Knowledgeable Communities) project.  The grantee will engage with schools and communities in the Chitungwiza region of Zimbabwe targeting students, teachers and parents. Teachers from local schools will receive training on classroom-based prevention strategies, early detection of risky behaviours, and ways to foster positive school climates. Students will also be selected as peer leaders and be equipped with life skills, refusal techniques, and resilience training to lead cascade sessions and positively influence other peers. Complementing these efforts, the grantee will also engage parents to strengthen their role in creating protective home environments for their family. And finally, to expand the reach of the programme, trained teachers and parents will conduct cascade trainings within schools and communities.

The Alcohol and Drug Information Centre (ADIC) in Sri Lanka will implement the project “Peer Power: Youth-Driven Substance Use Prevention and Resilience Building” in Colombo. Youth facilitators will be trained to mentor younger peer leaders, who will deliver interactive, skills-based workshops in local communities and schools with the support of ADIC’s resource persons. The project includes a baseline survey, capacity building for youth, creation of a tailored action plan, peer-to-peer education sessions, community and family engagement activities, and social media campaigns developed by youth. By combining in-person outreach with digital platforms, the project aims to enhance youth resilience and decision-making, empower and educate youth leaders, and strengthen community support for such initiatives.

In Cambodia, the grantee Mith Samlanh will implement its “Peer Prevention: A Youth-Driven Project Against Drugs” project by combining national and community-level initiatives. A national multimedia campaign, developed together with youth, will raise awareness about the risks of drug use through videos and prevention messages, reaching young people across social media platforms. In parallel, in-person awareness sessions will engage directly with communities in vulnerable areas of Phnom Penh, helping to bridge the digital divide and reach those who may not be active online. The grantee will also develop and integrate a Drug Prevention module into Mith Samlanh’s existing soft skills training for at-risk individuals, using evidence-informed methods to build resilience and enhance life skills. Additionally, a cascade Training of Trainers modality will strengthen local capacity by preparing teachers, social workers, youth champions, and local authorities to deliver prevention messaging and trainings to support youth and families across Phnom Penh.

In Iraq, the Bestan Child Society (Bustan Association) will implement the “Building Community Power to Prevent Youth Drug Use” project. The grantee will engage with community influencers such as teachers, sports coaches, youth leaders, and journalists to strengthen the local prevention capacity. Trained as prevention champions, they will integrate drug awareness and life skills into sports, arts, and peer-led activities that will be conducted in the target communities. Youth will also take part as informal peer educators through the 3S Initiative (Sport–Smile–Sleep), which will promote resilience and healthy lifestyles in young people.  Also, youth co-created awareness materials will further extend the project’s reach through social media and community events.

UNODC is pleased to support these four new diverse projects under the DAPC Grants Programme. Each initiative reflects a strong commitment to prevention aligned with the Standards, youth engagement, and community-level action — key elements in building healthier lifestyles and safer environments for young people to grow and thrive in. For more information about the DAPC grants projects and the programme, please visit the Youth Initiative website and stay up to date through the UNODC PTRS social media channels  (X, LinkedIn, Facebook).

Source:  https://www.unodc.org/unodc/prevention/youth-initiative/youth-action/2025/August/introducing-new-dapc-grant-funded-projects.html

Issued by U.S. Customs and Border Protection  – Thu, 08/21/2025

NEW YORK — U.S. Customs and Border Protection Deputy Commissioner John Modlin delivered remarks at a National Fentanyl Prevention and Awareness Day event today in Times Square.

The annual event, hosted by the nonprofit Facing Fentanyl, brings together impacted families and federal, state, and local law enforcement to draw national attention to the synthetic opioid epidemic.

“On behalf of the more than 65,000 fathers and mothers, and sons and daughters, who are also agents, officers and professional staff of CBP, we mourn with those who have lost a loved one to fentanyl poisoning,” said Deputy Commissioner Modlin. “Every hour of every day of the year, CBP is enforcing the law, across the land, in the air, and on the sea. Fentanyl is not just a public health threat – it’s a weapon. Any group that tries to poison Americans will face U.S. law enforcement and national security authorities.”

CBP supports the nation’s fight against fentanyl by prioritizing counter-fentanyl efforts across all operational environments. This includes stopping the ingredients, equipment, and the drug itself from entering or moving through the U.S. CBP has significantly increased its efforts to find and seize fentanyl at border crossings and checkpoints, using a variety of methods, such as officers’ instincts, drug-sniffing dogs, advanced scanning technology, artificial intelligence, and intelligence gathering to target and stop smugglers.

CBP’s approach to combatting fentanyl has grown to also include taking down the criminal groups that ship fentanyl, its ingredients, and pill-making equipment into the U.S. By working closely with law enforcement agencies both within the U.S. and in other countries, CBP helps investigate the larger criminal organizations, not just the individuals caught smuggling drugs at the border.

Fentanyl is a very dangerous drug that CBP first encountered in its final form around 2013-2014. Even a very small amount can be deadly. It’s cheap and easy to make, and there’s a high demand for it. Just one kilogram (about 2.2 pounds) of fentanyl already mixed into pills makes just over 9,000 pills. In contrast, one kilogram of fentanyl powder can make roughly 80,000 pills.

National Fentanyl Prevention and Awareness Day serves as a vital platform to highlight the devastating impact of synthetic opioids and the ongoing efforts to combat this epidemic. CBP’s participation underscores its unwavering commitment to protecting American communities and saving lives.

For more information on National Fentanyl Prevention and Awareness Day, visit DEA Fentanyl Awareness.

by Kevin Sabet  August 22, 2025 

In 2018, 27-year-old Bryn Spejcher, an inexperienced marijuana smoker in California, killed her boyfriend Chad O’Melia by stabbing him 108 times, a crime the local district attorney described as “horrific” and “one of the worst our medical examiner has ever seen.” A jury found Spejcher guilty of involuntary manslaughter, but she received only probation at sentencing because of a compelling presentation of her defense of cannabis-induced psychosis. Prior to the violent incident, Spejcher had taken two hits of legal marijuana from a bong, and claimed that she began “seeing things that weren’t there” and lost touch with reality. She also stabbed herself repeatedly in the neck, and stabbed her own dog. Law enforcement agents called to the scene had to break her arm with a metal baton to get her to let go of the knife; multiple Taserings had no effect. 

Cases like Spejcher’s illustrate the stakes involved in the federal reclassification of marijuana. If President Trump follows through with such a move, the drug would remain illegal on the federal level, but would receive an imprimatur of being safer and face fewer restrictions, with significant commercial and social implications.  

Yet voices across public discourse persist in asking: why should anyone care if President Trump does just that? 

Celebrities like Mike Tyson and Joe Rogan and hedge-fund bosses like Andrew Lahde tell us that marijuana is no big deal. Numerous states have already legalized it for medical and recreational usage, and they claim to be regulating it well. If we are to believe the advocates, marijuana is a miracle cure for PTSD, anxiety, depression, and bipolar disorder — not to mention an unbeatable salve for the pain suffered by cancer patients.

So what sense does it make for this drug to sit in the same federal category as PCP and heroin? Isn’t marijuana’s placement in Schedule I, the most serious category, merely a relic of discredited thinking from the bad old days of the War on Drugs? It isn’t. To understand why it isn’t, and why a Trump move to reclassify weed would risk unmitigated harm to American health and safety, it’s first important to clear up some common misunderstandings around how and why drugs end up classified as they do.  

Under the Controlled Substances Act of 1971, a five-part schedule was established for classification of potentially dangerous drugs. This schedule is emphatically not an index either of a drug’s “hardness” or a kind of unofficial charging and sentencing guide for prosecutors and judges. Placement is earned specifically through consideration of a drug’s accepted medical use and its abuse risk. Drugs with no accepted medical use and a high risk of abuse get placed in Schedule I.  

That’s the commonality between marijuana and heroin; under federal law, the relevant agencies necessarily view them that way.  

Neither has an accepted medical use, though both drugs have approved medicines derived from them that remain in lower schedules (the medicine dronabinol, for example, is synthesized THC, the active ingredient in marijuana, and is in Schedule III). Both have high risks of abuse. The argument that one is a “hard” drug and the other is not  — which is debatable, especially given today’s ultra-high-potency weed — simply doesn’t come into play.  

Nor does the criminal-justice question. Keeping marijuana in Schedule I isn’t, as critics have it, a carceral strategy; conversely, moving it into Schedule III isn’t a de-carceral one. Under a move to Schedule III, the drug would remain federally illegal, still subject to the enforcement power of the Drug Enforcement Administration and the Department of Justice. No low-level offender would see his sentence commuted. This is sort of beside the point anyway, since most low-level marijuana users never receive a sentence for anything. 

But how can it be, another objection runs, that the drug has no medical use? Most US states currently allow doctors to recommend it. 

That, again, is technically correct. But the decisions those states made to allow doctors (and in some cases, “designated caregivers”) to recommend marijuana to treat pain and other issues were political decisions, not medical or scientific ones. Voters stated a preference; that has no effect on how federal agencies are required by current law to view the question. The facts of just how those recommendations get handed out drive home that political aspect. In 2022, Pennsylvania saw some 132,000 medical-marijuana certifications, a third of the state’s total for that year, issued by only 17 doctors.

Those decisions, taken in the aggregate, don’t constitute an accepted medical use. Or at least, they didn’t until October 2022. That was the month the Biden administration directed its Department of Health and Human Services to look into a possible reclassification of the drug.  

“This schedule is emphatically not an index either of a drug’s ‘hardness’ or a kind of unofficial charging and sentencing guide.”

Again, history is important here. Before the Biden process, the federal government had used an eight-factor test to determine how to schedule various drugs. Those factors focus on what the current and historical patterns of its abuse look like, as well as what that means for individual users, what risk it presents to public health, how likely it is to cause dependence (either physical or psychological), the state of the science around the drug and its pharmacology, and whether it’s a chemical precursor or “analogue” of another controlled substance.  

By these metrics, marijuana is precisely where it belongs in Schedule I. The best science shows that it isn’t an effective medical treatment. One of the most frequent conditions it’s used to treat is chronic pain. But the 2017 study cited to prove its efficacy there has seen dozens of subsequent meta-analyses and reviews fail to support its conclusions; a 2022 study of a decade’s worth of surgical records from a Cleveland hospital even found that using marijuana actually increases pain after surgery. 

The data also demonstrate that marijuana poses a significant risk of dependency: addiction rates are around 30% of all users and rising. Addiction in this case means exactly what it does for other substances: inability to quit, a need for ever more of the drug to achieve the same effect, and even withdrawal symptoms. Given the recent avalanche of data cataloguing marijuana’s harms specifically to cardiac and mental health — like a June British Medical Journal review  connecting it to a two-fold risk of cardiovascular death or the massive Danish study from 2023 suggesting that as much as 30% of schizophrenia cases among men between 21 and 30 were linked to cannabis-use disorder — its wider public-health risks are glaringly clear.  

The Biden administration supplanted the eight factors with a new system seemingly designed to push the drug into a less restrictive schedule. The Biden recommendation — likely a political compromise between the status quo and full legalization, timed just before Joe Biden’s re-election bid — also incorporated the shaky argument that because so many states have made political decisions to allow medical marijuana, that constitutes an accepted medical use.

An incisive article in JAMA Neurology, by the Harvard addiction scientist Bertha Madras, took a hard look at the process and found disturbing evidence of politicization. This included the fact that a high-ranking Biden DOJ official, Acting Assistant Attorney General Peter Hyun, argued that “cannabis has not been proven in scientific studies to be a safe and effective treatment for any disease or condition” — six months before the rescheduling directive appeared. Yet the science Hyun cites certainly had not changed in the interim.  

The federal government has long held the position Hyun laid out. Under the Obama administration, Jay Inslee and Gina Raimondo — then the governors of Washington and Rhode Island, respectively — petitioned the federal government to reclassify marijuana. The administration’s response made clear that federal drug schedules reflect what the science says, not “danger” or “severity.” Obama’s then-DEA chief, Chuck Rosenberg, announcing the denial of the petition, used language Hyun would later echo: “This decision isn’t based on danger. This decision is based on whether marijuana, as determined by the FDA, is a safe and effective medicine . . . and it’s not.”

Suggested reading

I have seen the damage cannabis does

By Peter Hurst

But let’s assume, for the sake of argument, that Trump reverses years of federal precedent to follow the logic of the rescheduling argument. What happens then? 

The truth: no one knows.  

It’s clear that the marijuana industry believes that rescheduling will be an enormous benefit to its shareholders. In one sense, that’s likely correct. Businesses selling substances in Schedule I face severe commercial restrictions under the tax code. A provision of the tax code prevents any such business from taking normal deductions at tax time on expenses like advertising. Lifting those restrictions seems sure to provide an enormous boost to revenues and reach for businesses selling marijuana products.

The impact on society is a different matter. The available evidence suggests that this will be a significant negative for society, especially given the research around how the young start using the drug: data published in June by researchers from the University of Southern California and Rutgers University show that exposure to marijuana social-media content plays a huge role in teens initiating use.  

But there are other externalities in play.  

If marijuana moves into Schedule III, it will be the only substance there without Food and Drug Administration approval. Will that play out in a similar way to the case of opium-poppy straw (i.e., the entirety of the plant, as it exists prior to the processes that turn it into heroin or opium)? Poppy straw is listed in Schedule II, but it also lacks an FDA approval — and it’s regularly seized by drug and border authorities, with a massive shipment grabbed up just in May. Though weed entrepreneurs clearly expect smooth sailing after a reclassification, they may well be in for a rough ride.

Then there’s the fact that substances listed in Schedule III face additional regulatory and enforcement power: Not only from the DEA and DOJ, but also from the FDA. There are strict rules around what sellers of Schedule III substances can and can’t say in advertisements. They’re forbidden from advertising off-label uses — and since marijuana lacks an FDA approval, all therapeutic uses are off-label. It’s easy to imagine another operator in the Schedule III space filing a lawsuit demanding precisely that kind of enforcement. 

In other words, rescheduling opens the door to regulatory chaos, even as it seems certain to add commercial firepower to an industry whose products, on the evidence, are extraordinarily harmful. How this combination will produce the benefits promised by proponents of rescheduling also remains unclear. 

The federal government shouldn’t signal to the American people that a drug that lacks medical or scientific imprimatur somehow possesses such approval. Others disagree — and vocally. They have a lot of money riding on it. But we should be crystal clear about what their preferred policy would  actually mean for American society — nothing good. 

Kevin Sabet, a former three-time White House senior drug-policy adviser, is president of Smart Approaches to Marijuana.

Source:  https://unherd.com/2025/08/the-illusion-of-safe-marijuana/?edition=us?

by

  • Thomas Kennedy GreenfieldSenior Scientist, Alcohol Research Group, Public Health Institute
  • Libo LiPublic Health Institute, Alcohol Research Grouphttps://orcid.org/0000-0001-7147-9838
  • Katherine J. Karriker-JaffeResearch Triangle Institutehttps://orcid.org/0000-0002-2019-0222
  • Cat MunroePublic Health Institute, Alcohol Research Grouphttps://orcid.org/0000-0002-6950-7200
  • Deidre PattersonPublic Health Institute, Alcohol Research Grouphttps://orcid.org/0000-0002-6775-9682
  • Erica RosenCalifornia State University, Long Beachhttps://orcid.org/0000-0003-1343-7554
  • Yachen ZhuPublic Health Institute, Alcohol Research Grouphttps://orcid.org/0000-0002-8192-6168
  • William C. Kerr Centre Director, Scientific Director, Public Health Institute, Alcohol Research Grouphttps://orcid.org/0000-0001-6612-9200

August 22, 2025

This study from PHI’s Alcohol Research Group and RTI International evaluated the associations between a seven-item summative burden scale and different types of harms attributed to someone else’s use of alcohol, cannabis or other drugs.

There is a growing body of research on the second-hand harms from alcohol and drug use that points to the negative health impacts of substance use extend beyond the individual engaged in the behavior. The literature on alcohol-related harms has explored the connections between secondhand alcohol and drug harms (ADH) and their impact on quality of life, well-being and mental health issues among those affected, often including family members, but there hasn’t been any specific research done on the family burden related to alcohol and other drug harms until now.

This study from PHI’s Alcohol Research Group and independent scientific research institute RTI International evaluates the familial burden of the secondhand ADHs, investigating associations between a seven-item summative burden scale and different types of harms attributed to someone else’s use of alcohol, cannabis or other drugs. The findings reveal the need for family support interventions and policy remedies to mitigate these burdens.

You can view the study here:

Background: Family burden has not been studied in relation to alcohol and other drug harms from others. We adapted a family burden scale from studies of caring for those with mental health conditions for use in the US Alcohol and Drug Harm to Others Survey (ADHTOS). We investigated associations between a seven-item summative burden scale and different types of harms attributed to someone else’s use of alcohol, cannabis, or another drug: (a) being assaulted/physically harmed; (b) having family/partner problems; (c) feeling threatened or afraid; and (d) being emotionally hurt/neglected due to others’ substance use.

Methods: A survey of adults aged 18 years and over conducted between October 2023 and July 2024 (= 8,311), involved address-based sampling (n = 3,931 including 193 mail-backs) and web panels (n = 4,380), oversampling Black (n = 951), Latinx (n = 790) and sexual or gender minority (SGM) respondents (n = 309). Data from seven items on types of burdens experienced from other people’s alcohol or drug use were provided by those harmed by someone else’s alcohol or drug use and were used to create a burden scale. Analyses used negative binomial regression on burden sum adjusting for covariates, such as age, gender, race and ethnicity, marital status and years of education.

ResultsThe single factor burden scale showed good internal consistency (α = .91). Components assessing being emotionally drained/exhausted and family friction/arguments were endorsed by 38–39% of participants; finding stigma of the other’s substance use upsetting was affirmed by 33%. Fewer endorsed feeling trapped in caregiving roles (22%), problems outside the family (26%), neglect of other family members’ needs (16%), and having to change plans (14%). In adjusted regression models, seven of eight harm exposures were significantly associated with burden scores.

Discussion: People reported substantial burden from others’ use of alcohol, cannabis, and other drugs. Family support interventions and policy remedies to mitigate these burdens are needed.

About RTI International

RTI International is an independent scientific research institute dedicated to improving the human condition. Our vision is to address the world’s most critical problems with technical and science-based solutions in pursuit of a better future. Clients rely on us to answer questions that demand an objective and multidisciplinary approach—one that integrates expertise across social, statistical, data, and laboratory sciences, engineering, and other technical disciplines to solve the world’s most challenging problems.

Source:  https://www.phi.org/thought-leadership/study-evaluating-family-burden-among-us-adults-experiencing-secondhand-harms-from-alcohol-cannabis-or-other-drug-use/

 


CHARLES CITY COUNTY, Va. (WRIC) — The Charles City County Elementary School will soon re-introduce a program focused on drug prevention and awareness for the 2025-26 academic year.

According to a release from the sheriff’s office, the program, DARE — Drug Abuse Resistance Education program — will come to the elementary school for the upcoming school year.

SRO Corporal Tramayne Mayo, who developed a curriculum to teach the program, reportedly attended a two-week training course as required by DARE to instruct.

“We are excited to get this program back into our school system,” said Jayson Crawley, Sheriff of Charles City County. “We feel that early education of the dangers of drugs should be taught to our youths and can have a significant positive impact on the decisions they make when faced with drugs. This is just part of our continued efforts to deter illegal drug activity in our county.”

Opioid settlement money awarded to all jurisdictions in the Commonwealth from a reported lawsuit filed against prescription drug companies will help fund the program, per the sheriff’s office.

8News previously reported that, in June, Virginia joined all other states and some U.S. territories in agreeing to sign a $7.4 billion settlement with Purdue Pharma and members of the Sackler family who own the company for their part in perpetuating the opioid crisis.

As a result, the state will receive as much as $103.8 million from this settlement over the next 15 years — funding which will go toward local prevention, treatment and recovery efforts, as previously reported by 8News.

Source:  https://www.wric.com/news/local-news/charles-city-county/dare-program-charles-city-elementary-2025-2026/

by Emily Murray – August 11, 2025

Fake pills remain a threat, with 5 out of 10 pills tested containing potentially lethal doses of fentanyl.

OMAHA, Nebraska – As students across the state prepare to return to school, the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) Omaha Division is encouraging families to have open conversations about the potentially lethal consequences of drug experimentation and the threat posed by drug dealers on social media.

In Nebraska, DEA has seized more than 145,000 fentanyl pills in the first seven months of 2025. This number is more than triple the amount seized by DEA in Nebraska in all of 2024 and represents close to 85,000 deadly doses of fentanyl removed from communities.

Social media plays a significant role in the life of students and cartels are taking advantage of this audience. Parents and caregivers are encouraged to emphasize the dangers associated with buying pills online. In Nebraska, DEA has seized fentanyl pills made to resemble common prescription medications such as Xanax ®, Adderall ® and Oxycodone ®. Never trust your eyes to determine if a pill is legitimate or counterfeit. The only safe medications are prescribed by a trusted medical professional and dispensed by a licensed pharmacist.

“We know that a lot of families sit down at the start of a new school year to go over things like dealing with bullies, taking precautions when walking home and staying organized with classes,” DEA Omaha Division Acting Special Agent in Charge Rafael Mattei said. “We want families to engage on the tough topics including the use of social media for buying and selling drugs. One pill can kill. Let’s raise awareness in our communities and prevent families from suffering a tragic loss of life.”

For families unsure how to begin a conversation on the dangers of drug use, the DEA has resources and fact sheets available online: https://www.dea.gov/onepill/partner-toolbox. Conversation starters, information on drugs including street names and side effects, and helpful tips on ways to stay engaged in these important conversations year-round, are available based on age and grade.

Source:  https://www.dea.gov/press-releases/2025/08/11/drug-enforcement-administration-encourages-open-conversations-dangers

OPINION: Eric Adams is right 
Charles Fain Lehman is a fellow at the Manhattan Institute and senior editor of City Journal.

Can New York clean up its public drug-use problem?

Mayor Eric Adams aims to try: On Thursday, he called on the state Legislature to allow clinicians and judges to compel people into treatment when their drug use is hurting them and the city.

“We must help those struggling finally get treatment, whether they recognize the need for it or not,” Adams said at an event hosted by the Manhattan Institute (where I work).  

“Addiction doesn’t just harm individual users; it tears apart lives, families and entire communities, and we must change the system to keep all New Yorkers safer.”

Adams’ proposed state law, the Compassionate Interventions Act, may face an uphill battle in Albany, as “harm reduction” advocates assail it as coercive and dangerous.

But involuntary treatment should be a tool in New York’s arsenal for dealing with the public drug use that has plagued it for years.

Last year it reported nearly 4,000 homeless residents with a history of chronic substance use — probably an undercount, as such people are less likely to be identified by the city’s annual late-night census.

Regardless, it’s not hard to find people shooting up on New York’s streets — just visit the Hub in The Bronx or Washington Square Park in Manhattan.

Such behavior makes whole swaths of the city unlivable.

Public drug use hurts both users — there were more than 2,100 overdose deaths in the five boroughs last year — and the places where they use.

It deters commerce, and creates environments conducive to more serious crime.

Too often the city has responded to these situations with benign neglect, exemplified by its two “supervised consumption sites,” which give people a place to use with Narcan-wielding staff standing by.

These sites continue to operate, in spite of the fact that they don’t work and violate federal law.

Leaving people free to abuse drugs, it turns out, doesn’t save lives.

 

 

 

 

Involuntary treatment, by contrast, tries to correct the behavior that drives drug users to hurt both themselves and others.

That’s why 37 other states already permit it — and why New York under Adams’ plan would join them.

Critics will insist that involuntary drug treatment doesn’t work, and that people have to want to change.

But the balance of the evidence suggests that involuntary treatment performs as well as voluntary treatment.

That’s backed up both by older research on California’s involuntary-treatment scheme, and by strong indications that drug courts, which route drug offenders into treatment instead of prison, can reduce recidivism.

Opponents will also say that it’s immoral to compel people to get treatment they don’t want, and that it violates their “bodily autonomy.”

But there’s no right to shoot up in public spaces, or to ruin your body with fentanyl. And New Yorkers should have the right to expect their public spaces to be free from disorder, including public drug use.

The biggest challenge for Adams, though, may be the state’s limited treatment capacity.

New York state as a whole has only 134 long-term residential treatment facilities.

As of 2023, the most recent available data, they were serving 2,935 clients — fewer than the city’s tallied homeless drug-addict population.

Implementing the Compassionate Interventions Act will almost certainly require more funding for treatment beds, much as Adams’ previous efforts to institutionalize the seriously mentally ill did. That will have to be part of any ask in Albany.

But the mayor’s proposal will also allow diversion to outpatient treatment programs, including a new $27 million investment in contingency management therapy — an evidence-based intervention that has been shown to help treat drug addiction.

What happens if Albany says no to Adams’ proposal? Or if Adams is out of the mayoralty come the next legislative session?

The NYPD can still work to clear encampments. And the city can still try to divert drug users into its drug-courts system, which, while useful, faces administrative problems and lacks transparency.

But actually getting drug users the help they need, rather than just cycling them through the city’s jails, will be hard — much as the administration struggled to handle the seriously mentally ill before it had the power to compel them into treatment.

SOURCE: https://nypost.com/2025/08/14/opinion/involuntary-treatment-can-solve-the-public-drug-scourge/

 

From CDC Media Relations – August 5, 2025
Illustration: Free Mind Campaign

The back-to-school season is a great time to engage with youth about mental health and substance use to promote their well-being throughout the academic year. To support these conversations, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has launched Free Mind, a new national campaign that provides youth ages 12-17 and their parents and caregivers with resources and information about substance use, mental health, and the connection between the two.

The drug overdose crisis is constantly evolving and remains an important public health issue. In 2024, more than 80,000 Americans died from a drug overdose. From 2020 to 2024, 75% of overdose deaths among youth ages 10–19 involved illegally made fentanyl. In addition, the number of teens reporting poor mental health has increased in the past decade. In 2023, 40% of high school students stopped regular activities because of persistent feelings of sadness or hopelessness and one in five students seriously considered attempting suicide.

“Teens may use alcohol and other substances to help them cope with stress, anxiety, and depression,” said Dr. Allison Arwady, Director of the CDC National Center for Injury Prevention and Control. “Talking openly about mental health and substance use, and knowing when to get professional help, is critical to helping teens stay healthy. That’s why this campaign supports youth, parents, and caregivers in having those conversations early, before an issue arises.”

CDC spoke directly with youth about their knowledge and perceptions regarding substance use to develop messages, branding, and tactical strategies for Free Mind. The campaign seeks to resonate with this age group by addressing the connections between substance use and mental health, risk factors that contribute to drug use, and strategies to keep them safe. CDC also has created resources for parents and caregivers about the latest substance use and mental health challenges youth may face.

Source:  https://www.cdc.gov/media/releases/2025/2025-cdc-launches-new-campaign-to-address-youth-substance-use-and-mental-health.html

Physical activity emerges as a powerful ally in exercise addiction recovery, offering hope and healing for those struggling with substance dependency. Recent groundbreaking research reveals how structured exercise programmes can reshape both body and mind, providing a natural pathway to wellness that supports long-term recovery goals.

The Science Behind Exercise Addiction Recovery

Two comprehensive studies from leading institutions demonstrate the remarkable impact of physical activity on individuals recovering from substance dependency. Research involving 90 participants in opioid substitution treatment and 43 individuals in drug rehabilitation centres reveals compelling evidence for physical activity recovery benefits.

Neurohormonal Changes Through Exercise

Exercise creates profound changes in the brain’s chemistry that directly counteract the damage caused by substance abuse. When individuals engage in regular moderate-intensity aerobic exercise, their bodies experience:

Increased β-endorphin production: These natural “feel-good” chemicals help restore the brain’s reward system, reducing cravings and improving mood without relying on substances.

Reduced cortisol levels: Exercise helps normalise stress hormone production, which is typically elevated during early recovery phases. This reduction helps manage anxiety, insomnia, and psychological distress.

Enhanced immune function: Regular exercise addiction recovery programmes boost white blood cell and neutrophil counts, strengthening the body’s natural defence systems weakened by substance abuse.

Physical Transformations Supporting Recovery

Body Composition Improvements

Research participants following structured exercise programmes showed remarkable physical changes after 24 weeks:

  • Significant reduction in body fat percentage
  • Increased skeletal muscle mass
  • Improved overall body composition
  • Enhanced physical strength and endurance

These improvements aren’t merely cosmetic—they represent fundamental changes that support sustained recovery by improving self-esteem and physical capability.

Fitness and Functional Capacity

Physical activity recovery programmes deliver measurable improvements across multiple fitness domains:

Cardiovascular health: Participants experienced substantial increases in vital capacity and overall cardiovascular function, supporting better oxygen delivery throughout the body.

Strength and endurance: Upper body and core muscle strength showed significant improvements, enabling individuals to engage more fully in daily activities and work responsibilities.

Flexibility and balance: Enhanced balance control and flexibility reduce injury risk whilst improving quality of life and confidence in physical activities.

Mental Health Benefits of Exercise Addiction Recovery

Anxiety and Depression Relief

The research demonstrates that structured exercise provides substantial mental health benefits:

  • 20% reduction in anxiety scores within 12 weeks
  • Significant decrease in depression symptoms sustained throughout the programme
  • Improved emotional regulation and stress management
  • Enhanced self-confidence and body awareness

The Mind-Body Connection

Exercise programmes that emphasise mind-body integration, such as Pilates, show particular promise. These activities combine physical movement with breath control and mental focus, helping individuals:

  • Develop greater body awareness
  • Learn effective stress management techniques
  • Build emotional resilience
  • Establish healthy coping mechanisms

Types of Exercise for Addiction Recovery

Aerobic Exercise

Moderate-intensity aerobic exercise performed at approximately 70% of maximum heart rate proves most effective for exercise addiction recovery. Activities include:

  • Treadmill walking or running
  • Cycling
  • Swimming
  • Group fitness classes

The key lies in consistency—training three times per week for 20-minute sessions produces measurable neurohormonal improvements.

Mind-Body Practices

Research specifically highlights the benefits of Pilates training for individuals in recovery:

  • Progressive intensity programmes that adapt to improving fitness levels
  • Emphasis on core strength and stability
  • Integration of breathing techniques with movement
  • Low injury risk suitable for deconditioned individuals

Creating Sustainable Exercise Addiction Recovery Programmes

Professional Supervision

Successful physical activity recovery requires proper oversight:

  • Medical clearance before beginning exercise
  • Trained supervision during sessions
  • Heart rate monitoring to ensure appropriate intensity
  • Progressive programme design that prevents overexertion

Long-Term Commitment

The research emphasises that benefits accumulate over time. Participants showed:

  • Initial improvements within 4-6 weeks
  • Significant changes by 12 weeks
  • Maximum benefits achieved after 24 weeks of consistent training

Integration with Comprehensive Care

Exercise works best as part of a holistic recovery approach that includes:

  • Professional counselling and therapy
  • Medical support as needed
  • Peer support networks
  • Structured daily routines

Practical Implementation Strategies

Starting an Exercise Programme

For individuals beginning their recovery journey, successful exercise addiction recovery programmes typically include:

Foundation PhaseWeek 1-4:

  • Low-intensity activities focusing on movement quality
  • 40-50% maximum heart rate
  • Emphasis on learning proper techniques

Development PhaseWeek 5-12

  • Moderate intensity training
  • 60-70% maximum heart rate
  • Increased session duration and frequency

Maintenance PhaseWeek 13-24

  • Sustained moderate-intensity exercise
  • Focus on long-term habit formation
  • Integration of preferred activities

Monitoring Progress

Successful programmes track multiple indicators:

  • Physical fitness improvements (strength, endurance, flexibility)
  • Mental health assessments (anxiety and depression scales)
  • Body composition changes
  • Adherence to exercise schedule

The Role of Exercise in Long-Term Recovery

Preventing Relapse

Physical activity recovery programmes address key relapse triggers:

  • Providing healthy stress relief mechanisms
  • Improving mood naturally through endorphin release
  • Building structured daily routines
  • Enhancing self-efficacy and confidence

Social Benefits

Group exercise activities offer additional advantages:

  • Peer support and accountability
  • Shared goals and achievements
  • Reduced isolation and loneliness
  • Development of healthy social connections

Building Support Networks

Family and Friends

Loved ones play crucial roles in supporting exercise addiction recovery:

  • Encouraging consistent participation
  • Participating in activities together when possible
  • Celebrating milestones and achievements
  • Understanding the importance of exercise in recovery

Professional Support Teams

Effective programmes involve multidisciplinary teams:

  • Exercise physiologists or qualified fitness professionals
  • Mental health counsellors familiar with addiction recovery
  • Medical professionals monitoring overall health
  • Peer support specialists with recovery experience

Evidence-Based Outcomes

The research provides compelling evidence for physical activity recovery effectiveness:

  • 96% programme adherence rates in supervised settings
  • Significant improvements in all measured physical parameters
  • Sustained mental health benefits throughout intervention periods
  • Strong correlations between physical improvements and psychological wellbeing

These outcomes demonstrate that exercise isn’t merely an adjunct therapy—it’s a fundamental component of comprehensive recovery strategies.

Moving Forward with Exercise Addiction Recovery

The evidence overwhelmingly supports integrating structured exercise addiction recovery programmes into comprehensive treatment approaches. By addressing both physical and mental health simultaneously, exercise provides a natural, sustainable foundation for long-term recovery success.

For individuals and families affected by substance dependency, understanding the transformative power of physical activity offers hope and practical steps towards healing. The journey may be challenging, but with proper support, professional guidance, and commitment to consistent exercise, lasting recovery becomes not just possible but probable.

The path to recovery through exercise requires dedication, but the rewards—improved physical health, enhanced mental wellbeing, and sustained freedom from substance dependency—make every step worthwhile.

by Herschel Baker – Director Queensland Director, Drug Free Australia – 03 August 2025 

Story by Kat Lay, Global health correspondent

Avatars smoke in an image shared on social media of a gathering in the metaverse. A packet of Djarum LA cigarettes, an Indonesian brand, sit on the table. Photograph: iceperience.id Instagram via Canary© Photograph: iceperience.id Instagram via Canary

In the image, a group of friends is standing in a bar, smoke winding upwards from the cigarettes in their hands. More lie in an open packet on the table between them. This is not a photograph taken before smoking bans, but a picture shared on social media of a gathering in the metaverse.

Virtual online spaces are becoming a new marketing battleground as tobacco and alcohol promoters target young people without any legislative consequences.

A report shared at the World Conference on Tobacco Control last month in Dublin set out multiple examples of new technologies being adopted to promote smoking and vaping, including tobacco companies launching digital tokens and vape companies sponsoring online games.

It comes from a monitoring project known as Canary – because it seeks to act as the canary in a coalmine – run by the global public health organisation Vital Strategies.

“Tobacco companies are no longer waiting for regulations to catch them up. They are way ahead of us. We are still trying to understand what we’re seeing in social media, but they’re already operating in unregulated spaces like the metaverse,” says Dr Melina Magsumbol, of Vital Strategies India. “They’re using NFTs [non-fungible tokens]. They’re using immersive events to get our kids to come and see what they’re offering.”

In India, one tobacco company made and promoted an NFT, which represents ownership of digital assets, to celebrate its 93rd anniversary.

Canary scans for and analyses tobacco marketing on social media platforms and news sites in India, Indonesia and Mexico. It is expanding to more countries, including Brazil and China, and to cover alcohol and ultra-processed food marketing.

Digital platforms are being used to bypass traditional advertising restrictions and target young audiences

Melina Magsumbol, Vital Strategies India

It is not set up to scan the metaverse – a three-dimensional, immersive version of the internet that uses technology such as virtual reality headsets to enable people to interact in a digital space. But it has picked up references to what is going on there via links and information shared on older social media sites.

Researchers say that children are likely to be exposed to any tobacco marketing in the new digital spaces given the age profile of users – more than half of the metaverse’s active users are aged 13 and below.

Social media companies have deep knowledge of how to drive engagement and keep people coming back for more views, says Dr Mary-Ann Etiebet, chief executive of Vital Strategies.

“When you combine that with the experience and the knowledge of the tobacco industry on how to hook and keep people hooked … those two things together in a space that is unknown and opaque – that scares me.”

Mark Zuckerberg, metaverse’s prominent backer, says in future “you’ll be able to do almost anything you can imagine” there. Already, that includes shopping and attending virtual concerts.

But Magsumbol describes it as “a new battleground for all of us” that is “being taken over by corporate entities that actually push health-harming products”.

“My daughter is very quiet, she’s an introvert. But online, on [gaming platform] Roblox, when she is killing zombies and ghosts, she morphs into a different avatar – she’s like Alexander the Great mixed with Bruce Lee and John Wick. She is so bloodthirsty,” she says.

“Online we behave differently. Social norms change … the tobacco industry knows that very well. And it’s so easy to subtly sell the idea that you can be anything, anyone you want.”

The metaverse art the team saw in Indonesia was shared on an Instagram account for electronic music lovers linked to Djarum, one of Indonesia’s largest cigarette companies. Another example showed a group having coffee, and looking for a lighter.

It all amounts to efforts to “normalise” smoking and vaping, says Magsumbol. “This kind of behaviour is happening and being done by your avatars, but is it seeping into your real life?

“Digital platforms are being used to bypass traditional advertising restrictions and target young audiences,” she says. “What we’re seeing here is not just a shift in marketing, it’s a shift in how influence works.”

Other researchers have set out examples of alcohol being promoted and even sold in virtual stores.

Online marketing is a global issue. At the same conference, Irish researchers shared findings that 53% of teenagers saw e-cigarette posts daily on social media.

A World Health Organization official (WHO) says a rise in youth smoking in Ukraine is due, in part, to Covid and the war pushing children “too much online” and exposing them to marketing.

Related: Vapes threaten to undo gains in tackling dangers of tobacco, health leaders warn

In India, Agamroop Kaur, a youth ambassador at the Campaign for Tobacco-Free Kids, includes social media marketing when speaking to schoolchildren about the dangers of tobacco and vaping. She has seen vapes suggested as a “wellness” item.

“I think educating youth on what an advertisement looks like, why it’s false, how you might not even see that it’s from the tobacco industry and it’s [content posted by an] influencer is really powerful because then that builds a skill – so that when they’re on social media, because they are digital natives, they’re able to see all of that and know that it’s fake and it’s not something they should be attracted by. I think building those skills early from high school to middle school, and even younger, is really important.”

The WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control requires countries to implement bans on tobacco advertising, promotion and sponsorship. Last year, signatories agreed that action was needed to tackle the increasing focus on “digital marketing channels such as social media, which increases adolescent and young people’s exposure to tobacco marketing”.

But there is no easy answer, says Andrew Black at the framework’s secretariat.

“The challenge of regulating the internet is not a problem that’s unique to tobacco. It’s a real challenge for governments to think about how they can provide the protections that society is used to in a world where borders are broken down because of these technologies.”

Nandita Murukutla, who oversees Canary, says regulators should take note: “What starts out small and you ignore, rises up to a certain point when you’ve got critical mass, and after that, it just explodes, and dialing something back is virtually impossible.”

Herschel Baker

International Liaison, Director Queensland Director, Drug Free Australia – Web https://drugfree.org.au/

Source:  https://www.msn.com/en-au/news/other/smoking-avatars-and-online-games-how-big-tobacco-targets-young-people-in-the-metaverse/ar-AA1J2WHU?

by  Shalini Ramachandran  and Betsy McKay – Wall Street Journal – July 31, 2025

Hundreds of thousands of veterans with PTSD have been prescribed simultaneous doses of powerful psychiatric drugs. The practice, known as “polypharmacy,” can tranquilize patients to the point of numbness, cause weight gain and increase suicidal thoughts when it involves pharmaceuticals that target the central nervous system, according to scientific studies and veterans’ accounts. 

The VA’s own guidelines say no data support drug combinations to treat PTSD. The Food and Drug Administration warns that combining certain medications such as opioids and benzodiazepines can cause serious side effects, including death.

Nonetheless, prescribing cocktails of such drugs is one of the VA’s most common treatments for veterans with PTSD, and the number of veterans on multiple psychiatric drugs is a growing concern at the agency, according to interviews with more than 50 veterans, VA health practitioners, researchers and former officials, and a review of VA medical records and studies.

Polypharmacy has multiple definitions when it comes to central nervous system drugs. The VA defines it as taking five or more medications at the same time, while some medical researchers say it’s two or more and the American Geriatrics Society defines it as three or more. 

There is an emerging medical consensus among VA doctors and researchers that taking multiple central nervous system drugs can wreak havoc on patients. Interactions between such drugs aren’t well understood, and their effects in combination can be unpredictable and extreme.

SOME CASE HISTORIES …

Mark Miller

U.S. Navy, Security Forces (1992-2007)

In 2007, Mark Miller was diagnosed with PTSD. The military put him on fluoxetine, otherwise known as Prozac. He became suicidal. Miller eventually weaned himself off medications and used “neuroplasticity” therapy which forms new connections in the brain. This April, returning suicidal thoughts prompted Miller to visit a VA hospital in San Antonio. A nurse practitioner prescribed a powerful antipsychotic in a five-minute appointment. Six days later, Miller returned, stepped off a shuttle bus and fatally shot himself in the head. “He did it clearly to speak for all the veterans who have no voice,” his father said.

  • Aripiprazole
  • Bupropion
  • Cyclobenzaprine
  • Fluoxetine
  • Lithium
  • Quetiapine
  • Tramadol

‘They did not even listen to anything I said — just prescribed stuff. Unreal’— Text from Mark Miller to his father days before his suicide

The VA maintains that the best treatment for PTSD is talk therapy. But therapists are scarce and wait times are long, so overwhelmed doctors default to pills. Because there is no single drug designed specifically to treat PTSD, veterans often end up on drug cocktails as multiple specialists try to ease a variety of symptoms and prevent harm or suicide, according to VA clinical staff, studies and veterans. 

“When it comes to the challenge of polypharmacy in these populations, it’s constantly chasing your tail,” said Dr. Ryan Vega, a chief healthcare innovation official at the VA until 2023, who still treats veterans. “It is where medicine is more art than science. We have medications that treat those symptoms but are we addressing the root cause?”

Nearly 60% of VA patients with PTSD were taking two or more central nervous system drugs at the same time in 2019, the latest year for which data are publicly available, according to a VA study. That works out to more than 520,000 patients, up 62% from a decade earlier, driven by a near doubling of the number of VA patients with PTSD due to more combat tours and better screening. 

One silver lining highlighted by the study was that the percentage of PTSD veterans on five or more CNS medications declined to 7% from 12%, largely due to internal efforts to deprescribe opioids and benzodiazepines. (Central nervous system drugs affect the brain and spinal cord; psychiatric medications are a subset of CNS drugs). The VA declined requests from The Wall Street Journal to provide more recent polypharmacy numbers for veterans in its care. 

The VA has long been aware of the risks of overprescribing, and has internal research since at least 2016 showing the potential harms, including increased risk of suicide. The internal polypharmacy data “was pretty concerning,” said Dr. Shereef Elnahal, who headed the VA health system until early this year. He recalled a veteran advocate who told him about three veterans on more than five psychiatric drugs each who died by suicide, one after the other. They had been “walking around like zombies” before they took their own lives, the advocate told him. 

The VA’s use of psychiatric drugs has come under scrutiny from members of Congress and advocacy groups as the veteran suicide rate is roughly double that of U.S. adults who didn’t serve. Studies by VA researchers link the simultaneous use of multiple psychiatric drugs to suicide risk among veterans, including a 2016 paper that found Iraq and Afghanistan war veterans taking five or more central nervous system drugs faced higher risks of overdose and suicidal behaviors.

Lucas Hamrick

U.S. Army, Special Forces (1996-2019)

Lucas Hamrick was diagnosed with PTSD in the Army. There, and then at the VA, he was prescribed multiple central nervous system drugs. Some put him in a daze, others made him feel like he might want to kill himself. After losing 12 friends on similar drug combinations to suicide, Hamrick quit all the medications by 2023 and turned to meditation, mindfulness and breathing exercises. “It’s about structuring life around how not to let things spill over,” he said.

  • Chlordiazepoxide
  • Diazepam
  • Gabapentin
  • Hydrocodone-acetaminophen
  • Lorazepam
  • Naltrexone
  • Paroxetine
  • Phenobarbital
  • Prazosin
  • Propranolol
  • Rizatriptan
  • Sertraline
  • Trazodone

‘The quality of mental health care made me feel like I was there to check a box and complete the process instead of working toward any type of changes in perspective or disposition.’

Yet the agency has been slow to mandate changes. It has failed to implement nationwide electronic systems to alert doctors when they prescribe multiple psychiatric drugs, despite evidence from its own studies that these alerts improve care. The VA doesn’t uniformly require written informed consent for all psychiatric drugs with suicide risk, something that veterans groups and some members of Congress are urging. Some veterans who have resisted taking cocktails of drugs say they were warned by VA and military doctors that refusing them could jeopardize their eligibility for disability benefits, which can reach $4,500 a month.

“I’ve been mortified by practically every veteran I’ve seen having been prescribed multiple psychiatric medications, often without a timely referral to therapy or without any referral at all,” said Janie Gendron, a therapist who worked for the Defense Department and has seen hundreds of active-duty service members and veterans in the past 25 years.

A VA spokesman said the agency is looking into the issues raised by the Journal, and that the Trump administration is seeking to address serious problems it has identified in veterans’ healthcare that weren’t solved by the Biden administration. 

VA Secretary Doug Collins said at a congressional hearing in May that the agency is pursuing the potential use of alternative therapies, such as psychedelics, to offer more options and reduce the risk of suicide among veterans. 

The rise of the combat cocktail for PTSD has its roots in the overreliance on a single class of drugs: benzodiazepines. By the 1970s, the military and VA relied heavily on Valium and, later, Xanax as a primary treatment for traumatized service members and veterans returning from deployment. But in the 1990s, Defense Department researchers observed that high doses often yielded poor clinical outcomes, and, along with the VA, ultimately advised against their long-term use on veterans in 2004.

Still, against the guideline, the VA has doled out benzodiazepines to more than 1.7 million patients with PTSD diagnoses since 2005, its own data show. It took nearly a decade for the use of those drugs to start to decline.

At the same time, prescriptions to veterans with PTSD rose for other powerful psychiatric drugs.

VA doctors and patients say that existing tools to limit the number of psychiatric drugs a patient takes, and guidance to avoid the use of benzodiazepines and certain antipsychotics for veterans with PTSD, are frequently ignored.

A friend’s suicide

After his best friend’s suicide in 2013, Iraq war veteran Doug Gresenz was diagnosed with PTSD and borderline personality disorder and eventually put on six psychotropic drugs. After one medication’s dosage was increased, he attempted suicide and was hospitalized. When he protested the volume of medications there, he said VA doctors questioned his commitment to recovery and told him he needed the pills to lead a normal life. “I was guilt-tripped,” he said. 

Doug Gresenz

U.S. Marine Corps, Assaultman (2006-2010)

  • Baclofen
  • Bupropion
  • Citalopram
  • Clonazepam
  • Clonidine
  • Cyclobenzaprine
  • Divalproex
  • Doxepin
  • Erenumab-aooe
  • Eszopiclone
  • Gabapentin
  • Hydroxyzine
  • Melatonin
  • Methocarbamol
  • Mirtazapine
  • Olanzapine
  • Oxycodone
  • Prazosin
  • Propranolol
  • Sumatriptan
  • Quetiapine
  • Tizanidine
  • Tramadol
  • Trazodone
  • Venlafaxine
  • Zolpidem

‘I remember thinking: I’m literally poisoning myself.’

In 2016 alone, VA doctors prescribed him more than a dozen drugs, including antidepressants, antipsychotics, muscle relaxants and medications for nightmares, anxiety, pain and sleep, medical records show. Over little more than a decade, he received more than two dozen central nervous system medications. He recalled complaining to VA doctors that he was “so doped up” he would have accidents before getting to the bathroom.

“I remember thinking: I’m literally poisoning myself,” he said. In 2018, he quit benzodiazepines cold turkey and began to taper off the other drugs.

Within a couple of weeks, he collapsed, unable to use his legs. He developed a stutter and extreme light sensitivity. Violent spasms led to another fall, which caused complications that resulted in a severe foot injury and, eventually, an amputation last year.

The VA recommends any one of three antidepressants for PTSD—sertraline (Zoloft), paroxetine (Paxil) and venlafaxine (Effexor). But doctors are free to prescribe other additional drugs off-label—and many do.

“It’s super normal to see someone on five or six medications,” said Mary Neal Vieten, a retired Navy psychologist who has worked with thousands of members of the military and veterans. “That’s like an everyday thing.” Trauma has been medicalized, she said. “They’re acting as if the problem is in the person,” she said. Instead, it’s a normal response to an overwhelming experience, she said.

‘Stop-and-go’ pills

The culture of combat cocktails begins for some who are diagnosed with PTSD while still on active duty. In the military, too, drugs have long been given priority over psychotherapy, according to many veterans, former VA officials and therapists. 

One Navy chaplain said his repeated calls to the Navy for more mental health resources went unanswered despite his documentation of more than 70 critical events, including suicide attempts, at a high-stress installation with nuclear submarines. When the chaplain himself grew suicidal, Navy doctors suggested that refusing the three-medication cocktail they prescribed could lead to discharge without benefits, instead of medical retirement with care. 

Some veterans enter VA care dependent on psychiatric drugs that they were prescribed to improve combat readiness. They include Air Force veterans given “stop-and-go” pills—stimulants followed by sleeping pills. 

Michael Valentino, who was chief pharmacist at the VA until 2021, said he grew alarmed by the rising numbers of service members entering VA care on stimulants without a diagnosis justifying it. “Then the VA has the burden of trying to undo it.”

Heather King

U.S. Air Force, Aircraft Maintenance Craftsman (2001-2010)

Heather King struggled with sleep after the Air Force prescribed Ambien following long flights. After her discharge, she was diagnosed with PTSD, and the VA added eight central nervous system drugs by 2020. King begged for help weaning off. Her VA doctor’s response: “Heather, under no circumstances are you ever going to be a person who is going to operate without meds.” She’s lately been sleeping soundly without pills for the first time, thanks to cognitive behavioral therapy for insomnia—something the VA only told her about recently.

  • Amitriptyline
  • Buspirone
  • Cyclobenzaprine
  • Doxazosin
  • Doxepin
  • Duloxetine
  • Fluoxetine
  • Gabapentin
  • Hydroxyzine
  • Lamotrigine
  • Lorazepam
  • Mirtazapine
  • Prazosin
  • Propranolol
  • Ramelteon
  • Trazodone
  • Zaleplon
  • Zolpidem

‘It was like a death sentence. All these medications, they just made me numb. I wanted to feel my feelings, I wanted to actually heal.’

A Pentagon official said several medications at once are sometimes necessary for patients with multiple medical problems or who are treatment-resistant, adding that “records are reviewed to determine if the treating provider has provided clinical justification for the use of polypharmacy.” Service members and their families are offered “a robust and comprehensive array” of mental health programs, the official said.

Chemical messengers

Psychiatric drugs work by affecting levels of chemical messengers in the brain called neurotransmitters, which send signals between nerve cells and other cells in the body. For instance, many antidepressants increase levels of serotonin, a neurotransmitter associated with mood. Benzodiazepines enhance the activity of a neurotransmitter called GABA, while some antipsychotics block dopamine receptors. Layering on several of these central nervous system agents at once can magnify their effects. 

Combining an antipsychotic drug that activates dopamine receptors with one that blocks dopamine can exacerbate psychosis, said Dr. Sanket Raut, a research fellow specializing in polypharmacy at Gallipoli Medical Research in Brisbane, Australia. By the same token, benzodiazepines and opioids taken together can increase the risk of overdose. “Polypharmacy is a big problem,” said Raut. “There are many side effects: cognitive impairment, dizziness and the risk of falls.”

Erika Downey

U.S. Army, Military Police (2007-2013)

Amphetamine-Dextroamphetamine

  • Clonazepam
  • Erenumab-aooe
  • Fluoxetine
  • Lorazepam
  • Trazodone

‘They give out these giant paper bags filled with medicine after your first psychiatrist appointment.’

“They give out these giant paper bags filled with medicine after your first psychiatrist appointment,” said Erika Downey, a 35-year-old retired Army sergeant with PTSD. Women are more likely to be prescribed multiple drugs concurrently against guidelines, VA researchers have found. 

Downey’s bouts of suicidal ideation while taking antidepressants, benzodiazepines and stimulants were so bad she once called a friend to come take away her gun. After that, she decided talk therapy would be the best medicine. She weaned herself off the drugs on her own over two years. She had to wait three years for a VA psychotherapy appointment. “At the VA, you are more quick to get into a psychiatrist”—someone who can prescribe meds—“than a psychologist,” she said. Gray for WSJ

Only 15% of veterans diagnosed with depression, PTSD or anxiety are offered psychotherapy in lieu of medication, according to a 2019 report by the Government Accountability Office. “They’re really leveraging the prescribing to keep up with patient demand,” said Derek Blumke of the Grunt Style Foundation, a nonprofit veterans’ care group. Many VA providers’ impulse is to “get them in and get them out,” said Chris Figura, a patient advocate at a VA in St. Louis.

Navy veteran Dick Johnson, in the VA system for three decades and diagnosed with PTSD and bipolar disorder, was prescribed more than 25 different central nervous system drugs, including antipsychotics, antidepressants and epilepsy medications, sometimes on six concurrently, his medical records show. He blames them for the collapse of his two marriages. “They pretty much destroyed my life,” Johnson said. When he worsened on one antipsychotic and experienced intense withdrawal tapering off, VA doctors tried to patch him up with a cocktail of other medicines including benzodiazepines. In 2006, he started a prolonged dose of Seroquel, a powerful antipsychotic, to get off benzodiazepines, because doctors said it was supposed to be easier to stop. His weight soared and he developed diabetes. Quitting Seroquel “nearly killed” him, as he suffered intense vomiting, diarrhea and a near-inability to digest. He’s still tapering off Paxil and Tegretol today, using a jewelry scale and sandpaper.

Drugged for Decades

Dick Johnson, who joined the Navy in 1989, was diagnosed with bipolar disorder. After he was medically discharged in 1994, the VA put him on a heavy regimen of psychiatric drugs that made matters worse.

  • Medications prescribed, by class and date
  • Mood Stabilizers Anti- Psychotics Anti- Anxiety Anti-Depressant Medicated with lithium, which makes him severely ill 1995
  • Lithium Divorce with first wife  2000
  • Second marriage ’05 PTSD diagnosis
  • Divorce with second wife Seroquel ’10
  • Retires with disability from power plant ’15
  • Side effects of medications lead to ICU visit. Seeks help outside VA to taper off meds ’20
  • After cutting backmeds, joinssupport groupsand shares hisexperience
  • Note: Does not include all medications, including those prescribed for short durations.

Dr. Saraswathy Battar, a VA geriatrician, launched a passion project in 2016 to decrease the use of potentially inappropriate medications. After noticing veterans suffering from debilitating symptoms that she attributed to overprescription, she developed an electronic tool that has helped providers discontinue more than three million prescriptions. About half of VA providers are using the optional tool, she said, but they’re mostly caring for older veterans or those in palliative care, while it’s been hard to get mental health providers to adopt the tool. Some said they were unaware of its existence. “Suicide and homicide get attention,” but “there’s no penalty for not prioritizing polypharmacy reduction,” she said.

A path forward

After years on psychiatric drug regimens prescribed by military and VA doctors, a growing number of veterans are taking healing into their own hands, often exploring unconventional treatments. Many veterans said they are frustrated and angry that the country spends heavily training them to be lethal, but there’s little support for their fragile mental health as they reintegrate back into society.

Scott Griffin, the former special operations soldier who contemplated suicide last year, reached out to a group called Veterans Exploring Treatment Solutions, or VETS, after the episode. Their suggestion: ibogaine, a powerful psychedelic derived from an African plant and illegal in the U.S., but only after tapering off his current medications. When Griffin asked his VA prescriber for help tapering, “he point-blank refused,” Griffin said.

He embarked on a gruelling self-taper. “I was white knuckling. I broke my teeth from clenching,” he recalled, battling intense vertigo and suicidality.

After 12 hours of altered consciousness on ibogaine in Mexico, Griffin took 5-MeO-DMT, a psychoactive compound most famously found in Colorado River toads’ poison, which he says was a profound spiritual experience. Since returning home in March, he has discarded his pills, prays daily and spends time with family, reconnecting after years of being “consumed by panic and anxiety.”

A Stanford study of 30 special operations forces veterans published last year found that ibogaine sharply reduced PTSD and related symptoms. A bipartisan bill in the House aims to fund VA research into psychedelics, which doctors caution remain largely unproven in clinical trials. 

Says Griffin, “How does bark from a tree and venom off the back of a toad beat all this crap, all these pharmaceuticals they push down your throat?”

Source:  Maggie Petito – www.drugwatch.org

Abstract

Introduction: The aim of this study was to test the a priori hypothesis that the increasing incidence of testis and breast cancer in adolescent and young adult (AYA) Americans correlates with their increasing cannabis use. 

Methods: The overall study design involved comparing breast and testis cancer incidence trends in jurisdictions that had or had not legalized cannabis use. Cancer incidence was assessed for the U.S. using the U.S. Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) data, and for Canada, using Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation data. 

Results: In the U.S., both breast carcinoma in 20- to 34-year-old females and testis cancer in 15- to 39-year-old males had annual incidence rate increases that were highly correlated (Pearson’s r = 0.95) with the increase in the number of cannabis-legalizing jurisdictions during the period 2000–2019. Both were significantly greater during the period 2000–2019 in the SEER registries of cannabis-legalizing than non-legalizing states (Joinpoint-derived average annual percent change, AAPC1.3, p << 0.001 vs. 0.7, p << 0.001, respectively, for breast cancer, and AAPC1.2, p << 0.001 vs. no increase during the period 2000–2011 for testis cancer). During the period 2000–2019, registries in cannabis-legalizing versus non-legalizing states had a 26% versus 17% increase in breast carcinoma and 24% versus 14% increase in testis cancer. In the same age groups, Canada had a greater increase in both breast and testis cancer incidence than the U.S., and in both countries, breast and cancer trends were both correlated with the country’s cannabis use disorder prevalence by age. 

Conclusions: North America shows evidence that cannabis is a potential etiologic factor contributing to the rising incidence of breast carcinoma and testis cancer in young adults. Canada’s greater increases than in the U.S. are consistent with its earlier and broader cannabis legalization. Given the increasing use and potency of cannabis facilitated by jurisdiction legalization and expanded availability, cannabis’ potential as a cause of breast and testis cancer merits national consideration.

Source:  https://www.academia.edu/2998-7741/2/2/10.20935/AcadOnco7758

new study from researchers at the Johns Hopkins Bloomberg School of Public Health sheds light on how people who inject drugs (PWID) are responding to the growing instability and danger in the U.S. illicit drug supply. Despite facing structural vulnerabilities, participants in the study demonstrated a keen awareness of changes in drug quality and content, and many are taking proactive steps to reduce their risk of overdose, injury, and other harms.

Published July 24, 2025, in the journal Health Promotion International, the qualitative study explores the experiences of 23 PWID in Baltimore City, where a growing number of opioid-related deaths and the emergence of new, harmful adulterants like xylazine have made drug use increasingly perilous. Participants reported encountering potent and unpredictable drug combinations and described cognitive, behavioral, and social strategies they use to navigate this new reality. Notably, the paper’s publication comes just two weeks after a mass overdose in Baltimore’s Penn North neighborhood sent dozens of people to the hospital in the span of a few hours and tests revealed unfamiliar ingredients.

“We found that people who inject drugs are not indifferent to the risks they face,” said lead author Abigail Winiker, PhD, MSPH, an assistant scientist in Health Policy and Management and program director for the Bloomberg Overdose Prevention Initiative. “They are making conscious decisions every day to protect their health, whether that’s testing a small dose, avoiding injecting alone, switching to less risky methods of use, or sharing safety information with peers. These are intentional harm reduction strategies grounded in knowledge and a desire to stay safe.”

The U.S. continues to grapple with a historic overdose crisis, with over 107,000 deaths reported in 2022 alone. Fentanyl and its analogs now dominate the opioid supply, but new substances, often unknown to users, are increasingly present. Participants in the study described a “wildcard” market where real heroin has been replaced by unpredictable blends, sometimes laced with benzodiazepines, dissociative agents, or tranquilizers like xylazine, which are not meant for human consumption.

The uncertainty has led to intense fear and physical harm among PWID, with many recounting a range of adverse reactions from illicit substance use, including blackouts, seizures, severe wounds, and overdose. Despite the increasing risk associated with these drug market changes, most participants reported having no access to a reliable source of information about the composition of the drug supply, making it challenging to adapt in the face of new additives. Most knowledge about specific risks or harmful batches was passed on through word of mouth, which could perpetuate rumors and the spread of misinformation.

Individual and Collective Adaptations 

The study highlights the wide array of harm reduction strategies participants use to mitigate risk. Cognitively, many indicated thinking about their drug use in terms of personal health and family responsibilities, with some expressing a motivation to seek treatment or abstain from use entirely in the face of an increasingly risky drug supply.

Behaviorally, PWID described strategies such as taking smaller test doses, sniffing instead of injecting, and having someone present who could administer naloxone if needed. Socially, trust played a critical role; participants emphasized returning to known sellers who warned them about potent batches and relying on peer networks to spread information about adverse events or dangerous batches in circulation. 

“These strategies reflect a deep sense of agency and adaptability,” said Winiker. “Our findings debunk the dangerous myth that individuals who use drugs are reckless or disconnected from their health. This false narrative perpetuates stigma and limits our ability as a society to recognize the incredible resilience and strength of people who use drugs.” 

Policy and Programmatic Implications 

The authors argue that these findings should inform more responsive public health policies and harm reduction programming. While fentanyl test strips can be an effective intervention, many participants noted that fentanyl’s presence is now expected, but what they fear are the unknown additives they cannot identify or test for, such as those that were found in the case of the mass overdose two weeks ago. Universal drug checking services, real-time supply surveillance, and mobile harm reduction outreach are critical next steps, the study concludes.

The research also points to the urgent need to remove structural barriers to harm reduction. In many states, drug checking equipment is still considered illegal paraphernalia. Criminalization and stigma continue to limit access to lifesaving services, especially among those who are unhoused or medically underserved. 

“People who inject drugs are doing their part to reduce harm,” said Winiker. “It’s time to reform our systems so they stop making it harder for them to do so, by legalizing drug checking, ensuring individuals with lived experience have leadership roles in overdose prevention and response efforts, investing in safer supply programs, and ensuring that stigma and punitive laws don’t block access to care.”

The study was conducted as part of the SCOPE Study, a project led by Susan Sherman, PhD, MPH, to design an integrated drug checking and HIV prevention intervention. It was supported by the National Institute on Drug Abuse and reflects growing interest in how PWID are adapting to the post-fentanyl era.

Source:  https://publichealth.jhu.edu/2025/in-the-face-of-a-volatile-drug-supply-people-take-harm-reduction-into-their-own-hands

by Emily Caldwell – Ohio State News – Jul 08, 2025

Almost 1 in 10 workers in their 30s uses alcohol, marijuana or hard drugs like cocaine while on the job in the United States, a new study has found. 

The risk for substance use among young employees was highest in the food preparation/service industry and in safety-sensitive occupations including construction – a sector linked in previous research with a high risk for drug overdose deaths. 

Based on their prior studies of workplace strategies related to employee substance use, the researchers say these new findings suggest comprehensive substance use policies and supportive interventions could improve safety and help reduce workers’ misuse of alcohol and drugs. 

“Especially for those working in blue-collar or heavy manual jobs, they often have limited access to support to address substance use,” said lead author Sehun Oh, associate professor of social work at The Ohio State University. “It’s easy to blame someone for using substances, but we want to pay attention to understanding their working conditions and barriers at the workplace.” 

Oh completed the study with Daejun “Aaron” Park, assistant professor of social work at Ohio University, and Sarah Al-Hashemi, a recent Ohio State College of Public Health graduate. 

The research was published recently in the American Journal of Industrial Medicine. 

Previous research has suggested that substance use is common among people who work long hours or evening shifts and earn low wages, or who experience life stressors such as low annual household income and limited education. But few studies have been able to report on substance use during work hours, and the occupations at highest risk for on-the-job alcohol and drug use, because the data is hard to come by. 

“There are many studies looking at specific occupations and their risks, and the prevalence of substance use outside work,” Oh said. “There is very limited evidence on workplace substance use, which is more concerning in terms of occupational safety, not just for the workers but also colleagues or others exposed to the workplaces. This is the only data we know of to inform this issue.” 

The study sample included 5,465 young employees who participated in the National Longitudinal Survey of Youth 1997, a nationally representative sample of men and women who were aged 12-17 in 1997 and were interviewed regularly until 2022. The NLSY surveys were conducted by Ohio State’s Center for Human Resource Research. Data for this study came from the 2015-16 survey, the most recent wave to collect information on substance use behaviors. 

Results were based on participants’ reports of substance use immediately before or during a work shift in the past month. Among respondents, 8.9% of workers reported any substance use in the workplace, including 5.6% drinking alcohol, 3.1% using marijuana and 0.8% taking cocaine or other hard drugs, a category that also included opioids. 

Statistical modeling showed a higher risk for all types of on-the-job substance use among food-industry workers, higher alcohol use among white-collar workers (linked in prior research to drinking while cultivating business relationships or celebrating accomplishments), and elevated alcohol and marijuana use in safety-sensitive occupations.

“We’re really concerned to see the findings for safety-sensitive occupations – not just in construction, but also installation, maintenance, repair, transportation and material movement,” Oh said. “In many federal-level transportation occupations, there are policies prohibiting operating under the influence. So we’re surprised to see that still 6% of material moving workers are working under the influence, and 2% of them are using marijuana – this was striking, because other than drug testing policies, it’s hard to implement interventions for workers moving from place to place.” 

Both Oh and Park said these new findings shed light on the impact that comprehensive employer substance use policies and supportive programs for workers could have.  

Variations in workplace substance-use policies may be one explanation for industry differences in risk for employee alcohol and drug use on the job, Park said. In a 2023 study he led, 20% of survey participants reported their workplaces had no substance use policy. The research showed that comprehensive workplace substance use policies – which included recovery-friendly initiatives – were linked to a significant decrease in employee drug and alcohol use across many employment sectors. 

“The work categories least likely to have substance use policies tend to be those managed individually by owners or workers,” he said. “Also the arts, food service, entertainment, recreation – those kinds of workplaces don’t tend to have polices in place.” 

And Oh found in a 2023 study that only half of workers in a national sample had access to support services for substance use problems, such as counseling, at their places of employment. Availability of workplace support services led to lower rates of marijuana and other illicit drug use among workers. 

“What I found was policy alone can’t be effective in reducing substance use problems – policies need to be accompanied by support services,” he said. “That’s one thing we propose in this paper – that combining alcohol and other drug policies with supportive services produces the greatest benefits, rather than relying on either alone.” 

The analysis also showed substance use in the workplace had strong associations with off-work substance misuse: Users of marijuana on the job were more likely to report daily cannabis use and were more than twice as likely to be heavy drinkers compared to those not using marijuana at work, and employees on cocaine or other hard drugs while working were more likely to drink heavily, use marijuana more frequently, and report frequent illicit drug use. 

“Our research shows that those under adverse working conditions with many barriers to economic and well-being resources tend to use substances as a coping mechanism, whether that relates to an emotional toll or physical demands of not just working conditions, but their life circumstances,” Oh said. “There is a need for more structural support to address these huge implications for the health of workers and others, and to reduce the stigma associated with substance use.” 

Source: https://news.osu.edu/9-of-young-us-employees-use-alcohol-drugs-at-work-study-finds/

“There’s no ID required. It’s odorless. It’s everything kids look for. They can afford it, they can get it, and it doesn’t show in mom and dad’s drug test.” 

Dana O’Rourke lost her 19-year-old daughter to “dusting,” a trend popularized on social media.1 Dusting is one of the many slang terms used to describe the use of inhalants. As O’Rourke says, inhalants are easy to get and generally undetectable, making it appealing to young people. Below, learn more about dusting and huffing, the signs of inhalant misuse, and how to keep your child safe.

Key Takeaways:

  1. Inhalant misuse: Huffing and dusting involve inhaling substances like aerosol sprays or household chemicals, posing serious health risks.
  2. Warning Signs: Look for unusual chemical odors, headaches, dizziness, slurred speech, and behavioral changes.
  3. Prevention: Educate loved ones, keep chemicals out of reach, monitor activities, and seek professional help if needed.

What Are Inhalants?

 Inhalants are everyday household products that some people misuse to get high. This dangerous practice has many slang names including “huffing,” “dusting,” “sniffing,” “whippets,” and “huff.” (see other terms at the end of this article) These products were never meant to be breathed in on purpose and using them this way can cause serious harm or even death.2

Common household items that get misused include:3

  • Computer keyboard cleaners (canned air)
  • Spray paint
  • Nail polish remover
  • Certain types of glue
  • Markers and correction fluid
  • Hair spray and deodorant
  • Cooking spray
  • Cleaning fluids
  • Gasoline
  • Whipped cream dispensers (the propellant)
  • Air conditioner fluid (Freon)

Why This Is Happening More Often

 Inhalant misuse has become more visible, especially among younger teens. There are several reasons why this is concerning:

Easy to Find: Unlike other substances, these products are legal and found in almost every home, school, and store. Kids don’t need to buy anything special or find a dealer.

Social Media Influence: Some social media challenges and videos show people using inhalants, making it seem normal or fun. These videos don’t show the real dangers or the people who get seriously hurt.

False Safety: Because these products are sold in stores, some people think they must be safe to use in any way. This is far from the truth. (There are stores dedicated to the sale of alcohol, for example, and alcohol comes with many health risks.)

Quick Effect: Inhalants work very fast – within seconds of breathing them in, a person feels intoxicated with effects similar to being drunk on alcohol. This quick effect can make them appealing to curious teens, but it’s also what makes them so dangerous. 

The Real Dangers

 Using inhalants is extremely risky, even the first time. Here’s what can happen:

  • Immediate Effects: Within seconds, users may experience slurred speech, inability to coordinate movements, dizziness, confusion, delirium, nausea, and vomiting. They may also have lightheadedness, hallucinations, and delusions.
  • Sudden Death: This can happen to anyone, even healthy people using inhalants for the first time. It’s called “sudden sniffing death syndrome.”
  • Brain Damage: Inhalants can permanently damage parts of the brain that control thinking, moving, seeing, and hearing. Effects can range from mild problems to severe dementia.
  • Heart Problems: These chemicals can cause irregular heartbeat and heart failure.
  • Suffocation: People can pass out and stop breathing.
  • Dangerous Behavior: Because the high only lasts a few minutes, people often keep using inhalants over several hours to maintain the feeling. This greatly increases the risk of losing consciousness and death.
  • Long-term Problems: Regular use can cause weight loss, muscle weakness, disorientation, trouble paying attention and other problems related to thinking, lack of coordination, irritability, and depression. After heavy use, people may feel drowsy for hours and have lasting headaches.  Their use can also lead to addiction.

Warning Signs Parents Should Watch For

 Parents and other caregivers should look out for these signs of inhalant misuse:

Physical Signs:

  • Chemical smell on breath or clothes
  • Paint stains on face, hands, or clothing
  • Red or runny nose and eyes
  • Spots or sores around the mouth
  • Drunk-like behavior without alcohol smell
  • Loss of appetite

Behavioral Changes:

  • Sudden mood swings
  • Becoming secretive or isolated
  • Declining grades
  • Loss of interest in hobbies or friends
  • Finding hidden cans, bottles, or rags

Items Around the House:

  • Empty spray cans or bottles
  • Missing household products
  • Rags or clothing that smell like chemicals
  • Hidden bags or balloons

What Parents Can Do

 Talk Early and Often: Have honest conversations about drugs and inhalants before problems start. Explain that legal doesn’t mean safe. Other important messages are:

    • No temporary feeling is worth risking your life or permanent brain damage.
    • Real friends won’t pressure you to try dangerous things. It’s okay to say no.
    • Remember that social media doesn’t show the whole story. Videos don’t show the people who got seriously hurt or died.
  • Secure Products: Keep inhalants locked up or in hard-to-reach places, especially if you suspect a problem.
  • Stay Involved: Know your child’s friends, activities, and where they spend time.
  • Monitor Online Activity: Be aware of what your kids see on social media and talk about dangerous trends.
  • Get Help: If you suspect inhalant misuse, contact your doctor, school counselor, or an addiction professional immediately.

If you discover that your child is under the influence of inhalants:

  • Don’t leave them alone if they seem confused or sick
  • Call 911 if they pass out or have trouble breathing
  • Encourage them to talk about why they are using inhalants
  • Connect with Partnership to End Addiction for guidance and resources 

Additional Terms and Information

 The following provides more information on inhalants from “The Clinical Assessment and Treatment of Inhalant Abuse”:4

  • Bagging: inhaling fumes from a soaked cloth sprayed with euphoria-inducing substances and deposited inside a paper or plastic bag.
  • Ballooning: inhaling a gas (usually nitrous oxide) from a balloon.
  • Chroming: spraying paint from an aerosol can into a plastic bag and then breathing the vapors from the bag.
  • Dusting: spraying an aerosol directly into the nose or mouth.
  • Gladding: inhaling air-freshener aerosols sprayed near the face.
  • Glue sniffer’s rash/huffer’s rash: refers to a skin condition that occurs around the mouth and midface. Glue or other chemicals dry out the skin and dissolve its natural oils, leading to inflammation, redness, and sometimes infections.
  • Huffing: inhaling a substance from a cloth or rags that have been soaked and are held close to the face.
  • Poppers/snappers: amyl nitrite packaged in small bottles that are opened to release the vapors; sold under trade names Super Rush, Locker Room, Bolt, Jungle Juice, Quick Silver, and Extreme Formula.5
  • Popper’s maculopathy: is damage to vision in the central part of the retina caused by using alkyl nitrites, which are chemicals often found in certain inhalants.
  • Sniffing/snorting: inhaling a substance from an open container directly through the mouth or nose.
  • Snotballs: inhaling smoke from the burning of rubber cement, where the adhesive is rolled into balls then burned to release the fumes.
  • Whippets: vials of nitrous oxide gas, most commonly from whipped cream aerosol canisters. The nitrous oxide can be extracted following whipped cream discharge, after which the released gas can be inhaled at close range or transferred to a balloon and then inhaled.

The Bottom Line

 Inhalant use might seem harmless because these products are common household items, but it’s one of the most dangerous forms of substance use. The risk of serious injury or death is real from the very first use. By understanding the dangers, staying informed, and learning how to spot the signs of inhalant misuse, parents can better protect their families.

Remember: There is no safe way to use inhalants. The only safe choice is not to use them at all. If you’re concerned about your loved one, don’t hesitate to reach out to us for support.

Source: https://drugfree.org/article/huffing-dusting-signs-of-inhalant-misuse-parents-should-know/

July 23, 2025.

Lessons from a Decade of Police, Drug Treatment, and Community Partnerships

“This scenario is ripe for innovation,” wrote Charlier, adding that deflection lays the groundwork for “comprehensive solutions that work in a variety of jurisdictions.”1

A decade later, the benefits suggested in the 2015 article have borne out, and the practice of deflection indeed has exploded into the emergence of a global field and movement. Reflecting on the impact of deflection over the past decade, many additional lessons and benefits have become evident as well.

What’s In a Name?

At first appearance, the need for a word to describe what was a small and disparate set of police departments working with local drug treatment agencies to address overdoses might have seemed unnecessary. With only a handful of departments across the United States known to be doing what would become called deflection, and with departments each developing their own processes ad hoc, the need for a new word was anything but obvious. Now, 10 years on, the word itself, while still new to some, has stuck. That is in part because of the simplicity and logic of the term: while diversion moves people away from the justice system after they have already entered itdeflection happens earlier, before they even enter it, moving them into community-based services instead. In other words, diversion is post-filing, and deflection is always pre-filing, whether or not an arrest occurs.

At the time the deflection term was coined, it was becoming clear that (1) something new and different was happening between police and drug treatment that had not been seen formally before; (2) when looked at closely, even in those early days, it appeared that what other parts of the justice system (prosecutors, jails, courts, prisons, probation, and parole) had been doing for many years (working closely with drug treatment) had now arrived for police; and (3) this was more than a move upstream to the police now doing diversion; rather, this was something very different because it relied not on the justice system solving the problem, but first and foremost on community, treatment, and recovery as co-problem-solving partners with the police.

“When one thinks about when and where they can have the greatest impact with the fewest resources, including costs, it is always best and better to act first at prevention and then early intervention”

Another aspect of deflection that easily could be overlooked yet deserves to be acknowledged for the tremendous innovation that it represents is this: deflection emerged not from the treatment or recovery movement, but from—almost exclusively at first—police, sheriffs, and other law enforcement agencies. The birth of deflection was in large part, but not exclusively, a response to the overdose crisis, and the maxim that “we can’t arrest our way out of this” is due to the courage, willingness, and creativity of police, sheriffs, law enforcement, and prosecutors to seek alternative solutions.

 While one-off versions of deflection have existed here and there since the 1990s, deflection now is practiced across departments, in multicounty approaches, and even at the level of state police. Deflection exists in training, practice, policy, legislation, research, and funding and continues to expand into new areas. It is here to stay and (together with its older sibling diversion, which also works at the intersection of public safety and public health) forms an entirely new way of understanding a practice-based, community-first-approach to reducing drug use and drug use–related crime, while promoting recovery and well-being.

Another way to think about the emergence of deflection is that whereas before, prevention and diversion of drug-related offenses happened through models such as treatment courts, there now exist new opportunities to reduce drug use and drug-related behaviors earlier than previously practicable by thinking of prevention–deflection–diversion, each offering opportunities to act.

Today, 9 U.S. federal agencies; 41 states; and innumerable counties, cities, foundations, researchers, universities, police training units, and—most importantly—police practitioners, recognize deflection. From those original few sites (and with federal, state, and local funding streams for deflection) it is now estimated that more than1,600 deflection initiatives exist, not including any of the  sites outside the United States.

Deflection on an International Scale

Deflection has evolved in concert with parallel international advances in related drug- and crime-reduction policies grounded in public safety and public health working together. For instance, the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), in the past several years, has hosted Commission on Narcotic Drugs (CND) side events focused specifically on deflection. Outside of the United States, deflection initiatives have emerged in the United Kingdom, Ireland, Kenya, Mexico, South Africa, Italy, Tanzania, and other countries as communities seek efficient and cost-effective means to reduce substance use and its consequences.2 Just as has occurred in the United States, these initiatives are growing organically and according to local needs and resources. As one example, deflection practice in the UK incorporates a vast menu of options, from children’s referrals from schools, to veterans, mental health co-response, and women-only pathways. Each program is coordinated through the local authority’s community safety partnership, and each local authority is very different from another.

10 Lessons Learned from 10 Years of Deflection

With these roots, 10 major lessons have emerged as deflection has become formalized and has grown across the United States and globally:

  1. Police–treatment partnerships are effective. The first and most important lesson is that police and drug treatment can work together, side by side, with a shared mission and vision, to make a positive difference for the community. This idea, prior to deflection, was not routinely seen nor practiced. Policing and drug treatment historically have had misgivings about working together, starting with not considering how it might benefit them both to work together. Thanks to deflection, this has now changed. Through locally driven efforts unique to each community, where police departments have flexibility and control over processes, along with treatment partners who offer clinical and outreach expertise, deflection offers mutually rewarding solutions whereby both the justice system and public health system benefit from shared goals through a collaborative working relationship. In practical terms, police officers on the street now have a new “partner” working alongside them to figure out how to handle situations for which police were neither trained nor equipped, and the treatment and recovery communities now have earlier-than-before access to people with problem drug use who were not yet, in all but overdose cases, at the point of crisis. Of course, for the deflection participant, they benefit from a supportive “warm handoff” to treatment and services as a way to stop continued drug use.
  2. Police–recovery partnerships are growing. The second lesson, which stems from the first, is that police and people in recovery from addiction could work well together. If the first lesson was a hill to overcome, then this lesson was the mountain. Indeed, the credit of deflection actually working on the ground, day in and day out, goes to the line officers and people in recovery who have learned to work together by understanding and respecting why the other does what they do. Deflection creates a situation where they need each other. This is because while the police previously may have had the contact with the person using drugs, deflection offered a way to build trust that mattered. Through what is known in the field as “relentless engagement,” the partnerships seek to ensure the person knows that both the officer and treatment/services/recovery supports are there to assist them.
  3. The community is on board. The third lesson is that communities can accept deflection, especially and importantly when key community partners are consulted and included from the outset. Binary notions such as “tough on drugs” versus “let people use drugs” are politicized statements that do not reflect the reality on the ground of what the public wants—a response that leads to a solution that actually works for their family members, neighbors, businesses, and the community alike, and then allows their local police to focus more on serious and violent crimes, including, not coincidently, drug trafficking. Limited resources require efficient use of those resources.
  4. Deflection is effective. The fourth lesson underscores all the others: deflection works. From early evaluations to research to now second and even third site evaluations, it is clear that this entirely new field and movement, which sits between drug prevention and justice diversion (post-filing and entry into the justice system), was indeed called for and needed. As anticipated when it came into being a decade ago, deflection evaluations have shown it can reduce drug use and reduce drug use–related behaviors and crime, while also promoting recovery, well-being, and community safety.3
  5. Deflection’s community focus is rooted in the history of policing. Deflection fits naturally within the history and role of policing. Sir Robert Peel, who established the first organized police force in London, England, in 1829, and August Vollmer, who became known as the “father of modern policing” in the United States a century later, each contended that a foundational principle of policing is to prevent crime before it occurs and that this happens in partnership with the community. They both proposed that, by addressing underlying reasons for criminal behavior, policing practices can mitigate the harm caused by crime and reduce its occurrence. Indeed, Vollmer practically described deflection exactly when he suggested at a 1919 IACP meeting that police collaborate with social service agencies as a crime prevention strategy.4
  6. Police want to help people recover from drug use. The sixth lesson is that the police want to learn more about drug use, misuse, and addiction; about drug treatment and how it works; and most importantly, how they can be part of helping people to recover from addiction. Every day, police see people who use drugs. They see them getting worse, not better, and they see the harmful impact of drug use on families and the community at large. Through deflection, police get to see people reduce and then stop and recover from drug use. This is critical to a profession that otherwise often sees only bad and negative things. Police can see in deflection the role they play in reducing the scourge of addiction and how helpful they and their profession can be. They are not asked to provide treatment nor do the case management, but they kick off the entire process. It is said within the field that while police may be only the first step of many to recovery from drugs, without law enforcement, deflection would never get started. (Deflection is now practiced by EMS and fire departments, as well as by others, including second responders, but police deflection still makes up the majority of sites.)
  7. Local, community-based designs, decisions, and control are vital. Deflection is a framework, not a program. This is often heard in the field with the idea being that while some critical elements that make deflection work, and work better, are known, it is and always will exist only within the context of the local community in which it operates. Deflection is a multisystems approach to addressing a complex, often chronic problem: addiction. That means the local community has a say in how it is designed and looks; police have a say in how it operates; and treatment and recovery providers have a say into how it will focus their limited resources. The complexity of deflection, understood within the design of a specific community, is what gives meaning to the statement, “If you’ve seen one deflection initiative, you’ve truly seen only one deflection initiative.”
  8. Deflection is good public policy. The combined voice of police, drug treatment, and community together makes for good, community-grounded public policy, and as a result, is much more powerful when speaking to drug policy, funding, and practice than any of them would be alone. This lesson comes from the work of each of the deflection sites themselves, which figures out how to make it work on the ground and from that, find their shared voice to do more and do better to share deflection insights with neighboring communities.
  9. Barriers to treatment persist. The ninth lesson is that deflection has required greater adjustments for treatment than it has for the police. For police, any initial hesitancy about deflection usually relates to the practical side of how this will work. For treatment, recovery, and health partners, working alongside the police is often a new endeavor altogether. Interestingly, treatment partners will state they know this can be done but do not know how. Deflection creates a bridge between public safety and public health and the resulting connection provides guidance; instruction; training; and most important, one-on-one relationships between officers, people who treat those who use drugs, and people in recovery.
  10. The efficiency of deflection: Why wait for an arrest? The tenth lesson comes directly from the motto of the deflection field: “Why wait for an arrest?” Deflection offers an opportunity to get people to treatment before they reach the point of entering the justice system, and often before addiction has set in at full force. Deflection creates pathways, six to be exact, to connect people to treatment, housing, recovery, and services.5)

This matters because when one thinks about when and where they can have the greatest impact with the fewest resources, including costs, it is always best and better to act first at prevention and then early intervention. This is, of course, where deflection operates. In cases of overdose, its focus is preventing the next potential overdose. Deflection is an early, upstream strategy. This means that deflection is efficient in addressing issues before they become crises or happen again.

First national deflection and pre-arrest diversion summit, held at IACP in Alexandria, VA, 2017.
Photo courtesy TASC’s Center for Health and Justice.

As the decade since the introduction of the term deflection closes out and stakeholders reflect on these 10 lessons learned, the future of this field and movement is nothing but positive. It is growing nationally and globally; it is now common; it has funding and legislative support; researchers and policymakers are doing more of it; the demands to show more and better outcomes by the public are underway; and there is much more to come. Most important, the idea attached to the word deflection—this foundational change in how police and drug treatment work together, in and with the community—is no longer unusual, something not understood. Rather, the communities  practicing it show that deflection can be done, and the field indeed is doing it!

Finally, as deflection celebrates its 10th anniversary with a celebration at the Police, Treatment, and Community Collaborative (PTACC) 2025 International Deflection and Pre-Arrest Diversion Summit in New Orleans, Louisiana, from December 2–4, deflection sites will share their own lessons learned. Police professionals are invited to join PTACC in New Orleans. After that, it’s time to get ready for the next 10 years. Many possibilities exist of where this work will go, but this field and movement, once unheard of, will be more, do more, and achieve more. Indeed, police, treatment, and communities alike are counting on deflection to do just that! d

 

 

Source: https://www.policechiefmagazine.org/deflection-turns-10/

 

OPENING REMARK BY NDPA:

Dianova presents itself as a “Swiss NGO recognized as a Public Utility organization, committed to social progress”. Examination of their publications places them as an organisation which is less committed to primary prevention than to reactive approaches, such as harm reduction. A telling quote in this context comes in their publication entitledBetween Music and Substances: a Look at Drug Use at Festivals” they introduce this by saying Drug use is a common occurrence at most music festivals: how can we promote self-care and harm reduction among participants?”there is no mention of prevention as a policy option.

In their ‘history’ Dianova take a position found not infrequently in some other other critics of prevention i.e. any prevention program which does not achieve 100% success is deemed a failure … but no such assessment is made of reactive or accepting policies.

In this publication they dismiss the ‘Just Say No’ program as “…focusing mainly on white, middle-class children, it simply pointed the finger at others, particularly black communities, who were held responsible for the problem.” And yet immediately below this statement they include a photo of a White House ‘Just Say No’ rally, with Nancy Regan surrounded by black youngsters.

Dianova make judgemental remarks – without supporting evidence – in several places, and NDPA take would issue with several of these, but we have elected to retain this paper complete with their judgemental remarks, to illustrate their position on the ‘history’ as they see it.

by the Dianova.org team – 

From the early 20th century to the present day, an overview of the origins of drug use prevention, past mistakes and the current situation in this field

By the Dianova team – Over the past 40 years, prevention has become a key focus of public intervention in many areas, including responses to social issues such as alcohol and other drug use. Prevention strategies are now most often part of a comprehensive approach combining prevention, treatment and harm reduction, and taking into account the needs of people who use drugs and those of society as a whole.

These initiatives are developed on the basis of applied research in the humanities and social sciences, and their implementation and evaluation are based on scientifically validated strategies designed to answer one key question: do they work?

Understanding risk factors is crucial in modern drug prevention interventions, as it enables us to address the root causes of substance use and promote protective factors such as strong family bonds, engagement with school, and community support – Image by stokpic from pixabay, via Canva

Rather than raising awareness of the ‘dangers of drugs’, most initiatives today prefer to target risk factors and protective factors at the individual, family, community and environmental levels. These interventions are designed to be person-centred, while taking into account the many complex interactions between personal and environmental factors that may make certain populations more vulnerable to substance use or addiction. However, this has not always been the case. So what was prevention like before? Is prevention today so different from what it was in the past?

The origins of prevention: combating the ravages of alcohol

All forms of prevention stem from the 19th-century school of thought influenced by Pasteur’s work on the spread of disease: hygienism. This developed in a society plagued by diseases such as tuberculosis and cholera, which were widespread in most European countries, as well as in India, the United States and Canada.

With regard to substance use, it was alcohol that initially became the focus of efforts in Western countries. . In the countries concerned, the Industrial Revolution caused a profound change in drinking habits and exacerbated related problems. The advent of industrialization precipitated a period of exponential growth in the production, transportation and commercialization of alcohol. In urban areas, which experienced a significant increase in population following the rural exodus, millions of workers, reliant on their employers and lacking in social rights, found solace in alcohol, which had become readily available and inexpensive. Alcohol consumption increased significantly, as did the associated problems.

The temperance movement, a group of religious associations and leagues committed to combating the social ills of alcoholism, fought against the consumption of alcohol in the name of morality, good manners and the protection of the family unit. The influence of this movement grew until it reached its zenith in the early 20th century with the advent of alcohol prohibition laws, not only in the United States, but also in Canada, Finland and Russia – with the results we all know.

“The voluntary slave” – press illustration published in “La Fraternité” (France) for the Popular Anti-alcoholic league, author Adolphe Willette – circa 1875 – Adapted from screenshot from L’histoire par l’image

What about illegal drugs?

At the dawn of the 20th century, the concept of ‘illegal’ drugs had yet to be established. Europe and America had recently discovered a ‘remarkable substance’ – cocaine – lauded for its medicinal properties, touted as a panacea for all maladies. Initially imported in small quantities for medical research, its use grew rapidly, particularly within the medical community, and it was prescribed to treat a wide range of ailments, from toothache to morphine addiction. Sigmund Freud himself considered at the time cocaine to be a highly effective medicine for depression and stomach problems without causing addiction or side effects. With regard to cannabis and hashish, these were still available for purchase in all reputable pharmacies, while heroin, a registered trademark of the Bayer pharmaceutical company, was regarded as a sovereign remedy for… coughs.

It should be noted that the issue of substance addiction had not yet manifested itself in the context of affluent, colonizing nations. Elsewhere, the perspective was somewhat different: in a distant country – China – opium had already been wreaking havoc for several decades.

Introduced and marketed by Europeans, it had become a pervasive national scourge affecting millions of Chinese people. Opium  addiction is a prime example of the impact of colonialism on local societies: not only did it trigger two wars against Western powers concerned solely with their economic interests (profits from the opium trade), but it also had profound social and political consequences that are still felt today.

The Western countries’ ‘honeymoon’ with drugs was not to last. The problems they posed became apparent rapidly and, under the influence of American temperance leagues, they swiftly transitioned from being regarded as a universal remedy to being perceived as a threat to society and moral values. This marked the beginning of American policies predicated on drug control (or the war on drugs, depending on one’s perspective), which would shape global policies in this domain for over a century.

The demonization of ‘drugs’

The demonisation of drugs, the effects of which were felt from the beginning of the 20th century, is closely associated with a set of social, racial, political and economic dynamics that resulted in the stigmatization of both the substances themselves and the people who consumed them. As early as 1906, the United States initiated the legislative process, and the phenomenon grew until it culminated in a particularly restrictive and repressive international drug control policy – but that is another matter.

In the 1930s, the American government initiated a media offensive involving the use of racist stereotypes, sensationalist media, and political propaganda to portray cannabis as a dangerous substance that led to violence, insanity, and moral decay.

The process of demonizing drugs was gradual yet unstoppable. The discourse surrounding narcotics such as morphine, opium and heroin was initially shaped by their association with specific demographic groups, namely minorities, the economically disadvantaged, and migrants. This demonization continued over the following decades, fuelled by media sensationalism and public panic, particularly around the use of cocaine and cannabis – substances that were claimed to be the root cause of criminal behaviour and moral corruption.

The criminalization and stigmatization of substances and those who use them have had a profound impact. Not only have they perpetuated and reinforced racist prejudices against Afro-descendant, Latin American and other historically marginalized communities, but they have also completely distorted the approaches and prevention efforts implemented subsequently.

Early drug prevention initiatives

Before the 1960s, the ‘drug phenomenon’ was virtually non-existent in industrialised countries. Apart from a few opium enthusiasts, alcohol and tobacco reigned supreme in the field of substance addiction.

From the 1960s onwards, there was a rapid increase in the use of illegal drugs in the United States, particularly among the counterculture movement. The use of LSD and cannabis – and, to a lesser extent, amphetamines and heroin – spread and became a symbol of rebellion against authority, as part of a broader movement focused on social change.

Within the collective imagination, the 1960s are often regarded as the golden age of illegal drug use. This period was characterised by widespread use of cannabis, as well as the significant distribution of heroin among children in impoverished neighbourhoods. Notable figures such as Timothy Leary, a prominent Harvard professor, popularised the effects of LSD. However, an analysis of historical data reveals that the phenomenon was not as widespread as is commonly believed. Conversely, however, there was a marked increase in the perception of risk associated with drugs. For instance, in 1969, a mere 4% of American adults reported having used cannabis at least once. However, 48% of respondents indicated that drug use was a serious problem.

While many current prevention efforts have a solid theoretical basis and evidence of effectiveness, historic prevention strategies were often based on intuition and guesswork, with an emphasis on such scare tactics as the one depicted above (“Your brain on drugs” campaign, initially launched in 1987)

The notion of prevention as a concept was first developed in the early 1960s within the domain of mental health and behavioural disorders. In the context of drug policy, the first initiatives were echoing the pervasive fear of drugs that was prevalent in both America and Europe during that period. Logically, the primary initiatives were consistent with the propaganda campaigns initiated in previous decades with the objective of demonizing cannabis. The objective of these initial prevention initiatives was not to promote education, but rather to instil a sense of fear and intimidation.

Children and young people in the 1960s and 1970s were no more stupid than anyone else and just as observant. They quickly realised that the messages promoted by schools and families did not correspond to reality.

So simple, ‘Just Say No’.

In 1971, Richard Nixon declared drug abuse ‘public enemy number one’ and launched a widespread campaign against drug use, distribution and trafficking. This marked the beginning of a government policy that led to the incarceration of both traffickers and users. The policy would have far-reaching consequences for many countries, whilst in the United States it would have a disproportionately negative impact on the Black community.

The notion that one should ‘Just Say No’ to drugs is predicated on a rudimentary interpretation of the rational choice model, according to which people choose their behaviour in order to maximize rewards and minimize costs (negative consequences).

Nancy Reagan at a “Just Say No” rally at the White House in May 1986 – White House Photographic Collection, public domain

The D.A.R.E. programme: information is not enough

From 1983 onwards, this concept became central to the D.A.R.E. (Drug Abuse Resistance Education) programme. Initially implemented in Los Angeles, this school-based programme aimed to help young people understand that the harmful consequences of drug use far outweigh any perceived benefits. Young people can therefore avoid these consequences by refusing to take drugs.

The D.A.R.E programme’s model was based on three key elements: 1) drugs are bad; 2) when children understand how bad drugs are, they will avoid using them; and 3) the message is more effective when delivered by police officers, who are considered credible.

The programme was subsequently developed in the United Kingdom, and a similar model was adopted elsewhere in Europe during the same period — notably by associations of rehabilitated individuals — which replaced the credibility of police officers with that of former drug users ‘who could speak from experience’.

In response to findings on the ineffectiveness of the DARE programme, a new curriculum was developed (2009) with a stronger focus on interactive activities and decision-making skills, moving away from the traditional lecture-based approach by a police officer – AI-generated image, via Canva

Over the years, the programme has been the subject of extensive study. One study found that people who completed the programme had higher levels of drug use than those who did not. Another study found that teenagers enrolled in the D.A.R.E programme “were just as likely to use drugs as those who received no intervention”.

The impact of popular culture

The aim here is not to portray the D.A.R.E. programme or similar interventions solely in an unfavourable or ridiculous light. Even though it has lost its central position, the programme is still implemented in most US states, and according to its website, it has been developed in 29 countries since its creation. It is true that the programme has since been adapted to incorporate various aspects, such as resistance to peer pressure and the development of social skills.

However, these initiatives face a major difficulty from the outset. As we know, experimentation and risk-taking are part of normal adolescent development, which is why providing young people with detailed information about different substances is likely to arouse their interest in these drugs, especially if the information is not presented in an appropriate manner. Secondly, this type of strategy only has an impact on young people who are susceptible to alarmist messages because of their cognitive patterns, and is not effective for everyone else, as we now know.

Officers in the DARE programme would sometimes arrive in sports cars seized from drug traffickers to exemplify their message on drugs and crime (Crime does not pay) – A Pontiac Firebird in D.A.R.E. livery in Evesham Township, New Jersey – image: Jay Reed – Flickr, licence: CC BY-SA 2.0

Furthermore, when talking about drugs, one must also consider the influence of popular culture, which, without openly glorifying substance use, often portrays alcohol, tobacco, and other drugs in a favourable light, particularly at an age when young people are most receptive.

We now know that providing information about drugs is not enough to make for a good prevention policy. While education and awareness can always play an important role, they are not sufficient, nor even necessary, to prevent addiction.

Should we talk about drugs to prevent drug use?

According to Dr Rebecca Haines-Saah, who spoke at a webinar organised by Dianova last May, the most effective drug prevention strategies do not focus on drugs, but on much broader social issues, such as reducing poverty, combating discrimination and implementing targeted community programmes.

These approaches aim to create conditions that indirectly discourage drug use, particularly by strengthening social skills and improving people’s living conditions. For example, programmes focused on improving the school environment, teaching social skills or promoting healthy lifestyles can have a positive impact on reducing substance use without explicitly targeting drugs.

Similarly, family interventions that strengthen parent-child relationships and improve communication can also help prevent substance misuse by targeting underlying risk factors. These strategies highlight the importance of a holistic approach to prevention that goes far beyond direct drug education.

Prevention is a science

Preventing substance use – i.e. the use of all psychoactive substances regardless of their legal status –  involves helping people, particularly young people, to avoid using substances. If they have already used substances, the objective is to prevent them from developing substance use disorders (problematic use or dependence).

However, the overall objective is much broader, as highlighted by the UNODC in the second edition of the International Standards on Drug Use Prevention. It also involves ensuring that children and adolescents grow up healthy and safe, so they can fulfil their potential and become active and productive members of society.

Drug prevention is now grounded in research and evidence-based practices. This multi-disciplinary field has developed over the last forty years, aiming to improve public health by identifying risk and protective factors, assessing the efficacy of preventive interventions, and identifying optimal means for dissemination and diffusion –  AndreyPopov from Getty Images, via Canva

There is now a vast body of literature on substance use prevention. Its aim is to highlight effective and less effective strategies based on scientific evidence in order to guide decision-makers and practitioners in the field in their choices. Despite this, prevention activities are still sometimes poorly prepared and based primarily on beliefs or ideologies rather than scientific knowledge.

At Dianova, we believe that addiction prevention, particularly among young people, must take into account societal changes (new drugs, new patterns of use, changes in legislation, etc.) using scientifically validated strategies based on standards and methodological guidelines.

These strategies are based in particular on:

  • The acquisition of psychosocial skills (problem solving, decision-making, interpersonal skills, stress management, etc.),
  • Interventions aimed at developing parenting skills (e.g. communication skills, conflict management, setting boundaries, etc.),
  • Prevention strategies tailored to young people with vulnerability factors (e.g. those whose parents suffer from substance use disorders) and taking into account gender perspectives, abandoning androcentric strategies that obscure the situation of girls and LGBTQI+ communities.

In conclusion, we must bear in mind the mistakes of the past so as not to repeat them and, above all, understand that no prevention system is sufficient on its own. Whatever approach is chosen, effective prevention systems must be evidence-based and integrated into broader, balanced systems that focus on health promotion, the treatment of substance use disorders, risk and harm reduction, and countering drug trafficking.

Effective, science-based programmes that can make a real difference to people’s lives can only be developed by integrating all these elements.

Source: https://www.dianova.org/publications/a-brief-history-of-drug-prevention/

 

Report to Congressional Committees – July 2025  / GAO-25-107845 – United States GAO – (Government Accountability Office)

Highlights

A report to congressional committees.

For more information, contact: Triana McNeil – United States Government Accountability Office

What GAO Found

The 12 experts in a forum which GAO convened said that to develop effective media campaigns and evaluate media campaigns, whether on drug misuse prevention or other topics, campaigns need to consider the following: 

Graphical user interface, text, application AI-generated content may be incorrect.

·         Identify and understand intended audience. Once a campaign has identified who it wants to reach, it needs to understand the intended audience—including by identifying the underlying causes of the behavior the campaign wants to change. For example, experts noted that campaigns may decide to target the underlying reasons why people misuse drugs rather than developing campaigns to target specific drugs.

·         Create content, select messengers, and decide on delivery methods. Campaigns need to create content to deliver their messages, which need to be credible and relevant for the intended audience. Campaigns also need to select messengers to deliver their messages, such as community leaders. Additionally, campaigns need to decide how to deliver their messages. For example, campaigns may use print and social media, among other options.

·         Test messages. Campaigns need to test their messages with the intended audience to ensure that the messages are relevant and resonate with the intended audience. This testing can include using focus groups, interviews, or surveys, among other methods.

·         Define the intended outcome. Campaigns need to have a clear understanding of what they are trying to achieve. Then, evaluators can decide what data are needed to determine whether a campaign is meeting its goals.

·         Select qualified evaluators. Campaigns need independent evaluators who can speak to campaign managers about a campaign’s effectiveness using evidence from evaluations. Evaluators need expertise in research methods, evaluation, and other disciplines and need to understand the campaign substance.

·         Decide when and how to measure effectiveness. Campaigns need to decide if they will evaluate the campaign while it is ongoing or after the campaign has concluded. They also need to decide what they want to measure and what data collection methods they will use.

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Source: https://files.gao.gov/reports/GAO-25-107845/index.html?

 

by Charles Fain Lehman – Wall Street Journal – July 2, 2025

President Trump should halt Biden’s attempt to make pot a ‘Schedule III’ substance.

Whether to loosen the government’s ultra-tight controls on marijuana is among the matters President Trump inherited from Joe Biden.

Under law, marijuana is a Schedule I substance, meaning it has no accepted medical use and a high potential for abuse. Mr. Biden initiated a process to move pot to Schedule III, thereby labelling it a medicine with only moderate abuse potential. Mr. Trump must decide whether to move ahead with the change.

He shouldn’t. Rescheduling would bolster a socially disastrous legal weed industry that has spread crime and disorder in the streets. Containing that chaos instead of spreading it would be in line with the president’s mandate.

Rescheduling wouldn’t mean legalization. Marijuana would still be a federally controlled substance, subject to the same restrictions as drugs like ketamine and anabolic steroids. Rescheduling also wouldn’t mean increasing the medical availability of marijuana. Medical cannabis is legal in 40 states, and the Rohrabacher-Farr Amendment, which became law in 2014, prohibits spending money to enforce federal laws against these operations. Marijuana is already more available to “medical” users than other Schedule III substances.

The primary effect of rescheduling, as the Congressional Research Service has shown, would be a tax break to fuel the growth of state-legal marijuana businesses. That’s because a provision of the tax code, Section 280E, which provides that businesses can’t deduct the costs of trafficking in Schedule I or II controlled substances. But that’s not the case for Schedule III.

That affects state-legal marijuana businesses. Because of 280E, these firms can pay effective tax rates as high as 70%. Shifting pot to schedule III would alleviate the tax burden, and give the firms more room to operate. That would be good if these were normal companies, and if their business wasn’t socially and individually harmful. But the state-legal marijuana business has been a catastrophe.

Legalization has increased rates of marijuana addiction—typically called “marijuana use disorder”—including rates of heavy use among teens. State-legal businesses have a profit-motivated reason to nurture addiction. Due to legalization, today’s pot is far more potent than it was decades ago. Research links marijuana use, especially in young adulthood, to IQ loss, schizophrenia, heart attacks, strokes and lung disease.

As important, legalization is already socially toxic. Research by the Kansas City Federal Reserve found it has increased homelessness, addiction and arrests by double-digit percentages. Other research, on Seattle and Vancouver, British Columbia, finds that dispensary proximity causally reduces property values. There’s also the odor, which nearly half of New York City residents reported smelling “often” in a recent poll.

Legalization hasn’t even killed the black market. By expanding the consumer base while regulating the supply, it has made the illicit alternative more appealing than ever. Cannabis forecaster Whitney Economics has projected that in 2026 the black market will still account for 60% of sales.

Much of that money flows to Chinese criminal groups, which “have come to dominate the cultivation and distribution of marijuana throughout the United States,” according to the Drug Enforcement Administration’s recent National Drug Threat Assessment. Maybe that is why a majority of Americans now say that pot is bad for its users and society, according to Gallup.

The rescheduling decision rests with the Justice and Health and Human Services departments, which both take marching orders from the president. Mr. Trump should end Mr. Biden’s dangerous social experiment.

Source: https://www.wsj.com/opinion/legal-marijuanas-disastrous-legacy-policy-law-7c727c22

OPENING REMARK BY NDPA.

This article involves several prestigious authors – not least Bertha K Madras. We therefore recommend readers to its contents, albeit they are lengthy and sometimes complex.

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

 

Source: Rescheduling Cannabis – Medicine or Politics

Cannabis dependence affects millions globally, with over 23 million people worldwide struggling with problematic use patterns. As treatment demand continues rising, understanding which psychological interventions for cannabis dependence work best has become increasingly important. This comprehensive guide examines the latest evidence on therapeutic approaches that help individuals overcome cannabis-related difficulties.

Understanding Cannabis Dependence and Treatment Needs

Cannabis use becomes problematic when it significantly interferes with daily life, relationships, and responsibilities. The World Health Organisation recognises that whilst brief interventions may help casual users, those with established dependence require specialised psychological treatments for cannabis problems.

Recent statistics reveal the growing need for effective interventions:

  1. Treatment admissions in Europe increased by 30% between 2010 and 2019
  2. Young adults aged 20-24 show the highest rates of problematic use
  3. Cannabis is now the most frequently cited substance among those entering treatment programmes

Evidence-Based Psychological Interventions for Cannabis Users

A major systematic review from the University of Bristol analysed 22 clinical trials involving over 3,300 participants, providing crucial insights into which therapeutic approaches demonstrate real effectiveness.

Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy with Motivational Enhancement

The most extensively researched approach combines cognitive restructuring with motivation-building techniques. This integrated therapy helps individuals:

  1. Identify triggers and high-risk situations
  2. Develop practical coping strategies
  3. Build internal motivation for change
  4. Master skills to prevent relapse

Research demonstrates this approach can increase abstinence rates nearly threefold compared to no intervention, establishing it as a cornerstone of evidence-based care.

Third-Wave Therapies: DBT and ACT Approaches

Newer psychological interventions for cannabis problems incorporate mindfulness and acceptance-based strategies. These therapies teach:

  1. Mindfulness skills for managing cravings
  2. Emotional regulation techniques
  3. Distress tolerance without substance use
  4. Values clarification and committed action

Studies show these approaches can quadruple abstinence rates when compared to basic psychoeducation alone.

Community Reinforcement Strategies

This approach restructures the individual’s environment to support recovery through:

  1. Leveraging community resources
  2. Building substance-free social networks
  3. Creating natural reinforcements for positive change
  4. Addressing multiple life domains simultaneously

Effectiveness of Psychological Treatments for Cannabis Dependence

The research reveals important findings about treatment outcomes:

Abstinence Achievement

Structured psychological interventions significantly improve abstinence rates. Individuals receiving cognitive-behavioural therapy are 18 times more likely to achieve abstinence compared to those awaiting treatment.

Reducing Use Frequency

For individuals not ready for complete abstinence, certain therapies effectively reduce consumption patterns. Acceptance-based approaches can decrease usage frequency by approximately 60%.

Treatment Duration and Structure

Effective programmes typically include:

  1. 6-52 sessions (average of 14)
  2. Weekly meetings over 2-6 months
  3. Individual or group formats
  4. Structured, manualised approaches

Key Components of Successful Psychological Interventions for Cannabis

Research identifies several critical elements that enhance treatment effectiveness:

Skills Training

Teaching practical techniques for managing triggers, cravings, and high-risk situations proves essential for lasting change.

Motivational Enhancement

Building intrinsic motivation through personalised feedback and collaborative goal-setting improves engagement and outcomes.

Relapse Prevention

Comprehensive planning for potential setbacks helps maintain gains achieved during active treatment.

Environmental Modification

Addressing social and environmental factors that maintain problematic use patterns enhances long-term success.

Challenges in Delivering Effective Treatment

Despite proven effectiveness, several challenges affect treatment delivery:

Engagement and Retention

Maintaining participant engagement throughout treatment remains challenging, with completion rates varying significantly across different approaches.

Individual Differences

Treatment response varies based on:

  1. Severity of dependence
  2. Co-occurring mental health conditions
  3. Social support availability
  4. Personal motivation levels

Access to Services: Many individuals face barriers accessing evidence-based psychological treatments for cannabis problems, including geographical limitations and resource constraints.

Future Directions for Cannabis Treatment Research

As cannabis potency increases and use patterns evolve, treatment approaches must adapt accordingly. Priority areas include:

  1. Developing age-specific interventions for adolescents
  2. Creating culturally adapted treatments
  3. Integrating technology-enhanced delivery methods
  4. Addressing co-occurring conditions simultaneously

Implications for Treatment Seekers

For individuals considering treatment, research suggests:

  1. Evidence-based psychological interventions offer genuine hope for recovery
  2. Different approaches suit different individuals
  3. Professional assessment helps match treatment to personal needs
  4. Persistence often proves necessary, as initial attempts may not succeed

The growing evidence base confirms that specialised psychological interventions for cannabis dependence can produce meaningful, lasting change when properly implemented and tailored to individual needs.

Conclusion: Current research provides strong support for several psychological approaches in treating cannabis dependence. Whilst cognitive-behavioural therapy with motivational enhancement shows the most consistent evidence, acceptance-based therapies and community reinforcement approaches also demonstrate effectiveness. As our understanding grows, these evidence-based treatments offer real pathways to recovery for those struggling with cannabis-related problems.

Source: https://nobrainer.org.au/index.php/resources/i-need-to-stop-this-help/1471-psychological-interventions-for-cannabis-dependence-latest-research-on-effective-therapies?

Email From: Drug Free America Foundation – 11 July 2025

Some hopeful news has come to light in the latest Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) Annual Report: overdose deaths dropped more than 20% nationwide in 2024, which is the largest yearly decrease in four decades of tracking. Although this decrease in overdose deaths is good news, it does not mean the crisis is over. Changes in drug mixtures, independent regional shifts in overdose patterns, and the alarming rise in new chemical contaminants—many of which users don’t even know they’re taking—makes this ever-evolving issue complex and increasingly more dangerous than ever before.

The DEA found that 1 in 8 samples of methamphetamine now contains fentanyl, and 1 in 4 samples of cocaine samples are similarly contaminated. And while deaths from fentanyl may be decreasing, fentanyl is increasingly being mixed into other drugs, often with deadly result.

In a regional assessment of fentanyl-related deaths, stimulants such as cocaine and methamphetamine were found to be contaminated with fentanyl and linked to 1 out of every 2 drug-related deaths in the west and 1 out of every 3 drug-related deaths in the east. Contaminated drug mixtures are especially dangerous given that naloxone, one of the key measures in reducing opioid overdose deaths, is ineffective against non-opioid drugs such as stimulants.

Among the surprising findings was that between 2018 and 2022, fentanyl-only overdose among 15-24 year olds increased approximately 168%. This age group, which is one that generally does not seek fentanyl, are suspected to be unknowingly consuming drugs laced with it. The low production cost of fentanyl continues to fuel the shift between already dangerous plant-based drugs to lab-made substances. The emergence of additives that cause prolonged sedation such as xylazine and medetomidine increase the dangers associated with the consumption of these drugs as some these mixtures may also render naloxone ineffective.

Despite the drop in overall overdose deaths the U.S. still has the highest drug overdose rate in the world, with 324 deaths per million people. Most states are showing promising progress with decreases in drug-related deaths. However, Nevada is an exception, experiencing an increase largely driven by methamphetamines, which have now surpassed fentanyl as the leading cause of drug-related deaths in the state.

Although overall trends seem to show a positive promising future, the drug supply is evolving faster than available tools can manage. And overdose risks are no longer about misuse, but also about unknowing exposure to potent synthetic chemicals hidden in recognizable drugs.

Source: Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Ave N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

by Yousef al Habsi – Oman Observer – Muscat, Jul 13, 2025

6,741 narcotic cases recorded in Oman between 2023 and 2024

The Public Prosecution disclosed that 6,741 drug cases were recorded in the Sultanate of Oman between 2023 and 2024, warning of an increase in drug abuse among various society segments including women.

The Public Prosecution called for increased awareness and family monitoring to protect children from falling into drug addiction.

Dr Rashid al Kaabi, the official spokesperson for the Public Prosecution, said that international criminal networks use social media to lure young people, turn them into addicts and then exploit them in drug trafficking or committing crimes. He explained that drugs are smuggled into the country via land, sea and air, noting that the Sultanate of Oman’s strategic location makes it a potential transit point for drugs.

The most common types of drugs are: hashish, shabu, heroin and painkillers, he said, pointing to the devastating health, social and economic impacts of drugs including psychological and physical illnesses, family disintegration, theft and violence as well as the economic loss. He called for a greater role for the family, educational, religious and media institutions.

He added that the Sultanate of Oman is applying the national strategy (2023–2028) for combating drugs and is intensifying prevention, treatment and rehabilitation efforts. He praised the role of the Royal Oman Police, the Ministry of Health, the Public Prosecution, the Ministry of Education, and other relevant authorities in combating the drug phenomenon.

The Public Prosecution spokesman stressed the importance of monitoring children, adding that families should not hesitate to seek treatment when necessary as addiction is not just a deviation but a disease that requires early and comprehensive intervention.

The Sultanate of Oman had taken a series of important legislative and regulatory steps, the first of which was passing the Law on Combating Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances pursuant to Royal Decree No 99/17.

In addition, the National Strategy for Combating Narcotics and Psychotropic Substances (2023-2028) was laid out, outlining the policies, programmes and regulatory activities necessary to address contemporary challenges in this field, the Public Prosecution spokesman said.

The Royal Oman Police (ROP), through the Directorate-General for Combating Narcotics and Psychotropic Substances, continues making significant efforts to implement the necessary security measures to prevent drug smuggling across land, sea and air. The ROP has significant capabilities to confront cross-border smuggling networks.

In the same context, the Public Prosecution is responsible for handling drug and addiction cases through the Drug Cases Department, he said, adding that the number of drug cases reported in 2024 saw a significant increase compared to 2023.

Source: https://www.omanobserver.om/article/1173442/oman/call-for-awareness-as-drug-abuse-hits-a-high

by The Daily Telegraph, London, UK –

Sadiq Khan wants to decrim­in­al­ise the Class-B drug, but fam­il­ies and doc­tors warn that smoking it is ‘play­ing Rus­sian roul­ette with your brain’. By Gwyneth Rees

For retired char­ity dir­ector Terry Ham­mond, 78, the issue of can­nabis-induced psy­chosis has come to dom­in­ate his life. About 25 years ago, his teen­age son Steven, now 42, began smoking skunk – a highly potent strain of the drug – at friends’ houses, without his par­ents know­ing.

For retired char­ity dir­ector Terry Ham­mond, 78, the issue of can­nabis-induced psy­chosis has come to dom­in­ate his life. About 25 years ago, his teen­age son Steven, now 42, began smoking skunk – a highly potent strain of the drug – at friends’ houses, without his par­ents know­ing.

“He was like so many young boys,” recalls Ham­mond from his home in Leicester­shire. “He was binge­ing on it in secret and thought it would be fine.” But around six months later, in the autumn of 1999, Steven sud­denly became para­noid. “We were watch­ing the BBC news, and he turned to me and accused me of ringing them. He was con­vinced the presenters were talk­ing about him.”

The psy­chosis didn’t stop there. “He began to think ali­ens had taken over every­body,” adds Ham­mond. “Then he began mum­bling in an incom­pre­hens­ible lan­guage, shout­ing at the walls and lock­ing him­self in his room. He was a boy gripped by abso­lute fear and ter­ror, and his beau­ti­ful mind had just been des­troyed.”

The psy­chosis didn’t stop there. “He began to think ali­ens had taken over every­body,” adds Ham­mond. “Then he began mum­bling in an incom­pre­hens­ible lan­guage, shout­ing at the walls and lock­ing him­self in his room. He was a boy gripped by abso­lute fear and ter­ror, and his beau­ti­ful mind had just been des­troyed.”

At 21, and with no fam­ily his­tory of men­tal health prob­lems, Steven was dia­gnosed with para­noid schizo­phrenia – psy­chosis that con­tin­ues indef­in­itely. He spent three months in the depart­ment of psy­chi­atry at the Royal South Hants Hos­pital in Southamp­ton, where he was put on the anti­psychotic drug Olan­za­pine and given talk­ing ther­apy. But even now – two dec­ades on – Steven, who lives in a stu­dio flat in his par­ents’ garden, is still affected by his early drug use.

At 21, and with no fam­ily his­tory of men­tal health prob­lems, Steven was dia­gnosed with para­noid schizo­phrenia – psy­chosis that con­tin­ues indef­in­itely. He spent three months in the depart­ment of psy­chi­atry at the Royal South Hants Hos­pital in Southamp­ton, where he was put on the anti­psychotic drug Olan­za­pine and given talk­ing ther­apy. But even now – two dec­ades on – Steven, who lives in a stu­dio flat in his par­ents’ garden, is still affected by his early drug use.

At 21, and with no fam­ily his­tory of men­tal health prob­lems, Steven was dia­gnosed with para­noid schizo­phrenia – psy­chosis that con­tin­ues indef­in­itely. He spent three months in the depart­ment of psy­chi­atry at the Royal South Hants Hos­pital in Southamp­ton, where he was put on the anti­psychotic drug Olan­za­pine and given talk­ing ther­apy. But even now – two dec­ades on – Steven, who lives in a stu­dio flat in his par­ents’ garden, is still affected by his early drug use.

“He can­not work and struggles socially,” says Ham­mond, who has Steven’s per­mis­sion to share his story and has also writ­ten a book, Gone to Pot, to help oth­ers in sim­ilar cir­cum­stances. “He is still on anti­psychotic drugs but con­tin­ues to hear voices, although he now has the skills to ration­al­ise them.

“He can­not work and struggles socially,” says Ham­mond, who has Steven’s per­mis­sion to share his story and has also writ­ten a book, Gone to Pot, to help oth­ers in sim­ilar cir­cum­stances. “He is still on anti­psychotic drugs but con­tin­ues to hear voices, although he now has the skills to ration­al­ise them.

“It has com­pletely ruined his life, and as par­ents we have had to suf­fer the bereave­ment of los­ing our son. Fun­da­ment­ally, it has dam­aged his brain for good. Young people need to know smoking can­nabis is play­ing Rus­sian roul­ette with brain dam­age.”

It is a har­row­ing story. But the issue of how to tackle the grow­ing prob­lem of ever-more potent can­nabis on our streets divides those in power. Sir Sadiq Khan, Lon­don’s mayor, has backed a report by the Lon­don Drugs Com­mis­sion stat­ing that pos­ses­sion of small amounts of can­nabis should be decrim­in­al­ised. He said there was a “com­pel­ling, evid­ence­based case” for decrim­in­al­isa­tion.

It is a har­row­ing story. But the issue of how to tackle the grow­ing prob­lem of ever-more potent can­nabis on our streets divides those in power. Sir Sadiq Khan, Lon­don’s mayor, has backed a report by the Lon­don Drugs Com­mis­sion stat­ing that pos­ses­sion of small amounts of can­nabis should be decrim­in­al­ised. He said there was a “com­pel­ling, evid­ence­based case” for decrim­in­al­isa­tion.

But on July 7, Bri­tain’s lead­ing police chiefs rejec­ted this and urged their officers to crack down on the drug. Last month, David Sid­wick, the Con­ser­vat­ive police and crime com­mis­sioner for Dor­set, wrote a let­ter to the police min­is­ter Diana John­son – signed by 13 other police and crime com­mis­sion­ers – call­ing can­nabis a “chron­ic­ally dan­ger­ous drug” that is as harm­ful as cocaine and crack.

Evid­ence shows that can­nabisin­duced psy­chosis has sub­stan­tially increased in recent years. A 2019 study pub­lished in The Lan­cet by Prof Marta Di Forti shows that can­nabis is respons­ible for 30 per cent of first-time psy­chosis cases in south Lon­don (it is 50 per cent in Ams­ter­dam).

Evid­ence shows that can­nabisin­duced psy­chosis has sub­stan­tially increased in recent years. A 2019 study pub­lished in The Lan­cet by Prof Marta Di Forti shows that can­nabis is respons­ible for 30 per cent of first-time psy­chosis cases in south Lon­don (it is 50 per cent in Ams­ter­dam).

Fur­ther research, not yet pub­lished, by Dr Diego Quat­trone and Dr Robin Mur­ray, pro­fess­ors of psy­chi­at­ric research at King’s Col­lege Lon­don, reveals that can­nabis-induced psy­chosis in the

‘In Amer­ica, the THC con­tent is so strong, you can go psychotic in one night’

UK is three times more com­mon than in the 1960s. Their research sug­gests that 75 per cent of this increase is down to the use of skunk, which accounts for 94 per cent of can­nabis on the UK mar­ket.

“Viol­ence is also asso­ci­ated with psy­chosis, and of the psychotic people who go on to kill, 90 per cent are using either alco­hol or can­nabis,” says Mur­ray.

More experts are now link­ing can­nabis use to viol­ence, which they attrib­ute to a chem­ical com­pon­ent in the plant – tet­rahy­drocan­nabinol (THC) – which can trig­ger hal­lu­cin­a­tions and para­noid ideas in vul­ner­able indi­vidu­als. Wor­ry­ingly, THC levels in can­nabis have been rising sharply. In the 1960s, THC levels in “weed” were around 3 per cent. Today, most UK can­nabis has THC levels of 16 to 20 per cent. In Hol­land, the fig­ure is between 30 and 40 per cent, and in Cali­for­nia, where can­nabis is legal, levels can reach 80 per cent.

“It is not easy to get psy­chosis,” says Mur­ray. “Typ­ic­ally, someone may smoke skunk for five years before it kicks in. But in Amer­ica, the THC is so strong, you can go psychotic in one night. It will hit those who already have a his­tory of men­tal health prob­lems the worst. We are braced for an epi­demic of psy­chosis.”

Dr Niall Camp­bell, a con­sult­ant psy­chi­at­rist at the Roe­hamp­ton Pri­ory Clinic, believes looser can­nabis reg­u­la­tion com­bined with increased potency have led to more patients suf­fer­ing psy­chosis. “I don’t think this rise is that sur­pris­ing given how easy skunk is to buy online, and how ubi­quit­ous it has become,” he says.

“Psy­chosis often begins with young people smoking a few joints and feel­ing a bit para­noid. But if they don’t stop, over time they can reach a psychotic state which won’t go away, even if they stop smoking. Sadly, this psy­chosis may last a life­time and once people are told that they can get very depressed or sui­cidal.”

“Psy­chosis often begins with young people smoking a few joints and feel­ing a bit para­noid. But if they don’t stop, over time they can reach a psychotic state which won’t go away, even if they stop smoking. Sadly, this psy­chosis may last a life­time and once people are told that they can get very depressed or sui­cidal.”

Lin­sey Raf­ferty, 42, from Pais­ley near Glas­gow, is one of those to have exper­i­enced dam­age firsthand. She had three short psychotic epis­odes over the dec­ades she smoked, but in 2020, dur­ing the Covid lock­down, she suffered an extreme epis­ode. “I was hear­ing things and writ­ing all over the walls of my home,” she says. “I threw my phone away because I thought it had been tapped and was eat­ing out of bins. It all made total sense to me at the time, and I can under­stand why people go viol­ent.”

Lin­sey Raf­ferty, 42, from Pais­ley near Glas­gow, is one of those to have exper­i­enced dam­age firsthand. She had three short psychotic epis­odes over the dec­ades she smoked, but in 2020, dur­ing the Covid lock­down, she suffered an extreme epis­ode. “I was hear­ing things and writ­ing all over the walls of my home,” she says. “I threw my phone away because I thought it had been tapped and was eat­ing out of bins. It all made total sense to me at the time, and I can under­stand why people go viol­ent.”

Raf­ferty was sec­tioned and put on anti­psychot­ics. Five years on, she has stopped smoking.

“When I stopped smoking, the psy­chosis went away,” she says. “But still, the epis­ode was deep and long-last­ing, and the scars haven’t gone. I never real­ised it could make me so vul­ner­able. I used to think drugs should be leg­al­ised, but not any­more.”

Source: https://www.pressreader.com/uk/features/20250716/281548001918086?
Some hopeful news has come to light in the latest Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) Annual Report: overdose deaths dropped more than 20% nationwide in 2024, which is the largest yearly decrease in four decades of tracking. Although this decrease in overdose deaths is good news, it does not mean the crisis is over. Changes in drug mixtures, independent regional shifts in overdose patterns, and the alarming rise in new chemical contaminants—many of which users don’t even know they’re taking—makes this ever-evolving issue complex and increasingly more dangerous than ever before.

 

The DEA found that 1 in 8 samples of methamphetamine now contains fentanyl, and 1 in 4 samples of cocaine samples are similarly contaminated. And while deaths from fentanyl may be decreasing, fentanyl is increasingly being mixed into other drugs, often with deadly result.

In a regional assessment of fentanyl-related deaths, stimulants such as cocaine and methamphetamine were found to be contaminated with fentanyl and linked to 1 out of every 2 drug-related deaths in the west and 1 out of every 3 drug-related deaths in the east. Contaminated drug mixtures are especially dangerous given that naloxone, one of the key measures in reducing opioid overdose deaths, is ineffective against non-opioid drugs such as stimulants.

 

Among the surprising findings was that between 2018 and 2022, fentanyl-only overdose among 15-24 year olds increased approximately 168%. This age group, which is one that generally does not seek fentanyl, are suspected to be unknowingly consuming drugs laced with it. The low production cost of fentanyl continues to fuel the shift between already dangerous plant-based drugs to lab-made substances. The emergence of additives that cause prolonged sedation such as xylazine and medetomidine increase the dangers associated with the consumption of these drugs as some these mixtures may also render naloxone ineffective.

 

Despite the drop in overall overdose deaths the U.S. still has the highest drug overdose rate in the world, with 324 deaths per million people. Most states are showing promising progress with decreases in drug-related deaths. However, Nevada is an exception, experiencing an increase largely driven by methamphetamines, which have now surpassed fentanyl as the leading cause of drug-related deaths in the state.

 

Although overall trends seem to show a positive promising future, the drug supply is evolving faster than available tools can manage. And overdose risks are no longer about misuse, but also about unknowing exposure to potent synthetic chemicals hidden in recognizable drugs.

 

 

Source:  Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Ave N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

 

Key points

  • Substance use prevention is not just focused on the absence of a disease or illness but on promoting wellness.
  • Funding cuts from DOJ for substance use and treatment services may have long-term consequences.
  • These cuts represent the latest cycle of punitive sentiments towards substances use.

On April 22, the Department of Justice (DOJ) announced the termination of 365 awards that “no longer effectuate Department priorities.” Among these cuts were $88 million in Office of Justice Programs (OJP) funded programs administering substance use and mental health services. During Preisdent Trump’s first term, we witnessed a shift away from behavioral health models toward scare tactics and increased law enforcement activities — strategies known to be ineffective at preventing substance use. This term appears to be following that same trajectory.

America has a long history of reactively and emotionally addressing substance use in ways inconsistent with research and best practices. Large swings in political views and funding are not new and have detrimental effects on prevention efforts and communities. This latest rollback represents a reversion back to failed, punitive models, which threatens to unravel decades of progress in promoting community health and wellness.

Substance Use Prevention

Today’s substance use prevention activities are not the mass media scare campaigns seen during the 1960s to the 1990s or as simple as “Just Say No.” Substance use prevention takes a public health approach to promoting wellness and preventing substance use problems.

Unlike early iterations of “prevention,” the ultimate goal of prevention activities today is to promote wellness. Promoting wellness is not the same as advocating for the absence of a disease or illness but the presence of purpose in life, involvement in satisfying work and play, having joyful relationships, a healthy body and living environment, as well as general happiness. The Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA), drawing on Swarbrick’s wellness approach, describes wellness as having eight different dimensions – emotional, spiritual, intellectual, physical, environmental, financial, occupational, and social.

Effective prevention programs work across these dimensions to reduce factors that put people at risk of developing behavioral health disorders (i.e., risk factors) as well as promote or strengthen factors that protect people from these disorders (i.e., protective factors).

The Cycle of Prevention Activities

The way we have responded to substance use has always been reactionary and punitive. Responses to substance use in the U.S. has stretched back over a century and followed a repeating cycle of panic, punishment, and progress. A new drug “hits the streets,” a news article highlights the death of a young, innocent victim, or a new political ringleader will enter the scene spouting “tough on crime” rhetoric that causes a moral panic among the masses and calls for increased punishment. Those sentiments take hold for several years and lead to prison overcrowding and an increase in arrest rates. Eventually, scientific advancements push responses to substance use back into the behavioral health realm. Then, a political campaign or story regresses the U.S. back to failed models of addressing substance use with punishment and the cycle repeats.

The 1950s/1960s are generally seen as the beginning of the modern era of prevention — an era dominated by fear-based approaches. School talks aimed at “scaring kids straight” and media campaigns and movies painted exaggerated horror stories about drug use. But scare-based tactics never work, particularly when youth can see that the lessons don’t reflect their lived experience. By the 1970s, the “War on Drugs” had been launched, and President Nixon had called drugs America’s “public enemy number one” and ushered in a wave of punishment over support. One of the most popular mantras of prevention originated in the 1980s with Nancy Reagan’s famous phrase: ‘Just Say No.’ It was catchy, simple, and widespread, but ultimately ineffective.

In the 1990s, science began to shape prevention and we saw large drops in youth substance use rates ever since. Researchers began to examine risk and protective factors associated with substance use. These studies led to a more structured approach to prevention. New, evidence-based school curricula focused on building life skills, resilience, and relationships were implemented. Community coalitions like the Communities That Care model gained traction. This progress continued in the early 2000s, when prevention finally got a seat at the table in public health. Prevention efforts became evidence-based and multi-layered. Programs began to see substance use as due to a complex interaction between systems and started addressing the risk at the family-, peer-, school-, and individual-level, such as the Seattle Social Development Project.

But this progress is often undermined by political agendas.

The punitive spirit of the War on Drugs remains deeply embedded in U.S. policy. The first Trump administration marked a clear pivot away from behavioral health and back toward criminal justice responses. Law enforcement became the answer while programs focused on research and wellness were deprioritized. Youth substance use trends began to stabilize despite the steady decline they had been on since the 1980s, marking an early sign that prevention was losing its momentum. The Biden-Harris administration brought in a new wave of the War on Drugs by naming a specific adulterated substance, fentanyl combined with xylazine, as an “emerging threat to the United States,” a term traditionally held for matters of homeland security.

Why This Matters Now

This new Trump administration brings new challenges and likely worse consequences as we witness an unprecedented time of widespread cuts to federal funding. Many communities rely heavily on these programs to help their fellow residents promote wellness in their area. Without these programs, improvements in trends in substance use will likely plateau, then potentially worsen. The challenge is that the consequences of cutting prevention are long-term, not immediate. As a result, many will turn to this time period in the next year to point out that there was no visible crisis or dramatic increase in substance use but that is based on a deep misunderstanding in evaluation research. The kids that would have relied on these programs will reach adulthood in the next few years which will be when we see the effects of not having these programs. People who relied on federally funded programs for treatment and support will experience worsening symptoms and rates of fatal overdoses will rise. Our schools will likely witness lower rates of attendance and a higher number of students dropping out or failing. Issues of overcrowding in jails and prisons will continue to worsen as increases in law enforcement activity will lead to greater arrests.

The defunding of mental health and substance use programming is a mistake. When prevention works, it’s invisible — no one sees the overdoses that didn’t happen, hears the fights that were avoided, or reads headlines about the crisis that never occurred. The invisibility of its effects does not mean it is not important.

Mobilizing the Community

We are at risk of repeating history by cutting prevention and returning to failed punitive models. Communities must lead where the federal government is failing. The momentum for prevention has always lain in the power of the community. The earliest substance use prevention movements started with everyday people who cared. Mothers Against Drunk Drivers (MADD) and other grassroots organizations started taking an active role in prevention in the 1980s, and ever since we have seen more communities taking the reins when it comes to promoting wellness in their area. Prevention is not an activity reserved solely for those in power; it is the duty and responsibility of every individual. Prevention is more than a policy or program; it is a promise to keep showing up for each other. If you are not sure where to start, start by telling your story and making space for others to lead. Prevention is strongest when it is shared.

Source:  https://www.psychologytoday.com/us/blog/the-nature-of-substance-use/202505/defunding-prevention-a-setback-for-science-and-public

 

 

A police officer said that no motive is currently known and that Chesser was compliant at the time of her arrest. Police believe he was killed around midnight on Tuesday, June 17.

Australian Reality Star Charged With Murder After Boyfriend's Headless Body Found
Tamika Sueann-Rose Chesser, a 34-year-old former Australian reality TV star, has been charged with murdering her 39-year-old boyfriend, Julian Story. According to a report by The Telegraph, authorities discovered Mr Story’s headless body at their South Australia home in Port Lincoln on June 19, following a report of a small fire. The investigation led to Chesser’s arrest and murder charge after his dismembered remains were found at the apartment. Police are still searching for Mr Story’s severed head.

“It was a confronting scene for police and emergency services personnel as Julian’s body had been dismembered. Julian’s head had been removed during the dismemberment and, despite extensive searches, has not yet been located,” South Australia Police said in a statement Friday. 

Police believe he was killed around midnight on Tuesday, June 17.

A witness reported seeing smoke coming from the apartment and approached Chesser, who claimed she was doing nothing. She then took her dogs for a walk and locked the door. Police released surveillance footage showing a woman, believed to be Chesser, dressed in black and walking with three dogs, just hours after the alleged murder on June 17, around midnight. 

Police are urging residents to review their surveillance or dashcam footage to aid in the ongoing investigation.

“I can only imagine, and I want you to imagine, the grief this news is causing Julian’s family. Recovering Julian’s head to return it to his family so they can have a peaceful outcome, have a funeral and lay him to rest is a really important aspect for us,” Detective Superintendent Darren Fielke added. 

She was taken into custody after police found her in a catatonic and unresponsive state in the backyard of the crime scene, according to court documents. Mr Fielke said there was no obvious motive at this stage, and Chesser was cooperative at the time of the arrest, the ABC reported.

A spokesperson for Mr Story’s family said they were “navigating an unimaginable loss” as they thanked police and first responders for their “compassion and professionalism during this devastating time”.

“We are also deeply grateful to our family and friends and this extraordinary community, whose kindness and support have helped carry us through. Your prayers, presence, and quiet strength mean more than words can say,” the statement added. 

Chesser was the runner-up on the 2010 season of Beauty and the Geek and later modelled for men’s magazines including Playboy, Ralph and FHM. 

She remains in custody under a mental health detention order and due to appear in court again in December.

Sources:

India news: https://www.ndtv.com/world-news/australian-reality-star-charged-with-murder-after-boyfriends-headless-body-found-8795479

Australia news: https://www.aol.com/australian-reality-tv-star-charged-121626759.html

Los Angeles — Inside a bright new building in the heart of Skid Row, homeless people hung out in a canopy-covered courtyard — some waiting to take a shower, do laundry, or get medication for addiction treatment. Others relaxed on shaded grass and charged their phones as an intake line for housing grew more crowded.

The new Skid Row Care Campus offers homeless people health care and a place to rest, charge their phones, grab some

food, or even get connected with housing.Angela Hart / KFF Health News

 

The Skid Row Care Campus officially opened this spring with ample offerings for people living on the streets of this historically downtrodden neighborhood. Pop-up fruit stands and tent encampments lined the sidewalks, as well as dealers peddling meth and fentanyl in open-air drug markets. Some people, sick or strung out, were passed out on sidewalks as pedestrians strolled by on a recent afternoon.

For those working toward sobriety, clinicians are on site to offer mental health and addiction treatment. Skid Row’s first methadone clinic is set to open here this year. For those not ready to quit drugs or alcohol, the campus provides clean syringes to more safely shoot up, glass pipes for smoking drugs, naloxone to prevent overdoses, and drug test strips to detect fentanyl contamination, among other supplies.

As many Americans have grown increasingly intolerant of street homelessness, cities and states have returned to tough-on-crime approaches that penalize people for living outside and for substance use disorders. But the Skid Row facility shows Los Angeles County leaders’ embrace of the principle of harm reduction, a range of more lenient strategies that can include helping people more safely use drugs, as they contend with a homeless population estimated around 75,000 — among the largest of any county in the nation. Evidence shows the approach can help individuals enter treatment, gain sobriety, and end their homelessness, while addiction experts and county health officials note it has the added benefit of improving public health.

“We get a really bad rap for this, but this is the safest way to use drugs,” said Darren Willett, director of the Center for Harm Reduction on the new Skid Row Care Campus. “It’s an overdose prevention strategy, and it prevents the spread of infectious disease.”

Despite a decline in overdose deaths, drug and alcohol use continues to be the leading cause of death among homeless people in the county. Living on the streets or in sordid encampments, homeless people saddle the health care system with high costs from uncompensated care, emergency room trips, inpatient hospitalizations, and, for many of them, their deaths. Harm reduction, its advocates say, allows homeless people the opportunity to obtain jobs, taxpayer-subsidized housing, health care, and other social services without being forced to give up drugs. Yet it’s hotly debated.

Politicians around the country, including Gov. Gavin Newsom in California, are reluctant to adopt harm reduction techniques, such as needle exchanges or supervised places to use drugs, in part because they can be seen by the public as condoning illicit behavior. Although Democrats are more supportive than Republicans, a national poll this year found lukewarm support across the political spectrum for such interventions.

Los Angeles is defying President Trump’s agenda as he advocates for forced mental health and addiction treatment for homeless people — and locking up those who refuse. The city has also been the scene of large protests against Mr. Trump’s immigration crackdown, which the president has fought by deploying National Guard troops and Marines.

Mr. Trump’s most detailed remarks on homelessness and substance use disorder came during his campaign, when he attacked people who use drugs as criminals and said that homeless people “have no right to turn every park and sidewalk into a place for them to squat and do drugs.” Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. reinforced Mr. Trump’s focus on treatment.

“Secretary Kennedy stands with President Trump in prioritizing recovery-focused solutions to address addiction and homelessness,” said agency spokesperson Vianca Rodriguez Feliciano. “HHS remains focused on helping individuals recover, communities heal, and help make our cities clean, safe, and healthy once again.”

A comprehensive report led by Margot Kushel, a professor of medicine at the University of California-San Francisco, this year found that nearly half of California’s homeless population had a complex behavioral health need, defined as regular drug use, heavy drinking, hallucinations, or a recent psychiatric hospitalization.

The chaos of living outside, she said — marked by violence, sexual assault, sleeplessness, and lack of housing and health care — can make it nearly impossible to get sober.

Skid Row Care Campus

The new care campus is funded by about $26 million a year in local, state, and federal homelessness and health care money, and initial construction was completed by a Skid Row landlord, Matt Lee, who made site improvements on his own, according to Anna Gorman, chief operating officer for community programs at the Los Angeles County Department of Health Services. Operators say the campus should be able to withstand potential federal spending cuts because it is funded through a variety of sources.

Glass front doors lead to an atrium inside the yellow-and-orange complex. It was designed with input from homeless people, who advised the county not just on the layout but also on the services offered on-site. There are 22 recovery beds and 48 additional beds for mostly older homeless people, arts and wellness programs, a food pantry, and pet care. Even bunnies and snakes are allowed.

John Wright, 65, who goes by the nickname Slim, mingled with homeless visitors one afternoon in May, asking them what they needed to be safe and comfortable.

“Everyone thinks we’re criminals, like we’re out robbing everyone, but we aren’t,” said Wright, who is employed as a harm reduction specialist on the campus and is trying, at his own pace, to stop using fentanyl. “I’m homeless and I’m a drug addict, but I’m on methadone now so I’m working on it,” he said.

Nearby on Skid Row, Anthony Willis rested in his wheelchair while taking a toke from a crack pipe. He’d just learned about the new care campus, he said, explaining that he was homeless for roughly 20 years before getting into a taxpayer-subsidized apartment on Skid Row. He spends most of his days and nights on the streets, using drugs and alcohol.

The drugs, he said, help him stay awake so he can provide companionship and sometimes physical protection for homeless friends who don’t have housing. “It’s tough sometimes living down here; it’s pretty much why I keep relapsing,” said Willis, who at age 62 has asthma and arthritic knees. “But it’s also my community.”

Willis said the care campus could be a place to help him kick drugs, but he wasn’t sure he was ready.

Research shows harm reduction helps prevent death and can build long-term recovery for people who use substances, said Brian Hurley, an addiction psychiatrist and the medical director for the Bureau of Substance Abuse Prevention and Control at the Los Angeles County Department of Public Health. The techniques allow health care providers and social service workers to meet people when they’re ready to stop using drugs or enter treatment.

“Recovery is a learning activity, and the reality is relapse is part of recovery,” he said. “People go back and forth and sometimes get triggered or haven’t figured out how to cope with a stressor.”

Swaying public opinion

Under harm reduction principles, officials acknowledge that people will use drugs. Funded by taxpayers, the government provides services to use safely, rather than forcing people to quit or requiring abstinence in exchange for government-subsidized housing and treatment programs.

Los Angeles County is spending hundreds of millions to combat homelessness, while also launching a multiyear “By LA for LA” campaign to build public support, fight stigma, and encourage people to use services and seek treatment. Officials have hired a nonprofit, Vital Strategies, to conduct the campaign including social media advertising and billboards to promote the expansion of both treatment and harm reduction services for people who use drugs.

The organization led a national harm reduction campaign and is working on overdose prevention and public health campaigns in seven states using roughly $70 million donated by Michael Bloomberg, the former mayor of New York.

“We don’t believe people should die just because they use drugs, so we’re going to provide support any way that we can,” said Shoshanna Scholar, director of harm reduction at the Los Angeles County Department of Health Services. “Eventually, some people may come in for treatment but what we really want is to prevent overdose and save lives.”

Los Angeles also finds itself at odds with California’s Democratic governor. Newsom has spearheaded stricter laws targeting homelessness and addiction and has backed treatment requirements for people with mental illness or who use drugs. Last year, California voters approved Proposition 36, which allows felony charges for some drug crimes, requires courts to warn people they could be charged with murder for selling or providing illegal drugs that kill someone, and makes it easier to order treatment for people who use drugs.

Even San Francisco approved a measure last year that requires welfare recipients to participate in treatment to continue receiving cash aid. Mayor Daniel Lurie recently ordered city officials to stop handing out free drug supplies, including pipes and foil, and instead to require participation in drug treatment to receive services. Lurie signed a recovery-first ordinance, which prioritizes “long-term remission” from substance use, and the city is also expanding policing while funding new sober-living sites and treatment centers for people recovering from addiction.

“Harm encouragement”

State Sen. Roger Niello, a Republican who represents conservative suburbs outside Sacramento, says the state needs to improve the lives of homeless people through stricter drug policies. He argues that providing drug supplies or offering housing without a mandate to enter treatment enables homeless people to remain on the streets.

Proposition 36, he said, needs to be implemented forcefully, and homeless people should be required to enter treatment in exchange for housing.

“I think of it as tough love,” Niello said. “What Los Angeles is doing, I would call it harm encouragement. They’re encouraging harm by continuing to feed a habit that is, quite frankly, killing people.”

Keith Humphreys, who worked in the George W. Bush and Barack Obama administrations and pioneered harm reduction practices across the nation, said that communities should find a balance between leniency and law enforcement.

“Parents need to be able to walk their kids to the park without being traumatized. You should be able to own a business without being robbed,” he said. “Harm reduction and treatment both have a place, and we also need prevention and a focus on public safety.”

Just outside the Skid Row Care Campus, Cindy Ashley organized her belongings in a cart after recently leaving a local hospital ER for a deep skin infection on her hand and arm caused by shooting heroin. She also regularly smokes crack, she said.

She was frantically searching for a home so she could heal from two surgeries for the infection. She learned about the new care campus and rushed over to get her name on the waiting list for housing.

“I’m not going to make it out here,” she said, in tears.

Source:  https://www.cbsnews.com/news/los-angeles-harm-reduction-drugs-homelessness/

KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF — the independent source for health policy research, polling, and journalism.

 

by Robyn Oster – Associate Director, Health Law and Policy – July 2025

Reminder: The U.S. Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF), an expert panel, evaluates preventive services and recommends which should be provided at no cost.

  • Why it’s important: Services currently required to be covered at no cost include certain mental health screenings, drug/alcohol screenings, PrEP for HIV, etc.
  • A group of conservative Christian employers in Texas led a lawsuit challenging the requirement. They argued that having the independent panel determine national health coverage violated the appointments clause of the Constitution and that covering PrEP violated religious freedom (though the Supreme Court only weighed in on the appointments clause argument).

The details:

  • The employers argued that USPSTF members were not appointed as either of two types of executive branch officers that the Constitution allows to make certain national policy decisions. They argued that the task force recommendations requiring them to cover certain preventive services in their employer-sponsored health plans were unconstitutional because task force members are not confirmed by the Senate.
  • The government defended the task force, arguing that it is constitutional because HHS officials appoint USPSTF members, and the HHS secretary can remove members at will and veto recommendations.
  • The Supreme Court agreed with the government and affirmed that the HHS secretary has these powers over USPSTF and its recommendations.

The bigger context:

  • The decision is a win for health advocates, who wanted to maintain the no-cost coverage requirement for preventive services. Providing preventive services at no cost is key to increasing access to and receipt of important screenings and other preventive services. Decreasing access to such services would lead to worse health outcomes.
  • But: The ruling could challenge USPSTF’s independence and credibility. It cements a strong role for the HHS secretary in overseeing the USPSTF, including removing members and modifying its rulings. This paves the way for HHS Secretary Kennedy to reject recommendations he disagrees with, allowing insurers to charge for those services or avoid covering them in some cases. It also opens the door for Kennedy to remove all the task force members and appoint new people, and a new task force could reject previous recommendations.

Source:  https://drugfree.org/drug-and-alcohol-news/supreme-court-upholds-aca-preventive-care/

In Christian Daily – Forum 2025 – News & Stories  – July 9, 2025

According to a report in ChristianDaily.com, a June 2025 study published in a peer-reviewed journal of the British Medical Association, found that daily cannabis users are 34% more likely to develop heart failure than non-users.

The study by researchers from France drew on data from over 150,000 U.S. adults tracked over several years, and also linked marijuana use with an increased risk of heart attack and stroke. The objective was to evaluate the possible association between major adverse cardiovascular events (MACE) and the use of cannabis or cannabinoids.

Dr. Matthew Springer, a heart disease biologist at the University of California, San Francisco (UCSF), told the New York Times that marijuana inhalation delivers “thousands of chemicals deep into the lungs,” potentially increasing cardiovascular risk. His lab recently found that both edible and inhaled forms of marijuana were associated with comparable levels of blood vessel dysfunction.

An accompanying editorial by researchers from California USA said about the study:

Legalisation of medical and recreational cannabis commerce is spreading around the world, associated with increased use1 and falling perception of the risk. Frequent cannabis use has increased in several countries, and many users believe that it is a safe and natural way to relieve pain or stress. In contrast, a growing body of evidence links cannabis use to significant harms throughout life, including cardiovascular health of adults. The robust meta-analysis of cannabis use and cardiovascular disease by Storck et al4 in this issue of Heart raises serious questions about the assumption that cannabis imposes little cardiovascular risk.

This study is backed up by a March 2025 publication by the American College of Cardiology which revealed that cannabis users under the age of 50 are six times more likely to suffer a heart attack and three times more likely to die from cardiovascular causes compared to non-users.

According to a review article in JACC: Journal of the American College of Cardiology – “Marijuana is becoming increasingly potent, and smoking marijuana carries many of the same cardiovascular health hazards as smoking tobacco.”

As reported by Christian Daily International, in 2019, the Christian Medical & Dental Associations (CMDA) — a U.S.-based nonprofit representing thousands of Christian healthcare professionals — issued a position statement cautioning against recreational and medicinal marijuana use. “[T]here is a need for limiting access to marijuana,” the CMDA said. It warned of addiction, cognitive impairment, psychosis, and long-term health effects, especially among youth. “The adolescent brain is still developing and more vulnerable to the adverse effects of marijuana,” the statement emphasised.

Source: https://www.christiandaily.com/news/new-study-links-marijuana-to-heart-failure-echoing-christian-medical-professionals-long-standing-warnings-against-recrea

Two large-scale surveys of California high school students found that teens who saw cannabis and e-cigarette content were more likely to start using those substances or to have used them in the past month

Teens who see social media posts showing cannabis or e-cigarettes, including from friends and influencers, are more likely to later start using those substances or to report using them in the past month, according to surveys done by researchers at the Keck School of Medicine of USC. Viewing such posts was linked to cannabis use, as well as dual use of cannabis and e-cigarettes (vapes). Dual use refers to youth who have used both cannabis and e-cigarettes at some point. The results were just published in JAMA Network Open.

The findings come amid a decline in youth e-cigarette use, reported in 2024 by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. However, teen vaping, cannabis use and the dual use of e-cigarettes and cannabis remain a problem. 

“While the rate of e-cigarette use is declining, our study shows that exposure to e-cigarette content on social media still contributes to the risk of using e-cigarettes with other substances, like cannabis,” said Julia Vassey, PhD, a health behavior researcher in the Department of Population and Public Health Sciences at the Keck School of Medicine.

The study, funded by the National Institutes of Health, also helps clarify how certain types of social media posts relate to teen substance use. Researchers surveyed more than 7,600 teens across two studies: a longitudinal study to understand whether viewing cannabis or e-cigarette posts on TikTok, Instagram and YouTube relates to a teen’s later choice to start using either substance or both, and a second survey looking at whether an association exists between the source of the content— friends, influencers, celebrities or brands—and substance use.  

“Answering these questions can help federal regulators and social media platforms create guidelines geared toward preventing youth substance use,” Vassey said.

Links across substances

Data for the study came from California high school students, with an average age of 17, who completed questionnaires on classroom computers between 2021 and 2023. Researchers conducted two surveys, one focused on teens who used cannabis, e-cigarettes or both for the first time, the other focused on use during the past month.

In the first survey, which included 4,232 students, 22.9% reported frequently seeing e-cigarette posts on TikTok, Instagram or YouTube, meaning they saw at least one post per week. A smaller portion—12%—frequently saw cannabis posts.

One year later, researchers followed up with the students. Teens who had frequently seen cannabis posts—but had never tried cannabis or e-cigarettes—were more likely to have started using e-cigarettes, cannabis or both. Teens who had frequently seen e-cigarette posts on TikTok were more likely to have started using cannabis or started dual use of both cannabis and e-cigarettes. No such pattern was found for Instagram or YouTube. The data collected allowed researchers to look at platform-specific results for e-cigarettes posts, but not for cannabis posts.

“This is consistent with previous research showing that, of the three platforms, TikTok is probably the strongest risk factor for substance use,” Vassey said. That may be because TikTok’s algorithm pushes popular content broadly, including posts that feature e-cigarettes, even to users who don’t follow the accounts.

In the second survey, researchers asked 3,380 students whether they saw cannabis or e-cigarette posts from brands, friends, celebrities, or influencers with 10,000 to 100,000 followers. Teens who saw e-cigarette or cannabis posts from influencers were more likely than their peers to have used cannabis in the past month. Those who saw e-cigarette posts from friends were more likely to have been dual users of cannabis and e-cigarettes in the past month. Those who saw cannabis posts from friends were more likely to have used cannabis in the past month or to have been dual users of cannabis and e-cigarettes.

The link between e-cigarette posts and cannabis use is what researchers call a “cross-substance association” and may be explained by the similar appearance of nicotine and cannabis vaping devices, Vassey said. 

The risks of influencer content

Influencer posts deserve special attention because they often slip through loopholes in federal rules and platform guidelines. For example, the FDA can only regulate content when brand partnerships are disclosed, but influencers—consciously or not—may skip disclosures in some posts.

Studies show that these seemingly unsponsored posts are seen as more authentic, Vassey said, making them particularly influential.

Most social media platforms already ban paid promotion of cannabis and tobacco products, including e-cigarettes. Some researchers say those bans should be extended to cover additional influencer content. Others want platforms to partner with regulators to find a comprehensive solution.

“So far, it’s a grey area, and nobody has provided a clear answer on how we should act and when,” Vassey said.

In future studies, Vassey plans to further explore cannabis influencer marketing, including whether changes to social media guidelines impact what teens see and how they respond.

About this research

In addition to Vassey, the study’s other authors are Junhan Cho, Trisha Iyer and Jennifer B. Unger from the Department of Population and Public Health Sciences, Keck School of Medicine of USC, University of Southern California; Erin A. Vogel from the TSET Health Promotion Research Center, University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center, Oklahoma City; and Julia Chen-Sankey from the Institute for Nicotine and Tobacco Studies and the School of Public Health, Rutgers University, New Brunswick, New Jersey.

This work was supported by National Institutes of Health [R01CA260459]and the National Institute on Drug Abuse [K01DA055073].

Source:  https://keck.usc.edu/news/e-cigarette-and-cannabis-social-media-posts-pose-risks-for-teens-study-finds/

itvx news – Tuesday 24 June 2025

Cannabis activists and entrepreneurs, hold cannabis plant as they march to Government House in Bangkok, Thailand in 2024.Credit: AP

Thailand is moving to pass new legislation banning cannabis for recreational use in a major reversal, three years after the country became the first in Asia to decriminalise the drug, local media reports.

On Tuesday, Public Health Minister Somsak Thepsuthin said he had signed an announcement limiting cannabis to medical use only, Bangkok news site Khaosod confirmed.

Under the changes, people wishing to purchase cannabis must have a doctor’s prescription and a medical certificate indicating their illness.

Operators selling the drug will need to have a doctor present at the shop to renew or apply for a license to sell.

Somsak also said that in the future, cannabis will return to being considered a narcotic.

It is not clear when the regulation will take effect or when it will be re-listed.

Banged up abroad: How many Brits are being arrested over alleged drug smuggling?

Thailand to crack down on cannabis after smuggling cases involving UK tourists

Is cannabis legal in Thailand?

Medical marijuana has been legal in Thailand since 2018, but decriminalisation in 2022 took things a step further, making it no longer a crime to grow and trade marijuana and hemp products, or to use any parts of the plant to treat illnesses.

It was a rarity in the region where many countries give long jail terms and even death sentences for people convicted of marijuana possession, consumption or trafficking.

Smoking marijuana in public remained illegal even under the relaxed laws.

Subscribe free to our weekly newsletter for exclusive and original coverage from ITV News. Direct to your inbox every Friday morning.

What happened when cannabis was decriminalised?

The relaxed laws saw a lucrative cannabis industry catering to locals and foreigners alike boom across the Southeast Asian nation, with thousands of cannabis dispensaries sprouting up across Thailand, as well as other cannabis-themed businesses like weed cafes and hemp spas, and beauty treatment.

Cities like Chiang Mai and the capital Bangkok have even held weed festivals, and decriminalisation has been a major draw for tourists.

Pro-legislation advocates have argued that the cannabis boom across Thailand has helped many Thais, from farmers to small business owners and workers behind the counter.

Critics say the decriminalisation was rushed through, causing confusion about the regulations.

Last year, a new conservative government vowed to tighten the rules around the drug after a string of alleged smuggling cases involving tourists.

Hundreds of British citizens are currently detained across the world, accused of narcotics smuggling offences.

Prisoners Abroad – a charity assisting Britons who are arrested and detained overseas – told ITV News it is currently supporting 431 people around the globe who are facing drugs charges.

This includes 22 people in Thailand.

 

Source:  https://www.itv.com/news/2025-06-24/thailand-to-ban-recreational-cannabis-three-years-after-decriminalisation

Inside a bright new building in the heart of Skid Row, homeless people hung out in a canopy-covered courtyard — some waiting to take a shower, do laundry, or get medication for addiction treatment. Others relaxed on shaded grass and charged their phones as an intake line for housing grew more crowded.

The Skid Row Care Campus officially opened this spring with ample offerings for people living on the streets of this historically downtrodden neighborhood. Pop-up fruit stands and tent encampments lined the sidewalks, as well as dealers peddling meth and fentanyl in open-air drug markets. Some people, sick or strung out, were passed out on sidewalks as pedestrians strolled by on a recent afternoon.

For those working toward sobriety, clinicians are on site to offer mental health and addiction treatment. Skid Row’s first methadone clinic is set to open here this year. For those not ready to quit drugs or alcohol, the campus provides clean syringes to more safely shoot up, glass pipes for smoking drugs, naloxone to prevent overdoses, and drug test strips to detect fentanyl contamination, among other supplies.

As many Americans have grown increasingly intolerant of street homelessness, cities and states have returned to tough-on-crime approaches that penalize people for living outside and for substance use disorders. But the Skid Row facility shows Los Angeles County leaders’ embrace of the principle of harm reduction, a range of more lenient strategies that can include helping people more safely use drugs, as they contend with a homeless population estimated around 75,000 — among the largest of any county in the nation. Evidence shows the approach can help individuals enter treatment, gain sobriety, and end their homelessness, while addiction experts and county health officials note it has the added benefit of improving public health.

“We get a really bad rap for this, but this is the safest way to use drugs,” said Darren Willett, director of the Center for Harm Reduction on the new Skid Row Care Campus. “It’s an overdose prevention strategy, and it prevents the spread of infectious disease.”

Despite a decline in overdose deaths, drug and alcohol use continues to be the leading cause of death among homeless people in the county. Living on the streets or in sordid encampments, homeless people saddle the health care system with high costs from uncompensated care, emergency room trips, inpatient hospitalizations, and, for many of them, their deaths. Harm reduction, its advocates say, allows homeless people the opportunity to obtain jobs, taxpayer-subsidized housing, health care, and other social services without being forced to give up drugs. Yet it’s hotly debated.

Politicians around the country, including Gov. Gavin Newsom in California, are reluctant to adopt harm reduction techniques, such as needle exchanges or supervised places to use drugs, in part because they can be seen by the public as condoning illicit behavior. Although Democrats are more supportive than Republicans, a national poll this year found lukewarm support across the political spectrum for such interventions.

Los Angeles is defying President Donald Trump’s agenda as he advocates for forced mental health and addiction treatment for homeless people — and locking up those who refuse. The city has also been the scene of large protests against Trump’s immigration crackdown, which the president has fought by deploying National Guard troops and Marines.

Trump’s most detailed remarks on homelessness and substance use disorder came during his campaign, when he attacked people who use drugs as criminals and said that homeless people “have no right to turn every park and sidewalk into a place for them to squat and do drugs.” Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. reinforced Trump’s focus on treatment.

“Secretary Kennedy stands with President Trump in prioritizing recovery-focused solutions to address addiction and homelessness,” said agency spokesperson Vianca Rodriguez Feliciano. “HHS remains focused on helping individuals recover, communities heal, and help make our cities clean, safe, and healthy once again.”

A comprehensive report led by Margot Kushel, a professor of medicine at the University of California-San Francisco, this year found that nearly half of California’s homeless population had a complex behavioral health need, defined as regular drug use, heavy drinking, hallucinations, or a recent psychiatric hospitalization.

The chaos of living outside, she said — marked by violence, sexual assault, sleeplessness, and lack of housing and health care — can make it nearly impossible to get sober.

Skid row care campus

The new care campus is funded by about $26 million a year in local, state, and federal homelessness and health care money, and initial construction was completed by a Skid Row landlord, Matt Lee, who made site improvements on his own, according to Anna Gorman, chief operating officer for community programs at the Los Angeles County Department of Health Services. Operators say the campus should be able to withstand potential federal spending cuts because it is funded through a variety of sources.

Glass front doors lead to an atrium inside the yellow-and-orange complex. It was designed with input from homeless people, who advised the county not just on the layout but also on the services offered on-site. There are 22 recovery beds and 48 additional beds for mostly older homeless people, arts and wellness programs, a food pantry, and pet care. Even bunnies and snakes are allowed.

John Wright, 65, who goes by the nickname Slim, mingled with homeless visitors one afternoon in May, asking them what they needed to be safe and comfortable.

“Everyone thinks we’re criminals, like we’re out robbing everyone, but we aren’t,” said Wright, who is employed as a harm reduction specialist on the campus and is trying, at his own pace, to stop using fentanyl. “I’m homeless and I’m a drug addict, but I’m on methadone now so I’m working on it,” he said.

Nearby on Skid Row, Anthony Willis rested in his wheelchair while taking a toke from a crack pipe. He’d just learned about the new care campus, he said, explaining that he was homeless for roughly 20 years before getting into a taxpayer-subsidized apartment on Skid Row. He spends most of his days and nights on the streets, using drugs and alcohol.

The drugs, he said, help him stay awake so he can provide companionship and sometimes physical protection for homeless friends who don’t have housing. “It’s tough sometimes living down here; it’s pretty much why I keep relapsing,” said Willis, who at age 62 has asthma and arthritic knees. “But it’s also my community.”

Willis said the care campus could be a place to help him kick drugs, but he wasn’t sure he was ready.

Research shows harm reduction helps prevent death and can build long-term recovery for people who use substances, said Brian Hurley, an addiction psychiatrist and the medical director for the Bureau of Substance Abuse Prevention and Control at the Los Angeles County Department of Public Health. The techniques allow health care providers and social service workers to meet people when they’re ready to stop using drugs or enter treatment.

Swaying public opinion

Under harm reduction principles, officials acknowledge that people will use drugs. Funded by taxpayers, the government provides services to use safely, rather than forcing people to quit or requiring abstinence in exchange for government-subsidized housing and treatment programs.

Los Angeles County is spending hundreds of millions to combat homelessness, while also launching a multiyear “By LA for LA” campaign to build public support, fight stigma, and encourage people to use services and seek treatment. Officials have hired a nonprofit, Vital Strategies, to conduct the campaign including social media advertising and billboards to promote the expansion of both treatment and harm reduction services for people who use drugs.

The organization led a national harm reduction campaign and is working on overdose prevention and public health campaigns in seven states using roughly $70 million donated by Michael Bloomberg, the former mayor of New York.

“We don’t believe people should die just because they use drugs, so we’re going to provide support any way that we can,” said Shoshanna Scholar, director of harm reduction at the Los Angeles County Department of Health Services. “Eventually, some people may come in for treatment but what we really want is to prevent overdose and save lives.”

Los Angeles also finds itself at odds with California’s Democratic governor. Newsom has spearheaded stricter laws targeting homelessness and addiction and has backed treatment requirements for people with mental illness or who use drugs. Last year, California voters approved Proposition 36, which allows felony charges for some drug crimes, requires courts to warn people they could be charged with murder for selling or providing illegal drugs that kill someone, and makes it easier to order treatment for people who use drugs.

Even San Francisco approved a measure last year that requires welfare recipients to participate in treatment to continue receiving cash aid. Mayor Daniel Lurie recently ordered city officials to stop handing out free drug supplies, including pipes and foil, and instead to require participation in drug treatment to receive services. Lurie signed a recovery-first ordinance, which prioritizes “long-term remission” from substance use, and the city is also expanding policing while funding new sober-living sites and treatment centers for people recovering from addiction.

‘Harm encouragement’

State Sen. Roger Niello, a Republican who represents conservative suburbs outside Sacramento, says the state needs to improve the lives of homeless people through stricter drug policies. He argues that providing drug supplies or offering housing without a mandate to enter treatment enables homeless people to remain on the streets.

Proposition 36, he said, needs to be implemented forcefully, and homeless people should be required to enter treatment in exchange for housing.

“I think of it as tough love,” Niello said. “What Los Angeles is doing, I would call it harm encouragement. They’re encouraging harm by continuing to feed a habit that is, quite frankly, killing people.”

Keith Humphreys, who worked in the George W. Bush and Barack Obama administrations and pioneered harm reduction practices across the nation, said that communities should find a balance between leniency and law enforcement.

“Parents need to be able to walk their kids to the park without being traumatized. You should be able to own a business without being robbed,” he said. “Harm reduction and treatment both have a place, and we also need prevention and a focus on public safety.”

Just outside the Skid Row Care Campus, Cindy Ashley organized her belongings in a cart after recently leaving a local hospital ER for a deep skin infection on her hand and arm caused by shooting heroin. She also regularly smokes crack, she said.

She was frantically searching for a home so she could heal from two surgeries for the infection. She learned about the new care campus and rushed over to get her name on the waiting list for housing.

“I’m not going to make it out here,” she said, in tears.

Source:  https://www.news-medical.net/news/20250708/In-a-nation-growing-hostile-toward-drugs-and-homelessness-Los-Angeles-tries-leniency.aspx

Kaiser Health NewsThis article was reprinted from khn.org, a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF – the independent source for health policy research, polling, and journalism.

by  James White – Jul 7, 2025

Transporting (widening) the effect of the ASSIST school-based smoking prevention intervention to the Smoking, Drinking and Drug Use Among Young People in England Survey (2004-2021): A secondary analysis of a randomized controlled trial

Abstract

Aims: To conduct exploratory analyses into the transported effect of the ASSIST (A Stop Smoking in Schools Trial) school-based smoking prevention intervention on weekly smoking in young people between 2004 and 2021.

Design: Secondary analysis of a cluster randomized control trial (cRCT).

Setting: England and Wales.

Participants: ASSIST trial participants comprised 8756 students aged 12-13 years in 59 schools assigned using stratified block randomization to the control (29 schools, 4193 students) or intervention (30 schools, 4563 students) condition. The target population was represented by 12-13-year-old participants in the Smoking, Drinking and Drug Use Among Young People in England Survey (SDDU) in 2004 (n = 3958), 2006 (n = 3377), 2014 (n = 3145), 2016 (n = 4874) and 2021 (n = 3587), which are randomly sampled school-based surveys with student response rates varying between 85% and 93%.

Intervention and comparator: The ASSIST intervention involved 2 days of off-site training of influential students to encourage their peers not to smoke over a 10-week period. The control group continued with their usual education.

Measurements: The outcome was the proportion of students who self-reported weekly smoking 2 years post-intervention.

Findings: The prevalence of weekly smoking at the 2-year follow-up in the ASSIST trial in 2004 was 4.1%, 49.5% of students were girls, and 7.8% ethnic minorities. In the SDDU in 2004, the prevalence of weekly smoking was 3.6%, 47.6% students were girls and 14.4% ethnic minorities and in 2021 0.2% were weekly smokers, 48.6% girls and 27.8% ethnic minorities. The odds ratio of weekly smoking in the ASSIST trial in 2004 was 0.85 [95% confidence interval (95% CI) = 0.71-1.02]. The estimated odds ratio in the SDDU target population in 2004 was 0.90 (95% CI = 0.72-1.13), in 2014 was 0.89 (95% CI = 0.70-1.14), and by 2021 was 0.88 (95% CI = 0.60-1.28). The confidence interval ratio was used to estimate precision in the transported estimates in the target population and was 1.57 in 2004, 1.63 in 2014 and 2.13 in 2021, reflecting increasing uncertainty in the effect of ASSIST over time. Subgroup analyses showed effects were comparable when restricted to only English schools in the ASSIST trial.

Conclusions: These exploratory analyses indicate the effect of the ASSIST school-based smoking prevention intervention reported in the original trial may not have been replicated in the target population over the 17-year period of its licensing and roll out.

Keywords: generalizability; prevention; randomized controlled trial; real world evidence; smoking; transportability.

Drug and Alcohol Dependence

Drug and Alcohol Dependence – Volume 273, 1 August 2025, 112714

by Gustave Maffre Maviel,  Camilla Somma, Camille Davisse-Paturet, Guillaume Airagnes,  Maria Melchior.

A systematic review and meta-analysis

Highlights
  • Studies reveal a significant association between cannabis use and suicidality, independent of depression.
  • Existing research is inconsistent regarding whether the association differs between individuals with and without depression.
  • More research is needed to identify the pathways linking cannabis use to suicidality.

Abstract

Background

Depression has been cited as a possible confounder, moderator, and mediator of the relationship between cannabis use and suicidal behaviours. We aimed to assess the role of depression in the relationship between cannabis use and suicidal behaviours by systematically reviewing existing literature in the general population.

Methods

We systematically searched PubMed, Science Direct and Psych Articles from database inception to May 20th 2024, for quantitative observational studies investigating the role of depression in the association between cannabis use and suicidal behaviours. We conducted a meta-analysis to examine the confounding role of depression and search for qualitative arguments in favour of moderating and/or mediating roles of depression.

Results

We screened 1081 articles, selected 43 for full-text screening and finally included 25. Among adolescents, cannabis use was associated with suicidal ideation (OR = 1.46 [1.17, 1.83]) and suicide attempts (OR = 2.17 [1.56, 3.03]) in studies adjusting for depression. Among adults, cannabis use was associated with suicidal ideation (OR = 1.78 [1.28, 2.46]) in studies adjusting for depression. 12 out of 25 studies found no association between cannabis use and suicidality after adjustment for depression. Six studies investigated a potential moderating role of depression, with four reporting significant but conflicting results. No article investigated the mediating role of depression.

Discussion

There is a clear relationship between cannabis use and suicidal behaviours, which is partly confounded by depression. Studies investigating a moderating role of depression did not agree about the direction of moderation. Further research using methodologies that consider the chronology of events is needed. 

Keywords

Cannabis
Cannabis use
Cannabis use disorder
Suicidal behaviours
Suicide
Depression
Source:  https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S037687162500167X?
Elsevier Science has two locations: one in New York, United States, and the other in Amsterdam, Netherlands.  

 by Shane Varcoe  – Executive Director – Dalgarno Institute

Wine has long been a symbol of sophistication, celebration, and relaxation. From vineyard tours to candlelit dinners, it’s often associated with nature, tradition, and wellness. However, a closer look uncovers the hidden dangers in wine. A recent report reveals that wine is not just about ethanol; today’s bottles are also tainted with toxins like trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) and synthetic pesticides, posing significant risks to both health and the environment.

The findings force us to confront the polished image of wine and reconsider its real impact. Below, we explore these “hidden dangers in wine,” how they’ve arisen, and what they mean for consumers and the planet.

Toxic Truths Unveiled: A groundbreaking report from PAN Europe (Pesticide Action Network Europe) investigated 49 wines from ten European countries. Their findings reveal an alarming rise in TFA contamination. Known as a persistent and toxic chemical derived from PFAS (per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances), TFA builds up in water, soil, plants, and now, wine.

Elin Engdahl, an expert on environmental toxins at the Swedish Society for Nature Conservation, highlighted the gravity of this contamination. “We are seeing an explosive increase, especially in the last ten years,” she stated.

Key findings of the report include:
• Wines produced between 2021 and 2023 contain an average of 122 micrograms of TFA per litre.
• Some bottles spike to over 300 micrograms per litre.
• Wines from earlier vintages, particularly before 1988, were completely free of TFA.
“TFA is found all over the planet today. We have high concentrations in water, soil, plants, and even human blood,” explained Ioannis Liagkouridis, a PFAS researcher at the Swedish Environmental Institute IVL.
These concerning levels demand urgent attention, as TFA meets the criteria for posing a risk to vital planetary boundaries. 

 Source:  https://www.dalgarnoinstitute.org.au

Opinion by Kevin Sabet – SAM (Smart Approaches to Marijuana) – July 10, 2025, 

President Donald Trump is facing a pivotal decision: whether to ease national restrictions on marijuana, a policy shift he hinted at during his 2024 campaign. But a major federal bust this week in Massachusetts — where the FBI arrested seven Chinese nationals connected with a multimillion-dollar pot-growing conspiracy — shows why loosening the rules would be a soft-power disaster.

First, some context.

The federal government, under the Controlled Substances Act, uses a five-part schedule to classify various drugs and other potentially addictive items. Drugs with no accepted medical use and high potential for abuse get listed on Schedule I.

That’s where marijuana is now placed — right where it belongs.

FDA-approved marijuana-based medications are rightly classified on lower schedules.

Raw weed, however, has no accepted medical use (whatever may be claimed in states that have legalized it), and addiction rates are around 30% and rising, with younger people hit hard.

That didn’t concern President Joe Biden’s Health and Human Services Department, which recommended moving cannabis to Schedule III, the list of drugs with an accepted medical use and a lower risk of abuse.

Now celebrities, star athletes and some MAGA influencers are pushing Trump to follow the Biden-era recommendation.

But this president — who correctly grasps the multifaceted strategic threat China poses to the United States — should reject their urgings.

Look at this week’s Justice Department charges.

Federal law enforcement on Tuesday rolled up a network of marijuana grow houses in Massachusetts and Maine, allegedly run by Chinese nationals and staffed with illegal immigrants pressed into what amounts to indentured servitude.

The operations generated millions of dollars in profits, which the growers sank into assets like jewelry, cars and real estate that expanded their criminal enterprise.

Chinese criminals played a major role in the US fentanyl crisis by manufacturing the drug’s precursor chemicals and selling them to Mexican cartels. Trump slammed China with a 20% tariff over that very fact.

Marijuana is looking like another big-time business unit for Beijing.

But it gets worse: China’s communist government appears to have significant links with these criminal weed enterprises.

Two Chinese nationals charged with running an illegal grow operation in Maine in 2023 had deep links to the Sijiu Association, a Brooklyn-based non-profit reportedly connected to China’s New York consulate and to the United Front Work Department — the branch of the CCP’s Central Committee that handles influence operations abroad.

Another report in 2024 tracked the connections of Zhu Di, one of China’s top US diplomats, to an Oklahoma cultural association that Sooner State authorities investigated for its links to the illicit weed business.

It’s beyond clear that Beijing smells the skunky funk of a tactical play against the United States rising from the red-hot marijuana trade.  

That’s what makes rescheduling weed such a risk.

Moving marijuana to Schedule III would supercharge the pot market, letting canna-businesses take regular deductions — including on advertising — at tax time, and easing their access to banking and credit.

In other words, it would be a major step towards commercially normalizing Big Weed, and a massive boost for Chinese organized criminals with apparent CCP connections.

Worse — as New York has seen first-hand — far from eliminating the drug dealers, a juiced-up legal weed market leads to a bigger illegal market.

Post-legalization in the Empire State, New York City alone contains an estimated 3,600 illegal pot stores, dwarfing the mere dozens of legal ones. California and Michigan have seen a similar trend.

That’s yet another way rescheduling would hand an unforced victory to China, which is already elbow-deep in illegal weed operations stateside.

The worst part is that there’s no domestic benefit to this trade-off.

If weed goes on Schedule III, it will do nothing except help addiction profiteers get rich — and damage public health irreparably, even as a flood of new data confirms that marijuana is as bad as it gets for users’ mental and physical well-being.

Heart disease, schizophrenia, dementia, even tooth rot: Weed truly is the drug that does it all.

Yes, the American public seems to be waking up. Every state considering recreational marijuana at the ballot box in 2024 rejected it.

But Trump should remember that Beijing will exploit any and every policy misstep we make to the utmost.

That’s as true of spy balloons as it is of public-health policies with nothing but negative domestic implications.

Rescheduling marijuana would put Americans last, at home and abroad — and usher in the very opposite of the Golden Age the president has so memorably promised.

Kevin Sabet is president of Smart Approaches to Marijuana and a former White House drug policy adviser.

Source:  https://nypost.com/2025/07/10/opinion/easing-weed-rules-will-harm-golden-age-and-boost-china/

Opening Remark by NDPA:

This news item came from the website for a Kissimmee (Orlando, Fla) residents website for the Lindfields division.

The item is of general interest because although it is ostensibly limited to Florida, it introduces a tougher education course for new drivers, specifically including education on drinks/drugs and driving.

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<FLA>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

STATEMENT IN LINDFIELDS DIVISION RESIDENTS’ WEBSITE – JULY 2025

Florida is phasing out the old 4-hour course and introducing a new, more in-depth requirement for teen drivers under age 18. This affects anyone applying for a learner’s permit or first-time driver’s license. ????

Key Dates and What’s Required July 1 to July 31, 2025 (Transition Period) If you’re under 18 and applying for your learner’s permit or license: You may take either of the following: TLSAE/DATA: Traffic Law and Substance Abuse Education Also known as Drugs, Alcohol, Traffic Awareness A 4-hour course currently required for all new drivers in Florida DETS: Driver Education and Traffic Safety A new 6-hour course required for teen drivers beginning in 2025 August 1, 2025 and After Only DETS (Driver Education and Traffic Safety) will be accepted for drivers under 18 The TLSAE/DATA course will no longer be valid for minors applying for a learner’s permit Adults (18+) may still use TLSAE/DATA to meet the education requirement ????

What is DETS and Why the Change? The new 6-hour DETS course is designed to:

  • Strengthen defensive driving habits I
  • mprove hazard recognition
  • Cover DUI prevention and traffic laws in more detail
  • Reduce teen crash risks by offering a broader education experience

Summary:

  • Date Range Under-18 Requirements July 1–31, 2025 TLSAE/DATA or DETS accepted August 1, 2025 onward
  • Only DETS accepted Age 18+ Can continue using TLSAE/DATA.

Source:  LINDFIELDS DIVISION RESIDENTS’ WEBSITE – JULY 2025

Exactly one year ago today, we became the European Union Drugs Agency (EUDA) and embarked on our new mission to strengthen EU preparedness on drugs. Building on the work of the EMCDDA, and with a more proactive mandate, we set off to support the EU and its Member States in addressing emerging drug issues in an ever-changing world. Our work contributes to making Europe’s streets safer and to saving lives. Our motto — ‘Acting today, anticipating tomorrow’.

In our role, we help policymakers anticipate and respond effectively to drug-related threats. We issue health and security alerts and risk communications, share knowledge and recommend evidence-based policies and actions to address problems efficiently.

This first year has been one of many milestones. Among our achievements in these 12 months as the EUDA, we have:

  • Established the European Drug Alert System
  • Set up a European network of forensic and toxicological laboratories
  • Strengthened the Early Warning System on new substances
  • Organised the first European conference on drug-related violence, issued a call to action and launched the Safe futures project
  • Issued a call to action on new synthetic opioids
  • Supported Member States with our first pilot threat assessment on highly potent synthetic opioids in the Baltic region
  • Expanded our foresight work allowing us to envision possible scenarios to help our stakeholders make forward-thinking decisions
  • Adopted a new brand identity and communication strategy
  • Adopted a new international cooperation framework
  • Worked closely with our partners to develop new products and services (such as a cannabis policy toolkit)
  • Helped shape evidence-based drug policies across Europe

Transforming from the EMCDDA into the EUDA marked the most significant organisational shift in the agency to date. To rise to this challenge, we accelerated our business transformation to build the capabilities needed to deliver innovative, future-oriented services while providing core monitoring services to support EU drug policy.

With a renewed baseline vision of being ‘your European Union Drugs Agency’, we enter our second year with a clear commitment to lead, innovate and partner in tackling drug-related challenges — for a healthier, safer and more resilient Europe.

Source:  https://www.euda.europa.eu/news/2025/first-anniversary-euda-delivers-key-gains-strengthening-europes-preparedness-drugs_en

by Nada Hassanein, Stateline reporter – ‘News from the States ‘- New Jersey – Jul 03, 2025
Carlos Santiago, an ambassador and driver for the Greater Hartford Harm Reduction Coalition (now known as the Connecticut Harm Reduction
Alliance), works at a mobile overdose prevention event in 2022 in New Haven, Conn. (Photo courtesy of Connecticut Harm Reduction Alliance,
formerly known as Greater Hartford Harm Reduction Coalition)

A study published Wednesday in the medical journal JAMA Network Open found that emergency room clinicians were much less likely to refer Black opioid overdose patients for outpatient treatment compared with white patients.

The researchers looked at the medical records of 1,683 opioid overdose patients from emergency rooms in nine states: California, Colorado, Georgia, Michigan, Missouri, New Jersey, New York, Oregon and Pennsylvania.

About 5.7% of Black patients received referrals for outpatient treatment, compared with 9.6% of white patients, according to the researchers, who received a federal grant from the National Institute on Drug Abuse to conduct the analysis.

While the nation saw a decrease in opioid overdose deaths in white people between 2021 and 2022, overdose death rates increased for American Indian, Alaska Native, Asian, Black and Hispanic people. Patients visiting ERs for opioid overdoses are more likely to die from an overdose after the visit, the authors wrote, underscoring the importance of gaining “an improved understanding of disparities in [emergency department] treatment and referral.”

In total, roughly 18% of the patients received a referral for outpatient treatment, 43% received a naloxone kit or prescription, and 8.4% received a prescription for buprenorphine, the first-line medication for treating opioid use disorder.

The researchers used records from 10 hospital sites participating in a national consortium collecting data on overdoses from fentanyl and its related drugs. The patient records were from September 2020 to November 2023.

Another study in JAMA Network Open, released last week, found similar disparities: Black and Hispanic patients were significantly less likely than white patients to receive buprenorphine. Black patients had a 17% chance, and Hispanic patients a 16% chance, to be prescribed the therapy, compared with a 20% chance for white patients.

The authors of that study, from the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai in New York City, looked at data from 176,000 records of opioid-related events between 2017 and 2022 across all 50 states.

Source:  https://www.newsfromthestates.com/article/new-studies-find-wide-racial-disparities-opioid-overdose-treatment-referrals

  • by Oritro Karim (United Nations) – 

UNITED NATIONS, Jun 27 (IPS) – Since 1989, the United Nations (UN) has recognized June 26 as the International Day Against Drug Abuse and Illicit Trafficking in an effort to raise awareness around the global drug problem and foster a more compassionate world, free of drug abuse. Through this year’s campaign, “Break the Cycle. #StopOrganizedCrime”, the UN underscores the importance of addressing the root causes of global drug abuse and illegal drug trading, and investing in reliable systems that prioritize prevention, education, and health.

Concurrently, the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) released its annual World Drug Report, in which it analyzed the current trends in global drug abuse amid a “new era of global instability”. In the report, UNODC emphasizes the wide ranging implications of drug use on the economy, the environment, global security, and human society.

According to the report, roughly 316 million people used drugs (excluding tobacco and alcohol) around the world in 2023. UNODC also estimates that nearly half a million people around the world die annually as a result of drug use disorders, indicating a “global health crisis”. Roughly 28 million years of life are lost annually from disabilities and premature deaths due to addiction. Furthermore, there is an overwhelming lack of healthcare and education resources for individuals with drug use disorders, as only one in twelve people are estimated to have received treatment in 2023.

Cocaine has been described as the world’s fastest growing illicit drug in terms of global usage, production, and seizures. In 2023, approximately 3,708 tons of cocaine were produced, marking a 34 percent increase from the previous year. Roughly 2,275 tons were seized in 2023, a 68 percent increase from 2019’s figures. Additionally, global usage of cocaine has inflated to 25 million users in 2023.

As nations began to implement harsher crackdowns on drug production, the use and transportation of synthetic drugs, such as fentanyl and methamphetamine, has reached record-highs, accounting for nearly half of all global drug seizures. Drug trafficking groups have found ways to chemically conceal these drugs, making distribution much easier.

UNODC Executive Director Ghada Fathi Waly states that organized drug trafficking groups around the world continue to exploit global crises, disproportionately targeting the most vulnerable communities. With worldwide synthetic drug consumption having surged in recent years, the UNODC forecasts that civilians displaced by armed conflicts face heightened risks of drug abuse and addiction.

Although the cocaine market was once contained in Latin America, trade has extended through to Asia, Africa, and Western Europe, with Western Balkans having greater shares in the market. This is a testament to the influence of organized crime groups in areas facing instability, natural disasters, and economic challenges.

According to the report, since the end of the Assad regime in Syria and the subsequent political transition, nationwide use of fenethylline — also known as captagon, a cheap, synthetic stimulant — has soared. Although the transitional government of Syria has stated that there is zero tolerance for captagon trade and consumption, UNODC warns that Syria will remain a significant hub for drug production.

Angela Me, the Chief of Research and Analysis at UNODC, states that captagon use in the Arabian peninsula was spurred by regional violence, with members of terrorist organizations using it on battlefields to stay alert. Due to its highly addictive properties, as well as its severe impacts on physical and mental health, the drug has seen widespread consumption over the past several years.

“These groups have been managing Captagon for a long time, and production is not going to stop in a matter of days or weeks,” said Me. “We see a lot of large shipments going from Syria through, for example, Jordan. There are probably still stocks of the substance being shipped out, but we’re looking at where the production may be shifting to. We’re also seeing that the trafficking is expanding regionally, and we’ve discovered labs in Libya.”

Global drug trafficking is estimated to generate billions of dollars per year. National budgets to combat drug trafficking, in terms of law enforcement and prosecution, cost governments millions to billions annually as well. Healthcare systems, which are often underfunded for addiction-related treatments, are overwhelmed by the vast scale of needs. Furthermore, damages related to theft, vandalism, violence, and lost productivity in the workplace have significant impacts on gross domestic products.

Additionally, increased rates of deforestation and pollution are linked with global drug cultivation. Additional adverse environmental impacts include ecosystem damage from drug waste, which yields notable costs in environmental restoration efforts.

It is imperative for governments, policymakers, and other stakeholders to invest in programs that disrupt illicit drug trafficking groups and promote increased security, especially along borders, which are critical hubs for transporting concealed substances. Furthermore, cooperation at an international level is instrumental for the transfer of information and promoting a joint and multifaceted approach.

“We must invest in prevention and address the root causes of the drug trade at every point of the illicit supply chain. And we must strengthen responses, by leveraging technology, strengthening cross-border cooperation, providing alternative livelihoods, and taking judicial action that targets key actors driving these networks,” said Waly. “Through a comprehensive, coordinated approach, we can dismantle criminal organizations, bolster global security, and protect our communities.”

Source:  https://www.globalissues.org/news/2025/06/27/40295

 by Andrew Yockey, Assistant Professor of Public Health, University of Mississippi July 3, 2025

Once associated with high-profile figures like John Belushi, River Phoenix and Chris Farley , this dangerous polysubstance use has become a leading cause of overdose deaths across the United States since the early- to mid-2010s.

I am an assistant professor of public health who has written extensively on methamphetamine and opioid use and the dangerous combination of the two in the United States.

As these dangerous combinations of drugs increasingly flood the market, I see an urgent need and opportunity for a new approach to prevention and treatment.

Why speedballing?

Dating back to the 1970s, the term speedballing originally referred to the combination of heroin and cocaine. Combining stimulants and opioids – the former’s “rush” with the latter’s calming effect – creates a dangerous physiological conflict.

According to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, stimulant-involved overdose fatalities increased markedly from more than 12,000 annually in 2015 to greater than 57,000 in 2022, a 375% increase. Notably, approximately 70% of stimulant-related overdose deaths in 2022 also involved fentanyl or other synthetic opioids, reflecting the rising prevalence of polysubstance involvement in overdose mortality.

Users sought to experience the euphoric “rush” from the stimulant and the calming effects of the opioid. However, with the proliferation of fentanyl – which is far more potent than heroin – this combination has become increasingly lethal. Fentanyl is often mixed with cocaine or methamphetamine, sometimes without the user’s knowledge, leading to unintentional overdoses.

The rise in speedballing is part of a broader trend of polysubstance use in the U.S. Since 2010, overdoses involving both stimulants and fentanyl have increased 50-fold, now accounting for approximately 35,000 deaths annually.

This has been called the fourth wave of the opioid epidemic. The toxic and contaminated drug supply has exacerbated this crisis.

A dangerous combination of physiological effects

Stimulants like cocaine increase heart rate and blood pressure, while opioids suppress respiratory function. This combination can lead to respiratory failure, cardiovascular collapse and death. People who use both substances are more than twice as likely to experience a fatal overdose compared with those using opioids alone.

The conflicting effects of stimulants and opioids can also exacerbate mental health issues. Users may experience heightened anxiety, depression and paranoia. The combination can also impair cognitive functions, leading to confusion and poor decision-making.

Speedballing can also lead to severe cardiovascular problems, including hypertension, heart attack and stroke. The strain on the heart and blood vessels from the stimulant, combined with the depressant effects of the opioid, increases the risk of these life-threatening conditions.

Addressing the crisis

Increasing awareness about the dangers of speedballing is crucial. I believe that educational campaigns can inform the public about the risks of combining stimulants and opioids and the potential for unintentional fentanyl exposure.

There is a great need for better access to treatment for people with stimulant use disorder – a condition defined as the continued use of amphetamine-type substances, cocaine or other stimulants leading to clinically significant impairment or distress, from mild to severe. Treatments for this and other substance use disorders are underfunded and less accessible than those for opioid use disorder. Addressing this gap can help reduce the prevalence of speedballing.

Implementing harm reduction strategies by public health officials, community organizations and health care providers, such as providing fentanyl test strips and naloxone – a medication that reverses opioid overdoses – can save lives.

These measures allow individuals to test their drugs for the presence of fentanyl and have immediate access to overdose-reversing medication. Implementing these strategies widely is crucial to reducing overdose deaths and improving community health outcomes.

Source: https://theconversation.com/speedballing-the-deadly-mix-of-stimulants-and-opioids-requires-a-new-approach-to-prevention-and-treatment-257425

Disclosure statement

Andrew Yockey does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organisation that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

Salalah, 25 Jun (ONA) — The Ministry of Social Development, in Dhofar Governorate, organized today a community event titled “A Nation Free from Drugs” to raise awareness about the dangers of narcotics and psychotropic substances.

The initiative aimed to educate the public on the threat of drug abuse, its societal risks, and the importance of collective prevention while fostering health, social and cultural awareness.

The event featured a panel discussion titled “A Nation Free from Drugs,” where experts addressed the societal impacts of addiction and strategies for prevention and treatment.

“A Nation Free from Drugs” Awareness Campaign Held in Salalah.

Source:  https://www.omannews.gov.om/topics/en/128/show/123051/ona

by Shane Varcoe, Dalgarno Institute, based on https://nobrainer.org.au
Teen vaping is on the rise. Around the world, 16.8% of young people have already tried e-cigarettes, often starting as early as 14 years old. The risks? Nicotine addiction, lung damage, harmful chemicals, and even mental health concerns. Schools are on the frontline to tackle this issue, and now, a new programme called ‘Our Futures Vaping’ is aiming to revolutionise teen vaping prevention in schools.
Why Teen Vaping Prevention is Essential: Reports indicate that one in four teenagers in Australia has experimented with vaping. With the average age of initiation being just 14, the potential harm cannot be ignored. The effects of vaping include:
• Lung injuries caused by chemical exposure
• Higher risk of transitioning to smoking cigarettes
• Possible long-term mental health difficulties
Despite regulatory reforms aiming to restrict vaping to medicinal use, illegal access remains widespread. To address this challenge, schools need prevention tools that are credible, age-appropriate, and accessible.
A New Approach to Teen Vaping Prevention with Digital Lessons: A team of researchers has co-designed an innovative school-based programme called ‘Our Futures Vaping’. This cutting-edge project takes the fight against teen vaping to the classroom, with an engaging digital platform tailored to Year 7 and 8 students. It’s more than just a teaching tool; it’s a way to empower students with knowledge, critical thinking skills, and the confidence to say no to vaping. 
Source:  https://nobrainer.org.au/index.php/student-teacher/get-a-clue-partae/1456-new-digital-lessons-to-combat-teen-vaping-in-schools?

Joseph M Kress exposes the dark reality of America’s drug crisis

 

TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA, June 23, 2025 /EINPresswire.com/ — In his compelling and illuminating new book, “Single Handed,” retired lieutenant and police detective Joseph M. Kress reveals the stark realities of America’s ongoing drug crisis and the concerning shortcomings of the nation’s drug prevention programs. Inspired by true events, the story uncovers a journey shaped by tragedy and the hardened years in law enforcement.

The book begins with a very personal and tragic event: Joe Kress’s brother Greg was murdered while on his honeymoon following a robbery in New Orleans. This shocking act of violence sparks Joe’s determination to join the police force. What follows is a vivid, rapid-fire narrative of Joe’s years as an officer, exploring a diverse array of cases that unveil the most sinister aspects of society, from child disappearances to horrific sexual assaults. Despite suffering a gunshot wound to his leg and having to retire early due to injury, Joe is shown to be a man who is motivated by duty throughout it all.

However, “Single Handed” does not conclude with Joe’s time in uniform. In fact, the narrative takes a turn into thrilling and audacious realms. After leaving official service, Joe sets off on a unique journey of his own creation: pursuing drug dealers nationwide. Utilizing his SWAT training and special operations background, he embarks on a mission to tackle the soaring drug-related crime rates affecting American neighborhoods. This unfolds a vigilante crusade, crafted from genuine frustration and moulded by years of direct involvement in law enforcement and profound personal grief.

Amazon reviewer Sanjin highlights the book as crucial and relevant, praising the author’s direct and engaging storytelling that sheds light on an ongoing crisis affecting communities today. In a similar vein, reader Clarence Joseph shares this sentiment, highlighting that the story’s expertly crafted pace not only amplifies its suspense but also provides a captivating and delightful reading journey.

Source:  https://fox59.com/business/press-releases/ein-presswire/824883015/joseph-m-kress-exposes-the-dark-reality-of-americas-drug-crisis-through-his-latest-candid-memoir/

 

If you’re a small business owner, you probably wear a lot of hats: manager, mentor, HR rep, sometimes even IT support. You already know that building a successful company today means adapting to change, especially when it comes to supporting your team. How we approach substance use and mental health on the job is where workplaces need to be evolving quickly!

You might think serious conversations about substance use, behavioral health, and mental wellness are reserved for big corporations with large HR departments and employee wellness budgets. But in today’s world, even the smallest teams need modern, compassionate policies.

Why? Because the way we work—and what employees expect—has changed. Employees today want to know that their employer cares about their whole well-being, not just their productivity. That includes creating space to talk about tough topics like stress, burnout, and yes, substance use.

Modern leadership means recognizing that substance use is something that impacts real people—people you may work with every day. It doesn’t always look like someone missing work or failing a drug test. It can be more subtle: someone relying on alcohol to decompress every night, using prescription stimulants to keep up with unrealistic demands, or struggling quietly with a dependence on marijuana.

Ignoring these issues won’t make them go away. But addressing them with care and structure? That’s leadership.

Here’s how small business owners can modernize their workplace by making room for this kind of support:

 

1. Update Your Workplace Culture, Not Just Your Tech

You wouldn’t run your business on a five-year-old software system. So why stick with outdated workplace norms around health and performance?

A modern workplace recognizes that stress, mental health, and substance use challenges are part of the human experience—and responds with resources, not judgment. Whether that’s offering access to support programs or simply encouraging open dialogue, small steps make a big difference.

 

2. Create a Clear, Supportive Policy

Yes, even small businesses should have a written policy about substance use. Not to scare people—but to protect them. A good policy:

·    Explains your company’s stance (supportive, not punitive)

·    Details how employees can seek help confidentially

·    Trains supervisors to spot concerns and respond appropriately

·    Builds in support and resources—like referrals, time off for treatment, or check-ins

It shows employees that they don’t have to hide what they’re going through.

 

3. Lead With Curiosity, Not Control

You don’t need to be a counselor. But you can ask thoughtful questions, listen without judgment, and point people in the right direction. A curious, compassionate conversation can open the door to real change—especially when someone is already feeling vulnerable.

Modern support means meeting people where they are. Whether someone is cutting back, abstaining, or just starting to question their habits, having your workplace be part of the solution helps them take the next step.

 

4. Set the Tone From the Top

As a business owner, your attitude sets the culture. Talking openly about stress, supporting mental health days, and encouraging balance gives your employees permission to take care of themselves. And when people feel safe, they perform better. It’s that simple.

Addressing substance use isn’t about policing your team. It’s about building a workplace where people can show up as they are, get the support they need, and grow. That’s what today’s employees are looking for—and it’s how small businesses build loyalty, retention, and a reputation for doing things the right way.

Source: McConnell, K. (2024, April 1). The Challenge of Change: How employers can modernize workplace substance use support. How Employers Can Modernize Workplace Substance Use Support | Spring Health. https://www.springhealth.com/blog/how-employers-can-modernize-workplace-substance-use-support 

 

Source:  Drug Free America Foundation | 333 3rd Avenue N Suite 200 | St. Petersburg, FL 33701 US

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<DFAF>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

NATIONAL DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE ALLIANCE

As the workplace division of Drug Free America Foundation, NDWA’s mission is to be a national leader in the drug-free workplace industry by directly assisting employers and stakeholders, providing drug-free workplace program resources and assistance, and supporting a national coalition of drug-free workplace service providers.

For more information and drug-free workplace resources, visit NDWA at www.ndwa.org.

 

By Joe Rossiter – The Mail on Sunday-  29 June 2025 

More than a quarter of police and crime commissioners have written to the policing minister calling for cannabis to be upgraded to a class A substance, The Mail on Sunday can reveal.

In the stark letter to Dame Diana Johnson MP, seen exclusively by this newspaper, 14 police chiefs claim the effect of the drug in society ‘may be far worse’ than heroin.

They warn that ‘we cannot allow this to become the Britain of the future’. And they also hit out at the recent report by the London Commission – backed by Labour London mayor Sir Sadiq Khan – which suggested decriminalising small amounts of cannabis, which is currently a class B drug.

‘Heroin can kill quickly but the cumulative effect of cannabis in our society may be far worse,’ the letter states. 

It adds that class A status – which comes with potential life sentences for suppliers – was the way forward ‘rather than effective decriminalising’.

And renowned psychiatrist Professor Sir Robin Murray, of King’s College London, told The Mail on Sunday that the UK may now be ‘at the beginnings of an epidemic of cannabis-induced psychosis’ which could overwhelm NHS mental health services.

The commissioners also pointed to other countries where laws are laxer, warning that the US has seen ‘unofficial pharmacies’ selling cannabis and the powerful opiate fentanyl alongside one another, while Portugal has been forced to consider reversing drug decriminalisation after a 30-fold increase in psychosis.

They said cannabis’s effects were so devastating it had ‘more birth defects associated with it than thalidomide’ – the notorious morning sickness drug which caused deformities among thousands of babies in the 1950s and 1960s.

More than a quarter of police and crime commissioners have written to the policing minister calling for cannabis to be upgraded to a class A substance (file pic)

Marcus Monzo, 37, was last week found guilty of 14-year-old Daniel Anjorin’s murder while in a state of cannabis-induced psychosis Monzo attacked the teenager with a samurai sword in Hainault, east London, last May

Their warnings came after Marcus Monzo, 37, was last week found guilty of 14-year-old Daniel Anjorin’s murder after he attacked him with a samurai sword in Hainault, east London, while in a state of cannabis-induced psychosis.

David Sidwick, Police and Crime Commissioner for Dorset, said cannabis legislation was ‘clearly not fit for purpose’ and likened it to ‘using a machete for brain surgery’. 

He added the public wanted to see ‘tougher measures’ for cannabis possession because it was a gateway to harder drugs.

His Devon and Cornwall counterpart Alison Hernandez said: ‘The fact that we’ve been so blase about cannabis in society means that people think it’s legal and normal, and it’s not. 

‘We’ve got to show them that it’s not, and the way you do that is to be quite fierce in your enforcement arrangements.’

Latest figures show three in four people caught with cannabis avoid appearing in court, while 87 per cent of children and young people in alcohol and drug treatment cited cannabis dependency, compared to 39 per cent for alcohol.

In the stark letter to Dame Diana Johnson MP, 14 police chiefs claim the effect of the drug in society ‘may be far worse’ than heroin

David Sidwick, Police and Crime Commissioner for Dorset, said he wanted to see ‘tougher measures’ for cannabis possession because it was a gateway to harder drugs (file pic)

Stuart Reece, an Australian clinician and cannabis researcher quoted in the letter said more than 90 per cent of hard drug addicts he encountered had started with cannabis.

He said pro-cannabis campaigners had the view it was ‘my right to use drugs and destroy my body and you will pay for it through the NHS’.

Dr Karen Randall, a physician in the US state of Colorado where recreational cannabis was legalised in 2012, said healthcare costs linked to the drug are ‘exorbitant’.

A Home Office spokesman said: ‘We work with partners across health, policing and wider public services to drive down drug use, ensure more people receive timely treatment and support, and make our streets and communities safer.’

Source: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-14857305/Cannabis-worse-society-heroin-police-tsars-upgrade-class.html

by Ingrid Fadelli, Phys.org – edited by Gaby Clark, reviewed by Robert Egan – The GIST – June 26, 2025

Omicron Limited’ 36 Hope Street, Douglas, IM1 1AR, Isle of Man

Cannabis, also known as marijuana or weed, is widely consumed worldwide, whether for recreational or medicinal purposes. Over the past decades, the use of cannabis has been fully legalized or decriminalized in various countries worldwide, including Canada, many U.S. states, the Netherlands, Germany, Spain and Portugal.

While some studies have found that cannabis and especially cannabidiol (i.e., the non-intoxicating compound contained in it) can have medicinal effects, others have linked the abuse of its psychoactive variations (i.e., containing tetrahydrocannabinol or THC) with a greater risk of being diagnosed with psychiatric disorders.

As many individuals worldwide use cannabis on a regular basis, understanding the mechanisms that could link its consumption with psychiatric disorders could be highly valuable, as it might help to identify factors that increase the risk of developing specific disorders.

In a paper published in Nature Mental Health, researchers at Yale University School of Medicine, the Veterans Affairs Connecticut Healthcare System and Washington University School of Medicine shed new light on the genetic associations between cannabis use, cannabis use disorder (CanUD) and various psychiatric disorders.

CanUD is a mental health disorder characterized by a continued use of cannabis, difficulties experienced when trying to cut down its consumption or cease using it altogether, and an interference of the substance with daily activities, relationships or responsibilities.

“Increasing prevalence of cannabis use and CanUD may increase risk for psychiatric disorders,” wrote Marco Galimberti, Cassie Overstreet and their colleagues in their paper. “We evaluated the relationships between these cannabis traits and a range of psychiatric traits, running global and local genetic correlations, genomic structural equation modeling, colocalization analyses and Mendelian randomization analyses for causality.”

Genomic-SEM. Genomic-SEM analyses of cannabis traits (CanUD and cannabis use) and
psychiatric disorders for a three-factor model. Credit: Galimberti et al.
(Nature Mental Health, 2025).

The researchers analyzed genetic, psychiatric and psychological data collected as part of earlier studies, using various statistical techniques. First, they tried to detect genetic patterns that linked cannabis use with specific psychiatric and personality traits, using a technique known as genomic structural equation modeling.

Subsequently, they ran colocalization analyses, a statistical analysis that allowed them to uncover instances where two traits shared the same underlying genetic variant. Finally, they used a technique called Mendelian randomization to uncover causal relationships between traits, or in other words, if a sporadic or problematic use of cannabis caused specific disorders via genetic factors and vice versa.

“Global genetic analyses identified significantly different correlations between CanUD and cannabis use,” wrote Galimberti, Overstreet and their colleagues. “A variant in strong linkage disequilibrium to one regulating CHRNA2 was significantly shared by CanUD and schizophrenia in colocalization analysis and included in a significant region in local genetic correlations between these traits. A three-factor model from genomic structural equation modeling showed that CanUD and cannabis use partially map together onto a factor with major depressive disorder and ADHD.”

Interestingly, the researchers found that although cannabis use and CanUD are in some ways related, they had different genetic relationships with psychiatric disorders. In fact, they found that variations in the regulation of the gene CHRNA2, which has also been linked to nicotine consumption and dopamine signaling, were common to both schizophrenia and CanUD, but not to casual or general cannabis use.

“In terms of causality, CanUD showed bidirectional causal relationships with most tested psychiatric disorders, differently from cannabis use,” wrote Galimberti, Overstreet and their colleagues. “Increasing use of cannabis can increase rates of psychiatric disorders over time, especially in individuals who progress from cannabis use to CanUD.”

Overall, the findings of this recent study suggest that there is a bi-directional genetic relationship between the abuse of cannabis, specifically CanUD, and various psychiatric disorders, including schizophrenia, ADHD, depression, and bipolar disorder. In other words, it appears that CanUD could increase the risk of developing mental health disorders, and being diagnosed with some psychiatric disorders could also prompt abuse of cannabis.

This recent work could potentially inform the development of public health interventions aimed at monitoring or limiting people’s consumption of cannabis early, to reduce the risk that they will later develop psychiatric disorders. In addition, the analyses could inspire other research groups to delve deeper into the genetic associations they uncovered, potentially by analyzing a wider pool of genetic, psychological and medical data.

Written for you by our author Ingrid Fadelli, edited by Gaby Clark , and fact-checked and reviewed by Robert Egan —this article is the result of careful human work. We rely on readers like you to keep independent science journalism alive. If this reporting matters to you, please consider a donation (especially monthly). You’ll get an ad-free account as a thank-you.

More information: Marco Galimberti et al, The genetic relationship between cannabis use disorder, cannabis use and psychiatric disorders, Nature Mental Health (2025). DOI: 10.1038/s44220-025-00440-4.

Journal information: Nature Mental Health

Source: https://medicalxpress.com/news/2025-06-explores-genetic-link-cannabis-psychiatric.html

by Haoliang Cui1;  Jianyi Zhang1;  Wenkai Luo1;  Erri Du2;  Zhongwei Jia1, , and Corresponding Author Zhongwei Jia, jiazw@bjmu.edu.cn 

Author affiliations

The recognition of drug use as a global challenge requiring coordinated international response began with the first international conference on narcotic drugs held in Shanghai in 1909. Throughout the 20th century, three pivotal United Nations (UN) conventions on drug control (1961, 1971, and 1988) established the legal and institutional framework for a comprehensive multilateral system addressing prevention and enforcement. The creation of the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) in 1997 further underscored the widespread nature of drug-related challenges confronting societies worldwide (12).

As nations develop more sophisticated approaches to addressing global drug challenges, international surveillance data continue to underscore both the magnitude of the problem and the critical importance of prevention strategies. The global population using drugs has reached 292 million in 2022, representing a 20% increase over the past decade (3). Particularly concerning is the finding that cannabis use prevalence among adolescents aged 15–16 years exceeds that of adults worldwide (3). It was estimated that 84 million adults aged 15–64 in Europe had used cannabis at least once, including approximately 15.3 million young adults aged 15–34 based on the European Drug Report 2023. (4). Similarly, in 2022, an estimated 70.3 million individuals aged 12 or older in the United States reported illicit drug use within the past year, with peak prevalence occurring among young adults aged 18 to 25. These statistics demonstrate the urgent need for targeted prevention investments, particularly among youth populations (5).

China has actively contributed to and responded to these global drug control initiatives. The Anti-Drug Law of the People’s Republic of China (6) was enacted in 2007, establishing a comprehensive triadic strategy that encompasses prevention, punishment, and rehabilitation. Following the law’s implementation, the number of newly identified drug users increased steadily, reaching its peak in 2015 (Figure 1). However, a series of national initiatives — including the “People’s War on Drugs,” the “Sword Action” (Liangjian Project), and the deployment of “Skynet” surveillance systems — led to a significant decrease in newly identified drug users. This decline was particularly pronounced during and after the COVID-19 pandemic, when the number of newly found drug users experienced a sharp drop (Figure 1).

The theme of this year’s International Day Against Drug Abuse and Illicit Trafficking — “The evidence is clear: invest in prevention, Break the cycle, Stop Organized Crime” (7) — underscores the public health nature of the drug problem and emphasizes the critical importance of preventive measures (Figure 2). The evolution of these annual themes reflects a fundamental shift in global attitudes toward drug policy. From 1996 to 2009, themes primarily emphasized the dangers and harmful consequences of drug use. The second stage (2010 to 2015) began treating the drug problem as a public health issue rather than solely a criminal justice matter. Since 2016, the focus has shifted toward prevention, early intervention, and youth-centered strategies, reflecting a more comprehensive and evidence-based approach to drug policy.

Nevertheless, emerging risks continue to challenge existing frameworks. Recent cases of adolescent substance abuse involving compounds not yet under formal regulatory control, such as nitrous oxide and etomidate, have been documented across China (8). Since January 2021, Guangzhou in Guangdong Province has implemented targeted enforcement measures against nitrous oxide distribution, resulting in 46 investigated cases by June 2022 (9). These novel psychoactive substances present distinct challenges due to their accessibility through online platforms, ambiguous legal classification, and limited public awareness — particularly among adolescents. In response to these evolving threats, the Ministry of Justice issued a national directive in early 2025 emphasizing “intensified drug prevention campaigns targeting adolescents” (10). Through strategic investments in early education programs, enhanced cross-sector collaboration, and implementation of evidence-based policy frameworks, China is proactively adapting its approach to address the dynamic landscape of emerging drug-related risks.

  • FIGURE 1.  Trends in newly identified drug users in China, 2007–2022.

    Note: Data from 2007 to 2013 were sourced from the Drug Abuse Population Estimation in the Key Cities of the Ministry of Public Security, while data from 2014 to 2022 were obtained from the respective annual editions of the Drug Situation in China report.

Associated Information:

Opening Remark by NDPA:

“Although Harm Reduction is too often abused as a vehicle for liberalising or legalising drugs( tactically ignoring the fact that the strongest form of harm reduction is to stop using) Peter Kykant’s selfless and commendable work was an example of the positive side of harm reduction – which could work alongside prevention rather than at odds with it”

NDPA – 22 – 06 – 2025

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

 

by Libby Brooks The Guardian – Fri 20 Jun 2025

Peter Krykant by the River Carron near Falkirk in March 2020.

His decision to set up a mobile drug consumption facility in Glasgow propelled Scotland’s drug deaths crisis up the political agenda. 

Photograph: Murdo MacLeod/The Guardian

Drugs policy campaigner whose commitment to harm reduction led him to set up an overdose prevention service

The drugs policy campaigner Peter Krykant, who has died suddenly aged 48, advanced the cause of the harm reduction movement through a transformative act of civil disobedience.

Fitting out a van as a mobile safer drug consumption space and making it available to Glasgow’s most vulnerable homeless addicts broke the law. And it also – eventually – broke the stalemate around UK drugs policy, propelled Scotland’s drug deaths crisis further up the political agenda and, most importantly, saved lives.

Krykant’s law-breaking plan coalesced in February 2020 after he attended what he saw as another talking shop – a Scottish government conference focused on drug deaths, which took place 24 hours before a UK government summit on the same subject, at the same Glasgow venue. It seemed to him a ludicrous show of escalating tensions between the two administrations.

“The conferences were the final straw, and the fact that [a drug consumption room pilot] is being used as a political football,” he told the Guardian a week later. “As a person who went through my own trauma – drug use and street homelessness issues many years ago – I cannot stand back.”

Within days of announcing his plan to purchase a vehicle and customise it as a mobile safer-injecting suite, Krykant had raised more than £2,000. He was immediately sacked from his job as an HIV outreach worker at the charity Waverley Care.

Undeterred by the looming global Covid pandemic, Krykant recognised that, as services contracted, the homeless drug users who congregated around Trongate in Glasgow were even more in need. So he struck out in the midst of lockdown, first in a minibus nicknamed “the Tank” and later in a converted ambulance, providing clean water, needles and swabs, as well as supplies of naloxone, the potentially life-saving drug that reverses the effects of opioid overdose. Rules included using your own drugs, and agreeing to an overdose intervention if needed.

Writing in the Guardian, Krykant later explained: “Overdose prevention services are an internationally recognised way of reducing drug-related harms. It benefits everyone by supporting the most vulnerable and saving taxpayers’ money on ambulance callouts, hospital admissions and council clean-up teams.”

The local police largely tolerated his activity, although he was charged in October 2020 for obstructing officers attempting to search his van – the charges were later dropped. He continued operating until May 2021. More than 1,000 injections were supervised, and nine overdoses reversed.

“It was the trust people had in Peter, the cup of tea and the Mars bar, that really helped them and is hard to quantify,” said the MSP Paul Sweeney, who became a close friend when the pair volunteered together at the van. “He proved all the naysayers and the procrastinators wrong. He never said it was a silver bullet but Peter knew firsthand the particular risks for people who inject on the street and saw that this intervention could directly save lives.”

Krykant was always insistent that addiction should be understood in the wider context of poverty and inequality, a message he took around the doorsteps of his local Holyrood constituency of Falkirk East when he stood for the Scottish parliament elections in May 2021.

A Guardian film, which followed his campaign, captures his younger son, aglow with pride, explaining to the producers: “I’ve got three reasons you should vote for my dad: because he’s honest, reliable and he listens to people’s suggestions.”

But the responsibility he evidently carried for every individual he helped, the memories they stirred of his own trauma as well as escalating public scrutiny, took their toll and Krykant relapsed.

He had talked openly about darker currents in his childhood in the village of Maddiston, near Falkirk; trauma and sexual abuse that would lead him to start taking drugs when he was 11. He left school with no formal qualifications, and by his late teens he was sleeping rough and injecting heroin.

But eventually he found support to live drug-free, and worked successfully in sales for over a decade, first in Brighton, and later returning north of the border, where he subsequently trained as an addiction support worker. During this time he married and started a family, taking market research work to fit around caring for his two young sons.

Krykant had continued his advocacy work in recent years, passing the van on to the Transform Drug Policy Foundation and embarking on a tour across the UK. Lately he worked at the harm reduction charity Cranstoun, where he developed an overdose response app called BuddyUp and represented the organisation at events around the world.

When the UK’s first legal drug consumption room, the Thistle, opened its doors in Glasgow this January, there were many who drew a direct line from his minibus to its airy vestibule. Others felt his contribution had been sidelined to make way for more mainstream voices, or that his vulnerabilities had been exploited by those who desired the frisson of his lived experience for their campaigns.

This winter, say friends, Krykant found himself at his lowest ebb. His marriage had collapsed, he had lost his job and he was struggling to support himself, worrying about the impact this had on his sons.

Martin Powell, who drove the van on its UK tour, said: “He was the catalyst and without him we might still be waiting. Without question there are people alive today who would not be without Peter Krykant. It’s an absolute tragedy that he isn’t one of them.”

Krykant is survived by his sons.

 Peter Krykant, campaigner, born 13 November 1976; died 9 June 2025

Source: https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2025/jun/20/peter-krykant-obituary

 

SG/SM/22690 – 18 June 2025

Following is UN Secretary-General António Guterres’ message on the International Day against Drug Abuse and Illicit Trafficking, observed on 26 June:

” The global illicit drug trade continues to exact a devastating toll:  claiming lives, ravaging public health services and fuelling violence and organized crime.

Drug trafficking is tearing through communities with substances that are more potent, more dangerous and more deadly than ever.  Meanwhile, criminal networks prey on the most vulnerable — particularly women and youth — as they rake in hundreds of billions annually through the illicit drug trade.

This year, we shine a light on prevention as the most essential strategy for halting the flow of drugs that fuels organized crime worldwide.

We must reduce demand through investing in education, treatment, harm-reduction measures and care; target the machinery of production by eliminating illicit laboratories and offering farmers viable alternatives; and sever trafficking networks by strengthening global trade routes and choking the financial flows of criminal networks, while always ensuring respect for human rights.

Let us recommit to ending drug abuse and trafficking, uniting to dismantle criminal networks and breaking the cycle of suffering and destruction once and for all. “

Source: https://press.un.org/en/2025/sgsm22690.doc.htm

 

Contrary to the popular narrative, President Nixon’s comprehensive approach to drug policy provided an effective solution to a growing problem.

In the 1970s, the United States faced a growing heroin epidemic. By 1970, there were an estimated 600,000 heroin addicts and 7,200 overdose deaths—a crisis that demanded a national response.

President Richard Nixon took decisive action to address this crisis. While he did  declare drug abuse “public enemy number one,” the phrase “war on drugs” was largely a media invention. The public perception that Nixon launched a punitive campaign against drugs has overshadowed the more nuanced reality of his policy and its measurable success.

Judge Robert Bonner, former DEA administrator and U.S. District Court judge, addressed this misconception during remarks at the Nixon Library on August 22,  2023. In his research into President Nixon’s drug policy, Bonner found that Nixon used the term “war on drugs” only once—in a little-known speech to Customs personnel in Texas. As Bonner put it, “The ‘war on drugs’ is a horrid metaphor. We’ve never treated it as a war, never funded it like one, and there’s no ultimate victory.” 

Journalist Charles Fain Lehman, a Robert Novak Journalism Fellow, echoed this sentiment: “Despite what critics claim, there is no fifty-year straight line from Nixon to Reagan’s drug war.”

Instead of approaching the acute drug crisis like a war, President Nixon developed a strategic, two-pronged approach aimed at reducing heroin addiction in America. His strategy targeted both demand and supply. On the demand side, he expanded treatment and prevention programs. On the supply side, he cracked down on drug trafficking through law enforcement and international diplomacy. As Lehman puts it, “his policy agenda was responsive to a real and substantial drug epidemic, one which merited a proportional government response.”

One of President Nixon’s earliest legislative achievements was the Controlled Substances Act of 1970, the first comprehensive federal drug law. Contrary to later tough-on-crime narratives, this law actually eliminated mandatory minimum sentences for drug offenses—sentences that would only return with the Drug Abuse Act of 1986 under a different administration.

To enforce drug laws more effectively, President Nixon created the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA), the first federal agency with a singular mission to combat drug trafficking. Under his leadership, the DEA partnered with international allies to curb the global heroin trade. In just two years, Nixon’s team helped disrupt heroin routes through France and negotiated efforts to ban opium production in Turkey. According to Bonner, these efforts helped reduce the number of heroin addicts in the U.S. from approximately 600,000 to fewer than 100,000—a number that remained low for over a decade.

Further busting the myth of a drug war, compassion was core to President Nixon’s drug policy. “Heroin addiction is a problem that demands compassion, not simply condemnation,” he said. To put that compassion into action, he created the Special Action Office for Drug Abuse Prevention and appointed Dr. Jerome Jaffe—a pioneer in addiction treatment—to lead it. One of the key objectives President Nixon assigned to Jaffe was addressing the treatment of servicemen returning from Vietnam with heroin addiction—an issue that, according to a 1971 congressional report, affected an estimated 30,000 to 40,000 veterans. Under President Nixon’s leadership, federally funded heroin treatment and education programs expanded dramatically. As Lehman noted, “Nixon spent more on drug treatment than enforcement year after year, and pioneered the use of methadone maintenance treatment.”

Richard Nixon’s approach—combining treatment, enforcement, and diplomacy—laid the groundwork for a more balanced and effective drug policy. As Bonner concluded, “In short, Nixon understood the problem. He also did something about it. It was a whole government effort—and it worked.”

View Judge Robert Bonner’s full remarks:

Sources

Bonner, Robert. Judge. 23 August 2023. Keynote Remarks by Judge Robert Bonner, YouTube, August 23, 2023.

Lehman, Charles Fain. “What Was the War on Drugs? Part I.” The Causal Fallacy, May 6, 2025.

Lehman, Charles Fain. “What Was the War on Drugs? Part II.”The Causal Fallacy, May 7, 2025.

OPENING REMARKS BY NDPA:

This book, and its review, engage with differing viewpoint s about addiction and addicts. Flanagan prefers to avoid the word ‘disease’ – characterising the condition as a behavioural ‘disorder’ – much in the way that Stanton Peele, in his classic 1975 text ‘Love and Addiction’ – (Peele and Brodsky – Pubd, Taplinger, New York) similarly views the condition. But in the professional field of today additional concepts have been introduced, what some might call ‘influencers’ – longest established is the notion of ‘harm reduction’ – this (in our opinion) has a valid purpose in limiting harm that users can experience, but it has also been ‘abused’ by campaigners who argue that ‘laws are harmful, so legalisation reduces harm’. More recently the notion of ‘stigma’ has become more prominent in the drug policy arena … and again, whilst there is a valid role for addressing gratuitous stigmatisation of users, the liberalising campaigners can be seen to abuse the notion, arguing that ‘all stigma is bad, therefore all stigma should be removed.’ In fact, society has long rationally deployed stigma where it can be seen as criticising an individuals drug abuse when this damages and jeopardises a healthful society, or threatens the health of people around the user … this is echoed in Flanagan’s text where, for example he says addicts are ‘… are by no means blameless just because they supposedly have a disease’. This dialogue will of course run and run, and NDPA will endeavour to maintain a balanced and rational journey through this jungle!

A new book looks at addiction through the lens of choice and responsibility.

 Reason Magazine – 

Owen Flanagan’s new book, What Is It Like To Be an Addict?, should be welcomed by anyone concerned with these issues. Despite its modest size, this is a work of large ambition and broad range informed not just by the author’s long career as a prominent philosopher but by his many years as a desperately addicted abuser of alcohol and sedatives.

“This is a deeply personal book,” he writes. “I was addicted to booze and benzos for twenty years on and off from the late 1970s until the early 2000s. The last years were especially ugly, requiring several hospitalizations, and involving constant self-loathing and suicidal despair.”

Unsurprisingly given his experience, Flanagan stresses that we should pay close attention to what the addicted have to tell us. And among the most important things addicts say is that they are by no means blameless just because they supposedly have a disease. On the contrary, many feel shame (for being an addict) and guilt (for behaviors that are slowly destroying them and harming their loved ones).

To Flanagan, these feelings are right and good. That stance may inspire horror from some people, who will see it as victim-blaming. But it’s consistent with Flanagan’s view that addicts can’t be reduced to flesh-and-blood automatons jerked about by their cravings. As he notes, even people who claim to believe this will then earnestly implore an addict to get help—a plea that could only be directed at someone presumed to have the ability to make choices. “Every treatment that works to unseat addiction,” he writes, “assumes that addicts are responsible and must participate in undoing their own addiction.”

Flanagan doesn’t even think addiction is a disease, exactly—more of a multifactorial disorder of enormous social, physical, psychological, and pharmacological complexity. Indeed, one of his book’s main points is that addiction cannot be seen as any one simple thing. But he doggedly insists that addicts retain some agency during their plight.

“Practices of compassion, forgiveness, and excusing are distinct from whether or not we hold the addict responsible,” he writes. “We hold addicts responsible in many respects and rightly so. Thus, the determination that addiction is a disease or mental disorder is much less consequential as far as holding addicts responsible goes than many suggest.”

Flanagan takes care to distinguish between unwilling addicts, willing addicts, and resigned addicts, helping us through these categories to think about what we mean by addiction and how best to mitigate it. Particularly notable are the minority who are willing addicts—he mentions as an example Keith Richards, who has said he was a longtime heroin user. At least some of these individuals are in control of the consequences of their habit and satisfied with their lives. Is their addiction any more meaningful than a coffee habit?

Unwilling addicts want to quit, and many will eventually succeed. And resigned addicts are those who wanted to quit, couldn’t, and just gave up, surrendering to hopelessness. They are in a sense beyond unwilling; by not trying to quit, they effectively acquiesce. Here, the author says, a kind of accommodation may help. One nonprofit in Europe helps resigned addicts to lead orderly lives through more disciplined consumption—in one methadone-like program, six pints of beer spread throughout the day—as well as suitable paid employment.

As for himself, the author credits Alcoholics Anonymous with saving his life by enabling his sobriety, but he also thinks it has a certain cultishness; like any good rationalist, he insists on “the distinction between the belief in a Higher Power having an effect and the Higher Power having an effect.”

Flanagan is also a capable researcher and reporter. Who knew that many addicts call the rest of us “earth people”? Or, more significantly, that there is so much overlap between addiction and other psychiatric disorders? “Twenty-five percent of individuals with severe mental illness, defined as a disorder that severely compromises normal functioning—schizophrenia with delusions or immobilizing depression—have a substance use disorder,” the author says. “In the other direction, 15 percent of individuals with a substance use disorder also have a severe mental illness.”

This book’s focus is substance abuse rather than, say, Facebook addiction, if such a thing exists. Flanagan is properly skeptical of the movement to medicalize all of life’s setbacks and sadnesses. He notes that men in most cultures are more likely than women to abuse alcohol and drugs, but that women are gaining. “There is no country where female alcoholism…rates are near 10 percent. But there are many countries in which the male alcoholism rate is above 10 percent and a few that top 13 percent: Russia (16.29 percent), Hungary (15.29 percent), Lithuania (13.35 percent), and South Korea (13.10 percent).”

He reminds us that while the war on drugs appears to be a costly failure, we can’t say for sure that many addictions wouldn’t be worse in its absence. And he notes some of the problems that have accompanied legalization initiatives. In Portugal, after a decade of good results, “substance use is on the rise, and fewer and fewer people in need are getting treatment. Recent data indicate that both overall drug use and drug overdose rates are up.” In Oregon, decriminalization Measure 110 “is being unwound” after evictions and fentanyl supplies surged. But he cautions: “The data do not mean, as some are quick to insist, that decriminalization, harm reduction, and treatment are not for the best.”

What Is It Like To Be an Addict? has its shortcomings, which largely stem from the author’s academic tribe. The book is not particularly well-organized or well-written; again and again, Flanagan tells us what he’s going to tell us, and then tells us the thing a couple more times to be on the safe side. And the book can be heavy on jargon. At one point, despite his professed sobriety, he writes: “When I report on the experiences of fellow addicts based on their autophenomenological reports, I am doing heterophenomenology.”

Particularly nettlesome is the author’s claim that, although addicts are responsible for their addiction, the rest of us are responsible too because of the woeful conditions we’ve allowed to persist. He wheels out the usual suspects including “social displacement,” poverty, inequality, racism, depression, “lack of good life options,” and other all-purpose woes that “are not caused by addicts.”

Blinkered by his ready-made list of villains, the author takes little account of other potential factors. Affluence in particular seems at least as likely a culprit as poverty. Today’s poor are often richer than middle-class Americans were in the middle of the last century, and today’s American middle class is extraordinarily affluent by historical and global standards. That means more of us can afford substance abuse of all kinds, not to mention addictions to shopping and other costly behaviors.

How about changes to family life or to levels of church attendance? Isn’t it possible that the religious and familial dimensions of A.A. are essential to its remarkable success? It’s noteworthy that the author’s own salvation came not from any arm of government but from a private, apolitical institution operating on a shoestring and making no attempt to end inequality or racism. Drunks come to A.A. and somehow get sober anyway.

But in truth, the author’s gestures toward collective responsibility feel more obligatory than emphatic. What he really wants is a humane, evidence-based approach to the problem of addiction consistent with individual agency, and that’s an approach fully in accord with a faith in human liberty. At the same time, we might as well recognize that voters will quickly lose their enthusiasm for legalizing drugs if they blame it for public chaos. Freedom always and everywhere relies on self-regulation. 

These are tough times for individual agency. Many philosophers and psychologists scoff at the notion of free will, which others seem to regard as the sole province of the “privileged.” A therapeutic culture and the nanny state give us all incentives to see ourselves as victims, helpless in the face of implacable forces of oppression. It is refreshing to read a book that refuses to dehumanize addicts by depriving them of responsibility or delegitimizing the shame they feel for their actions.

Source:  https://reason.com/2025/06/15/how-freedom-lovers-can-reckon-with-addicts-and-addiction/

  Lisbon 20.06.2025

 This week, the EUDA and the University of Limerick’s REPPP team (1) officially launched ‘Safe futures’, a project focused on identifying effective ways to prevent youth involvement in European drug markets.

The initiative responds to growing public and policy concern about the increasing recruitment and exploitation of young people by criminal drug networks across Europe. These networks often target the most vulnerable young people, leading to significant security, social and public health consequences.

The two-year project brings together policymakers, researchers, law enforcement agencies and practitioners from across Europe to collaborate in a new multi-disciplinary Community of Practice conceived to share knowledge and research and inform and design future interventions in this complex policy area. This week’s meeting involved a cross-section of these groups to examine the issue across different jurisdictions, share information and begin collaborative problem-solving.

The agenda featured a dynamic mix of presentations, group work and plenary discussions designed to highlight both existing challenges and promising solutions. Participants also explored knowledge gaps and discussed next steps for the Community of Practice.

The overall purpose of the project is to enhance drug-related crime prevention efforts in Europe by:

  • evaluating existing models and strategies for the involvement of young people in drug markets and drug-related crime;
  • supporting linked networking building activities; and
  • identifying possible facilitators and barriers to the implementation of programmes in this area. 

The project outputs are expected to contribute to a better understanding of future research, policy and developmental needs and inform future investments in this area at national and European level.

In November 2024, following the first European conference on the topic, the EUDA issued a Call to action to break the cycle of drug-related violence. This underlined the urgent need for cross-sector collaboration to ensure a safer and more secure Europe. It also stressed that targeted prevention mechanisms should focus on young people and other at-risk groups, including prevention of their recruitment into organised crime. ‘Safe futures’ responds to this call.

DAVE EVANS, LISKOWITZ V.  describes a significant victory re Vapes. The court upheld the Complaint for:

COUNT I:
DEFECTIVE DESIGN – NEW JERSEY PRODUCTS LIABILITY ACT – N.J.S.A. 2A:58C-1 ET SEQ.

COUNT II:
PRODUCT LIABILITY – FAILURE TO WARN (NEW JERSEY PRODUCTS LIABILITY ACT – N.J.S.A. 2A:58C-1 ET SEQ.

III and VI were dismissed without prejudice

The order – -which runs to 30 pages – can be accessed hereby:

To access the full document: Click on the ‘Source’ link below, at the foot of this web page.

                                                                       *      *      *      *      *      *

In a first of its kind lawsuit in New Jersey, a victim of Big Cannabis is seeking to hold it accountable for the terrifying mental health disorder Plaintiff suffered after using intoxicating hemp cannabis products.

The plaintiff is an athletic professional. While training, Plaintiff began consuming intoxicating cannabis hemp products.

After a few months of use, Plaintiff became psychotic and suicidal, suffering from extreme delusions and paranoia, and was hospitalized.  After the hospitalization, the Plaintiff was discharged to Plaintiff’s parents, and they flew back to their home state for further treatment.

While traveling, the Plaintiff believed that they were being followed by the FBI and would be subject to arrest.  To protect the parents from arrest, Plaintiff sought the opportunity to flee.  While traveling home from the airport, the plaintiff jumped out of the back seat car window and ran across six lanes of traffic and, to the horror of the parents watching from the car, and jumped off a 135-foot bridge, landing head-first into a river.

Miraculously, Plaintiff survived, but Plaintiff’s injuries included a torn ACL, right shoulder dislocation, and extensive road rash.  Plaintiff subsequently received substance abuse and psychological treatment and stopped using hemp products.  Plaintiff and family are still recovering from this harrowing ordeal.

As established by decades of medical research and as recognized by the National Institute of Health (NIH), the National Academy of Sciences, and the Center for Disease Control (CDC), cannabis use is indelibly linked to the development of psychosis and other mental health disorders such as schizophrenia, suicidal ideation, and depression.

Despite the robust evidence, Big Cannabis refuses to warn consumers of the devastating potential side effects.  Worse, Big Cannabis actively and maliciously markets these products as safe, even medicinal.

We are in the midst of a gathering mental health epidemic caused by increasing use of cannabis, especially high-potency cannabis after years of Big Cannabis’s sophisticated and coordinated legalization efforts.  There are tens, if not hundreds, of thousands who have been injured in a similar way to the Plaintiff.  Many, however, have failed to draw the connection between their cannabis use and their mental health disorders because the public relations arm of Big Cannabis has so effectively hidden and confused the association in an effort to realize extravagant profits.

This suit, drawing upon various consumer protection laws, seeks to hold the cannabis industry accountable for its lies and its failure to adequately warn an unsuspecting public of its products’ considerable and often devastating dangers.

The suit also seeks to raise awareness about the association between cannabis and mental health disorders so that those affected current or former users who have suffered at the hands of Big Cannabis can take action.

The case has survived a Motion to Dismiss

The Plaintiff is being represented in this matter by attorney David Evans whose office is in Flemington NJ . If you, or someone you know, has been affected by cannabis, Mr. Evans will be happy to discuss your potential claims.

Mr. Evans can be reached at 908-963-0254. (www.addictionslaw.com)

 

To access the full document:

  1. Click on the ‘Source’ link below.
  2. An image  – the front page of the full document will appear.
  3. Click on the image to open the full document.

Source:  ORDER.MO.DISS.6.18.2025 – Dave Evans

#cannabisculture is undermining #MentalHealth in most demographics, adolescents hardest hit!


The conversation around marijuana and mental illness has taken a new, alarming turn. A systematic review published in the journal Biomolecules this March presents fresh evidence of a strong link between marijuana use and severe mental health issues, particularly schizophrenia and psychosis. Notably, the study highlights that adolescents are at a significantly higher risk, amplifying urgent questions about its impact on younger users.


The Risk of Psychosis and Schizophrenia: The Biomolecules review analysed data…which documented an association between marijuana use and an increased risk of developing schizophrenia or psychosis-like events…One staggering takeaway from the review is the calculated odds ratio. Individuals using marijuana had a 2.88 higher likelihood of developing psychosis-related conditions than those who abstained.
Adolescents who use marijuana, however, face an even greater threat. The study authors pointed to a “large age effect,” suggesting that the impact of marijuana on younger users is far more severe…


Why Adolescents Are at Greater Risk: One key hypothesis from the researchers is that marijuana affects adolescents in two major ways. First, it can cause acute psychotic sensations that resemble those triggered by hallucinogenic drugs, indicative of acute toxicity. Second, it disrupts synaptic plasticity during adolescence, leading to developmental changes in the brain that could contribute to long-term mental health issues.
The End of the Self-Medication Argument: For years, the “self-medication hypothesis” has been used to explain the relationship between marijuana and schizophrenia. It claimed that individuals with schizophrenia used cannabis as a coping mechanism to manage symptoms. However, the review pushes back strongly against this narrative, stating that in these cases, it’s the cannabis that comes first. Alison Knopf of Alcoholism and Drug Abuse Weekly emphasised that these findings mark a key step in resolving the “chicken-and-egg conundrum” around marijuana and mental illness. (Research: https://www.dalgarnoinstitute.org.au/…/2708-marijuana…)

Source:  https://www.dalgarnoinstitute.org.au/index.php/resources/cannabis-conundrum/2708-marijuana-and-mental-illness-what-the-latest-research-reveals?

Back to top of page

Powered by WordPress